NCERT

TEXTBOOK

11
CLASS

MATHEMATICS
MATHEMATICS
Textbook for Class XI

2018-19
 Contents
Foreword iii
1. Sets 1
1.1 Introduction 1
1.2 Sets and their Representations 1
1.3 The Empty Set 5
1.4 Finite and Infinite Sets 6
1.5 Equal Sets 7
1.6 Subsets 9
1.7 Power Set 12
1.8 Universal Set 12
1.9 Venn Diagrams 13
1.10 Operations on Sets 14
1.11 Complement of a Set 18
1.12 Practical Problems on Union and Intersection of Two Sets 21

2. Relations and Functions 30

2.1 Introduction 30
2.2 Cartesian Product of Sets 30
2.3 Relations 34
2.4 Functions 36
3. Trigonometric Functions 49
3.1 Introduction 49
3.2 Angles 49
3.3 Trigonometric Functions 55
3.4 Trigonometric Functions of Sum and Difference of Two Angles 63
3.5 Trigonometric Equations 74
4. Principle of Mathematical Induction 86
4.1 Introduction 86
4.2 Motivation 87
4.3 The Principle of Mathematical Induction 88

2018-19
5. Complex Numbers and Quadratic Equations 97
5.1 Introduction 97
5.2 Complex Numbers 97
5.3 Algebra of Complex Numbers 98
5.4 The Modulus and the Conjugate of a Complex Number 102
5.5 Argand Plane and Polar Representation 104
5.6 Quadratic Equations 108
6. Linear Inequalities 116
6.1 Introduction 116
6.2 Inequalities 116
6.3 Algebraic Solutions of Linear Inequalities in One Variable
and their Graphical Representation 118
6.4 Graphical Solution of Linear Inequalities in Two Variables 123
6.5 Solution of System of Linear Inequalities in Two Variables 127
7. Permutations and Combinations 134
7.1 Introduction 134
7.2 Fundamental Principle of Counting 134
7.3 Permutations 138
7.4 Combinations 148
8. Binomial Theorem 160
8.1 Introduction 160
8.2 Binomial Theorem for Positive Integral Indices 160
8.3 General and Middle Terms 167
9. Sequences and Series 177
9.1 Introduction 177
9.2 Sequences 177
9.3 Series 179
9.4 Arithmetic Progression (A.P.) 181
9.5 Geometric Progression (G.P.) 186
9.6 Relationship Between A.M. and G.M. 191
9.7 Sum to n terms of Special Series 194
10. Straight Lines 203
10.1 Introduction 203
10.2 Slope of a Line 204
10.3 Various Forms of the Equation of a Line 212
10.4 General Equation of a Line 220
10.5 Distance of a Point From a Line 225
viii

2018-19
11. Conic Sections 236
11.1 Introduction 236
11.2 Sections of a Cone 236
11.3 Circle 239
11.4 Parabola 242
11.5 Ellipse 247
11.6 Hyperbola 255
12. Introduction to Three Dimensional Geometry 268
12.1 Introduction 268
12.2 Coordinate Axes and Coordinate Planes in
Three Dimensional Space 269
12.3 Coordinates of a Point in Space 269
12.4 Distance between Two Points 271
12.5 Section Formula 273
13. Limits and Derivatives 281
13.1 Introduction 281
13.2 Intuitive Idea of Derivatives 281
13.3 Limits 284
13.4 Limits of Trigonometric Functions 298
13.5 Derivatives 303
14. Mathematical Reasoning 321
14.1 Introduction 321
14.2 Statements 321
14.3 New Statements from Old 324
14.4 Special Words/Phrases 329
14.5 Implications 335
14.6 Validating Statements 339
15. Statistics 347
15.1 Introduction 347
15.2 Measures of Dispersion 349
15.3 Range 349
15.4 Mean Deviation 349
15.5 Variance and Standard Deviation 361
15.6 Analysis of Frequency Distributions 372
ix

2018-19
16. Probability 383
16.1 Introduction 383
16.2 Random Experiments 384
16.3 Event 387
16.4 Axiomatic Approach to Probability 394
Appendix 1: Infinite Series 412
A.1.1 Introduction 412
A.1.2 Binomial Theorem for any Index 412
A.1.3 Infinite Geometric Series 414
A.1.4 Exponential Series 416
A.1.5 Logarithmic Series 419
Appendix 2: Mathematical Modelling 421
A.2.1 Introduction 421
A.2.2 Preliminaries 421
A.2.3 What is Mathematical Modelling 425
Answers 433
Supplementary Material 466

2018-19
 Chapter 1
SETS
vIn these days of conflict between ancient and modern studies; there
must surely be something to be said for a study which did not
begin with Pythagoras and will not end with Einstein; but
is the oldest and the youngest. — G.H. HARDY v

1.1 Introduction
The concept of set serves as a fundamental part of the
present day mathematics. Today this concept is being used
in almost every branch of mathematics. Sets are used to
define the concepts of relations and functions. The study of
geometry, sequences, probability, etc. requires the knowledge
of sets.
The theory of sets was developed by German
mathematician Georg Cantor (1845-1918). He first
encountered sets while working on “problems on trigonometric
series”. In this Chapter, we discuss some basic definitions
Georg Cantor
and operations involving sets. (1845-1918)
1.2 Sets and their Representations
In everyday life, we often speak of collections of objects of a particular kind, such as,
a pack of cards, a crowd of people, a cricket team, etc. In mathematics also, we come
across collections, for example, of natural numbers, points, prime numbers, etc. More
specially, we examine the following collections:
(i) Odd natural numbers less than 10, i.e., 1, 3, 5, 7, 9
(ii) The rivers of India
(iii) The vowels in the English alphabet, namely, a, e, i, o, u
(iv) Various kinds of triangles
(v) Prime factors of 210, namely, 2,3,5 and 7
(vi) The solution of the equation: x2 – 5x + 6 = 0, viz, 2 and 3.
We note that each of the above example is a well-defined collection of objects in

2018-19
2 MATHEMATICS

the sense that we can definitely decide whether a given particular object belongs to a
given collection or not. For example, we can say that the river Nile does not belong to
the collection of rivers of India. On the other hand, the river Ganga does belong to this
colleciton.
We give below a few more examples of sets used particularly in mathematics, viz.
N : the set of all natural numbers
Z : the set of all integers
Q : the set of all rational numbers
R : the set of real numbers
Z+ : the set of positive integers
Q+ : the set of positive rational numbers, and
R + : the set of positive real numbers.
The symbols for the special sets given above will be referred to throughout
this text.
Again the collection of five most renowned mathematicians of the world is not
well-defined, because the criterion for determining a mathematician as most renowned
may vary from person to person. Thus, it is not a well-defined collection.
We shall say that a set is a well-defined collection of objects.
The following points may be noted :
(i) Objects, elements and members of a set are synonymous terms.
(ii) Sets are usually denoted by capital letters A, B, C, X, Y, Z, etc.
(iii) The elements of a set are represented by small letters a, b, c, x, y, z, etc.
If a is an element of a set A, we say that “ a belongs to A” the Greek symbol ∈
(epsilon) is used to denote the phrase ‘belongs to’. Thus, we write a ∈ A. If ‘b’ is not
an element of a set A, we write b ∉ A and read “b does not belong to A”.
Thus, in the set V of vowels in the English alphabet, a ∈ V but b ∉ V. In the set
P of prime factors of 30, 3 ∈ P but 15 ∉ P.
There are two methods of representing a set :
(i) Roster or tabular form
(ii) Set-builder form.
(i) In roster form, all the elements of a set are listed, the elements are being separated
by commas and are enclosed within braces { }. For example, the set of all even
positive integers less than 7 is described in roster form as {2, 4, 6}. Some more
examples of representing a set in roster form are given below :
(a) The set of all natural numbers which divide 42 is {1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 21, 42}.

2018-19
 SETS 3

ANote In roster form, the order in which the elements are listed is immaterial.
Thus, the above set can also be represented as {1, 3, 7, 21, 2, 6, 14, 42}.
(b) The set of all vowels in the English alphabet is {a, e, i, o, u}.
(c) The set of odd natural numbers is represented by {1, 3, 5, . . .}. The dots
tell us that the list of odd numbers continue indefinitely.

A Note It may be noted that while writing the set in roster form an element is not
generally repeated, i.e., all the elements are taken as distinct. For example, the set
of letters forming the word ‘SCHOOL’ is { S, C, H, O, L} or {H, O, L, C, S}. Here,
the order of listing elements has no relevance.
(ii) In set-builder form, all the elements of a set possess a single common property
which is not possessed by any element outside the set. For example, in the set
{a, e, i, o, u}, all the elements possess a common property, namely, each of them
is a vowel in the English alphabet, and no other letter possess this property. Denoting
this set by V, we write
V = {x : x is a vowel in English alphabet}
It may be observed that we describe the element of the set by using a symbol x
(any other symbol like the letters y, z, etc. could be used) which is followed by a colon
“ : ”. After the sign of colon, we write the characteristic property possessed by the
elements of the set and then enclose the whole description within braces. The above
description of the set V is read as “the set of all x such that x is a vowel of the English
alphabet”. In this description the braces stand for “the set of all”, the colon stands for
“such that”. For example, the set
A = {x : x is a natural number and 3 < x < 10} is read as “the set of all x such that
x is a natural number and x lies between 3 and 10.” Hence, the numbers 4, 5, 6,
7, 8 and 9 are the elements of the set A.
If we denote the sets described in (a), (b) and (c) above in roster form by A, B,
C, respectively, then A, B, C can also be represented in set-builder form as follows:
A= {x : x is a natural number which divides 42}
B= {y : y is a vowel in the English alphabet}
C= {z : z is an odd natural number}
Example 1 Write the solution set of the equation x2 + x – 2 = 0 in roster form.
Solution The given equation can be written as
(x – 1) (x + 2) = 0, i. e., x = 1, – 2
Therefore, the solution set of the given equation can be written in roster form as {1, – 2}.
Example 2 Write the set {x : x is a positive integer and x2 < 40} in the roster form.

2018-19
4 MATHEMATICS

Solution The required numbers are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. So, the given set in the roster form
is {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}.
Example 3 Write the set A = {1, 4, 9, 16, 25, . . . }in set-builder form.
Solution We may write the set A as
A = {x : x is the square of a natural number}
Alternatively, we can write
A = {x : x = n2, where n ∈ N}

1 2 3 4 5 6
Example 4 Write the set { , , , , , } in the set-builder form.
2 3 4 5 6 7
Solution We see that each member in the given set has the numerator one less than
the denominator. Also, the numerator begin from 1 and do not exceed 6. Hence, in the
set-builder form the given set is
 n 
x : x = , where n is a natural number and 1 ≤ n ≤ 6 
 n +1 
Example 5 Match each of the set on the left described in the roster form with the
same set on the right described in the set-builder form :
(i) {P, R, I, N, C, A, L} (a) { x : x is a positive integer and is a divisor of 18}
(ii) { 0 } (b) { x : x is an integer and x2 – 9 = 0}
(iii) {1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 18} (c) {x : x is an integer and x + 1= 1}
(iv) {3, –3} (d) {x : x is a letter of the word PRINCIPAL}
Solution Since in (d), there are 9 letters in the word PRINCIPAL and two letters P and I
are repeated, so (i) matches (d). Similarly, (ii) matches (c) as x + 1 = 1 implies
x = 0. Also, 1, 2 ,3, 6, 9, 18 are all divisors of 18 and so (iii) matches (a). Finally, x2 – 9 = 0
implies x = 3, –3 and so (iv) matches (b).

EXERCISE 1.1
1. Which of the following are sets ? Justify your answer.
(i) The collection of all the months of a year beginning with the letter J.
(ii) The collection of ten most talented writers of India.
(iii) A team of eleven best-cricket batsmen of the world.
(iv) The collection of all boys in your class.
(v) The collection of all natural numbers less than 100.
(vi) A collection of novels written by the writer Munshi Prem Chand.
(vii) The collection of all even integers.

2018-19
 SETS 5

(viii) The collection of questions in this Chapter.

(ix) A collection of most dangerous animals of the world.
2. Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. Insert the appropriate symbol ∈ or ∉ in the blank
spaces:
(i) 5. . .A (ii) 8 . . . A (iii) 0. . .A
(iv) 4. . . A (v) 2. . .A (vi) 10. . .A
3. Write the following sets in roster form:
(i) A = {x : x is an integer and –3 ≤ x < 7}
(ii) B = {x : x is a natural number less than 6}
(iii) C = {x : x is a two-digit natural number such that the sum of its digits is 8}
(iv) D = {x : x is a prime number which is divisor of 60}
(v) E = The set of all letters in the word TRIGONOMETRY
(vi) F = The set of all letters in the word BETTER
4. Write the following sets in the set-builder form :
(i) (3, 6, 9, 12} (ii) {2,4,8,16,32} (iii) {5, 25, 125, 625}
(iv) {2, 4, 6, . . .} (v) {1,4,9, . . .,100}
5. List all the elements of the following sets :
(i) A = {x : x is an odd natural number}
1 9
(ii) B = {x : x is an integer, – <x< }
2 2
(iii) C = {x : x is an integer, x2 ≤ 4}
(iv) D = {x : x is a letter in the word “LOYAL”}
(v) E = {x : x is a month of a year not having 31 days}
(vi) F = {x : x is a consonant in the English alphabet which precedes k }.
6. Match each of the set on the left in the roster form with the same set on the right
described in set-builder form:
(i) {1, 2, 3, 6} (a) {x : x is a prime number and a divisor of 6}
(ii) {2, 3} (b) {x : x is an odd natural number less than 10}
(iii) {M,A,T,H,E,I,C,S} (c) {x : x is natural number and divisor of 6}
(iv) {1, 3, 5, 7, 9} (d) {x : x is a letter of the word MATHEMATICS}.
1.3 The Empty Set
Consider the set
A = { x : x is a student of Class XI presently studying in a school }
We can go to the school and count the number of students presently studying in
Class XI in the school. Thus, the set A contains a finite number of elements.
We now write another set B as follows:

2018-19
6 MATHEMATICS

B = { x : x is a student presently studying in both Classes X and XI }

We observe that a student cannot study simultaneously in both Classes X and XI.
Thus, the set B contains no element at all.
Definition 1 A set which does not contain any element is called the empty set or the
null set or the void set.
According to this definition, B is an empty set while A is not an empty set. The
empty set is denoted by the symbol φ or { }.
We give below a few examples of empty sets.
(i) Let A = {x : 1 < x < 2, x is a natural number}. Then A is the empty set,
because there is no natural number between 1 and 2.
(ii) B = {x : x2 – 2 = 0 and x is rational number}. Then B is the empty set because
the equation x2 – 2 = 0 is not satisfied by any rational value of x.
(iii) C = {x : x is an even prime number greater than 2}.Then C is the empty set,
because 2 is the only even prime number.
(iv) D = { x : x2 = 4, x is odd }. Then D is the empty set, because the equation
x2 = 4 is not satisfied by any odd value of x.
1.4 Finite and Infinite Sets
Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}, B = {a, b, c, d, e, g}
and C = { men living presently in different parts of the world}
We observe that A contains 5 elements and B contains 6 elements. How many elements
does C contain? As it is, we do not know the number of elements in C, but it is some
natural number which may be quite a big number. By number of elements of a set S,
we mean the number of distinct elements of the set and we denote it by n (S). If n (S)
is a natural number, then S is non-empty finite set.
Consider the set of natural numbers. We see that the number of elements of this
set is not finite since there are infinite number of natural numbers. We say that the set
of natural numbers is an infinite set. The sets A, B and C given above are finite sets
and n(A) = 5, n(B) = 6 and n(C) = some finite number.
Definition 2 A set which is empty or consists of a definite number of elements is
called finite otherwise, the set is called infinite.
Consider some examples :
(i) Let W be the set of the days of the week. Then W is finite.
(ii) Let S be the set of solutions of the equation x2 –16 = 0. Then S is finite.
(iii) Let G be the set of points on a line. Then G is infinite.
When we represent a set in the roster form, we write all the elements of the set
within braces { }. It is not possible to write all the elements of an infinite set within
braces { } because the numbers of elements of such a set is not finite. So, we represent

2018-19
 SETS 7

some infinite set in the roster form by writing a few elements which clearly indicate the
structure of the set followed ( or preceded ) by three dots.
For example, {1, 2, 3 . . .} is the set of natural numbers, {1, 3, 5, 7, . . .} is the set
of odd natural numbers, {. . .,–3, –2, –1, 0,1, 2 ,3, . . .} is the set of integers. All these
sets are infinite.

A Note All infinite sets cannot be described in the roster form. For example, the
set of real numbers cannot be described in this form, because the elements of this
set do not follow any particular pattern.
Example 6 State which of the following sets are finite or infinite :
(i) {x : x ∈ N and (x – 1) (x –2) = 0}
(ii) {x : x ∈ N and x2 = 4}
(iii) {x : x ∈ N and 2x –1 = 0}
(iv) {x : x ∈ N and x is prime}
(v) {x : x ∈ N and x is odd}
Solution (i) Given set = {1, 2}. Hence, it is finite.
(ii) Given set = {2}. Hence, it is finite.
(iii) Given set = φ. Hence, it is finite.
(iv) The given set is the set of all prime numbers and since set of prime
numbers is infinite. Hence the given set is infinite
(v) Since there are infinite number of odd numbers, hence, the given set is
infinite.
1.5 Equal Sets
Given two sets A and B, if every element of A is also an element of B and if every
element of B is also an element of A, then the sets A and B are said to be equal.
Clearly, the two sets have exactly the same elements.
Definition 3 Two sets A and B are said to be equal if they have exactly the same
elements and we write A = B. Otherwise, the sets are said to be unequal and we write
A ≠ B.
We consider the following examples :
(i) Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and B = {3, 1, 4, 2}. Then A = B.
(ii) Let A be the set of prime numbers less than 6 and P the set of prime factors
of 30. Then A and P are equal, since 2, 3 and 5 are the only prime factors of
30 and also these are less than 6.

ANote A set does not change if one or more elements of the set are repeated.
For example, the sets A = {1, 2, 3} and B = {2, 2, 1, 3, 3} are equal, since each

2018-19
8 MATHEMATICS

element of A is in B and vice-versa. That is why we generally do not repeat any

element in describing a set.
Example 7 Find the pairs of equal sets, if any, give reasons:
A = {0}, B = {x : x > 15 and x < 5},
C = {x : x – 5 = 0 }, D = {x: x2 = 25},
E = {x : x is an integral positive root of the equation x2 – 2x –15 = 0}.
Solution Since 0 ∈ A and 0 does not belong to any of the sets B, C, D and E, it
follows that, A ≠ B, A ≠ C, A ≠ D, A ≠ E.
Since B = φ but none of the other sets are empty. Therefore B ≠ C, B ≠ D
and B ≠ E. Also C = {5} but –5 ∈ D, hence C ≠ D.
Since E = {5}, C = E. Further, D = {–5, 5} and E = {5}, we find that, D ≠ E.
Thus, the only pair of equal sets is C and E.
Example 8 Which of the following pairs of sets are equal? Justify your answer.
(i) X, the set of letters in “ALLOY” and B, the set of letters in “LOYAL”.
(ii) A = {n : n ∈ Z and n2 ≤ 4} and B = {x : x ∈ R and x2 – 3x + 2 = 0}.
Solution (i) We have, X = {A, L, L, O, Y}, B = {L, O, Y, A, L}. Then X and B are
equal sets as repetition of elements in a set do not change a set. Thus,
X = {A, L, O, Y} = B
(ii) A = {–2, –1, 0, 1, 2}, B = {1, 2}. Since 0 ∈ A and 0 ∉ B, A and B are not equal sets.

EXERCISE 1.2
1. Which of the following are examples of the null set
(i) Set of odd natural numbers divisible by 2
(ii) Set of even prime numbers
(iii) { x : x is a natural numbers, x < 5 and x > 7 }
(iv) { y : y is a point common to any two parallel lines}
2. Which of the following sets are finite or infinite
(i) The set of months of a year
(ii) {1, 2, 3, . . .}
(iii) {1, 2, 3, . . .99, 100}
(iv) The set of positive integers greater than 100
(v) The set of prime numbers less than 99
3. State whether each of the following set is finite or infinite:
(i) The set of lines which are parallel to the x-axis
(ii) The set of letters in the English alphabet
(iii) The set of numbers which are multiple of 5

2018-19
 SETS 9

(iv) The set of animals living on the earth

(v) The set of circles passing through the origin (0,0)
4. In the following, state whether A = B or not:
(i) A = { a, b, c, d } B = { d, c, b, a }
(ii) A = { 4, 8, 12, 16 } B = { 8, 4, 16, 18}
(iii) A = {2, 4, 6, 8, 10} B = { x : x is positive even integer and x ≤ 10}
(iv) A = { x : x is a multiple of 10}, B = { 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, . . . }
5. Are the following pair of sets equal ? Give reasons.
(i) A = {2, 3}, B = {x : x is solution of x2 + 5x + 6 = 0}
(ii) A = { x : x is a letter in the word FOLLOW}
B = { y : y is a letter in the word WOLF}
6. From the sets given below, select equal sets :
A = { 2, 4, 8, 12}, B = { 1, 2, 3, 4}, C = { 4, 8, 12, 14}, D = { 3, 1, 4, 2}
E = {–1, 1}, F = { 0, a}, G = {1, –1}, H = { 0, 1}
1.6 Subsets
Consider the sets : X = set of all students in your school, Y = set of all students in your
class.
We note that every element of Y is also an element of X; we say that Y is a subset
of X. The fact that Y is subset of X is expressed in symbols as Y ⊂ X. The symbol ⊂
stands for ‘is a subset of’ or ‘is contained in’.
Definition 4 A set A is said to be a subset of a set B if every element of A is also an
element of B.
In other words, A ⊂ B if whenever a ∈ A, then a ∈ B. It is often convenient to
use the symbol “⇒” which means implies. Using this symbol, we can write the definiton
of subset as follows:
A ⊂ B if a ∈ A ⇒ a ∈ B
We read the above statement as “A is a subset of B if a is an element of A
implies that a is also an element of B”. If A is not a subset of B, we write A ⊄ B.
We may note that for A to be a subset of B, all that is needed is that every
element of A is in B. It is possible that every element of B may or may not be in A. If
it so happens that every element of B is also in A, then we shall also have B ⊂ A. In this
case, A and B are the same sets so that we have A ⊂ B and B ⊂ A ⇔ A = B, where
“⇔” is a symbol for two way implications, and is usually read as if and only if (briefly
written as “iff”).
It follows from the above definition that every set A is a subset of itself, i.e.,
A ⊂ A. Since the empty set φ has no elements, we agree to say that φ is a subset of
every set. We now consider some examples :

2018-19
10 MATHEMATICS

(i) The set Q of rational numbers is a subset of the set R of real numbes, and
we write Q ⊂ R.
(ii) If A is the set of all divisors of 56 and B the set of all prime divisors of 56,
then B is a subset of A and we write B ⊂ A.
(iii) Let A = {1, 3, 5} and B = {x : x is an odd natural number less than 6}. Then
A ⊂ B and B ⊂ A and hence A = B.
(iv) Let A = { a, e, i, o, u} and B = { a, b, c, d}. Then A is not a subset of B,
also B is not a subset of A.
Let A and B be two sets. If A ⊂ B and A ≠ B , then A is called a proper subset
of B and B is called superset of A. For example,
A = {1, 2, 3} is a proper subset of B = {1, 2, 3, 4}.
If a set A has only one element, we call it a singleton set. Thus,{ a } is a
singleton set.
Example 9 Consider the sets
φ, A = { 1, 3 }, B = {1, 5, 9}, C = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9}.
Insert the symbol ⊂ or ⊄ between each of the following pair of sets:
(i) φ . . . B (ii) A . . . B (iii) A . . . C (iv) B . . . C
Solution (i) φ ⊂ B as φ is a subset of every set.
(ii) A ⊄ B as 3 ∈ A and 3 ∉ B
(iii) A ⊂ C as 1, 3 ∈ A also belongs to C
(iv) B ⊂ C as each element of B is also an element of C.
Example 10 Let A = { a, e, i, o, u} and B = { a, b, c, d}. Is A a subset of B ? No.
(Why?). Is B a subset of A? No. (Why?)
Example 11 Let A, B and C be three sets. If A ∈ B and B ⊂ C, is it true that
A ⊂ C?. If not, give an example.
Solution No. Let A = {1}, B = {{1}, 2} and C = {{1}, 2, 3}. Here A ∈ B as A = {1}
and B ⊂ C. But A ⊄ C as 1 ∈ A and 1 ∉ C.
Note that an element of a set can never be a subset of itself.
1.6.1 Subsets of set of real numbers
As noted in Section 1.6, there are many important subsets of R. We give below the
names of some of these subsets.
The set of natural numbers N = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, . . .}
The set of integers Z = {. . ., –3, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2, 3, . . .}
p
The set of rational numbers Q = { x : x = , p, q ∈ Z and q ≠ 0}
q

2018-19
 SETS 11

p
which is read “ Q is the set of all numbers x such that x equals the quotient
q , where
p and q are integers and q is not zero”. Members of Q include –5 (which can be
5 5 1 7 11
expressed as – ) , , 3 (which can be expressed as ) and – .
1 7 2 2 3
The set of irrational numbers, denoted by T, is composed of all other real numbers.
Thus T = {x : x ∈ R and x ∉ Q}, i.e., all real numbers that are not rational.
Members of T include 2 , 5 and π .
Some of the obvious relations among these subsets are:
N ⊂ Z ⊂ Q, Q ⊂ R, T ⊂ R, N ⊄ T.
1.6.2 Intervals as subsets of R Let a, b ∈ R and a < b. Then the set of real numbers
{ y : a < y < b} is called an open interval and is denoted by (a, b). All the points
between a and b belong to the open interval (a, b) but a, b themselves do not belong to
this interval.
The interval which contains the end points also is called closed interval and is
denoted by [ a, b ]. Thus
[ a, b ] = {x : a ≤ x ≤ b}
We can also have intervals closed at one end and open at the other, i.e.,
[ a, b ) = {x : a ≤ x < b} is an open interval from a to b, including a but excluding b.
( a, b ] = { x : a < x ≤ b } is an open interval from a to b including b but excluding a.
These notations provide an alternative way of designating the subsets of set of
real numbers. For example , if A = (–3, 5) and B = [–7, 9], then A ⊂ B. The set [ 0, ∞)
defines the set of non-negative real numbers, while set ( – ∞, 0 ) defines the set of
negative real numbers. The set ( – ∞, ∞ ) describes the set of real numbers in relation
to a line extending from – ∞ to ∞.
On real number line, various types of intervals described above as subsets of R,
are shown in the Fig 1.1.

Fig 1.1

Here, we note that an interval contains infinitely many points.

For example, the set {x : x ∈ R, –5 < x ≤ 7}, written in set-builder form, can be
written in the form of interval as (–5, 7] and the interval [–3, 5) can be written in set-
builder form as {x : –3 ≤ x < 5}.

2018-19
12 MATHEMATICS

The number (b – a) is called the length of any of the intervals (a, b), [a, b],
[a, b) or (a, b].
1.7 Power Set
Consider the set {1, 2}. Let us write down all the subsets of the set {1, 2}. We
know that φ is a subset of every set . So, φ is a subset of {1, 2}. We see that {1}
and { 2 }are also subsets of {1, 2}. Also, we know that every set is a subset of
itself. So, { 1, 2 } is a subset of {1, 2}. Thus, the set { 1, 2 } has, in all, four
subsets, viz. φ, { 1 }, { 2 } and { 1, 2 }. The set of all these subsets is called the
power set of { 1, 2 }.
Definition 5 The collection of all subsets of a set A is called the power set of A. It is
denoted by P(A). In P(A), every element is a set.
Thus, as in above, if A = { 1, 2 }, then
P( A ) = { φ,{ 1 }, { 2 }, { 1,2 }}
Also, note that n [ P (A) ] = 4 = 22
In general, if A is a set with n(A) = m, then it can be shown that
n [ P(A)] = 2m.
1.8 Universal Set
Usually, in a particular context, we have to deal with the elements and subsets of a
basic set which is relevant to that particular context. For example, while studying the
system of numbers, we are interested in the set of natural numbers and its subsets such
as the set of all prime numbers, the set of all even numbers, and so forth. This basic set
is called the “Universal Set”. The universal set is usually denoted by U, and all its
subsets by the letters A, B, C, etc.
For example, for the set of all integers, the universal set can be the set of rational
numbers or, for that matter, the set R of real numbers. For another example, in human
population studies, the universal set consists of all the people in the world.

EXERCISE 1.3
1. Make correct statements by filling in the symbols ⊂ or ⊄ in the blank spaces :
(i) { 2, 3, 4 } . . . { 1, 2, 3, 4,5 } (ii) { a, b, c } . . . { b, c, d }
(iii) {x : x is a student of Class XI of your school}. . .{x : x student of your school}
(iv) {x : x is a circle in the plane} . . .{x : x is a circle in the same plane with
radius 1 unit}
(v) {x : x is a triangle in a plane} . . . {x : x is a rectangle in the plane}
(vi) {x : x is an equilateral triangle in a plane} . . . {x : x is a triangle in the same plane}
(vii) {x : x is an even natural number} . . . {x : x is an integer}

2018-19
 SETS 13

2. Examine whether the following statements are true or false:

(i) { a, b } ⊄ { b, c, a }
(ii) { a, e } ⊂ { x : x is a vowel in the English alphabet}
(iii) { 1, 2, 3 } ⊂ { 1, 3, 5 }
(iv) { a } ⊂ { a, b, c }
(v) { a } ∈ { a, b, c }
(vi) { x : x is an even natural number less than 6} ⊂ { x : x is a natural number
which divides 36}
3. Let A = { 1, 2, { 3, 4 }, 5 }. Which of the following statements are incorrect and why?
(i) {3, 4} ⊂ A (ii) {3, 4} ∈ A (iii) {{3, 4}} ⊂ A
(iv) 1 ∈ A (v) 1 ⊂ A (vi) {1, 2, 5} ⊂ A
(vii) {1, 2, 5} ∈ A (viii) {1, 2, 3} ⊂ A (ix) φ ∈ A
(x) φ ⊂ A (xi) {φ} ⊂ A
4. Write down all the subsets of the following sets
(i) {a} (ii) {a, b} (iii) {1, 2, 3} (iv) φ
5. How many elements has P(A), if A = φ?
6. Write the following as intervals :
(i) {x : x ∈ R, – 4 < x ≤ 6} (ii) {x : x ∈ R, – 12 < x < –10}
(iii) {x : x ∈ R, 0 ≤ x < 7} (iv) {x : x ∈ R, 3 ≤ x ≤ 4}
7. Write the following intervals in set-builder form :
(i) (– 3, 0) (ii) [6 , 12] (iii) (6, 12] (iv) [–23, 5)
8. What universal set(s) would you propose for each of the following :
(i) The set of right triangles. (ii) The set of isosceles triangles.
9. Given the sets A = {1, 3, 5}, B = {2, 4, 6} and C = {0, 2, 4, 6, 8}, which of the
following may be considered as universal set (s) for all the three sets A, B and C
(i) {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
(ii) φ
(iii) {0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10}
(iv) {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8}
1.9 Venn Diagrams
Most of the relationships between sets can be
represented by means of diagrams which are known
as Venn diagrams. Venn diagrams are named after
the English logician, John Venn (1834-1883). These
diagrams consist of rectangles and closed curves
usually circles. The universal set is represented
usually by a rectangle and its subsets by circles.
In Venn diagrams, the elements of the sets
are written in their respective circles (Figs 1.2 and 1.3) Fig 1.2

2018-19
14 MATHEMATICS

Illustration 1 In Fig 1.2, U = {1,2,3, ..., 10} is the

universal set of which
A = {2,4,6,8,10} is a subset.
Illustration 2 In Fig 1.3, U = {1,2,3, ..., 10} is the
universal set of which
A = {2,4,6,8,10} and B = {4, 6} are subsets,
and also B ⊂ A. Fig 1.3
The reader will see an extensive use of the
Venn diagrams when we discuss the union, intersection and difference of sets.
1.10 Operations on Sets
In earlier classes, we have learnt how to perform the operations of addition, subtraction,
multiplication and division on numbers. Each one of these operations was performed
on a pair of numbers to get another number. For example, when we perform the
operation of addition on the pair of numbers 5 and 13, we get the number 18. Again,
performing the operation of multiplication on the pair of numbers 5 and 13, we get 65.
Similarly, there are some operations which when performed on two sets give rise to
another set. We will now define certain operations on sets and examine their properties.
Henceforth, we will refer all our sets as subsets of some universal set.
1.10.1 Union of sets Let A and B be any two sets. The union of A and B is the set
which consists of all the elements of A and all the elements of B, the common elements
being taken only once. The symbol ‘∪’ is used to denote the union. Symbolically, we
write A ∪ B and usually read as ‘A union B’.
Example 12 Let A = { 2, 4, 6, 8} and B = { 6, 8, 10, 12}. Find A ∪ B.
Solution We have A ∪ B = { 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12}
Note that the common elements 6 and 8 have been taken only once while writing
A ∪ B.
Example 13 Let A = { a, e, i, o, u } and B = { a, i, u }. Show that A ∪ B = A
Solution We have, A ∪ B = { a, e, i, o, u } = A.
This example illustrates that union of sets A and its subset B is the set A
itself, i.e., if B ⊂ A, then A ∪ B = A.
Example 14 Let X = {Ram, Geeta, Akbar} be the set of students of Class XI, who are
in school hockey team. Let Y = {Geeta, David, Ashok} be the set of students from
Class XI who are in the school football team. Find X ∪ Y and interpret the set.
Solution We have, X ∪ Y = {Ram, Geeta, Akbar, David, Ashok}. This is the set of
students from Class XI who are in the hockey team or the football team or both.

2018-19
 SETS 15

Thus, we can define the union of two sets as follows:

Definition 6 The union of two sets A and B is the set C which consists of all those
elements which are either in A or in B (including
those which are in both). In symbols, we write.
A ∪ B = { x : x ∈A or x ∈B }
The union of two sets can be represented by a
Venn diagram as shown in Fig 1.4.
The shaded portion in Fig 1.4 represents A ∪ B.
Some Properties of the Operation of Union
(i) A ∪ B = B ∪ A (Commutative law) Fig 1.4
(ii) ( A ∪ B ) ∪ C = A ∪ ( B ∪ C)
(Associative law )
(iii) A ∪ φ = A (Law of identity element, φ is the identity of ∪)
(iv) A ∪ A = A (Idempotent law)
(v) U ∪ A = U (Law of U)
1.10.2 Intersection of sets The intersection of sets A and B is the set of all elements
which are common to both A and B. The symbol ‘∩’ is used to denote the intersection.
The intersection of two sets A and B is the set of all those elements which belong to
both A and B. Symbolically, we write A ∩ B = {x : x ∈ A and x ∈ B}.
Example 15 Consider the sets A and B of Example 12. Find A ∩ B.
Solution We see that 6, 8 are the only elements which are common to both A and B.
Hence A ∩ B = { 6, 8 }.
Example 16 Consider the sets X and Y of Example 14. Find X ∩ Y.
Solution We see that element ‘Geeta’ is the only element common to both. Hence,
X ∩ Y = {Geeta}.
Example 17 Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} and B = { 2, 3, 5, 7 }. Find A ∩ B and
hence show that A ∩ B = B.
Solution We have A ∩ B = { 2, 3, 5, 7 } = B. We
note that B ⊂ A and that A ∩ B = B.
Definition 7 The intersection of two sets A and B
is the set of all those elements which belong to both
A and B. Symbolically, we write
A ∩ B = {x : x ∈ A and x ∈ B}
The shaded portion in Fig 1.5 indicates the
intersection of A and B. Fig 1.5

2018-19
16 MATHEMATICS

If A and B are two sets such that A ∩ B = φ, then U

A and B are called disjoint sets.
For example, let A = { 2, 4, 6, 8 } and
B = { 1, 3, 5, 7 }. Then A and B are disjoint sets, A B
because there are no elements which are common to
A and B. The disjoint sets can be represented by
means of Venn diagram as shown in the Fig 1.6
In the above diagram, A and B are disjoint sets. Fig 1.6
Some Properties of Operation of Intersection
(i) A ∩ B = B ∩ A (Commutative law).
(ii) ( A ∩ B ) ∩ C = A ∩ ( B ∩ C ) (Associative law).
(iii) φ ∩ A = φ, U ∩ A = A (Law of φ and U).
(iv) A ∩ A = A (Idempotent law)
(v) A ∩ ( B ∪ C ) = ( A ∩ B ) ∪ ( A ∩ C ) (Distributive law ) i. e.,
∩ distributes over ∪
This can be seen easily from the following Venn diagrams [Figs 1.7 (i) to (v)].

(i) (iii)

(ii) (iv)

(v)
Figs 1.7 (i) to (v)

2018-19
 SETS 17

1.10.3 Difference of sets The difference of the sets A and B in this order is the set
of elements which belong to A but not to B. Symbolically, we write A – B and read as
“ A minus B”.
Example 18 Let A = { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}, B = { 2, 4, 6, 8 }. Find A – B and B – A.
Solution We have, A – B = { 1, 3, 5 }, since the elements 1, 3, 5 belong to A but
not to B and B – A = { 8 }, since the element 8 belongs to B and not to A.
We note that A – B ≠ B – A.
Example 19 Let V = { a, e, i, o, u } and
B = { a, i, k, u}. Find V – B and B – V
Solution We have, V – B = { e, o }, since the elements
e, o belong to V but not to B and B – V = { k }, since
the element k belongs to B but not to V.
We note that V – B ≠ B – V. Using the set-
builder notation, we can rewrite the definition of
Fig 1.8
difference as
A – B = { x : x ∈ A and x ∉ B }
The difference of two sets A and B can be
represented by Venn diagram as shown in Fig 1.8.
The shaded portion represents the difference of
the two sets A and B.
Remark The sets A – B, A ∩ B and B – A are
mutually disjoint sets, i.e., the intersection of any of
Fig 1.9
these two sets is the null set as shown in Fig 1.9.

EXERCISE 1.4
1. Find the union of each of the following pairs of sets :
(i) X = {1, 3, 5} Y = {1, 2, 3}
(ii) A = [ a, e, i, o, u} B = {a, b, c}
(iii) A = {x : x is a natural number and multiple of 3}
B = {x : x is a natural number less than 6}
(iv) A = {x : x is a natural number and 1 < x ≤ 6 }
B = {x : x is a natural number and 6 < x < 10 }
(v) A = {1, 2, 3}, B = φ
2. Let A = { a, b }, B = {a, b, c}. Is A ⊂ B ? What is A ∪ B ?
3. If A and B are two sets such that A ⊂ B, then what is A ∪ B ?
4. If A = {1, 2, 3, 4}, B = {3, 4, 5, 6}, C = {5, 6, 7, 8 }and D = { 7, 8, 9, 10 }; find

2018-19
18 MATHEMATICS

(i) A ∪ B (ii) A ∪ C (iii) B ∪ C (iv) B ∪ D

(v) A ∪ B ∪ C (vi) A ∪ B ∪ D (vii) B ∪ C ∪ D
5. Find the intersection of each pair of sets of question 1 above.
6. If A = { 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 }, B = {7, 9, 11, 13}, C = {11, 13, 15}and D = {15, 17}; find
(i) A ∩ B (ii) B ∩ C (iii) A ∩ C ∩ D
(iv) A ∩ C (v) B ∩ D (vi) A ∩ (B ∪ C)
(vii) A ∩ D (viii) A ∩ (B ∪ D) (ix) ( A ∩ B ) ∩ ( B ∪ C )
(x) ( A ∪ D) ∩ ( B ∪ C)
7. If A = {x : x is a natural number }, B = {x : x is an even natural number}
C = {x : x is an odd natural number}andD = {x : x is a prime number }, find
(i) A ∩ B (ii) A ∩ C (iii) A ∩ D
(iv) B ∩ C (v) B ∩ D (vi) C ∩ D
8. Which of the following pairs of sets are disjoint
(i) {1, 2, 3, 4} and {x : x is a natural number and 4 ≤ x ≤ 6 }
(ii) { a, e, i, o, u } and { c, d, e, f }
(iii) {x : x is an even integer } and {x : x is an odd integer}
9. If A = {3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21}, B = { 4, 8, 12, 16, 20 },
C = { 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 }, D = {5, 10, 15, 20 }; find
(i) A – B (ii) A – C (iii) A – D (iv) B – A
(v) C – A (vi) D – A (vii) B – C (viii) B – D
(ix) C – B (x) D – B (xi) C – D (xii) D – C
10. If X= { a, b, c, d } and Y = { f, b, d, g}, find
(i) X – Y (ii) Y – X (iii) X ∩ Y
11. If R is the set of real numbers and Q is the set of rational numbers, then what is
R – Q?
12. State whether each of the following statement is true or false. Justify your answer.
(i) { 2, 3, 4, 5 } and { 3, 6} are disjoint sets.
(ii) { a, e, i, o, u } and { a, b, c, d }are disjoint sets.
(iii) { 2, 6, 10, 14 } and { 3, 7, 11, 15} are disjoint sets.
(iv) { 2, 6, 10 } and { 3, 7, 11} are disjoint sets.
1.11 Complement of a Set
Let U be the universal set which consists of all prime numbers and A be the subset of
U which consists of all those prime numbers that are not divisors of 42. Thus,
A = {x : x ∈ U and x is not a divisor of 42 }. We see that 2 ∈ U but 2 ∉ A, because
2 is divisor of 42. Similarly, 3 ∈ U but 3 ∉ A, and 7 ∈ U but 7 ∉ A. Now 2, 3 and 7 are
the only elements of U which do not belong to A. The set of these three prime numbers,
i.e., the set {2, 3, 7} is called the Complement of A with respect to U, and is denoted by

2018-19
 SETS 19

A′. So we have A′ = {2, 3, 7}. Thus, we see that

A′ = {x : x ∈ U and x ∉ A }. This leads to the following definition.
Definition 8 Let U be the universal set and A a subset of U. Then the complement of
A is the set of all elements of U which are not the elements of A. Symbolically, we
write A′ to denote the complement of A with respect to U. Thus,
A′ = {x : x ∈ U and x ∉ A }. Obviously A′ = U – A
We note that the complement of a set A can be looked upon, alternatively, as the
difference between a universal set U and the set A.
Example 20 Let U = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} and A = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9}. Find A′.
Solution We note that 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 are the only elements of U which do not belong to
A. Hence A′ = { 2, 4, 6, 8,10 }.
Example 21 Let U be universal set of all the students of Class XI of a coeducational
school and A be the set of all girls in Class XI. Find A′.
Solution Since A is the set of all girls, A′ is clearly the set of all boys in the class.

ANote If A is a subset of the universal set U, then its complement A′ is also a

subset of U.
Again in Example 20 above, we have A′ = { 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 }
Hence (A′ )′ = {x : x ∈ U and x ∉ A′}
= {1, 3, 5, 7, 9} = A
It is clear from the definition of the complement that for any subset of the universal
set U, we have ( A′ )′ = A

Now, we want to find the results for ( A ∪ B )′ and A′ ∩ B′ in the followng

example.
Example 22 Let U = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}, A = {2, 3} and B = {3, 4, 5}.
Find A′, B′ , A′ ∩ B′, A ∪ B and hence show that ( A ∪ B )′ = A′ ∩ B′.
Solution Clearly A′ = {1, 4, 5, 6}, B′ = { 1, 2, 6 }. Hence A′ ∩ B′ = { 1, 6 }
Also A ∪ B = { 2, 3, 4, 5 }, so that (A ∪ B )′ = { 1, 6 }
( A ∪ B )′ = { 1, 6 } = A′ ∩ B′
It can be shown that the above result is true in general. If A and B are any two
subsets of the universal set U, then
( A ∪ B )′ = A′ ∩ B′. Similarly, ( A ∩ B )′ = A′ ∪ B′ . These two results are stated
in words as follows :

2018-19
20 MATHEMATICS

The complement of the union of two sets is

the intersection of their complements and the
complement of the intersection of two sets is the
union of their complements. These are called De
Morgan’s laws. These are named after the
mathematician De Morgan.
The complement A′ of a set A can be represented
by a Venn diagram as shown in Fig 1.10. Fig 1.10
The shaded portion represents the complement of the set A.
Some Properties of Complement Sets
1. Complement laws: (i) A ∪ A′ = U (ii) A ∩ A′ = φ
2. De Morgan’s law: (i) (A ∪ B)´ = A′ ∩ B′ (ii) (A ∩ B )′ = A′ ∪ B′
3. Law of double complementation : (A′ )′ = A
4. Laws of empty set and universal set φ′ = U and U′ = φ.
These laws can be verified by using Venn diagrams.

EXERCISE 1.5
1. Let U = { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 }, A = { 1, 2, 3, 4}, B = { 2, 4, 6, 8 } and
C = { 3, 4, 5, 6 }. Find (i) A′ (ii) B′ (iii) (A ∪ C)′ (iv) (A ∪ B)′ (v) (A′)′
(vi) (B – C)′
2. If U = { a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h}, find the complements of the following sets :
(i) A = {a, b, c} (ii) B = {d, e, f, g}
(iii) C = {a, c, e, g} (iv) D = { f, g, h, a}
3. Taking the set of natural numbers as the universal set, write down the complements
of the following sets:
(i) {x : x is an even natural number} (ii) { x : x is an odd natural number }
(iii) {x : x is a positive multiple of 3} (iv) { x : x is a prime number }
(v) {x : x is a natural number divisible by 3 and 5}
(vi) { x : x is a perfect square } (vii) { x : x is a perfect cube}
(viii) { x : x + 5 = 8 } (ix) { x : 2x + 5 = 9}
(x) { x : x ≥ 7 } (xi) { x : x ∈ N and 2x + 1 > 10 }
4. If U = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 }, A = {2, 4, 6, 8} and B = { 2, 3, 5, 7}. Verify that
(i) (A ∪ B)′ = A′ ∩ B′ (ii) (A ∩ B)′ = A′ ∪ B′
5. Draw appropriate Venn diagram for each of the following :
(i) (A ∪ B)′, (ii) A′ ∩ B′, (iii) (A ∩ B)′, (iv) A′ ∪ B′
6. Let U be the set of all triangles in a plane. If A is the set of all triangles with at
least one angle different from 60°, what is A′?

2018-19
 SETS 21

7. Fill in the blanks to make each of the following a true statement :

(i) A ∪ A′ = . . . (ii) φ′ ∩ A = . . .
(iii) A ∩ A′ = . . . (iv) U′ ∩ A = . . .
1.12 Practical Problems on Union and
Intersection of Two Sets
In earlier Section, we have learnt union, intersection
and difference of two sets. In this Section, we will
go through some practical problems related to our
daily life.The formulae derived in this Section will
also be used in subsequent Chapter on Probability
(Chapter 16). Fig 1.11
Let A and B be finite sets. If A ∩ B = φ, then
(i) n ( A ∪ B ) = n ( A ) + n ( B ) ... (1)
The elements in A ∪ B are either in A or in B but not in both as A ∩ B = φ. So, (1)
follows immediately.
In general, if A and B are finite sets, then
(ii) n ( A ∪ B ) = n ( A ) + n ( B ) – n ( A ∩ B ) ... (2)
Note that the sets A – B, A ∩ B and B – A are disjoint and their union is A ∪ B
(Fig 1.11). Therefore
n ( A ∪ B) = n ( A – B) + n ( A ∩ B ) + n ( B – A )
= n ( A – B) + n ( A ∩ B ) + n ( B – A ) + n ( A ∩ B ) – n ( A ∩ B)
= n ( A ) + n ( B ) – n ( A ∩ B), which verifies (2)
(iii) If A, B and C are finite sets, then
n ( A ∪ B ∪ C ) = n ( A ) + n ( B ) + n ( C ) – n ( A ∩ B ) – n ( B ∩ C)
– n (A ∩ C)+n (A ∩ B ∩ C) ... (3)
In fact, we have
n ( A ∪ B ∪ C ) = n (A) + n ( B ∪ C ) – n [ A ∩ ( B ∪ C ) ] [ by (2) ]
= n (A) + n ( B ) + n ( C ) – n ( B ∩ C ) – n [ A ∩ ( B ∪ C ) ] [ by (2) ]
Since A ∩ ( B ∪ C ) = ( A ∩ B ) ∪ ( A ∩ C ), we get
n [ A ∩ ( B ∪ C ) ] = n ( A ∩ B ) + n ( A ∩ C ) – n [ ( A ∩ B ) ∩ (A ∩ C)]
= n ( A ∩ B ) + n ( A ∩ C ) – n (A ∩ B ∩ C)
Therefore
n ( A ∪ B ∪ C ) = n (A) + n ( B ) + n ( C ) – n ( A ∩ B ) – n ( B ∩ C)
– n(A ∩ C)+n (A ∩B ∩C)
This proves (3).
Example 23 If X and Y are two sets such that X ∪ Y has 50 elements, X has
28 elements and Y has 32 elements, how many elements does X ∩ Y have ?

2018-19
22 MATHEMATICS

Solution Given that

n ( X ∪ Y ) = 50, n ( X ) = 28, n ( Y ) = 32,
n (X ∩ Y) = ?
By using the formula
n ( X ∪ Y ) = n ( X ) + n ( Y ) – n ( X ∩ Y ),
we find that
n(X∩Y) = n ( X ) + n(Y) – n ( X∪Y)
= 28 + 32 – 50 = 10 Fig 1.12
Alternatively, suppose n ( X ∩ Y ) = k, then
n ( X – Y ) = 28 – k , n ( Y – X ) = 32 – k (by Venn diagram in Fig 1.12 )
This gives 50 = n ( X ∪ Y ) = n (X – Y) + n (X ∩ Y) + n ( Y – X)
= ( 28 – k ) + k + (32 – k )
Hence k = 10.
Example 24 In a school there are 20 teachers who teach mathematics or physics. Of
these, 12 teach mathematics and 4 teach both physics and mathematics. How many
teach physics ?
Solution Let M denote the set of teachers who teach mathematics and P denote the
set of teachers who teach physics. In the statement of the problem, the word ‘or’ gives
us a clue of union and the word ‘and’ gives us a clue of intersection. We, therefore,
have
n ( M ∪ P ) = 20 , n ( M ) = 12 and n ( M ∩ P ) = 4
We wish to determine n ( P ).
Using the result
n ( M ∪ P ) = n ( M ) + n ( P ) – n ( M ∩ P ),
we obtain
20 = 12 + n ( P ) – 4
Thus n ( P ) = 12
Hence 12 teachers teach physics.
Example 25 In a class of 35 students, 24 like to play cricket and 16 like to play
football. Also, each student likes to play at least one of the two games. How many
students like to play both cricket and football ?
Solution Let X be the set of students who like to play cricket and Y be the set of
students who like to play football. Then X ∪ Y is the set of students who like to play
at least one game, and X ∩ Y is the set of students who like to play both games.
Given n ( X) = 24, n ( Y ) = 16, n ( X ∪ Y ) = 35, n (X ∩ Y) = ?
Using the formula n ( X ∪ Y ) = n ( X ) + n ( Y ) – n ( X ∩ Y ), we get
35 = 24 + 16 – n (X ∩ Y)

2018-19
 SETS 23

Thus, n (X ∩ Y) = 5
i.e., 5 students like to play both games.
Example 26 In a survey of 400 students in a school, 100 were listed as taking apple
juice, 150 as taking orange juice and 75 were listed as taking both apple as well as
orange juice. Find how many students were taking neither apple juice nor orange juice.
Solution Let U denote the set of surveyed students and A denote the set of students
taking apple juice and B denote the set of students taking orange juice. Then
n (U) = 400, n (A) = 100, n (B) = 150 and n (A ∩ B) = 75.
Now n (A′ ∩ B′) = n (A ∪ B)′
= n (U) – n (A ∪ B)
= n (U) – n (A) – n (B) + n (A ∩ B)
= 400 – 100 – 150 + 75 = 225
Hence 225 students were taking neither apple juice nor orange juice.
Example 27 There are 200 individuals with a skin disorder, 120 had been exposed to
the chemical C1, 50 to chemical C2, and 30 to both the chemicals C1 and C2. Find the
number of individuals exposed to
(i) Chemical C1 but not chemical C2 (ii) Chemical C2 but not chemical C1
(iii) Chemical C1 or chemical C2
Solution Let U denote the universal set consisting of individuals suffering from the
skin disorder, A denote the set of individuals exposed to the chemical C1 and B denote
the set of individuals exposed to the chemical C2.
Here n ( U) = 200, n ( A ) = 120, n ( B ) = 50 and n ( A ∩ B ) = 30
(i) From the Venn diagram given in Fig 1.13, we have
A = ( A – B ) ∪ ( A ∩ B ).
n (A) = n( A – B ) + n( A ∩ B ) (Since A – B) and A ∩ B are disjoint.)
or n ( A – B ) = n ( A ) – n ( A ∩ B ) = 120 –30 = 90
Hence, the number of individuals exposed to
chemical C1 but not to chemical C2 is 90.
(ii) From the Fig 1.13, we have
B = ( B – A) ∪ ( A ∩ B).
and so, n (B) = n (B – A) + n ( A ∩ B)
(Since B – A and A ∩B are disjoint.)
or n ( B – A ) = n ( B ) – n ( A ∩ B )
= 50 – 30 = 20 Fig 1.13

2018-19
24 MATHEMATICS

Thus, the number of individuals exposed to chemical C2 and not to chemical C1 is 20.
(iii) The number of individuals exposed either to chemical C1 or to chemical C2, i.e.,
n (A∪ B ) = n (A) + n ( B ) – n (A∩ B )
= 120 + 50 – 30 = 140.

EXERCISE 1.6
1. If X and Y are two sets such that n ( X ) = 17, n ( Y ) = 23 and n ( X ∪ Y ) = 38,
find n ( X ∩ Y ).
2. If X and Y are two sets such that X ∪ Y has 18 elements, X has 8 elements and
Y has 15 elements ; how many elements does X ∩ Y have?
3. In a group of 400 people, 250 can speak Hindi and 200 can speak English. How
many people can speak both Hindi and English?
4. If S and T are two sets such that S has 21 elements, T has 32 elements, and S ∩ T
has 11 elements, how many elements does S ∪ T have?
5. If X and Y are two sets such that X has 40 elements, X ∪ Y has 60 elements and
X ∩ Y has 10 elements, how many elements does Y have?
6. In a group of 70 people, 37 like coffee, 52 like tea and each person likes at least
one of the two drinks. How many people like both coffee and tea?
7. In a group of 65 people, 40 like cricket, 10 like both cricket and tennis. How many
like tennis only and not cricket? How many like tennis?
8. In a committee, 50 people speak French, 20 speak Spanish and 10 speak both
Spanish and French. How many speak at least one of these two languages?

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 28 Show that the set of letters needed to spell “ CATARACT ” and the
set of letters needed to spell “ TRACT” are equal.
Solution Let X be the set of letters in “CATARACT”. Then
X = { C, A, T, R }
Let Y be the set of letters in “ TRACT”. Then
Y = { T, R, A, C, T } = { T, R, A, C }
Since every element in X is in Y and every element in Y is in X. It follows that X = Y.
Example 29 List all the subsets of the set { –1, 0, 1 }.
Solution Let A = { –1, 0, 1 }. The subset of A having no element is the empty
set φ. The subsets of A having one element are { –1 }, { 0 }, { 1 }. The subsets of
A having two elements are {–1, 0}, {–1, 1} ,{0, 1}. The subset of A having three
elements of A is A itself. So, all the subsets of A are φ, {–1}, {0}, {1}, {–1, 0}, {–1, 1},
{0, 1} and {–1, 0, 1}.

2018-19
 SETS 25

Example 30 Show that A ∪ B = A ∩ B implies A = B

Solution Let a ∈ A. Then a ∈ A ∪ B. Since A ∪ B = A ∩ B , a ∈ A ∩ B. So a ∈ B.
Therefore, A ⊂ B. Similarly, if b ∈ B, then b ∈ A ∪ B. Since
A ∪ B = A ∩ B, b ∈ A ∩ B. So, b ∈ A. Therefore, B ⊂ A. Thus, A = B
Example 31 For any sets A and B, show that
P ( A ∩ B ) = P ( A ) ∩ P ( B ).
Solution Let X ∈ P ( A ∩ B ). Then X ⊂ A ∩ B. So, X ⊂ A and X ⊂ B. Therefore,
X ∈ P ( A ) and X ∈ P ( B ) which implies X ∈ P ( A ) ∩ P ( B). This gives P ( A ∩ B )
⊂ P ( A ) ∩ P ( B ). Let Y ∈ P ( A ) ∩ P ( B ). Then Y ∈ P ( A) and Y ∈ P ( B ). So,
Y ⊂ A and Y ⊂ B. Therefore, Y ⊂ A ∩ B, which implies Y ∈ P ( A ∩ B ). This gives
P ( A ) ∩ P ( B ) ⊂ P ( A ∩ B)
Hence P ( A ∩ B ) = P ( A ) ∩ P ( B ).
Example 32 A market research group conducted a survey of 1000 consumers and
reported that 720 consumers like product A and 450 consumers like product B, what is
the least number that must have liked both products?
Solution Let U be the set of consumers questioned, S be the set of consumers who
liked the product A and T be the set of consumers who like the product B. Given that
n ( U ) = 1000, n ( S ) = 720, n ( T ) = 450
So n(S∪T)=n(S)+n(T)–n(S∩T)
= 720 + 450 – n (S ∩ T) = 1170 – n ( S ∩ T )
Therefore, n ( S ∪ T ) is maximum when n ( S ∩ T ) is least. But S ∪ T ⊂ U implies
n ( S ∪ T ) ≤ n ( U ) = 1000. So, maximum values of n ( S ∪ T ) is 1000. Thus, the least
value of n ( S ∩ T ) is 170. Hence, the least number of consumers who liked both products
is 170.
Example 33 Out of 500 car owners investigated, 400 owned car A and 200 owned
car B, 50 owned both A and B cars. Is this data correct?
Solution Let U be the set of car owners investigated, M be the set of persons who
owned car A and S be the set of persons who owned car B.
Given that n ( U ) = 500, n (M ) = 400, n ( S ) = 200 and n ( S ∩ M ) = 50.
Then n ( S ∪ M ) = n ( S ) + n ( M ) – n ( S ∩ M ) = 200 + 400 – 50 = 550
But S ∪ M ⊂ U implies n ( S ∪ M ) ≤ n ( U ).
This is a contradiction. So, the given data is incorrect.
Example 34 A college awarded 38 medals in football, 15 in basketball and 20 in
cricket. If these medals went to a total of 58 men and only three men got medals in all
the three sports, how many received medals in exactly two of the three sports ?

2018-19
26 MATHEMATICS

Solution Let F, B and C denote the set of men who

received medals in football, basketball and cricket,
respectively.
Then n ( F ) = 38, n ( B ) = 15, n ( C ) = 20
n (F ∪ B ∪ C ) = 58 and n (F ∩ B ∩ C ) = 3
Therefore, n (F ∪ B ∪ C ) = n ( F ) + n ( B )
+ n ( C ) – n (F ∩ B ) – n (F ∩ C ) – n (B ∩ C ) +
n ( F ∩ B ∩ C ), Fig 1.14
gives n ( F ∩ B ) + n ( F ∩ C ) + n ( B ∩ C ) = 18
Consider the Venn diagram as given in Fig 1.14
Here, a denotes the number of men who got medals in football and basketball only, b
denotes the number of men who got medals in football and cricket only, c denotes the
number of men who got medals in basket ball and cricket only and d denotes the
number of men who got medal in all the three. Thus, d = n ( F ∩ B ∩ C ) = 3 and
a + d + b + d + c + d = 18
Therefore a + b + c = 9,
which is the number of people who got medals in exactly two of the three sports.
Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 1
1. Decide, among the following sets, which sets are subsets of one and another:
A = { x : x ∈ R and x satisfy x2 – 8x + 12 = 0 },
B = { 2, 4, 6 }, C = { 2, 4, 6, 8, . . . }, D = { 6 }.
2. In each of the following, determine whether the statement is true or false. If it is
true, prove it. If it is false, give an example.
(i) If x ∈ A and A ∈ B , then x ∈ B
(ii) If A ⊂ B and B ∈ C , then A ∈ C
(iii) If A ⊂ B and B ⊂ C , then A ⊂ C
(iv) If A ⊄ B and B ⊄ C , then A ⊄ C
(v) If x ∈ A and A ⊄ B , then x ∈ B
(vi) If A ⊂ B and x ∉ B , then x ∉ A
3. Let A, B, and C be the sets such that A ∪ B = A ∪ C and A ∩ B = A ∩ C. Show
that B = C.
4. Show that the following four conditions are equivalent :
(i) A ⊂ B(ii) A – B = φ (iii) A ∪ B = B (iv) A ∩ B = A
5. Show that if A ⊂ B, then C – B ⊂ C – A.
6. Assume that P ( A ) = P ( B ). Show that A = B
7. Is it true that for any sets A and B, P ( A ) ∪ P ( B ) = P ( A ∪ B )? Justify your
answer.

2018-19
 SETS 27

8. Show that for any sets A and B,

A = ( A ∩ B ) ∪ ( A – B ) and A ∪ ( B – A ) = ( A ∪ B )
9. Using properties of sets, show that
(i) A ∪ ( A ∩ B ) = A (ii) A ∩ ( A ∪ B ) = A.
10. Show that A ∩ B = A ∩ C need not imply B = C.
11. Let A and B be sets. If A ∩ X = B ∩ X = φ and A ∪ X = B ∪ X for some set
X, show that A = B.
(Hints A = A ∩ ( A ∪ X ) , B = B ∩ ( B ∪ X ) and use Distributive law )
12. Find sets A, B and C such that A ∩ B, B ∩ C and A ∩ C are non-empty
sets and A ∩ B ∩ C = φ.
13. In a survey of 600 students in a school, 150 students were found to be taking tea
and 225 taking coffee, 100 were taking both tea and coffee. Find how many
students were taking neither tea nor coffee?
14. In a group of students, 100 students know Hindi, 50 know English and 25 know
both. Each of the students knows either Hindi or English. How many students
are there in the group?
15. In a survey of 60 people, it was found that 25 people read newspaper H, 26 read
newspaper T, 26 read newspaper I, 9 read both H and I, 11 read both H and T,
8 read both T and I, 3 read all three newspapers. Find:
(i) the number of people who read at least one of the newspapers.
(ii) the number of people who read exactly one newspaper.
16. In a survey it was found that 21 people liked product A, 26 liked product B and
29 liked product C. If 14 people liked products A and B, 12 people liked products
C and A, 14 people liked products B and C and 8 liked all the three products.
Find how many liked product C only.

Summary
This chapter deals with some basic definitions and operations involving sets. These
are summarised below:
® A set is a well-defined collection of objects.
® A set which does not contain any element is called empty set.
® A set which consists of a definite number of elements is called finite set,
otherwise, the set is called infinite set.
® Two sets A and B are said to be equal if they have exactly the same elements.
® A set A is said to be subset of a set B, if every element of A is also an element
of B. Intervals are subsets of R.
® power set of a set A is collection of all subsets of A. It is denoted by P(A).
A

2018-19
28 MATHEMATICS

® The union of two sets A and B is the set of all those elements which are either
in A or in B.
® The intersection of two sets A and B is the set of all elements which are
common. The difference of two sets A and B in this order is the set of elements
which belong to A but not to B.
® The complement of a subset A of universal set U is the set of all elements of U
which are not the elements of A.
® For any two sets A and B, (A ∪ B)′ = A′ ∩ B′ and ( A ∩ B )′ = A′ ∪ B′
® If A and B are finite sets such that A ∩ B = φ, then
n (A ∪ B) = n (A) + n (B).
If A ∩ B ≠ φ, then
n (A ∪ B) = n (A) + n (B) – n (A ∩ B)

Historical Note
The modern theory of sets is considered to have been originated largely by the
German mathematician Georg Cantor (1845-1918). His papers on set theory
appeared sometimes during 1874 to 1897. His study of set theory came when he
was studying trigonometric series of the form a1 sin x + a2 sin 2x + a3 sin 3x + ...
He published in a paper in 1874 that the set of real numbers could not be put into
one-to-one correspondence wih the integers. From 1879 onwards, he publishd
several papers showing various properties of abstract sets.
Cantor’s work was well received by another famous mathematician Richard
Dedekind (1831-1916). But Kronecker (1810-1893) castigated him for regarding
infinite set the same way as finite sets. Another German mathematician Gottlob
Frege, at the turn of the century, presented the set theory as principles of logic.
Till then the entire set theory was based on the assumption of the existence of the
set of all sets. It was the famous Englih Philosopher Bertand Russell (1872-
1970 ) who showed in 1902 that the assumption of existence of a set of all sets
leads to a contradiction. This led to the famous Russell’s Paradox. Paul R.Halmos
writes about it in his book ‘Naïve Set Theory’ that “nothing contains everything”.
The Russell’s Paradox was not the only one which arose in set theory.
Many paradoxes were produced later by several mathematicians and logicians.

2018-19
 SETS 29

As a consequence of all these paradoxes, the first axiomatisation of set theory

was published in 1908 by Ernst Zermelo. Another one was proposed by Abraham
Fraenkel in 1922. John Von Neumann in 1925 introduced explicitly the axiom of
regularity. Later in 1937 Paul Bernays gave a set of more satisfactory
axiomatisation. A modification of these axioms was done by Kurt Gödel in his
monograph in 1940. This was known as Von Neumann-Bernays (VNB) or Gödel-
Bernays (GB) set theory.
Despite all these difficulties, Cantor’s set theory is used in present day
mathematics. In fact, these days most of the concepts and results in mathematics
are expressed in the set theoretic language.

v—
—v

2018-19
 Chapter 2
RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

vMathematics is the indispensable instrument of

all physical research. – BERTHELOT v

2.1 Introduction
Much of mathematics is about finding a pattern – a
recognisable link between quantities that change. In our
daily life, we come across many patterns that characterise
relations such as brother and sister, father and son, teacher
and student. In mathematics also, we come across many
relations such as number m is less than number n, line l is
parallel to line m, set A is a subset of set B. In all these, we
notice that a relation involves pairs of objects in certain
order. In this Chapter, we will learn how to link pairs of
objects from two sets and then introduce relations between
the two objects in the pair. Finally, we will learn about G . W. Leibnitz
special relations which will qualify to be functions. The (1646–1716)
concept of function is very important in mathematics since it captures the idea of a
mathematically precise correspondence between one quantity with the other.
2.2 Cartesian Products of Sets
Suppose A is a set of 2 colours and B is a set of 3 objects, i.e.,
A = {red, blue}and B = {b, c, s},
where b, c and s represent a particular bag, coat and shirt, respectively.
How many pairs of coloured objects can be made from these two sets?
Proceeding in a very orderly manner, we can see that there will be 6
distinct pairs as given below:
(red, b), (red, c), (red, s), (blue, b), (blue, c), (blue, s).
Thus, we get 6 distinct objects (Fig 2.1).
Let us recall from our earlier classes that an ordered pair of elements Fig 2.1
taken from any two sets P and Q is a pair of elements written in small

2018-19
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 31

brackets and grouped together in a particular order, i.e., (p,q), p ∈ P and q ∈ Q . This
leads to the following definition:
Definition 1 Given two non-empty sets P and Q. The cartesian product P × Q is the
set of all ordered pairs of elements from P and Q, i.e.,
P × Q = { (p,q) : p ∈ P, q ∈ Q }
If either P or Q is the null set, then P × Q will also be empty set, i.e., P × Q = φ
From the illustration given above we note that
A × B = {(red,b), (red,c), (red,s), (blue,b), (blue,c), (blue,s)}.
Again, consider the two sets:
A = {DL, MP, KA}, where DL, MP, KA represent Delhi,
Madhya Pradesh and Karnataka, respectively and B = {01,02, 03
03}representing codes for the licence plates of vehicles issued 02
by DL, MP and KA . 01
If the three states, Delhi, Madhya Pradesh and Karnataka
were making codes for the licence plates of vehicles, with the DL MP KA
restriction that the code begins with an element from set A,
Fig 2.2
which are the pairs available from these sets and how many such
pairs will there be (Fig 2.2)?
The available pairs are:(DL,01), (DL,02), (DL,03), (MP,01), (MP,02), (MP,03),
(KA,01), (KA,02), (KA,03) and the product of set A and set B is given by
A × B = {(DL,01), (DL,02), (DL,03), (MP,01), (MP,02), (MP,03), (KA,01), (KA,02),
(KA,03)}.
It can easily be seen that there will be 9 such pairs in the Cartesian product, since
there are 3 elements in each of the sets A and B. This gives us 9 possible codes. Also
note that the order in which these elements are paired is crucial. For example, the code
(DL, 01) will not be the same as the code (01, DL).
As a final illustration, consider the two sets A= {a1, a2} and
B = {b1, b2, b3, b4} (Fig 2.3).
A × B = {( a1, b1), (a1, b2), (a1, b3), (a1, b4), (a2, b1), (a2, b2),
(a2, b3), (a2, b4)}.
The 8 ordered pairs thus formed can represent the position of points in
the plane if A and B are subsets of the set of real numbers and it is
obvious that the point in the position (a1, b2) will be distinct from the point
Fig 2.3
in the position (b2, a1).
Remarks
(i) Two ordered pairs are equal, if and only if the corresponding first elements
are equal and the second elements are also equal.

2018-19
32 MATHEMATICS

(ii) If there are p elements in A and q elements in B, then there will be pq

elements in A × B, i.e., if n(A) = p and n(B) = q, then n(A × B) = pq.
(iii) If A and B are non-empty sets and either A or B is an infinite set, then so is
A × B.
(iv) A × A × A = {(a, b, c) : a, b, c ∈ A}. Here (a, b, c) is called an ordered
triplet.

Example 1 If (x + 1, y – 2) = (3,1), find the values of x and y.

Solution Since the ordered pairs are equal, the corresponding elements are equal.
Therefore x + 1 = 3 and y – 2 = 1.
Solving we get x = 2 and y = 3.
Example 2 If P = {a, b, c} and Q = {r}, form the sets P × Q and Q × P.
Are these two products equal?
Solution By the definition of the cartesian product,
P × Q = {(a, r), (b, r), (c, r)} and Q × P = {(r, a), (r, b), (r, c)}
Since, by the definition of equality of ordered pairs, the pair (a, r) is not equal to the pair
(r, a), we conclude that P × Q ≠ Q × P.
However, the number of elements in each set will be the same.
Example 3 Let A = {1,2,3}, B = {3,4} and C = {4,5,6}. Find
(i) A × (B ∩ C) (ii) (A × B) ∩ (A × C)
(iii) A × (B ∪ C) (iv) (A × B) ∪ (A × C)
Solution (i) By the definition of the intersection of two sets, (B ∩ C) = {4}.
Therefore, A × (B ∩ C) = {(1,4), (2,4), (3,4)}.
(ii) Now (A × B) = {(1,3), (1,4), (2,3), (2,4), (3,3), (3,4)}
and (A × C) = {(1,4), (1,5), (1,6), (2,4), (2,5), (2,6), (3,4), (3,5), (3,6)}
Therefore, (A × B) ∩ (A × C) = {(1, 4), (2, 4), (3, 4)}.
(iii) Since, (B ∪ C) = {3, 4, 5, 6}, we have
A × (B ∪ C) = {(1,3), (1,4), (1,5), (1,6), (2,3), (2,4), (2,5), (2,6), (3,3),
(3,4), (3,5), (3,6)}.
(iv) Using the sets A × B and A × C from part (ii) above, we obtain
(A × B) ∪ (A × C) = {(1,3), (1,4), (1,5), (1,6), (2,3), (2,4), (2,5), (2,6),
(3,3), (3,4), (3,5), (3,6)}.

2018-19
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 33

Example 4 If P = {1, 2}, form the set P × P × P.

Solution We have, P × P × P = {(1,1,1), (1,1,2), (1,2,1), (1,2,2), (2,1,1), (2,1,2), (2,2,1),
(2,2,2)}.
Example 5 If R is the set of all real numbers, what do the cartesian products R × R
and R × R × R represent?
Solution The Cartesian product R × R represents the set R × R={(x, y) : x, y ∈ R}
which represents the coordinates of all the points in two dimensional space and the
cartesian product R × R × R represents the set R × R × R ={(x, y, z) : x, y, z ∈ R}
which represents the coordinates of all the points in three-dimensional space.

Example 6 If A × B ={(p, q),(p, r), (m, q), (m, r)}, find A and B.
Solution A = set of first elements = {p, m}
B = set of second elements = {q, r}.

EXERCISE 2.1
x 2 5 1
1. If  + 1, y –  =  ,  , find the values of x and y.
3 3 3 3
2. If the set A has 3 elements and the set B = {3, 4, 5}, then find the number of
elements in (A×B).
3. If G = {7, 8} and H = {5, 4, 2}, find G × H and H × G.
4. State whether each of the following statements are true or false. If the statement
is false, rewrite the given statement correctly.
(i) If P = {m, n} and Q = { n, m}, then P × Q = {(m, n),(n, m)}.
(ii) If A and B are non-empty sets, then A × B is a non-empty set of ordered
pairs (x, y) such that x ∈ A and y ∈ B.
(iii) If A = {1, 2}, B = {3, 4}, then A × (B ∩ φ) = φ.
5. If A = {–1, 1}, find A × A × A.
6. If A × B = {(a, x),(a , y), (b, x), (b, y)}. Find A and B.
7. Let A = {1, 2}, B = {1, 2, 3, 4}, C = {5, 6} and D = {5, 6, 7, 8}. Verify that
(i) A × (B ∩ C) = (A × B) ∩ (A × C). (ii) A × C is a subset of B × D.
8. Let A = {1, 2} and B = {3, 4}. Write A × B. How many subsets will A × B have?
List them.
9. Let A and B be two sets such that n(A) = 3 and n(B) = 2. If (x, 1), (y, 2), (z, 1)
are in A × B, find A and B, where x, y and z are distinct elements.

2018-19
34 MATHEMATICS

10. The Cartesian product A × A has 9 elements among which are found (–1, 0) and
(0,1). Find the set A and the remaining elements of A × A.
2.3 Relations
Consider the two sets P = {a, b, c} and Q = {Ali, Bhanu, Binoy, Chandra, Divya}.
The cartesian product of
P and Q has 15 ordered pairs which
can be listed as P × Q = {(a, Ali),
(a,Bhanu), (a, Binoy), ..., (c, Divya)}.
We can now obtain a subset of
P × Q by introducing a relation R
between the first element x and the
second element y of each ordered pair Fig 2.4
(x, y) as
R= { (x,y): x is the first letter of the name y, x ∈ P, y ∈ Q}.
Then R = {(a, Ali), (b, Bhanu), (b, Binoy), (c, Chandra)}
A visual representation of this relation R (called an arrow diagram) is shown
in Fig 2.4.
Definition 2 A relation R from a non-empty set A to a non-empty set B is a subset of
the cartesian product A × B. The subset is derived by describing a relationship between
the first element and the second element of the ordered pairs in A × B. The second
element is called the image of the first element.
Definition 3 The set of all first elements of the ordered pairs in a relation R from a set
A to a set B is called the domain of the relation R.
Definition 4 The set of all second elements in a relation R from a set A to a set B is
called the range of the relation R. The whole set B is called the codomain of the
relation R. Note that range ⊂ codomain.
Remarks (i) A relation may be represented algebraically either by the Roster
method or by the Set-builder method.
(ii) An arrow diagram is a visual representation of a relation.
Example 7 Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. Define a relation R from A to A by
R = {(x, y) : y = x + 1 }
(i) Depict this relation using an arrow diagram.
(ii) Write down the domain, codomain and range of R.
Solution (i) By the definition of the relation,
R = {(1,2), (2,3), (3,4), (4,5), (5,6)}.

2018-19
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 35

The corresponding arrow diagram is

shown in Fig 2.5.
(ii) We can see that the
domain ={1, 2, 3, 4, 5,}
Similarly, the range = {2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
and the codomain = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}.
Fig 2.5
Example 8 The Fig 2.6 shows a relation
between the sets P and Q. Write this relation (i) in set-builder form, (ii) in roster form.
What is its domain and range?
Solution It is obvious that the relation R is
“x is the square of y”.
(i) In set-builder form, R = {(x, y): x
is the square of y, x ∈ P, y ∈ Q}
(ii) In roster form, R = {(9, 3),
(9, –3), (4, 2), (4, –2), (25, 5), (25, –5)} Fig 2.6
The domain of this relation is {4, 9, 25}.
The range of this relation is {– 2, 2, –3, 3, –5, 5}.
Note that the element 1 is not related to any element in set P.
The set Q is the codomain of this relation.

A Note The total number of relations that can be defined from a set A to a set B
is the number of possible subsets of A × B. If n(A ) = p and n(B) = q, then
n (A × B) = pq and the total number of relations is 2pq.
Example 9 Let A = {1, 2} and B = {3, 4}. Find the number of relations from A to B.
Solution We have,
A × B = {(1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4)}.
Since n (A×B ) = 4, the number of subsets of A×B is 24. Therefore, the number of
relations from A into B will be 24.
Remark A relation R from A to A is also stated as a relation on A.

EXERCISE 2.2
1. Let A = {1, 2, 3,...,14}. Define a relation R from A to A by
R = {(x, y) : 3x – y = 0, where x, y ∈ A}. Write down its domain, codomain and
range.

2018-19
36 MATHEMATICS

2. Define a relation R on the set N of natural numbers by R = {(x, y) : y = x + 5,

x is a natural number less than 4; x, y ∈N}. Depict this relationship using roster
form. Write down the domain and the range.
3. A = {1, 2, 3, 5} and B = {4, 6, 9}. Define a relation R from A to B by
R = {(x, y): the difference between x and y is odd; x ∈ A, y ∈ B}. Write R in
roster form.
4. The Fig2.7 shows a relationship
between the sets P and Q. Write this
relation
(i) in set-builder form (ii) roster form.
What is its domain and range?
5. Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 6}. Let R be the
relation on A defined by Fig 2.7
{(a, b): a , b ∈A, b is exactly divisible by a}.
(i) Write R in roster form
(ii) Find the domain of R
(iii) Find the range of R.
6. Determine the domain and range of the relation R defined by
R = {(x, x + 5) : x ∈ {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5}}.
7. Write the relation R = {(x, x3) : x is a prime number less than 10} in roster form.
8. Let A = {x, y, z} and B = {1, 2}. Find the number of relations from A to B.
9. Let R be the relation on Z defined by R = {(a,b): a, b ∈ Z, a – b is an integer}.
Find the domain and range of R.
2.4 Functions
In this Section, we study a special type of relation called function. It is one of the most
important concepts in mathematics. We can, visualise a function as a rule, which produces
new elements out of some given elements. There are many terms such as ‘map’ or
‘mapping’ used to denote a function.
Definition 5 A relation f from a set A to a set B is said to be a function if every
element of set A has one and only one image in set B.
In other words, a function f is a relation from a non-empty set A to a non-empty
set B such that the domain of f is A and no two distinct ordered pairs in f have the
same first element.
If f is a function from A to B and (a, b) ∈ f, then f (a) = b, where b is called the
image of a under f and a is called the preimage of b under f.

2018-19
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 37

The function f from A to B is denoted by f: A à B.

Looking at the previous examples, we can easily see that the relation in Example 7 is
not a function because the element 6 has no image.
Again, the relation in Example 8 is not a function because the elements in the
domain are connected to more than one images. Similarly, the relation in Example 9 is
also not a function. (Why?) In the examples given below, we will see many more
relations some of which are functions and others are not.
Example 10 Let N be the set of natural numbers and the relation R be defined on
N such that R = {(x, y) : y = 2x, x, y ∈ N}.
What is the domain, codomain and range of R? Is this relation a function?
Solution The domain of R is the set of natural numbers N. The codomain is also N.
The range is the set of even natural numbers.
Since every natural number n has one and only one image, this relation is a
function.
Example 11 Examine each of the following relations given below and state in each
case, giving reasons whether it is a function or not?
(i) R = {(2,1),(3,1), (4,2)}, (ii) R = {(2,2),(2,4),(3,3), (4,4)}
(iii) R = {(1,2),(2,3),(3,4), (4,5), (5,6), (6,7)}
Solution (i) Since 2, 3, 4 are the elements of domain of R having their unique images,
this relation R is a function.
(ii) Since the same first element 2 corresponds to two different images 2
and 4, this relation is not a function.
(iii) Since every element has one and only one image, this relation is a
function.
Definition 6 A function which has either R or one of its subsets as its range is called
a real valued function. Further, if its domain is also either R or a subset of R, it is
called a real function.
Example 12 Let N be the set of natural numbers. Define a real valued function
f : Nà N by f (x) = 2x + 1. Using this definition, complete the table given below.
x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
y f (1) = ... f (2) = ... f (3) = ... f (4) = ... f (5) = ... f (6) = ... f (7) = ...
Solution The completed table is given by
x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
y f (1) = 3 f (2) = 5 f (3) = 7 f (4) = 9 f (5) = 11 f (6) = 13 f (7) =15

2018-19
38 MATHEMATICS

2.4.1 Some functions and their graphs

(i) Identity function Let R be the set of real numbers. Define the real valued
function f : R → R by y = f(x) = x for each x ∈ R. Such a function is called the
identity function. Here the domain and range of f are R. The graph is a straight line as
shown in Fig 2.8. It passes through the origin.

Fig 2.8
(ii) Constant function Define the function f: R → R by y = f (x) = c, x ∈ R where
c is a constant and each x ∈ R. Here domain of f is R and its range is {c}.

Fig 2.9

2018-19
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 39

The graph is a line parallel to x-axis. For example, if f(x)=3 for each x∈R, then its
graph will be a line as shown in the Fig 2.9.
(iii) Polynomial function A function f : R → R is said to be polynomial function if
for each x in R, y = f (x) = a0 + a1x + a2x2 + ...+ an xn, where n is a non-negative
integer and a0, a1, a2,...,an∈R.
The functions defined by f(x) = x3 – x2 + 2, and g(x) = x4 + 2 x are some examples
2
of polynomial functions, whereas the function h defined by h(x) = x 3 + 2x is not a
polynomial function.(Why?)
Example 13 Define the function f: R → R by y = f(x) = x2, x ∈ R. Complete the
Table given below by using this definition. What is the domain and range of this function?
Draw the graph of f.
x –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4
y = f(x) = x2
Solution The completed Table is given below:
x –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4
2
y = f (x) = x 16 9 4 1 0 1 4 9 16
2
Domain of f = {x : x∈R}. Range of f = {x : x ∈ R}. The graph of f is given
by Fig 2.10

Fig 2.10

2018-19
40 MATHEMATICS

Example 14 Draw the graph of the function f :R → R defined by f (x) = x3, x∈R.
Solution We have
f(0) = 0, f(1) = 1, f(–1) = –1, f(2) = 8, f(–2) = –8, f(3) = 27; f(–3) = –27, etc.
Therefore, f = {(x,x3): x∈R}.
The graph of f is given in Fig 2.11.

Fig 2.11
f (x )
(iv) Rational functions are functions of the type , where f(x) and g(x) are
g (x)
polynomial functions of x defined in a domain, where g(x) ≠ 0.
1
Example 15 Define the real valued function f : R – {0} → R defined by f (x) = ,
x
x ∈ R –{0}. Complete the Table given below using this definition. What is the domain
and range of this function?

x –2 –1.5 –1 –0.5 0.25 0.5 1 1.5 2

1
y = ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
x
Solution The completed Table is given by
x –2 –1.5 –1 –0.5 0.25 0.5 1 1.5 2

1
y= – 0.5 – 0.67 –1 – 2 4 2 1 0.67 0.5
x

2018-19
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 41

The domain is all real numbers except 0 and its range is also all real numbers
except 0. The graph of f is given in Fig 2.12.

Fig 2.12

(v) The Modulus function The function

f: R→R defined by f(x) = |x| for each
x ∈R is called modulus function. For each
non-negative value of x, f(x) is equal to x.
But for negative values of x, the value of
f(x) is the negative of the value of x, i.e.,

 x,x ≥ 0
f (x) = 
 − x,x < 0
The graph of the modulus function is given
in Fig 2.13.
(vi) Signum function The function
f:R→R defined by
Fig 2.13
1,if x > 0

f (x ) = 0,if x = 0
−1,if x < 0


2018-19
42 MATHEMATICS

is called the signum function. The domain of the signum function is R and the range is
the set {–1, 0, 1}. The graph of the signum function is given by the Fig 2.14.

x
f(x) = x , x ‘ 0and 0for x = 0
Fig 2.14

(vii) Greatest integer function

The function f: R → R defined
by f(x) = [x], x ∈R assumes the
value of the greatest integer, less
than or equal to x. Such a function
is called the greatest integer
function.
From the definition of [x], we
can see that
[x] = –1 for –1 ≤ x < 0
[x] = 0 for 0 ≤ x < 1
[x] = 1 for 1 ≤ x < 2
[x] = 2 for 2 ≤ x < 3 and
so on.
Fig 2.15
The graph of the function is
shown in Fig 2.15.
2.4.2 Algebra of real functions In this Section, we shall learn how to add two real
functions, subtract a real function from another, multiply a real function by a scalar
(here by a scalar we mean a real number), multiply two real functions and divide one
real function by another.
(i) Addition of two real functions Let f : X → R and g : X → R be any two real
functions, where X ⊂ R. Then, we define (f + g): X → R by
(f + g) (x) = f (x) + g (x), for all x ∈ X.

2018-19
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 43

(ii) Subtraction of a real function from another Let f : X → R and g: X → R be

any two real functions, where X ⊂ R. Then, we define (f – g) : X → R by
(f–g) (x) = f(x) –g(x), for all x ∈ X.
(iii) Multiplication by a scalar Let f : X→R be a real valued function and α be a
scalar. Here by scalar, we mean a real number. Then the product α f is a function from
X to R defined by (α f ) (x) = α f (x), x ∈X.
(iv) Multiplication of two real functions The product (or multiplication) of two real
functions f:X → R and g:X → R is a function fg:X → R defined by
(fg) (x) = f(x) g(x), for all x ∈ X.
This is also called pointwise multiplication.
(v) Quotient of two real functions Let f and g be two real functions defined from
f
X→R, where X ⊂ R. The quotient of f by g denoted by
g is a function defined by ,

 f  f ( x)
  ( x) = , provided g(x) ≠ 0, x ∈ X
g g ( x)
2
Example 16 Let f(x) = x and g(x) = 2x + 1 be two real functions.Find
 f 
(f + g) (x), (f –g) (x), (fg) (x),   ( x ) .
g
Solution We have,
2 2
(f + g) (x) = x + 2x + 1, (f –g) (x) = x – 2x – 1,

2  f 
3 2 x2 1
(fg) (x) = x (2x + 1) = 2x + x ,   ( x ) = ,x ≠ −
g 2x + 1 2
Example 17 Let f(x) = x and g(x) = x be two functions defined over the set of non-
 f 
negative real numbers. Find (f + g) (x), (f – g) (x), (fg) (x) and   (x).
g
Solution We have
(f + g) (x) = x + x, (f – g) (x) = x –x,
3  f  x –
1

(fg) x = x( x ) = x2 and  g  ( x ) = = x 2,x≠0

  x

2018-19
44 MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE 2.3
1. Which of the following relations are functions? Give reasons. If it is a function,
determine its domain and range.
(i) {(2,1), (5,1), (8,1), (11,1), (14,1), (17,1)}
(ii) {(2,1), (4,2), (6,3), (8,4), (10,5), (12,6), (14,7)}
(iii) {(1,3), (1,5), (2,5)}.
2. Find the domain and range of the following real functions:
(i) f(x) = – x (ii) f(x) = 9 − x2 .
3. A function f is defined by f(x) = 2x –5. Write down the values of
(i) f (0), (ii) f (7), (iii) f (–3).
4. The function ‘t’ which maps temperature in degree Celsius into temperature in
9C
degree Fahrenheit is defined by t(C) = + 32.
5
Find (i) t(0) (ii) t(28) (iii) t(–10) (iv) The value of C, when t(C) = 212.
5. Find the range of each of the following functions.
(i) f (x) = 2 – 3x, x ∈ R, x > 0.
(ii) f (x) = x2 + 2, x is a real number.
(iii) f (x) = x, x is a real number.

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 18 Let R be the set of real numbers.
Define the real function
f: R→R by f(x) = x + 10
and sketch the graph of this function.
Solution Here f(0) = 10, f(1) = 11, f(2) = 12, ...,
f(10) = 20, etc., and
f(–1) = 9, f(–2) = 8, ..., f(–10) = 0 and so on.
Therefore, shape of the graph of the given
function assumes the form as shown in Fig 2.16.
Remark The function f defined by f(x) = mx + c ,
x ∈ R, is called linear function, where m and c are
constants. Above function is an example of a linear
Fig 2.16
function.

2018-19
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 45

Example 19 Let R be a relation from Q to Q defined by R = {(a,b): a,b ∈ Q and

a – b ∈ Z}. Show that
(i) (a,a) ∈ R for all a ∈ Q
(ii) (a,b) ∈ R implies that (b, a) ∈ R
(iii) (a,b) ∈ R and (b,c) ∈ R implies that (a,c) ∈R
Solution (i) Since, a – a = 0 ∈ Z, if follows that (a, a) ∈ R.
(ii) (a,b) ∈ R implies that a – b ∈ Z. So, b – a ∈ Z. Therefore,
(b, a) ∈ R
(iii) (a, b) and (b, c) ∈ R implies that a – b ∈ Z. b – c ∈ Z. So,
a – c = (a – b) + (b – c) ∈ Z. Therefore, (a,c) ∈ R
Example 20 Let f = {(1,1), (2,3), (0, –1), (–1, –3)} be a linear function from Z into Z.
Find f(x).
Solution Since f is a linear function, f (x) = mx + c. Also, since (1, 1), (0, – 1) ∈ R,
f (1) = m + c = 1 and f (0) = c = –1. This gives m = 2 and f(x) = 2x – 1.

x2 + 3x + 5
Example 21 Find the domain of the function f ( x ) =
x2 − 5x + 4
2
Solution Since x –5x + 4 = (x – 4) (x –1), the function f is defined for all real numbers
except at x = 4 and x = 1. Hence the domain of f is R – {1, 4}.
Example 22 The function f is defined by
1− x, x < 0

1 , x=0
f (x) = 
 x + 1, x > 0

Draw the graph of f (x).
Solution Here, f(x) = 1 – x, x < 0, this gives
f(– 4) = 1 – (– 4) = 5;
f(– 3) =1 – (– 3) = 4,
f(– 2) = 1 – (– 2) = 3
f(–1) = 1 – (–1) = 2; etc,
and f(1) = 2, f (2) = 3, f (3) = 4
f(4) = 5 and so on for f(x) = x + 1, x > 0.
Thus, the graph of f is as shown in Fig 2.17 Fig 2.17

2018-19
46 MATHEMATICS

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 2

 x , 0 ≤ x ≤ 3
2
1. The relation f is defined by f (x) = 
3 x,3 ≤ x ≤10

 x 2 , 0 ≤ x ≤ 2
The relation g is defined by g ( x) = 
3x , 2 ≤ x ≤ 10
Show that f is a function and g is not a function.
2 f (1.1) – f (1)
2. If f (x) = x , find .
(1.1 – 1)

x2 + 2 x + 1
3. Find the domain of the function f (x) = .
x 2 – 8 x + 12
4. Find the domain and the range of the real function f defined by f (x) = ( x − 1) .
5. Find the domain and the range of the real function f defined by f (x) = x – 1 .

 x2  
6. Let f =  x ,  : x ∈ R  be a function from R into R. Determine the range
 1 + x 
2

of f.
7. Let f, g : R→R be defined, respectively by f(x) = x + 1, g(x) = 2x – 3. Find
f
f + g, f – g and
g.
8. Let f = {(1,1), (2,3), (0,–1), (–1, –3)} be a function from Z to Z defined by
f(x) = ax + b, for some integers a, b. Determine a, b.
2
9. Let R be a relation from N to N defined by R = {(a, b) : a, b ∈N and a = b }. Are
the following true?
(i) (a,a) ∈ R, for all a ∈ N (ii) (a,b) ∈ R, implies (b,a) ∈ R
(iii) (a,b) ∈ R, (b,c) ∈ R implies (a,c) ∈ R.
Justify your answer in each case.
10. Let A ={1,2,3,4}, B = {1,5,9,11,15,16} and f = {(1,5), (2,9), (3,1), (4,5), (2,11)}
Are the following true?
(i) f is a relation from A to B (ii) f is a function from A to B.
Justify your answer in each case.

2018-19
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 47

11. Let f be the subset of Z × Z defined by f = {(ab, a + b) : a, b ∈ Z}. Is f a

function from Z to Z? Justify your answer.
12. Let A = {9,10,11,12,13} and let f : A→N be defined by f (n) = the highest prime
factor of n. Find the range of f.

Summary
In this Chapter, we studied about relations and functions.The main features of
this Chapter are as follows:
® Ordered pair A pair of elements grouped together in a particular order.
® Cartesian product A × B of two sets A and B is given by
A × B = {(a, b): a ∈ A, b ∈ B}
In particular R × R = {(x, y): x, y ∈ R}
and R × R × R = (x, y, z): x, y, z ∈ R}
® If (a, b) = (x, y), then a = x and b = y.
® If n(A) = p and n(B) = q, then n(A × B) = pq.
®A×φ=φ
® In general, A × B ≠ B × A.
® Relation A relation R from a set A to a set B is a subset of the cartesian
product A × B obtained by describing a relationship between the first element
x and the second element y of the ordered pairs in A × B.
® The image of an element x under a relation R is given by y, where (x, y) ∈ R,
® The domain of R is the set of all first elements of the ordered pairs in a
relation R.
® The range of the relation R is the set of all second elements of the ordered
pairs in a relation R.
® Function A function f from a set A to a set B is a specific type of relation for
which every element x of set A has one and only one image y in set B.
We write f: A→B, where f(x) = y.
® A is the domain and B is the codomain of f.

2018-19
48 MATHEMATICS

® The range of the function is the set of images.

® A real function has the set of real numbers or one of its subsets both as its
domain and as its range.
® Algebra of functions For functions f : X → R and g : X → R, we have
(f + g) (x) = f (x) + g(x), x ∈ X
(f – g) (x) = f (x) – g(x), x ∈ X
(f.g) (x) = f (x) .g (x), x ∈ X
(kf) (x) = k ( f (x) ), x ∈ X, where k is a real number.
f f ( x)
  (x) = g ( x ) , x ∈ X, g(x) ≠ 0
g

Historical Note
The word FUNCTION first appears in a Latin manuscript “Methodus
tangentium inversa, seu de fuctionibus” written by Gottfried Wilhelm Leibnitz
(1646-1716) in 1673; Leibnitz used the word in the non-analytical sense. He
considered a function in terms of “mathematical job” – the “employee” being
just a curve.
On July 5, 1698, Johan Bernoulli, in a letter to Leibnitz, for the first time
deliberately assigned a specialised use of the term function in the analytical
sense. At the end of that month, Leibnitz replied showing his approval.
Function is found in English in 1779 in Chambers’ Cyclopaedia: “The
term function is used in algebra, for an analytical expression any way compounded
of a variable quantity, and of numbers, or constant quantities”.

—v —

2018-19
 Chapter 3
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS
vA mathematician knows how to solve a problem,
he can not solve it. – MILNE v

3.1 Introduction
The word ‘trigonometry’ is derived from the Greek words
‘trigon’ and ‘metron’ and it means ‘measuring the sides of
a triangle’. The subject was originally developed to solve
geometric problems involving triangles. It was studied by
sea captains for navigation, surveyor to map out the new
lands, by engineers and others. Currently, trigonometry is
used in many areas such as the science of seismology,
designing electric circuits, describing the state of an atom,
predicting the heights of tides in the ocean, analysing a
musical tone and in many other areas.
In earlier classes, we have studied the trigonometric Arya Bhatt
ratios of acute angles as the ratio of the sides of a right (476-550)
angled triangle. We have also studied the trigonometric identities and application of
trigonometric ratios in solving the problems related to heights and distances. In this
Chapter, we will generalise the concept of trigonometric ratios to trigonometric functions
and study their properties.
3.2 Angles
Angle is a measure of rotation of a given ray about its initial point. The original ray is
Vertex

Fig 3.1

2018-19
50 MATHEMATICS

called the initial side and the final position of the ray after rotation is called the
terminal side of the angle. The point of rotation is called the vertex. If the direction of
rotation is anticlockwise, the angle is said to be positive and if the direction of rotation
is clockwise, then the angle is negative (Fig 3.1).
The measure of an angle is the amount of
rotation performed to get the terminal side from
the initial side. There are several units for
measuring angles. The definition of an angle Fig 3.2
suggests a unit, viz. one complete revolution from the position of the initial side as
indicated in Fig 3.2.
This is often convenient for large angles. For example, we can say that a rapidly
spinning wheel is making an angle of say 15 revolution per second. We shall describe
two other units of measurement of an angle which are most commonly used, viz.
degree measure and radian measure.
th
 1 
3.2.1 Degree measure If a rotation from the initial side to terminal side is   of
 360 
a revolution, the angle is said to have a measure of one degree, written as 1°. A degree is
divided into 60 minutes, and a minute is divided into 60 seconds . One sixtieth of a degree is
called a minute, written as 1′, and one sixtieth of a minute is called a second, written as 1″.
Thus, 1° = 60′, 1′ = 60″
Some of the angles whose measures are 360°,180°, 270°, 420°, – 30°, – 420° are
shown in Fig 3.3.

Fig 3.3

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 51

3.2.2 Radian measure There is another unit for measurement of an angle, called
the radian measure. Angle subtended at the centre by an arc of length 1 unit in a
unit circle (circle of radius 1 unit) is said to have a measure of 1 radian. In the Fig
3.4(i) to (iv), OA is the initial side and OB is the terminal side. The figures show the
1 1
angles whose measures are 1 radian, –1 radian, 1 radian and –1 radian.
2 2

(i) (ii)
(iii)

(iv)
Fig 3.4 (i) to (iv)
We know that the circumference of a circle of radius 1 unit is 2π. Thus, one
complete revolution of the initial side subtends an angle of 2π radian.
More generally, in a circle of radius r, an arc of length r will subtend an angle of
1 radian. It is well-known that equal arcs of a circle subtend equal angle at the centre.
Since in a circle of radius r, an arc of length r subtends an angle whose measure is 1
l
radian, an arc of length l will subtend an angle whose measure is radian. Thus, if in
r
a circle of radius r, an arc of length l subtends an angle θ radian at the centre, we have
l
θ = or l = r θ.
r

2018-19
52 MATHEMATICS

P
3.2.3 Relation between radian and real numbers
2
Consider the unit circle with centre O. Let A be any point
on the circle. Consider OA as initial side of an angle.
Then the length of an arc of the circle will give the radian 1
measure of the angle which the arc will subtend at the
centre of the circle. Consider the line PAQ which is
1 A 0
tangent to the circle at A. Let the point A represent the O
real number zero, AP represents positive real number and
AQ represents negative real numbers (Fig 3.5). If we
−1
rope the line AP in the anticlockwise direction along the
circle, and AQ in the clockwise direction, then every real
number will correspond to a radian measure and −2
conversely. Thus, radian measures and real numbers can Fig 3.5 Q
be considered as one and the same.

3.2.4 Relation between degree and radian Since a circle subtends at the centre
an angle whose radian measure is 2π and its degree measure is 360°, it follows that
2π radian = 360° or π radian = 180°
The above relation enables us to express a radian measure in terms of degree
measure and a degree measure in terms of radian measure. Using approximate value
22
of π as , we have
7
180°
1 radian = = 57° 16′ approximately.
π

π
Also 1° = radian = 0.01746 radian approximately.
180

The relation between degree measures and radian measure of some common angles
are given in the following table:

Degree 30° 45° 60° 90° 180° 270° 360°

π π π π 3π
Radian π 2π
6 4 3 2 2

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 53

Notational Convention
Since angles are measured either in degrees or in radians, we adopt the convention
that whenever we write angle θ°, we mean the angle whose degree measure is θ and
whenever we write angle β, we mean the angle whose radian measure is β.
Note that when an angle is expressed in radians, the word ‘radian’ is frequently
π π
omitted. Thus, π = 180° and = 45° are written with the understanding that π and
4 4
are radian measures. Thus, we can say that
π
180 ×
Radian measure = Degree measure

180
Degree measure = × Radian measure
π
Example 1 Convert 40° 20′ into radian measure.
Solution We know that 180° = π radian.
1 π 121 121π
Hence 40° 20′ = 40 degree = × radian = radian.
3 180 3 540
121π
Therefore 40° 20′ = radian.
540
Example 2 Convert 6 radians into degree measure.
Solution We know that π radian = 180°.
180 1080 × 7
Hence 6 radians = × 6 degree = degree
π 22
7 7 × 60
= 343 degree = 343° + minute [as 1° = 60′]
11 11
2
= 343° + 38′ + minute [as 1′ = 60″]
11
= 343° + 38′ + 10.9″ = 343°38′ 11″ approximately.
Hence 6 radians = 343° 38′ 11″ approximately.
Example 3 Find the radius of the circle in which a central angle of 60° intercepts an
22
arc of length 37.4 cm (use π = ).
7

2018-19
54 MATHEMATICS

60π π
Solution Here l = 37.4 cm and θ = 60° = radian =
180 3
l
Hence, by r = , we have
θ
37.4×3 37.4×3×7
r= = = 35.7 cm
π 22
Example 4 The minute hand of a watch is 1.5 cm long. How far does its tip move in
40 minutes? (Use π = 3.14).
Solution In 60 minutes, the minute hand of a watch completes one revolution. Therefore,
2 2
in 40 minutes, the minute hand turns through of a revolution. Therefore, θ = × 360°
3 3
4π
or radian. Hence, the required distance travelled is given by
3
4π
l = r θ = 1.5 × cm = 2π cm = 2 × 3.14 cm = 6.28 cm.
3
Example 5 If the arcs of the same lengths in two circles subtend angles 65°and 110°
at the centre, find the ratio of their radii.
Solution Let r1 and r2 be the radii of the two circles. Given that
π 13π
θ1 = 65° = × 65 = radian
180 36
π 22π
and θ2 = 110° = × 110 = radian
180 36
Let l be the length of each of the arc. Then l = r1θ1 = r2θ2, which gives
13π 22π r1 22
× r1 = × r2 , i.e., r =
36 36 2 13
Hence r1 : r2 = 22 : 13.

EXERCISE 3.1
1. Find the radian measures corresponding to the following degree measures:
(i) 25° (ii) – 47°30′ (iii) 240° (iv) 520°

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 55

2. Find the degree measures corresponding to the following radian measures

22
(Use π = ).
7
11 5π 7π
(i) (ii) – 4 (iii) (iv)
16 3 6
3. A wheel makes 360 revolutions in one minute. Through how many radians does
it turn in one second?
4. Find the degree measure of the angle subtended at the centre of a circle of
22
radius 100 cm by an arc of length 22 cm (Use π = ).
7
5. In a circle of diameter 40 cm, the length of a chord is 20 cm. Find the length of
minor arc of the chord.
6. If in two circles, arcs of the same length subtend angles 60° and 75° at the
centre, find the ratio of their radii.
7. Find the angle in radian through which a pendulum swings if its length is 75 cm
and th e tip describes an arc of length
(i) 10 cm (ii) 15 cm (iii) 21 cm
3.3 Trigonometric Functions
In earlier classes, we have studied trigonometric ratios for acute angles as the ratio of
sides of a right angled triangle. We will now extend the definition of trigonometric
ratios to any angle in terms of radian measure and study them as trigonometric functions.
Consider a unit circle with centre
at origin of the coordinate axes. Let
P (a, b) be any point on the circle with
angle AOP = x radian, i.e., length of arc
AP = x (Fig 3.6).
We define cos x = a and sin x = b
Since ∆OMP is a right triangle, we have
OM2 + MP2 = OP2 or a2 + b2 = 1
Thus, for every point on the unit circle,
we have
a2 + b2 = 1 or cos2 x + sin2 x = 1
Since one complete revolution
subtends an angle of 2π radian at the
π
centre of the circle, ∠AOB = , Fig 3.6
2

2018-19
56 MATHEMATICS

3π π
∠AOC = π and ∠AOD = . All angles which are integral multiples of are called
2 2
quadrantal angles. The coordinates of the points A, B, C and D are, respectively,
(1, 0), (0, 1), (–1, 0) and (0, –1). Therefore, for quadrantal angles, we have
cos 0° = 1 sin 0° = 0,
π π
cos =0 sin =1
2 2
cosπ = − 1 sinπ = 0
3π 3π
cos =0 sin = –1
2 2
cos 2π = 1 sin 2π = 0
Now, if we take one complete revolution from the point P, we again come back to
same point P. Thus, we also observe that if x increases (or decreases) by any integral
multiple of 2π, the values of sine and cosine functions do not change. Thus,
sin (2nπ + x) = sin x , n ∈ Z , cos (2nπ + x) = cos x , n ∈ Z
Further, sin x = 0, if x = 0, ± π, ± 2π , ± 3π, ..., i.e., when x is an integral multiple of π
π 3π 5π
and cos x = 0, if x = ± ,± ,± , ... i.e., cos x vanishes when x is an odd
2 2 2
π
multiple of . Thus
2
π, where n is any integer
sin x = 0 implies x = nπ,
π
cos x = 0 implies x = (2n + 1) , where n is any integer.
2
We now define other trigonometric functions in terms of sine and cosine functions:
1
cosec x = , x ≠ nπ, where n is any integer.
sin x
1 π
sec x = , x ≠ (2n + 1) , where n is any integer.
cos x 2
sin x π
tan x = , x ≠ (2n +1) , where n is any integer.
cos x 2
cos x
cot x = , x ≠ n π, where n is any integer.
sin x

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 57

We have shown that for all real x, sin2 x + cos2 x = 1

It follows that

1 + tan2 x = sec2 x (why?)

1 + cot2 x = cosec2 x (why?)

In earlier classes, we have discussed the values of trigonometric ratios for 0°,
30°, 45°, 60° and 90°. The values of trigonometric functions for these angles are same
as that of trigonometric ratios studied in earlier classes. Thus, we have the following
table:
π π π π 3π
0° π 2π
6 4 3 2 2
1 1 3
sin 0 1 0 –1 0
2 2 2
3 1 1
cos 1 0 –1 0 1
2 2 2
1 not not
tan 0 1 3 0 0
3 defined defined

The values of cosec x, sec x and cot x

are the reciprocal of the values of sin x,
cos x and tan x, respectively.
3.3.1 Sign of trigonometric functions
Let P (a, b) be a point on the unit circle
with centre at the origin such that
∠AOP = x. If ∠AOQ = – x, then the
coordinates of the point Q will be (a, –b)
(Fig 3.7). Therefore
cos (– x) = cos x
and sin (– x) = – sin x
Since for every point P (a, b) on
the unit circle, – 1 ≤ a ≤ 1 and Fig 3.7

2018-19
58 MATHEMATICS

– 1 ≤ b ≤ 1, we have – 1 ≤ cos x ≤ 1 and –1 ≤ sin x ≤ 1 for all x. We have learnt in

π
previous classes that in the first quadrant (0 < x < ) a and b are both positive, in the
2
π
second quadrant ( < x <π) a is negative and b is positive, in the third quadrant
2
3π 3π
(π < x < ) a and b are both negative and in the fourth quadrant ( < x < 2π) a is
2 2
positive and b is negative. Therefore, sin x is positive for 0 < x < π, and negative for
π π 3π
π < x < 2π. Similarly, cos x is positive for 0 < x < , negative for < x < and also
2 2 2
3π
positive for < x < 2π. Likewise, we can find the signs of other trigonometric
2

functions in different quadrants. In fact, we have the following table.

I II III IV

sin x + + – –

cos x + – – +

tan x + – + –

cosec x + + – –

sec x + – – +

cot x + – + –

3.3.2 Domain and range of trigonometric functions From the definition of sine
and cosine functions, we observe that they are defined for all real numbers. Further,
we observe that for each real number x,
– 1 ≤ sin x ≤ 1 and – 1 ≤ cos x ≤ 1
Thus, domain of y = sin x and y = cos x is the set of all real numbers and range
is the interval [–1, 1], i.e., – 1 ≤ y ≤ 1.

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 59

1
Since cosec x =
sin x , the domain of y = cosec x is the set { x : x ∈ R and
x ≠ n π, n ∈ Z} and range is the set {y : y ∈ R, y ≥ 1 or y ≤ – 1}. Similarly, the domain
π
of y = sec x is the set {x : x ∈ R and x ≠ (2n + 1)
, n ∈ Z} and range is the set
2
{y : y ∈ R, y ≤ – 1or y ≥ 1}. The domain of y = tan x is the set {x : x ∈ R and
π
x ≠ (2n + 1) , n ∈ Z} and range is the set of all real numbers. The domain of
2
y = cot x is the set {x : x ∈ R and x ≠ n π, n ∈ Z} and the range is the set of all real
numbers.
π
We further observe that in the first quadrant, as x increases from 0 to , sin x
2
π
increases from 0 to 1, as x increases from to π, sin x decreases from 1 to 0. In the
2
3π
third quadrant, as x increases from π to , sin x decreases from 0 to –1and finally, in
2
3π
the fourth quadrant, sin x increases from –1 to 0 as x increases from to 2π.
2
Similarly, we can discuss the behaviour of other trigonometric functions. In fact, we
have the following table:

I quadrant II quadrant III quadrant IV quadrant

sin increases from 0 to 1 decreases from 1 to 0 decreases from 0 to –1 increases from –1 to 0

cos decreases from 1 to 0 decreases from 0 to – 1 increases from –1 to 0 increases from 0 to 1

tan increases from 0 to ∞ increases from –∞to 0 increases from 0 to ∞ increases from –∞to 0

cot decreases from ∞ to 0 decreases from 0 to–∞ decreases from ∞ to 0 decreases from 0to –∞

sec increases from 1 to ∞ increases from –∞to–1 decreases from –1to–∞ decreases from ∞ to 1

cosec decreases from ∞ to 1 increases from 1 to ∞ increases from –∞to–1 decreases from–1to–∞

Remark In the above table, the statement tan x increases from 0 to ∞ (infinity) for
π π
0<x< simply means that tan x increases as x increases for 0 < x < and
2 2

2018-19
60 MATHEMATICS

π
assumes arbitraily large positive values as x approaches to . Similarly, to say that
2
cosec x decreases from –1 to – ∞ (minus infinity) in the fourth quadrant means that
3π
cosec x decreases for x ∈ ( , 2π) and assumes arbitrarily large negative values as
2
x approaches to 2π. The symbols ∞ and – ∞ simply specify certain types of behaviour
of functions and variables.
We have already seen that values of sin x and cos x repeats after an interval of
2π. Hence, values of cosec x and sec x will also repeat after an interval of 2π. We

Fig 3.8

Fig 3.9

Fig 3.10 Fig 3.11

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 61

Fig 3.12 Fig 3.13

shall see in the next section that tan (π + x) = tan x. Hence, values of tan x will repeat
after an interval of π. Since cot x is reciprocal of tan x, its values will also repeat after
an interval of π. Using this knowledge and behaviour of trigonometic functions, we can
sketch the graph of these functions. The graph of these functions are given above:

Example 6 If cos x = – 3 , x lies in the third quadrant, find the values of other five
5
trigonometric functions.
3 5
Solution Since cos x = − , we have sec x = −
5 3
2 2 2 2
Now sin x + cos x = 1, i.e., sin x = 1 – cos x
9 16
or sin2 x = 1 – =
25 25
4
Hence sin x = ±
5
Since x lies in third quadrant, sin x is negative. Therefore
4
sin x = –
5
which also gives
5
cosec x = –
4

2018-19
62 MATHEMATICS

Further, we have
sin x 4 cos x 3
tan x = = and cot x = = .
cos x 3 sin x 4
5
Example 7 If cot x = – , x lies in second quadrant, find the values of other five
12
trigonometric functions.

5 12
Solution Since cot x = – , we have tan x = –
12 5
144 169
Now sec2 x = 1 + tan2 x = 1 + =
25 25
13
Hence sec x = ±
5
Since x lies in second quadrant, sec x will be negative. Therefore
13
sec x = – ,
5
which also gives
5
cos x = −
13
Further, we have
12 5 12
sin x = tan x cos x = (– ) × (– )=
5 13 13
1 13
and cosec x = = .
sin x 12

31π
Example 8 Find the value of sin .
3
Solution We know that values of sin x repeats after an interval of 2π. Therefore

31π π π 3
sin = sin (10π + ) = sin = .
3 3 3 2

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 63

Example 9 Find the value of cos (–1710°).

Solution We know that values of cos x repeats after an interval of 2π or 360°.
Therefore, cos (–1710°) = cos (–1710° + 5 × 360°)
= cos (–1710° + 1800°) = cos 90° = 0.

EXERCISE 3.2
Find the values of other five trigonometric functions in Exercises 1 to 5.

1
1. cos x = – , x lies in third quadrant.
2
3
2. sin x = , x lies in second quadrant.
5
3
3. cot x = , x lies in third quadrant.
4
13
4. sec x = , x lies in fourth quadrant.
5
5
5. tan x = – , x lies in second quadrant.
12
Find the values of the trigonometric functions in Exercises 6 to 10.
6. sin 765° 7. cosec (– 1410°)
19π 11π
8. tan 9. sin (– )
3 3
15π
10. cot (– )
4
3.4 Trigonometric Functions of Sum and Difference of Two Angles
In this Section, we shall derive expressions for trigonometric functions of the sum and
difference of two numbers (angles) and related expressions. The basic results in this
connection are called trigonometric identities. We have seen that

1. sin (– x) = – sin x
2. cos (– x) = cos x
We shall now prove some more results:

2018-19
64 MATHEMATICS

3. cos (x + y) = cos x cos y – sin x sin y

Consider the unit circle with centre at the origin. Let x be the angle P4OP1and y be
the angle P1OP2. Then (x + y) is the angle P4OP2. Also let (– y) be the angle P4OP3.
Therefore, P 1 , P 2 , P 3 and P 4 will have the coordinates P 1 (cos x, sin x),
P2 [cos (x + y), sin (x + y)], P3 [cos (– y), sin (– y)] and P4 (1, 0) (Fig 3.14).

Fig 3.14
Consider the triangles P1OP3 and P2OP4. They are congruent (Why?). Therefore,
P1P3 and P2P4 are equal. By using distance formula, we get
P 1P 32 = [cos x – cos (– y)]2 + [sin x – sin(–y]2
= (cos x – cos y)2 + (sin x + sin y)2
= cos2 x + cos2 y – 2 cos x cos y + sin2 x + sin2 y + 2sin x sin y
= 2 – 2 (cos x cos y – sin x sin y) (Why?)
Also, P 2P 42 = [1 – cos (x + y)] 2 + [0 – sin (x + y)]2
= 1 – 2cos (x + y) + cos2 (x + y) + sin2 (x + y)
= 2 – 2 cos (x + y)

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 65

Since P 1 P 3 = P2P4, we have P1P32 = P2P42.

Therefore, 2 –2 (cos x cos y – sin x sin y) = 2 – 2 cos (x + y).
Hence cos (x + y) = cos x cos y – sin x sin y
4 . cos (x – y) = cos x cos y + sin x sin y
Replacing y by – y in identity 3, we get
cos (x + (– y)) = cos x cos (– y) – sin x sin (– y)
or cos (x – y) = cos x cos y + sin x sin y
π
5. cos ( – x ) = sin x
2
π
If we replace x by and y by x in Identity (4), we get
2
π π π
cos ( − x ) = cos cos x + sin sin x = sin x.
2 2 2
π
6. sin ( – x ) = cos x
2
Using the Identity 5, we have
π π  π 
sin (− x ) = cos  −  − x   = cos x.
2 2  2 
7. sin (x + y) = sin x cos y + cos x sin y
We know that
π   π 
sin (x + y) = cos  − (x + y )  = cos  ( − x) − y 
2   2 
π π
= cos ( − x ) cos y + sin ( − x) sin y
2 2
= sin x cos y + cos x sin y
8. sin (x – y) = sin x cos y – cos x sin y
If we replace y by –y, in the Identity 7, we get the result.
9. By taking suitable values of x and y in the identities 3, 4, 7 and 8, we get the
following results:
π π
cos ( + x ) = – sin x sin ( + x ) = cos x
2 2
π – x) = – cos x
cos (π π – x) = sin x
sin (π

2018-19
66 MATHEMATICS

π + x) = – cos x
cos (π π + x) = – sin x
sin (π
cos (2ππ – x) = cos x sin (2ππ – x) = – sin x
Similar results for tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x can be obtained from the results of sin
x and cos x.
π
10. If none of the angles x, y and (x + y) is an odd multiple of , then
2
tan x + tan y
tan (x + y) =
1 – tan x tan y

π
Since none of the x, y and (x + y) is an odd multiple of , it follows that cos x,
2
cos y and cos (x + y) are non-zero. Now
sin( x + y ) sin x cos y + cos x sin y
tan (x + y) = = .
cos( x + y ) cos x cos y − sin x sin y
Dividing numerator and denominator by cos x cos y, we have

sin x cos y cos x sin y

+
cos x cos y cos x cos y
tan (x + y) =
cos x cos y sin x sin y
−
cos x cos y cos x cos y

tan x + tan y
= 1 – tan x tan y

tan x – tan y
11. tan ( x – y) =
1 + tan x tan y
If we replace y by – y in Identity 10, we get
tan (x – y) = tan [x + (– y)]
tan x + tan (− y ) tan x − tan y
= =
1 − tan x tan ( − y ) 1+ tan x tan y
12. If none of the angles x, y and (x + y) is a multiple of π , then
cot x cot y – 1
cot ( x + y) =
cot y + cot x

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 67

Since, none of the x, y and (x + y) is multiple of π, we find that sin x sin y and
sin (x + y) are non-zero. Now,
cos ( x + y ) cos x cos y – sin x sin y
cot ( x + y) = =
sin ( x + y ) sin x cos y + cos x sin y
Dividing numerator and denominator by sin x sin y, we have
cot x cot y – 1
cot (x + y) =
cot y + cot x

cot x cot y + 1
13. cot (x – y) = if none of angles x, y and x–y is a multiple of π
cot y – cot x
If we replace y by –y in identity 12, we get the result

2 2 2
1 – tan 2 x
2
14. cos 2x = cos x – sin x = 2 cos x – 1 = 1 – 2 sin x =
1 + tan 2 x
We know that
cos (x + y) = cos x cos y – sin x sin y
Replacing y by x, we get
cos 2x = cos2x – sin2 x
= cos2 x – (1 – cos2 x) = 2 cos2x – 1
Again, cos 2x = cos2 x – sin2 x
= 1 – sin2 x – sin2 x = 1 – 2 sin2 x.

2
cos2 x − sin 2 x
2
We have cos 2x = cos x – sin x =
cos2 x + sin 2 x
Dividing numerator and denominator by cos2 x, we get
1 – tan 2 x π
cos 2x = 2 ,
x ≠ n π + , where n is an integer
1 + tan x 2

2tan x π
15. sin 2x = 2 sinx cos x = 2 x ≠ n π + , where n is an integer
1 + tan x 2
We have
sin (x + y) = sin x cos y + cos x sin y
Replacing y by x, we get sin 2x = 2 sin x cos x.
2sin x cos x
Again sin 2x =
cos2 x + sin 2 x

2018-19
68 MATHEMATICS

Dividing each term by cos2 x, we get

2tan x
sin 2x =
1 +tan 2 x

2tan x π
16. tan 2x = 2 if 2 x ≠ n π + , where n is an integer
1 – tan x 2
We know that
tan x + tan y
tan (x + y) = 1 – tan x tan y

2 tan x
Replacing y by x , we get tan 2 x =
1− tan 2 x
17. sin 3x = 3 sin x – 4 sin3 x
We have,
sin 3x = sin (2x + x)
= sin 2x cos x + cos 2x sin x
= 2 sin x cos x cos x + (1 – 2sin2 x) sin x
= 2 sin x (1 – sin2 x) + sin x – 2 sin3 x
= 2 sin x – 2 sin3 x + sin x – 2 sin3 x
= 3 sin x – 4 sin3 x
18. cos 3x = 4 cos3 x – 3 cos x
We have,
cos 3x = cos (2x +x)
= cos 2x cos x – sin 2x sin x
= (2cos2 x – 1) cos x – 2sin x cos x sin x
= (2cos2 x – 1) cos x – 2cos x (1 – cos2 x)
= 2cos3 x – cos x – 2cos x + 2 cos3 x
= 4cos3 x – 3cos x.
3 tan x – tan 3 x π
19. tan 3 x = if 3 x ≠ n π + , where n is an integer
1 – 3tan 2 x 2
We have tan 3x =tan (2x + x)
2tan x
+ tan x
tan 2 x + tan x 1 – tan 2 x
= =
1 – tan 2 x tan x 1 – 2tan x . tan x
1 – tan 2 x

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 69

2tan x + tan x – tan 3 x 3 tan x – tan 3 x

= =
1 – tan 2 x – 2tan 2 x 1 – 3tan 2 x

x+ y x– y
20. (i) cos x + cos y = 2cos cos
2 2
x+ y x– y
(ii) cos x – cos y = – 2sin sin
2 2
x+ y x– y
(iii) sin x + sin y = 2sin cos
2 2
x+ y x– y
(iv) sin x – sin y = 2cos sin
2 2
We know that
cos (x + y) = cos x cos y – sin x sin y ... (1)
and cos (x – y) = cos x cos y + sin x sin y ... (2)
Adding and subtracting (1) and (2), we get
cos (x + y) + cos(x – y) = 2 cos x cos y ... (3)
and cos (x + y) – cos (x – y) = – 2 sin x sin y ... (4)
Further sin (x + y) = sin x cos y + cos x sin y ... (5)
and sin (x – y) = sin x cos y – cos x sin y ... (6)
Adding and subtracting (5) and (6), we get
sin (x + y) + sin (x – y) = 2 sin x cos y ... (7)
sin (x + y) – sin (x – y) = 2cos x sin y ... (8)
Let x + y = θ and x – y = φ. Therefore
 θ+φ   θ−φ 
x =  and y =  
 2   2 
Substituting the values of x and y in (3), (4), (7) and (8), we get
 θ+φ   θ −φ 
cos θ + cos φ = 2 cos   cos  
 2   2 

θ+φ θ – φ
cos θ – cos φ = – 2 sin   sin  
 2   2 

 θ+φ   θ−φ 
sin θ + sin φ = 2 sin   cos  
 2   2 

2018-19
70 MATHEMATICS

 θ+φ   θ−φ 
sin θ – sin φ = 2 cos   sin  
 2   2 
Since θ and φ can take any real values, we can replace θ by x and φ by y.
Thus, we get
x+ y x− y x+ y x− y
cos x + cos y = 2 cos cos ; cos x – cos y = – 2 sin sin ,
2 2 2 2
x+ y x− y x+ y x− y
sin x + sin y = 2 sin cos ; sin x – sin y = 2 cos sin .
2 2 2 2
Remark As a part of identities given in 20, we can prove the following results:
21. (i) 2 cos x cos y = cos (x + y) + cos (x – y)
(ii) –2 sin x sin y = cos (x + y) – cos (x – y)
(iii) 2 sin x cos y = sin (x + y) + sin (x – y)
(iv) 2 cos x sin y = sin (x + y) – sin (x – y).
Example 10 Prove that
π π 5π π
3sin sec − 4sin cot =1
6 3 6 4
Solution We have
π π 5π π
L.H.S. = 3sin sec − 4sin cot
6 3 6 4
1  π π
=3× × 2 – 4 sin  π −  × 1 = 3 – 4 sin
2  6 6
1
=3–4× = 1 = R.H.S.
2
Example 11 Find the value of sin 15°.
Solution We have
sin 15° = sin (45° – 30°)
= sin 45° cos 30° – cos 45° sin 30°
1 3 1 1 3 –1
= × − × = .
2 2 2 2 2 2
13 π
Example 12 Find the value of tan .
12

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 71

Solution We have
13 π  π π π π
tan = tan  π +  = tan = tan  − 
12  12  12 4 6

π π 1−
1
tan − tan
4 6 3 = 3 −1 = 2 − 3
= =
π π 1 3 +1
1 + tan tan 1+
4 6 3

Example 13 Prove that

sin ( x + y ) tan x + tan y
=
sin ( x − y ) tan x − tan y .

Solution We have
sin (x + y) sin x cos y + cos x sin y
L.H.S. = =
sin (x − y ) sin x cos y − cos x sin y
Dividing the numerator and denominator by cos x cos y, we get
sin ( x + y ) tan x + tan y
=
sin ( x − y ) tan x − tan y .

Example 14 Show that

tan 3 x tan 2 x tan x = tan 3x – tan 2 x – tan x
Solution We know that 3x = 2x + x
Therefore, tan 3x = tan (2x + x)
tan 2 x + tan x
or tan 3x =
1– tan 2 x tan x
or tan 3x – tan 3x tan 2x tan x = tan 2x + tan x
or tan 3x – tan 2x – tan x = tan 3x tan 2x tan x
or tan 3x tan 2x tan x = tan 3x – tan 2x – tan x.
Example 15 Prove that
π  π 
cos  + x  + cos  − x  = 2 cos x
4  4 
Solution Using the Identity 20(i), we have

2018-19
72 MATHEMATICS

π  π 
L.H.S. = cos  + x  + cos  − x 
4  4 

π π  π π 
 4 +x+ 4 −x  4 + x – ( 4 − x) 
= 2cos   cos  
 2   2 
   

π 1
= 2 cos cos x = 2 × cos x = 2 cos x = R.H.S.
4 2

cos 7 x + cos 5 x
Example 16 Prove that = cot x
sin 7 x – sin 5 x

Solution Using the Identities 20 (i) and 20 (iv), we get

7 x + 5x 7 x − 5x
2cos cos cos x
2 2 = cot x = R.H.S.
L.H.S. = =
7 x + 5x 7 x − 5x sin x
2cos sin
2 2

sin 5 x − 2sin 3x + sin x

Example 17 Prove that = = tan x
cos5 x − cos x

Solution We have

sin 5 x − 2sin 3 x + sin x sin 5 x + sin x − 2sin 3x

L.H.S. = =
cos5 x − cos x cos5 x − cos x

2sin 3 x cos 2 x − 2sin 3 x sin 3 x (cos 2 x − 1)

= =–
– 2sin 3x sin 2x sin 3x sin 2x

1− cos 2 x 2sin 2 x
= = = tan x = R.H.S.
sin 2 x 2sin x cos x

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 73

EXERCISE 3.3
Prove that:
π π π 1 π 7π π 3
1. sin2 + cos2 – tan2 = – 2. 2sin2 + cosec2 cos 2 =
6 3 4 2 6 6 3 2
π 5π π 2 3π π π
3. cot
2
+ cosec + 3tan 2 = 6 4. 2sin + 2cos 2 + 2sec 2 = 10
6 6 6 4 4 3
5. Find the value of:
(i) sin 75° (ii) tan 15°

Prove the following:

π  π  π  π 
6. cos  − x  cos  − y  − sin  − x  sin  − y  = sin ( x + y )
 4   4   4   4 

π 
tan  + x  2
 4  =  1 + tan x cos (π + x) cos ( − x )
7.   8. = cot 2 x
π   1 − tan x π 
tan  − x  sin (π − x) cos  + x 
4  2 

 3π    3π  
9. cos  + x  cos (2 π + x)  cot  − x  + cot (2π + x)  = 1
 2    2  
10. sin (n + 1)x sin (n + 2)x + cos (n + 1)x cos (n + 2)x = cos x
 3π   3π 
11. cos  + x  − cos  − x  = − 2 sin x
 4   4 
12. sin2 6x – sin2 4x = sin 2x sin 10x 13. cos2 2x – cos2 6x = sin 4x sin 8x
14. sin2 x + 2 sin 4x + sin 6x = 4 cos2 x sin 4x
15. cot 4x (sin 5x + sin 3x) = cot x (sin 5x – sin 3x)
cos 9 x − cos 5 x sin 2 x sin 5x + sin 3 x
16. =− 17. = tan 4 x
sin 17 x − sin 3 x cos 10 x cos 5x + cos 3 x
sin x − sin y x−y sin x + sin 3 x
18. = tan 19. = tan 2 x
cos x + cos y 2 cos x + cos 3 x
sin x − sin 3x cos 4 x + cos 3x + cos 2 x
20. = 2 sin x 21. = cot 3x
2
sin x − cos x
2
sin 4 x + sin 3x + sin 2 x

2018-19
74 MATHEMATICS

22. cot x cot 2x – cot 2x cot 3x – cot 3x cot x = 1

4tan x (1 − tan 2 x)
23. tan 4 x = 24. cos 4x = 1 – 8sin2 x cos2 x
1 − 6 tan 2 x + tan 4 x

25. cos 6x = 32 cos6 x – 48cos4 x + 18 cos2 x – 1

3.5 Trigonometric Equations
Equations involving trigonometric functions of a variable are called trigonometric
equations. In this Section, we shall find the solutions of such equations. We have
already learnt that the values of sin x and cos x repeat after an interval of 2π and the
values of tan x repeat after an interval of π. The solutions of a trigonometric equation
for which 0 ≤ x < 2π are called principal solutions. The expression involving integer
‘n’ which gives all solutions of a trigonometric equation is called the general solution.
We shall use ‘Z’ to denote the set of integers.
The following examples will be helpful in solving trigonometric equations:
3
Example 18 Find the principal solutions of the equation sin x = .
2

π 3 2π  π π 3
Solution We know that, sin = and sin = sin  π −  = sin = .
3 2 3  3 3 2
π 2π
Therefore, principal solutions are x = and .
3 3
1
Example 19 Find the principal solutions of the equation tan x = − .
3
π 1  π π 1
Solution We know that, tan = . Thus, tan  π –  = – tan = –
6 3  6 6 3

 π π 1
and tan  2π −  = − tan = −
 6 6 3
5π 11π 1
Thus tan = tan =− .
6 6 3
5π 11π
Therefore, principal solutions are and .
6 6
We will now find the general solutions of trigonometric equations. We have already

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 75

seen that:
sin x =0 gives x = nπ, where n ∈ Z
π
cos x =0 gives x = (2n + 1) , where n ∈ Z.
2
We shall now prove the following results:
Theorem 1 For any real numbers x and y,
sin x = sin y implies x = nπ + (–1)n y, where n ∈ Z
Proof If sin x = sin y, then
x+y x−y
sin x – sin y = 0 or 2cos sin =0
2 2
x+ y x− y
which gives cos = 0 or sin =0
2 2
x+ y π x−y
Therefore = (2n + 1) or= nπ, where n ∈ Z
2 2 2
i.e. x = (2n + 1) π – y or x = 2nπ + y, where n∈Z
Hence x = (2n + 1)π + (–1)2n + 1 y or x = 2nπ +(–1)2n y, where n ∈ Z.
Combining these two results, we get
x = nπ + (–1)n y, where n ∈ Z.
Theorem 2 For any real numbers x and y, cos x = cos y, implies x = 2nπ ± y,
where n ∈ Z
Proof If cos x = cos y, then
x+ y x− y
cos x – cos y = 0 i.e., –2 sin sin =0
2 2
x+y x−y
Thus sin =0 or sin =0
2 2
x+ y x−y
Therefore = nπ or = nπ, where n ∈ Z
2 2
i.e. x = 2nπ – y or x = 2nπ + y, where n ∈ Z
Hence x = 2nπ ± y, where n ∈ Z
π
Theorem 3 Prove that if x and y are not odd mulitple of , then
2
tan x = tan y implies x = nπ + y, where n ∈ Z

2018-19
76 MATHEMATICS

Proof If tan x = tan y, then tan x – tan y = 0

sin x cos y − cos x sin y
or =0
cos x cos y
which gives sin (x – y) = 0 (Why?)
Therefore x – y = nπ, i.e., x = nπ + y, where n ∈ Z

3
Example 20 Find the solution of sin x = – .
2

3 π  π 4π
Solution We have sin x = – = − sin = sin  π +  = sin
2 3  3 3
4π
Hence sin x = sin , which gives
3
4π
x = nπ + ( − 1) n , where n ∈ Z.
3

4π 3
A Note is one such value of x for which sin x = − . One may take any
3 2
3
other value of x for which sin x = − . The solutions obtained will be the same
2
although these may apparently look different.
1
Example 21 Solve cos x = .
2
1 π
Solution We have, cos x = = cos
2 3
π
Therefore x = 2nπ ± , where n ∈ Z.
3
 π
Example 22 Solve tan 2 x = − cot  x +  .
 3

π π
Solution We have, tan 2 x = − cot  x + π  = tan  + x + 
 3 2 3

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 77

 5π 
or tan2 x = tan  x + 
 6 
5π
Therefore 2 x = nπ + x + , where n∈Z
6
5π
or x = nπ +
, where n∈Z.
6
Example 23 Solve sin 2x – sin 4x + sin 6x = 0.
Solution The equation can be written as
sin 6 x + sin 2 x − sin 4 x = 0
or 2 sin 4 x cos 2 x − sin 4 x = 0
i.e. sin 4 x (2 cos 2 x − 1) = 0
1
Therefore sin 4x = 0 or cos 2 x =
2
π
i.e. sin4 x = 0 or cos 2 x = cos
3
π
Hence 4 x = nπ or 2 x = 2nπ ± , where n∈Z
3
nπ π
i.e. x= or x = nπ ± , where n∈Z.
4 6
Example 24 Solve 2 cos2 x + 3 sin x = 0
Solution The equation can be written as
2 (1 − sin 2 x ) + 3 sin x = 0
2
or 2 sin x − 3 sin x − 2 = 0
or (2sinx + 1) (sinx − 2) = 0

1
Hence sin x = − or sin x = 2
2
But sin x = 2 is not possible (Why?)
1 7π
Therefore sin x = − = sin .
2 6

2018-19
78 MATHEMATICS

Hence, the solution is given by

7π
x = nπ + ( − 1) n , where n ∈ Z.
6

EXERCISE 3.4
Find the principal and general solutions of the following equations:
1. tan x = 3 2. sec x = 2
3. cot x = − 3 4. cosec x = – 2
Find the general solution for each of the following equations:
5. cos 4 x = cos 2 x 6. cos 3x + cos x – cos 2x = 0
7. sin 2x + cos x = 0 8. sec2 2x = 1– tan 2x
9. sin x + sin 3x + sin 5x = 0

Miscellaneous Examples
3 12
Example 25 If sin x = , cos y = − , where x and y both lie in second quadrant,
5 13
find the value of sin (x + y).
Solution We know that
sin (x + y) = sin x cos y + cos x sin y ... (1)
9 16
Now cos2 x = 1 – sin2 x = 1 – =
25 25
4
Therefore cos x = ± .
5
Since x lies in second quadrant, cos x is negative.
4
Hence cos x = −
5
144 25
Now sin2y = 1 – cos2y = 1 – =
169 169
5
i.e. sin y = ± .
13
5
Since y lies in second quadrant, hence sin y is positive. Therefore, sin y = . Substituting
13
the values of sin x, sin y, cos x and cos y in (1), we get

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 79

3  12   4  5 36 20 56
sin( x + y ) = ×  −  +  − × = − − =− .
5  13   5  13 65 65 65
Example 26 Prove that
x 9x 5x
cos 2 x cos − cos 3 x cos = sin 5 x sin .
2 2 2
Solution We have
1  x 9x 
L.H.S. =  2cos 2 x cos − 2cos cos 3x 
2  2 2 

1  x  x  9x   9x 
cos  2 x +  + cos  2 x −  − cos  + 3x  − cos  − 3x  
2  
=
2  2  2   2 
1 5x 3x 15x 3x  1  5x 15x 
 cos + cos − cos − cos  =  cos − cos
2 
=
2 2 2 2 2  2 2

  5 x 15 x   5 x 15 x 
1   2 + 2   2 − 2 
 −2sin   sin  
= 2  2   2 
    

 5x  5x
= − sin 5x sin  −  = sin 5x sin = R.H.S.
 2 2
π
Example 27 Find the value of tan .
8
π π
Solution Let x = . Then 2 x = .
8 4
2 tan x
Now tan 2 x =
1 − tan 2 x
π
2tan
π 8
tan =
or 4 1 − tan 2 π
8

π 2y
Let y = tan . Then 1 =
8 1− y2

2018-19
80 MATHEMATICS

or y2 + 2y – 1 = 0

−2 ± 2 2
Therefore y= = − 1± 2
2
π π
Since lies in the first quadrant, y = tan is positve. Hence
8 8
π
tan = 2 −1 .
8

3 3π x x x
Example 28 If tan x = , π < x < , find the value of sin , cos and tan .
4 2 2 2 2

3π
Solution Since π < x < , cos x is negative.
2
π x 3π
Also < < .
2 2 4
x x
Therefore, sin is positive and cos is negative.
2 2
9 25
Now sec2 x = 1 + tan2 x = 1 + =
16 16
16 4
Therefore cos2 x = or cos x = – (Why?)
25 5
x 4 9
Now 2 sin 2 = 1 – cos x = 1 + = .
2 5 5
x 9
Therefore sin2 =
2 10
x 3
or sin = (Why?)
2 10
x 4 1
Again 2cos2 = 1+ cos x = 1 − =
2 5 5
x 1
Therefore cos2 =
2 10

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 81

x 1
or cos =− (Why?)
2 10
x
sin  − 10 
x 2 3
Hence tan = = ×  = – 3.
2 x 10  1 
cos
2
Example 29
 π  π 3
Prove that cos2 x + cos2  x +  + cos 2  x −  = .
 3  3 2

Solution We have

 2π   2π 
1 + cos  2 x +  1 + cos  2 x − 
L.H.S. = 1 + cos 2 x +  3 
+  3  .
2 2 2

1  2π   2π  
 3 + cos 2 x + cos  2 x +  + cos  2 x − 
3  
=
2  3  

1 2π 
=  3 + cos 2 x + 2cos 2 x cos 
2 3

1  π 
=  3 + cos 2 x + 2cos 2 x cos  π −  
2  3 

1 π
=  3 + cos 2 x − 2cos 2 x cos 
2 3
1 3
= [3 + cos 2 x − cos 2 x ] = = R.H.S.
2 2

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 3

Prove that:

π 9π 3π 5π
1. 2 cos cos + cos + cos =0
13 13 13 13
2. (sin 3x + sin x) sin x + (cos 3x – cos x) cos x = 0

2018-19
82 MATHEMATICS

x+ y
3. (cos x + cos y)2 + (sin x – sin y)2 = 4 cos2
2
x −y
4. (cos x – cos y)2 + (sin x – sin y)2 = 4 sin2
2
5. sin x + sin 3x + sin 5x + sin 7x = 4 cos x cos 2x sin 4x
(sin 7x + sin 5x ) + (sin 9x + sin 3x )
6. = tan 6x
(cos 7x + cos 5x ) + (cos 9x + cos 3x )
x 3x
7. sin 3x + sin 2x – sin x = 4sin x cos cos
2 2
x x x
Find sin , cos and tan in each of the following :
2 2 2
4 1
8. tan x = − , x in quadrant II 9. cos x = − , x in quadrant III
3 3
1
10. sin x = , x in quadrant II
4

Summary
® If in a circle of radius r, an arc of length l subtends an angle of θ radians, then
l=rθ
π
® Radian measure = × Degree measure
180
180
® Degree measure = π × Radian measure

® cos2 x + sin2 x = 1
® 1 + tan2 x = sec2 x
® 1 + cot2 x = cosec2 x
® cos (2nπ + x) = cos x
® sin (2nπ + x) = sin x
® sin (– x) = – sin x
® cos (– x) = cos x

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 83

® cos (x + y) = cos x cos y – sin x sin y

® cos (x – y) = cos x cos y + sin x sin y
π
® cos ( 2 − x ) = sin x
π
® sin ( 2 − x ) = cos x
® sin (x + y) = sin x cos y + cos x sin y
® sin (x – y) = sin x cos y – cos x sin y
π  π 
® cos  2 + x  = – sin x sin  + x  = cos x
2 
cos (π – x) = – cos x sin (π – x) = sin x
cos (π + x) = – cos x sin (π + x) = – sin x
cos (2π – x) = cos x sin (2π – x) = – sin x

π
® If none of the angles x, y and (x ± y) is an odd multiple of 2
, then

tan x + tan y
tan (x + y) =
1 − tan x tan y
tan x − tan y
® tan (x – y) = 1 + tan x tan y

® If none of the angles x, y and (x ± y) is a multiple of π, then

cot x cot y − 1
cot (x + y) =
cot y + cot x
cot x cot y + 1
® cot (x – y) = cot y − cot x

1 – tan 2 x
® cos 2x = cos2 x – sin2 x = 2cos2 x – 1 = 1 – 2 sin2 x = 1 + tan 2 x

2018-19
84 MATHEMATICS

2 tan x
® sin 2x = 2 sin x cos x =
1 + tan 2 x

2tanx
® tan 2x = 1 − tan 2 x

® sin 3x = 3sin x – 4sin3 x

® cos 3x = 4cos3 x – 3cos x
3tan x − tan 3 x
® tan 3x = 1− 3tan 2 x
x+ y x− y
® (i) cos x + cos y = 2cos cos
2 2
x+ y x− y
(ii) cos x – cos y = – 2sin sin
2 2
x+ y x− y
(iii) sin x + sin y = 2 sin cos
2 2
x+ y x− y
(iv) sin x – sin y = 2cos sin
2 2
® (i) 2cos x cos y = cos ( x + y) + cos ( x – y)
(ii) – 2sin x sin y = cos (x + y) – cos (x – y)
(iii) 2sin x cos y = sin (x + y) + sin (x – y)
(iv) 2 cos x sin y = sin (x + y) – sin (x – y).
® sin x = 0 gives x = nπ, where n ∈ Z.
π
® cos x = 0 gives x = (2n + 1) , where n ∈ Z.
2
® sin x = sin y implies x = nπ + (– 1)n y, where n ∈ Z.
® cos x = cos y, implies x = 2nπ ± y, where n ∈ Z.
® tan x = tan y implies x = nπ + y, where n ∈ Z.

2018-19
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 85

Historical Note
The study of trigonometry was first started in India. The ancient Indian
Mathematicians, Aryabhatta (476), Brahmagupta (598), Bhaskara I (600) and
Bhaskara II (1114) got important results. All this knowledge first went from
India to middle-east and from there to Europe. The Greeks had also started the
study of trigonometry but their approach was so clumsy that when the Indian
approach became known, it was immediately adopted throughout the world.
In India, the predecessor of the modern trigonometric functions, known as
the sine of an angle, and the introduction of the sine function represents the main
contribution of the siddhantas (Sanskrit astronomical works) to the history of
mathematics.
Bhaskara I (about 600) gave formulae to find the values of sine functions
for angles more than 90°. A sixteenth century Malayalam work Yuktibhasa
(period) contains a proof for the expansion of sin (A + B). Exact expression for
sines or cosines of 18°, 36°, 54°, 72°, etc., are given by
Bhaskara II.
The symbols sin–1 x, cos–1 x, etc., for arc sin x, arc cos x, etc., were
suggested by the astronomer Sir John F.W. Hersehel (1813) The names of Thales
(about 600 B.C.) is invariably associated with height and distance problems. He
is credited with the determination of the height of a great pyramid in Egypt by
measuring shadows of the pyramid and an auxiliary staff (or gnomon) of known
height, and comparing the ratios:
H h
= = tan (sun’s altitude)
S s
Thales is also said to have calculated the distance of a ship at sea through
the proportionality of sides of similar triangles. Problems on height and distance
using the similarity property are also found in ancient Indian works.

—v —

2018-19
 Chapter 4
PRINCIPLE OF
MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION

vAnalysis and natural philosophy owe their most important discoveries to

this fruitful means, which is called induction. Newton was indebted
to it for his theorem of the binomial and the principle of
universal gravity. – LAPLACE v

4.1 Introduction
One key basis for mathematical thinking is deductive rea-
soning. An informal, and example of deductive reasoning,
borrowed from the study of logic, is an argument expressed
in three statements:
(a) Socrates is a man.
(b) All men are mortal, therefore,
(c) Socrates is mortal.
If statements (a) and (b) are true, then the truth of (c) is
established. To make this simple mathematical example,
we could write:
(i) Eight is divisible by two.
(ii) Any number divisible by two is an even number, G . Peano
(1858-1932)
therefore,
(iii) Eight is an even number.
Thus, deduction in a nutshell is given a statement to be proven, often called a
conjecture or a theorem in mathematics, valid deductive steps are derived and a
proof may or may not be established, i.e., deduction is the application of a general
case to a particular case.
In contrast to deduction, inductive reasoning depends on working with each case,
and developing a conjecture by observing incidences till we have observed each and
every case. It is frequently used in mathematics and is a key aspect of scientific
reasoning, where collecting and analysing data is the norm. Thus, in simple language,
we can say the word induction means the generalisation from particular cases or facts.

2018-19
 PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION 87

In algebra or in other discipline of mathematics, there are certain results or state-

ments that are formulated in terms of n, where n is a positive integer. To prove such
statements the well-suited principle that is used–based on the specific technique, is
known as the principle of mathematical induction.
4.2 Motivation
In mathematics, we use a form of complete induction called mathematical induction.
To understand the basic principles of mathematical induction, suppose a set of thin
rectangular tiles are placed as shown in Fig 4.1.

Fig 4.1

When the first tile is pushed in the indicated direction, all the tiles will fall. To be
absolutely sure that all the tiles will fall, it is sufficient to know that
(a) The first tile falls, and
(b) In the event that any tile falls its successor necessarily falls.
This is the underlying principle of mathematical induction.
We know, the set of natural numbers N is a special ordered subset of the real
numbers. In fact, N is the smallest subset of R with the following property:
A set S is said to be an inductive set if 1∈ S and x + 1 ∈ S whenever x ∈ S. Since
N is the smallest subset of R which is an inductive set, it follows that any subset of R
that is an inductive set must contain N.
Illustration
Suppose we wish to find the formula for the sum of positive integers 1, 2, 3,...,n, that is,
a formula which will give the value of 1 + 2 + 3 when n = 3, the value 1 + 2 + 3 + 4,
when n = 4 and so on and suppose that in some manner we are led to believe that the
n ( n + 1)
formula 1 + 2 + 3+...+ n = is the correct one.
2
How can this formula actually be proved? We can, of course, verify the statement
for as many positive integral values of n as we like, but this process will not prove the
formula for all values of n. What is needed is some kind of chain reaction which will

2018-19
88 MATHEMATICS

have the effect that once the formula is proved for a particular positive integer the
formula will automatically follow for the next positive integer and the next indefinitely.
Such a reaction may be considered as produced by the method of mathematical induction.
4.3 The Principle of Mathematical Induction
Suppose there is a given statement P(n) involving the natural number n such that
(i) The statement is true for n = 1, i.e., P(1) is true, and
(ii) If the statement is true for n = k (where k is some positive integer), then
the statement is also true for n = k + 1, i.e., truth of P(k) implies the
truth of P (k + 1).
Then, P(n) is true for all natural numbers n.
Property (i) is simply a statement of fact. There may be situations when a
statement is true for all n ≥ 4. In this case, step 1 will start from n = 4 and we shall
verify the result for n = 4, i.e., P(4).
Property (ii) is a conditional property. It does not assert that the given statement
is true for n = k, but only that if it is true for n = k, then it is also true for n = k +1. So,
to prove that the property holds , only prove that conditional proposition:
If the statement is true for n = k, then it is also true for n = k + 1.
This is sometimes referred to as the inductive step. The assumption that the given
statement is true for n = k in this inductive step is called the inductive hypothesis.
For example, frequently in mathematics, a formula will be discovered that appears
to fit a pattern like
1 = 12 =1
4 = 22 = 1 + 3
9 = 32 = 1 + 3 + 5
16 = 42 = 1 + 3 + 5 + 7, etc.
It is worth to be noted that the sum of the first two odd natural numbers is the
square of second natural number, sum of the first three odd natural numbers is the
square of third natural number and so on.Thus, from this pattern it appears that
1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + ... + (2n – 1) = n2 , i.e,
the sum of the first n odd natural numbers is the square of n.
Let us write
P(n): 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + ... + (2n – 1) = n2.
We wish to prove that P(n) is true for all n.
The first step in a proof that uses mathematical induction is to prove that
P (1) is true. This step is called the basic step. Obviously
1 = 12, i.e., P(1) is true.
The next step is called the inductive step. Here, we suppose that P (k) is true for some

2018-19
 PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION 89

positive integer k and we need to prove that P (k + 1) is true. Since P (k) is true, we
have
1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + ... + (2k – 1) = k2 ... (1)
Consider
1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + ... + (2k – 1) + {2(k +1) – 1} ... (2)
= k2 + (2k + 1) = (k + 1)2 [Using (1)]
Therefore, P (k + 1) is true and the inductive proof is now completed.
Hence P(n) is true for all natural numbers n.
Example 1 For all n ≥ 1, prove that
n (n + 1)(2 n + 1)
12 + 22 + 32 + 42 +…+ n2 = .
6
Solution Let the given statement be P(n), i.e.,
n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
P(n) : 12 + 22 + 32 + 42 +…+ n2 =
6
1(1 + 1) (2 × 1 + 1) 1× 2× 3
For n = 1, P(1): 1 = = =1 which is true.
6 6
Assume that P(k) is true for some positive integer k, i.e.,
k (k + 1)(2k + 1)
12 + 22 + 32 + 42 +…+ k2 = ... (1)
6
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is also true. Now, we have
(12 +22 +32 +42 +…+k2 ) + (k + 1) 2
k (k + 1)(2k + 1)
= + ( k + 1)2 [Using (1)]
6
k (k + 1) (2k + 1) + 6(k + 1)2
=
6
(k + 1) (2 k 2 + 7 k + 6)
=
6
(k + 1)( k + 1 + 1){2( k + 1) + 1}
=
6
Thus P(k + 1) is true, whenever P (k) is true.
Hence, from the principle of mathematical induction, the statement P(n) is true
for all natural numbers n.

2018-19
90 MATHEMATICS

Example 2 Prove that 2n > n for all positive integers n.

Solution Let P(n): 2n > n
When n =1, 21 >1. Hence P(1) is true.
Assume that P(k) is true for any positive integer k, i.e.,
2k > k ... (1)
We shall now prove that P(k +1) is true whenever P(k) is true.
Multiplying both sides of (1) by 2, we get
2. 2k > 2k
k+1
i.e., 2 > 2k = k + k > k + 1
Therefore, P(k + 1) is true when P(k) is true. Hence, by principle of mathematical
induction, P(n) is true for every positive integer n.
Example 3 For all n ≥ 1, prove that
1 1 1 1 n
+ + + ... + =
1.2 2.3 3.4 n(n + 1) n + 1 .

Solution We can write

1 1 1 1 n
P(n): + + + ... + =
1.2 2.3 3.4 n( n + 1) n + 1

1 1 1
We note that P(1): = = , which is true. Thus, P(n) is true for n = 1.
1.2 2 1 +1
Assume that P(k) is true for some natural number k,
1 1 1 1 k
i.e., + + + ... + = ... (1)
1.2 2.3 3.4 k ( k + 1) k + 1
We need to prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. We have
1 1 1 1 1
+ + + ... + +
1.2 2.3 3.4 k (k + 1) ( k + 1) (k + 2)

 1 1 1 1  1
=  + + + ... + +
 1.2 2.3 3.4 k ( k + 1)  ( k + 1) ( k + 2)

k 1
= + [Using (1)]
k + 1 (k + 1)( k + 2)

2018-19
 PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION 91

k (k + 2) + 1 (k 2 + 2 k + 1) ( k + 1)2 k +1
=
k +1
= = = =
(k + 1)(k + 2) (k + 1) ( k + 2) ( k + 1) ( k + 2 ) k + 2 ( k + 1) + 1
Thus P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Hence, by the principle of mathematical
induction, P(n) is true for all natural numbers.
Example 4 For every positive integer n, prove that 7n – 3n is divisible by 4.
Solution We can write
P(n) : 7n – 3n is divisible by 4.
We note that
P(1): 71 – 31 = 4 which is divisible by 4. Thus P(n) is true for n = 1
Let P(k) be true for some natural number k,
i.e., P(k) : 7k – 3k is divisible by 4.
We can write 7k – 3k = 4d, where d ∈ N.
Now, we wish to prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true.
Now 7(k + 1) – 3(k + 1) = 7(k + 1) – 7.3k + 7.3k – 3(k + 1)
= 7(7k – 3k) + (7 – 3)3k = 7(4d) + (7 – 3)3k
= 7(4d) + 4.3k = 4(7d + 3k)
From the last line, we see that 7(k + 1) – 3(k + 1) is divisible by 4. Thus, P(k + 1) is true
when P(k) is true. Therefore, by principle of mathematical induction the statement is
true for every positive integer n.
Example 5 Prove that (1 + x)n ≥ (1 + nx), for all natural number n, where x > – 1.
Solution Let P(n) be the given statement,
i.e., P(n): (1 + x)n ≥ (1 + nx), for x > – 1.
We note that P(n) is true when n = 1, since ( 1+x) ≥ (1 + x) for x > –1
Assume that
P(k): (1 + x)k ≥ (1 + kx), x > – 1 is true. ... (1)
We want to prove that P(k + 1) is true for x > –1 whenever P(k) is true. ... (2)
Consider the identity
(1 + x)k + 1 = (1 + x)k (1 + x)
Given that x > –1, so (1+x) > 0.
Therefore , by using (1 + x)k ≥ (1 + kx), we have
(1 + x) k + 1 ≥ (1 + kx)(1 + x)
i.e. (1 + x)k + 1 ≥ (1 + x + kx + kx2). ... (3)

2018-19
92 MATHEMATICS

Here k is a natural number and x2 ≥ 0 so that kx2 ≥ 0. Therefore

(1 + x + kx + kx2) ≥ (1 + x + kx),
and so we obtain
(1 + x)k + 1 ≥ (1 + x + kx)
i.e. (1 + x)k + 1 ≥ [1 + (1 + k)x]
Thus, the statement in (2) is established. Hence, by the principle of mathematical
induction, P(n) is true for all natural numbers.
Example 6 Prove that
2.7n + 3.5n – 5 is divisible by 24, for all n ∈ N.

Solution Let the statement P(n) be defined as

P(n) : 2.7n + 3.5n – 5 is divisible by 24.
We note that P(n) is true for n = 1, since 2.7 + 3.5 – 5 = 24, which is divisible by 24.
Assume that P(k) is true
i.e. 2.7k + 3.5k – 5 = 24q, when q ∈ N ... (1)
Now, we wish to prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true.
We have
2.7k+1 + 3.5k+1 – 5 = 2.7k . 71 + 3.5k . 51 – 5
= 7 [2.7k + 3.5k – 5 – 3.5k + 5] + 3.5k . 5 – 5
= 7 [24q – 3.5k + 5] + 15.5k –5
= 7 × 24q – 21.5k + 35 + 15.5k – 5
= 7 × 24q – 6.5k + 30
= 7 × 24q – 6 (5k – 5)
= 7 × 24q – 6 (4p) [(5k – 5) is a multiple of 4 (why?)]
= 7 × 24q – 24p
= 24 (7q – p)
= 24 × r; r = 7q – p, is some natural number. ... (2)
The expression on the R.H.S. of (1) is divisible by 24. Thus P(k + 1) is true whenever
P(k) is true.
Hence, by principle of mathematical induction, P(n) is true for all n ∈ N.

2018-19
 PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION 93

Example 7 Prove that

n3
12 + 22 + ... + n2 > ,n∈N
3
Solution Let P(n) be the given statement.
n3
i.e., P(n) : 12 + 22 + ... + n2 > , n∈N
3
13
We note that P(n) is true for n = 1 since 1 >
2
3
Assume that P(k) is true
k3
i.e. P(k) : 12 + 22 + ... + k2 > ...(1)
3
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true.
We have 12 + 22 + 32 + ... + k2 + (k + 1)2
k3
( )
= 12 + 22 + ... + k 2 + ( k + 1) >
2

3
+ ( k + 1)
2
[by (1)]

1 3
= [k + 3k2 + 6k + 3]
3
1 1
= [(k + 1)3 + 3k + 2] > (k + 1)3
3 3
Therefore, P(k + 1) is also true whenever P(k) is true. Hence, by mathematical induction
P(n) is true for all n ∈ N.
Example 8 Prove the rule of exponents (ab)n = anbn
by using principle of mathematical induction for every natural number.
Solution Let P(n) be the given statement
i.e. P(n) : (ab)n = anbn.
We note that P(n) is true for n = 1 since (ab)1 = a1b1.
Let P(k) be true, i.e.,
(ab)k = akbk ... (1)
We shall now prove that P(k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true.
Now, we have
(ab)k + 1 = (ab)k (ab)

2018-19
94 MATHEMATICS

= (ak bk) (ab) [by (1)]

= (ak . a1) (bk . b1) = ak+1 . bk+1
Therefore, P(k + 1) is also true whenever P(k) is true. Hence, by principle of math-
ematical induction, P(n) is true for all n ∈ N.

EXERCISE 4.1
Prove the following by using the principle of mathematical induction for all n ∈ N:

(3n − 1)
1. 1 + 3 + 32 + ... + 3n – 1 = .
2
2
 n(n + 1) 
2. 1 + 2 + 3 + … +n = 
3 3 3 3
 .
 2 
1 1 1 2n
3. 1+ (1 + 2) + (1 + 2 + 3) + ...+ (1 + 2 + 3 + ...n) = (n + 1) .

n( n + 1) (n + 2) ( n + 3)
4. 1.2.3 + 2.3.4 +…+ n(n+1) (n+2) = .
4
(2n − 1)3n +1 + 3
5. 1.3 + 2.32 + 3.33 +…+ n.3n = .
4

 n( n + 1) (n + 2) 
6. 1.2 + 2.3 + 3.4 +…+ n.(n+1) =   .
 3

n(4n 2 + 6n − 1)
7. 1.3 + 3.5 + 5.7 +…+ (2n–1) (2n+1) = .
3
8. 1.2 + 2.22 + 3.23 + ...+n.2n = (n–1) 2n + 1 + 2.
1 1 1 1 1
9. + + + ... + n = 1 − n .
2 4 8 2 2
1 1 1 1 n
10. + + + ... + =
2.5 5.8 8.11 (3n − 1)(3n + 2) (6n + 4) .

1 1 1 1 n(n + 3)
11. + + + ... + =
1.2.3 2.3.4 3.4.5 n( n + 1) ( n + 2) 4( n + 1) ( n + 2) .

2018-19
 PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION 95

a (r n − 1)
12. a + ar + ar2 +…+ arn-1 = .
r −1

 3  5  7   (2n + 1) 
13. 1 +  1 +  1 +  ...  1 +  = ( n + 1) .
2

 1  4  9  n2 

 1  1   1   1 
14. 1 +  1 +  1 +  ...1 +  = (n + 1) .
 1  2   3   n 
n(2n − 1)(2n + 1)
15. 12 + 32 + 52 + …+ (2n–1)2 = .
3
1 1 1 1 n
16. 1.4 + 4.7 + 7.10 + ... + (3n − 2)(3n + 1) = (3n + 1) .

1 1 1 1 n
17. + + + ... + =
3.5 5.7 7.9 (2n + 1)(2n + 3) 3(2n + 3) .

1
18. 1 + 2 + 3 +…+ n < (2n + 1)2.
8
19. n (n + 1) (n + 5) is a multiple of 3.
20. 102n – 1 + 1 is divisible by 11.
21. x2n – y2n is divisible by x + y.
22. 32n+2 – 8n – 9 is divisible by 8.
23. 41n – 14n is a multiple of 27.
24. (2n + 7) < (n + 3)2.

Summary
® One key basis for mathematical thinking is deductive reasoning. In contrast to
deduction, inductive reasoning depends on working with different cases and
developing a conjecture by observing incidences till we have observed each
and every case. Thus, in simple language we can say the word ‘induction’
means the generalisation from particular cases or facts.
® The principle of mathematical induction is one such tool which can be used to
prove a wide variety of mathematical statements. Each such statement is
assumed as P(n) associated with positive integer n, for which the correctness

2018-19
96 MATHEMATICS

for the case n = 1 is examined. Then assuming the truth of P(k) for some
positive integer k, the truth of P (k+1) is established.

Historical Note
Unlike other concepts and methods, proof by mathematical induction is not
the invention of a particular individual at a fixed moment. It is said that the principle
of mathematical induction was known by the Pythagoreans.
The French mathematician Blaise Pascal is credited with the origin of the
principle of mathematical induction.
The name induction was used by the English mathematician John Wallis.
Later the principle was employed to provide a proof of the binomial theorem.
De Morgan contributed many accomplishments in the field of mathematics
on many different subjects. He was the first person to define and name
“mathematical induction” and developed De Morgan’s rule to determine the
convergence of a mathematical series.
G. Peano undertook the task of deducing the properties of natural numbers
from a set of explicitly stated assumptions, now known as Peano’s axioms.The
principle of mathematical induction is a restatement of one of the Peano’s axioms.

—v —

2018-19
 Chapter 5

COMPLEX NUMBERS AND

QUADRATIC EQUATIONS

vMathematics is the Queen of Sciences and Arithmetic is the Queen of

Mathematics. – GAUSS v

5.1 Introduction
In earlier classes, we have studied linear equations in one
and two variables and quadratic equations in one variable.
We have seen that the equation x2 + 1 = 0 has no real
solution as x2 + 1 = 0 gives x2 = – 1 and square of every
real number is non-negative. So, we need to extend the
real number system to a larger system so that we can
find the solution of the equation x2 = – 1. In fact, the main
objective is to solve the equation ax2 + bx + c = 0, where
D = b2 – 4ac < 0, which is not possible in the system of
real numbers.
W. R. Hamilton
5.2 Complex Numbers (1805-1865)

Let us denote −1 by the symbol i. Then, we have i = −1 . This means that i is a

2

solution of the equation x2 + 1 = 0.

A number of the form a + ib, where a and b are real numbers, is defined to be a
 −1 
complex number. For example, 2 + i3, (– 1) + i 3 , 4 + i   are complex numbers.
 11 
For the complex number z = a + ib, a is called the real part, denoted by Re z and
b is called the imaginary part denoted by Im z of the complex number z. For example,
if z = 2 + i5, then Re z = 2 and Im z = 5.
Two complex numbers z1 = a + ib and z2 = c + id are equal if a = c and b = d.

2018-19
98 MATHEMATICS

Example 1 If 4x + i(3x – y) = 3 + i (– 6), where x and y are real numbers, then find
the values of x and y.
Solution We have
4x + i (3x – y) = 3 + i (–6) ... (1)
Equating the real and the imaginary parts of (1), we get
4x = 3, 3x – y = – 6,
3 33
which, on solving simultaneously, give x = and y = .
4 4
5.3 Algebra of Complex Numbers
In this Section, we shall develop the algebra of complex numbers.
5.3.1 Addition of two complex numbers Let z1 = a + ib and z2 = c + id be any two
complex numbers. Then, the sum z1 + z2 is defined as follows:
z1 + z2 = (a + c) + i (b + d), which is again a complex number.
For example, (2 + i3) + (– 6 +i5) = (2 – 6) + i (3 + 5) = – 4 + i 8
The addition of complex numbers satisfy the following properties:
(i) The closure law The sum of two complex numbers is a complex
number, i.e., z1 + z2 is a complex number for all complex numbers
z1 and z2.
(ii) The commutative law For any two complex numbers z 1 and z 2 ,
z1 + z2 = z2 + z1
(iii) The associative law For any three complex numbers z 1, z 2, z 3 ,
(z1 + z2) + z3 = z1 + (z2 + z3).
(iv) The existence of additive identity There exists the complex number
0 + i 0 (denoted as 0), called the additive identity or the zero complex
number, such that, for every complex number z, z + 0 = z.
(v) The existence of additive inverse To every complex number
z = a + ib, we have the complex number – a + i(– b) (denoted as – z),
called the additive inverse or negative of z. We observe that z + (–z) = 0
(the additive identity).
5.3.2 Difference of two complex numbers Given any two complex numbers z1 and
z2, the difference z1 – z2 is defined as follows:
z1 – z2 = z1 + (– z2).
For example, (6 + 3i) – (2 – i) = (6 + 3i) + (– 2 + i ) = 4 + 4i
and (2 – i) – (6 + 3i) = (2 – i) + ( – 6 – 3i) = – 4 – 4i

2018-19
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 99

5.3.3 Multiplication of two complex numbers Let z1 = a + ib and z2 = c + id be any

two complex numbers. Then, the product z1 z2 is defined as follows:
z1 z2 = (ac – bd) + i(ad + bc)
For example, (3 + i5) (2 + i6) = (3 × 2 – 5 × 6) + i(3 × 6 + 5 × 2) = – 24 + i28
The multiplication of complex numbers possesses the following properties, which
we state without proofs.
(i) The closure law The product of two complex numbers is a complex number,
the product z1 z2 is a complex number for all complex numbers z1 and z2.
(ii) The commutative law For any two complex numbers z1 and z2,
z1 z2 = z2 z1 .
(iii) The associative law For any three complex numbers z 1 , z 2 , z 3 ,
(z1 z2) z3 = z1 (z2 z3).
(iv) The existence of multiplicative identity There exists the complex number
1 + i 0 (denoted as 1), called the multiplicative identity such that z.1 = z,
for every complex number z.
(v) The existence of multiplicative inverse For every non-zero complex
number z = a + ib or a + bi(a ≠ 0, b ≠ 0), we have the complex number
a –b 1
+i 2 2 (denoted by or z–1 ), called the multiplicative inverse
a +b
2 2
a +b z
of z such that
1
z. = 1 (the multiplicative identity).
z
(vi) The distributive law For any three complex numbers z1, z2, z3,
(a) z1 (z2 + z3) = z1 z2 + z1 z3
(b) (z1 + z2) z3 = z1 z3 + z2 z3
5.3.4 Division of two complex numbers Given any two complex numbers z1 and z2,
z1
where z2 ≠ 0 , the quotient z is defined by
2

z1 1
= z1
z2 z2
For example, let z1 = 6 + 3i and z2 = 2 – i

z1  1   2 − ( −1) 
=  (6 + 3i) ×  + 
2−i (
Then  = 6 + 3i )  22 + ( −1)
i 2 
z2  
2
2 2
+ ( −1) 

2018-19
100 MATHEMATICS

 2+i  1 1
= ( 6 + 3i )  = 12 − 3 + i (6 + 6 ) = (9 + 12i )
 5  5 5
5.3.5 Power of i we know that

( )
2
i 3 = i 2 i = ( −1) i = −i , = ( −1) = 1
2
i4 = i2

( ) i = (−1) i = i , ( )
2 3
= ( − 1) = −1 , etc.
2 3
i5 = i 2 i6 = i2

1 i i 1 1
Also, we have i −1 = × = = − i, i− 2 = = = − 1,
i i −1 i 2
−1

1 1 i i 1 1
i −3 =
= × = = i, i −4 = 4 = = 1
i 3
−i i 1 i 1
4k 4k + 1 4k + 2 4k + 3
In general, for any integer k, i = 1, i = i, i = –1, i =–i
5.3.6 The square roots of a negative real number
Note that i2 = –1 and ( – i)2 = i2 = – 1
Therefore, the square roots of – 1 are i, – i. However, by the symbol −1 , we would
mean i only.
Now, we can see that i and –i both are the solutions of the equation x2 + 1 = 0 or
2
x = –1.

( 3 i) = ( 3)
2 2
Similarly i2 = 3 (– 1) = – 3

(− 3 i) = (− 3 )
2 2
i2 = – 3

Therefore, the square roots of –3 are 3 i and − 3 i .

Again, the symbol −3 is meant to represent 3 i only, i.e., −3 = 3i .
Generally, if a is a positive real number, −a = a −1 = a i,
We already know that a × b = ab for all positive real number a and b. This
result also holds true when either a > 0, b < 0 or a < 0, b > 0. What if a < 0, b < 0?
Let us examine.
Note that

2018-19
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 101

i 2 = −1 −1 = ( −1) ( −1) (by assuming a× b = ab for all real numbers)

2
= 1 = 1, which is a contradiction to the fact that i = −1 .
Therefore, a × b ≠ ab if both a and b are negative real numbers.
Further, if any of a and b is zero, then, clearly, a × b = ab = 0.
5.3.7 Identities We prove the following identity

( z1 + z2 )
2
= z12 + z22 + 2 z1 z2 , for all complex numbers z1 and z2.

Proof We have, (z1 + z2)2 = (z1 + z2) (z1 + z2),

= (z1 + z2) z1 + (z1 + z2) z2 (Distributive law)
= z12 + z2 z1 + z1 z2 + z22 (Distributive law)

= z12 + z1 z2 + z1 z2 + z22 (Commutative law of multiplication)

= z12 + 2 z1 z2 + z22
Similarly, we can prove the following identities:

( z1 − z2 )
2
(i) = z12 − 2 z1 z2 + z22

( z1 + z2 )
3
(ii) = z13 + 3 z12 z2 + 3z1 z22 + z23

( z1 − z2 )
3
(iii) = z13 − 3z12 z2 + 3 z1 z22 − z23

(iv) z12 – z 22 = ( z1 + z 2 ) ( z1 – z 2 )
In fact, many other identities which are true for all real numbers, can be proved
to be true for all complex numbers.
Example 2 Express the following in the form of a + bi:
3
1   1 
(i) ( −5i )  i  (ii) ( −i ) ( 2i ) − i
8   8 

−5 2 −5
( −5i ) 
1  5 5
Solution (i) i = i = ( −1) = = + i0
8  8 8 8 8
3
 1  1 1 2
( ) 1
2
(ii) ( −i ) ( 2i )  − i  = 2 × × i5 = i i= i.
 8  8× 8×8 256 256

2018-19
102 MATHEMATICS

Example 3 Express (5 – 3i)3 in the form a + ib.

Solution We have, (5 – 3i)3 = 53 – 3 × 52 × (3i) + 3 × 5 (3i)2 – (3i)3
= 125 – 225i – 135 + 27i = – 10 – 198i.

( )( )
Example 4 Express − 3 + −2 2 3 − i in the form of a + ib

(
Solution We have, − 3 + −2 ) (2 3 −i ) = (− 3 + 2 i ) (2 3 − i )
= −6 + 3i + 2 6i − 2 i = ( −6 + 2 ) + 3 (1 + 2 2 ) i
2

5.4 The Modulus and the Conjugate of a Complex Number

Let z = a + ib be a complex number. Then, the modulus of z, denoted by | z |, is defined
to be the non-negative real number a 2 + b 2 , i.e., | z | = a 2 + b 2 and the conjugate
of z, denoted as z , is the complex number a – ib, i.e., z = a – ib.

For example, 3 + i = 32 + 12 = 10 , 2 − 5i = 22 + ( − 5)2 = 29 ,

and 3 + i = 3 − i , 2 − 5 i = 2 + 5 i , −3i − 5 = 3i – 5
Observe that the multiplicative inverse of the non-zero complex number z is
given by
1 a −b a − ib z
z–1 = = 2 +i 2 2 = =
a + ib a +b 2
a +b a 2 + b2 z
2

2
or z z= z
Furthermore, the following results can easily be derived.
For any two compex numbers z1 and z2 , we have

z1 z
(i) z1 z2 = z1 z2 (ii) = 1 provided z ≠ 0
z2 z2 2

 z1  z1
(iii) z1 z2 = z1 z2 (iv) z1 ± z2 = z1 ± z2 (v)  z  = z provided z2 ≠ 0.
 2 2

2018-19
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 103

Example 5 Find the multiplicative inverse of 2 – 3i.

Solution Let z = 2 – 3i
2
Then z = 2 + 3i and z = 22 + ( − 3) 2 = 13
Therefore, the multiplicative inverse of 2 − 3i is given by
z 2 + 3i 2 3
z–1 = 2
= = + i
z 13 13 13

The above working can be reproduced in the following manner also,

1 2 + 3i
z–1 = =
2 − 3i (2 − 3i )(2 + 3i)

2 + 3i 2 + 3i 2 3
= = = + i
2 − (3i)
2 2
13 13 13
Example 6 Express the following in the form a + ib
5 + 2i
(i) (ii) i–35
1 − 2i

5 + 2i 5 + 2i 1 + 2i 5 + 5 2i + 2i − 2
Solution (i) We have, = × =
( 2i )
2
1 − 2i 1 − 2i 1 + 2i 1−

3 + 6 2i 3(1 + 2 2i )
= = = 1 + 2 2i .
1+ 2 3

−35 1 1 1 i i
(ii) i = = = × = 2 =i
(i ) −i i −i
35 17
i 2
i

EXERCISE 5.1
Express each of the complex number given in the Exercises 1 to 10 in the
form a + ib.

(5i )  −
3 
1. i 2. i 9 + i 19 3. i −39
 5 

2018-19
104 MATHEMATICS

4. 3(7 + i7) + i (7 + i7) 5. (1 – i) – ( –1 + i6)

1 2  5  1 7   1   4 
6.  +i  −4+i  7.  3 + i 3  +  4 + i 3   −  − 3 + i 
5 5  2      
3 3
1   1 
8. (1 – i) 4
9.  + 3i  10.  −2 − i 
 3   3 
Find the multiplicative inverse of each of the complex numbers given in the
Exercises 11 to 13.
11. 4 – 3i 12.5 + 3i 13. – i
14. Express the following expression in the form of a + ib :

(3 + i 5 ) (3 − i 5 )
( 3 + 2 i) − ( 3 − i 2 )
5.5 Argand Plane and Polar Representation
We already know that corresponding to
each ordered pair of real numbers
(x, y), we get a unique point in the XY-
plane and vice-versa with reference to a
set of mutually perpendicular lines known
as the x-axis and the y-axis. The complex
number x + iy which corresponds to the
ordered pair (x, y) can be represented
geometrically as the unique point P(x, y)
in the XY-plane and vice-versa.
Some complex numbers such as
2 + 4i, – 2 + 3i, 0 + 1i, 2 + 0i, – 5 –2i and
Fig 5.1
1 – 2i which correspond to the ordered
pairs (2, 4), ( – 2, 3), (0, 1), (2, 0), ( –5, –2), and (1, – 2), respectively, have been
represented geometrically by the points A, B, C, D, E, and F, respectively in
the Fig 5.1.
The plane having a complex number assigned to each of its point is called the
complex plane or the Argand plane.

2018-19
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 105

Obviously, in the Argand plane, the modulus of the complex number

x + iy = x 2 + y 2 is the distance between the point P(x, y) and the origin O (0, 0)
(Fig 5.2). The points on the x-axis corresponds to the complex numbers of the form
a + i 0 and the points on the y-axis corresponds to the complex numbers of the form

Fig 5.2

0 + i b. The x-axis and y-axis in the Argand plane are called, respectively, the real axis
and the imaginary axis.
The representation of a complex number z = x + iy and its conjugate
z = x – iy in the Argand plane are, respectively, the points P (x, y) and Q (x, – y).
Geometrically, the point (x, – y) is the mirror image of the point (x, y) on the real
axis (Fig 5.3).

Fig 5.3

2018-19
106 MATHEMATICS

5.5.1 Polar representation of a complex

number Let the point P represent the non-
zero complex number z = x + iy. Let the
directed line segment OP be of length r and
θ be the angle which OP makes with the
positive direction of x-axis (Fig 5.4).
We may note that the point P is
uniquely determined by the ordered pair of
real numbers (r, θ), called the polar
coordinates of the point P. We consider
the origin as the pole and the positive
direction of the x axis as the initial line. Fig 5.4
We have, x = r cos θ, y = r sin θ and therefore, z = r (cos θ + i sin θ). The latter
is said to be the polar form of the complex number. Here r = x 2 + y 2 = z is the
modulus of z and θ is called the argument (or amplitude) of z which is denoted by arg z.
For any complex number z ≠ 0, there corresponds only one value of θ in
0 ≤ θ < 2π. However, any other interval of length 2π, for example – π < θ ≤ π, can be
such an interval.We shall take the value of θ such that – π < θ ≤ π, called principal
argument of z and is denoted by arg z, unless specified otherwise. (Figs. 5.5 and 5.6)

Fig 5.5 ( 0 ≤ θ < 2π )

Fig 5.6 (– π < θ ≤ π )

2018-19
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 107

Example 7 Represent the complex number z = 1 + i 3 in the polar form.

Solution Let 1 = r cos θ, 3 = r sin θ
By squaring and adding, we get

(
r 2 cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ = 4)
i.e., r = 4 = 2 (conventionally, r >0)
1 3 π
Therefore, cos θ = , sin θ = , which gives θ =
2 2 3
Fig 5.7
 π π
Therefore, required polar form is z = 2  cos + i sin 
 3 3
The complex number z = 1 + i 3 is represented as shown in Fig 5.7.
−16
Example 8 Convert the complex number into polar form.
1+ i 3

−16 −16 1− i 3
Solution The given complex number = ×
1+ i 3 1+ i 3 1− i 3

(
–16 1 – i 3 ) = –16 (1 – i 3 ) – 4 1 – i 3 = – 4 + i 4
= = ( ) 3 (Fig 5.8).
1 – (i 3 )
2
1+ 3

Let – 4 = r cos θ, 4 3 = r sin θ

By squaring and adding, we get

(
16 + 48 = r 2 cos 2θ + sin 2θ )
2
which gives r = 64, i.e., r = 8
1 3
Hence cos θ = − , sin θ =
2 2 Fig 5.8
π 2π
θ=π– =
3 3

 2π 2π 
Thus, the required polar form is 8  cos + i sin 
 3 3 

2018-19
108 MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE 5.2
Find the modulus and the arguments of each of the complex numbers in
Exercises 1 to 2.
1. z = – 1 – i 3 2. z = – 3 + i
Convert each of the complex numbers given in Exercises 3 to 8 in the polar form:
3. 1 – i 4. – 1 + i 5. – 1 – i
6. – 3 7. 3 +i 8. i

5.6 Quadratic Equations

We are already familiar with the quadratic equations and have solved them in the set
of real numbers in the cases where discriminant is non-negative, i.e., ≥ 0,
Let us consider the following quadratic equation:
ax2 + bx + c = 0 with real coefficients a, b, c and a ≠ 0.
Also, let us assume that the b2 – 4ac < 0.
Now, we know that we can find the square root of negative real numbers in the
set of complex numbers. Therefore, the solutions to the above equation are available in
the set of complex numbers which are given by

−b ± b 2 − 4ac −b ± 4ac − b 2 i
x= =
2a 2a

A Note At this point of time, some would be interested to know as to how many
roots does an equation have? In this regard, the following theorem known as the
Fundamental theorem of Algebra is stated below (without proof).
“A polynomial equation has at least one root.”
As a consequence of this theorem, the following result, which is of immense
importance, is arrived at:
“A polynomial equation of degree n has n roots.”

Example 9 Solve x2 + 2 = 0
Solution We have, x2 + 2 = 0
or x2 = – 2 i.e., x = ± −2 = ± 2 i

Example 10 Solve x2 + x + 1= 0
Solution Here, b2 – 4ac = 12 – 4 × 1 × 1 = 1 – 4 = – 3

2018-19
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 109

−1 ± −3 −1 ± 3i
Therefore, the solutions are given by x = =
2 ×1 2
Example 11 Solve 5x2 + x + 5 = 0
Solution Here, the discriminant of the equation is
12 − 4 × 5 × 5 = 1 – 20 = – 19
Therefore, the solutions are

−1 ± −19 −1 ± 19i
= .
2 5 2 5

EXERCISE 5.3
Solve each of the following equations:
1. x2 + 3 = 0 2. 2x2 + x + 1 = 0 3. x2 + 3x + 9 = 0
4. – x2 + x – 2 = 0 5. x2 + 3x + 5 = 0 6. x2 – x + 2 = 0
7. 2 x2 + x + 2 = 0 8. 3x2 − 2 x + 3 3 = 0
1 x
9. x2 + x + =0 10. x2 + +1 = 0
2 2

Miscellaneous Examples

(3 − 2i) (2 + 3i )
Example 12 Find the conjugate of
(1 + 2i ) (2 − i ) .

(3 − 2i ) (2 + 3i )
Solution We have , (1 + 2i) (2 − i )

6 + 9i − 4i + 6 12 + 5i 4 − 3i
= = ×
2 − i + 4i + 2 4 + 3i 4 − 3i

48 − 36i + 20i + 15 63 −16i 63 16

= = = − i
16 + 9 25 25 25

(3 − 2i ) (2 + 3i ) 63 16
Therefore, conjugate of is + i
(1 + 2i) (2 − i ) 25 25 .

2018-19
110 MATHEMATICS

Example 13 Find the modulus and argument of the complex numbers:

1+ i 1
(i) , (ii)
1− i 1+ i

1+ i 1 + i 1+ i 1 − 1+ 2i
Solution (i) We have, = × = =i= 0 + i
1 − i 1− i 1+ i 1+ 1
Now, let us put 0 = r cos θ, 1 = r sin θ
2
Squaring and adding, r = 1 i.e., r = 1 so that
cos θ = 0, sin θ = 1
π
Therefore, θ =
2
1+ i π
Hence, the modulus of is 1 and the argument is .
1− i 2
1 1− i 1− i 1 i
(ii) We have = = = −
1 + i (1 + i) (1 − i) 1 + 1 2 2

1 1
Let = r cos θ, – = r sin θ
2 2
1 1 −1
Proceeding as in part (i) above, we get r = ; cosθ = , sin θ =
2 2 2

−π
Therefore θ =
4

1 1 −π
Hence, the modulus of is , argument is .
1+ i 2 4

a + ib
2 2
Example 14 If x + iy =
a − ib , prove that x + y = 1.

Solution We have,
(a + ib) (a + ib) a 2 − b 2 + 2abi a2 − b2 2ab
x + iy = ( a − ib) ( a + ib) = = 2 2 + 2 2i
a +b
2 2
a +b a +b

2018-19
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 111

a 2 − b2 2ab
So that, x – iy = − 2 2i
a +b a +b
2 2

Therefore,

( a 2 − b 2 )2 4a 2b 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) 2
2 2
x + y = (x + iy) (x – iy) = + = 2 2 2 =1
(a 2 + b 2 ) 2 (a 2 + b 2 ) 2 (a + b )
Example 15 Find real θ such that
3 + 2i sinθ
is purely real.
1− 2i sinθ

Solution We have,
3 + 2i sinθ (3 + 2i sinθ) (1 + 2i sinθ)
=
1 − 2i sinθ (1 − 2i sinθ) (1 + 2i sinθ)

3+ 6i sinθ + 2i sinθ – 4sin 2θ 3 − 4sin 2θ 8i sinθ

= = +
1+ 4sin 2θ 1 + 4sin 2 θ 1 + 4sin 2θ
We are given the complex number to be real. Therefore
8sinθ
= 0, i.e., sin θ = 0
1 + 4sin 2θ
Thus θ = nπ, n ∈ Z.
i −1
Example 16 Convert the complex number z = π π in the polar form.
cos + i sin
3 3

i −1
Solution We have, z =
1 3
+ i
2 2

= × =
(
2(i − 1) 1 − 3i 2 i + 3 − 1 + 3i
=
) 3 −1
+
3 +1
i
1 + 3i 1 − 3i 1+ 3 2 2

3 −1 3 +1
Now, put = r cos θ , = r sin θ
2 2

2018-19
112 MATHEMATICS

Squaring and adding, we obtain

2  ( 3) + 1
2 2 2
 3 −1  3 +1 
r =  +  = 2× 4 = 2
2
   = 
 2   2  4 4

3 −1 3 +1
Hence, r = 2 which gives cosθ = , sinθ =
2 2 2 2

π π 5π
Therefore, θ = + = (Why?)
4 6 12
Hence, the polar form is
 5π 5π 
2  cos + i sin 
 12 12 

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 5

3
 18  1  25 
1. Evaluate:  i +    .
  i  
2. For any two complex numbers z1 and z2, prove that
Re (z1 z2) = Re z1 Re z2 – Imz1 Imz2.
 1 2   3 − 4i 
3. Reduce  −   to the standard form .
 1 − 4i 1 + i   5 + i 

a − ib a2 + b2
( )
2
4. If x − iy = prove that x + y = 2 2 .
2 2
c − id c +d
5. Convert the following in the polar form:
1 + 7i 1 + 3i
(i)
(2 − i ) 2 , (ii)
1 – 2i
Solve each of the equation in Exercises 6 to 9.
20 3
6. 3 x − 4 x + =0 x2 − 2 x + =0
2
7.
3 2
8. 27 x 2 − 10 x + 1 = 0

2018-19
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 113

9. 21x 2 − 28 x + 10 = 0

z1 + z2 +1
10. If z1 = 2 – i, z2 = 1 + i, find z – z +1 .
1 2

( x 2 + 1) 2
( x + i )2
11. If a + ib =
2 x2 + 1 (
, prove that a2 + b2 = 2 x 2 + 1 2 .
)
12. Let z1 = 2 – i, z2 = –2 + i. Find

 z1 z2   1 
(i) Re  z  , (ii) Im  .
 1   z1 z1 
1+ 2i
13. Find the modulus and argument of the complex number .
1 − 3i
14. Find the real numbers x and y if (x – iy) (3 + 5i) is the conjugate of –6 – 24i.
1+ i 1− i
15. Find the modulus of −
1 − i 1+ i .
u v
16. If (x + iy)3 = u + iv, then show that + = 4( x 2 – y 2 ) .
x y

β–α
17. If α and β are different complex numbers with β = 1 , then find 1 – α β .

x
18. Find the number of non-zero integral solutions of the equation 1 – i = 2x .
19. If (a + ib) (c + id) (e + if) (g + ih) = A + iB, then show that
(a2 + b2) (c2 + d2) (e2 + f 2) (g2 + h2) = A2 + B2

m
1+ i 
20. If   = 1 , then find the least positive integral value of m.
1 – i 

2018-19
114 MATHEMATICS

Summary

® A number of the form a + ib, where a and b are real numbers, is called a
complex number, a is called the real part and b is called the imaginary part
of the complex number.
® Let z1 = a + ib and z2 = c + id. Then
(i) z1 + z2 = (a + c) + i (b + d)
(ii) z1 z2 = (ac – bd) + i (ad + bc)
® For any non-zero complex number z = a + ib (a ≠ 0, b ≠ 0), there exists the
a −b 1
complex number +i 2 2 , denoted by or z –1, called the
a +b
2 2
a +b z

 a2 −b 
multiplicative inverse of z such that (a + ib)  2 +i 2  = 1 + i0 =1
 a +b a + b2 
2

® For any integer k, i4k = 1, i4k + 1 = i, i4k + 2 = – 1, i4k + 3 = – i

® The conjugate of the complex number z = a + ib, denoted by z , is given by
z = a – ib.
® The polar form of the complex number z = x + iy is r (cosθ + i sinθ), where
x y
r= x 2 + y 2 (the modulus of z) and cosθ = , sinθ = . (θ is known as the
r r
argument of z. The value of θ, such that – π < θ ≤ π, is called the principal
argument of z.
® A polynomial equation of n degree has n roots.
® The solutions of the quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0, where a, b, c ∈ R,
−b ± 4ac − b 2 i
a ≠ 0, b2 – 4ac < 0, are given by x = .
2a

2018-19
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 115

Historical Note
The fact that square root of a negative number does not exist in the real number
system was recognised by the Greeks. But the credit goes to the Indian
mathematician Mahavira (850) who first stated this difficulty clearly. “He mentions
in his work ‘Ganitasara Sangraha’ as in the nature of things a negative (quantity)
is not a square (quantity)’, it has, therefore, no square root”. Bhaskara, another
Indian mathematician, also writes in his work Bijaganita, written in 1150. “There
is no square root of a negative quantity, for it is not a square.” Cardan (1545)
considered the problem of solving
x + y = 10, xy = 40.
He obtained x = 5 + −15 and y = 5 – −15 as the solution of it, which
was discarded by him by saying that these numbers are ‘useless’. Albert Girard
(about 1625) accepted square root of negative numbers and said that this will
enable us to get as many roots as the degree of the polynomial equation. Euler
was the first to introduce the symbol i for −1 and W.R. Hamilton (about
1830) regarded the complex number a + ib as an ordered pair of real numbers
(a, b) thus giving it a purely mathematical definition and avoiding use of the so
called ‘imaginary numbers’.

—v —

2018-19
 Chapter 6
LINEAR INEQUALITIES

vMathematics is the art of saying many things in many

different ways. – MAXWELLv

6.1 Introduction
In earlier classes, we have studied equations in one variable and two variables and also
solved some statement problems by translating them in the form of equations. Now a
natural question arises: ‘Is it always possible to translate a statement problem in the
form of an equation? For example, the height of all the students in your class is less
than 160 cm. Your classroom can occupy atmost 60 tables or chairs or both. Here we
get certain statements involving a sign ‘<’ (less than), ‘>’ (greater than), ‘≤’ (less than
or equal) and ≥ (greater than or equal) which are known as inequalities.
In this Chapter, we will study linear inequalities in one and two variables. The
study of inequalities is very useful in solving problems in the field of science, mathematics,
statistics, economics, psychology, etc.

6.2 Inequalities
Let us consider the following situations:
(i) Ravi goes to market with ` 200 to buy rice, which is available in packets of 1kg. The
price of one packet of rice is ` 30. If x denotes the number of packets of rice, which he
buys, then the total amount spent by him is ` 30x. Since, he has to buy rice in packets
only, he may not be able to spend the entire amount of ` 200. (Why?) Hence
30x < 200
... (1)
Clearly the statement (i) is not an equation as it does not involve the sign of equality.
(ii) Reshma has ` 120 and wants to buy some registers and pens. The cost of one
register is ` 40 and that of a pen is ` 20. In this case, if x denotes the number of
registers and y, the number of pens which Reshma buys, then the total amount spent by
her is ` (40x + 20y) and we have
40x + 20y ≤ 120 ... (2)

2018-19
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 117

Since in this case the total amount spent may be upto ` 120. Note that the statement (2)
consists of two statements
40x + 20y < 120 ... (3)
and 40x + 20y = 120 ... (4)
Statement (3) is not an equation, i.e., it is an inequality while statement (4) is an equation.

Definition 1 Two real numbers or two algebraic expressions related by the symbol
‘<’, ‘>’, ‘≤’ or ‘≥’ form an inequality.
Statements such as (1), (2) and (3) above are inequalities.
3 < 5; 7 > 5 are the examples of numerical inequalities while
x < 5; y > 2; x ≥ 3, y ≤ 4 are some examples of literal inequalities.
3 < 5 < 7 (read as 5 is greater than 3 and less than 7), 3 < x < 5 (read as x is greater
than or equal to 3 and less than 5) and 2 < y < 4 are the examples of double inequalities.
Some more examples of inequalities are:
ax + b < 0 ... (5)
ax + b > 0 ... (6)
ax + b ≤ 0 ... (7)
ax + b ≥ 0 ... (8)
ax + by < c ... (9)
ax + by > c ... (10)
ax + by ≤ c ... (11)
ax + by ≥ c ... (12)
ax + bx + c ≤ 0
2
... (13)
ax2 + bx + c > 0 ... (14)
Inequalities (5), (6), (9), (10) and (14) are strict inequalities while inequalities (7), (8),
(11), (12), and (13) are slack inequalities. Inequalities from (5) to (8) are linear
inequalities in one variable x when a ≠ 0, while inequalities from (9) to (12) are linear
inequalities in two variables x and y when a ≠ 0, b ≠ 0.
Inequalities (13) and (14) are not linear (in fact, these are quadratic inequalities
in one variable x when a ≠ 0).
In this Chapter, we shall confine ourselves to the study of linear inequalities in one
and two variables only.

2018-19
118 MATHEMATICS

6.3 Algebraic Solutions of Linear Inequalities in One Variable and their

Graphical Representation
Let us consider the inequality (1) of Section 6.2, viz, 30x < 200
Note that here x denotes the number of packets of rice.
Obviously, x cannot be a negative integer or a fraction. Left hand side (L.H.S.) of this
inequality is 30x and right hand side (RHS) is 200. Therefore, we have
For x = 0, L.H.S. = 30 (0) = 0 < 200 (R.H.S.), which is true.
For x = 1, L.H.S. = 30 (1) = 30 < 200 (R.H.S.), which is true.
For x = 2, L.H.S. = 30 (2) = 60 < 200, which is true.
For x = 3, L.H.S. = 30 (3) = 90 < 200, which is true.
For x = 4, L.H.S. = 30 (4) = 120 < 200, which is true.
For x = 5, L.H.S. = 30 (5) = 150 < 200, which is true.
For x = 6, L.H.S. = 30 (6) = 180 < 200, which is true.
For x = 7, L.H.S. = 30 (7) = 210 < 200, which is false.
In the above situation, we find that the values of x, which makes the above
inequality a true statement, are 0,1,2,3,4,5,6. These values of x, which make above
inequality a true statement, are called solutions of inequality and the set {0,1,2,3,4,5,6}
is called its solution set.
Thus, any solution of an inequality in one variable is a value of the variable
which makes it a true statement.
We have found the solutions of the above inequality by trial and error method
which is not very efficient. Obviously, this method is time consuming and sometimes
not feasible. We must have some better or systematic techniques for solving inequalities.
Before that we should go through some more properties of numerical inequalities and
follow them as rules while solving the inequalities.
You will recall that while solving linear equations, we followed the following rules:
Rule 1 Equal numbers may be added to (or subtracted from) both sides of an equation.
Rule 2 Both sides of an equation may be multiplied (or divided) by the same non-zero
number.
In the case of solving inequalities, we again follow the same rules except with a
difference that in Rule 2, the sign of inequality is reversed (i.e., ‘<‘ becomes ‘>’, ≤’
becomes ‘≥’ and so on) whenever we multiply (or divide) both sides of an inequality by
a negative number. It is evident from the facts that
3 > 2 while – 3 < – 2,
– 8 < – 7 while (– 8) (– 2) > (– 7) (– 2) , i.e., 16 > 14.

2018-19
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 119

Thus, we state the following rules for solving an inequality:

Rule 1 Equal numbers may be added to (or subtracted from) both sides of an inequality
without affecting the sign of inequality.
Rule 2 Both sides of an inequality can be multiplied (or divided) by the same positive
number. But when both sides are multiplied or divided by a negative number, then the
sign of inequality is reversed.
Now, let us consider some examples.
Example 1 Solve 30 x < 200 when
(i) x is a natural number, (ii) x is an integer.
Solution We are given 30 x < 200
30 x 200
or < (Rule 2), i.e., x < 20 / 3.
30 30
(i) When x is a natural number, in this case the following values of x make the
statement true.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
The solution set of the inequality is {1,2,3,4,5,6}.
(ii) When x is an integer, the solutions of the given inequality are
..., – 3, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
The solution set of the inequality is {...,–3, –2,–1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
Example 2 Solve 5x – 3 < 3x +1 when
(i) x is an integer, (ii) x is a real number.
Solution We have, 5x –3 < 3x + 1
or 5x –3 + 3 < 3x +1 +3 (Rule 1)
or 5x < 3x +4
or 5x – 3x < 3x + 4 – 3x (Rule 1)
or 2x < 4
or x < 2 (Rule 2)
(i) When x is an integer, the solutions of the given inequality are
..., – 4, – 3, – 2, – 1, 0, 1
(ii) When x is a real number, the solutions of the inequality are given by x < 2,
i.e., all real numbers x which are less than 2. Therefore, the solution set of
the inequality is x ∈ (– ∞, 2).
We have considered solutions of inequalities in the set of natural numbers, set of
integers and in the set of real numbers. Henceforth, unless stated otherwise, we shall
solve the inequalities in this Chapter in the set of real numbers.

2018-19
120 MATHEMATICS

Example 3 Solve 4x + 3 < 6x +7.

Solution We have, 4x + 3 < 6x + 7
or 4x – 6x < 6x + 4 – 6x
or – 2x < 4 or x > – 2
i.e., all the real numbers which are greater than –2, are the solutions of the given
inequality. Hence, the solution set is (–2, ∞).

5 – 2x x
Example 4 Solve ≤ –5.
3 6
Solution We have
5 – 2x x
≤ –5
3 6
or 2 (5 – 2x) ≤ x – 30.
or 10 – 4x ≤ x – 30
or – 5x ≤ – 40, i.e., x ≥ 8
Thus, all real numbers x which are greater than or equal to 8 are the solutions of the
given inequality, i.e., x ∈ [8, ∞).
Example 5 Solve 7x + 3 < 5x + 9. Show the graph of the solutions on number line.
Solution We have 7x + 3 < 5x + 9 or
2x < 6 or x < 3
The graphical representation of the solutions are given in Fig 6.1.

Fig 6.1

3x − 4 x + 1
Example 6 Solve ≥ −1 . Show the graph of the solutions on number line.
2 4
Solution We have
3x − 4 x + 1
≥ −1
2 4
3x − 4 x − 3
or ≥
2 4
or 2 (3x – 4) ≥ (x – 3)

2018-19
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 121

or 6x – 8 ≥ x – 3
or 5x ≥ 5 or x ≥ 1
The graphical representation of solutions is given in Fig 6.2.

Fig 6.2

Example 7 The marks obtained by a student of Class XI in first and second terminal
examination are 62 and 48, respectively. Find the minimum marks he should get in the
annual examination to have an average of at least 60 marks.
Solution Let x be the marks obtained by student in the annual examination. Then
62 + 48 + x
≥ 60
3
or 110 + x ≥ 180
or x ≥ 70
Thus, the student must obtain a minimum of 70 marks to get an average of at least
60 marks.
Example 8 Find all pairs of consecutive odd natural numbers, both of which are larger
than 10, such that their sum is less than 40.
Solution Let x be the smaller of the two consecutive odd natural number, so that the
other one is x +2. Then, we should have
x > 10 ... (1)
and x + ( x + 2) < 40 ... (2)
Solving (2), we get
2x + 2 < 40
i.e., x < 19 ... (3)
From (1) and (3), we get
10 < x < 19
Since x is an odd number, x can take the values 11, 13, 15, and 17. So, the required
possible pairs will be
(11, 13), (13, 15), (15, 17), (17, 19)

2018-19
122 MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE 6.1
1. Solve 24x < 100, when
(i) x is a natural number. (ii) x is an integer.
2. Solve – 12x > 30, when
(i) x is a natural number. (ii) x is an integer.
3. Solve 5x – 3 < 7, when
(i) x is an integer. (ii) x is a real number.
4. Solve 3x + 8 >2, when
(i) x is an integer. (ii) x is a real number.
Solve the inequalities in Exercises 5 to 16 for real x.
5. 4x + 3 < 5x + 7 6. 3x – 7 > 5x – 1
7. 3(x – 1) ≤ 2 (x – 3) 8. 3 (2 – x) ≥ 2 (1 – x)
x x x x
9. x + + < 11 10. > +1
2 3 3 2
3( x − 2) 5(2 − x) 1  3x  1
11. ≤ 12.  + 4  ≥ ( x − 6)
5 3 2 5  3
13. 2 (2x + 3) – 10 < 6 (x – 2) 14. 37 – (3x + 5) > 9x – 8 (x – 3)
x (5 x − 2) (7 x − 3) (2 x −1) (3 x − 2) (2 − x )
15. < − 16. ≥ −
4 3 5 3 4 5
Solve the inequalities in Exercises 17 to 20 and show the graph of the solution in each
case on number line
17. 3x – 2 < 2x + 1 18. 5x – 3 > 3x – 5
x (5 x – 2) (7 x – 3)
19. 3 (1 – x) < 2 (x + 4) 20. ≥ –
2 3 5
21. Ravi obtained 70 and 75 marks in first two unit test. Find the minimum marks he
should get in the third test to have an average of at least 60 marks.
22. To receive Grade ‘A’ in a course, one must obtain an average of 90 marks or
more in five examinations (each of 100 marks). If Sunita’s marks in first four
examinations are 87, 92, 94 and 95, find minimum marks that Sunita must obtain
in fifth examination to get grade ‘A’ in the course.
23. Find all pairs of consecutive odd positive integers both of which are smaller than
10 such that their sum is more than 11.
24. Find all pairs of consecutive even positive integers, both of which are larger than
5 such that their sum is less than 23.

2018-19
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 123

25. The longest side of a triangle is 3 times the shortest side and the third side is 2 cm
shorter than the longest side. If the perimeter of the triangle is at least 61 cm, find
the minimum length of the shortest side.
26. A man wants to cut three lengths from a single piece of board of length 91cm.
The second length is to be 3cm longer than the shortest and the third length is to
be twice as long as the shortest. What are the possible lengths of the shortest
board if the third piece is to be at least 5cm longer than the second?
[Hint: If x is the length of the shortest board, then x , (x + 3) and 2x are the
lengths of the second and third piece, respectively. Thus, x + (x + 3) + 2x ≤ 91 and
2x ≥ (x + 3) + 5].

6.4 Graphical Solution of Linear Inequalities in Two Variables

In earlier section, we have seen that a graph of an inequality in one variable is a visual
representation and is a convenient way to represent the solutions of the inequality.
Now, we will discuss graph of a linear inequality in two variables.
We know that a line divides the Cartesian plane into two parts. Each part is
known as a half plane. A vertical line will divide the plane in left and right half planes
and a non-vertical line will divide the plane into lower and upper half planes
(Figs. 6.3 and 6.4).

Fig 6.3 Fig 6.4

A point in the Cartesian plane will either lie on a line or will lie in either of the half
planes I or II. We shall now examine the relationship, if any, of the points in the plane
and the inequalities ax + by < c or ax + by > c.
Let us consider the line
ax + by = c, a ≠ 0, b ≠ 0 ... (1)

2018-19
124 MATHEMATICS

There are three possibilities namely:

(i) ax + by = c (ii) ax + by > c (iii) ax + by < c.
In case (i), clearly, all points (x, y) satisfying (i) lie on the line it represents and
conversely. Consider case (ii), let us first assume that b > 0. Consider a point P (α,β)
on the line ax + by = c, b > 0, so that
aα + bβ = c.Take an arbitrary point
Q (α , γ) in the half plane II (Fig 6.5).
Now, from Fig 6.5, we interpret,
γ > β (Why?)
or b γ > bβ or aα + b γ > aα + bβ
(Why?)
or aα + b γ > c
i.e., Q(α, γ ) satisfies the inequality
ax + by > c.
Thus, all the points lying in the half
plane II above the line ax + by = c satisfies Fig 6.5
the inequality ax + by > c. Conversely, let (α, β) be a point on line ax + by = c and an
arbitrary point Q(α, γ) satisfying
ax + by > c
so that aα + bγ > c
⇒ aα + b γ > aα + bβ (Why?)
⇒ γ>β (as b > 0)
This means that the point (α, γ ) lies in the half plane II.
Thus, any point in the half plane II satisfies ax + by > c, and conversely any point
satisfying the inequality ax + by > c lies in half plane II.
In case b < 0, we can similarly prove that any point satisfying ax + by > c lies in
the half plane I, and conversely.
Hence, we deduce that all points satisfying ax + by > c lies in one of the half
planes II or I according as b > 0 or b < 0, and conversely.
Thus, graph of the inequality ax + by > c will be one of the half plane (called
solution region) and represented by shading in the corresponding half plane.

A Note 1 The region containing all the solutions of an inequality is called the
solution region.
2. In order to identify the half plane represented by an inequality, it is just sufficient
to take any point (a, b) (not online) and check whether it satisfies the inequality or
not. If it satisfies, then the inequality represents the half plane and shade the region

2018-19
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 125

which contains the point, otherwise, the inequality represents that half plane which
does not contain the point within it. For convenience, the point (0, 0) is preferred.
3. If an inequality is of the type ax + by ≥ c or ax + by ≤ c, then the points on the
line ax + by = c are also included in the solution region. So draw a dark line in the
solution region.
4. If an inequality is of the form ax + by > c or ax + by < c, then the points on the
line ax + by = c are not to be included in the solution region. So draw a broken or
dotted line in the solution region.
In Section 6.2, we obtained the following linear inequalities in two variables
x and y: 40x + 20y ≤ 120 ... (1)
while translating the word problem of purchasing of registers and pens by Reshma.
Let us now solve this inequality keeping in mind that x and y can be only whole
numbers, since the number of articles cannot be a fraction or a negative number. In
this case, we find the pairs of values of x and y, which make the statement (1) true. In
fact, the set of such pairs will be the solution set of the inequality (1).
To start with, let x = 0. Then L.H.S. of (1) is
40x + 20y = 40 (0) + 20y = 20y.
Thus, we have
20y ≤ 120 or y ≤ 6 ... (2)
For x = 0, the corresponding values of y can be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 only. In this case, the
solutions of (1) are (0, 0), (0, 1), (0,2), (0,3), (0,4),
(0, 5) and (0, 6).
Similarly, other solutions of (1), when
x = 1, 2 and 3 are: (1, 0), (1, 1), (1, 2), (1,
3), (1, 4), (2, 0), (2, 1), (2, 2), (3, 0)
This is shown in Fig 6.6.
Let us now extend the domain of x and y
from whole numbers to real numbers, and see
what will be the solutions of (1) in this case.
You will see that the graphical method of solution
will be very convenient in this case. For this
purpose, let us consider the (corresponding)
equation and draw its graph.
40x + 20y = 120 ... (3)
In order to draw the graph of the inequality
(1), we take one point say (0, 0), in half plane I
and check whether values of x and y satisfy the
inequality or not. Fig 6.6

2018-19
126 MATHEMATICS

We observe that x = 0, y = 0 satisfy the

inequality. Thus, we say that the half plane I is the
graph (Fig 6.7) of the inequality. Since the points on
the line also satisfy the inequality (1) above, the line
is also a part of the graph.
Thus, the graph of the given inequality is half
plane I including the line itself. Clearly half plane II
is not the part of the graph. Hence, solutions of
inequality (1) will consist of all the points of its graph
(half plane I including the line).
We shall now consider some examples to
explain the above procedure for solving a linear
inequality involving two variables.
Example 9 Solve 3x + 2y > 6 graphically. Fig 6.7
Solution Graph of 3x + 2y = 6 is given as dotted line in the Fig 6.8.
This line divides the xy-plane in two half
planes I and II. We select a point (not on the
line), say (0, 0), which lies in one of the half
planes (Fig 6.8) and determine if this point
satisfies the given inequality, we note that
3 (0) + 2 (0) > 6
or 0 > 6 , which is false.
Hence, half plane I is not the solution region of
the given inequality. Clearly, any point on the
line does not satisfy the given strict inequality.
In other words, the shaded half plane II Fig 6.8
excluding the points on the line is the solution
region of the inequality.
Example 10 Solve 3x – 6 ≥ 0 graphically in
two dimensional plane.
Solution Graph of 3x – 6 = 0 is given in the
Fig 6.9.
We select a point, say (0, 0) and substituting it in
given inequality, we see that:
3 (0) – 6 ≥ 0 or – 6 ≥ 0 which is false.
Thus, the solution region is the shaded region on
the right hand side of the line x = 2. Fig 6.9

2018-19
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 127

Example 11 Solve y < 2 graphically.

Solution Graph of y = 2 is given in the Fig 6.10.
Let us select a point, (0, 0) in lower half
plane I and putting y = 0 in the given inequality,
we see that
1 × 0 < 2 or 0 < 2 which is true.
Thus, the solution region is the shaded region
below the line y = 2. Hence, every point below
the line (excluding all the points on the line)
determines the solution of the given inequality.
Fig 6.10

EXERCISE 6.2
Solve the following inequalities graphically in two-dimensional plane:
1. x + y < 5 2. 2x + y ≥ 6 3. 3x + 4y ≤ 12
4. y + 8 ≥ 2x 5. x – y ≤ 2 6. 2x – 3y > 6
7. – 3x + 2y ≥ – 6 8. 3y – 5x < 30 9. y < – 2
10. x > – 3.
6.5 Solution of System of Linear Inequalities in Two Variables
In previous Section, you have learnt how to solve linear inequality in one or two variables
graphically. We will now illustrate the method for solving a system of linear inequalities
in two variables graphically through some
examples.
Example 12 Solve the following system
of linear inequalities graphically.
x+y≥5 ... (1)
x–y≤3 ... (2)
Solution The graph of linear equation
x+y=5
is drawn in Fig 6.11.
We note that solution of inequality
(1) is represented by the shaded region
above the line x + y = 5, including the
points on the line.
On the same set of axes, we draw
the graph of the equation x – y = 3 as Fig 6.11
shown in Fig 6.11. Then we note that inequality (2) represents the shaded region above

2018-19
128 MATHEMATICS

the line x – y = 3, including the points on the line.

Clearly, the double shaded region, common to the above two shaded regions is
the required solution region of the given system of inequalities.
Example 13 Solve the following system
of inequalities graphically
5x + 4y ≤ 40 ... (1)
x≥2 ... (2)
y≥3 ... (3)
Solution We first draw the graph of
the line
5x + 4y = 40, x = 2 and y = 3
Then we note that the inequality (1)
represents shaded region below the line
5x + 4y = 40 and inequality (2) represents
the shaded region right of line x = 2 but
inequality (3) represents the shaded region
above the line y = 3. Hence, shaded region
(Fig 6.12) including all the point on the lines
are also the solution of the given system Fig 6.12
of the linear inequalities.
In many practical situations involving
system of inequalities the variable x and y
often represent quantities that cannot have
negative values, for example, number of
units produced, number of articles
purchased, number of hours worked, etc.
Clearly, in such cases, x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0 and the
solution region lies only in the first quadrant.
Example 14 Solve the following system
of inequalities
8x + 3y ≤ 100 ... (1)
x≥0 ... (2)
y≥0 ... (3)
Solution We draw the graph of the line
8x + 3y = 100
The inequality 8x + 3y ≤ 100 represents the
shaded region below the line, including the Fig 6.13
points on the line 8x +3y =100 (Fig 6.13).

2018-19
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 129

Since x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0, every point in the

shaded region in the first quadrant,
including the points on the line and
the axes, represents the solution of
the given system of inequalities.
Example 15 Solve the following
system of inequalities graphically
x + 2y ≤ 8 ... (1)
2x + y ≤ 8 ... (2)
x>0 ... (3)
y>0 ... (4)
Solution We draw the graphs of
the lines x + 2y = 8 and 2x + y = 8.
The inequality (1) and (2) represent
Fig 6.14
the region below the two lines,
including the point on the respective lines.
Since x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0, every point in the shaded region in the first quadrant represent
a solution of the given system of inequalities (Fig 6.14).

EXERCISE 6.3
Solve the following system of inequalities graphically:
1. x ≥ 3, y ≥ 2 2. 3x + 2y ≤ 12, x ≥ 1, y ≥ 2
3. 2x + y ≥ 6, 3x + 4y < 12 4. x + y ≥ 4, 2x – y < 0
5. 2x – y >1, x – 2y < – 1 6. x + y ≤ 6, x + y ≥ 4
7. 2x + y ≥ 8, x + 2y ≥ 10 8. x + y ≤ 9, y > x, x ≥ 0
9. 5x + 4y ≤ 20, x ≥ 1, y ≥ 2
10. 3x + 4y ≤ 60, x +3y ≤ 30, x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0
11. 2x + y ≥ 4, x + y ≤ 3, 2x – 3y ≤ 6
12. x – 2y ≤ 3, 3x + 4y ≥ 12, x ≥ 0 , y ≥ 1
13. 4x + 3y ≤ 60, y ≥ 2x, x ≥ 3, x, y ≥ 0
14. 3x + 2y ≤ 150, x + 4y ≤ 80, x ≤ 15, y ≥ 0, x ≥ 0
15. x + 2y ≤ 10, x + y ≥ 1, x – y ≤ 0, x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0

2018-19
130 MATHEMATICS

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 16 Solve – 8 ≤ 5x – 3 < 7.
Solution In this case, we have two inequalities, – 8 ≤ 5x – 3 and 5x – 3 < 7, which we
will solve simultaneously. We have – 8 ≤ 5x –3 < 7
or –5 ≤ 5x < 10 or –1 ≤ x < 2
5 – 3x
Example 17 Solve – 5 ≤ ≤ 8.
2
5 – 3x
Solution We have – 5 ≤ ≤8
2
or –10 ≤ 5 – 3x ≤ 16 or – 15 ≤ – 3x ≤ 11
11
or 5≥x≥–
3
–11
which can be written as ≤ x ≤5
3
Example 18 Solve the system of inequalities:
3x – 7 < 5 + x ... (1)
11 – 5 x ≤ 1 ... (2)
and represent the solutions on the number line.
Solution From inequality (1), we have
3x – 7 < 5 + x
or x<6
... (3)
Also, from inequality (2), we have
11 – 5 x ≤ 1
or – 5 x ≤ – 10 i.e., x ≥ 2 ... (4)
If we draw the graph of inequalities (3) and (4) on the number line, we see that the
values of x, which are common to both, are shown by bold line in Fig 6.15.

Fig 6.15
Thus, solution of the system are real numbers x lying between 2 and 6 including 2, i.e.,
2≤x<6

2018-19
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 131

Example 19 In an experiment, a solution of hydrochloric acid is to be kept between

30° and 35° Celsius. What is the range of temperature in degree Fahrenheit if conversion
5
formula is given by C = (F – 32), where C and F represent temperature in degree
9
Celsius and degree Fahrenheit, respectively.
Solution It is given that 30 < C < 35.
5
Putting C= (F – 32), we get
9
5
30 < (F – 32) < 35,
9
9 9
or × (30) < (F – 32) < × (35)
5 5
or 54 < (F – 32) < 63
or 86 < F < 95.
Thus, the required range of temperature is between 86° F and 95° F.
Example 20 A manufacturer has 600 litres of a 12% solution of acid. How many litres
of a 30% acid solution must be added to it so that acid content in the resulting mixture
will be more than 15% but less than 18%?
Solution Let x litres of 30% acid solution is required to be added. Then
Total mixture = (x + 600) litres
Therefore 30% x + 12% of 600 > 15% of (x + 600)
and 30% x + 12% of 600 < 18% of (x + 600)
30 x 12 15
or + (600) > (x + 600)
100 100 100

30 x 12 18
and + (600) < (x + 600)
100 100 100
or 30x + 7200 > 15x + 9000
and 30x + 7200 < 18x + 10800
or 15x > 1800 and 12x < 3600
or x > 120 and x < 300,
i.e. 120 < x < 300

2018-19
132 MATHEMATICS

Thus, the number of litres of the 30% solution of acid will have to be more than
120 litres but less than 300 litres.

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 6

Solve the inequalities in Exercises 1 to 6.
1. 2 ≤ 3x – 4 ≤ 5 2. 6 ≤ – 3 (2x – 4) < 12
7x 3( x − 2 )
3. –3≤4− ≤ 18 4. −15 < ≤0
2 5
3x ( 3x +11 )
5. −12 < 4 − ≤2 6. 7 ≤ ≤ 11 .
−5 2
Solve the inequalities in Exercises 7 to 10 and represent the solution graphically on
number line.
7. 5x + 1 > – 24, 5x – 1 < 24
8. 2 (x – 1) < x + 5, 3 (x + 2) > 2 – x
9. 3x – 7 > 2 (x – 6) , 6 – x > 11 – 2x
10. 5 (2x – 7) – 3 (2x + 3) ≤ 0 , 2x + 19 ≤ 6x + 47 .
11. A solution is to be kept between 68° F and 77° F. What is the range in temperature
in degree Celsius (C) if the Celsius / Fahrenheit (F) conversion formula is given by
9
F= C + 32 ?
5
12. A solution of 8% boric acid is to be diluted by adding a 2% boric acid solution to
it. The resulting mixture is to be more than 4% but less than 6% boric acid. If we have
640 litres of the 8% solution, how many litres of the 2% solution will have to be added?
13. How many litres of water will have to be added to 1125 litres of the 45% solution
of acid so that the resulting mixture will contain more than 25% but less than 30% acid
content?
14. IQ of a person is given by the formula

MA
IQ = × 100,
CA
where MA is mental age and CA is chronological age. If 80 ≤ IQ ≤ 140 for a group of
12 years old children, find the range of their mental age.

2018-19
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 133

Summary
® Two real numbers or two algebraic expressions related by the symbols <, >, ≤
or ≥ form an inequality.
® Equal numbers may be added to (or subtracted from ) both sides of an inequality.
® Both sides of an inequality can be multiplied (or divided ) by the same positive
number. But when both sides are multiplied (or divided) by a negative number,
then the inequality is reversed.
® The values of x, which make an inequality a true statement, are called solutions
of the inequality.
® To represent x < a (or x > a) on a number line, put a circle on the number a and
dark line to the left (or right) of the number a.
® represent x ≤ a (or x ≥ a) on a number line, put a dark circle on the number
To
a and dark the line to the left (or right) of the number x.
® If an inequality is having ≤ or ≥ symbol, then the points on the line are also
included in the solutions of the inequality and the graph of the inequality lies left
(below) or right (above) of the graph of the equality represented by dark line
that satisfies an arbitrary point in that part.
® If an inequality is having < or > symbol, then the points on the line are not
included in the solutions of the inequality and the graph of the inequality lies to
the left (below) or right (above) of the graph of the corresponding equality
represented by dotted line that satisfies an arbitrary point in that part.
® The solution region of a system of inequalities is the region which satisfies all
the given inequalities in the system simultaneously.

—v —

2018-19
 Chapter 7
PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS

Every body of discovery is mathematical in form because there is no

other guidance we can have – DARWIN

7.1 Introduction
Suppose you have a suitcase with a number lock. The number
lock has 4 wheels each labelled with 10 digits from 0 to 9.
The lock can be opened if 4 specific digits are arranged in a
particular sequence with no repetition. Some how, you have
forgotten this specific sequence of digits. You remember only
the first digit which is 7. In order to open the lock, how
many sequences of 3-digits you may have to check with? To
answer this question, you may, immediately, start listing all
possible arrangements of 9 remaining digits taken 3 at a
Jacob Bernoulli
time. But, this method will be tedious, because the number
(1654-1705)
of possible sequences may be large. Here, in this Chapter,
we shall learn some basic counting techniques which will enable us to answer this
question without actually listing 3-digit arrangements. In fact, these techniques will be
useful in determining the number of different ways of arranging and selecting objects
without actually listing them. As a first step, we shall examine a principle which is most
fundamental to the learning of these techniques.

7.2 Fundamental Principle of Counting

Let us consider the following problem. Mohan has 3 pants and 2 shirts. How many
different pairs of a pant and a shirt, can he dress up with? There are 3 ways in which
a pant can be chosen, because there are 3 pants available. Similarly, a shirt can be
chosen in 2 ways. For every choice of a pant, there are 2 choices of a shirt. Therefore,
there are 3 × 2 = 6 pairs of a pant and a shirt.

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 135

Let us name the three pants as P1, P2 , P3 and the two shirts as S1, S2. Then,
these six possibilities can be illustrated in the Fig. 7.1.
Let us consider another problem
of the same type.
Sabnam has 2 school bags, 3 tiffin boxes
and 2 water bottles. In how many ways
can she carry these items (choosing one
each).
A school bag can be chosen in 2
different ways. After a school bag is
chosen, a tiffin box can be chosen in 3
different ways. Hence, there are
2 × 3 = 6 pairs of school bag and a tiffin
box. For each of these pairs a water
bottle can be chosen in 2 different ways. Fig 7.1
Hence, there are 6 × 2 = 12 different ways in which, Sabnam can carry these items to
school. If we name the 2 school bags as B1, B2, the three tiffin boxes as T1, T2, T3 and
the two water bottles as W1, W2, these possibilities can be illustrated in the Fig. 7.2.

Fig 7.2

2018-19
136 MATHEMATICS

In fact, the problems of the above types are solved by applying the following
principle known as the fundamental principle of counting, or, simply, the multiplication
principle, which states that
“If an event can occur in m different ways, following which another event
can occur in n different ways, then the total number of occurrence of the events
in the given order is m×n.”
The above principle can be generalised for any finite number of events. For
example, for 3 events, the principle is as follows:
‘If an event can occur in m different ways, following which another event can
occur in n different ways, following which a third event can occur in p different ways,
then the total number of occurrence to ‘the events in the given order is m × n × p.”
In the first problem, the required number of ways of wearing a pant and a shirt
was the number of different ways of the occurence of the following events in succession:
(i) the event of choosing a pant
(ii) the event of choosing a shirt.
In the second problem, the required number of ways was the number of different
ways of the occurence of the following events in succession:
(i) the event of choosing a school bag
(ii) the event of choosing a tiffin box
(iii) the event of choosing a water bottle.
Here, in both the cases, the events in each problem could occur in various possible
orders. But, we have to choose any one of the possible orders and count the number of
different ways of the occurence of the events in this chosen order.
Example 1 Find the number of 4 letter words, with or without meaning, which can be
formed out of the letters of the word ROSE, where the repetition of the letters is not
allowed.
Solution There are as many words as there are ways of filling in 4 vacant places
by the 4 letters, keeping in mind that the repetition is not allowed. The
first place can be filled in 4 different ways by anyone of the 4 letters R,O,S,E. Following
which, the second place can be filled in by anyone of the remaining 3 letters in 3
different ways, following which the third place can be filled in 2 different ways; following
which, the fourth place can be filled in 1 way. Thus, the number of ways in which the
4 places can be filled, by the multiplication principle, is 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 = 24. Hence, the
required number of words is 24.

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 137

Note If the repetition of the letters was allowed, how many words can be formed?
One can easily understand that each of the 4 vacant places can be filled in succession
in 4 different ways. Hence, the required number of words = 4 × 4 × 4 × 4 = 256.

Example 2 Given 4 flags of different colours, how many different signals can be
generated, if a signal requires the use of 2 flags one below the other?
Solution There will be as many signals as there are ways of filling in 2 vacant places

in succession by the 4 flags of different colours. The upper vacant place can
be filled in 4 different ways by anyone of the 4 flags; following which, the lower vacant
place can be filled in 3 different ways by anyone of the remaining 3 different flags.
Hence, by the multiplication principle, the required number of signals = 4 × 3 = 12.
Example 3 How many 2 digit even numbers can be formed from the digits
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 if the digits can be repeated?
Solution There will be as many ways as there are ways of filling 2 vacant places
in succession by the five given digits. Here, in this case, we start filling in unit’s
place, because the options for this place are 2 and 4 only and this can be done in 2
ways; following which the ten’s place can be filled by any of the 5 digits in 5 different
ways as the digits can be repeated. Therefore, by the multiplication principle, the required
number of two digits even numbers is 2 × 5, i.e., 10.
Example 4 Find the number of different signals that can be generated by arranging at
least 2 flags in order (one below the other) on a vertical staff, if five different flags are
available.
Solution A signal can consist of either 2 flags, 3 flags, 4 flags or 5 flags. Now, let us
count the possible number of signals consisting of 2 flags, 3 flags, 4 flags and 5 flags
separately and then add the respective numbers.
There will be as many 2 flag signals as there are ways of filling in 2 vacant places

in succession by the 5 flags available. By Multiplication rule, the number of

ways is 5 × 4 = 20.
Similarly, there will be as many 3 flag signals as there are ways of filling in 3

vacant places in succession by the 5 flags.

2018-19
138 MATHEMATICS

The number of ways is 5 × 4 × 3 = 60.

Continuing the same way, we find that
The number of 4 flag signals = 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 = 120
and the number of 5 flag signals = 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 = 120
Therefore, the required no of signals = 20 + 60 + 120 + 120 = 320.

EXERCISE 7.1
1. How many 3-digit numbers can be formed from the digits 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
assuming that
(i) repetition of the digits is allowed?
(ii) repetition of the digits is not allowed?
2. How many 3-digit even numbers can be formed from the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 if the
digits can be repeated?
3. How many 4-letter code can be formed using the first 10 letters of the English
alphabet, if no letter can be repeated?
4. How many 5-digit telephone numbers can be constructed using the digits 0 to 9 if
each number starts with 67 and no digit appears more than once?
5. A coin is tossed 3 times and the outcomes are recorded. How many possible
outcomes are there?
6. Given 5 flags of different colours, how many different signals can be generated if
each signal requires the use of 2 flags, one below the other?
7.3 Permutations
In Example 1 of the previous Section, we are actually counting the different possible
arrangements of the letters such as ROSE, REOS, ..., etc. Here, in this list, each
arrangement is different from other. In other words, the order of writing the letters is
important. Each arrangement is called a permutation of 4 different letters taken all
at a time. Now, if we have to determine the number of 3-letter words, with or without
meaning, which can be formed out of the letters of the word NUMBER, where the
repetition of the letters is not allowed, we need to count the arrangements NUM,
NMU, MUN, NUB, ..., etc. Here, we are counting the permutations of 6 different
letters taken 3 at a time. The required number of words = 6 × 5 × 4 = 120 (by using
multiplication principle).
If the repetition of the letters was allowed, the required number of words would
be 6 × 6 × 6 = 216.

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 139

Definition 1 A permutation is an arrangement in a definite order of a number of

objects taken some or all at a time.
In the following sub-section, we shall obtain the formula needed to answer these
questions immediately.
7.3.1 Permutations when all the objects are distinct
Theorem 1 The number of permutations of n different objects taken r at a time,
where 0 < r ≤ n and the objects do not repeat is n ( n – 1) ( n – 2). . .( n – r + 1),
which is denoted by nPr.
Proof There will be as many permutations as there are ways of filling in r vacant
places ... by
← r vacant places →
the n objects. The first place can be filled in n ways; following which, the second place
can be filled in (n – 1) ways, following which the third place can be filled in (n – 2)
ways,..., the rth place can be filled in (n – (r – 1)) ways. Therefore, the number of
ways of filling in r vacant places in succession is n(n – 1) (n – 2) . . . (n – (r – 1)) or
n ( n – 1) (n – 2) ... (n – r + 1)
This expression for nPr is cumbersome and we need a notation which will help to
reduce the size of this expression. The symbol n! (read as factorial n or n factorial )
comes to our rescue. In the following text we will learn what actually n! means.
7.3.2 Factorial notation The notation n! represents the product of first n natural
numbers, i.e., the product 1 × 2 × 3 × . . . × (n – 1) × n is denoted as n!. We read this
symbol as ‘n factorial’. Thus, 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 . . . × (n – 1) × n = n !
1=1!
1×2=2!
1× 2 × 3 = 3 !
1 × 2 × 3 × 4 = 4 ! and so on.
We define 0 ! = 1
We can write 5 ! = 5 × 4 ! = 5 × 4 × 3 ! = 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 !
= 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1!
Clearly, for a natural number n
n ! = n (n – 1) !
= n (n – 1) (n – 2) ! [provided (n ≥ 2)]
= n (n – 1) (n – 2) (n – 3) ! [provided (n ≥ 3)]
and so on.

2018-19
140 MATHEMATICS

Example 5 Evaluate (i) 5 ! (ii) 7 ! (iii) 7 ! – 5!

Solution (i) 5 ! = 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 × 5 = 120
(ii) 7 ! = 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 × 5 × 6 ×7 = 5040
and (iii) 7 ! – 5! = 5040 – 120 = 4920.
7! 12!
Example 6 Compute (i)
5! ( )
(ii) 10! (2!)

7! 7 × 6 × 5!
Solution (i) We have = = 7 × 6 = 42
5! 5!

12! 12 × 11 × (10!)
and (ii) = = 6 × 11 = 66.
(10!) ( 2!) (10!)× ( 2 )
n!
( )
Example 7 Evaluate r ! n − r ! , when n = 5, r = 2.

5!
Solution
( )
We have to evaluate 2! 5 − 2 ! (since n = 5, r = 2)

5! 5! 5× 4
= = 10 .
We have 2 !(5 − 2 )! 2! × 3!
= 2

1 1 x
Example 8 If + =
8! 9! 10! , find x.

1 1 x
Solution We have 8! + 9 × 8! = 10 × 9 × 8!

1 x 10 x
Therefore 1+ = or =
9 10 × 9 9 10 × 9
So x = 100.

EXERCISE 7.2
1. Evaluate
(i) 8 ! (ii) 4 ! – 3 !

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 141

8! 1 1 x
2. Is 3 ! + 4 ! = 7 ! ? 3. Compute 4. If + = , find x
6! × 2! 6! 7! 8!

n!
5.
( )
Evaluate n − r ! , when

(i) n = 6, r = 2 (ii) n = 9, r = 5.
7.3.3 Derivation of the formula for nPr

n n!
Pr = ,0≤r≤n
( r )!
n −
Let us now go back to the stage where we had determined the following formula:
n
Pr = n (n – 1) (n – 2) . . . (n – r + 1)
Multiplying numerator and denomirator by (n – r) (n – r – 1) . . . 3 × 2 × 1, we get
n ( n − 1) ( n − 2 ) ...( n − r + 1)( n − r )( n − r − 1) ...3 × 2 × 1 n!
n
Pr = = ,
( n − r )( n − r − 1) ... 3 × 2 × 1 ( n − r )!
n!
n
Pr =
Thus
( n − r )! , where 0 < r ≤ n
This is a much more convenient expression for nPr than the previous one.
n!
In particular, when r = n, n Pn = = n!
0!
Counting permutations is merely counting the number of ways in which some or
all objects at a time are rearranged. Arranging no object at all is the same as leaving
behind all the objects and we know that there is only one way of doing so. Thus, we
can have
n! n!
n
P0 = 1 = = ... (1)
n ! ( n − 0)!

Therefore, the formula (1) is applicable for r = 0 also.

n!
n
Pr = ,0≤r ≤n .
Thus
( n − r )!

2018-19
142 MATHEMATICS

Theorem 2 The number of permutations of n different objects taken r at a time,

where repetition is allowed, is nr.
Proof is very similar to that of Theorem 1 and is left for the reader to arrive at.
Here, we are solving some of the problems of the pervious Section using the
formula for nPr to illustrate its usefulness.
In Example 1, the required number of words = 4P4 = 4! = 24. Here repetition is
not allowed. If repetition is allowed, the required number of words would be 44 = 256.
The number of 3-letter words which can be formed by the letters of the word
6!
NUMBER = P3 = 3! = 4 × 5 × 6 = 120. Here, in this case also, the repetition is not
6

allowed. If the repetition is allowed,the required number of words would be 63 = 216.

The number of ways in which a Chairman and a Vice-Chairman can be chosen
from amongst a group of 12 persons assuming that one person can not hold more than
12!
one position, clearly 12
P2 = = 11 × 12 = 132.
10!

7.3.4 Permutations when all the objects are not distinct objects Suppose we have
to find the number of ways of rearranging the letters of the word ROOT. In this case,
the letters of the word are not all different. There are 2 Os, which are of the same kind.
Let us treat, temporarily, the 2 Os as different, say, O1 and O2. The number of
permutations of 4-different letters, in this case, taken all at a time
is 4!. Consider one of these permutations say, RO 1O2T. Corresponding to this
permutation,we have 2 ! permutations RO1O2T and RO2O1T which will be exactly the
same permutation if O1 and O2 are not treated as different, i.e., if O1 and O2 are the
same O at both places.
4!
Therefore, the required number of permutations = 2! = 3 × 4 = 12 .

Permutations when O1, O2 are Permutations when O1, O2 are

different. the same O.
RO1O 2 T 
RO 2 O1T 
ROOT

T O1O 2 R 
T O2 O1R 
TOOR

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 143

R O1T O 2 
R O 2 T O1 
ROTO

T O1R O 2 
T O 2 R O1 
TORO

R T O1 O 2 
R T O 2 O1 
RTOO

T R O1 O 2 
T R O 2 O1 
TROO

O1 O 2 R T 
O2 O1 T R 
OORT

O1 R O 2 T 
O 2 R O1 T 
OROT

O1 T O 2 R 
O 2 T O1 R 
OTOR

O1 R T O 2 
O 2 R T O1 
ORTO

O1 T R O 2 
O 2 T R O1 
OTRO

O1 O 2 T R 
O 2 O1 T R 
OOTR

Let us now find the number of ways of rearranging the letters of the word
INSTITUTE. In this case there are 9 letters, in which I appears 2 times and T appears
3 times.
Temporarily, let us treat these letters different and name them as I1, I2, T1, T2, T3.
The number of permutations of 9 different letters, in this case, taken all at a time is 9 !.
Consider one such permutation, say, I1 NT1 SI2 T2 U E T3. Here if I1, I2 are not same

2018-19
144 MATHEMATICS

and T1, T2, T3 are not same, then I1, I2 can be arranged in 2! ways and T1, T2, T3 can
be arranged in 3! ways. Therefore, 2! × 3! permutations will be just the same permutation
corresponding to this chosen permutation I1NT1SI2T2UET3. Hence, total number of
9!
different permutations will be
2! 3!
We can state (without proof) the following theorems:
Theorem 3 The number of permutations of n objects, where p objects are of the
n!
same kind and rest are all different =
p! .
In fact, we have a more general theorem.
Theorem 4 The number of permutations of n objects, where p1 objects are of one
kind, p2 are of second kind, ..., pk are of kth kind and the rest, if any, are of different
n!
kind is .
p1! p2! ... pk!

Example 9 Find the number of permutations of the letters of the word ALLAHABAD.
Solution Here, there are 9 objects (letters) of which there are 4A’s, 2 L’s and rest are
all different.
9! 5× 6× 7 ×8× 9
Therefore, the required number of arrangements = = = 7560
4! 2! 2

Example 10 How many 4-digit numbers can be formed by using the digits 1 to 9 if
repetition of digits is not allowed?
Solution Here order matters for example 1234 and 1324 are two different numbers.
Therefore, there will be as many 4 digit numbers as there are permutations of 9 different
digits taken 4 at a time.
9 9! 9!
Therefore, the required 4 digit numbers = P4 = = = 9 × 8 × 7 × 6 = 3024.
(9 – 4 )! 5!
Example 11 How many numbers lying between 100 and 1000 can be formed with the
digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, if the repetition of the digits is not allowed?
Solution Every number between 100 and 1000 is a 3-digit number. We, first, have to

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 145

count the permutations of 6 digits taken 3 at a time. This number would be 6P3. But,
these permutations will include those also where 0 is at the 100’s place. For example,
092, 042, . . ., etc are such numbers which are actually 2-digit numbers and hence the
number of such numbers has to be subtracted from 6P3 to get the required number. To
get the number of such numbers, we fix 0 at the 100’s place and rearrange the remaining
5 digits taking 2 at a time. This number is 5P2. So
6! 5!
The required number = 6 P3 − 5 P2 = −
3! 3!
= 4 × 5 × 6 – 4 ×5 = 100
Example 12 Find the value of n such that
n
P4 5
(i) n
P5 = 42 P3 , n > 4
n
(ii) n –1
= ,n>4
P4 3

Solution (i) Given that

n
P5 = 42 n P3
or n (n – 1) (n – 2) (n – 3) (n – 4) = 42 n(n – 1) (n – 2)
Since n>4 so n(n – 1) (n – 2) ≠ 0
Therefore, by dividing both sides by n(n – 1) (n – 2), we get
(n – 3 (n – 4) = 42
or n2 – 7n – 30 = 0
or n2 – 10n + 3n – 30
or (n – 10) (n + 3) = 0
or n – 10 = 0 or n + 3 = 0
or n = 10 or n = – 3
As n cannot be negative, so n = 10.
n
P4 5
(ii) Given that n –1
=
P4 3
Therefore 3n (n – 1) (n – 2) (n – 3) = 5(n – 1) (n – 2) (n – 3) (n – 4)
or 3n = 5 (n – 4) [as (n – 1) (n – 2) (n – 3) ≠ 0, n > 4]
or n = 10.

2018-19
146 MATHEMATICS

Example 13 Find r, if 5 4Pr = 6 5Pr–1 .

Solution We have 5 4 Pr = 6 5 Pr −1

4! 5!
5× = 6×
or
( 4 − r )! (5 − r + 1)!
5! 6 × 5!
=
or
( 4 − r )! (5 − r + 1) (5 − r )(5 − r − 1)!
or (6 – r) (5 – r) = 6
or r2 – 11r + 24 = 0
or r2 – 8r – 3r + 24 = 0
or (r – 8) (r – 3) = 0
or r = 8 or r = 3.
Hence r = 8, 3.
Example 14 Find the number of different 8-letter arrangements that can be made
from the letters of the word DAUGHTER so that
(i) all vowels occur together (ii) all vowels do not occur together.
Solution (i) There are 8 different letters in the word DAUGHTER, in which there
are 3 vowels, namely, A, U and E. Since the vowels have to occur together, we can for
the time being, assume them as a single object (AUE). This single object together with
5 remaining letters (objects) will be counted as 6 objects. Then we count permutations
of these 6 objects taken all at a time. This number would be 6P6 = 6!. Corresponding to
each of these permutations, we shall have 3! permutations of the three vowels A, U, E
taken all at a time . Hence, by the multiplication principle the required number of
permutations = 6 ! × 3 ! = 4320.
(ii) If we have to count those permutations in which all vowels are never
together, we first have to find all possible arrangments of 8 letters taken all at a time,
which can be done in 8! ways. Then, we have to subtract from this number, the number
of permutations in which the vowels are always together.
Therefore, the required number 8 ! – 6 ! × 3 ! = 6 ! (7×8 – 6)
= 2 × 6 ! (28 – 3)
= 50 × 6 ! = 50 × 720 = 36000
Example 15 In how many ways can 4 red, 3 yellow and 2 green discs be arranged in
a row if the discs of the same colour are indistinguishable ?
Solution Total number of discs are 4 + 3 + 2 = 9. Out of 9 discs, 4 are of the first kind

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 147

(red), 3 are of the second kind (yellow) and 2 are of the third kind (green).
9!
Therefore, the number of arrangements = 1260 .
4! 3! 2!
Example 16 Find the number of arrangements of the letters of the word
INDEPENDENCE. In how many of these arrangements,
(i) do the words start with P
(ii) do all the vowels always occur together
(iii) do the vowels never occur together
(iv) do the words begin with I and end in P?
Solution There are 12 letters, of which N appears 3 times, E appears 4 times and D
appears 2 times and the rest are all different. Therefore
12!
The required number of arrangements = 3! 4! 2! = 1663200

(i) Let us fix P at the extreme left position, we, then, count the arrangements of the
remaining 11 letters. Therefore, the required number of words starting with P
11!
= = 138600 .
3! 2! 4!
(ii) There are 5 vowels in the given word, which are 4 Es and 1 I. Since, they have
to always occur together, we treat them as a single object EEEEI for the time
being. This single object together with 7 remaining objects will account for 8
objects. These 8 objects, in which there are 3Ns and 2 Ds, can be rearranged in
8!
3! 2! ways. Corresponding to each of these arrangements, the 5 vowels E, E, E,

5!
E and I can be rearranged in ways. Therefore, by multiplication principle,
4!
the required number of arrangements
8! 5!
= × = 16800
3! 2! 4!
(iii) The required number of arrangements
= the total number of arrangements (without any restriction) – the number
of arrangements where all the vowels occur together.

2018-19
148 MATHEMATICS

= 1663200 – 16800 = 1646400

(iv) Let us fix I and P at the extreme ends (I at the left end and P at the right end).
We are left with 10 letters.
Hence, the required number of arrangements
10!
= = 12600
3! 2! 4!

EXERCISE 7.3
1. How many 3-digit numbers can be formed by using the digits 1 to 9 if no digit is
repeated?
2. How many 4-digit numbers are there with no digit repeated?
3. How many 3-digit even numbers can be made using the digits
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, if no digit is repeated?
4. Find the number of 4-digit numbers that can be formed using the digits 1, 2, 3, 4,
5 if no digit is repeated. How many of these will be even?
5. From a committee of 8 persons, in how many ways can we choose a chairman
and a vice chairman assuming one person can not hold more than one position?
6. Find n if n – 1P3 : nP4 = 1 : 9.
7. Find r if (i) 5 Pr = 2 6 Pr −1 (ii) 5 Pr = 6 Pr −1 .
8. How many words, with or without meaning, can be formed using all the letters of
the word EQUATION, using each letter exactly once?
9. How many words, with or without meaning can be made from the letters of the
word MONDAY, assuming that no letter is repeated, if.
(i) 4 letters are used at a time, (ii) all letters are used at a time,
(iii) all letters are used but first letter is a vowel?
10. In how many of the distinct permutations of the letters in MISSISSIPPI do the
four I’s not come together?
11. In how many ways can the letters of the word PERMUTATIONS be arranged if the
(i) words start with P and end with S, (ii) vowels are all together,
(iii) there are always 4 letters between P and S?
7.4 Combinations
Let us now assume that there is a group of 3 lawn tennis players X, Y, Z. A team
consisting of 2 players is to be formed. In how many ways can we do so? Is the team
of X and Y different from the team of Y and X ? Here, order is not important.
In fact, there are only 3 possible ways in which the team could be constructed.

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 149

Fig. 7.3
These are XY, YZ and ZX (Fig 7.3).
Here, each selection is called a combination of 3 different objects taken 2 at a time.
In a combination, the order is not important.
Now consider some more illustrations.
Twelve persons meet in a room and each shakes hand with all the others. How do
we determine the number of hand shakes. X shaking hands with Y and Y with X will
not be two different hand shakes. Here, order is not important. There will be as many
hand shakes as there are combinations of 12 different things taken 2 at a time.
Seven points lie on a circle. How many chords can be drawn by joining these
points pairwise? There will be as many chords as there are combinations of 7 different
things taken 2 at a time.
Now, we obtain the formula for finding the number of combinations of n different
objects taken r at a time, denoted by nCr..
Suppose we have 4 different objects A, B, C and D. Taking 2 at a time, if we have
to make combinations, these will be AB, AC, AD, BC, BD, CD. Here, AB and BA are
the same combination as order does not alter the combination. This is why we have not
included BA, CA, DA, CB, DB and DC in this list. There are as many as 6 combinations
of 4 different objects taken 2 at a time, i.e., 4C2 = 6.
Corresponding to each combination in the list, we can arrive at 2! permutations as
2 objects in each combination can be rearranged in 2! ways. Hence, the number of
permutations = 4C2 × 2!.
On the other hand, the number of permutations of 4 different things taken 2 at
a time = 4P2.
4!
4
P2 = 4C2 × 2! or = 4C2
Therefore
( − )
4 2 ! 2!
Now, let us suppose that we have 5 different objects A, B, C, D, E. Taking 3 at a
time, if we have to make combinations, these will be ABC, ABD, ABE, BCD, BCE,
CDE, ACE, ACD, ADE, BDE. Corresponding to each of these 5C3 combinations, there
are 3! permutations, because, the three objects in each combination can be

2018-19
150 MATHEMATICS

rearranged in 3 ! ways. Therefore, the total of permutations = 5 C3 × 3!

5!
5
P3 = 5C3 × 3! = 5 C3
Therefore or
( )
5 − 3 ! 3!
These examples suggest the following theorem showing relationship between
permutaion and combination:
Theorem 5 n Pr = n C r r! , 0 < r ≤ n.

Proof Corresponding to each combination of nCr, we have r ! permutations, because

r objects in every combination can be rearranged in r ! ways.
Hence, the total number of permutations of n different things taken r at a time
is nCr × r!. On the other hand, it is n Pr . Thus
n
Pr = n C r × r! , 0 < r ≤ n .

n! n!
Remarks 1. From above ( n − r )! = C r × r! , i.e., Cr =
n n
r!( n − r )! .

n!
In particular, if r = n , Cn = = 1.
n
n! 0!
2. We define nC0 = 1, i.e., the number of combinations of n different things taken
nothing at all is considered to be 1. Counting combinations is merely counting the
number of ways in which some or all objects at a time are selected. Selecting
nothing at all is the same as leaving behind all the objects and we know that there
is only one way of doing so. This way we define nC0 = 1.
n! n!
3. As = 1 = n C0 , the formula n Cr = is applicable for r = 0 also.
0!( n − 0 )! r ! ( − r )!
n

Hence

n n!
Cr =
r ! (n − r ) ! , 0 ≤ r ≤ n.

n! n!
4.
n
Cn− r = = n − r !r ! = n C r ,
( n − r )!( n − ( n − r ))! ( )

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 151

i.e., selecting r objects out of n objects is same as rejecting (n – r) objects.

5. Ca = nCb ⇒ a = b or a = n – b, i.e., n = a + b
n

n +1
Theorem 6 n
C r + n C r −1 = Cr

n! n!
Proof We have
n
Cr + n Cr −1 = +
r!( n − r )! ( r − 1)!( n − r + 1)!

n! n!
= +
r × ( r − 1)!( n − r )! ( r − 1)!( n − r + 1) ( n − r )!

n! 1 1 
+
( r − 1)!( n − r )!  r n − r + 1 

=

n!
×
n − r +1 + r ( n + 1)! = n +1 C
= =
( r − 1)!( n − r )! r ( n − r + 1) r!( n + 1 − r )! r

Example 17 If n C9 = n C8 , find n C17 .

Solution We have n C9 = n C8

n! n!
=
i.e., 9!( n − 9 )! ( n − 8 )! 8!

1 1
or = or n – 8 = 9 or n = 17
9 n −8
Therefore n
C17 = 17 C17 = 1 .
Example 18 A committee of 3 persons is to be constituted from a group of 2 men and
3 women. In how many ways can this be done? How many of these committees would
consist of 1 man and 2 women?
Solution Here, order does not matter. Therefore, we need to count combinations.
There will be as many committees as there are combinations of 5 different persons
5! 4 × 5
taken 3 at a time. Hence, the required number of ways = C3 = = = 10 .
5
3! 2! 2
Now, 1 man can be selected from 2 men in 2C1 ways and 2 women can be
selected from 3 women in 3C2 ways. Therefore, the required number of committees

2018-19
152 MATHEMATICS

2! 3!
= C1 × C2 = × = 6.
2 3
1! 1! 2! 1!

Example 19 What is the number of ways of choosing 4 cards from a pack of 52

playing cards? In how many of these
(i) four cards are of the same suit,
(ii) four cards belong to four different suits,
(iii) are face cards,
(iv) two are red cards and two are black cards,
(v) cards are of the same colour?
Solution There will be as many ways of choosing 4 cards from 52 cards as there are
combinations of 52 different things, taken 4 at a time. Therefore
52! 49 × 50 × 51× 52
The required number of ways =
52
C4 = =
4! 48! 2× 3× 4
= 270725
(i) There are four suits: diamond, club, spade, heart and there are 13 cards of each
suit. Therefore, there are 13C4 ways of choosing 4 diamonds. Similarly, there are
13
C4 ways of choosing 4 clubs, 13C4 ways of choosing 4 spades and 13C4 ways of
choosing 4 hearts. Therefore
The required number of ways = 13C4 + 13C4 + 13C4 + 13C4.
13!
= 4× = 2860
4! 9!
(ii) There are13 cards in each suit.
Therefore, there are 13C1 ways of choosing 1 card from 13 cards of diamond,
13
C1 ways of choosing 1 card from 13 cards of hearts, 13C1 ways of choosing 1
card from 13 cards of clubs, 13C1 ways of choosing 1 card from 13 cards of
spades. Hence, by multiplication principle, the required number of ways
= 13C1 × 13C1 × 13C1× 13C1 = 134
(iii) There are 12 face cards and 4 are to be selected out of these 12 cards. This can be
12!
done in 12C4 ways. Therefore, the required number of ways = = 495 .
4! 8!

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 153

(iv) There are 26 red cards and 26 black cards. Therefore, the required number of
ways = 26C2 × 26C2
2
 26! 
 = (325) = 105625
2
=
 2! 24! 
26
(v) 4 red cards can be selected out of 26 red cards in C 4 ways.
4 black cards can be selected out of 26 black cards in 26C4ways.
Therefore, the required number of ways = 26C4 + 26C4
26!
= 2× = 29900.
4! 22!

EXERCISE 7.4
1. If nC8 = nC2, find nC2.
2. Determine n if
(i) 2nC3 : nC3 = 12 : 1 (ii) 2nC3 : nC3 = 11 : 1
3. How many chords can be drawn through 21 points on a circle?
4. In how many ways can a team of 3 boys and 3 girls be selected from 5 boys and
4 girls?
5. Find the number of ways of selecting 9 balls from 6 red balls, 5 white balls and 5
blue balls if each selection consists of 3 balls of each colour.
6. Determine the number of 5 card combinations out of a deck of 52 cards if there
is exactly one ace in each combination.
7. In how many ways can one select a cricket team of eleven from 17 players in
which only 5 players can bowl if each cricket team of 11 must include exactly 4
bowlers?
8. A bag contains 5 black and 6 red balls. Determine the number of ways in which
2 black and 3 red balls can be selected.
9. In how many ways can a student choose a programme of 5 courses if 9 courses
are available and 2 specific courses are compulsory for every student?

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 20 How many words, with or without meaning, each of 3 vowels and 2
consonants can be formed from the letters of the word INVOLUTE ?
Solution In the word INVOLUTE, there are 4 vowels, namely, I,O,E,Uand 4
consonants, namely, N, V, L and T.

2018-19
154 MATHEMATICS

The number of ways of selecting 3 vowels out of 4 = 4C3 = 4.

The number of ways of selecting 2 consonants out of 4 = 4C2 = 6.
Therefore, the number of combinations of 3 vowels and 2 consonants is
4 × 6 = 24.
Now, each of these 24 combinations has 5 letters which can be arranged among
themselves in 5 ! ways. Therefore, the required number of different words is
24 × 5 ! = 2880.
Example 21 A group consists of 4 girls and 7 boys. In how many ways can a team of
5 members be selected if the team has (i) no girl ? (ii) at least one boy and one girl ?
(iii) at least 3 girls ?
Solution (i) Since, the team will not include any girl, therefore, only boys are to be
selected. 5 boys out of 7 boys can be selected in 7C5 ways. Therefore, the required
7! 6× 7
= C5 = 5! 2! = 2 = 21
7
number of ways

(ii) Since, at least one boy and one girl are to be there in every team. Therefore, the
team can consist of
(a) 1 boy and 4 girls (b) 2 boys and 3 girls
(c) 3 boys and 2 girls (d) 4 boys and 1 girl.
1 boy and 4 girls can be selected in 7C1 × 4C4 ways.
2 boys and 3 girls can be selected in 7C2 × 4C3 ways.
3 boys and 2 girls can be selected in 7C3 × 4C2 ways.
4 boys and 1 girl can be selected in 7C4 × 4C1 ways.
Therefore, the required number of ways
= 7C1 × 4C4 + 7C2 × 4C3 + 7C3 × 4C2 + 7C4 × 4C1
= 7 + 84 + 210 + 140 = 441
(iii) Since, the team has to consist of at least 3 girls, the team can consist of
(a) 3 girls and 2 boys, or (b) 4 girls and 1 boy.
Note that the team cannot have all 5 girls, because, the group has only 4 girls.
3 girls and 2 boys can be selected in 4C3 × 7C2 ways.
4 girls and 1 boy can be selected in 4C4 × 7C1 ways.
Therefore, the required number of ways
= 4C3 × 7C2 + 4C4 × 7C1 = 84 + 7 = 91

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 155

Example 22 Find the number of words with or without meaning which can be made
using all the letters of the word AGAIN. If these words are written as in a dictionary,
what will be the 50th word?
Solution There are 5 letters in the word AGAIN, in which A appears 2 times. Therefore,
5!
the required number of words = = 60 .
2!
To get the number of words starting with A, we fix the letter A at the extreme left
position, we then rearrange the remaining 4 letters taken all at a time. There will be as
many arrangements of these 4 letters taken 4 at a time as there are permutations of 4
different things taken 4 at a time. Hence, the number of words starting with
4!
A = 4! = 24. Then, starting with G, the number of words = = 12 as after placing G
2!
at the extreme left position, we are left with the letters A, A, I and N. Similarly, there
are 12 words starting with the next letter I. Total number of words so far obtained
= 24 + 12 + 12 =48.
The 49th word is NAAGI. The 50th word is NAAIG.
Example 23 How many numbers greater than 1000000 can be formed by using the
digits 1, 2, 0, 2, 4, 2, 4?
Solution Since, 1000000 is a 7-digit number and the number of digits to be used is also
7. Therefore, the numbers to be counted will be 7-digit only. Also, the numbers have to
be greater than 1000000, so they can begin either with 1, 2 or 4.
6! 4 × 5 × 6
The number of numbers beginning with 1 = = = 60, as when 1 is
3! 2! 2
fixed at the extreme left position, the remaining digits to be rearranged will be 0, 2, 2, 2,
4, 4, in which there are 3, 2s and 2, 4s.
Total numbers begining with 2
6! 3× 4 × 5 × 6
= = = 180
2! 2! 2

6!
and total numbers begining with 4 = = 4 × 5 × 6 = 120
3!

2018-19
156 MATHEMATICS

Therefore, the required number of numbers = 60 + 180 + 120 = 360.

Alternative Method
7!
The number of 7-digit arrangements, clearly, 3! 2! = 420 . But, this will include those

numbers also, which have 0 at the extreme left position. The number of such
6!
arrangements 3! 2! (by fixing 0 at the extreme left position) = 60.

Therefore, the required number of numbers = 420 – 60 = 360.

 Note If one or more than one digits given in the list is repeated, it will be
understood that in any number, the digits can be used as many times as is given in
the list, e.g., in the above example 1 and 0 can be used only once whereas 2 and 4
can be used 3 times and 2 times, respectively.
Example 24 In how many ways can 5 girls and 3 boys be seated in a row so that no
two boys are together?
Solution Let us first seat the 5 girls. This can be done in 5! ways. For each such
arrangement, the three boys can be seated only at the cross marked places.
× G × G × G × G × G ×.
There are 6 cross marked places and the three boys can be seated in 6P3 ways.
Hence, by multiplication principle, the total number of ways
6!
= 5! × 6P3 = 5!×
3!
= 4 × 5 × 2 × 3 × 4 × 5 × 6 = 14400.

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 7

1. How many words, with or without meaning, each of 2 vowels and 3 consonants
can be formed from the letters of the word DAUGHTER ?
2. How many words, with or without meaning, can be formed using all the letters of
the word EQUATION at a time so that the vowels and consonants occur together?
3. A committee of 7 has to be formed from 9 boys and 4 girls. In how many ways
can this be done when the committee consists of:
(i) exactly 3 girls ? (ii) atleast 3 girls ? (iii) atmost 3 girls ?
4. If the different permutations of all the letter of the word EXAMINATION are

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 157

listed as in a dictionary, how many words are there in this list before the first
word starting with E ?
5. How many 6-digit numbers can be formed from the digits 0, 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9
which are divisible by 10 and no digit is repeated ?
6. The English alphabet has 5 vowels and 21 consonants. How many words with
two different vowels and 2 different consonants can be formed from the
alphabet ?
7. In an examination, a question paper consists of 12 questions divided into two
parts i.e., Part I and Part II, containing 5 and 7 questions, respectively. A student
is required to attempt 8 questions in all, selecting at least 3 from each part. In
how many ways can a student select the questions ?
8. Determine the number of 5-card combinations out of a deck of 52 cards if each
selection of 5 cards has exactly one king.
9. It is required to seat 5 men and 4 women in a row so that the women occupy the
even places. How many such arrangements are possible ?
10. From a class of 25 students, 10 are to be chosen for an excursion party. There
are 3 students who decide that either all of them will join or none of them will
join. In how many ways can the excursion party be chosen ?
11. In how many ways can the letters of the word ASSASSINATION be arranged
so that all the S’s are together ?

Summary
 Fundamental principle of counting If an event can occur in m different
ways, following which another event can occur in n different ways, then the
total number of occurrence of the events in the given order is m × n.
 The number of permutations of n different things taken r at a time, where
n!
repetition is not allowed, is denoted by nPr and is given by nPr =
(n − r )! ,
where 0 ≤ r ≤ n.
 n! = 1 × 2 × 3 × ...×n
 n! = n × (n – 1) !
 The number of permutations of n different things, taken r at a time, where
repeatition is allowed, is nr.
 The number of permutations of n objects taken all at a time, where p1 objects

2018-19
158 MATHEMATICS

are of first kind, p2 objects are of the second kind, ..., pk objects are of the kth
n!
kind and rest, if any, are all different is p ! p !... p ! .
1 2 k

 The number of combinations of n different things taken r at a time, denoted by

n!
Cr , is given by nCr = =
r!( n − r )! , 0 ≤ r ≤ n.
n

Historical Note
The concepts of permutations and combinations can be traced back to the advent
of Jainism in India and perhaps even earlier. The credit, however, goes to the
Jains who treated its subject matter as a self-contained topic in mathematics,
under the name Vikalpa.
Among the Jains, Mahavira, (around 850) is perhaps the world’s first
mathematician credited with providing the general formulae for permutations and
combinations.
In the 6th century B.C., Sushruta, in his medicinal work, Sushruta Samhita,
asserts that 63 combinations can be made out of 6 different tastes, taken one at a
time, two at a time, etc. Pingala, a Sanskrit scholar around third century B.C.,
gives the method of determining the number of combinations of a given number
of letters, taken one at a time, two at a time, etc. in his work Chhanda Sutra.
Bhaskaracharya (born 1114) treated the subject matter of permutations and
combinations under the name Anka Pasha in his famous work Lilavati. In addition
to the general formulae for nC r and nP r already provided by Mahavira,
Bhaskaracharya gives several important theorems and results concerning the
subject.
Outside India, the subject matter of permutations and combinations had its
humble beginnings in China in the famous book I–King (Book of changes). It is
difficult to give the approximate time of this work, since in 213 B.C., the emperor
had ordered all books and manuscripts in the country to be burnt which fortunately
was not completely carried out. Greeks and later Latin writers also did some
scattered work on the theory of permutations and combinations.
Some Arabic and Hebrew writers used the concepts of permutations and
combinations in studying astronomy. Rabbi ben Ezra, for instance, determined
the number of combinations of known planets taken two at a time, three at a time
and so on. This was around 1140. It appears that Rabbi ben Ezra did not know

2018-19
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 159

the formula for nCr. However, he was aware that nCr = nCn–r for specific values
n and r. In 1321, Levi Ben Gerson, another Hebrew writer came up with the
formulae for nPr , nPn and the general formula for nCr.
The first book which gives a complete treatment of the subject matter of
permutations and combinations is Ars Conjectandi written by a Swiss, Jacob
Bernoulli (1654 – 1705), posthumously published in 1713. This book contains
essentially the theory of permutations and combinations as is known today.

— —

2018-19
 Chapter 8
BINOMIAL THEOREM

vMathematics is a most exact science and its conclusions are capable of

absolute proofs. – C.P. STEINMETZv

8.1 Introduction
In earlier classes, we have learnt how to find the squares
and cubes of binomials like a + b and a – b. Using them, we
could evaluate the numerical values of numbers like
(98)2 = (100 – 2)2, (999)3 = (1000 – 1)3, etc. However, for
higher powers like (98)5, (101)6, etc., the calculations become
difficult by using repeated multiplication. This difficulty was
overcome by a theorem known as binomial theorem. It gives
an easier way to expand (a + b)n, where n is an integer or a
rational number. In this Chapter, we study binomial theorem
for positive integral indices only.
Blaise Pascal
8.2 Binomial Theorem for Positive Integral Indices (1623-1662)
Let us have a look at the following identities done earlier:
(a+ b)0 = 1 a+b≠0
(a+ b)1 = a + b
(a+ b)2 = a2 + 2ab + b2
(a+ b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3
(a+ b)4 = (a + b)3 (a + b) = a4 + 4a3b + 6a2b2 + 4ab3 + b4
In these expansions, we observe that
(i) The total number of terms in the expansion is one more than the index. For
example, in the expansion of (a + b)2 , number of terms is 3 whereas the index of
(a + b)2 is 2.
(ii) Powers of the first quantity ‘a’ go on decreasing by 1 whereas the powers of the
second quantity ‘b’ increase by 1, in the successive terms.
(iii) In each term of the expansion, the sum of the indices of a and b is the same and
is equal to the index of a + b.

2018-19
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 161

We now arrange the coefficients in these expansions as follows (Fig 8.1):

Fig 8.1
Do we observe any pattern in this table that will help us to write the next row? Yes we
do. It can be seen that the addition of 1’s in the row for index 1 gives rise to 2 in the row
for index 2. The addition of 1, 2 and 2, 1 in the row for index 2, gives rise to 3 and 3 in
the row for index 3 and so on. Also, 1 is present at the beginning and at the end of each
row. This can be continued till any index of our interest.
We can extend the pattern given in Fig 8.2 by writing a few more rows.

Fig 8.2

Pascal’s Triangle
The structure given in Fig 8.2 looks like a triangle with 1 at the top vertex and running
down the two slanting sides. This array of numbers is known as Pascal’s triangle,
after the name of French mathematician Blaise Pascal. It is also known as Meru
Prastara by Pingla.
Expansions for the higher powers of a binomial are also possible by using Pascal’s
triangle. Let us expand (2x + 3y)5 by using Pascal’s triangle. The row for index 5 is
1 5 10 10 5 1
Using this row and our observations (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
(2x + 3y)5 = (2x)5 + 5(2x)4 (3y) + 10(2x)3 (3y)2 +10 (2x)2 (3y)3 + 5(2x)(3y)4 +(3y)5
= 32x5 + 240x4y + 720x3y2 + 1080x2y3 + 810xy4 + 243y5.

2018-19
162 MATHEMATICS

Now, if we want to find the expansion of (2x + 3y)12, we are first required to get
the row for index 12. This can be done by writing all the rows of the Pascal’s triangle
till index 12. This is a slightly lengthy process. The process, as you observe, will become
more difficult, if we need the expansions involving still larger powers.
We thus try to find a rule that will help us to find the expansion of the binomial for
any power without writing all the rows of the Pascal’s triangle, that come before the
row of the desired index.
For this, we make use of the concept of combinations studied earlier to rewrite
n!
n
Cr =
the numbers in the Pascal’s triangle. We know that
r!(n – r )! , 0 ≤ r ≤ n and
n is a non-negative integer. Also, nC0 = 1 = nCn
The Pascal’s triangle can now be rewritten as (Fig 8.3)

Fig 8.3 Pascal’s triangle

Observing this pattern, we can now write the row of the Pascal’s triangle for any index
without writing the earlier rows. For example, for the index 7 the row would be
7
C0 7C1 7C2 7C3 7C4 7C5 7C6 7C7.
Thus, using this row and the observations (i), (ii) and (iii), we have
(a + b)7 = 7C0 a7 + 7C1a6b + 7C2a5b2 + 7C3a4b3 + 7C4a3b4 + 7C5a2b5 + 7C6ab6 + 7C7b7
An expansion of a binomial to any positive integral index say n can now be visualised
using these observations. We are now in a position to write the expansion of a binomial
to any positive integral index.

2018-19
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 163

8.2.1 Binomial theorem for any positive integer n,

(a + b)n = nC0an + nC1an–1b + nC2an–2 b2 + ...+ nCn – 1a.bn–1 + nCnbn
Proof The proof is obtained by applying principle of mathematical induction.
Let the given statement be
P(n) : (a + b)n = nC0an + nC1an – 1b + nC2an – 2b2 + ...+ nCn–1a.bn – 1 + nCnbn
For n = 1, we have
P (1) : (a + b)1 = 1C0a1 + 1C1b1 = a + b
Thus, P (1) is true.
Suppose P (k) is true for some positive integer k, i.e.
(a + b)k = kC0ak + kC1ak – 1b + kC2ak – 2b2 + ...+ kCkbk ... (1)
We shall prove that P(k + 1) is also true, i.e.,
(a + b)k + 1 = k+1
C0 ak + 1 + k+1
C 1 ak b + k+1
C2 ak – 1b2 + ...+ k+1
Ck+1 bk + 1
Now, (a + b)k + 1 = (a + b) (a + b)k
= (a + b) (kC0 ak + kC1ak – 1 b + kC2 ak – 2 b2 +...+ kCk – 1 abk – 1 + kCk bk)
[from (1)]
= kC0 ak + 1 + kC1 akb + kC2ak – 1b2 +...+ kCk – 1 a2bk – 1 + kCk abk + kC0 akb
+ kC1ak – 1b2 + kC2ak – 2b3+...+ kCk-1abk + kCkbk + 1
[by actual multiplication]
= kC0ak + 1 + (kC1+ kC0) akb + (kC2 + kC1)ak – 1b2 + ...
+ (kCk+ kCk–1) abk + kCkbk + 1 [grouping like terms]
= k + 1C0a k + 1 + k + 1C1akb + k + 1C2 ak – 1b2 +...+ k + 1Ckabk + k + 1Ck + 1 bk +1
k+1 k+1
(by using C0=1, kCr + kCr–1 = Cr and k
Ck = 1= k + 1Ck + 1)
Thus, it has been proved that P (k + 1) is true whenever P(k) is true. Therefore, by
principle of mathematical induction, P(n) is true for every positive integer n.
We illustrate this theorem by expanding (x + 2)6:
(x + 2)6 = 6C0x6 + 6C1x5.2 + 6C2x422 + 6C3x3.23 + 6C4x2.24 + 6C5x.25 + 6C6.26.
= x6 + 12x5 + 60x4 + 160x3 + 240x2 + 192x + 64
Thus (x + 2)6 = x6 + 12x5 + 60x4 + 160x3 + 240x2 + 192x + 64.

2018-19
164 MATHEMATICS

Observations
n

1. The notation ∑
k =0
n
C k a n− k b k stands for

C0a b + C1an–1b1 + ...+ nC ran–rbr + ...+nCnan–nbn, where b0 = 1 = an–n.

n n 0 n

Hence the theorem can also be stated as

n
( a + b) n = ∑ n C k a n − k b k .
k =0

2. The coefficients nCr occuring in the binomial theorem are known as binomial
coefficients.
3. There are (n+1) terms in the expansion of (a+b)n, i.e., one more than the index.
4. In the successive terms of the expansion the index of a goes on decreasing by
unity. It is n in the first term, (n–1) in the second term, and so on ending with zero
in the last term. At the same time the index of b increases by unity, starting with
zero in the first term, 1 in the second and so on ending with n in the last term.
5. In the expansion of (a+b)n, the sum of the indices of a and b is n + 0 = n in the
first term, (n – 1) + 1 = n in the second term and so on 0 + n = n in the last term.
Thus, it can be seen that the sum of the indices of a and b is n in every term of the
expansion.
8.2.2 Some special cases In the expansion of (a + b)n,
(i) Taking a = x and b = – y, we obtain
(x – y)n = [x + (–y)]n
= nC0xn + nC1xn – 1(–y) + nC2xn–2(–y)2 + nC3xn–3(–y)3 + ... + nCn (–y)n
= nC0xn – nC1xn – 1y + nC2xn – 2y2 – nC3xn – 3y3 + ... + (–1)n nCn yn
Thus (x–y)n = nC0xn – nC1xn – 1 y + nC2xn – 2 y2 + ... + (–1)n nCn yn
Using this, we have (x–2y)5 = 5
C0x5 – 5C1x4 (2y) + 5C2x3 (2y)2 – 5C3x2 (2y)3 +
5
C4 x(2y)4 – 5C5(2y)5
= x5 –10x4y + 40x3y2 – 80x2y3 + 80xy4 – 32y5.
(ii) Taking a = 1, b = x, we obtain
(1 + x)n = nC0(1)n + nC1(1)n – 1x + nC2(1)n – 2 x2 + ... + nCnxn
= nC0 + nC1x + nC2x2 + nC3x3 + ... + nCnxn
Thus (1 + x)n = nC0 + nC1x + nC2x2 + nC3x3 + ... + nCnxn

2018-19
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 165

In particular, for x = 1, we have

2n = nC0 + nC1 + nC2 + ... + nCn.
(iii) Taking a = 1, b = – x, we obtain
(1– x)n = nC0 – nC1x + nC2x2 – ... + (– 1)n nCnxn
In particular, for x = 1, we get
0 = nC0 – nC1 + nC2 – ... + (–1)n nCn
4
 2 3
Example 1 Expand  x +  , x ≠ 0
 x
Solution By using binomial theorem, we have
4 2 3 4
3 3  3  3  3
= C0(x ) + C1(x )   + 4C2(x2)2   + 4C3(x2)   + 4C4  
2
x + 4 2 4 4 2 3
x  x  x  x  x
3 9 27 81
= x8 + 4.x6 . + 6.x4 . 2 + 4.x2. 3 + 4
x x x x
108 81
= x8 + 12x5 + 54x2 + + .
x x4
Example 2 Compute (98)5.
Solution We express 98 as the sum or difference of two numbers whose powers are
easier to calculate, and then use Binomial Theorem.
Write 98 = 100 – 2
Therefore, (98)5 = (100 – 2)5
= 5C0 (100)5 – 5C1 (100)4.2 + 5C2 (100)322
– 5C3 (100)2 (2)3 + 5C4 (100) (2)4 – 5C5 (2)5
= 10000000000 – 5 × 100000000 × 2 + 10 × 1000000 × 4 – 10 ×10000
× 8 + 5 × 100 × 16 – 32

= 10040008000 – 1000800032 = 9039207968.

Example 3 Which is larger (1.01)1000000 or 10,000?
Solution Splitting 1.01 and using binomial theorem to write the first few terms we
have

2018-19
166 MATHEMATICS

(1.01)1000000 = (1 + 0.01)1000000
1000000 1000000
= C0 + C1(0.01) + other positive terms

= 1 + 1000000 × 0.01 + other positive terms

= 1 + 10000 + other positive terms

> 10000

Hence (1.01)1000000 > 10000

Example 4 Using binomial theorem, prove that 6n–5n always leaves remainder
1 when divided by 25.
Solution For two numbers a and b if we can find numbers q and r such that
a = bq + r, then we say that b divides a with q as quotient and r as remainder. Thus, in
order to show that 6n – 5n leaves remainder 1 when divided by 25, we prove that
6n – 5n = 25k + 1, where k is some natural number.
We have
(1 + a)n = nC0 + nC1a + nC2a2 + ... + nCnan
For a = 5, we get
(1 + 5)n = nC0 + nC15 + nC252 + ... + nCn5n

i.e. (6)n = 1 + 5n + 52.nC2 + 53.nC3 + ... + 5n

i.e. 6n – 5n = 1+52 (nC2 + nC35 + ... + 5n-2)

or 6n – 5n = 1+ 25 (nC2 + 5 .nC3 + ... + 5n-2)

or 6n – 5n = 25k+1 where k = nC2 + 5 .nC3 + ... + 5n–2.

This shows that when divided by 25, 6n – 5n leaves remainder 1.

EXERCISE 8.1
Expand each of the expressions in Exercises 1 to 5.
5
2 x
1. (1–2x)5 2.  –  3. (2x – 3)6
 x 2

2018-19
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 167

5 6
x 1  1
4.  +  5.  x + 
3 x  x
Using binomial theorem, evaluate each of the following:
6. (96)3 7. (102)5 8. (101)4
9. (99)5
10. Using Binomial Theorem, indicate which number is larger (1.1)10000 or 1000.
11. Find (a + b)4 – (a – b)4. Hence, evaluate ( 3 + 2)4 – ( 3 – 2 )4 .
12. Find (x + 1)6 + (x – 1)6. Hence or otherwise evaluate ( 2 + 1)6 + ( 2 – 1)6.
13. Show that 9n+1 – 8n – 9 is divisible by 64, whenever n is a positive integer.
n

14. Prove that ∑3

r =0
r n
C r = 4n .

8.3 General and Middle Terms

1. In the binomial expansion for (a + b)n, we observe that the first term is
n
C0an, the second term is nC1an–1b, the third term is nC2an–2b2, and so on. Looking
at the pattern of the successive terms we can say that the (r + 1)th term is
n
Cran–rbr. The (r + 1)th term is also called the general term of the expansion
(a + b)n. It is denoted by Tr+1. Thus Tr+1 = nCr an–rbr.
2. Regarding the middle term in the expansion (a + b)n, we have
(i) If n is even, then the number of terms in the expansion will be n + 1. Since
th
 n +1+1
n is even so n + 1 is odd. Therefore, the middle term is   , i.e.,
 2 
th
n 
 +1 term.
2 
th
8 
For example, in the expansion of (x + 2y) , the middle term is  +1  i.e.,
8
2 
5th term.

(ii) If n is odd, then n +1 is even, so there will be two middle terms in the

2018-19
168 MATHEMATICS

th
 n +1 
th
 n +1 
expansion, namely,   term and  + 1 term. So in the expansion
 2   2 
th th
 7 +1   7 +1 
(2x – y) , the middle terms are 
7  , i.e., 4th and  + 1 , i.e., 5th term.
 2   2 

2n th
 1  2 n +1 + 1 
3. In the expansion of  x +  , where x ≠ 0, the middle term is   ,
 x  2 
i.e., (n + 1)th term, as 2n is even.
n
1
It is given by Cnx   = 2nCn (constant).
2n n
x
This term is called the term independent of x or the constant term.
Example 5 Find a if the 17th and 18th terms of the expansion (2 + a)50 are equal.
Solution The (r + 1)th term of the expansion (x + y)n is given by Tr + 1 = nCrxn–ryr.
For the 17th term, we have, r + 1 = 17, i.e., r = 16
Therefore, T17 = T16 + 1 = 50C16 (2)50 – 16 a16
= 50C 16 234 a16.
Similarly, T18 = 50C 17 233 a17
Given that T17 = T 18
50
So C 16 (2)34 a16 = 50C 17 (2)33 a17

50
C 16 . 2 34 a 17
Therefore 50
=
C 17 . 2 33 a 16
50
C16 × 2 50! 17! . 33!
i.e., a= 50 = × × 2 =1
C17 16!34! 50!

Example 6 Show that the middle term in the expansion of (1+x) 2n is

1.3.5...(2n − 1)
2n xn, where n is a positive integer.
n!

2018-19
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 169

th
 2n 
Solution As 2n is even, the middle term of the expansion (1 + x)2n is  + 1 ,
 2 
i.e., (n + 1)th term which is given by,
(2n)! n
Tn+1 = 2nCn(1)2n – n(x)n = 2nCnxn = x
n! n!

2n (2n − 1) (2n − 2) ...4.3.2.1 n

= x
n! n!

1.2.3.4...(2n − 2) (2n − 1) (2n) n

= x
n!n!
[1.3.5 ... (2n – 1)][2.4.6...(2n)] n
= x
n!n!

[1.3.5...(2n − 1)]2 n [1.2.3...n] n

= x
n!n!
[1.3.5...(2n − 1)] n! n n
= 2 .x
n! n!

1.3.5...(2n − 1) n n
= 2 x
n!
Example 7 Find the coefficient of x6y3 in the expansion of (x + 2y)9.
Solution Suppose x6y3 occurs in the (r + 1)th term of the expansion (x + 2y)9.
Now Tr+1 = 9Cr x9 – r (2y)r = 9Cr 2 r . x9 – r . y r .
Comparing the indices of x as well as y in x6y3 and in Tr + 1 , we get r = 3.
Thus, the coefficient of x6y3 is
9! 3 9.8.7 3
9
C3 2 3 = .2 = . 2 = 672.
3! 6! 3.2

Example 8 The second, third and fourth terms in the binomial expansion (x + a)n are
240, 720 and 1080, respectively. Find x, a and n.
Solution Given that second term T2 = 240

2018-19
170 MATHEMATICS

We have T2 = nC1xn – 1 . a
n
So C1xn–1 . a = 240 ... (1)
Similarly n
C2xn–2 a2 = 720 ... (2)
n n–3 3
and C3x a = 1080 ... (3)
Dividing (2) by (1), we get
n
C 2 x n− 2 a 2 720 (n − 1)! a
= i.e., . =6
n
C1 x n −1a 240 (n − 2)! x
a 6
or = ... (4)
x ( n − 1)
Dividing (3) by (2), we have
a 9
= ... (5)
x 2( n − 2)
From (4) and (5),
6 9
=
n −1 2 (n − 2) . Thus, n = 5

a 3
Hence, from (1), 5x4a = 240, and from (4), =
x 2
Solving these equations for a and x, we get x = 2 and a = 3.
Example 9 The coefficients of three consecutive terms in the expansion of (1 + a)n
are in the ratio1: 7 : 42. Find n.
Solution Suppose the three consecutive terms in the expansion of (1 + a)n are
(r – 1)th, rth and (r + 1)th terms.
The (r – 1)th term is nCr – 2 ar – 2, and its coefficient is nCr – 2. Similarly, the coefficients
of rth and (r + 1)th terms are nCr – 1 and nCr , respectively.
Since the coefficients are in the ratio 1 : 7 : 42, so we have,
n
Cr −2 1
n
= , i.e., n – 8r + 9 = 0 ... (1)
C r −1 7
n
C r −1 7
and n
= , i.e., n – 7r + 1 = 0 ... (2)
Cr 42
Solving equations(1) and (2), we get, n = 55.

2018-19
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 171

EXERCISE 8.2

Find the coefficient of

1. x5 in (x + 3)8 2. a5b7 in (a – 2b)12 .
Write the general term in the expansion of
3. (x2 – y)6 4. (x2 – yx)12, x ≠ 0.
5. Find the 4th term in the expansion of (x – 2y)12.
18
 1 
6. Find the 13 term in the expansion of  9 x −
th
 , x ≠ 0.
 3 x

Find the middle terms in the expansions of

7 10
 x3  x 
 3 −  8.  + 9 y 
6 
7. .
  3 
9. In the expansion of (1 + a)m+n, prove that coefficients of am and an are equal.
10. The coefficients of the (r – 1)th, rth and (r + 1)th terms in the expansion of (x + 1)n
are in the ratio 1 : 3 : 5. Find n and r.
11. Prove that the coefficient of xn in the expansion of (1 + x)2n is twice the coefficient
of xn in the expansion of (1 + x)2n – 1.
12. Find a positive value of m for which the coefficient of x2 in the expansion
(1 + x)m is 6.

Miscellaneous Examples
6
3 2 1 
Example 10 Find the term independent of x in the expansion of  x −  .
2 3x 

6−r r
3 2  1 
− 
6
Solution We have Tr + 1 = Cr  x 
2   3x 

6−r r
3 1  1 
(x )
6−r
6
= Cr  
2
( − 1)r    r
2  x 3 

2018-19
172 MATHEMATICS

(3)6 − 2 r 12 − 3r
= ( − 1)
r 6
Cr x
(2) 6 − r
The term will be independent of x if the index of x is zero, i.e., 12 – 3r = 0. Thus, r = 4
(3) 6−8 5
th
Hence 5 term is independent of x and is given by (– 1) C4 = .
4 6
(2) 6− 4 12
Example 11 If the coefficients of ar – 1, ar and ar + 1 in the expansion of (1 + a)n are in
arithmetic progression, prove that n2 – n(4r + 1) + 4r2 – 2 = 0.
Solution The (r + 1)th term in the expansion is nCrar. Thus it can be seen that ar occurs
in the (r + 1)th term, and its coefficient is nCr. Hence the coefficients of ar – 1, ar and
ar + 1 are nCr – 1, nCr and nCr + 1, respectively. Since these coefficients are in arithmetic
progression, so we have, nCr – 1+ nCr + 1 = 2.nCr. This gives
n! n! n!
+ =2×
(r − 1)!(n − r + 1)! (r + 1)!(n − r − 1)! r!(n − r )!
1 1
i.e. +
(r − 1)!(n − r + 1) (n − r ) (n − r − 1)! (r + 1) (r ) (r − 1)!(n − r − 1)!
1
=2×
r ( r − 1)! (n − r ) ( n − r − 1)!

1  1 1 
or (r − 1)! (n − r − 1)!  ( n – r ) ( n − r + 1) + ( r + 1) (r ) 
 
1
= 2×
( r − 1)! (n − r − 1)![r (n – r )]

1 1 2
i.e. + =
(n − r + 1) (n − r ) r (r + 1) r (n − r ) ,
r (r + 1) + (n − r )(n − r + 1) 2
or =
(n − r )(n − r + 1)r (r + 1) r (n − r )

or r(r + 1) + (n – r) (n – r + 1) = 2 (r + 1) (n – r + 1)
or r2 + r + n2 – nr + n – nr + r2 – r = 2(nr – r2 + r + n – r + 1)

2018-19
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 173

or n2 – 4nr – n + 4r2 – 2 = 0
i.e., n2 – n (4r + 1) + 4r2 – 2 = 0
Example 12 Show that the coefficient of the middle term in the expansion of (1 + x)2n is
equal to the sum of the coefficients of two middle terms in the expansion of (1 + x)2n – 1.
Solution As 2n is even so the expansion (1 + x)2n has only one middle term which is
th
 2n 
 + 1 i.e., (n + 1)th term.
 2 
The (n + 1)th term is 2nCnxn. The coefficient of xn is 2nCn
Similarly, (2n – 1) being odd, the other expansion has two middle terms,
th th
 2n − 1 + 1   2n − 1 + 1 
  and  + 1 i.e., nth and (n + 1)th terms. The coefficients of
 2   2 
2n – 1 2n – 1
these terms are Cn – 1 and Cn, respectively.
Now
2n – 1 2n – 1
Cn – 1 + Cn= 2nCn [As nCr – 1+ nCr = n+1
Cr]. as required.

Example 13 Find the coefficient of a4 in the product (1 + 2a)4 (2 – a)5 using binomial
theorem.
Solution We first expand each of the factors of the given product using Binomial
Theorem. We have
(1 + 2a)4 = 4C0 + 4C1 (2a) + 4C2 (2a)2 + 4C3 (2a)3 + 4C4 (2a)4
= 1 + 4 (2a) + 6(4a2) + 4 (8a3) + 16a4.
= 1 + 8a + 24a2 + 32a3 + 16a4
and (2 – a)5 = 5C0 (2)5 – 5C1 (2)4 (a) + 5C2 (2)3 (a)2 – 5C3 (2)2 (a)3
+ 5C4 (2) (a)4 – 5C5 (a)5
= 32 – 80a + 80a2 – 40a3 + 10a4 – a5
Thus (1 + 2a)4 (2 – a)5
= (1 + 8a + 24a2 + 32a3+ 16a4) (32 –80a + 80a2– 40a3 + 10a4– a5)
The complete multiplication of the two brackets need not be carried out. We write only
those terms which involve a4. This can be done if we note that ar. a4 – r = a4. The terms
containing a4 are
1 (10a4) + (8a) (–40a3) + (24a2) (80a2) + (32a3) (– 80a) + (16a4) (32) = – 438a4

2018-19
174 MATHEMATICS

Thus, the coefficient of a4 in the given product is – 438.

Example 14 Find the rth term from the end in the expansion of (x + a)n.
Solution There are (n + 1) terms in the expansion of (x + a)n. Observing the terms we
can say that the first term from the end is the last term, i.e., (n + 1)th term of the
expansion and n + 1 = (n + 1) – (1 – 1). The second term from the end is the nth term
of the expansion, and n = (n + 1) – (2 – 1). The third term from the end is the (n – 1)th
term of the expansion and n – 1 = (n + 1) – (3 – 1) and so on. Thus rth term from the
end will be term number (n + 1) – (r – 1) = (n – r + 2) of the expansion. And the
(n – r + 2)th term is nCn – r + 1 xr – 1 an – r + 1.
18
3 1 
Example 15 Find the term independent of x in the expansion of  x + 3  , x > 0.
 2 x
r
 1 
( x)
18 − r
18 3
Solution We have Tr + 1 = Cr  3 
2 x 
18 − r 18 − 2 r
1 1
= 18
Cr x 3 . =
18
Cr .x 3

r
r
2r
2 .x 3
18 − 2r
Since we have to find a term independent of x, i.e., term not having x, so take =0.
3
1
We get r = 9. The required term is 18C9 .
29
Example 16 The sum of the coefficients of the first three terms in the expansion of
m
 3 
 x − 2  , x ≠ 0, m being a natural number, is 559. Find the term of the expansion
 x 
containing x3.
m
 3 
Solution The coefficients of the first three terms of  x − 2  are mC0, (–3) mC1
 x 
m
and 9 C2. Therefore, by the given condition, we have
9m (m − 1)
m
C0 –3 mC1+ 9 mC2 = 559, i.e., 1 – 3m + = 559
2

2018-19
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 175

which gives m = 12 (m being a natural number).

r
 3 
Now Tr + 1 = 12
Cr x12 – r − 2  = 12
Cr (– 3)r . x12 – 3r
 x 

Since we need the term containing x3, so put 12 – 3r = 3 i.e., r = 3.

Thus, the required term is 12C3 (– 3)3 x3, i.e., – 5940 x3.
Example 17 If the coefficients of (r – 5)th and (2r – 1)th terms in the expansion of
(1 + x)34 are equal, find r.
Solution The coefficients of (r – 5)th and (2r – 1)th terms of the expansion (1 + x)34
are 34Cr – 6 and 34C2r – 2, respectively. Since they are equal so 34Cr – 6 = 34C2r – 2
Therefore, either r – 6 = 2r – 2 or r–6 = 34 – (2r – 2)
[Using the fact that if nCr = nCp, then either r = p or r = n – p]
So, we get r = – 4 or r = 14. r being a natural number, r = – 4 is not possible.
So, r = 14.

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 8

1. Find a, b and n in the expansion of (a + b)n if the first three terms of the expansion
are 729, 7290 and 30375, respectively.
2. Find a if the coefficients of x2 and x3 in the expansion of (3 + ax)9 are equal.
3. Find the coefficient of x5 in the product (1 + 2x)6 (1 – x)7 using binomial theorem.
4. If a and b are distinct integers, prove that a – b is a factor of an – bn, whenever
n is a positive integer.
[Hint write an = (a – b + b)n and expand]

( ) −( )
6 6
5. Evaluate 3+ 2 3− 2 .

( ) + (a )
4 4
6. Find the value of a + a − 1 − a2 − 1 .
2 2 2

7. Find an approximation of (0.99)5 using the first three terms of its expansion.
8. Find n, if the ratio of the fifth term from the beginning to the fifth term from the
n
4 1 
end in the expansion of  2 + 4  is 6 :1 .
 3

2018-19
176 MATHEMATICS

4
 x 2
9. Expand using Binomial Theorem  1 + −  , x ≠ 0 .
 2 x
2 2 3
10. Find the expansion of (3x – 2ax + 3a ) using binomial theorem.

Summary
® The expansion of a binomial forn anyn positive
n n
integral n is given by Binomial
n – 1 n n – 2 2
Theorem, which is (a + b) = C 0 a + C 1 a b + C 2a b + ...+
n
Cn – 1a.bn – 1 + nCnbn.
® The coefficients of the expansions are arranged in an array. This array is
called Pascal’s triangle.
® The general term of an expansion (a + b)n is Tr + 1 = nCran – r. br.
th
n 
® In the expansion (a + b)n, if n is even, then the middle term is the  2 + 1
th th
 n +1  n+1 
term.If n is odd, then the middle terms are   and  +1 terms.
 2   2 

Historical Note
The ancient Indian mathematicians knew about the coefficients in the
expansions of (x + y)n, 0 ≤ n ≤ 7. The arrangement of these coefficients was in
the form of a diagram called Meru-Prastara, provided by Pingla in his book
Chhanda shastra (200B.C.). This triangular arrangement is also found in the
work of Chinese mathematician Chu-shi-kie in 1303. The term binomial coefficients
was first introduced by the German mathematician, Michael Stipel (1486-1567) in
approximately 1544. Bombelli (1572) also gave the coefficients in the expansion of
(a + b)n, for n = 1,2 ...,7 and Oughtred (1631) gave them for n = 1, 2,..., 10. The
arithmetic triangle, popularly known as Pascal’s triangle and similar to the Meru-
Prastara of Pingla was constructed by the French mathematician Blaise Pascal
(1623-1662) in 1665.
The present form of the binomial theorem for integral values of n appeared in
Trate du triange arithmetic, written by Pascal and published posthumously in
1665.

—v —

2018-19
 Chapter 9
SEQUENCES AND SERIES

vNatural numbers are the product of human spirit. – DEDEKIND v

9.1 Introduction
In mathematics, the word, “sequence” is used in much the
same way as it is in ordinary English. When we say that a
collection of objects is listed in a sequence, we usually mean
that the collection is ordered in such a way that it has an
identified first member, second member, third member and
so on. For example, population of human beings or bacteria
at different times form a sequence. The amount of money
deposited in a bank, over a number of years form a sequence.
Depreciated values of certain commodity occur in a
sequence. Sequences have important applications in several Fibonacci
spheres of human activities. (1175-1250)
Sequences, following specific patterns are called progressions. In previous class,
we have studied about arithmetic progression (A.P). In this Chapter, besides discussing
more about A.P.; arithmetic mean, geometric mean, relationship between A.M.
and G.M., special series in forms of sum to n terms of consecutive natural numbers,
sum to n terms of squares of natural numbers and sum to n terms of cubes of
natural numbers will also be studied.
9.2 Sequences
Let us consider the following examples:
Assume that there is a generation gap of 30 years, we are asked to find the
number of ancestors, i.e., parents, grandparents, great grandparents, etc. that a person
might have over 300 years.

Here, the total number of generations = 300 = 10

30

2018-19
178 MATHEMATICS

The number of person’s ancestors for the first, second, third, …, tenth generations are
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, …, 1024. These numbers form what we call a sequence.
Consider the successive quotients that we obtain in the division of 10 by 3 at
different steps of division. In this process we get 3,3.3,3.33,3.333, ... and so on. These
quotients also form a sequence. The various numbers occurring in a sequence are
called its terms. We denote the terms of a sequence by a1, a2, a3, …, an, …, etc., the
subscripts denote the position of the term. The nth term is the number at the nth position
of the sequence and is denoted by an. The nth term is also called the general term of the
sequence.
Thus, the terms of the sequence of person’s ancestors mentioned above are:
a1 = 2, a2 = 4, a3 = 8, …, a10 = 1024.
Similarly, in the example of successive quotients
a1 = 3, a2 = 3.3, a3 = 3.33, …, a6 = 3.33333, etc.
A sequence containing finite number of terms is called a finite sequence. For
example, sequence of ancestors is a finite sequence since it contains 10 terms (a fixed
number).
A sequence is called infinite, if it is not a finite sequence. For example, the
sequence of successive quotients mentioned above is an infinite sequence, infinite in
the sense that it never ends.
Often, it is possible to express the rule, which yields the various terms of a sequence
in terms of algebraic formula. Consider for instance, the sequence of even natural
numbers 2, 4, 6, …
Here a1 = 2 = 2 × 1 a2 = 4 = 2 × 2
a3 = 6 = 2 × 3 a4 = 8 = 2 × 4
.... .... .... .... .... ....
.... .... .... .... .... ....
a23 = 46 = 2 × 23, a24 = 48 = 2 × 24, and so on.
In fact, we see that the nth term of this sequence can be written as an = 2n,
where n is a natural number. Similarly, in the sequence of odd natural numbers 1,3,5, …,
the nth term is given by the formula, an = 2n – 1, where n is a natural number.
In some cases, an arrangement of numbers such as 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8,.. has no visible
pattern, but the sequence is generated by the recurrence relation given by
a1 = a2 = 1
a3 = a1 + a2
an = an – 2 + an – 1, n > 2
This sequence is called Fibonacci sequence.

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 179

In the sequence of primes 2,3,5,7,…, we find that there is no formula for the nth
prime. Such sequence can only be described by verbal description.
In every sequence, we should not expect that its terms will necessarily be given
by a specific formula. However, we expect a theoretical scheme or a rule for generating
the terms a1, a2, a3,…,an,… in succession.
In view of the above, a sequence can be regarded as a function whose domain
is the set of natural numbers or some subset of it. Sometimes, we use the functional
notation a(n) for an.
9.3 Series
Let a1, a2, a3,…,an, be a given sequence. Then, the expression
a1 + a2 + a3 +,…+ an + ...
is called the series associated with the given sequence .The series is finite or infinite
according as the given sequence is finite or infinite. Series are often represented in
compact form, called sigma notation, using the Greek letter ∑ (sigma) as means of
indicating the summation involved. Thus, the series a1 + a2 + a3 + ... + an is abbreviated

n
as ∑ ak .
k =1

Remark When the series is used, it refers to the indicated sum not to the sum itself.
For example, 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 is a finite series with four terms. When we use the phrase
“sum of a series,” we will mean the number that results from adding the terms, the
sum of the series is 16.
We now consider some examples.
Example 1 Write the first three terms in each of the following sequences defined by
the following:
n−3
(i) an = 2n + 5, (ii) an = .
4
Solution (i) Here an = 2n + 5
Substituting n = 1, 2, 3, we get
a1 = 2(1) + 5 = 7, a2 = 9, a3 = 11
Therefore, the required terms are 7, 9 and 11.
n−3 1− 3 1 1
(ii) Here an = . Thus, a1 = = − , a2 = − , a3 = 0
4 4 2 4

2018-19
180 MATHEMATICS

Hence, the first three terms are – 1 , – 1 and 0.

2 4
Example 2 What is the 20th term of the sequence defined by
an = (n – 1) (2 – n) (3 + n) ?
Solution Putting n = 20 , we obtain
a20 = (20 – 1) (2 – 20) (3 + 20)
= 19 × (– 18) × (23) = – 7866.
Example 3 Let the sequence an be defined as follows:
a1 = 1, an = an – 1 + 2 for n ≥ 2.
Find first five terms and write corresponding series.
Solution We have
a1 = 1, a2 = a1 + 2 = 1 + 2 = 3, a3 = a2 + 2 = 3 + 2 = 5,
a4 = a3 + 2 = 5 + 2 = 7, a5 = a4 + 2 = 7 + 2 = 9.
Hence, the first five terms of the sequence are 1,3,5,7 and 9. The corresponding series
is 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9 +...

EXERCISE 9.1
Write the first five terms of each of the sequences in Exercises 1 to 6 whose nth
terms are:
n
1. an = n (n + 2) 2. an = 3. an = 2n
n +1

2n − 3 n2 + 5
4. an = 5. an = (–1)n–1 5n+1 6. a n = n .
6 4
Find the indicated terms in each of the sequences in Exercises 7 to 10 whose nth
terms are:

n2
7. an = 4n – 3; a17, a24 8. an = 2n ; a7
n(n – 2)
9. an = (–1)n – 1n3; a9 10. an = ; a20 .
n+3

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 181

Write the first five terms of each of the sequences in Exercises 11 to 13 and obtain the
corresponding series:
an −1
11. a1 = 3, an = 3an – 1 + 2 for all n > 1 12. a1 = – 1, an = ,n≥2
n
13. a1 = a2 = 2, an = an – 1–1, n > 2
14. The Fibonacci sequence is defined by
1 = a1 = a2 and an = an – 1 + an – 2, n > 2.
an +1
Find
an , for n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

9.4 Arithmetic Progression (A.P.)

Let us recall some formulae and properties studied earlier.
A sequence a1, a2, a3,…, an ,… is called arithmetic sequence or arithmetic
progression if an + 1 = an + d, n ∈ N, where a1 is called the first term and the constant
term d is called the common difference of the A.P.
Let us consider an A.P. (in its standard form) with first term a and common
difference d, i.e., a, a + d, a + 2d, ...
Then the nth term (general term) of the A.P. is an = a + (n – 1) d.
We can verify the following simple properties of an A.P. :
(i) If a constant is added to each term of an A.P., the resulting sequence is
also an A.P.
(ii) If a constant is subtracted from each term of an A.P., the resulting
sequence is also an A.P.
(iii) If each term of an A.P. is multiplied by a constant, then the resulting
sequence is also an A.P.
(iv) If each term of an A.P. is divided by a non-zero constant then the
resulting sequence is also an A.P.
Here, we shall use the following notations for an arithmetic progression:
a = the first term, l = the last term, d = common difference,
n = the number of terms.
Sn= the sum to n terms of A.P.
Let a, a + d, a + 2d, …, a + (n – 1) d be an A.P. Then
l = a + (n – 1) d

2018-19
182 MATHEMATICS

n
Sn = [2a + (n −1)d ]
2

n
We can also write, Sn = [a + l ]
2
Let us consider some examples.

Example 4 In an A.P. if mth term is n and the nth term is m, where m ≠ n, find the pth
term.
Solution We have am = a + (m – 1) d = n, ... (1)
and an = a + (n – 1) d = m ... (2)
Solving (1) and (2), we get
(m – n) d = n – m, or d = – 1, ... (3)
and a= n+m–1 ... (4)
Therefore a p = a + (p – 1)d
= n + m – 1 + ( p – 1) (–1) = n + m – p
Hence, the pth term is n + m – p.
1
Example 5 If the sum of n terms of an A.P. is nP + n(n – 1)Q , where P and Q
2
are constants, find the common difference.
Solution Let a1, a2, … an be the given A.P. Then
1
Sn = a1 + a2 + a3 +...+ an–1 + an = nP + n (n – 1) Q
2
Therefore S1 = a1 = P, S2 = a1 + a2 = 2P + Q
So that a2 = S2 – S1 = P + Q
Hence, the common difference is given by d = a2 – a1 = (P + Q) – P = Q.
Example 6 The sum of n terms of two arithmetic progressions are in the ratio
(3n + 8) : (7n + 15). Find the ratio of their 12th terms.
Solution Let a1, a2 and d1, d2 be the first terms and common difference of the first
and second arithmetic progression, respectively. According to the given condition, we
have
Sum to n terms of first A.P. 3n + 8
=
Sum to n termsof second A.P. 7 n + 15

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 183

n
2
[2a1 + ( n −1 )d1 ] 3n + 8
=
or n 7n +15
2
[ 2
2 a + ( n − 1 )d 2]

2a1 + ( n − 1) d1 3n + 8
or = ... (1)
2a2 + ( n − 1) d 2 7n + 15

12th term of first A.P. a +11d1

Now = 1
12 term of second A.P a2 +11d 2
th

2a1 + 22d1 3 × 23 + 8
= [By putting n = 23 in (1)]
2a2 + 22d 2 7 × 23 + 15

a1 + 11d1 12th term of first A.P. 7

Therefore = th =
a2 + 11d 2 12 term of second A.P. 16
Hence, the required ratio is 7 : 16.
Example 7 The income of a person is Rs. 3,00,000, in the first year and he receives an
increase of Rs.10,000 to his income per year for the next 19 years. Find the total
amount, he received in 20 years.
Solution Here, we have an A.P. with a = 3,00,000, d = 10,000, and n = 20.
Using the sum formula, we get,
20
S20 = [600000 + 19 × 10000] = 10 (790000) = 79,00,000.
2
Hence, the person received Rs. 79,00,000 as the total amount at the end of 20 years.
9.4.1 Arithmetic mean Given two numbers a and b. We can insert a number A
between them so that a, A, b is an A.P. Such a number A is called the arithmetic mean
(A.M.) of the numbers a and b. Note that, in this case, we have
a +b
A – a = b – A, i.e., A =
2
We may also interpret the A.M. between two numbers a and b as their
a +b
average . For example, the A.M. of two numbers 4 and 16 is 10. We have, thus
2
constructed an A.P. 4, 10, 16 by inserting a number 10 between 4 and 16. The natural

2018-19
184 MATHEMATICS

question now arises : Can we insert two or more numbers between given two numbers
so that the resulting sequence comes out to be an A.P. ? Observe that two numbers 8
and 12 can be inserted between 4 and 16 so that the resulting sequence 4, 8, 12, 16
becomes an A.P.
More generally, given any two numbers a and b, we can insert as many numbers
as we like between them such that the resulting sequence is an A.P.
Let A1, A2, A3, …, An be n numbers between a and b such that a, A1, A2, A3, …,
An, b is an A.P.
Here, b is the (n + 2) th term, i.e., b = a + [(n + 2) – 1]d = a + (n + 1) d.
b−a
This gives d= .
n +1
Thus, n numbers between a and b are as follows:
b−a
A1 = a + d = a +
n +1

2(b − a )
A2 = a + 2d = a +
n +1

3(b − a )
A3 = a + 3d = a +
n +1
..... ..... ..... .....
..... ..... ..... .....
n (b − a )
An = a + nd = a +
n +1 .
Example 8 Insert 6 numbers between 3 and 24 such that the resulting sequence is
an A.P.
Solution Let A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6 be six numbers between 3 and 24 such that
3, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, 24 are in A.P. Here, a = 3, b = 24, n = 8.
Therefore, 24 = 3 + (8 –1) d, so that d = 3.
Thus A1 = a + d = 3 + 3 = 6; A2 = a + 2d = 3 + 2 × 3 = 9;
A3 = a + 3d = 3 + 3 × 3 = 12; A4 = a + 4d = 3 + 4 × 3 = 15;
A5 = a + 5d = 3 + 5 × 3 = 18; A6 = a + 6d = 3 + 6 × 3 = 21.
Hence, six numbers between 3 and 24 are 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 and 21.

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 185

EXERCISE 9.2
1. Find the sum of odd integers from 1 to 2001.
2. Find the sum of all natural numbers lying between 100 and 1000, which are
multiples of 5.
3. In an A.P., the first term is 2 and the sum of the first five terms is one-fourth of
the next five terms. Show that 20th term is –112.

4. How many terms of the A.P. – 6, −

11 , – 5, … are needed to give the sum –25?
2

1 1
5. In an A.P., if pth term is and qth term is , prove that the sum of first pq
q p
1
terms is (pq +1), where p ≠ q.
2
6. If the sum of a certain number of terms of the A.P. 25, 22, 19, … is 116. Find the
last term.
7. Find the sum to n terms of the A.P., whose kth term is 5k + 1.
8. If the sum of n terms of an A.P. is (pn + qn2), where p and q are constants,
find the common difference.
9. The sums of n terms of two arithmetic progressions are in the ratio
5n + 4 : 9n + 6. Find the ratio of their 18th terms.
10. If the sum of first p terms of an A.P. is equal to the sum of the first q terms, then
find the sum of the first (p + q) terms.
11. Sum of the first p, q and r terms of an A.P. are a, b and c, respectively.
a b c
Prove that ( q − r ) + ( r − p ) + ( p − q) = 0
p q r
12. The ratio of the sums of m and n terms of an A.P. is m2 : n2. Show that the ratio
of mth and nth term is (2m – 1) : (2n – 1).
13. If the sum of n terms of an A.P. is 3n2 + 5n and its mth term is 164, find the value
of m.
14. Insert five numbers between 8 and 26 such that the resulting sequence is an A.P.

a n + bn
15. If is the A.M. between a and b, then find the value of n.
a n−1 + b n−1
16. Between 1 and 31, m numbers have been inserted in such a way that the resulting
sequence is an A. P. and the ratio of 7th and (m – 1)th numbers is 5 : 9. Find the
value of m.

2018-19
186 MATHEMATICS

17. A man starts repaying a loan as first instalment of Rs. 100. If he increases the
instalment by Rs 5 every month, what amount he will pay in the 30th instalment?
18. The difference between any two consecutive interior angles of a polygon is 5°.
If the smallest angle is 120° , find the number of the sides of the polygon.
9.5 Geometric Progression (G. P.)
Let us consider the following sequences:
1 –1 1 –1
(i) 2,4,8,16,..., (ii) , , , (iii) .01,.0001,.000001,...
9 27 81 243 ...
In each of these sequences, how their terms progress? We note that each term, except
the first progresses in a definite order.

a2 a a
In (i), we have a1 = 2, = 2, 3 = 2, 4 = 2 and so on.
a1 a2 a3

1 a2 1 a 1 a 1
In (ii), we observe, a1 = , = , 3 = , 4= and so on.
9 a1 3 a2 3 a3 3
Similarly, state how do the terms in (iii) progress? It is observed that in each case,
every term except the first term bears a constant ratio to the term immediately preceding
1
it. In (i), this constant ratio is 2; in (ii), it is – 3 and in (iii), the constant ratio is 0.01.
Such sequences are called geometric sequence or geometric progression abbreviated
as G.P.
A sequence a1, a2, a3, …, an, … is called geometric progression, if each term is
ak + 1
non-zero and = r (constant), for k ≥ 1.
ak
By letting a1 = a, we obtain a geometric progression, a, ar, ar2, ar3,…., where a
is called the first term and r is called the common ratio of the G.P. Common ratio in
1
geometric progression (i), (ii) and (iii) above are 2, – and 0.01, respectively.
3
As in case of arithmetic progression, the problem of finding the nth term or sum of n
terms of a geometric progression containing a large number of terms would be difficult
without the use of the formulae which we shall develop in the next Section. We shall
use the following notations with these formulae:
a = the first term, r = the common ratio, l = the last term,
n = the numbers of terms,

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 187

n = the numbers of terms,

Sn = the sum of first n terms.
9.5.1 General term of a G .P. Let us consider a G.P. with first non-zero term ‘a’ and
common ratio ‘r’. Write a few terms of it. The second term is obtained by multiplying
a by r, thus a2 = ar. Similarly, third term is obtained by multiplying a2 by r. Thus,
a3 = a2r = ar2, and so on.
We write below these and few more terms.
1st term = a1 = a = ar1–1, 2nd term = a2 = ar = ar2–1, 3rd term = a3 = ar2 = ar3–1
4th term = a4 = ar3 = ar4–1, 5th term = a5 = ar4 = ar5–1
Do you see a pattern? What will be 16th term?
a16 = ar16–1 = ar15
Therefore, the pattern suggests that the nth term of a G.P. is given by
an = ar n−1 .
Thus, a, G.P. can be written as a, ar, ar2, ar3, … arn – 1; a, ar, ar2,...,arn – 1... ;according
as G.P. is finite or infinite, respectively.
The series a + ar + ar2 + ... + arn–1 or a + ar + ar2 + ... + arn–1 +...are called
finite or infinite geometric series, respectively.
9.5.2. Sum to n terms of a G .P. Let the first term of a G.P. be a and the common
ratio be r. Let us denote by Sn the sum to first n terms of G.P. Then
Sn = a + ar + ar2 +...+ arn–1 ... (1)
Case 1 If r = 1, we have Sn = a + a + a + ... + a (n terms) = na
Case 2 If r ≠ 1, multiplying (1) by r, we have
rSn = ar + ar2 + ar3 + ... + arn ... (2)
Subtracting (2) from (1), we get (1 – r) Sn = a – arn = a(1 – rn)

a (1 − r n ) a( r n −1)
This gives Sn = or Sn =
1− r r −1
th th
Example 9 Find the 10 and n terms of the G.P. 5, 25,125,… .
Solution Here a = 5 and r = 5. Thus, a10 = 5(5)10–1 = 5(5)9 = 510
and an = arn–1 = 5(5)n–1 = 5n .
Example10 Which term of the G.P., 2,8,32, ... up to n terms is 131072?
Solution Let 131072 be the nth term of the given G.P. Here a = 2 and r = 4.
Therefore 131072 = an = 2(4)n – 1 or 65536 = 4n – 1
This gives 48 = 4n – 1.
So that n – 1 = 8, i.e., n = 9. Hence, 131072 is the 9th term of the G.P.

2018-19
188 MATHEMATICS

Example11 In a G.P., the 3rd term is 24 and the 6th term is 192.Find the 10th term.
Solution Here, a3 = ar = 24
2
... (1)
and a6 = ar = 192
5
... (2)
Dividing (2) by (1), we get r = 2. Substituting r = 2 in (1), we get a = 6.
Hence a10 = 6 (2)9 = 3072.
Example12 Find the sum of first n terms and the sum of first 5 terms of the geometric
2 4
series 1 + + + ...
3 9
2
Solution Here a = 1 and r = . Therefore
3

  2 n 
1 −     n

a (1 − r n )   3   3 1−  2  
Sn = = =  
1− r 2   3  
1−
3

  2 5  211 211
In particular, S5 = 3 1 −    = 3 × = .
243 81
  3  
3 3
Example 13 How many terms of the G.P. 3, , ,... are needed to give the
2 4
3069
sum 512 ?

1 3069
Solution Let n be the number of terms needed. Given that a = 3, r = and Sn =
2 512
a (1 – r n )
Since Sn =
1− r

1
3(1 − )
Therefore 3069
= 2n = 6  1− 1 
1  n 
512 1−  2 
2

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 189

3069 1
or = 1− n
3072 2
1 3069 3 1
or n =
1− = =
2 3072 3072 1024
or 2n = 1024 = 210, which gives n = 10.
13
Example 14 The sum of first three terms of a G.P. is and their product is – 1.
12
Find the common ratio and the terms.
a
Solution Let , a, ar be the first three terms of the G.P. Then
r
a 13
+ ar + a = ... (1)
r 12

a ... (2)

and   (a ) (ar ) = – 1
r
From (2), we get a3 = – 1, i.e., a = – 1 (considering only real roots)
Substituting a = –1 in (1), we have
1 13
– –1 – r = or 12r2 + 25r + 12 = 0.
r 12

3 4
This is a quadratic in r, solving, we get r = –or – .
4 3
4 3 –3 3 4 –4
Thus, the three terms of G.P. are : , – 1, for r = and , – 1, for r = ,
3 4 4 4 3 3
Example15 Find the sum of the sequence 7, 77, 777, 7777, ... to n terms.
Solution This is not a G.P., however, we can relate it to a G.P. by writing the terms as
Sn = 7 + 77 + 777 + 7777 + ... to n terms
7
= [9 + 99 + 999 + 9999 + ...to n term]
9
7
= [(10 − 1) + (102 − 1) + (103 −1) + (104 − 1) + ...n terms]
9

2018-19
190 MATHEMATICS

7
= [(10 + 102 + 103 + ...n terms) – (1+1+1+...n terms)]
9

7  10(10n − 1)  7  10 (10n − 1) 
=  − n  =  − n .
9  10 − 1  9 9 
Example 16 A person has 2 parents, 4 grandparents, 8 great grandparents, and so on.
Find the number of his ancestors during the ten generations preceding his own.
Solution Here a = 2, r = 2 and n = 10
a (r n −1)
Using the sum formula Sn =
r −1
We have S10 = 2(210 – 1) = 2046
Hence, the number of ancestors preceding the person is 2046.
9.5.3 Geometric Mean (G .M.) The geometric mean of two positive numbers a

and b is the number ab . Therefore, the geometric mean of 2 and 8 is 4. We

observe that the three numbers 2,4,8 are consecutive terms of a G.P. This leads to a
generalisation of the concept of geometric means of two numbers.
Given any two positive numbers a and b, we can insert as many numbers as
we like between them to make the resulting sequence in a G.P.
Let G1, G2,…, Gn be n numbers between positive numbers a and b such that
a,G1,G2,G3,…,Gn,b is a G.P. Thus, b being the (n + 2)th term,we have

1
n +1  b n + 1 .
b = ar , or r= 
a
1
 b  n+1 2 3
Hence G1 = ar = a   ,  b  n +1  b  n+1
a G 2 = ar 2 = a   , G 3 = ar = a   ,
3
a a
n
 b  n +1
G n = ar n = a  
a

Example17 Insert three numbers between 1 and 256 so that the resulting sequence
is a G.P.
Solution Let G1, G2,G3 be three numbers between 1 and 256 such that
1, G1,G2,G3 ,256 is a G.P.

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 191

Therefore 256 = r4 giving r = ± 4 (Taking real roots only)

For r = 4, we have G1 = ar = 4, G2 = ar2 = 16, G3 = ar3 = 64
Similarly, for r = – 4, numbers are – 4,16 and – 64.
Hence, we can insert 4, 16, 64 between 1 and 256 so that the resulting sequences are
in G.P.
9.6 Relationship Between A.M. and G.M.
Let A and G be A.M. and G.M. of two given positive real numbers a and b, respectively.
Then
a+b
A= and G = ab
2
Thus, we have
a +b a + b − 2 ab
A–G= − ab =
2 2

( )
2
a− b
= ≥0 ... (1)
2
From (1), we obtain the relationship A ≥ G.
Example 18 If A.M. and G.M. of two positive numbers a and b are 10 and 8,
respectively, find the numbers.
a+b
Solution Given that A.M. = =10 ... (1)
2
and G.M. = ab = 8 ... (2)

From (1) and (2), we get

a + b = 20 ... (3)
ab = 64 ... (4)
Putting the value of a and b from (3), (4) in the identity (a – b) = (a + b)2 – 4ab,
2

we get
(a – b)2 = 400 – 256 = 144
or a – b = ± 12
... (5)
Solving (3) and (5), we obtain
a = 4, b = 16 or a = 16, b = 4
Thus, the numbers a and b are 4, 16 or 16, 4 respectively.

2018-19
192 MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE 9.3

5 5 5
1. Find the 20th and nth terms of the G.P. , , , ...
2 4 8
2. Find the 12th term of a G.P. whose 8th term is 192 and the common ratio is 2.
3. The 5 th, 8 th and 11 th terms of a G.P. are p, q and s, respectively. Show
that q2 = ps.
4. The 4th term of a G.P. is square of its second term, and the first term is – 3.
Determine its 7th term.
5. Which term of the following sequences:
(a) 2, 2 2 , 4,... is 128 ? (b) 3 ,3,3 3 ,... is729 ?
1 1 1 1
(c) , , ,... is ?
3 9 27 19683

2 7
6. For what values of x, the numbers – , x, – are in G.P.?
7 2
Find the sum to indicated number of terms in each of the geometric progressions in
Exercises 7 to 10:
7. 0.15, 0.015, 0.0015, ... 20 terms.
8. 7 , 21 , 3 7 , ... n terms.
9. 1, – a, a2, – a3, ... n terms (if a ≠ – 1).
10. x3, x5, x7, ... n terms (if x ≠ ± 1).

11
11. Evaluate ∑ (2 + 3k ) .
k =1

39
12. The sum of first three terms of a G.P. is and their product is 1. Find the
10
common ratio and the terms.
13. How many terms of G.P. 3, 32, 33, … are needed to give the sum 120?
14. The sum of first three terms of a G.P. is 16 and the sum of the next three terms is
128. Determine the first term, the common ratio and the sum to n terms of the G.P.
15. Given a G.P. with a = 729 and 7th term 64, determine S7.
16. Find a G.P. for which sum of the first two terms is – 4 and the fifth term is
4 times the third term.
17. If the 4th, 10th and 16th terms of a G.P. are x, y and z, respectively. Prove that x,
y, z are in G.P.

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 193

18. Find the sum to n terms of the sequence, 8, 88, 888, 8888… .
19. Find the sum of the products of the corresponding terms of the sequences 2, 4, 8,

1
16, 32 and 128, 32, 8, 2, .
2
20. Show that the products of the corresponding terms of the sequences a, ar, ar2,
…arn – 1 and A, AR, AR2, … ARn – 1 form a G.P, and find the common ratio.
21. Find four numbers forming a geometric progression in which the third term is
greater than the first term by 9, and the second term is greater than the 4th by 18.
22. If the pth, qth and rth terms of a G.P. are a, b and c, respectively. Prove that
aq – r br – pcP – q = 1.
23. If the first and the nth term of a G.P. are a and b, respectively, and if P is the
product of n terms, prove that P2 = (ab)n.
24. Show that the ratio of the sum of first n terms of a G.P. to the sum of terms from

1
(n + 1)th to (2n)th term is .
rn
25. If a, b, c and d are in G.P. show that
(a2 + b2 + c2) (b2 + c2 + d2) = (ab + bc + cd)2 .
26. Insert two numbers between 3 and 81 so that the resulting sequence is G.P.

a n+1 + b n+1
27. Find the value of n so that may be the geometric mean between
a n + bn
a and b.
28. The sum of two numbers is 6 times their geometric mean, show that numbers

( )(
are in the ratio 3 + 2 2 : 3 − 2 2 . )
29. If A and G be A.M. and G.M., respectively between two positive numbers,

prove that the numbers are A ± ( A + G )( A − G ) .

30. The number of bacteria in a certain culture doubles every hour. If there were 30
bacteria present in the culture originally, how many bacteria will be present at the
end of 2nd hour, 4th hour and nth hour ?
31. What will Rs 500 amounts to in 10 years after its deposit in a bank which pays
annual interest rate of 10% compounded annually?
32. If A.M. and G.M. of roots of a quadratic equation are 8 and 5, respectively, then
obtain the quadratic equation.

2018-19
194 MATHEMATICS

9.7 Sum to n Terms of Special Series

We shall now find the sum of first n terms of some special series, namely;
(i) 1 + 2 + 3 +… + n (sum of first n natural numbers)
(ii) 12 + 22 + 32 +… + n2(sum of squares of the first n natural numbers)
(iii) 13 + 23 + 33 +… + n3(sum of cubes of the first n natural numbers).
Let us take them one by one.

n (n + 1)
(i) Sn=1 + 2 + 3 + … + n, then Sn = (See Section 9.4)
2
(ii) Here Sn= 12 + 22 + 32 + … + n2
We consider the identity k3 – (k – 1)3 = 3k2 – 3k + 1
Putting k = 1, 2…, n successively, we obtain
13 – 03 = 3 (1)2 – 3 (1) + 1
23 – 13 = 3 (2)2 – 3 (2) + 1
33 – 23 = 3(3)2 – 3 (3) + 1
.......................................
.......................................
......................................
n3 – (n – 1)3 = 3 (n)2 – 3 (n) + 1
Adding both sides, we get
n3 – 03 = 3 (12 + 22 + 32 + ... + n2) – 3 (1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n) + n

n n
n3 = 3 ∑ k 2 – 3 ∑ k + n
k =1 k =1

n
n (n + 1)
By (i), we know that ∑ k =1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n = 2
k =1
n
1 3n (n + 1)  1
Hence Sn = ∑ k 2 = 3 n3 + 2
− n  = (2n3 + 3n 2 + n)
 6
k =1

n (n +1)(2n + 1)
=
6
(iii) Here Sn = 13 + 23 + ...+n3
We consider the identity, (k + 1)4 – k4 = 4k3 + 6k2 + 4k + 1
Putting k = 1, 2, 3… n, we get

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 195

24 – 14 = 4(1)3 + 6(1)2 + 4(1) + 1

34 – 24 = 4(2)3 + 6(2)2 + 4(2) + 1
44 – 34 = 4(3)3 + 6(3)2 + 4(3) + 1
..................................................
..................................................
..................................................
(n – 1)4 – (n – 2)4 = 4(n – 2)3 + 6(n – 2)2 + 4(n – 2) + 1
n4 – (n – 1)4 = 4(n – 1)3 + 6(n – 1)2 + 4(n – 1) + 1
(n + 1)4 – n4 = 4n3 + 6n2 + 4n + 1
Adding both sides, we get
(n + 1)4 – 14 = 4(13 + 23 + 33 +...+ n3) + 6(12 + 22 + 32 + ...+ n2) +
4(1 + 2 + 3 +...+ n) + n

n n n
= 4 ∑ k3 + 6 ∑ k 2 + 4 ∑ k + n ... (1)
k =1 k =1 k =1

From parts (i) and (ii), we know that

n
n (n + 1) n
n (n + 1) (2n + 1)
∑k = 2
and ∑ k2 = 6
k =1 k =1

Putting these values in equation (1), we obtain

n
6n (n + 1) (2n + 1) 4n (n + 1)
4 ∑ k 3 = n 4 + 4n 3 + 6n 2 + 4 n – – –n
k =1 6 2
or 4Sn = n4 + 4n3 + 6n2 + 4n – n (2n2 + 3n + 1) – 2n (n + 1) – n
= n4 + 2n3 + n2
= n2(n + 1)2.

n 2 (n + 1) 2 [n (n + 1) ]
2
Hence, Sn = =
4 4
Example 19 Find the sum to n terms of the series: 5 + 11 + 19 + 29 + 41…
Solution Let us write
Sn = 5 + 11 + 19 + 29 + ... + an–1 + an
or Sn = 5 + 11 + 19 + ... + an–2 + an–1 + an
On subtraction, we get

2018-19
196 MATHEMATICS

0 = 5 + [6 + 8 + 10 + 12 + ...(n – 1) terms] – an
(n – 1)[12 + (n − 2) × 2]
or an = 5 +
2
= 5 + (n – 1) (n + 4) = n2 + 3n + 1
n n n n
Sn = ∑ ak = ∑ ( k + 3k + 1) = ∑ k + 3∑ k + n
Hence 2 2

k =1 k =1 k =1 1

n(n +1)(2n + 1) 3n(n + 1) n(n + 2)(n + 4)

= + +n = .
6 2 3

Example 20 Find the sum to n terms of the series whose nth term is n (n+3).
Solution Given that an = n (n + 3) = n2 + 3n
Thus, the sum to n terms is given by
n n n
Sn = ∑ ak = ∑ k 2 + 3∑ k
k =1 k =1 k =1

n (n + 1) (2n + 1) 3n (n + 1) n(n + 1)(n + 5)

= + = .
6 2 3

EXERCISE 9.4
Find the sum to n terms of each of the series in Exercises 1 to 7.
1. 1 × 2 + 2 × 3 + 3 × 4 + 4 × 5 +... 2. 1 × 2 × 3 + 2 × 3 × 4 + 3 × 4 × 5 + ...
1 1 1
3. 3 × 12 + 5 × 22 + 7 × 32 + ... 4. + + +
1× 2 2 × 3 3× 4 ...
5. 52 + 62 + 72 + ... + 202 6. 3 × 8 + 6 × 11 + 9 × 14 + ...
7. 12 + (12 + 22) + (12 + 22 + 32) + ...
Find the sum to n terms of the series in Exercises 8 to 10 whose nth terms is given by

8. n (n+1) (n+4). 9. n2 + 2n
10. (2n – 1) 2

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 197

Miscellaneous Examples

Example21 If pth, qth, r th and sth terms of an A.P. are in G.P, then show that
(p – q), (q – r), (r – s) are also in G.P.
Solution Here
ap = a + (p –1) d ... (1)
aq = a + (q –1) d ... (2)
ar = a + (r –1) d ... (3)
as = a + (s –1) d ... (4)
Given that ap, aq, ar and as are in G.P.,

So aq ar aq − ar q − r ... (5)
= = =
ap aq a p − aq p − q (why ?)

Similarly ar as ar − as r − s ... (6)

= = = (why ?)
aq ar aq − ar q − r
Hence, by (5) and (6)

q – r r – s , i.e., p – q, q – r and r – s are in G.P.

=
p–q q–r
1 1 1
Example 22 If a, b, c are in G.P. and a x = b y = c z , prove that x, y, z are in A.P.

1 1 1
Solution Let a x = b y = c z = k Then
a = kx , b = ky and c = kz. ... (1)
Since a, b, c are in G.P., therefore,
b2 = ac ... (2)
Using (1) in (2), we get
k2y = kx + z, which gives 2y = x + z.
Hence, x, y and z are in A.P.
Example 23 If a, b, c, d and p are different real numbers such that
(a2 + b2 + c2)p2 – 2(ab + bc + cd) p + (b2 + c2 + d2) ≤ 0, then show that a, b, c and d
are in G.P.
Solution Given that
(a2 + b2 + c2) p2 – 2 (ab + bc + cd) p + (b2 + c2 + d2) ≤ 0 ... (1)

2018-19
198 MATHEMATICS

But L.H.S.
= (a2p2 – 2abp + b2) + (b2p2 – 2bcp + c2) + (c2p2 – 2cdp + d2),
which gives (ap – b)2 + (bp – c)2 + (cp – d)2 ≥ 0 ...
(2)
Since the sum of squares of real numbers is non negative, therefore, from (1) and (2),
we have, (ap – b)2 + (bp – c)2 + (cp – d)2 = 0
or ap – b = 0, bp – c = 0, cp – d = 0

b c d
This implies that = = =p
a b c
Hence a, b, c and d are in G.P.
Example 24 If p,q,r are in G.P. and the equations, px2 + 2qx + r = 0 and

d e f
dx2 + 2ex + f = 0 have a common root, then show that , , are in A.P.
p q r
Solution The equation px2 + 2qx + r = 0 has roots given by

−2q ± 4q 2 − 4rp
x=
2p

−q −q
Since p ,q, r are in G.P. q2 = pr. Thus x = but is also root of
p p
dx2 + 2ex + f = 0 (Why ?). Therefore
2
 −q   −q 
d  + 2e   + f = 0,
 p   p 
or dq2 – 2eqp + fp2 = 0 ... (1)
Dividing (1) by pq2 and using q2 = pr, we get

d 2e fp 2e d f
− + = 0, or = +
p q pr q p r

d e f
Hence , , are in A.P.
p q r

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 199

Miscellaneous Exercise On Chapter 9

1. Show that the sum of (m + n)th and (m – n)th terms of an A.P. is equal to twice
the mth term.
2. If the sum of three numbers in A.P., is 24 and their product is 440, find the
numbers.
3. Let the sum of n, 2n, 3n terms of an A.P. be S1, S2 and S3, respectively, show that
S3 = 3(S2 – S1)
4. Find the sum of all numbers between 200 and 400 which are divisible by 7.
5. Find the sum of integers from 1 to 100 that are divisible by 2 or 5.
6. Find the sum of all two digit numbers which when divided by 4, yields 1 as
remainder.
7. If f is a function satisfying f (x +y) = f(x) f(y) for all x, y ∈ N such that
n
f(1) = 3 and ∑ f (x) = 120 , find the value of n.
x =1

8. The sum of some terms of G.P. is 315 whose first term and the common ratio are
5 and 2, respectively. Find the last term and the number of terms.
9. The first term of a G.P. is 1. The sum of the third term and fifth term is 90.
Find the common ratio of G.P.
10. The sum of three numbers in G.P. is 56. If we subtract 1, 7, 21 from these numbers
in that order, we obtain an arithmetic progression. Find the numbers.
11. A G.P. consists of an even number of terms. If the sum of all the terms is 5 times
the sum of terms occupying odd places, then find its common ratio.
12. The sum of the first four terms of an A.P. is 56. The sum of the last four terms is
112. If its first term is 11, then find the number of terms.

a + bx b + cx c + dx
13. If = = ( x ≠ 0) , then show that a, b, c and d are in G.P.
a − bx b − cx c − dx
14. Let S be the sum, P the product and R the sum of reciprocals of n terms in a G.P.
Prove that P2Rn = Sn.
15. The pth, qth and rth terms of an A.P. are a, b, c, respectively. Show that
(q – r )a + (r – p )b + (p – q )c = 0
1 1 1 1  1 1
16. If a  +  ,b  +  ,c  +  are in A.P., prove that a, b, c are in A.P.
b c c a a b
17. If a, b, c, d are in G.P, prove that (an + bn), (bn + cn), (cn + dn) are in G.P.
18. If a and b are the roots of x2 – 3x + p = 0 and c, d are roots of x2 – 12x + q = 0,
where a, b, c, d form a G.P. Prove that (q + p) : (q – p) = 17:15.

2018-19
200 MATHEMATICS

19. The ratio of the A.M. and G.M. of two positive numbers a and b, is m : n. Show

( )(
that a : b = m + m2 – n 2 : m – m2 – n 2 ).
1 1 1
20. If a, b, c are in A.P.; b, c, d are in G.P. and , , are in A.P. prove that a, c, e
c d e
are in G.P.
21. Find the sum of the following series up to n terms:
(i) 5 + 55 +555 + … (ii) .6 +. 66 +. 666+…
22. Find the 20th term of the series 2 × 4 + 4 × 6 + 6 × 8 + ... + n terms.
23. Find the sum of the first n terms of the series: 3+ 7 +13 +21 +31 +…
24. If S1, S2, S3 are the sum of first n natural numbers, their squares and their
cubes, respectively, show that 9 S22 = S3 (1 + 8S1).
25. Find the sum of the following series up to n terms:

13 13 + 23 13 + 23 + 33
+ + + ...
1 1+ 3 1+ 3 + 5
1 × 2 2 + 2 × 32 + ... + n × (n + 1) 2 3n + 5
26. Show that =
12 × 2 + 2 2 × 3 + ... + n2 × (n + 1) 3n + 1 .
27. A farmer buys a used tractor for Rs 12000. He pays Rs 6000 cash and agrees to
pay the balance in annual instalments of Rs 500 plus 12% interest on the unpaid
amount. How much will the tractor cost him?
28. Shamshad Ali buys a scooter for Rs 22000. He pays Rs 4000 cash and agrees to
pay the balance in annual instalment of Rs 1000 plus 10% interest on the unpaid
amount. How much will the scooter cost him?
29. A person writes a letter to four of his friends. He asks each one of them to copy
the letter and mail to four different persons with instruction that they move the
chain similarly. Assuming that the chain is not broken and that it costs 50 paise to
mail one letter. Find the amount spent on the postage when 8th set of letter is
mailed.
30. A man deposited Rs 10000 in a bank at the rate of 5% simple interest annually.
Find the amount in 15th year since he deposited the amount and also calculate the
total amount after 20 years.
31. A manufacturer reckons that the value of a machine, which costs him Rs. 15625,
will depreciate each year by 20%. Find the estimated value at the end of 5 years.
32. 150 workers were engaged to finish a job in a certain number of days. 4 workers
dropped out on second day, 4 more workers dropped out on third day and so on.

2018-19
 SEQUENCES AND SERIES 201

It took 8 more days to finish the work. Find the number of days in which the work
was completed.

Summary
® By a sequence, we mean an arrangement of number in definite order according
to some rule. Also, we define a sequence as a function whose domain is the
set of natural numbers or some subsets of the type {1, 2, 3, ....k}. A sequence
containing a finite number of terms is called a finite sequence. A sequence is
called infinite if it is not a finite sequence.
® Let a1, a2, a3, ... be the sequence, then the sum expressed as a1 + a2 + a3 + ...
is called series. A series is called finite series if it has got finite number of
terms.
® An arithmetic progression (A.P.) is a sequence in which terms increase or
decrease regularly by the same constant. This constant is called common
difference of the A.P. Usually, we denote the first term of A.P. by a, the
common difference by d and the last term by l. The general term or the nth
term of the A.P. is given by an = a + (n – 1) d.
The sum Sn of the first n terms of an A.P. is given by

n n
Sn = 2a + ( n – 1) d  = ( a + l ) .
2 2

a+b
® The arithmetic mean A of any two numbers a and b is given by 2
i.e., the

sequence a, A, b is in A.P.
® A sequence is said to be a geometric progression or G.P., if the ratio of any
term to its preceding term is same throughout. This constant factor is called
the common ratio. Usually, we denote the first term of a G.P. by a and its
common ratio by r. The general or the nth term of G.P. is given by an= arn – 1.
The sum Sn of the first n terms of G.P. is given by

2018-19
202 MATHEMATICS

Sn =
(
a rn – 1 ) or a (1– r ) , if r ≠ 1
n

r –1 1–r

® The geometric mean (G.M.) of any two positive numbers a and b is given by
ab i.e., the sequence a, G, b is G.P.

Historical Note
Evidence is found that Babylonians, some 4000 years ago, knew of arithmetic and
geometric sequences. According to Boethius (510), arithmetic and geometric
sequences were known to early Greek writers. Among the Indian mathematician,
Aryabhatta (476) was the first to give the formula for the sum of squares and cubes
of natural numbers in his famous work Aryabhatiyam, written around
499. He also gave the formula for finding the sum to n terms of an arithmetic
sequence starting with p th term. Noted Indian mathematicians Brahmgupta
(598), Mahavira (850) and Bhaskara (1114-1185) also considered the sum of squares
and cubes. Another specific type of sequence having important applications in
mathematics, called Fibonacci sequence, was discovered by Italian mathematician
Leonardo Fibonacci (1170-1250). Seventeenth century witnessed the classification
of series into specific forms. In 1671 James Gregory used the term infinite series in
connection with infinite sequence. It was only through the rigorous development of
algebraic and set theoretic tools that the concepts related to sequence and series
could be formulated suitably.

—v —

2018-19
 Chapter 10
STRAIGHT LINES

vG eometry, as a logical system, is a means and even the most powerful

means to make children feel the strength of the human spirit that is
of their own spirit. – H. FREUDENTHALv

10.1 Introduction
We are familiar with two-dimensional coordinate geometry
from earlier classes. Mainly, it is a combination of algebra
and geometry. A systematic study of geometry by the use
of algebra was first carried out by celebrated French
philosopher and mathematician René Descartes, in his book
‘La Géométry, published in 1637. This book introduced the
notion of the equation of a curve and related analytical
methods into the study of geometry. The resulting
combination of analysis and geometry is referred now as
analytical geometry. In the earlier classes, we initiated
the study of coordinate geometry, where we studied about René Descartes
coordinate axes, coordinate plane, plotting of points in a (1596 -1650)
plane, distance between two points, section formulae, etc. All these concepts are the
basics of coordinate geometry.
Let us have a brief recall of coordinate geometry done in earlier classes. To
recapitulate, the location of the points (6, – 4) and
(3, 0) in the XY-plane is shown in Fig 10.1.
We may note that the point (6, – 4) is at 6 units
distance from the y-axis measured along the positive
x-axis and at 4 units distance from the x-axis
measured along the negative y-axis. Similarly, the
point (3, 0) is at 3 units distance from the y-axis
measured along the positive x-axis and has zero
distance from the x-axis.
We also studied there following important Fig 10.1
formulae:

2018-19
204 MATHEMATICS

I. Distance between the points P (x1, y1) and Q (x2, y2) is

(x – x1 ) + ( y2 – y1 )
2 2
PQ = 2

For example, distance between the points (6, – 4) and (3, 0) is

(3 − 6 )2 + (0 + 4 )2 = 9 + 16 = 5 units.
II. The coordinates of a point dividing the line segment joining the points (x1, y1)
 m x 2 + n x1 m y 2 + n y1 
and (x2, y2) internally, in the ratio m: n are  , .
 m+n m + n 
For example, the coordinates of the point which divides the line segment joining
1.( − 3) + 3.1
A (1, –3) and B (–3, 9) internally, in the ratio 1: 3 are given by x = =0
1+ 3
1.9 + 3. ( –3)
and y = = 0.
1+ 3
III. In particular, if m = n, the coordinates of the mid-point of the line segment
 x1 + x2 y1 + y 2 
joining the points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) are  , .
 2 2 
IV. Area of the triangle whose vertices are (x1, y1), (x2, y2) and (x3, y3) is
1
x1 ( y 2 − y 3 ) + x 2 ( y 3 − y 1) + x 3 ( y1 − y 2 ) .
2
For example, the area of the triangle, whose vertices are (4, 4), (3, – 2) and (– 3, 16) is
1 − 54
4( −2 − 16) + 3(16 − 4) + (−3)(4 + 2) = = 27.
2 2
Remark If the area of the triangle ABC is zero, then three points A, B and C lie on
a line, i.e., they are collinear.
In the this Chapter, we shall continue the study of coordinate geometry to study
properties of the simplest geometric figure – straight line. Despite its simplicity, the
line is a vital concept of geometry and enters into our daily experiences in numerous
interesting and useful ways. Main focus is on representing the line algebraically, for
which slope is most essential.
10.2 Slope of a Line
A line in a coordinate plane forms two angles with the x-axis, which are supplementary.

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 205

The angle (say) θ made by the line l with positive

direction of x-axis and measured anti clockwise
is called the inclination of the line. Obviously
0° ≤ θ ≤ 180° (Fig 10.2).
We observe that lines parallel to x-axis, or
coinciding with x-axis, have inclination of 0°. The
inclination of a vertical line (parallel to or
coinciding with y-axis) is 90°.
Definition 1 If θ is the inclination of a line
l, then tan θ is called the slope or gradient of
the line l. Fig 10.2
The slope of a line whose inclination is 90° is not
defined.
The slope of a line is denoted by m.
Thus, m = tan θ, θ ≠ 90°
It may be observed that the slope of x-axis is zero and slope of y-axis is not defined.
10.2.1 Slope of a line when coordinates of any two points on the line are given
We know that a line is completely determined when we are given two points on it.
Hence, we proceed to find the slope of a
line in terms of the coordinates of two points
on the line.
Let P(x 1, y 1 ) and Q(x 2, y 2 ) be two
points on non-vertical line l whose inclination
is θ. Obviously, x1 ≠ x2, otherwise the line
will become perpendicular to x-axis and its
slope will not be defined. The inclination of
the line l may be acute or obtuse. Let us
take these two cases.
Draw perpendicular QR to x-axis and
PM perpendicular to RQ as shown in
Figs. 10.3 (i) and (ii).
Fig 10. 3 (i)
Case 1 When angle θ is acute:
In Fig 10.3 (i), ∠MPQ = θ. ... (1)
Therefore, slope of line l = m = tan θ.
MQ y2 − y1
But in ∆MPQ, we have tan θ = = . ... (2)
MP x2 − x1

2018-19
206 MATHEMATICS

From equations (1) and (2), we have

y2 − y1
m= .
x2 − x1

Case II When angle θ is obtuse:

In Fig 10.3 (ii), we have
∠MPQ = 180° – θ.
Therefore, θ = 180° – ∠MPQ.
Now, slope of the line l
Fig 10. 3 (ii)

m = tan θ
= tan ( 180° – ∠MPQ) = – tan ∠MPQ

MQ y −y y2 − y1
= − =− 2 1 = .
MP x1 − x2 x2 − x1
Consequently, we see that in both the cases the slope m of the line through the points
y2 − y1
(x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is given by m = .
x2 − x1

10.2.2 Conditions for parallelism and perpendicularity of lines in terms of their

slopes In a coordinate plane, suppose that non-vertical lines l1 and l2 have slopes m1
and m2, respectively. Let their inclinations be α and
β, respectively.
If the line l1 is parallel to l2 (Fig 10.4), then their
inclinations are equal, i.e.,
α = β, and hence, tan α = tan β
Therefore m1 = m2, i.e., their slopes are equal.
Conversely, if the slope of two lines l1 and l2
is same, i.e.,
m1 = m2.
Fig 10. 4
Then tan α = tan β.
By the property of tangent function (between 0° and 180°), α = β.
Therefore, the lines are parallel.

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 207

Hence, two non vertical lines l1 and l2 are parallel if and only if their slopes
are equal.
If the lines l1 and l2 are perpendicular (Fig 10.5), then β = α + 90°.
Therefore,tan β = tan (α + 90°)
1
= – cot α = −
tan α
1
i.e., m2 = − m or m1 m2 = – 1
1

Conversely, if m1 m2 = – 1, i.e., tan α tan β = – 1.

Then tan α = – cot β = tan (β + 90°) or tan (β – 90°)
Fig 10. 5
Therefore, α and β differ by 90°.
Thus, lines l1 and l2 are perpendicular to each other.
Hence, two non-vertical lines are perpendicular to each other if and only if
their slopes are negative reciprocals of each other,
1
i.e., m2= − or, m1 m2 = – 1.
m1
Let us consider the following example.

Example 1 Find the slope of the lines:

(a) Passing through the points (3, – 2) and (–1, 4),
(b) Passing through the points (3, – 2) and (7, – 2),
(c) Passing through the points (3, – 2) and (3, 4),
(d) Making inclination of 60° with the positive direction of x-axis.

Solution (a) The slope of the line through (3, – 2) and (– 1, 4) is

4 − ( −2) 6 3
m= = =− .
−1 − 3 −4 2
(b) The slope of the line through the points (3, – 2) and (7, – 2) is
–2 – (–2) 0
m= = = 0.
7–3 4
(c) The slope of the line through the points (3, – 2) and (3, 4) is

2018-19
208 MATHEMATICS

4 – (–2) 6
m = = , which is not defined.
3–3 0
(d) Here inclination of the line α = 60°. Therefore, slope of the line is
m = tan 60° = 3.

10.2.3 Angle between two lines When we think about more than one line in a plane,
then we find that these lines are either intersecting or parallel. Here we will discuss the
angle between two lines in terms of their slopes.
Let L1 and L2 be two non-vertical lines with slopes m1 and m2, respectively. If α1
and α2 are the inclinations of lines L1 and L2, respectively. Then
m1 = tan α1 and m2 = tan α2 .
We know that when two lines intersect each other, they make two pairs of
vertically opposite angles such that sum of any two adjacent angles is 180°. Let θ and
φ be the adjacent angles between the lines L1 and L2 (Fig10.6). Then
θ = α2 – α1 and α1, α2 ≠ 90°.
tan α 2 − tan α1 m − m1
Therefore tan θ = tan (α2 – α1) = = 2 (as 1 + m1m2 ≠ 0)
1 + tan α1 tan α 2 1 + m1m2
and φ = 180° – θ so that
m2 − m1
tan φ = tan (180° – θ ) = – tan θ = – , as 1 + m1m2 ≠ 0
1 + m1m2

Fig 10. 6
Now, there arise two cases:

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 209

m 2 – m1
Case I If is positive, then tan θ will be positive and tan φ will be negative,
1 + m1m 2
which means θ will be acute and φ will be obtuse.
m 2 – m1
Case II If is negative, then tan θ will be negative and tan φ will be positive,
1 + m1m 2
which means that θ will be obtuse and φ will be acute.
Thus, the acute angle (say θ) between lines L1 and L2 with slopes m1 and m2,
respectively, is given by
m 2 − m1
tan θ = , as 1 + m1m 2 ≠ 0 ... (1)
1 + m1m 2
The obtuse angle (say φ) can be found by using φ =1800 – θ.
π 1
Example 2 If the angle between two lines is and slope of one of the lines is , find
4 2
the slope of the other line.
Solution We know that the acute angle θ between two lines with slopes m1 and m2
m2 − m1
is given by tan θ = ... (1)
1 + m1m 2

1 π
Let m1 = , m2 = m and θ = .
2 4
Now, putting these values in (1), we get

1 1
m− m−
π 2 2
tan = or 1 = ,
4 1 1
1+ m 1+ m
2 2

1 1
m− m−
2 = 1 or 2 = –1.
which gives 1 1
1+ m 1+ m
2 2
1
Therefore m = 3 or m = − .
3

2018-19
210 MATHEMATICS

Hence, slope of the other line is

1
3 or − . Fig 10.7 explains the
3
reason of two answers.

Fig 10. 7

Example 3 Line through the points (–2, 6) and (4, 8) is perpendicular to the line
through the points (8, 12) and (x, 24). Find the value of x.

Solution Slope of the line through the points (– 2, 6) and (4, 8) is

8−6 2 1
m1 = = =
4 − ( −2 ) 6 3
Slope of the line through the points (8, 12) and (x, 24) is
24 − 12 12
m2 = =
x−8 x −8
Since two lines are perpendicular,
m1 m2 = –1, which gives
1 12
× = −1 or x = 4 .
3 x −8
10.2.4 Collinearity of three points We
know that slopes of two parallel lines are
equal. If two lines having the same slope
pass through a common point, then two
lines will coincide. Hence, if A, B and C
are three points in the XY-plane, then they
will lie on a line, i.e., three points are
collinear (Fig 10.8) if and only if slope of
AB = slope of BC. Fig 10. 8

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 211

Example 4 Three points P (h, k), Q (x1, y1) and R (x2, y2) lie on a line. Show that
(h – x1) (y2 – y1) = (k – y1) (x2 – x1).
Solution Since points P, Q and R are collinear, we have
y1 − k y −y
Slope of PQ = Slope of QR, i.e., = 2 1
x1 − h x2 − x1

k − y1 y 2 − y1
or =
h − x1 x2 − x1 ,

or (h – x1) (y2 – y1) = (k – y1) (x2 – x1).

Example 5 In Fig 10.9, time and
distance graph of a linear motion is given.
Two positions of time and distance are
recorded as, when T = 0, D = 2 and when
T = 3, D = 8. Using the concept of slope,
find law of motion, i.e., how distance
depends upon time.
Solution Let (T, D) be any point on the
line, where D denotes the distance at time
T. Therefore, points (0, 2), (3, 8) and
(T, D) are collinear so that Fig 10.9
8 − 2 D −8
= or 6 (T − 3) = 3 (D − 8)
3−0 T −3
or D = 2(T + 1),
which is the required relation.

EXERCISE 10.1
1. Draw a quadrilateral in the Cartesian plane, whose vertices are (– 4, 5), (0, 7),
(5, – 5) and (– 4, –2). Also, find its area.
2. The base of an equilateral triangle with side 2a lies along the y-axis such that the
mid-point of the base is at the origin. Find vertices of the triangle.
3. Find the distance between P (x1, y1) and Q (x2, y2) when : (i) PQ is parallel to the
y-axis, (ii) PQ is parallel to the x-axis.
4. Find a point on the x-axis, which is equidistant from the points (7, 6) and (3, 4).
5. Find the slope of a line, which passes through the origin, and the mid-point of the
line segment joining the points P (0, – 4) and B (8, 0).

2018-19
212 MATHEMATICS

6. Without using the Pythagoras theorem, show that the points (4, 4), (3, 5) and
(–1, –1) are the vertices of a right angled triangle.
7. Find the slope of the line, which makes an angle of 30° with the positive direction
of y-axis measured anticlockwise.
8. Find the value of x for which the points (x, – 1), (2,1) and (4, 5) are collinear.
9. Without using distance formula, show that points (– 2, – 1), (4, 0), (3, 3) and (–3, 2)
are the vertices of a parallelogram.
10. Find the angle between the x-axis and the line joining the points (3,–1) and (4,–2).
11. The slope of a line is double of the slope of another line. If tangent of the angle
1
between them is , find the slopes of the lines.
3
12. A line passes through (x1, y1) and (h, k). If slope of the line is m, show that
k – y1 = m (h – x1).
a b
13. If three points (h, 0), (a, b) and (0, k) lie on a line, show that + = 1.
h k
14. Consider the following population and year graph (Fig 10.10), find the slope of the
line AB and using it, find what will be the population in the year 2010?

Fig 10.10

10.3 Various Forms of the Equation of a Line

We know that every line in a plane contains infinitely many points on it. This relationship
between line and points leads us to find the solution of the following problem:

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 213

How can we say that a given point lies on the given line? Its answer may be that
for a given line we should have a definite condition on the points lying on the line.
Suppose P (x, y) is an arbitrary point in the XY-plane and L is the given line. For the
equation of L, we wish to construct a statement or condition for the point P that is
true, when P is on L, otherwise false. Of course the statement is merely an algebraic
equation involving the variables x and y. Now, we will discuss the equation of a line
under different conditions.
10.3.1 Horizontal and vertical lines If a horizontal line L is at a distance a from the
x-axis then ordinate of every point lying on the line is either a or – a [Fig 10.11 (a)].
Therefore, equation of the line L is either y = a or y = – a. Choice of sign will depend
upon the position of the line according as the line is above or below the y-axis. Similarly,
the equation of a vertical line at a distance b from the y-axis is either x = b or
x = – b [Fig 10.11(b)].

Fig 10.11

Example 6 Find the equations of the lines

parallel to axes and passing through
(– 2, 3).
Solution Position of the lines is shown in the
Fig 10.12. The y-coordinate of every point on
the line parallel to x-axis is 3, therefore, equation
of the line parallel tox-axis and passing through
(– 2, 3) is y = 3. Similarly, equation of the line
parallel to y-axis and passing through (– 2, 3)
is x = – 2. Fig 10.12

2018-19
214 MATHEMATICS

10.3.2 Point-slope form Suppose that

P0 (x0, y0) is a fixed point on a non-vertical
line L, whose slope is m. Let P (x, y) be an
arbitrary point on L (Fig 10.13).
Then, by the definition, the slope of L is
given by
y − y0
m= , i.e. , y − y 0 = m (x − x 0 )
x − x0
...(1)
Since the point P0 (x0 , y0) along with
all points (x, y) on L satisfies (1) and no
Fig 10.13
other point in the plane satisfies (1). Equation
(1) is indeed the equation for the given line L.
Thus, the point (x, y) lies on the line with slope m through the fixed point (x0, y0),
if and only if, its coordinates satisfy the equation
y – y0 = m (x – x0)
Example 7 Find the equation of the line through (– 2, 3) with slope – 4.
Solution Here m = – 4 and given point (x0 , y0) is (– 2, 3).
By slope-intercept form formula
(1) above, equation of the given
line is
y – 3 = – 4 (x + 2) or
4x + y + 5 = 0, which is the
required equation.
10.3.3 Two-point form Let the
line L passes through two given
points P1 (x1, y1) and P2 (x2, y2).
Let P (x, y) be a general point
on L (Fig 10.14).
The three points P1, P2 and P are Fig 10.14
collinear, therefore, we have
slope of P1P = slope of P1P2
y − y1 y 2 − y1 y 2 − y1
i.e., = , or y − y 1 = ( x − x1 ).
x − x1 x 2 − x1 x 2 − x1

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 215

Thus, equation of the line passing through the points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is given by
y 2 − y1
y − y1 = ( x − x1) ... (2)
x 2 − x1
Example 8 Write the equation of the line through the points (1, –1) and (3, 5).
Solution Here x1 = 1, y1 = – 1, x2 = 3 and y2 = 5. Using two-point form (2) above
for the equation of the line, we have
5 – ( –1)
y – ( –1) = ( x – 1)
3 –1
or –3x + y + 4 = 0, which is the required equation.
10.3.4 Slope-intercept form Sometimes a line is known to us with its slope and an
intercept on one of the axes. We will now find equations of such lines.
Case I Suppose a line L with slope m cuts the y-axis at a distance c from the origin
(Fig10.15). The distance c is called the y-
intercept of the line L. Obviously,
coordinates of the point where the line meet
the y-axis are (0, c). Thus, L has slope m
and passes through a fixed point (0, c).
Therefore, by point-slope form, the equation
of L is
y − c = m ( x − 0 ) or y = mx + c
Thus, the point (x, y) on the line with slope
m and y-intercept c lies on the line if and Fig 10.15
only if
y = mx +c ...(3)
Note that the value of c will be positive or negative according as the intercept is made
on the positive or negative side of the y-axis, respectively.
Case II Suppose line L with slope m makes x-intercept d. Then equation of L is
y = m(x – d) ... (4)
Students may derive this equation themselves by the same method as in Case I.
1
Example 9 Write the equation of the lines for which tan θ = , where θ is the
2
3
inclination of the line and (i) y-intercept is – (ii) x-intercept is 4.
2

2018-19
216 MATHEMATICS

1 3
Solution (i) Here, slope of the line is m = tan θ = and y - intercept c = – .
2 2
Therefore, by slope-intercept form (3) above, the equation of the line is
1 3
y= x − or 2 y − x + 3 = 0 ,
2 2
which is the required equation.
1
(ii) Here, we have m = tan θ = and d = 4.
2
Therefore, by slope-intercept form (4) above, the equation of the line is
1
y= ( x − 4) or 2 y − x + 4 = 0 ,
2
which is the required equation.
10.3.5 Intercept - form Suppose a line L makes x-intercept a and y-intercept b on the
axes. Obviously L meets x-axis at the point
(a, 0) and y-axis at the point (0, b) (Fig .10.16).
By two-point form of the equation of the line,
we have
b−0
y−0= (x − a) or ay = −bx + ab ,
0−a
x y
i.e., + = 1.
a b
Thus, equation of the line making intercepts
Fig 10.16
a and b on x-and y-axis, respectively, is
x y
+ =1 ... (5)
a b
Example 10 Find the equation of the line, which makes intercepts –3 and 2 on the
x- and y-axes respectively.
Solution Here a = –3 and b = 2. By intercept form (5) above, equation of the line is
x y
+ =1 or 2x − 3 y + 6 = 0 .
−3 2

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 217

10.3.6 Normal form Suppose a non-vertical line is known to us with following data:
(i) Length of the perpendicular (normal) from origin to the line.
(ii) Angle which normal makes with the positive direction of x-axis.
Let L be the line, whose perpendicular distance from origin O be OA = p and the
angle between the positive x-axis and OA be ∠XOA = ω. The possible positions of line
L in the Cartesian plane are shown in the Fig 10.17. Now, our purpose is to find slope
of L and a point on it. Draw perpendicular AM on the x-axis in each case.

Fig 10.17

In each case, we have OM = p cos ω and MA = p sin ω, so that the coordinates of the
point A are (p cos ω, p sin ω).
Further, line L is perpendicular to OA. Therefore
1 1 cos ω
The slope of the line L = − =− =− .
slope of OA tan ω sin ω

cos ω
Thus, the line L has slope − and point A ( p cos ω, p sin ω)on it. Therefore, by
sin ω
point-slope form, the equation of the line L is

2018-19
218 MATHEMATICS

cos ω
y − p sin ω = − ( x − p cos ω ) or x cos ω + y sin ω = p (sin 2ω + cos 2ω)
sin ω
or x cos ω + y sin ω = p.
Hence, the equation of the line having normal distance p from the origin and angle ω
which the normal makes with the positive direction of x-axis is given by
x cos ω + y sin ω = p ... (6)
Example 11 Find the equation of the line whose perpendicular distance from the
origin is 4 units and the angle which the normal makes with positive direction of x-axis
is 15°.
Solution Here, we are given p = 4 and
ω = 150 (Fig10.18).
3 +1
Now cos 15° =
2 2

3 −1
and sin 15º = (Why?)
2 2

By the normal form (6) above, the equation of the

line is Fig 10.18

3 +1 3 −1
x cos 150 + y sin 150 = 4 or
2 2
x+
2 2
y = 4 or ( ) (
3 +1 x + )
3 − 1 y = 8 2.

This is the required equation.

Example 12 The Fahrenheit temperature F and absolute temperature K satisfy a
linear equation. Given that K = 273 when F = 32 and that K = 373 when F = 212.
Express K in terms of F and find the value of F, when K = 0.
Solution Assuming F along x-axis and K along y-axis, we have two points (32, 273)
and (212, 373) in XY-plane. By two-point form, the point (F, K) satisfies the equation
373 − 273 100
K − 273 = ( F − 32 ) or K − 273 = ( F − 32 )
212 − 32 180
5
or K= ( F − 32 ) + 273 ... (1)
9
which is the required relation.

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 219

When K = 0, Equation (1) gives

5 273 × 9
0= ( F − 32 ) + 273 or F − 32 = − = − 491.4 or F= − 459.4 .
9 5
Alternate method We know that simplest form of the equation of a line is y = mx + c.
Again assuming F along x-axis and K along y-axis, we can take equation in the form
K = mF + c ... (1)
Equation (1) is satisfied by (32, 273) and (212, 373). Therefore
273 = 32m + c ... (2)
and 373 = 212m + c ... (3)
Solving (2) and (3), we get
5 2297
m= and c = .
9 9
Putting the values of m and c in (1), we get
5 2297 ... (4)
K= F+
9 9
which is the required relation. When K = 0, (4) gives F = – 459.4.

A Note We know, that the equation y = mx + c, contains two constants, namely,

m and c. For finding these two constants, we need two conditions satisfied by the
equation of line. In all the examples above, we are given two conditions to determine
the equation of the line.

EXERCISE 10.2
In Exercises 1 to 8, find the equation of the line which satisfy the given conditions:
1. Write the equations for the x-and y-axes.
1
2. Passing through the point (– 4, 3) with slope .
2
3. Passing through (0, 0) with slope m.
( )
4. Passing through 2, 2 3 and inclined with the x-axis at an angle of 75o.
5. Intersecting the x-axis at a distance of 3 units to the left of origin with slope –2.
6. Intersecting the y-axis at a distance of 2 units above the origin and making an
angle of 30o with positive direction of the x-axis.
7. Passing through the points (–1, 1) and (2, – 4).

2018-19
220 MATHEMATICS

8. Perpendicular distance from the origin is 5 units and the angle made by the
perpendicular with the positive x-axis is 300.
9. The vertices of ∆ PQR are P (2, 1), Q (–2, 3) and R (4, 5). Find equation of the
median through the vertex R.
10. Find the equation of the line passing through (–3, 5) and perpendicular to the line
through the points (2, 5) and (–3, 6).
11. A line perpendicular to the line segment joining the points (1, 0) and (2, 3) divides
it in the ratio 1: n. Find the equation of the line.
12. Find the equation of a line that cuts off equal intercepts on the coordinate axes
and passes through the point (2, 3).
13. Find equation of the line passing through the point (2, 2) and cutting off intercepts
on the axes whose sum is 9.
2π
14. Find equation of the line through the point (0, 2) making an angle with the
3
positive x-axis. Also, find the equation of line parallel to it and crossing the y-axis
at a distance of 2 units below the origin.
15. The perpendicular from the origin to a line meets it at the point (–2, 9), find the
equation of the line.
16. The length L (in centimetre) of a copper rod is a linear function of its Celsius
temperature C. In an experiment, if L = 124.942 when C = 20 and L= 125.134
when C = 110, express L in terms of C.
17. The owner of a milk store finds that, he can sell 980 litres of milk each week at
Rs 14/litre and 1220 litres of milk each week at Rs 16/litre. Assuming a linear
relationship between selling price and demand, how many litres could he sell
weekly at Rs 17/litre?
18. P (a, b) is the mid-point of a line segment between axes. Show that equation
x y
of the line is + = 2.
a b
19. Point R (h, k) divides a line segment between the axes in the ratio 1: 2. Find
equation of the line.
20. By using the concept of equation of a line, prove that the three points (3, 0),
(– 2, – 2) and (8, 2) are collinear.
10.4 General Equation of a Line
In earlier classes, we have studied general equation of first degree in two variables,
Ax + By + C = 0, where A, B and C are real constants such that A and B are not zero
simultaneously. Graph of the equation Ax + By + C = 0 is always a straight line.

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 221

Therefore, any equation of the form Ax + By + C = 0, where A and B are not zero
simultaneously is called general linear equation or general equation of a line.
10.4.1 Different forms of Ax + By + C = 0 The general equation of a line can be
reduced into various forms of the equation of a line, by the following procedures:
(a) Slope-intercept form If B ≠ 0, then Ax + By + C = 0 can be written as
A C
y=− x − or y = mx + c ... (1)
B B
A C
where m=− and c = − .
B B
We know that Equation (1) is the slope-intercept form of the equation of a line
A C
whose slope is − , and y-intercept is − .
B B
C
If B = 0, then x = − ,which is a vertical line whose slope is undefined and
A
C
x-intercept is − .
A
(b) Intercept form If C ≠ 0, then Ax + By + C = 0 can be written as
x y x y
+ = 1 or + =1
C C a b ... (2)
− −
A B
C C
where a= − and b = − .
A B
We know that equation (2) is intercept form of the equation of a line whose
C C
x-intercept is − and y-intercept is − .
A B
If C = 0, then Ax + By + C = 0 can be written as Ax + By = 0, which is a line
passing through the origin and, therefore, has zero intercepts on the axes.
(c) Normal form Let x cos ω + y sin ω = p be the normal form of the line represented
by the equation Ax + By + C = 0 or Ax + By = – C. Thus, both the equations are
A B C
same and therefore, = =−
cos ω sin ω p

2018-19
222 MATHEMATICS

Ap Bp
which gives cos ω = − and sin ω = − .
C C

( ) ( )
2 2
Ap Bp
sin ω + cos ω = − + − =1
2 2
Now
C C
2
C C
p = or p = ±
2
or
A +B A +B
2 2 2 2

A B
Therefore cosω = ± and sinω = ± .
A +B A +B
2 2 2 2

Thus, the normal form of the equation Ax + By + C = 0 is

x cos ω + y sin ω = p,
A B C
where cos ω = ± , sin ω = ± and p = ± .
A +B A +B A +B
2 2 2 2 2 2

Proper choice of signs is made so that p should be positive.

Example 13 Equation of a line is 3x – 4y + 10 = 0. Find its (i) slope, (ii) x - and
y-intercepts.
Solution (i) Given equation 3x – 4y + 10 = 0 can be written as
3 5
y= x+ ... (1)
4 2
3
Comparing (1) with y = mx + c, we have slope of the given line as m = .
4
(ii) Equation 3x – 4y + 10 = 0 can be written as
x y
3 x − 4 y = −10 or + =1 ... (2)
10 5
−
3 2
x y 10
Comparing (2) with + = 1 , we have x-intercept as a = − and
a b 3
5
y-intercept as b = .
2

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 223

Example 14 Reduce the equation 3 x + y − 8 = 0 into normal form. Find the values
of p and ω.
Solution Given equation is
3x + y − 8 = 0 ... (1)

( 3)
2
Dividing (1) by + (1)2 = 2 , we get

3 1
x + y = 4 or cos 30° x + sin 30° y = 4 ... (2)
2 2
Comparing (2) with x cos ω + y sin ω = p, we get p = 4 and ω = 30°.

Example15 Find the angle between the lines y − 3 x − 5 = 0 and 3y − x + 6 = 0 .

Solution Given lines are

y − 3 x − 5 = 0 or y = 3 x + 5 ... (1)

1
and 3 y − x + 6 = 0 or y = 3 x − 2 3 ... (2)

1
Slope of line (1) is m1 = 3 and slope of line (2) is m2 = .
3
The acute angle (say) θ between two lines is given by
m 2 − m1
tan θ = ...
1 + m1m 2
(3)
Putting the values of m1 and m2 in (3), we get

1
− 3
3 1− 3 1
tan θ = = =
1 2 3 3
1+ 3 ×
3
which gives θ = 30°. Hence, angle between two lines is either 30° or 180° – 30° = 150°.
Example 16 Show that two lines a1x + b1 y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2 y + c2 = 0,
where b1, b2 ≠ 0 are:

2018-19
224 MATHEMATICS

a1 a2
(i) Parallel if = , and (ii) Perpendicular if a1 a 2 + b1 b 2 = 0 .
b1 b2
Solution Given lines can be written as

y = − a1 x − c1 ... (1)
b1 b1

and y = − a2 x − c2 ... (2)

b2 b2

Slopes of the lines (1) and (2) are m1 = − a1 and m2 = −

a 2 , respectively. Now
b1 b2
(i) Lines are parallel, if m1 = m2, which gives
a1 a a1 a 2
− = − 2 or = .
b1 b2 b1 b2
(ii) Lines are perpendicular, if m1.m2 = – 1, which gives
a1 a2
. = − 1 or a a + b b = 0
b1 b2 1 2 1 2

Example 17 Find the equation of a line perpendicular to the line x − 2 y + 3 = 0 and

passing through the point (1, – 2).

Solution Given line x − 2 y + 3 = 0 can be written as

1 3
y= x+ ...(1)
2 2
1
Slope of the line (1) is m1 = . Therefore, slope of the line perpendicular to line (1) is
2
1
m2 = − = −2
m1
Equation of the line with slope – 2 and passing through the point (1, – 2) is
y − ( − 2) = − 2(x − 1) or y = − 2 x ,

which is the required equation.

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 225

10.5 Distance of a Point From a Line

The distance of a point from a line is the length of the perpendicular drawn from the
point to the line. Let L : Ax + By + C = 0 be a line, whose distance from the point
P (x1, y1) is d. Draw a perpendicular PM from the point P to the line L (Fig10.19). If

Fig10.19
the line meets the x-and y-axes at the points Q and R, respectively. Then, coordinates
 C   C
of the points are Q  − , 0  and R  0, −  . Thus, the area of the triangle PQR
 A   B
is given by
1 2 area (∆PQR)
area (∆PQR) = PM.QR , which gives PM = ... (1)
2 QR

1  C   C  C 
Also, area (∆PQR) = x1  0 +  +  −  − − y1  + 0 ( y 1 − 0 )
2  B   A  B 

1 C C C2
= x1 + y 1 +
2 B A AB

C
or 2 area (∆PQR) = . A x1 + B y 1 + C , and
AB

( )
2 2
 C C C
QR =  0 +  + − 0 = A +B
2 2
 A B AB
Substituting the values of area (∆PQR) and QR in (1), we get

2018-19
226 MATHEMATICS

A x1 + B y 1 + C
PM =
A +B
2 2

A x1 + B y1 + C
or d= .
A +B
2 2

Thus, the perpendicular distance (d) of a line Ax + By+ C = 0 from a point (x1, y1)
is given by
A x1 + B y1 + C
d= .
A +B
2 2

10.5.1 Distance between two

parallel lines We know that slopes
of two parallel lines are equal.
Therefore, two parallel lines can be
taken in the form
y = mx + c1 ... (1)
and y = mx + c2 ... (2)
Line (1) will intersect x-axis at the point
 c1 
A  − m , 0  as shown in Fig10.20.
  Fig10.20

Distance between two lines is equal to the length of the perpendicular from point
A to line (2). Therefore, distance between the lines (1) and (2) is

( −m)  −
c1 
 + ( −c2 ) c1 − c2
 m .
or d =
1 + m2 1 + m2

Thus, the distance d between two parallel lines y = mx + c1 and y = mx + c2 is given by

c1 − c2
d= .
1 + m2
If lines are given in general form, i.e., Ax + By + C1 = 0 and Ax + By + C2 = 0,

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 227

C1 − C 2
then above formula will take the form d =
A 2 + B2
Students can derive it themselves.
Example 18 Find the distance of the point (3, – 5) from the line 3x – 4y –26 = 0.
Solution Given line is 3x – 4y –26 = 0 ... (1)
Comparing (1) with general equation of line Ax + By + C = 0, we get
A = 3, B = – 4 and C = – 26.
Given point is (x1, y1) = (3, –5). The distance of the given point from given line is

Ax1 + By1 + C 3.3 + ( –4 )( –5 ) – 26 3

d= = = .
A +B 3 + ( –4 ) 5
2 2 2 2

Example 19 Find the distance between the parallel lines 3x – 4y +7 = 0 and

3x – 4y + 5 = 0
Solution Here A = 3, B = –4, C1 = 7 and C2 = 5. Therefore, the required distance is
7–5 2
d= = .
32 + ( –4 ) 5
2

EXERCISE 10.3
1. Reduce the following equations into slope - intercept form and find their slopes
and the y - intercepts.
(i) x + 7y = 0, (ii) 6x + 3y – 5 = 0, (iii) y = 0.
2. Reduce the following equations into intercept form and find their intercepts on
the axes.
(i) 3x + 2y – 12 = 0, (ii) 4x – 3y = 6, (iii) 3y + 2 = 0.
3. Reduce the following equations into normal form. Find their perpendicular distances
from the origin and angle between perpendicular and the positive x-axis.
(i) x – 3y + 8 = 0, (ii) y – 2 = 0, (iii) x – y = 4.
4. Find the distance of the point (–1, 1) from the line 12(x + 6) = 5(y – 2).
x y
5. Find the points on the x-axis, whose distances from the line + = 1 are 4 units.
3 4
6. Find the distance between parallel lines
(i) 15x + 8y – 34 = 0 and 15x + 8y + 31 = 0 (ii) l (x + y) + p = 0 and l (x + y) – r = 0.

2018-19
228 MATHEMATICS

7. Find equation of the line parallel to the line 3 x − 4 y + 2 = 0 and passing through
the point (–2, 3).
8. Find equation of the line perpendicular to the line x – 7y + 5 = 0 and having
x intercept 3.
9. Find angles between the lines 3 x + y = 1and x + 3 y = 1.
10. The line through the points (h, 3) and (4, 1) intersects the line 7 x − 9 y − 19 = 0.
at right angle. Find the value of h.
11. Prove that the line through the point (x1, y1) and parallel to the line Ax + By + C = 0 is
A (x –x1) + B (y – y1) = 0.
12. Two lines passing through the point (2, 3) intersects each other at an angle of 60o.
If slope of one line is 2, find equation of the other line.
13. Find the equation of the right bisector of the line segment joining the points (3, 4)
and (–1, 2).
14. Find the coordinates of the foot of perpendicular from the point (–1, 3) to the
line 3x – 4y – 16 = 0.
15. The perpendicular from the origin to the line y = mx + c meets it at the point
(–1, 2). Find the values of m and c.
16. If p and q are the lengths of perpendiculars from the origin to the
lines x cos θ − y sin θ = k cos 2θ and x sec θ + y cosec θ = k, respectively, prove
that p2 + 4q2 = k2.
17. In the triangle ABC with vertices A (2, 3), B (4, –1) and C (1, 2), find the equation
and length of altitude from the vertex A.
18. If p is the length of perpendicular from the origin to the line whose intercepts on
1 1 1
the axes are a and b, then show that 2
= 2 + 2.
p a b

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 20 If the lines 2 x + y − 3 = 0 , 5 x + ky − 3 = 0 and 3 x − y − 2 = 0 are
concurrent, find the value of k.
Solution Three lines are said to be concurrent, if they pass through a common point,
i.e., point of intersection of any two lines lies on the third line. Here given lines are
2x + y – 3 = 0 ... (1)
5x + ky – 3 = 0 ... (2)

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 229

3x – y – 2 = 0 ... (3)
Solving (1) and (3) by cross-multiplication method, we get
x y 1
= = or x = 1, y = 1 .
–2 – 3 –9 + 4 –2 – 3
Therefore, the point of intersection of two lines is (1, 1). Since above three lines are
concurrent, the point (1, 1) will satisfy equation (2) so that
5.1 + k .1 – 3 = 0 or k = – 2.

Example 21 Find the distance of the line 4x – y = 0 from the point P (4, 1) measured
along the line making an angle of 135° with the positive x-axis.
Solution Given line is 4x – y = 0 ... (1)
In order to find the distance of the
line (1) from the point P (4, 1) along
another line, we have to find the point
of intersection of both the lines. For
this purpose, we will first find the
equation of the second line (1, 4)
(Fig 10.21). Slope of second line is
tan 135° = –1. Equation of the line
with slope – 1 through the point
P (4, 1) is

Fig 10.21
y – 1 = – 1 (x – 4) or x + y – 5 = 0 ... (2)
Solving (1) and (2), we get x = 1 and y = 4 so that point of intersection of the two lines
is Q (1, 4). Now, distance of line (1) from the point P (4, 1) along the line (2)
= the distance between the points P (4, 1) and Q (1, 4).

= (1 − 4 )2 + ( 4 − 1)2 = 3 2 units .
Example 22 Assuming that straight lines work as the plane mirror for a point, find
the image of the point (1, 2) in the line x – 3y + 4 = 0.
Solution Let Q (h, k) is the image of the point P (1, 2) in the line
x – 3y + 4 = 0 ... (1)

2018-19
230 MATHEMATICS

Fig10.22
Therefore, the line (1) is the perpendicular bisector of line segment PQ (Fig 10.22).
−1
Hence Slope of line PQ = ,
Slope of line x − 3 y + 4 = 0

so that k − 2 = −1 or 3h + k = 5 ... (2)

h −1 1
3

 h +1 k + 2 
and the mid-point of PQ, i.e., point  ,  will satisfy the equation (1) so that
 2 2 
h +1  k + 2  ... (3)
− 3  + 4 = 0 or h − 3k = −3
2  2 
6 7
Solving (2) and (3), we get h = and k = .
5 5
6 7
Hence, the image of the point (1, 2) in the line (1) is  ,  .
5 5
Example 23 Show that the area of the triangle formed by the lines

(c – c )
2
1 2
y = m x + c , y = m x + c and x = 0 is .
1 1 2 2
2 m1 − m 2

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 231

Solution Given lines are

y = m1 x + c1 ... (1)
y = m2 x + c2 ... (2)
x=0 ... (3)
We know that line y = mx + c meets
the line x = 0 (y-axis) at the point
(0, c). Therefore, two vertices of the
triangle formed by lines (1) to (3) are
P (0, c1) and Q (0, c2) (Fig 10. 23).
Third vertex can be obtained by
solving equations (1) and (2). Solving
(1) and (2), we get

x=
(c2 − c1 ) and y =
( m1c2 − m2c1 ) Fig 10.23
( m1 − m2 ) ( m1 − m2 )
 ( c2 − c1 ) ( m1c2 − m2 c1 ) 
Therefore, third vertex of the triangle is R  m − m , 
( 1 2) ( m1 − m2 )  .
Now, the area of the triangle is

m c − m c  ( c −c )
2

1  m c − m2 c1  c −c  2 1
= 0  1 2 − c2  + 2 1 (c2 − c1 ) + 0  c − 1 2
=
2 1

 m1 − m2  m1 − m2 m1 − m2 2 m1 − m 2
1
2  
Example 24 A line is such that its segment
between the lines
5x – y + 4 = 0 and 3x + 4y – 4 = 0 is bisected at the
point (1, 5). Obtain its equation.
Solution Given lines are
5x – y + 4 = 0 ... (1)
3x + 4y – 4 = 0 ... (2)
Let the required line intersects the lines (1) and (2)
at the points, (α1, β1) and (α2, β2), respectively
(Fig10.24). Therefore
5α1 – β1 + 4 = 0 and
3 α2 + 4 β 2 – 4 = 0

2018-19
232 MATHEMATICS

4 – 3α 2
or β1 = 5α1 + 4 and β 2 = .
4
We are given that the mid point of the segment of the required line between (α1, β1)
and (α2, β2) is (1, 5). Therefore

α1 + α 2 β + β2
= 1 and 1 = 5,
2 2
4 – 3α 2
5α1 + 4 +
or α1 + α 2 = 2 and 4 = 5,
2
or α1 + α2 = 2 and 20 α1 – 3 α2 = 20 ... (3)
Solving equations in (3) for α1 and α2, we get

26 20 26 222
α1 = and α 2 = and hence, β1 = 5. +4 = .
23 23 23 23
Equation of the required line passing through (1, 5) and (α1, β1) is
222
β −5 −5
y −5 = 1 ( x − 1) or y − 5 = 23 (x − 1)
α1 − 1 26
−1
23
or 107x – 3y – 92 = 0,
which is the equation of required line.
Example 25 Show that the path of a moving point such that its distances from two
lines 3x – 2y = 5 and 3x + 2y = 5 are equal is a straight line.
Solution Given lines are
3x – 2y = 5 … (1)
and 3x + 2y = 5 … (2)
Let (h, k) is any point, whose distances from the lines (1) and (2) are equal. Therefore
3h − 2k − 5 3h + 2k − 5
= or 3h − 2k − 5 = 3h + 2k − 5 ,
9+4 9+4
which gives 3h – 2k – 5 = 3h + 2k – 5 or – (3h – 2k – 5) = 3h + 2k – 5.

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 233

5
Solving these two relations we get k = 0 or h = . Thus, the point (h, k) satisfies the
3
5
equations y = 0 or x = , which represent straight lines. Hence, path of the point
3
equidistant from the lines (1) and (2) is a straight line.

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 10

1. Find the values of k for which the line (k–3) x – (4 – k2) y + k2 –7k + 6 = 0 is
(a) Parallel to the x-axis,
(b) Parallel to the y-axis,
(c) Passing through the origin.
2. Find the values of θ and p, if the equation x cos θ + y sinθ = p is the normal form
of the line 3 x + y + 2 = 0.
3. Find the equations of the lines, which cut-off intercepts on the axes whose sum
and product are 1 and – 6, respectively.
x y
4. What are the points on the y-axis whose distance from the line + = 1 is
3 4
4 units.
5. Find perpendicular distance from the origin to the line joining the points (cosθ, sin θ)
and (cos φ, sin φ).
6. Find the equation of the line parallel to y-axis and drawn through the point of
intersection of the lines x – 7y + 5 = 0 and 3x + y = 0.
x y
7. Find the equation of a line drawn perpendicular to the line + = 1 through the
4 6
point, where it meets the y-axis.
8. Find the area of the triangle formed by the lines y – x = 0, x + y = 0 and x – k = 0.
9. Find the value of p so that the three lines 3x + y – 2 = 0, px + 2 y – 3 = 0 and
2x – y – 3 = 0 may intersect at one point.
10. If three lines whose equations are y = m1x + c1, y = m2x + c2 and y = m3x + c3 are
concurrent, then show that m1(c2 – c3) + m2 (c3 – c1) + m3 (c1 – c2) = 0.
11. Find the equation of the lines through the point (3, 2) which make an angle of 45o
with the line x – 2y = 3.
12. Find the equation of the line passing through the point of intersection of the lines
4x + 7y – 3 = 0 and 2x – 3y + 1 = 0 that has equal intercepts on the axes.

2018-19
234 MATHEMATICS

13. Show that the equation of the line passing through the origin and making an angle
y m ± tan ‚
θ with the line y = mx + c is x = 1 ∓ m tan ‚ .

14. In what ratio, the line joining (–1, 1) and (5, 7) is divided by the line x + y = 4?
15. Find the distance of the line 4x + 7y + 5 = 0 from the point (1, 2) along the line
2x – y = 0.
16. Find the direction in which a straight line must be drawn through the point (–1, 2)
so that its point of intersection with the line x + y = 4 may be at a distance of
3 units from this point.
17. The hypotenuse of a right angled triangle has its ends at the points (1, 3) and
(– 4, 1). Find an equation of the legs (perpendicular sides) of the triangle.
18. Find the image of the point (3, 8) with respect to the line x +3y = 7 assuming the
line to be a plane mirror.
19. If the lines y = 3x +1 and 2y = x + 3 are equally inclined to the line y = mx + 4, find
the value of m.
20. If sum of the perpendicular distances of a variable point P (x, y) from the lines
x + y – 5 = 0 and 3x – 2y +7 = 0 is always 10. Show that P must move on a line.
21. Find equation of the line which is equidistant from parallel lines 9x + 6y – 7 = 0
and 3x + 2y + 6 = 0.
22. A ray of light passing through the point (1, 2) reflects on the x-axis at point A and the
reflected ray passes through the point (5, 3). Find the coordinates of A.
23. Prove that the product of the lengths of the perpendiculars drawn from the

points ( ) ( ) x
a
y
cosθ + sin θ = 1is b 2 .
a 2 − b 2 ,0 and − a 2 − b2 ,0 to the line
b
24. A person standing at the junction (crossing) of two straight paths represented by
the equations 2x – 3y + 4 = 0 and 3x + 4y – 5 = 0 wants to reach the path whose
equation is 6x – 7y + 8 = 0 in the least time. Find equation of the path that he
should follow.

Summary
® Slope (m) of a non-vertical line passing through the points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2)
y 2 − y1 y1 − y 2
is given by m = = , x 1 ≠ x 2.
x 2 − x1 x1 − x 2
® If a line makes an angle á with the positive direction of x-axis, then the slope
of the line is given by m = tan α, α ≠ 90°.
® Slope of horizontal line is zero and slope of vertical line is undefined.

2018-19
 STRAIGHT LINES 235

® An acute angle (say θ) between lines L1 and L2 with slopes m1 and m2 is

m2 – m1
given by tanθ = 1 + m m ,1 + m1 m2 ≠ 0 .
1 2

® Two lines are parallel if and only if their slopes are equal.
® Two lines are perpendicular if and only if product of their slopes is –1.
® Three points A, B and C are collinear, if and only if slope of AB = slope of BC.
® Equation of the horizontal line having distance a from the x-axis is either
y = a or y = – a.
® Equation of the vertical line having distance b from the y-axis is either
x = b or x = – b.
® The point (x, y) lies on the line with slope m and through the fixed point (xo, yo),
if and only if its coordinates satisfy the equation y – y o = m (x – xo).
® Equation of the line passing through the points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is given by
y 2 − y1
y − y1 = ( x − x1).
x 2 − x1
® The point (x, y) on the line with slope m and y-intercept c lies on the line if and
only if y = mx + c.
® If a line with slope m makes x-intercept d. Then equation of the line is
y = m (x – d).
® Equation of a line making intercepts a and b on the x-and y-axis,
x y
respectively, is + = 1.
a b
® The equation of the line having normal distance from origin p and angle between
normal and the positive x-axis ω is given by x cos ω + y sin ω = p .
® Any equation of the form Ax + By + C = 0, with A and B are not zero,
simultaneously, is called the general linear equation or general equation of
a line.
® The perpendicular distance (d) of a line Ax + By+ C = 0 from a point (x1, y1)
Ax1 + B y1 + C
is given by d = .
A +B
2 2

® Distance between the parallel lines Ax + By + C1 = 0 and Ax + By + C2 = 0,

C1 − C 2
is given by d = .
A +B
2 2

2018-19
 Chapter 11
CONIC SECTIONS

Let the relation of knowledge to real life be very visible to your pupils
and let them understand how by knowledge the world could be
transformed. – BERTRAND RUSSELL 

11.1 Introduction
In the preceding Chapter 10, we have studied various forms
of the equations of a line. In this Chapter, we shall study
about some other curves, viz., circles, ellipses, parabolas
and hyperbolas. The names parabola and hyperbola are
given by Apollonius. These curves are in fact, known as
conic sections or more commonly conics because they
can be obtained as intersections of a plane with a double
napped right circular cone. These curves have a very wide
range of applications in fields such as planetary motion, Apollonius
design of telescopes and antennas, reflectors in flashlights (262 B.C. -190 B.C.)

and automobile headlights, etc. Now, in the subsequent sections we will see how the
intersection of a plane with a double napped right circular cone
results in different types of curves.

11.2 Sections of a Cone

Let l be a fixed vertical line and m be another line intersecting it at
a fixed point V and inclined to it at an angle α (Fig11.1).
Suppose we rotate the line m around the line l in such a way
that the angle α remains constant. Then the surface generated is
a double-napped right circular hollow cone herein after referred as Fig 11. 1

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 237

Fig 11. 2 Fig 11. 3

cone and extending indefinitely far in both directions (Fig11.2).
The point V is called the vertex; the line l is the axis of the cone. The rotating line
m is called a generator of the cone. The vertex separates the cone into two parts
called nappes.
If we take the intersection of a plane with a cone, the section so obtained is called
a conic section. Thus, conic sections are the curves obtained by intersecting a right
circular cone by a plane.
We obtain different kinds of conic sections depending on the position of the
intersecting plane with respect to the cone and by the angle made by it with the vertical
axis of the cone. Let β be the angle made by the intersecting plane with the vertical
axis of the cone (Fig11.3).
The intersection of the plane with the cone can take place either at the vertex of
the cone or at any other part of the nappe either below or above the vertex.
11.2.1 Circle, ellipse, parabola and hyperbola When the plane cuts the nappe (other
than the vertex) of the cone, we have the following situations:
(a) When β = 90o, the section is a circle (Fig11.4).
(b) When α < β < 90o, the section is an ellipse (Fig11.5).
(c) When β = α; the section is a parabola (Fig11.6).
(In each of the above three situations, the plane cuts entirely across one nappe of
the cone).
(d) When 0 ≤ β < α; the plane cuts through both the nappes and the curves of
intersection is a hyperbola (Fig11.7).

2018-19
238 MATHEMATICS

Fig 11. 4 Fig 11. 5

Fig 11. 7
Fig 11. 6
11.2.2 Degenerated conic sections
When the plane cuts at the vertex of the cone, we have the following different cases:
(a) When α < β ≤ 90o, then the section is a point (Fig11.8).
(b) When β = α, the plane contains a generator of the cone and the section is a
straight line (Fig11.9).
It is the degenerated case of a parabola.
(c) When 0 ≤ β < α, the section is a pair of intersecting straight lines (Fig11.10). It is
the degenerated case of a hyperbola.

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 239

In the following sections, we shall obtain the equations of each of these conic
sections in standard form by defining them based on geometric properties.

Fig 11. 8
Fig 11. 9

Fig 11. 10
11.3 Circle
Definition 1 A circle is the set of all points in a plane that are equidistant from a fixed
point in the plane.
The fixed point is called the centre of the circle and the distance from the centre
to a point on the circle is called the radius of the circle (Fig 11.11).

2018-19
240 MATHEMATICS

Fig 11. 11 Fig 11. 12

The equation of the circle is simplest if the centre of the circle is at the origin.
However, we derive below the equation of the circle with a given centre and radius
(Fig 11.12).
Given C (h, k) be the centre and r the radius of circle. Let P(x, y) be any point on
the circle (Fig11.12). Then, by the definition, | CP | = r . By the distance formula,
we have
(x – h)2 + (y – k )2 = r
i.e. (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2
This is the required equation of the circle with centre at (h,k) and radius r .
Example 1 Find an equation of the circle with centre at (0,0) and radius r.
Solution Here h = k = 0. Therefore, the equation of the circle is x2 + y2 = r2.
Example 2 Find the equation of the circle with centre (–3, 2) and radius 4.
Solution Here h = –3, k = 2 and r = 4. Therefore, the equation of the required circle is
(x + 3)2 + (y –2)2 = 16
Example 3 Find the centre and the radius of the circle x2 + y2 + 8x + 10y – 8 = 0
Solution The given equation is
(x2 + 8x) + (y2 + 10y) = 8
Now, completing the squares within the parenthesis, we get
(x2 + 8x + 16) + (y2 + 10y + 25) = 8 + 16 + 25
i.e. (x + 4)2 + (y + 5)2 = 49
i.e. {x – (– 4)}2 + {y – (–5)}2 = 72
Therefore, the given circle has centre at (– 4, –5) and radius 7.

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 241

Example 4 Find the equation of the circle which passes through the points (2, – 2), and
(3,4) and whose centre lies on the line x + y = 2.
Solution Let the equation of the circle be (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2.
Since the circle passes through (2, – 2) and (3,4), we have
(2 – h)2 + (–2 – k)2 = r2 ... (1)
and (3 – h)2 + (4 – k)2 = r2 ... (2)
Also since the centre lies on the line x + y = 2, we have
h+k=2 ... (3)
Solving the equations (1), (2) and (3), we get
h = 0.7, k = 1.3 and r2 = 12.58
Hence, the equation of the required circle is
(x – 0.7)2 + (y – 1.3)2 = 12.58.

EXERCISE 11.1
In each of the following Exercises 1 to 5, find the equation of the circle with
1. centre (0,2) and radius 2 2. centre (–2,3) and radius 4
1 1 1
3. centre ( , ) and radius 4. centre (1,1) and radius 2
2 4 12

5. centre (–a, –b) and radius a2 − b2 .

In each of the following Exercises 6 to 9, find the centre and radius of the circles.
6. (x + 5)2 + (y – 3)2 = 36 7. x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y – 45 = 0
8. x2 + y2 – 8x + 10y – 12 = 0 9. 2x2 + 2y2 – x = 0
10. Find the equation of the circle passing through the points (4,1) and (6,5) and
whose centre is on the line 4x + y = 16.
11. Find the equation of the circle passing through the points (2,3) and (–1,1) and
whose centre is on the line x – 3y – 11 = 0.
12. Find the equation of the circle with radius 5 whose centre lies on x-axis and
passes through the point (2,3).
13. Find the equation of the circle passing through (0,0) and making intercepts a and
b on the coordinate axes.
14. Find the equation of a circle with centre (2,2) and passes through the point (4,5).
15. Does the point (–2.5, 3.5) lie inside, outside or on the circle x2 + y2 = 25?

2018-19
242 MATHEMATICS

11.4 Parabola
Definition 2 A parabola is the set of all points
in a plane that are equidistant from a fixed line
and a fixed point (not on the line) in the plane.
The fixed line is called the directrix of
the parabola and the fixed point F is called the
focus (Fig 11.13). (‘Para’ means ‘for’ and
‘bola’ means ‘throwing’, i.e., the shape
described when you throw a ball in the air).

 Note If the fixed point lies on the fixed

line, then the set of points in the plane, which Fig 11. 13
are equidistant from the fixed point and the
fixed line is the straight line through the fixed
point and perpendicular to the fixed line. We
call this straight line as degenerate case of
the parabola.
A line through the focus and perpendicular
to the directrix is called the axis of the
parabola. The point of intersection of parabola
with the axis is called the vertex of the parabola
(Fig11.14).
11.4.1 Standard equations of parabola The Fig 11.14
equation of a parabola is simplest if the vertex
is at the origin and the axis of symmetry is along the x-axis or y-axis. The four possible
such orientations of parabola are shown below in Fig11.15 (a) to (d).

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 243

Fig 11.15 (a) to (d)

We will derive the equation for the parabola shown above in Fig 11.15 (a) with
focus at (a, 0) a > 0; and directricx x = – a as below:
Let F be the focus and l the directrix. Let
FM be perpendicular to the directrix and bisect
FM at the point O. Produce MO to X. By the
definition of parabola, the mid-point O is on the
parabola and is called the vertex of the parabola.
Take O as origin, OX the x-axis and OY
perpendicular to it as the y-axis. Let the distance
from the directrix to the focus be 2a. Then, the
coordinates of the focus are (a, 0), and the
equation of the directrix is x + a = 0 as in Fig11.16.
Let P(x, y) be any point on the parabola such that Fig 11.16
PF = PB, ... (1)
where PB is perpendicular to l. The coordinates of B are (– a, y). By the distance
formula, we have
PF = (x – a) 2 + y 2 and PB = (x + a) 2
Since PF = PB, we have

(x – a ) 2 + y 2 = (x + a )2
i.e. (x – a)2 + y2 = (x + a)2
or x2 – 2ax + a2 + y2 = x2 + 2ax + a2
or y2 = 4ax ( a > 0).

2018-19
244 MATHEMATICS

Hence, any point on the parabola satisfies

y2 = 4ax. ... (2)
Conversely, let P(x, y) satisfy the equation (2)

PF = (x – a) 2 + y 2 = (x – a) 2 + 4ax

= (x + a) 2 = PB ... (3)
and so P(x,y) lies on the parabola.
Thus, from (2) and (3) we have proved that the equation to the parabola with
vertex at the origin, focus at (a,0) and directrix x = – a is y2 = 4ax.
Discussion In equation (2), since a > 0, x can assume any positive value or zero but
no negative value and the curve extends indefinitely far into the first and the fourth
quadrants. The axis of the parabola is the positive x-axis.
Similarly, we can derive the equations of the parabolas in:
Fig 11.15 (b) as y2 = – 4ax,
Fig 11.15 (c) as x2 = 4ay,
Fig 11.15 (d) as x2 = – 4ay,
These four equations are known as standard equations of parabolas.

 Note The standard equations of parabolas have focus on one of the coordinate
axis; vertex at the origin and thereby the directrix is parallel to the other coordinate
axis. However, the study of the equations of parabolas with focus at any point and
any line as directrix is beyond the scope here.
From the standard equations of the parabolas, Fig11.15, we have the following
observations:
1. Parabola is symmetric with respect to the axis of the parabola.If the equation
has a y2 term, then the axis of symmetry is along the x-axis and if the
equation has an x2 term, then the axis of symmetry is along the y-axis.
2. When the axis of symmetry is along the x-axis the parabola opens to the
(a) right if the coefficient of x is positive,
(b) left if the coefficient of x is negative.
3. When the axis of symmetry is along the y-axis the parabola opens
(c) upwards if the coefficient of y is positive.
(d) downwards if the coefficient of y is negative.

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 245

11.4.2 Latus rectum

Definition 3 Latus rectum of a parabola is a line segment perpendicular to the axis of
the parabola, through the focus and whose end points lie on the parabola (Fig11.17).
To find the Length of the latus rectum of the parabola y2 = 4ax (Fig 11.18).
By the definition of the parabola, AF = AC.
But AC = FM = 2a
Hence AF = 2a.
And since the parabola is symmetric with respect to x-axis AF = FB and so
AB = Length of the latus rectum = 4a.

Fig 11.17 Fig 11.18

Example 5 Find the coordinates of the focus, axis,

the equation of the directrix and latus rectum of
the parabola y2 = 8x.
Solution The given equation involves y2, so the
axis of symmetry is along the x-axis.
The coefficient of x is positive so the parabola opens
to the right. Comparing with the given equation
y2 = 4ax, we find that a = 2. Fig 11.19
Thus, the focus of the parabola is (2, 0) and the equation of the directrix of the parabola
is x = – 2 (Fig 11.19).
Length of the latus rectum is 4a = 4 × 2 = 8.

2018-19
246 MATHEMATICS

Example 6 Find the equation of the parabola with focus (2,0) and directrix x = – 2.
Solution Since the focus (2,0) lies on the x-axis, the x-axis itself is the axis of the
parabola. Hence the equation of the parabola is of the form either
y2 = 4ax or y2 = – 4ax. Since the directrix is x = – 2 and the focus is (2,0), the parabola
is to be of the form y 2 = 4ax with a = 2. Hence the required equation is
y2 = 4(2)x = 8x
Example 7 Find the equation of the parabola with vertex at (0, 0) and focus at (0, 2).
Solution Since the vertex is at (0,0) and the focus is at (0,2) which lies on y-axis, the
y-axis is the axis of the parabola. Therefore, equation of the parabola is of the form
x2 = 4ay. thus, we have
x2 = 4(2)y, i.e., x2 = 8y.

Example 8 Find the equation of the parabola which is symmetric about the y-axis, and
passes through the point (2,–3).
Solution Since the parabola is symmetric about y-axis and has its vertex at the origin,
the equation is of the form x2 = 4ay or x2 = – 4ay, where the sign depends on whether
the parabola opens upwards or downwards. But the parabola passes through (2,–3)
which lies in the fourth quadrant, it must open downwards. Thus the equation is of
the form x2 = – 4ay.
Since the parabola passes through ( 2,–3), we have

1
22 = – 4a (–3), i.e., a =
3
Therefore, the equation of the parabola is
1
x2 = − 4   y, i.e., 3x2 = – 4y.
 3

EXERCISE 11.2
In each of the following Exercises 1 to 6, find the coordinates of the focus, axis of the
parabola, the equation of the directrix and the length of the latus rectum.
1. y2 = 12x 2. x2 = 6y 3. y2 = – 8x
4. x2 = – 16y 5. y2 = 10x 6. x2 = – 9y
In each of the Exercises 7 to 12, find the equation of the parabola that satisfies the
given conditions:

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 247

7. Focus (6,0); directrix x = – 6 8. Focus (0,–3); directrix y = 3

9. Vertex (0,0); focus (3,0) 10. Vertex (0,0); focus (–2,0)
11. Vertex (0,0) passing through (2,3) and axis is along x-axis.
12. Vertex (0,0), passing through (5,2) and symmetric with respect to y-axis.
11. 5 Ellipse
Definition 4 An ellipse is the set of all points in
a plane, the sum of whose distances from two
fixed points in the plane is a constant.
The two fixed points are called the foci (plural
of ‘focus’) of the ellipse (Fig11.20).

 Note The constant which is the sum of

the distances of a point on the ellipse from the
two fixed points is always greater than the Fig 11.20
distance between the two fixed points.
The mid point of the line segment joining the foci is called the centre of the
ellipse. The line segment through the foci of the ellipse is called the major axis and the
line segment through the centre and perpendicular to the major axis is called the minor
axis. The end points of the major axis are called the vertices of the ellipse(Fig 11.21).

Fig 11.21 Fig 11.22

We denote the length of the major axis by 2a, the length of the minor axis by 2b
and the distance between the foci by 2c. Thus, the length of the semi major axis is a
and semi-minor axis is b (Fig11.22).

2018-19
248 MATHEMATICS

11.5.1 Relationship between semi-major

axis, semi-minor axis and the distance of
the focus from the centre of the ellipse
(Fig 11.23).
Take a point P at one end of the major axis.
Sum of the distances of the point P to the
foci is F1 P + F2P = F1O + OP + F2P
(Since, F1P = F1O + OP)
= c + a + a – c = 2a Fig 11.23

Take a point Q at one end of the minor axis.

Sum of the distances from the point Q to the foci is

F1Q + F2Q = b2 + c2 + b2 + c2 = 2 b2 + c 2
Since both P and Q lies on the ellipse.
By the definition of ellipse, we have

2 b 2 + c 2 = 2a, i.e., a = b2 + c 2

or a 2 = b2 + c2 , i.e., c= a 2 − b2 .
11.5.2 Special cases of an ellipse In the equation
c2 = a2 – b2 obtained above, if we keep a fixed and
vary c from 0 to a, the resulting ellipses will vary in
shape.
Case (i) When c = 0, both foci merge together with
the centre of the ellipse and a2 = b2, i.e., a = b, and so
the ellipse becomes circle (Fig11.24). Thus, circle is a
special case of an ellipse which is dealt in Section 11.3.
Fig 11.24
Case (ii) When c = a, then b = 0. The ellipse reduces
to the line segment F1F2 joining the two foci (Fig11.25).
11.5.3 Eccentricity Fig 11.25
Definition 5 The eccentricity of an ellipse is the ratio of the distances from the centre
of the ellipse to one of the foci and to one of the vertices of the ellipse (eccentricity is
c
denoted by e) i.e., e = .
a

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 249

Then since the focus is at a distance of c from the centre, in terms of the eccentricity
the focus is at a distance of ae from the centre.
11.5.4 Standard equations of an ellipse The equation of an ellipse is simplest if the
centre of the ellipse is at the origin and the foci are

(a)
Fig 11.26
on the x-axis or y-axis. The two such possible orientations are shown in Fig 11.26.
We will derive the equation for the ellipse shown above in Fig 11.26 (a) with foci
on the x-axis.
Let F1 and F2 be the foci and O be the mid-
point of the line segment F1F2. Let O be the origin
and the line from O through F2 be the positive
x-axis and that through F1as the negative x-axis.
Let, the line through O perpendicular to the
x-axis be the y-axis. Let the coordinates of F1 be
(– c, 0) and F2 be (c, 0) (Fig 11.27).
Let P(x, y) be any point on the ellipse such
that the sum of the distances from P to the two x2 y 2
foci be 2a so given
+ =1
a 2 b2
PF1 + PF2 = 2a. ... (1)
Using the distance formula, we have Fig 11.27

( x + c) 2 + y 2 + ( x − c) 2 + y 2 = 2a

i.e., ( x + c) 2 + y 2 = 2a – ( x − c )2 + y 2

2018-19
250 MATHEMATICS

Squaring both sides, we get

(x + c)2 + y2 = 4a2 – 4a ( x − c) 2 + y 2 + ( x − c) 2 + y 2
which on simplification gives
c
( x − c) 2 + y 2 = a − x
a
Squaring again and simplifying, we get
x2 y2
+ 2 =1
a2 a − c2

x2 y2
i.e., + =1 (Since c2 = a2 – b2)
a2 b2
Hence any point on the ellipse satisfies
x2 y2
+ = 1. ... (2)
a2 b2
Conversely, let P (x, y) satisfy the equation (2) with 0 < c < a. Then
 x2 

y =b  1 − 
a 2 
2 2

Therefore, PF1 = ( x + c) 2 + y 2

 a2 − x2 
= ( x + c) 2 + b 2  2

 a 

 a2 − x2 
= ( x + c) 2 + ( a 2 − c 2 )  2  (since b2 = a2 – c2)
 a 
2
 cx  c
= a+  =a+ x
 a a

c
Similarly PF2 = a − x
a

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 251

c c
Hence PF1 + PF2 = a + x + a – x = 2a ... (3)
a a
x2 y2
So, any point that satisfies + = 1, satisfies the geometric condition and so
a2 b2
P(x, y) lies on the ellipse.
Hence from (2) and (3), we proved that the equation of an ellipse with centre of
the origin and major axis along the x-axis is
x2 y 2
+ = 1.
a 2 b2
Discussion From the equation of the ellipse obtained above, it follows that for every
point P (x, y) on the ellipse, we have
x2 y2
= 1 − ≤ 1, i.e., x2 ≤ a2, so – a ≤ x ≤ a.
a2 b2
Therefore, the ellipse lies between the lines x = – a and x = a and touches these lines.
Similarly, the ellipse lies between the lines y = – b and y = b and touches these
lines.
x2 y2
Similarly, we can derive the equation of the ellipse in Fig 11.26 (b) as + =1 .
b2 a 2
These two equations are known as standard equations of the ellipses.

 Note The standard equations of ellipses have centre at the origin and the
major and minor axis are coordinate axes. However, the study of the ellipses with
centre at any other point, and any line through the centre as major and the minor
axes passing through the centre and perpendicular to major axis are beyond the
scope here.
From the standard equations of the ellipses (Fig11.26), we have the following
observations:
1. Ellipse is symmetric with respect to both the coordinate axes since if (x, y) is a
point on the ellipse, then (– x, y), (x, –y) and (– x, –y) are also points on the ellipse.
2. The foci always lie on the major axis. The major axis can be determined by
finding the intercepts on the axes of symmetry. That is, major axis is along the x-axis
if the coefficient of x2 has the larger denominator and it is along the y-axis if the
coefficient of y2 has the larger denominator.

2018-19
252 MATHEMATICS

11.5.5 Latus rectum

Definition 6 Latus rectum of an ellipse is a

line segment perpendicular to the major axis
through any of the foci and whose end points
lie on the ellipse (Fig 11.28).
To find the length of the latus rectum
x2 y 2
of the ellipse + =1
a 2 b2
Let the length of AF2 be l. Fig 11. 28
Then the coordinates of A are (c, l ),i.e.,
(ae, l )
x2 y 2
Since A lies on the ellipse + = 1 , we have
a 2 b2

(ae) 2 l 2
+ 2 =1
a2 b
⇒ l2 = b2 (1 – e2)
c2 a 2 – b2 b2
But e2 = = = 1 –
a2 a2 a2

b4 b2
Therefore l2 = , i.e., l =
a2 a
Since the ellipse is symmetric with respect to y-axis (of course, it is symmetric w.r.t.
2b2
both the coordinate axes), AF2 = F2B and so length of the latus rectum is .
a
Example 9 Find the coordinates of the foci, the vertices, the length of major axis, the
minor axis, the eccentricity and the latus rectum of the ellipse
x2 y 2
+ =1
25 9
x2 y2
Solution Since denominator of is larger than the denominator of , the major
25 9

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 253

x2 y 2
axis is along the x-axis. Comparing the given equation with + = 1 , we get
a 2 b2
a = 5 and b = 3. Also
c = a 2 – b 2 = 25 – 9 = 4
Therefore, the coordinates of the foci are (– 4,0) and (4,0), vertices are (– 5, 0) and
(5, 0). Length of the major axis is 10 units length of the minor axis 2b is 6 units and the
4 2b 2 18
eccentricity is and latus rectum is = .
5 a 5
Example 10 Find the coordinates of the foci, the vertices, the lengths of major and
minor axes and the eccentricity of the ellipse 9x2 + 4y2 = 36.
Solution The given equation of the ellipse can be written in standard form as
x2 y2
+ =1
4 9
y2 x2
Since the denominator of is larger than the denominator of , the major axis is
9 4
along the y-axis. Comparing the given equation with the standard equation
x2 y2
+ = 1 , we have b = 2 and a = 3.
b2 a 2

Also c= a2 – b2 = 9–4= 5

c 5
and e= =
a 3
Hence the foci are (0, 5 ) and (0, – 5 ), vertices are (0,3) and (0, –3), length of the
major axis is 6 units, the length of the minor axis is 4 units and the eccentricity of the
5
ellipse is .
3
Example 11 Find the equation of the ellipse whose vertices are (± 13, 0) and foci are
(± 5, 0).
Solution Since the vertices are on x-axis, the equation will be of the form
x2 y 2
+ = 1 , where a is the semi-major axis.
a 2 b2

2018-19
254 MATHEMATICS

Given that a = 13, c = ± 5.

Therefore, from the relation c2 = a2 – b2, we get
25 = 169 – b2 , i.e., b = 12

x2 y2
Hence the equation of the ellipse is + = 1.
169 144
Example 12 Find the equation of the ellipse, whose length of the major axis is 20 and
foci are (0, ± 5).
Solution Since the foci are on y-axis, the major axis is along the y-axis. So, equation
x2 y2
of the ellipse is of the form + =1.
b2 a 2
Given that
20
a = semi-major axis = = 10
2
and the relation c 2 = a2 – b2 gives
52 = 102 – b2 i.e., b2 = 75
Therefore, the equation of the ellipse is
x2 y2
+ =1
75 100
Example 13 Find the equation of the ellipse, with major axis along the x-axis and
passing through the points (4, 3) and (– 1,4).

x2 y2
Solution The standard form of the ellipse is + = 1. Since the points (4, 3)
a2 b2
and (–1, 4) lie on the ellipse, we have
16 9
2
+ 2 =1 ... (1)
a b
1 16
and 2
+ 2 =1 ….(2)
a b
247 247
Solving equations (1) and (2), we find that a = and b =
2 2
.
7 15
Hence the required equation is

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 255

x2 y2
+ = 1 , i.e., 7x2 + 15y2 = 247.
 247  247
 
 7  15

EXERCISE 11.3
In each of the Exercises 1 to 9, find the coordinates of the foci, the vertices, the length
of major axis, the minor axis, the eccentricity and the length of the latus rectum of the
ellipse.
x2 y2 x2 y2 x2 y2
1. + =1 2. + =1 3. + =1
36 16 4 25 16 9

x2 y2 x2 y 2 x2 y2
4. + =1 5. + =1 6. + =1
25 100 49 36 100 400
7. 36x2 + 4y2 = 144 8. 16x2 + y2 = 16 9. 4x2 + 9y2 = 36
In each of the following Exercises 10 to 20, find the equation for the ellipse that satisfies
the given conditions:
10. Vertices (± 5, 0), foci (± 4, 0)
11. Vertices (0, ± 13), foci (0, ± 5)
12. Vertices (± 6, 0), foci (± 4, 0)
13. Ends of major axis (± 3, 0), ends of minor axis (0, ± 2)

14. Ends of major axis (0, ± 5 ), ends of minor axis (± 1, 0)

15. Length of major axis 26, foci (± 5, 0)
16. Length of minor axis 16, foci (0, ± 6).
17. Foci (± 3, 0), a = 4
18. b = 3, c = 4, centre at the origin; foci on the x axis.
19. Centre at (0,0), major axis on the y-axis and passes through the points (3, 2) and
(1,6).
20. Major axis on the x-axis and passes through the points (4,3) and (6,2).
11.6 Hyperbola
Definition 7 A hyperbola is the set of all points in a plane, the difference of whose
distances from two fixed points in the plane is a constant.

2018-19
256 MATHEMATICS

Fig 11.29
The term “difference” that is used in the definition means the distance to the
farther point minus the distance to the closer point. The two fixed points are called the
foci of the hyperbola. The mid-point of the line segment joining the foci is called the
centre of the hyperbola. The line through the foci is called the transverse axis and
the line through the centre and perpendicular to the transverse axis is called the conjugate
axis. The points at which the hyperbola
intersects the transverse axis are called the
vertices of the hyperbola (Fig 11.29).
We denote the distance between the
two foci by 2c, the distance between two
vertices (the length of the transverse axis)
by 2a and we define the quantity b as
b = c2 – a2
Also 2b is the length of the conjugate axis
Fig 11.30
(Fig 11.30).
To find the constant P1F2 – P1F1 :
By taking the point P at A and B in the Fig 11.30, we have
BF1 – BF2 = AF2 – AF1 (by the definition of the hyperbola)
BA +AF1– BF2 = AB + BF2– AF1
i.e., AF1 = BF2
So that, BF1 – BF2 = BA + AF1– BF2 = BA = 2a

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 257

11.6.1 Eccentricity
c
Definition 8 Just like an ellipse, the ratio e = is called the eccentricity of the
a
hyperbola. Since c ≥ a, the eccentricity is never less than one. In terms of the
eccentricity, the foci are at a distance of ae from the centre.
11.6.2 Standard equation of Hyperbola The equation of a hyperbola is simplest if
the centre of the hyperbola is at the origin and the foci are on the x-axis or y-axis. The
two such possible orientations are shown in Fig11.31.

(a) (b)

Fig 11.31

We will derive the equation for the hyperbola shown in Fig 11.31(a) with foci on
the x-axis.
Let F1 and F2 be the foci and O be the mid-point of the line segment F1F2. Let O
be the origin and the line through O
through F2 be the positive x-axis and
that through F 1 as the negative
x-axis. The line through O
perpendicular to the x-axis be the
y-axis. Let the coordinates of F1 be
(– c,0) and F2 be (c,0) (Fig 11.32).
Let P(x, y) be any point on the
hyperbola such that the difference
of the distances from P to the farther
point minus the closer point be 2a.
So given, PF1 – PF2 = 2a Fig 11.32

2018-19
258 MATHEMATICS

Using the distance formula, we have

(x + c ) 2 + y 2 – (x – c ) 2 + y 2 = 2a

i.e., (x + c ) 2 + y 2 = 2a + (x – c) 2 + y 2
Squaring both side, we get
(x + c)2 + y2 = 4a2 + 4a (x – c ) 2 + y 2 + (x – c)2 + y2
and on simplifying, we get
cx
–a= (x – c) 2 + y 2
a
On squaring again and further simplifying, we get
x2 y2
– =1
a 2 c2 – a2

x2 y 2
i.e., – =1 (Since c2 – a2 = b2)
a 2 b2

x2 y 2
Hence any point on the hyperbola satisfies – = 1 1.
a 2 b2
Conversely, let P(x, y) satisfy the above equation with 0 < a < c. Then
 x2 – a2 
y 2
= b 2  2 
 a 

Therefore, PF1 = + (x + c ) 2 + y 2

 x2 – a2  c
= + (x + c )2 + b 2  2  = a+ x
 a  a
a
Similarly, PF2 = a – x
c
c
In hyperbola c > a; and since P is to the right of the line x = a, x > a, x > a. Therefore,
a
c c
a– x becomes negative. Thus, PF2 = x – a.
a a

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 259

c cx
Therefore PF1 – PF2 = a + x – + a = 2a
a a
Also, note that if P is to the left of the line x = – a, then
 c  c
PF1 = –  a + x  , PF2 = a – x .
 a  a

x2 y 2
In that case P F2 – PF1 = 2a. So, any point that satisfies – = 1 , lies on the
a 2 b2
hyperbola.
Thus, we proved that the equation of hyperbola with origin (0,0) and transverse axis
x2 y 2
along x-axis is – =1.
a 2 b2

Note A hyperbola in which a = b is called an equilateral hyperbola.

Discussion From the equation of the hyperbola we have obtained, it follows that, we
x2 y2
have for every point (x, y) on the hyperbola, 2 = 1 + ≥ 1.
a b2

x
i.e, ≥ 1, i.e., x ≤ – a or x ≥ a. Therefore, no portion of the curve lies between the
a
lines x = + a and x = – a, (i.e. no real intercept on the conjugate axis).

y 2 x2
Similarly, we can derive the equation of the hyperbola in Fig 11.31 (b) as − =1
a 2 b2
These two equations are known as the standard equations of hyperbolas.

 Note The standard equations of hyperbolas have transverse and conjugate

axes as the coordinate axes and the centre at the origin. However, there are
hyperbolas with any two perpendicular lines as transverse and conjugate axes, but
the study of such cases will be dealt in higher classes.

From the standard equations of hyperbolas (Fig11.29), we have the following

observations:
1. Hyperbola is symmetric with respect to both the axes, since if (x, y) is a point on
the hyperbola, then (– x, y), (x, – y) and (– x, – y) are also points on the hyperbola.

2018-19
260 MATHEMATICS

2. The foci are always on the transverse axis. It is the positive term whose
x2 y 2
denominator gives the transverse axis. For example, – =1
9 16
y 2 x2
has transverse axis along x-axis of length 6, while – =1
25 16
has transverse axis along y-axis of length 10.

11.6.3 Latus rectum

Definition 9 Latus rectum of hyperbola is a line segment perpendicular to the transverse
axis through any of the foci and whose end points lie on the hyperbola.
2b 2
.
As in ellipse, it is easy to show that the length of the latus rectum in hyperbola is
a
Example 14 Find the coordinates of the foci and the vertices, the eccentricity,the
length of the latus rectum of the hyperbolas:
x2 y2
(i) – = 1 , (ii) y2 – 16x2 = 16
9 16
x2 y 2
Solution (i) Comparing the equation – = 1 with the standard equation
9 16

x2 y 2
– =1
a 2 b2
Here, a = 3, b = 4 and c = a 2 + b 2 = 9 + 16 = 5

Therefore, the coordinates of the foci are (± 5, 0) and that of vertices are (± 3, 0).Also,
c 5 2b 2 32
The eccentricity e = = . The latus rectum = =
a 3 a 3
y 2 x2
(ii) Dividing the equation by 16 on both sides, we have – =1
16 1

y 2 x2
Comparing the equation with the standard equation – = 1 , we find that
a 2 b2

a = 4, b = 1 and c = a 2 + b2 = 16 + 1 = 17 .

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 261

Therefore, the coordinates of the foci are (0, ± 17 ) and that of the vertices are
(0, ± 4). Also,
c 17 2b2 1
The eccentricity e = = . The latus rectum = = .
a 4 a 2
Example 15 Find the equation of the hyperbola with foci (0, ± 3) and vertices
11
(0, ± ).
2
Solution Since the foci is on y-axis, the equation of the hyperbola is of the form
y 2 x2
– =1
a 2 b2
11 11
Since vertices are (0, ± ), a =
2 2
25
Also, since foci are (0, ± 3); c = 3 and b2 = c2 – a2 = .
4
Therefore, the equation of the hyperbola is

y2 x2
– = 1, i.e., 100 y2 – 44 x2 = 275.
 11   25 
   
4  4 

Example 16 Find the equation of the hyperbola where foci are (0, ±12) and the length
of the latus rectum is 36.
Solution Since foci are (0, ± 12), it follows that c = 12.

2b 2
Length of the latus rectum = = 36 or b2 = 18a
a
Therefore c2 = a2 + b2; gives
144 = a2 + 18a
i.e., a2 + 18a – 144 = 0,
So a = – 24, 6.
Since a cannot be negative, we take a = 6 and so b2 = 108.
y2 x2
Therefore, the equation of the required hyperbola is – = 1 , i.e., 3y2 – x2 = 108
36 108

2018-19
262 MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE 11.4
In each of the Exercises 1 to 6, find the coordinates of the foci and the vertices, the
eccentricity and the length of the latus rectum of the hyperbolas.
x2 y2 y 2 x2
1. – =1 2. – =1 3. 9y2 – 4x2 = 36
16 9 9 27
4. 16x2 – 9y2 = 576 5. 5y2 – 9x2 = 36 6. 49y2 – 16x2 = 784.
In each of the Exercises 7 to 15, find the equations of the hyperbola satisfying the given
conditions.
7. Vertices (± 2, 0), foci (± 3, 0)
8. Vertices (0, ± 5), foci (0, ± 8)
9. Vertices (0, ± 3), foci (0, ± 5)
10. Foci (± 5, 0), the transverse axis is of length 8.
11. Foci (0, ±13), the conjugate axis is of length 24.
12. Foci (± 3 5 , 0), the latus rectum is of length 8.
13. Foci (± 4, 0), the latus rectum is of length 12

4
14. vertices (± 7,0), e = .
3
15. Foci (0, ± 10 ), passing through (2,3)

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 17 The focus of a parabolic mirror as shown in Fig 11.33 is at a distance of
5 cm from its vertex. If the mirror is 45 cm deep, find
the distance AB (Fig 11.33).
Solution Since the distance from the focus to the
vertex is 5 cm. We have, a = 5. If the origin is taken at
the vertex and the axis of the mirror lies along the
positive x-axis, the equation of the parabolic section is
y2 = 4 (5) x = 20 x
Note that x = 45. Thus
y2 = 900
Therefore y = ± 30
Hence AB = 2y = 2 × 30 = 60 cm.
Example 18 A beam is supported at its ends by Fig 11.33
supports which are 12 metres apart. Since the load is concentrated at its centre, there

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 263

is a deflection of 3 cm at the centre and the deflected beam is in the shape of a

parabola. How far from the centre is the deflection 1 cm?
Solution Let the vertex be at the lowest point and the axis vertical. Let the coordinate
axis be chosen as shown in Fig 11.34.

Fig 11.34
The equation of the parabola takes the form x2 = 4ay. Since it passes through
 3   3  36 ×100
 6,  , we have (6)2 = 4a   , i.e., a = = 300 m
 100   100  12
1 2
Let AB be the deflection of the beam which is m. Coordinates of B are (x, ).
100 100
2
Therefore x 2 = 4 × 300 × = 24
100
i.e. x= 24 = 2 6 metres

Example 19 A rod AB of length 15 cm rests in between two coordinate axes in such

a way that the end point A lies on x-axis and end point B lies on
y-axis. A point P(x, y) is taken on the rod in such a way
that AP = 6 cm. Show that the locus of P is an ellipse.
Solution Let AB be the rod making an angle θ with
OX as shown in Fig 11.35 and P (x, y) the point on it
such that AP = 6 cm.
Since AB = 15 cm, we have
PB = 9 cm.
From P draw PQ and PR perpendiculars on y-axis and
x-axis, respectively. Fig 11.35

2018-19
264 MATHEMATICS

x
From ∆ PBQ, cos θ =
9

y
From ∆ PRA, sin θ =
6
Since cos2 θ + sin2 θ = 1
2 2
 x  y
  +   =1
9 6

x2 y2
or + =1
81 36
Thus the locus of P is an ellipse.

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 11

1. If a parabolic reflector is 20 cm in diameter and 5 cm deep, find the focus.
2. An arch is in the form of a parabola with its axis vertical. The arch is 10 m high
and 5 m wide at the base. How wide is it 2 m from the vertex of the parabola?
3. The cable of a uniformly loaded suspension bridge hangs in the form of a parabola.
The roadway which is horizontal and 100 m long is supported by vertical wires
attached to the cable, the longest wire being 30 m and the shortest being 6 m.
Find the length of a supporting wire attached to the roadway 18 m from the
middle.
4. An arch is in the form of a semi-ellipse. It is 8 m wide and 2 m high at the centre.
Find the height of the arch at a point 1.5 m from one end.
5. A rod of length 12 cm moves with its ends always touching the coordinate axes.
Determine the equation of the locus of a point P on the rod, which is 3 cm from
the end in contact with the x-axis.
6. Find the area of the triangle formed by the lines joining the vertex of the parabola
x2 = 12y to the ends of its latus rectum.
7. A man running a racecourse notes that the sum of the distances from the two flag
posts from him is always 10 m and the distance between the flag posts is 8 m.
Find the equation of the posts traced by the man.
8. An equilateral triangle is inscribed in the parabola y2 = 4 ax, where one vertex is
at the vertex of the parabola. Find the length of the side of the triangle.

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 265

Summary

In this Chapter the following concepts and generalisations are studied.

 A circle is the set of all points in a plane that are equidistant from a fixed point
in the plane.
 The equation of a circle with centre (h, k) and the radius r is
(x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2.

 A parabola is the set of all points in a plane that are equidistant from a fixed
line and a fixed point in the plane.
 The equation of the parabola with focus at (a, 0) a > 0 and directrix x = – a is
y2 = 4ax.
 Latus rectum of a parabola is a line segment perpendicular to the axis of the
parabola, through the focus and whose end points lie on the parabola.
 Length of the latus rectum of the parabola y2 = 4ax is 4a.
 An ellipse is the set of all points in a plane, the sum of whose distances from
two fixed points in the plane is a constant.

x2 y 2
 The equation of an ellipse with foci on the x-axis is + =1.
a 2 b2

 Latus rectum of an ellipse is a line segment perpendicular to the major axis

through any of the foci and whose end points lie on the ellipse.

x2 y 2 2b 2
 Length of the latus rectum of the ellipse +
a 2 b2
= 1 is
a
.

 The eccentricity of an ellipse is the ratio between the distances from the centre
of the ellipse to one of the foci and to one of the vertices of the ellipse.
 A hyperbola is the set of all points in a plane, the difference of whose distances
from two fixed points in the plane is a constant.

x2 y 2
 The equation of a hyperbola with foci on the x-axis is : a 2 − b 2 = 1

2018-19
266 MATHEMATICS

 Latus rectum of hyperbola is a line segment perpendicular to the transverse

axis through any of the foci and whose end points lie on the hyperbola.

x2 y 2 2b2
 Length of the latus rectum of the hyperbola : − = 1 is : .
a 2 b2 a

 The eccentricity of a hyperbola is the ratio of the distances from the centre of
the hyperbola to one of the foci and to one of the vertices of the hyperbola.

Historical Note
Geometry is one of the most ancient branches of mathematics. The Greek
geometers investigated the properties of many curves that have theoretical and
practical importance. Euclid wrote his treatise on geometry around 300 B.C. He
was the first who organised the geometric figures based on certain axioms
suggested by physical considerations. Geometry as initially studied by the ancient
Indians and Greeks, who made essentially no use of the process of algebra. The
synthetic approach to the subject of geometry as given by Euclid and in
Sulbasutras, etc., was continued for some 1300 years. In the 200 B.C., Apollonius
wrote a book called ‘The Conic’ which was all about conic sections with many
important discoveries that have remained unsurpassed for eighteen centuries.
Modern analytic geometry is called ‘Cartesian’ after the name of Rene
Descartes (1596-1650) whose relevant ‘La Geometrie’ was published in 1637.
But the fundamental principle and method of analytical geometry were already
discovered by Pierre de Fermat (1601-1665). Unfortunately, Fermats treatise on
the subject, entitled Ad Locus Planos et So LIDOS Isagoge (Introduction to
Plane and Solid Loci) was published only posthumously in
1679. So, Descartes came to be regarded as the unique inventor of the analytical
geometry.
Isaac Barrow avoided using cartesian method. Newton used method of
undetermined coefficients to find equations of curves. He used several types of
coordinates including polar and bipolar. Leibnitz used the terms ‘abscissa’,
‘ordinate’ and ‘coordinate’. L’ Hospital (about 1700) wrote an important textbook
on analytical geometry.
Clairaut (1729) was the first to give the distance formula although in clumsy
form. He also gave the intercept form of the linear equation. Cramer (1750)

2018-19
 CONIC SECTIONS 267

made formal use of the two axes and gave the equation of a circle as
( y – a)2 + (b – x)2 = r
He gave the best exposition of the analytical geometry of his time. Monge
(1781) gave the modern ‘point-slope’ form of equation of a line as
y – y′ = a (x – x′)
and the condition of perpendicularity of two lines as aa′ + 1 = 0.
S.F. Lacroix (1765–1843) was a prolific textbook writer, but his contributions
to analytical geometry are found scattered. He gave the ‘two-point’ form of
equation of a line as
′ – 
y –= (x – )
′ – 
( – a – b )
and the length of the perpendicular from (α, β) on y = ax + b as .
1 + a2

 a′ – a 
His formula for finding angle between two lines was tan θ =  1 + aa′  . It is, of
 
course, surprising that one has to wait for more than 150 years after the invention
of analytical geometry before finding such essential basic formula. In 1818, C.
Lame, a civil engineer, gave mE + m′E′ = 0 as the curve passing through the
points of intersection of two loci E = 0 and E′ = 0.
Many important discoveries, both in Mathematics and Science, have been
linked to the conic sections. The Greeks particularly Archimedes (287–212 B.C.)
and Apollonius (200 B.C.) studied conic sections for their own beauty. These
curves are important tools for present day exploration of outer space and also for
research into behaviour of atomic particles.

— —

2018-19
 Chapter 12

INTRODUCTION TO THREE
DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY

vMathematics is both the queen and the hand-maiden of

all sciences – E.T. BELLv

12.1 Introduction
You may recall that to locate the position of a point in a
plane, we need two intersecting mutually perpendicular lines
in the plane. These lines are called the coordinate axes
and the two numbers are called the coordinates of the
point with respect to the axes. In actual life, we do not
have to deal with points lying in a plane only. For example,
consider the position of a ball thrown in space at different
points of time or the position of an aeroplane as it flies
from one place to another at different times during its flight.
Similarly, if we were to locate the position of the Leonhard Euler
lowest tip of an electric bulb hanging from the ceiling of a (1707-1783)
room or the position of the central tip of the ceiling fan in a room, we will not only
require the perpendicular distances of the point to be located from two perpendicular
walls of the room but also the height of the point from the floor of the room. Therefore,
we need not only two but three numbers representing the perpendicular distances of
the point from three mutually perpendicular planes, namely the floor of the room and
two adjacent walls of the room. The three numbers representing the three distances
are called the coordinates of the point with reference to the three coordinate
planes. So, a point in space has three coordinates. In this Chapter, we shall study the
basic concepts of geometry in three dimensional space.*

* For various activities in three dimensional geometry one may refer to the Book, “A Hand Book for
designing Mathematics Laboratory in Schools”, NCERT, 2005.

2018-19
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 269

12.2 Coordinate Axes and Coordinate Planes in Three Dimensional Space

Consider three planes intersecting at a point O
such that these three planes are mutually
perpendicular to each other (Fig 12.1). These
three planes intersect along the lines X′OX, Y′OY
and Z′OZ, called the x, y and z-axes, respectively.
We may note that these lines are mutually
perpendicular to each other. These lines constitute
the rectangular coordinate system. The planes
XOY, YOZ and ZOX, called, respectively the
XY-plane, YZ-plane and the ZX-plane, are
known as the three coordinate planes. We take Fig 12.1
the XOY plane as the plane of the paper and the
line Z′OZ as perpendicular to the plane XOY. If the plane of the paper is considered
as horizontal, then the line Z′OZ will be vertical. The distances measured from
XY-plane upwards in the direction of OZ are taken as positive and those measured
downwards in the direction of OZ′ are taken as negative. Similarly, the distance
measured to the right of ZX-plane along OY are taken as positive, to the left of
ZX-plane and along OY′ as negative, in front of the YZ-plane along OX as positive
and to the back of it along OX′ as negative. The point O is called the origin of the
coordinate system. The three coordinate planes divide the space into eight parts known
as octants. These octants could be named as XOYZ, X′OYZ, X′OY′Z, XOY′Z,
XOYZ′, X′OYZ′, X′OY′Z′ and XOY′Z′. and denoted by I, II, III, ..., VIII , respectively.
12.3 Coordinates of a Point in Space
Having chosen a fixed coordinate system in the
space, consisting of coordinate axes, coordinate
planes and the origin, we now explain, as to how,
given a point in the space, we associate with it three
coordinates (x,y,z) and conversely, given a triplet
of three numbers (x, y, z), how, we locate a point in
the space.
Given a point P in space, we drop a
perpendicular PM on the XY-plane with M as the Fig 12.2
foot of this perpendicular (Fig 12.2). Then, from the point M, we draw a perpendicular
ML to the x-axis, meeting it at L. Let OL be x, LM be y and MP be z. Then x,y and z
are called the x, y and z coordinates, respectively, of the point P in the space. In
Fig 12.2, we may note that the point P (x, y, z) lies in the octant XOYZ and so all x, y,
z are positive. If P was in any other octant, the signs of x, y and z would change

2018-19
270 MATHEMATICS

accordingly. Thus, to each point P in the space there corresponds an ordered triplet
(x, y, z) of real numbers.
Conversely, given any triplet (x, y, z), we would first fix the point L on the x-axis
corresponding to x, then locate the point M in the XY-plane such that (x, y) are the
coordinates of the point M in the XY-plane. Note that LM is perpendicular to the
x-axis or is parallel to the y-axis. Having reached the point M, we draw a perpendicular
MP to the XY-plane and locate on it the point P corresponding to z. The point P so
obtained has then the coordinates (x, y, z). Thus, there is a one to one correspondence
between the points in space and ordered triplet (x, y, z) of real numbers.
Alternatively, through the point P in the
space, we draw three planes parallel to the
coordinate planes, meeting the x-axis, y-axis
and z-axis in the points A, B and C, respectively
(Fig 12.3). Let OA = x, OB = y and OC = z.
Then, the point P will have the coordinates x, y
and z and we write P (x, y, z). Conversely, given
x, y and z, we locate the three points A, B and
C on the three coordinate axes. Through the
points A, B and C we draw planes parallel to
the YZ-plane, ZX-plane and XY-plane, Fig 12.3
respectively. The point of interesection of these three planes, namely, ADPF, BDPE
and CEPF is obviously the point P, corresponding to the ordered triplet (x, y, z). We
observe that if P (x, y, z) is any point in the space, then x, y and z are perpendicular
distances from YZ, ZX and XY planes, respectively.

ANote The coordinates of the origin O are (0,0,0). The coordinates of any point
on the x-axis will be as (x,0,0) and the coordinates of any point in the YZ-plane will
be as (0, y, z).
Remark The sign of the coordinates of a point determine the octant in which the
point lies. The following table shows the signs of the coordinates in eight octants.
Table 12.1
s
ant I II III IV V VI VII VIII
Oct nates
rdi
Coo
x + – – + + – – +
y + + – – + + – –
z + + + + – – – –

2018-19
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 271

Example 1 In Fig 12.3, if P is (2,4,5), find the coordinates of F.

Solution For the point F, the distance measured along OY is zero. Therefore, the
coordinates of F are (2,0,5).
Example 2 Find the octant in which the points (–3,1,2) and (–3,1,– 2) lie.
Solution From the Table 12.1, the point (–3,1, 2) lies in second octant and the point
(–3, 1, – 2) lies in octant VI.

EXERCISE 12.1
1. A point is on the x -axis. What are its y-coordinate and z-coordinates?
2. A point is in the XZ-plane. What can you say about its y-coordinate?
3. Name the octants in which the following points lie:
(1, 2, 3), (4, –2, 3), (4, –2, –5), (4, 2, –5), (– 4, 2, –5), (– 4, 2, 5),
(–3, –1, 6) (– 2, – 4, –7).
4. Fill in the blanks:
(i) The x-axis and y-axis taken together determine a plane known as_______.
(ii) The coordinates of points in the XY-plane are of the form _______.
(iii) Coordinate planes divide the space into ______ octants.

12.4 Distance between Two Points

We have studied about the distance
between two points in two-dimensional
coordinate system. Let us now extend this
study to three-dimensional system.
Let P(x1, y1, z1) and Q ( x2, y2, z2)
be two points referred to a system of
rectangular axes OX, OY and OZ.
Through the points P and Q draw planes
parallel to the coordinate planes so as to
form a rectangular parallelopiped with one
diagonal PQ (Fig 12.4).
Now, since ∠PAQ is a right Fig 12.4
angle, it follows that, in triangle PAQ,
PQ2 = PA 2 + AQ2 ... (1)
Also, triangle ANQ is right angle triangle with ∠ANQ a right angle.

2018-19
272 MATHEMATICS

Therefore AQ2 = AN2 + NQ2 ... (2)

From (1) and (2), we have
PQ2 = PA2 + AN2 + NQ2
Now PA = y2 – y1, AN = x2 – x1 and NQ = z2 – z1
2
Hence PQ = (x2 – x1)2 + (y2 – y1) + (z2 – z1)2
2

Therefore PQ = ( x2 − x1 ) 2 +( y 2 − y1 ) 2 +( z2 − z1 ) 2
This gives us the distance between two points (x1, y1, z1) and (x2, y2, z2).
2 2 2
In particular, if x1 = y1 = z1 = 0, i.e., point P is origin O, then OQ = x2 + y 2 + z 2 ,
which gives the distance between the origin O and any point Q (x2, y2, z2).
Example 3 Find the distance between the points P(1, –3, 4) and Q (– 4, 1, 2).
Solution The distance PQ between the points P (1,–3, 4) and Q (– 4, 1, 2) is
PQ = (−4 − 1) 2 + (1 + 3) 2 + (2 − 4) 2

= 25 + 16 + 4
= 45 = 3 5 units
Example 4 Show that the points P (–2, 3, 5), Q (1, 2, 3) and R (7, 0, –1) are collinear.
Solution We know that points are said to be collinear if they lie on a line.
Now, PQ = (1 + 2) 2 + ( 2 − 3) 2 + (3 − 5) 2 = 9 + 1 + 4 = 14

QR = (7 − 1) 2 + (0 − 2) 2 + (−1− 3) 2 = 36 + 4 + 16 = 56 = 2 14

and PR = (7 + 2) 2 + (0 − 3) 2 + (−1− 5) 2 = 81 + 9 + 36 = 126 = 3 14

Thus, PQ + QR = PR. Hence, P, Q and R are collinear.
Example 5 Are the points A (3, 6, 9), B (10, 20, 30) and C (25, – 41, 5), the vertices
of a right angled triangle?
Solution By the distance formula, we have
AB2 = (10 – 3)2 + (20 – 6)2 + (30 – 9)2
= 49 + 196 + 441 = 686
BC2 = (25 – 10)2 + (– 41 – 20)2 + (5 – 30)2
= 225 + 3721 + 625 = 4571

2018-19
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 273

CA 2 = (3 – 25)2 + (6 + 41)2 + (9 – 5)2

= 484 + 2209 + 16 = 2709
We find that CA2 + AB2 ≠ BC2.
Hence, the triangle ABC is not a right angled triangle.
Example 6 Find the equation of set of points P such that PA2 + PB2 = 2k2, where
A and B are the points (3, 4, 5) and (–1, 3, –7), respectively.
Solution Let the coordinates of point P be (x, y, z).
Here PA2 = (x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 + ( z – 5)2
PB2 = (x + 1)2 + (y – 3)2 + (z + 7)2
By the given condition PA2 + PB2 = 2k2, we have
(x – 3)2 + (y – 4)2 + (z – 5)2 + (x + 1)2 + (y – 3)2 + (z + 7)2 = 2k2
i.e., 2x2 + 2y2 + 2z2 – 4x – 14y + 4z = 2k2 – 109.

EXERCISE 12.2
1. Find the distance between the following pairs of points:
(i) (2, 3, 5) and (4, 3, 1) (ii) (–3, 7, 2) and (2, 4, –1)
(iii) (–1, 3, – 4) and (1, –3, 4) (iv) (2, –1, 3) and (–2, 1, 3).
2. Show that the points (–2, 3, 5), (1, 2, 3) and (7, 0, –1) are collinear.
3. Verify the following:
(i) (0, 7, –10), (1, 6, – 6) and (4, 9, – 6) are the vertices of an isosceles triangle.
(ii) (0, 7, 10), (–1, 6, 6) and (– 4, 9, 6) are the vertices of a right angled triangle.
(iii) (–1, 2, 1), (1, –2, 5), (4, –7, 8) and (2, –3, 4) are the vertices of a parallelogram.
4. Find the equation of the set of points which are equidistant from the points
(1, 2, 3) and (3, 2, –1).
5. Find the equation of the set of points P, the sum of whose distances from
A (4, 0, 0) and B (– 4, 0, 0) is equal to 10.
12.5 Section Formula
In two dimensional geometry, we have learnt how to find the coordinates of a point
dividing a line segment in a given ratio internally. Now, we extend this to three dimensional
geometry as follows:
Let the two given points be P(x1, y1, z1) and Q (x2, y2, z2). Let the point R (x, y, z)
divide PQ in the given ratio m : n internally. Draw PL, QM and RN perpendicular to

2018-19
274 MATHEMATICS

the XY-plane. Obviously PL || RN || QM and feet

of these perpendiculars lie in a XY-plane. The
points L, M and N will lie on a line which is the
intersection of the plane containing PL, RN and
QM with the XY-plane. Through the point R draw
a line ST parallel to the line LM. Line ST will
intersect the line LP externally at the point S and
the line MQ at T, as shown in Fig 12.5.
Also note that quadrilaterals LNRS and
NMTR are parallelograms.
The triangles PSR and QTR are similar. Therefore,
m PR SP SL – PL NR – PL z – z1 Fig 12.5
= = = = =
n QR QT QM – TM QM – NR z 2 – z

mz 2 + nz1
This implies z =
m +n
Similarly, by drawing perpendiculars to the XZ and YZ-planes, we get

my2 + ny1 mx + nx1

y= and x= 2
m+n m+n
Hence, the coordinates of the point R which divides the line segment joining two points
P (x1, y1, z1) and Q (x2, y2, z2) internally in the ratio m : n are

 mx2 + nx1 my 2 + ny1 mz2 + nz1 

 , , 
 m+n m+n m + n 
If the point R divides PQ externally in the ratio m : n, then its coordinates are
obtained by replacing n by – n so that coordinates of point R will be

 mx2 − nx1 my2 − ny1 mz 2 − nz1 

 , , 
 m−n m−n m−n 
Case 1 Coordinates of the mid-point: In case R is the mid-point of PQ, then
x1 + x2 y + y2 z + z2
m : n = 1 : 1 so that x = ,y = 1 and z = 1 .
2 2 2
These are the coordinates of the mid point of the segment joining P (x1, y1, z1)
and Q (x2, y2, z2).

2018-19
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 275

Case 2 The coordinates of the point R which divides PQ in the ratio k : 1 are obtained
m
by taking k = which are as given below:
n
 k x 2 + x1 ky2 + y1 kz 2 + z1 
 , , 
 1+k 1+k 1+k 

Generally, this result is used in solving problems involving a general point on the line
passing through two given points.
Example 7 Find the coordinates of the point which divides the line segment joining
the points (1, –2, 3) and (3, 4, –5) in the ratio 2 : 3 (i) internally, and (ii) externally.
Solution (i) Let P (x, y, z) be the point which divides line segment joining A(1, – 2, 3)
and B (3, 4, –5) internally in the ratio 2 : 3. Therefore

2(3) + 3(1) 9 2(4) + 3(–2) 2 2(–5) + 3(3) –1

x= = , y= = , z= =
2+3 5 2+3 5 2+3 5
 9 2 −1
Thus, the required point is  , , 
5 5 5 
(ii) Let P (x, y, z) be the point which divides segment joining A (1, –2, 3) and
B (3, 4, –5) externally in the ratio 2 : 3. Then
2(3) + (–3)(1) 2(4) + (–3)(–2) 2(–5) + (–3)(3)
x= = – 3, y = = – 14 , z = =19
2 + (–3) 2 + (–3) 2 + (–3)

Therefore, the required point is (–3, –14, 19).

Example 8 Using section formula, prove that the three points (– 4, 6, 10), (2, 4, 6)
and (14, 0, –2) are collinear.
Solution Let A (– 4, 6, 10), B (2, 4, 6) and C(14, 0, – 2) be the given points. Let the
point P divides AB in the ratio k : 1. Then coordinates of the point P are
2 k − 4 4 k + 6 6 k + 10
, ,
k +1 k +1 k +1
Let us examine whether for some value of k, the point P coincides with point C.
2k – 4
On putting = 14 , we get k = − 3
k +1 2

2018-19
276 MATHEMATICS

3
4( − ) + 6
3 4k + 6 2
When k = − , then = =0
2 k +1 3
− +1
2

3
6( − ) + 10
6k + 10 2
= = −2
and k +1 3
− +1
2
Therefore, C (14, 0, –2) is a point which divides AB externally in the ratio 3 : 2 and is
same as P.Hence A, B, C are collinear.
Example 9 Find the coordinates of the centroid of the triangle whose vertices are
(x1, y1, z1), (x2, y2, z2) and (x3, y3, z3).
Solution Let ABC be the triangle. Let the coordinates of the vertices A, B,C be
(x1, y1, z1), (x2, y2, z2) and (x3, y3, z3), respectively. Let D be the mid-point of BC.
Hence coordinates of D are
 x2 + x3 y 2 + y3 z2 + z3 
 , , 
 2 2 2 
Let G be the centroid of the triangle. Therefore, it divides the median AD in the ratio 2 : 1.
Hence, the coordinates of G are

  x2 + x3   y2 + y3   z 2 + z3  
 2  2  + x1 2  2  + y1 2  2  + z1 
   ,   ,   
 2 +1 2 +1 2 +1 
 
 

 x1 + x2 + x3 y1 + y2 + y3 z1 + z2 + z3 
or  , , 
 3 3 3 
Example 10 Find the ratio in which the line segment joining the points (4, 8, 10) and
(6, 10, – 8) is divided by the YZ-plane.
Solution Let YZ-plane divides the line segment joining A (4, 8, 10) and B (6, 10, – 8)
at P (x, y, z) in the ratio k : 1. Then the coordinates of P are
 4 + 6k 8 + 10k 10 − 8k 
 , , 
 k +1 k +1 k +1 

2018-19
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 277

4 + 6k
Since P lies on the YZ-plane, its x-coordinate is zero, i.e., =0
k +1
2
or k =−
3
Therefore, YZ-plane divides AB externally in the ratio 2 : 3.
EXERCISE 12.3
1. Find the coordinates of the point which divides the line segment joining the points
(– 2, 3, 5) and (1, – 4, 6) in the ratio (i) 2 : 3 internally, (ii) 2 : 3 externally.
2. Given that P (3, 2, – 4), Q (5, 4, – 6) and R (9, 8, –10) are collinear. Find the ratio
in which Q divides PR.
3. Find the ratio in which the YZ-plane divides the line segment formed by joining
the points (–2, 4, 7) and (3, –5, 8).
4. Using section formula, show that the points A (2, –3, 4), B (–1, 2, 1) and
 1 
C  0 , ,2  are collinear.
 3 
5. Find the coordinates of the points which trisect the line segment joining the points
P (4, 2, – 6) and Q (10, –16, 6).

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 11 Show that the points A (1, 2, 3), B (–1, –2, –1), C (2, 3, 2) and
D (4, 7, 6) are the vertices of a parallelogram ABCD, but it is not a rectangle.
Solution To show ABCD is a parallelogram we need to show opposite side are equal
Note that.

AB = (−1 − 1) 2 +(−2 − 2) 2 +(−1 − 3) 2 = 4 + 16 + 16 = 6

BC = (2 + 1) 2 +(3 + 2) 2 +( 2 + 1) 2 = 9 + 25 + 9 = 43

CD = ( 4 − 2) 2 +(7 − 3) 2 +(6 − 2) 2 = 4 + 16 + 16 = 6

DA = (1 − 4) 2 +(2 − 7) 2 +(3 − 6) 2 = 9 + 25 + 9 = 43

Since AB = CD and BC = AD, ABCD is a parallelogram.

Now, it is required to prove that ABCD is not a rectangle. For this, we show that
diagonals AC and BD are unequal. We have

2018-19
278 MATHEMATICS

AC = ( 2 − 1) 2 +(3 − 2) 2 +(2 − 3) 2 = 1 + 1 + 1= 3

BD = ( 4 + 1) 2 +(7 + 2) 2 +(6 + 1) 2 = 25 + 81 + 49 = 155 .

Since AC ≠ BD, ABCD is not a rectangle.

ANote We can also show that ABCD is a parallelogram, using the property that
diagonals AC and BD bisect each other.
Example 12 Find the equation of the set of the points P such that its distances from
the points A (3, 4, –5) and B (– 2, 1, 4) are equal.
Solution If P (x, y, z) be any point such that PA = PB.

Now ( x − 3) 2 + ( y − 4) 2 + ( z + 5) 2 = ( x + 2) 2 + ( y − 1) 2 + ( z − 4) 2

or ( x − 3) 2 + ( y − 4) 2 + ( z + 5) 2 = ( x + 2) 2 + ( y − 1) 2 + ( z − 4) 2
or 10 x + 6y – 18z – 29 = 0.
Example 13 The centroid of a triangle ABC is at the point (1, 1, 1). If the coordinates
of A and B are (3, –5, 7) and (–1, 7, – 6), respectively, find the coordinates of the
point C.
Solution Let the coordinates of C be (x, y, z) and the coordinates of the centroid G be
(1, 1, 1). Then
x + 3−1 y −5+ 7 z+7−6
= 1, i.e., x = 1; = 1, i.e., y = 1; = 1, i.e., z = 2.
3 3 3
Hence, coordinates of C are (1, 1, 2).

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 12

1. Three vertices of a parallelogram ABCD are A(3, – 1, 2), B (1, 2, – 4) and
C (– 1, 1, 2). Find the coordinates of the fourth vertex.
2. Find the lengths of the medians of the triangle with vertices A (0, 0, 6), B (0,4, 0)
and (6, 0, 0).
3. If the origin is the centroid of the triangle PQR with vertices P (2a, 2, 6),
Q (– 4, 3b, –10) and R(8, 14, 2c), then find the values of a, b and c.
4. Find the coordinates of a point on y-axis which are at a distance of 5 2 from
the point P (3, –2, 5).

2018-19
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 279

5. A point R with x-coordinate 4 lies on the line segment joining the points
P(2, –3, 4) and Q (8, 0, 10). Find the coordinates of the point R.
[Hint Suppose R divides PQ in the ratio k : 1. The coordinates of the point R are given
 8k + 2 − 3 10k + 4 
by  , ,  ].
 k +1 k +1 k +1 
6.If A and B be the points (3, 4, 5) and (–1, 3, –7), respectively, find the equation of the
set of points P such that PA2 + PB2 = k2, where k is a constant.

Summary
® In three dimensions, the coordinate axes of a rectangular Cartesian coordinate
system are three mutually perpendicular lines. The axes are called the x, y
and z-axes.
® The three planes determined by the pair of axes are the coordinate planes,
called XY, YZ and ZX-planes.
® The three coordinate planes divide the space into eight parts known as octants.
® The coordinates of a point P in three dimensional geometry is always written
in the form of triplet like (x, y, z). Here x, y and z are the distances from the
YZ, ZX and XY-planes.
® (i) Any point on x-axis is of the form (x, 0, 0)
(ii) Any point on y-axis is of the form (0, y, 0)
(iii) Any point on z-axis is of the form (0, 0, z).
® Distance between two points P(x1, y1, z1) and Q (x2, y2, z2) is given by

PQ = ( x2 − x1 )2 + ( y2 − y1 )2 + ( z2 − z1 )2
® The coordinates of the point R which divides the line segment joining two
points P (x1 y1 z1) and Q (x2, y2, z2) internally and externally in the ratio m : n
are given by
 mx2 + nx1 my2 + ny1 mz2 + nz1   mx2 – nx1 my2 – ny1 mz2 – nz1 
 , ,  and  , , 
 m+n m+ n m+n   m–n m–n m–n  ,
respectively.
® The coordinates of the mid-point of the line segment joining two points
 x1 + x2 y1 + y2 z1 + z2 
P(x1, y1, z1) and Q(x2, y2, z2) are  , , .
 2 2 2 

2018-19
280 MATHEMATICS

® The coordinates of the centroid of the triangle, whose vertices are (x1, y1, z1)
 x1 + x2 + x3 y1 + y2 + y3 z1 + z2 + x3 
(x2, y2, z2) and (x3, y3, z3), are  , , .
 3 3 3 

Historical Note
Rene’ Descartes (1596–1650), the father of analytical geometry, essentially dealt
with plane geometry only in 1637. The same is true of his co-inventor Pierre
Fermat (1601-1665) and La Hire (1640-1718). Although suggestions for the three
dimensional coordinate geometry can be found in their works but no details.
Descartes had the idea of coordinates in three dimensions but did not develop it.
J.Bernoulli (1667-1748) in a letter of 1715 to Leibnitz introduced the three coor-
dinate planes which we use today. It was Antoinne Parent
(1666-1716), who gave a systematic development of analytical solid geometry
for the first time in a paper presented to the French Academy in 1700.
L.Euler (1707-1783) took up systematically the three dimensional coordinate ge-
ometry, in Chapter 5 of the appendix to the second volume of his “Introduction
to Geometry” in 1748.
It was not until the middle of the nineteenth century that geometry was extended
to more than three dimensions, the well-known application of which is in the
Space-Time Continuum of Einstein’s Theory of Relativity.

—v—

2018-19
 Chapter 13

LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES

With the Calculus as a key, Mathematics can be successfully applied to the

explanation of the course of Nature – WHITEHEAD 

13.1 Introduction
This chapter is an introduction to Calculus. Calculus is that
branch of mathematics which mainly deals with the study
of change in the value of a function as the points in the
domain change. First, we give an intuitive idea of derivative
(without actually defining it). Then we give a naive definition
of limit and study some algebra of limits. Then we come
back to a definition of derivative and study some algebra
of derivatives. We also obtain derivatives of certain
standard functions.
13.2 Intuitive Idea of Derivatives Sir Issac Newton
Physical experiments have confirmed that the body dropped (1642-1727)
from a tall cliff covers a distance of 4.9t2 metres in t seconds,
i.e., distance s in metres covered by the body as a function of time t in seconds is given
by s = 4.9t2.
The adjoining Table 13.1 gives the distance travelled in metres at various intervals
of time in seconds of a body dropped from a tall cliff.
The objective is to find the veloctiy of the body at time t = 2 seconds from this
data. One way to approach this problem is to find the average velocity for various
intervals of time ending at t = 2 seconds and hope that these throw some light on the
velocity at t = 2 seconds.
Average velocity between t = t1 and t = t2 equals distance travelled between
t = t1 and t = t2 seconds divided by (t2 – t1). Hence the average velocity in the first
two seconds

2018-19
282 MATHEMATICS

Table 13.1
Distance travelled between t2 = 2 and t1 = 0
= t s
Time interval (t2 − t1 )
0 0
(19.6 − 0 ) m 1 4.9
= = 9.8 m / s .
(2 − 0 ) s 1.5 11.025
1.8 15.876
Similarly, the average velocity between t = 1
and t = 2 is 1.9 17.689
1.95 18.63225
(19.6 – 4.9) m 2 19.6
= 14.7 m/s
( 2 − 1) s 2.05 20.59225
Likewise we compute the average velocitiy 2.1 21.609
between t = t1 and t = 2 for various t1. The following 2.2 23.716
Table 13.2 gives the average velocity (v), t = t1 2.5 30.625
seconds and t = 2 seconds. 3 44.1
4 78.4

Table 13.2
t1 0 1 1.5 1.8 1.9 1.95 1.99
v 9.8 14.7 17.15 18.62 19.11 19.355 19.551

From Table 13.2, we observe that the average velocity is gradually increasing.
As we make the time intervals ending at t = 2 smaller, we see that we get a better idea
of the velocity at t = 2. Hoping that nothing really dramatic happens between 1.99
seconds and 2 seconds, we conclude that the average velocity at t = 2 seconds is just
above 19.551m/s.
This conclusion is somewhat strengthened by the following set of computation.
Compute the average velocities for various time intervals starting at t = 2 seconds. As
before the average velocity v between t = 2 seconds and t = t2 seconds is

Distance travelled between 2 seconds and t2 seconds

=
t2 − 2

Distance travelled in t2 seconds − Distance travelled in 2 seconds

=
t2 − 2

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 283

Distance travelled in t2 seconds − 19.6

=
t2 − 2
The following Table 13.3 gives the average velocity v in metres per second
between t = 2 seconds and t2 seconds.
Table 13.3

t2 4 3 2.5 2.2 2.1 2.05 2.01

v 29.4 24.5 22.05 20.58 20.09 19.845 19.649

Here again we note that if we take smaller time intervals starting at t = 2, we get
better idea of the velocity at t = 2.
In the first set of computations, what we have done is to find average velocities
in increasing time intervals ending at t = 2 and then hope that nothing dramatic happens
just before t = 2. In the second set of computations, we have found the average velocities
decreasing in time intervals ending at t = 2 and then hope that nothing dramatic happens
just after t = 2. Purely on the physical grounds, both these sequences of average
velocities must approach a common limit. We can safely conclude that the velocity of
the body at t = 2 is between 19.551m/s and 19.649 m/s. Technically, we say that the
instantaneous velocity at t = 2 is between 19.551 m/s and 19.649 m/s. As is
well-known, velocity is the rate of change of displacement. Hence what we have
accomplished is the following. From the given data of distance covered at various time
instants we have estimated the rate of
change of the distance at a given instant
of time. We say that the derivative of
the distance function s = 4.9t2 at t = 2
is between 19.551 and 19.649.
An alternate way of viewing this
limiting process is shown in Fig 13.1.
This is a plot of distance s of the body
from the top of the cliff versus the time
t elapsed. In the limit as the sequence
of time intervals h1, h2, ..., approaches
zero, the sequence of average velocities
approaches the same limit as does the
sequence of ratios Fig 13.1

2018-19
284 MATHEMATICS

C1B1 C2 B2 C3 B3
, , , ...
AC1 AC2 AC3
where C1B1 = s1 – s0 is the distance travelled by the body in the time interval h1 = AC1,
etc. From the Fig 13.1 it is safe to conclude that this latter sequence approaches the
slope of the tangent to the curve at point A. In other words, the instantaneous velocity
v(t) of a body at time t = 2 is equal to the slope of the tangent of the curve s = 4.9t2 at
t = 2.
13.3 Limits
The above discussion clearly points towards the fact that we need to understand limiting
process in greater clarity. We study a few illustrative examples to gain some familiarity
with the concept of limits.
Consider the function f(x) = x2. Observe that as x takes values very close to 0,
the value of f(x) also moves towards 0 (See Fig 2.10 Chapter 2). We say
lim f ( x ) = 0
x →0

(to be read as limit of f (x) as x tends to zero equals zero). The limit of f (x) as x tends
to zero is to be thought of as the value f (x) should assume at x = 0.
In general as x → a, f (x) → l, then l is called limit of the function f (x) which is

symbolically written as lim f (x) = l .

x →a

Consider the following function g(x) = |x|, x ≠ 0. Observe that g(0) is not defined.
Computing the value of g(x) for values of x very
near to 0, we see that the value of g(x) moves
towards 0. So, lim
x→0
g(x) = 0. This is intuitively
clear from the graph of y = |x| for x ≠ 0.
(See Fig 2.13, Chapter 2).
Consider the following function.
x2 − 4
h(x) = , x≠2.
x−2
Compute the value of h(x) for values of
x very near to 2 (but not at 2). Convince yourself
that all these values are near to 4. This is
somewhat strengthened by considering the graph
of the function y = h(x) given here (Fig 13.2). Fig 13.2

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 285

In all these illustrations the value which the function should assume at a given
point x = a did not really depend on how is x tending to a. Note that there are essentially
two ways x could approach a number a either from left or from right, i.e., all the
values of x near a could be less than a or could be greater than a. This naturally leads
to two limits – the right hand limit and the left hand limit. Right hand limit of a
function f(x) is that value of f(x) which is dictated by the values of f(x) when x tends
to a from the right. Similarly, the left hand limit. To illustrate this, consider the function
 1, x ≤ 0
f (x) = 
 2, x > 0
Graph of this function is shown in the Fig 13.3. It is
clear that the value of f at 0 dictated by values of f(x) with
x ≤ 0 equals 1, i.e., the left hand limit of f (x) at 0 is
lim f ( x) =1 .
x→0

Similarly, the value of f at 0 dictated by values of

f (x) with x > 0 equals 2, i.e., the right hand limit of f (x)
at 0 is
lim f ( x ) = 2 .
x →0 + Fig 13.3
In this case the right and left hand limits are different, and hence we say that the
limit of f (x) as x tends to zero does not exist (even though the function is defined at 0).

Summary
We say xlim
→a –
f(x) is the expected value of f at x = a given the values of f near
x to the left of a. This value is called the left hand limit of f at a.

We say lim+ f ( x ) is the expected value of f at x = a given the values of

x→a

f near x to the right of a. This value is called the right hand limit of f(x) at a.
If the right and left hand limits coincide, we call that common value as the limit
of f(x) at x = a and denote it by lim
x →a
f(x).

Illustration 1 Consider the function f(x) = x + 10. We want to find the limit of this
function at x = 5. Let us compute the value of the function f(x) for x very near to 5.
Some of the points near and to the left of 5 are 4.9, 4.95, 4.99, 4.995. . ., etc. Values
of the function at these points are tabulated below. Similarly, the real number 5.001,

2018-19
286 MATHEMATICS

5.01, 5.1 are also points near and to the right of 5. Values of the function at these points
are also given in the Table 13.4.
Table 13.4

x 4.9 4.95 4.99 4.995 5.001 5.01 5.1

f(x) 14.9 14.95 14.99 14.995 15.001 15.01 15.1

From the Table 13.4, we deduce that value of f(x) at x = 5 should be greater than
14.995 and less than 15.001 assuming nothing dramatic happens between x = 4.995
and 5.001. It is reasonable to assume that the value of the f(x) at x = 5 as dictated by
the numbers to the left of 5 is 15, i.e.,

lim f ( x ) = 15 .
x →5 –

Similarly, when x approaches 5 from the right, f(x) should be taking value 15, i.e.,

lim f ( x ) = 15 .
x →5+

Hence, it is likely that the left hand limit of f(x) and the right hand limit of f(x) are
both equal to 15. Thus,
lim f ( x ) = lim+ f ( x ) = lim f ( x ) = 15 .
x →5 − x →5 x →5

This conclusion about the limit being equal to 15 is somewhat strengthened by

seeing the graph of this function which is given in Fig 2.16, Chapter 2. In this figure, we
note that as x approaches 5 from either right or left, the graph of the function
f(x) = x +10 approaches the point (5, 15).
We observe that the value of the function at x = 5 also happens to be equal to 15.
Illustration 2 Consider the function f(x) = x3. Let us try to find the limit of this
function at x = 1. Proceeding as in the previous case, we tabulate the value of f(x) at
x near 1. This is given in the Table 13.5.
Table 13.5

x 0.9 0.99 0.999 1.001 1.01 1.1

f(x) 0.729 0.970299 0.997002999 1.003003001 1.030301 1.331

From this table, we deduce that value of f(x) at x = 1 should be greater than
0.997002999 and less than 1.003003001 assuming nothing dramatic happens between

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 287

x = 0.999 and 1.001. It is reasonable to assume that the value of the f(x) at x = 1 as
dictated by the numbers to the left of 1 is 1, i.e.,
lim f ( x ) = 1 .
x →1−

Similarly, when x approaches 1 from the right, f(x) should be taking value 1, i.e.,
lim f ( x ) = 1 .
x →1+

Hence, it is likely that the left hand limit of f(x) and the right hand limit of f(x) are
both equal to 1. Thus,
lim f ( x ) = lim+ f ( x ) = lim f ( x ) = 1 .
x →1− x →1 x →1

This conclusion about the limit being equal to 1 is somewhat strengthened by

seeing the graph of this function which is given in Fig 2.11, Chapter 2. In this figure, we
note that as x approaches 1 from either right or left, the graph of the function
f(x) = x3 approaches the point (1, 1).
We observe, again, that the value of the function at x = 1 also happens to be
equal to 1.
Illustration 3 Consider the function f(x) = 3x. Let us try to find the limit of this
function at x = 2. The following Table 13.6 is now self-explanatory.
Table 13.6

x 1.9 1.95 1.99 1.999 2.001 2.01 2.1

f(x) 5.7 5.85 5.97 5.997 6.003 6.03 6.3

As before we observe that as x approaches 2

from either left or right, the value of f(x) seem to
approach 6. We record this as
lim f ( x ) = lim+ f ( x ) = lim f ( x ) = 6
x →2 − x →2 x →2

Its graph shown in Fig 13.4 strengthens this

fact.
Here again we note that the value of the function
at x = 2 coincides with the limit at x = 2.

Illustration 4 Consider the constant function

f(x) = 3. Let us try to find its limit at x = 2. This
function being the constant function takes the same Fig 13.4

2018-19
288 MATHEMATICS

value (3, in this case) everywhere, i.e., its value at points close to 2 is 3. Hence
lim f ( x ) = lim+ f ( x ) = lim f ( x ) = 3
x→2 x →2 x→2

Graph of f(x) = 3 is anyway the line parallel to x-axis passing through (0, 3) and
is shown in Fig 2.9, Chapter 2. From this also it is clear that the required limit is 3. In

fact, it is easily observed that lim f ( x ) = 3 for any real number a.

x →a

Illustration 5 Consider the function f(x) = x2 + x. We want to find lim f ( x ) . We

x →1

tabulate the values of f(x) near x = 1 in Table 13.7.

Table 13.7
x 0.9 0.99 0.999 1.01 1.1 1.2

f(x) 1.71 1.9701 1.997001 2.0301 2.31 2.64

From this it is reasonable to deduce that

lim f ( x ) = lim+ f ( x ) = lim f ( x ) = 2 .
x →1− x →1 x →1

From the graph of f(x) = x2 + x

shown in the Fig 13.5, it is clear that as x
approaches 1, the graph approaches (1, 2).
Here, again we observe that the
lim f (x) = f (1)
x→1

Now, convince yourself of the

Fig 13.5
following three facts:

lim x 2 = 1, lim x = 1 and lim x + 1 = 2

x →1 x →1 x →1

Then lim x 2 + lim x = 1 + 1 = 2 = lim  x 2 + x  .

x →1 x →1 x →1

Also lim x. lim ( x + 1) = 1.2 = 2 = lim  x ( x + 1) = lim  x 2 + x  .

x →1 x→1 x →1 x →1

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 289

Illustration 6 Consider the function f(x) = sin x. We are interested in limπ sin x ,
x→
2

where the angle is measured in radians.

π
Here, we tabulate the (approximate) value of f(x) near (Table 13.8). From
2
this, we may deduce that
lim− f ( x ) = lim+ f ( x ) = lim f ( x ) = 1
π π π .
x→ x→ x→
2 2 2

Further, this is supported by the graph of f(x) = sin x which is given in the Fig 3.8
(Chapter 3). In this case too, we observe that lim sin x = 1.
π
x→
2

Table 13.8
π π π π
x − 0.1 − 0.01 + 0.01 + 0.1
2 2 2 2
f(x) 0.9950 0.9999 0.9999 0.9950

Illustration 7 Consider the function f(x) = x + cos x. We want to find the lim f (x).
x→0

Here we tabulate the (approximate) value of f(x) near 0 (Table 13.9).

Table 13.9
x – 0.1 – 0.01 – 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1

f(x) 0.9850 0.98995 0.9989995 1.0009995 1.00995 1.0950

From the Table 13.9, we may deduce that

lim f ( x ) = lim+ f ( x ) = lim f ( x ) = 1
x → 0− x→0 x →0

In this case too, we observe that lim f (x) = f (0) = 1.

x→0

Now, can you convince yourself that

lim [ x + cos x ] = lim x + lim cos x is indeed true?
x →0 x →0 x→0

2018-19
290 MATHEMATICS

1
Illustration 8 Consider the function f ( x ) = for x > 0 . We want to know lim f (x).
x2 x→0

Here, observe that the domain of the function is given to be all positive real
numbers. Hence, when we tabulate the values of f(x), it does not make sense to talk of
x approaching 0 from the left. Below we tabulate the values of the function for positive
x close to 0 (in this table n denotes any positive integer).
From the Table 13.10 given below, we see that as x tends to 0, f(x) becomes
larger and larger. What we mean here is that the value of f(x) may be made larger than
any given number.
Table 13.10

x 1 0.1 0.01 10–n

f(x) 1 100 10000 102n

Mathematically, we say
lim f ( x ) = + ∞
x →0

We also remark that we will not come across such limits in this course.

Illustration 9 We want to find lim f ( x ) , where

x →0

 x − 2, x < 0

f (x) =  0 , x = 0
 x + 2, x > 0

As usual we make a table of x near 0 with f(x). Observe that for negative values of x
we need to evaluate x – 2 and for positive values, we need to evaluate x + 2.
Table 13.11

x – 0.1 – 0.01 – 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1

f(x) – 2.1 – 2.01 – 2.001 2.001 2.01 2.1

From the first three entries of the Table 13.11, we deduce that the value of the
function is decreasing to –2 and hence.
lim f ( x ) = −2
x →0 −

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 291

From the last three entires of the table we deduce that the value of the function
is increasing from 2 and hence
lim f ( x ) = 2
x → 0+

Since the left and right hand limits at 0 do not coincide,

we say that the limit of the function at 0 does not exist.
Graph of this function is given in the Fig13.6. Here,
we remark that the value of the function at x = 0 is well
defined and is, indeed, equal to 0, but the limit of the function
at x = 0 is not even defined.
Fig 13.6
Illustration 10 As a final illustration, we find lim f (x) ,
x →1

where
x + 2 x ≠ 1
f ( x) = 
 0 x =1

Table 13.12

x 0.9 0.99 0.999 1.001 1.01 1.1

f(x) 2.9 2.99 2.999 3.001 3.01 3.1

As usual we tabulate the values of f(x) for x near 1. From the values of f(x) for
x less than 1, it seems that the function should take value 3 at x = 1., i.e.,
lim f ( x ) = 3 .
x →1−

Similarly, the value of f(x) should be 3 as dic-

tated by values of f(x) at x greater than 1. i.e.
lim f ( x ) = 3 .
x →1+

But then the left and right hand limits coincide

and hence

lim f ( x ) = lim+ f ( x ) = lim f ( x ) = 3 .

x →1− x →1 x →1

Graph of function given in Fig 13.7 strengthens

our deduction about the limit. Here, we Fig 13.7

2018-19
292 MATHEMATICS

note that in general, at a given point the value of the function and its limit may be
different (even when both are defined).
13.3.1 Algebra of limits In the above illustrations, we have observed that the limiting
process respects addition, subtraction, multiplication and division as long as the limits
and functions under consideration are well defined. This is not a coincidence. In fact,
below we formalise these as a theorem without proof.

Theorem 1 Let f and g be two functions such that both lim f (x) and lim g(x) exist.
x →a x →a

Then
(i) Limit of sum of two functions is sum of the limits of the functions, i.e.,
lim [f(x) + g (x)] = lim f(x) + lim g(x).
x →a x →a x →a

(ii) Limit of difference of two functions is difference of the limits of the functions, i.e.,
lim [f(x) – g(x)] = lim f(x) – lim g(x).
x →a x →a x →a

(iii) Limit of product of two functions is product of the limits of the functions, i.e.,
lim [f(x) . g(x)] = lim f(x). lim g(x).
x →a x →a x →a

(iv) Limit of quotient of two functions is quotient of the limits of the functions (whenever
the denominator is non zero), i.e.,

f (x) lim f ( x )
x →a
lim =
x →a g ( x) lim g ( x )
x→ a

 Note In particular as a special case of (iii), when g is the constant function

such that g(x) = λ , for some real number λ , we have

lim (λ. f ) ( x ) = λ.lim f ( x ) .

x→a x →a

In the next two subsections, we illustrate how to exploit this theorem to evaluate
limits of special types of functions.
13.3.2 Limits of polynomials and rational functions A function f is said to be a
polynomial function of degree n f(x) = a0 + a1x + a2x2 +. . . + anxn, where ais are real
numbers such that an ≠ 0 for some natural number n.
We know that lim x = a. Hence
x →a

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 293

lim x 2 = lim ( x. x ) = lim x.lim x = a. a = a 2

x→a x→ a x→a x→ a

An easy exercise in induction on n tells us that

lim x n = a n
x →a

Now, let f ( x ) = a0 + a1 x + a2 x 2 + ... + an x n be a polynomial function. Thinking

of each of a0 , a1 x, a2 x 2 ,..., an x n as a function, we have

lim f
x→a
( x ) = lim a0 + a1 x + a2 x 2 + ... + an x n 
x →a

= lim a0 + lim a1 x + lim a2 x 2 + ... + lim an x n

x →a x→ a x→a x →a

= a0 + a1 lim
x →a
x + a2 lim x 2 + ... + an lim x n
x →a x→ a

= a0 + a1a + a2 a 2 + ... + an a n

= f (a )
(Make sure that you understand the justification for each step in the above!)
g ( x)
( )
A function f is said to be a rational function, if f(x) = h x , where g(x) and h(x)

are polynomials such that h(x) ≠ 0. Then

g ( x) lim g ( x ) g (a )
lim f ( x ) = lim = x →a
=
x →a x→ a h(x) lim h ( x ) h (a)
x→ a

However, if h(a) = 0, there are two scenarios – (i) when g(a) ≠ 0 and (ii) when
g(a) = 0. In the former case we say that the limit does not exist. In the latter case we
can write g(x) = (x – a)k g1 (x), where k is the maximum of powers of (x – a) in g(x)
Similarly, h(x) = (x – a)l h1 (x) as h (a) = 0. Now, if k > l, we have

lim g ( x ) lim ( x − a ) g1 ( x )
k

lim f ( x ) = x→ a
= x→ a
x→a lim h ( x ) lim ( x − a ) h1 ( x )
l
x →a x →a

2018-19
294 MATHEMATICS

( k −l )
lim ( x − a ) g1 ( x ) 0. g1 ( a )
x→a
= = =0
lim h1 ( x ) h1 ( a )
x →a

If k < l, the limit is not defined.

Example 1 Find the limits: (i) lim  x 3 − x 2 + 1 (ii) lim  x ( x + 1)

x →1   x →3 

(iii) lim 1 + x + x 2 + ... + x10  .

x →−1 

Solution The required limits are all limits of some polynomial functions. Hence the
limits are the values of the function at the prescribed points. We have
(i) lim
x→1
[x3 – x2 + 1] = 13 – 12 + 1 = 1

(ii) lim  x ( x + 1) = 3 (3 + 1) = 3 ( 4 ) = 12

x →3 

(iii) lim 1 + x + x 2 + ... + x10  = 1 + ( −1) + ( −1)2 + ... + ( −1)10

x →−1 

= 1 − 1 + 1... + 1 = 1 .
Example 2 Find the limits:

 x2 + 1   x3 − 4 x 2 + 4 x 
(i) lim 
x →1 x + 100
 (ii) lim  
  x →2
 x2 − 4 

 x2 − 4   x3 − 2 x2 
(iii) lim  3  (iv) lim  2 
x →2 x − 4 x + 4 x
2 x →2 x − 5 x + 6
   

 x−2 1 
(v) lim  − 3
x − 3 x + 2 x 
x →1  x − x
2 2 .

Solution All the functions under consideration are rational functions. Hence, we first
0
evaluate these functions at the prescribed points. If this is of the form , we try to
0
rewrite the function cancelling the factors which are causing the limit to be of
0
the form .
0

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 295

x2 + 1 12 + 1 2
(i) We have lim = =
x →1 x + 100 1 + 100 101
0
(ii) Evaluating the function at 2, it is of the form .
0

x ( x − 2)
2
x3 − 4 x 2 + 4 x
Hence lim = lim
x → 2 ( x + 2 )( x − 2 )
x→2 x −4
2

x ( x − 2)
= lim as x ≠ 2
x →2 ( x + 2)
2 (2 − 2) 0
= = = 0.
2+2 4

0
(iii) Evaluating the function at 2, we get it of the form .
0

x2 − 4 ( x + 2 )( x − 2 )
Hence lim = lim
x ( x − 2)
x→2 2
x →2 x3 − 4 x 2 + 4 x

( x + 2) 2+2 4
= lim = =
x →2 x ( x − 2 ) 2 (2 − 2) 0

which is not defined.

0
(iv) Evaluating the function at 2, we get it of the form .
0

x3 − 2 x 2 x2 ( x − 2)
Hence lim 2 = lim
x →2 ( x − 2 )( x − 3 )
x→2 x − 5 x + 6

(2) 4
2
x2
= lim = = = −4.
x →2 ( x − 3) 2 − 3 −1

2018-19
296 MATHEMATICS

(v) First, we rewrite the function as a rational function.

 
 x−2 1   x−2 − 1 
−
   (
 x 2 − x x3 − 3x 2 + 2 x   x ( x − 1) x x − 3 x + 2
= 2
) 


 x−2 1 
=  x x −1 − x x −1 x − 2 
 ( ) ( )( ) 
 x2 − 4x + 4 − 1 
=  x x −1 x − 2 
 ( )( ) 
x2 − 4x + 3
( )( )
= x x −1 x − 2

0
Evaluating the function at 1, we get it of the form .
0

 x2 − 2 1  x2 − 4x + 3
lim  2 − 3 = lim
x − 3x 2 + 2 x  x →1 x ( x − 1)( x − 2 )
Hence x →1 x − x


( x − 3)( x − 1)
= lim
x →1 x ( x − 1)( x − 2 )

x−3 1− 3
= lim
x →1 x ( x − 2 ) = 1(1 − 2 ) = 2.
We remark that we could cancel the term (x – 1) in the above evaluation because
x ≠ 1.
Evaluation of an important limit which will be used in the sequel is given as a
theorem below.
Theorem 2 For any positive integer n,
xn − an
lim = na n−1 .
x →a x − a

Remark The expression in the above theorem for the limit is true even if n is any
rational number and a is positive.

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 297

Proof Dividing (xn – an) by (x – a), we see that

xn – an = (x–a) (xn–1 + xn–2 a + xn–3 a2 + ... + x an–2 + an–1)
xn − an
Thus, lim = lim (xn–1 + xn–2 a + xn–3 a2 + ... + x an–2 + an–1)
x →a x − a x →a

= an – l + a an–2 +. . . + an–2 (a) +an–l

= an–1 + an – 1 +...+an–1 + an–1 (n terms)
n −1
= na
Example 3 Evaluate:

x15 − 1 1+ x −1
(i) lim (ii) lim
x →1 x10 − 1 x →0 x
Solution (i) We have

x15 − 1 lim  x − 1 ÷ x − 1 
15 10
lim =  
x →1 x10 − 1 x →1
 x −1 x −1 

 x15 − 1   x10 − 1 
= x →1 
lim  ÷ lim  
 x − 1  x →1  x − 1 
= 15 (1)14 ÷ 10(1)9 (by the theorem above)

3
= 15 ÷ 10 =
2
(ii) Put y = 1 + x, so that y → 1 as x → 0.

1 + x −1 y −1
Then lim = lim
→
x →0 x y 1 y –1

1 1
y 2 − 12
= lim
y →1 y −1

1
1 2 −1 1
= (1) (by the remark above) =
2 2

2018-19
298 MATHEMATICS

13.4 Limits of Trigonometric Functions

The following facts (stated as theorems) about functions in general come in handy in
calculating limits of some trigonometric functions.
Theorem 3 Let f and g be two real valued functions with the same domain such that

f (x) ≤ g( x) for all x in the domain of definition, For some a, if both lim
x →a
f(x) and

lim g(x) exist, then lim f(x) ≤ lim g(x). This is illustrated in Fig 13.8.
x →a x →a x →a

Fig 13.8

Theorem 4 (Sandwich Theorem) Let f, g and h be real functions such that

f (x) ≤ g( x) ≤ h(x) for all x in the common domain of definition. For some real number

a, if lim
x →a
f(x) = l = lim
x →a
h(x), then lim g(x) = l. This is illustrated in Fig 13.9.
x→ a

Fig 13.9
Given below is a beautiful geometric proof of the following important
inequality relating trigonometric functions.
sin x 
cos x < <1 for 0 < x < (*)
x 2

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 299

Proof We know that sin (– x) = – sin x and cos( – x) = cos x. Hence, it is sufficient

to prove the inequality for 0 < x < .
2
In the Fig 13.10, O is the centre of the unit circle such that

the angle AOC is x radians and 0 < x < . Line segments B A and
2
CD are perpendiculars to OA. Further, join AC. Then
Area of ∆OAC < Area of sector OAC < Area of ∆ OAB. Fig 13.10
1 x 1
i.e., OA.CD < ..(OA) 2 < OA.AB .
2 2 2
i.e., CD < x . OA < AB.
From ∆ OCD,
CD AB
sin x = (since OC = OA) and hence CD = OA sin x. Also tan x = and
OA OA
hence AB = OA. tan x. Thus
OA sin x < OA. x < OA. tan x.
Since length OA is positive, we have
sin x < x < tan x.

Since 0 < x < , sinx is positive and thus by dividing throughout by sin x, we have
2
x 1
1< < . Taking reciprocals throughout, we have
sin x cos x
sin x
cos x < <1
x
which complete the proof.
Theorem 5 The following are two important limits.
sin x 1 − cos x
(i) lim =1. (ii) lim =0.
x →0 x x →0 x
sin x
Proof (i) The inequality in (*) says that the function is sandwiched between the
x
function cos x and the constant function which takes value 1.

2018-19
300 MATHEMATICS

Further, since lim

x→0
cos x = 1, we see that the proof of (i) of the theorem is
complete by sandwich theorem.
x
To prove (ii), we recall the trigonometric identity 1 – cos x = 2 sin2   .
2
Then

x x
2sin 2   sin  
1 − cos x  2  = lim  2  .sin  x 
lim = lim 2
x →0 x x →0 x x →0 x  
2

x
sin  
= lim
 2  .lim sin  x  = 1.0 = 0
x 2
x →0 x →0  
2

x
Observe that we have implicitly used the fact that x → 0 is equivalent to → 0 . This
2
x
may be justified by putting y = .
2

sin 4 x tan x
Example 4 Evaluate: (i) lim (ii) lim
x →0 sin 2 x x →0 x

sin 4 x  sin 4 x 2 x 
Solution (i) lim = lim  . .2
x →0 sin 2 x x → 0  4 x sin 2 x 

 sin 4 x   sin 2 x 
= 2.lim
x →0  ÷ 
 4 x   2x 

 sin 4 x   sin 2 x 
= 2. 4lim ÷ lim 
x →0 
 4x 
 2 x → 0  2x 


= 2.1.1 = 2 (as x → 0, 4x → 0 and 2x → 0)

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 301

tan x sin x sin x 1

(ii) We have lim = lim
→
= lim
→
. lim
→
= 1.1 = 1
x →0 x x 0 x cos x x 0 x x 0 cos x
A general rule that needs to be kept in mind while evaluating limits is the following.
f (x)
Say, given that the limit lim
x→a g ( x )
exists and we want to evaluate this. First we check

the value of f (a) and g(a). If both are 0, then we see if we can get the factor which
is causing the terms to vanish, i.e., see if we can write f(x) = f1 (x) f2(x) so that
f1 (a) = 0 and f2 (a) ≠ 0. Similarly, we write g(x) = g1 (x) g2(x), where g1(a) = 0 and
g2(a) ≠ 0. Cancel out the common factors from f(x) and g(x) (if possible) and write
f (x) p (x)
=
g (x) q ( x ) , where q(x) ≠ 0.

f (x) p (a )
lim =
Then x →a g (x) q (a ) .

EXERCISE 13.1
Evaluate the following limits in Exercises 1 to 22.
 22 
1. lim x+3 2. lim  x−  3. lim r 2
x →3 x→  7  r →1

4. lim
4x + 3
5. lim
x10 + x 5 + 1
6. lim
( x + 1)5 − 1
x →4 x − 2 x → −1 x −1 x→0 x

3 x 2 − x − 10 x 4 − 81 ax + b
7. lim 8. lim 9. lim
x →2 x2 − 4 x →3 2 x2 − 5x − 3 x →0 cx + 1
1
z3 −1 ax 2 + bx + c
10. lim
z →1 1 11. lim ,a+b+c ≠ 0
x →1 cx 2 + bx + a
z 6 −1

1 1
+ sin ax sin ax
12. lim x 2 13. lim 14. lim , a, b ≠ 0
x →0 bx x →0 sin bx
x →−2 x + 2

2018-19
302 MATHEMATICS

sin (  − x ) cos x cos 2 x − 1

15. lim
x→  (  − x )
16. lim 17. lim
x →0 −x x →0 cos x − 1

ax + x cos x
18. lim 19. lim
x →0
x sec x
x →0 b sin x
sin ax + bx (cosec x − cot x )
20. lim a, b, a + b ≠ 0 , 21. lim
x →0 ax + sin bx x →0

tan 2 x
lim
22.  
x→
2 x−
2

 2 x + 3, x ≤ 0
23. Find lim f ( x ) and lim f ( x ) , where f ( x ) = 
x →0 x →1
3 ( x + 1) , x > 0

 x 2 − 1, x ≤1
24. Find x →1 ( ) , where
lim f x f ( x ) =  2
− x − 1, x >1

| x |
 , x≠0
25. Evaluate lim f ( x ) , where f ( x ) =  x
x →0
 0, x = 0

 x
 , x≠0
26. Find lim f ( x ) , where f ( x ) =  | x |
x →0
 0, x = 0


27. Find lim f ( x ) , where f ( x ) = | x | −5

x →5

 a + bx , x <1

28. Suppose f ( x ) =  4, x =1
 b − ax , x >1


and if lim f (x) = f (1) what are possible values of a and b?

x→1

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 303

29. Let a1, a2, . . ., an be fixed real numbers and define a function
f ( x ) = ( x − a1 ) ( x − a2 )... ( x − an ) .

What is xlim
→a
f (x) ? For some a ≠ a1, a2, ..., an, compute lim
x→ a
f (x).
1

 x + 1, x < 0

30. If f ( x ) =  0, x=0 .
 x − 1, x > 0


For what value (s) of a does lim

x →a
f (x) exists?

f (x) − 2
31. If the function f(x) satisfies lim =  , evaluate lim f (x) .
x →1 x2 − 1 x →1

 mx 2 + n , x<0

32. If f ( x ) =  nx + m , 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 . For what integers m and n does both lim f (x)
x →0
 3
 nx + m , x >1

and lim f ( x ) exist?

x →1

13.5 Derivatives
We have seen in the Section 13.2, that by knowing the position of a body at various
time intervals it is possible to find the rate at which the position of the body is changing.
It is of very general interest to know a certain parameter at various instants of time and
try to finding the rate at which it is changing. There are several real life situations
where such a process needs to be carried out. For instance, people maintaining a
reservoir need to know when will a reservoir overflow knowing the depth of the water
at several instances of time, Rocket Scientists need to compute the precise velocity
with which the satellite needs to be shot out from the rocket knowing the height of the
rocket at various times. Financial institutions need to predict the changes in the value of
a particular stock knowing its present value. In these, and many such cases it is desirable
to know how a particular parameter is changing with respect to some other parameter.
The heart of the matter is derivative of a function at a given point in its domain
of definition.

2018-19
304 MATHEMATICS

Definition 1 Suppose f is a real valued function and a is a point in its domain of

definition. The derivative of f at a is defined by
f ( a + h ) − f (a )
lim
h →0 h
provided this limit exists. Derivative of f (x) at a is denoted by f′(a).
Observe that f′ (a) quantifies the change in f(x) at a with respect to x.
Example 5 Find the derivative at x = 2 of the function f(x) = 3x.
Solution We have

f (2 + h ) − f (2) 3(2 + h ) − 3(2)

f′ (2) = lim = lim
h →0 h h →0 h

6 + 3h − 6 3h
= lim = lim = lim 3 = 3 .
h →0 h h → 0 h h →0
The derivative of the function 3x at x = 2 is 3.
Example 6 Find the derivative of the function f(x) = 2x2 + 3x – 5 at x = –1. Also prove
that f ′ (0) + 3f ′ ( –1) = 0.
Solution We first find the derivatives of f(x) at x = –1 and at x = 0. We have

f (−1 + h ) − f ( −1)
f ' ( −1) = lim
h →0 h

 2 ( −1 + h )2 + 3 ( −1 + h ) − 5 −  2 ( −1)2 + 3 ( −1) − 5
= lim    
h →0 h

2h 2 − h
= lim = lim ( 2h − 1) = 2 ( 0 ) − 1 = −1
h →0 h h →0

f (0 + h ) − f (0 )
and f ' ( 0 ) = lim
h →0 h

 2 (0 + h )2 + 3 (0 + h ) − 5 −  2 (0 )2 + 3 (0 ) − 5
= lim    
h →0 h

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 305

2h 2 + 3h
= lim = lim ( 2h + 3) = 2 (0 ) + 3 = 3
h →0 h h →0

Clearly f ' ( 0 ) + 3 f ' ( −1) = 0

Remark At this stage note that evaluating derivative at a point involves effective use
of various rules, limits are subjected to. The following illustrates this.
Example 7 Find the derivative of sin x at x = 0.
Solution Let f(x) = sin x. Then
f (0 + h ) − f (0 )
f ′(0) = lim
h →0 h

sin (0 + h ) − sin (0 ) sin h

= lim = lim =1
h →0 h h →0 h

Example 8 Find the derivative of f(x) = 3 at x = 0 and at x = 3.

Solution Since the derivative measures the change in function, intuitively it is clear
that the derivative of the constant function must be zero at every point. This is indeed,
supported by the following computation.
f ( 0 + h ) − f (0 ) 3−3 0
f ' ( 0 ) = lim = lim = lim = 0 .
h →0 h h →0 h h →0 h

f (3 + h ) − f (3 ) 3−3
Similarly f ' (3) = lim = lim =0.
h →0 h h →0 h
We now present a geomet-
ric interpretation of derivative of a
function at a point. Let y = f(x) be
a function and let P = (a, f(a)) and
Q = (a + h, f(a + h) be two points
close to each other on the graph
of this function. The Fig 13.11 is
now self explanatory.

Fig 13.11

2018-19
306 MATHEMATICS

f (a + h ) − f (a )
We know that f ′ ( a ) = lim
h →0 h
From the triangle PQR, it is clear that the ratio whose limit we are taking is
precisely equal to tan(QPR) which is the slope of the chord PQ. In the limiting process,
as h tends to 0, the point Q tends to P and we have
f (a + h ) − f (a ) QR
lim = lim
h →0 h Q → P PR

This is equivalent to the fact that the chord PQ tends to the tangent at P of the
curve y = f(x). Thus the limit turns out to be equal to the slope of the tangent. Hence
f ′ ( a ) = tan  .
For a given function f we can find the derivative at every point. If the derivative
exists at every point, it defines a new function called the derivative of f . Formally, we
define derivative of a function as follows.
Definition 2 Suppose f is a real valued function, the function defined by
f ( x + h) − f ( x)
lim
h →0 h
wherever the limit exists is defined to be the derivative of f at x and is denoted by
f′(x). This definition of derivative is also called the first principle of derivative.
f ( x + h) − f ( x)
Thus f ' ( x ) = lim
h →0 h
Clearly the domain of definition of f′ (x) is wherever the above limit exists. There
are different notations for derivative of a function. Sometimes f′ (x) is denoted by
d dy
dx
( f ( x )) or if y = f(x), it is denoted by
dx
. This is referred to as derivative of f(x)

or y with respect to x. It is also denoted by D (f (x) ). Further, derivative of f at x = a

d df  df 
is also denoted by f ( x) or or even   .
dx a dx a  dx  x = a

Example 9 Find the derivative of f(x) = 10x.

f ( x + h) − f ( x)
Solution Since f′ ( x) = lim
h →0 h

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 307

10 ( x + h ) − 10 ( x )
= lim
h →0 h
10h
= lim = lim (10 ) = 10 .
h →0 h h→ 0

Example 10 Find the derivative of f(x) = x2.

f ( x + h) − f ( x)
Solution We have, f ′(x) = lim
h →0 h

( x + h) − (x)
2 2

(h + 2 x) = 2 x
= lim
h→0
= lim
h →0
h

Example 11 Find the derivative of the constant function f (x) = a for a fixed real
number a.
f ( x + h) − f ( x)
Solution We have, f ′(x) = lim
h →0 h
a−a 0
= lim = lim = 0 as h ≠ 0
h →0 h h →0 h

1
Example 12 Find the derivative of f(x) =
x

f ( x + h) − f ( x)
Solution We have f ′(x) = lim
h →0 h

1 1
–
= lim ( x + h) x
h →0 h

1  x − ( x + h) 
= lim  
h →0 h
 x ( x + h ) 

1  −h  −1 1
= lim   = lim = −
h →0 h x ( x + h )
  h → 0 x ( x + h) x2

2018-19
308 MATHEMATICS

13.5.1 Algebra of derivative of functions Since the very definition of derivatives

involve limits in a rather direct fashion, we expect the rules for derivatives to follow
closely that of limits. We collect these in the following theorem.
Theorem 5 Let f and g be two functions such that their derivatives are defined in a
common domain. Then
(i) Derivative of sum of two functions is sum of the derivatives of the
functions.
d d d
 f ( x ) + g ( x ) = f ( x) + g ( x) .
dx dx dx
(ii) Derivative of difference of two functions is difference of the derivatives of
the functions.
d d d
 f ( x ) − g ( x ) = f ( x) − g ( x ) .
dx dx dx
(iii) Derivative of product of two functions is given by the following product
rule.
d d d
 f ( x ) . g ( x ) = f ( x ) . g ( x ) + f ( x) . g ( x)
dx dx dx
(iv) Derivative of quotient of two functions is given by the following quotient
rule (whenever the denominator is non–zero).

d d
f ( x ) . g ( x) − f ( x) g ( x)
d  f ( x )  dx dx
 =
dx  g ( x )  ( g ( x) )2
The proofs of these follow essentially from the analogous theorem for limits. We
will not prove these here. As in the case of limits this theorem tells us how to compute
derivatives of special types of functions. The last two statements in the theorem may
be restated in the following fashion which aids in recalling them easily:
Let u = f ( x ) and v = g (x). Then

(uv )′ = u ′v + uv′

This is referred to a Leibnitz rule for differentiating product of functions or the

product rule. Similarly, the quotient rule is

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 309

 u ′ u ′v − uv′
  = v2
v
Now, let us tackle derivatives of some standard functions.
It is easy to see that the derivative of the function f(x) = x is the constant
f ( x + h) − f ( x) x+h−x
function 1. This is because f ′ ( x ) = lim = lim
h →0 h h →0 h

= lim1 =1 .
h→0

We use this and the above theorem to compute the derivative of

f(x) = 10x = x + .... + x (ten terms). By (i) of the above theorem
df ( x ) d
dx
=
dx
( x + ... + x ) (ten terms)

d d
x +. . .+
= x (ten terms)
dx dx
= 1 + ... + 1 (ten terms) = 10.
We note that this limit may be evaluated using product rule too. Write
f(x) = 10x = uv, where u is the constant function taking value 10 everywhere and
v(x) = x. Here, f(x) = 10x = uv we know that the derivative of u equals 0. Also
derivative of v(x) = x equals 1. Thus by the product rule we have

f ′ ( x ) = (10 x )′ = (uv )′ = u ′v + uv′ = 0.x + 10.1 = 10

On similar lines the derivative of f(x) = x2 may be evaluated. We have
f(x) = x2 = x .x and hence
df d d d
= ( x.x ) = ( x ).x + x. ( x )
dx dx dx dx
= 1. x + x.1 = 2 x .
More generally, we have the following theorem.
Theorem 6 Derivative of f(x) = xn is nxn – 1 for any positive integer n.
Proof By definition of the derivative function, we have

f ( x + h) − f ( x) ( x + h )n − x n
f ' ( x ) = lim = lim .
h →0 h h →0 h

2018-19
310 MATHEMATICS

Binomial theorem tells that (x + h)n = ( n

C0 x n +) ( C )x
n
1
n −1
h + ... + ( n
)
C n h n and
n n n–1 n–1
hence (x + h) – x = h(nx +... + h ). Thus

df ( x )
= lim
( x + h) − xn n

dx h →0 h

= lim
(
h nx n −1 + .... + h n−1 )
h →0 h

= lim
h →0
(
nx n−1 + ... + h n−1 = nx n −1 . )
Alternatively, we may also prove this by induction on n and the product rule as
follows. The result is true for n = 1, which has been proved earlier. We have
d n
dx
x =( )
d
dx
x.x n−1 ( )
=
d
dx
( ) d
( )
( x ). xn −1 + x. x n−1 (by product rule)
dx

= 1.x
n −1
( )
+ x. ( n − 1) x n − 2 (by induction hypothesis)

= x n −1 + ( n − 1) x n−1 = nx n−1 .
Remark The above theorem is true for all powers of x, i.e., n can be any real number
(but we will not prove it here).
13.5.2 Derivative of polynomials and trigonometric functions We start with the
following theorem which tells us the derivative of a polynomial function.
Theorem 7 Let f(x) = an x n + an−1 x n−1 + .... + a1 x + a0 be a polynomial function, where
ai s are all real numbers and an ≠ 0. Then, the derivative function is given by
df ( x )
= nan x n−1 + ( n − 1) an −1 x x − 2 + ... + 2a2 x + a1 .
dx
Proof of this theorem is just putting together part (i) of Theorem 5 and Theorem 6.
Example 13 Compute the derivative of 6x100 – x55 + x.
Solution A direct application of the above theorem tells that the derivative of the
above function is 600 x99 − 55 x54 + 1 .

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 311

Example 14 Find the derivative of f(x) = 1 + x + x2 + x3 +... + x50 at x = 1.

Solution A direct application of the above Theorem 6 tells that the derivative of the
above function is 1 + 2x + 3x2 + . . . + 50x49. At x = 1 the value of this function equals
(50 )(51)
1 + 2(1) + 3(1)2 + .. . + 50(1)49 = 1 + 2 + 3 + . . . + 50 = = 1275.
2
x +1
Example 15 Find the derivative of f(x) =
x
Solution Clearly this function is defined everywhere except at x = 0. We use the
quotient rule with u = x + 1 and v = x. Hence u′ = 1 and v′ = 1. Therefore
df ( x) d  x + 1  d  u  u ′v − uv ′ 1( x ) − ( x + 1)1 1
=   =  = = =− 2
dx dx  x  dx  v  v 2
x 2
x

Example 16 Compute the derivative of sin x.

Solution Let f(x) = sin x. Then
df ( x ) f ( x + h) − f ( x) sin ( x + h ) − sin ( x )
= lim = lim
dx h →0 h h →0 h

 2x + h   h 
2cos   sin  
= lim  2   2  (using formula for sin A – sin B)
h →0 h

h
sin
 h 2 = cos x.1 = cos x
lim cos  x +  .lim
= h →0  2  h → 0 h .
2
Example 17 Compute the derivative of tan x.
Solution Let f(x) = tan x. Then
df ( x ) f ( x + h) − f ( x) tan ( x + h ) − tan ( x )
= lim = lim
dx h →0 h h →0 h

1  sin ( x + h ) sin x 
= h→0 h  cos x + h − cos x 
lim
 ( ) 

2018-19
312 MATHEMATICS

 sin ( x + h ) cos x − cos ( x + h ) sin x 

= lim  
h →0
 h cos ( x + h ) cos x 

sin ( x + h − x )
= lim
h →0 h cos ( x + h ) cos x
(using formula for sin (A + B))

sin h 1
= lim
h →0
.lim
h h→0 cos ( x + h ) cos x

1
= 1. = sec2 x .
cos 2 x

Example 18 Compute the derivative of f(x) = sin2 x.

Solution We use the Leibnitz product rule to evaluate this.
df ( x ) d
= (sin x sin x )
dx dx

= (sin x )′ sin x + sin x ( sin x )′

= ( cos x ) sin x + sin x ( cos x )

= 2sin x cos x = sin 2 x .

EXERCISE 13.2
1. Find the derivative of x2 – 2 at x = 10.
2. Find the derivative of x at x = 1.
3. Find the derivative of 99x at x = l00.
4. Find the derivative of the following functions from first principle.
(i) x 3 − 27 (ii) ( x − 1)( x − 2 )
1 x +1
(iii) (iv)
x2 x −1
5. For the function
x100 x 99 x2
f (x) = + +. . .+ + x +1.
100 99 2

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 313

Prove that f ′ (1) = 100 f ′ (0 ) .

6. Find the derivative of x n + ax n −1 + a 2 x n− 2 + . . . + a n −1 x + a n for some fixed real

number a.
7. For some constants a and b, find the derivative of
x−a
(ax )
2
(i) ( x − a) ( x − b) (ii) 2
+b (iii)
x −b

xn − an
8. Find the derivative of for some constant a.
x−a
9. Find the derivative of

(5 x ) ( x − 1)
3
(i) 2 x − + 3x − 1
3
(ii)
4

(iii) x −3 (5 + 3 x ) (
(iv) x 3 − 6 x
5 −9
)
x2
(v) (
x −4 3 − 4 x −5 ) (vi)
2
−
x + 1 3x − 1
10. Find the derivative of cos x from first principle.
11. Find the derivative of the following functions:
(i) sin x cos x (ii) sec x (iii) 5sec x + 4 cos x
(iv) cosec x (v) 3cot x + 5cosec x
(vi) 5sin x − 6 cos x + 7 (vii) 2 tan x − 7 sec x

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 19 Find the derivative of f from the first principle, where f is given by
2x + 3 1
(i) f (x) = (ii) f (x) = x +
x−2 x
Solution (i) Note that function is not defined at x = 2. But, we have

2 ( x + h ) + 3 2x + 3
f ( x + h) − f (x) −
f ′ ( x ) = lim = lim x + h − 2 x−2
h →0 h h →0 h

2018-19
314 MATHEMATICS

( 2 x + 2h + 3)( x − 2 ) − ( 2x + 3)( x + h − 2 )
= lim
h →0 h ( x − 2 )( x + h − 2 )

( 2 x + 3)( x − 2 ) + 2h ( x − 2 ) − ( 2 x + 3)( x − 2 ) − h ( 2 x + 3)
= lim
h →0 h ( x − 2 )( x + h − 2 )

–7 7
= lim =−
h →0 ( x − 2 ) ( x + h − 2 )
( x − 2)
2

Again, note that the function f ′ is also not defined at x = 2.

(ii) The function is not defined at x = 0. But, we have

 1   1
 x+h+  −x+ 
f ( x + h) − f ( x) x+h 
= lim 
x
f ′( x ) = lim
h →0 h h →0 h

1 1 1
= lim  h+ − 
h →0 h x + h x

1 x − x−h 1  1 
lim  h +  = lim  h  1 − 
= h →0 h
 x ( x + h )  h→0 h   x ( x + h )  

 1  1
= lim 1 − =1− 2
 x ( x + h ) 
h →0 x

Again, note that the function f ′ is not defined at x = 0.

Example 20 Find the derivative of f(x) from the first principle, where f(x) is
(i) sin x + cos x (ii) x sin x
f ( x + h) − f ( x)
Solution (i) we have f ' ( x ) =
h

sin ( x + h ) + cos ( x + h ) − sin x − cos x

= lim
h →0 h
sin x cos h + cos x sin h + cos x cos h − sin x sin h − sin x − cos x
= lim
h →0 h

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 315

sin h (cos x − sin x ) + sin x (cos h − 1) + cos x (cos h − 1)

= lim
h →0 h

sin h (cos h − 1) (cos h − 1)

= lim
h →0
(cos x − sin x ) + lim
→
sin x + lim cos x
h h 0 h h →0 h
= cos x − sin x
f ( x + h) − f (x) ( x + h )sin ( x + h ) − x sin x
(ii) f ' ( x ) = lim = lim
h →0 h h →0 h

( x + h )(sin x cos h + sin h cos x ) − x sin x

= lim
h →0 h

x sin x ( cos h − 1) + x cos x sin h + h (sin x cos h + sin h cos x )

= lim
h →0 h

x sin x (cos h − 1) sin h

= lim + lim h→0 x cos x + lim (sin x cos h + sin h cos x )
h →0 h h h→0

= x cos x + sin x
Example 21 Compute derivative of
(i) f(x) = sin 2x (ii) g(x) = cot x
Solution (i) Recall the trigonometric formula sin 2x = 2 sin x cos x. Thus
df ( x ) d d
= ( 2sin x cos x ) = 2 (sin x cos x )
dx dx dx

= 2 (sin x )′ cos x + sin x (cos x )′ 

 

= 2 ( cos x ) cos x + sin x ( − sin x )

(
= 2 cos 2 x − sin 2 x )
cos x
(ii) By definition, g(x) = cot x = . We use the quotient rule on this function
sin x

dg d d  cos x 
= (cot x) = 
dx  sin x 
wherever it is defined.
dx dx

2018-19
316 MATHEMATICS

(cos x)′ (sin x) − (cos x) (sin x)′

=
(sin x )2

( − sin x )(sin x) − (cos x)(cos x)

=
(sin x ) 2

sin 2 x + cos2 x
= − 2
= − cosec 2 x
sin x
1
Alternatively, this may be computed by noting that cot x = . Here, we use the fact
tan x
that the derivative of tan x is sec2 x which we saw in Example 17 and also that the
derivative of the constant function is 0.
dg d d  1 
(cot x ) =
dx  tan x 
=
dx dx

(1)′ (tan x ) − (1) (tan x)′

=
(tan x) 2

(0) (tan x) − (sec x) 2

=
(tan x) 2

− sec 2 x
= = − cosec 2 x
tan 2 x

Example 22 Find the derivative of

x 5 − cos x x + cos x
(i) (ii)
sin x tan x

x 5 − cos x
Solution (i) Let h( x ) = . We use the quotient rule on this function wherever
sin x
it is defined.

( x 5 − cos x)′ sin x − ( x 5 − cos x) (sin x )′

h′( x) =
(sin x ) 2

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 317

(5 x 4 + sin x) sin x − ( x5 − cos x) cos x

=
sin 2 x

− x 5 cos x + 5 x 4 sin x + 1
=
(sin x )2

x + cos x
(ii) We use quotient rule on the function wherever it is defined.
tan x
( x + cos x)′ tan x − ( x + cos x ) (tan x)′
h′( x) =
(tan x) 2

(1 − sin x ) tan x − ( x + cos x) sec2 x

=
(tan x) 2

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 13

1. Find the derivative of the following functions from first principle:

(i) − x (ii) (− x) −1 (iii) sin (x + 1) (iv) cos (x –
)
8
Find the derivative of the following functions (it is to be understood that a, b, c, d,
p, q, r and s are fixed non-zero constants and m and n are integers):
r 
2. (x + a) 3. (px + q)  + s  4. ( ax + b )(cx + d )2
x 

1
ax + b 1+ 1
5. 6. x 7.
cx + d 1 ax + bx + c
2
1−
x

ax + b px 2 + qx + r a b
8. 9. 10. − 2 + cos x
px + qx + r
2
ax + b x 4
x

11. 4 x − 2 12. (ax + b) n 13. (ax + b) n (cx + d ) m

cos x
14. sin (x + a) 15. cosec x cot x 16.
1 + sin x

2018-19
318 MATHEMATICS

sin x + cos x sec x − 1

17. 18. 19. sin n x
sin x − cos x sec x + 1
a + b sin x sin( x + a)
20. 21. 22. x 4 (5sin x − 3cos x )
c + d cos x cos x

23. (x 2
)
+ 1 cos x 24. ( ax 2
+ sin x )( p + q cos x )
π 
4 x + 5sin x x 2 cos  
25. ( x + cos x ) ( x − tan x ) 26.
3 x + 7cos x
27. 4
sin x

x x
28.
1 + tan x
29. ( x + sec x ) ( x − tan x ) 30.
sin n x

Summary
 The expected value of the function as dictated by the points to the left of a
point defines the left hand limit of the function at that point. Similarly the right
hand limit.
 Limit of a function at a point is the common value of the left and right hand
limits, if they coincide.

 For a function f and a real number a, lim f(x) and f (a) may not be same (In
x →a

fact, one may be defined and not the other one).

 For functions f and g the following holds:
lim [ f ( x ) ± g ( x) ] = lim f ( x ) ± lim g ( x)
x →a x →a x →a

lim [ f ( x). g ( x) ]= lim f ( x ).lim g ( x )

x →a x→ a x→a

 f ( x)  lim
x →a
f ( x)
lim   =
x → a g ( x)
  lim
x→ a
g ( x)

 Following are some of the standard limits

xn − an
lim = na n−1
x →a x − a

2018-19
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 319

sin x
lim =1
x →0 x
1 − cos x
lim =0
x →0 x
 The derivative of a function f at a is defined by
f ( a + h) − f ( a)
f ′( a) = lim
h →0 h
 Derivative of a function f at any point x is defined by
df ( x) f ( x + h) − f ( x )
f ′( x) = = lim
dx h → 0 h
 For functions u and v the following holds:
(u ± v )′ = u ′ ± v′
(uv)′ = u ′v + uv′

 u ′ u ′v − uv′
  = provided all are defined.
v v2
 Following are some of the standard derivatives.
d n
( x ) = nx n −1
dx
d
(sin x) = cos x
dx
d
(cos x) = − sin x
dx

Historical Note
In the history of mathematics two names are prominent to share the credit for
inventing calculus, Issac Newton (1642 – 1727) and G.W. Leibnitz (1646 – 1717).
Both of them independently invented calculus around the seventeenth century.
After the advent of calculus many mathematicians contributed for further
development of calculus. The rigorous concept is mainly attributed to the great

2018-19
320 MATHEMATICS

mathematicians, A.L. Cauchy, J.L.Lagrange and Karl Weierstrass. Cauchy gave

the foundation of calculus as we have now generally accepted in our textbooks.
Cauchy used D’ Alembert’s limit concept to define the derivative of a function.
Starting with definition of a limit, Cauchy gave examples such as the limit of

sin α ∆ y f ( x + i ) − f ( x)
for α = 0. He wrote ∆ x = , and called the limit for
α i
i → 0, the “function derive’e, y′ for f ′ (x)”.
Before 1900, it was thought that calculus is quite difficult to teach. So calculus
became beyond the reach of youngsters. But just in 1900, John Perry and others
in England started propagating the view that essential ideas and methods of calculus
were simple and could be taught even in schools. F.L. Griffin, pioneered the
teaching of calculus to first year students. This was regarded as one of the most
daring act in those days.
Today not only the mathematics but many other subjects such as Physics,
Chemistry, Economics and Biological Sciences are enjoying the fruits of calculus.

— —

2018-19
 Chapter 14

MATHEMATICAL REASONING

There are few things which we know which are not capable of
mathematical reasoning and when these can not, it is a sign that our
knowledge of them is very small and confused and where a mathematical
reasoning can be had, it is as great a folly to make use of another,
as to grope for a thing in the dark when you have a candle stick
standing by you. – ARTHENBOT 

14.1 Introduction
In this Chapter, we shall discuss about some basic ideas of
Mathematical Reasoning. All of us know that human beings
evolved from the lower species over many millennia. The
main asset that made humans “superior” to other species
was the ability to reason. How well this ability can be used
depends on each person’s power of reasoning. How to
develop this power? Here, we shall discuss the process of
reasoning especially in the context of mathematics.
In mathematical language, there are two kinds of
reasoning – inductive and deductive. We have already
discussed the inductive reasoning in the context of George Boole
mathematical induction. In this Chapter, we shall discuss (1815 - 1864)
some fundamentals of deductive reasoning.
14.2 Statements
The basic unit involved in mathematical reasoning is a mathematical statement.
Let us start with two sentences:
In 2003, the president of India was a woman.
An elephant weighs more than a human being.

2018-19
322 MATHEMATICS

When we read these sentences, we immediately decide that the first sentence is
false and the second is correct. There is no confusion regarding these. In mathematics
such sentences are called statements.
On the other hand, consider the sentence:
Women are more intelligent than men.
Some people may think it is true while others may disagree. Regarding this sentence
we cannot say whether it is always true or false . That means this sentence is ambiguous.
Such a sentence is not acceptable as a statement in mathematics.
A sentence is called a mathematically acceptable statement if it is either
true or false but not both. Whenever we mention a statement here, it is a
“mathematically acceptable” statement.
While studying mathematics, we come across many such sentences. Some examples
are:
Two plus two equals four.
The sum of two positive numbers is positive.
All prime numbers are odd numbers.
Of these sentences, the first two are true and the third one is false. There is no
ambiguity regarding these sentences. Therefore, they are statements.
Can you think of an example of a sentence which is vague or ambiguous? Consider
the sentence:
The sum of x and y is greater than 0
Here, we are not in a position to determine whether it is true or false, unless we
know what x and y are. For example, it is false where x = 1, y = –3 and true when
x = 1 and y = 0. Therefore, this sentence is not a statement. But the sentence:
For any natural numbers x and y, the sum of x and y is greater than 0
is a statement.
Now, consider the following sentences :
How beautiful!
Open the door.
Where are you going?
Are they statements? No, because the first one is an exclamation, the second
an order and the third a question. None of these is considered as a statement in
mathematical language. Sentences involving variable time such as “today”, “tomorrow”
or “yesterday” are not statements. This is because it is not known what time is referred
here. For example, the sentence
Tomorrow is Friday

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 323

is not a statement. The sentence is correct (true) on a Thursday but not on other
days. The same argument holds for sentences with pronouns unless a particular
person is referred to and for variable places such as “here”, “there” etc., For
example, the sentences
She is a mathematics graduate.
Kashmir is far from here.
are not statements.
Here is another sentence
There are 40 days in a month.
Would you call this a statement? Note that the period mentioned in the sentence
above is a “variable time” that is any of 12 months. But we know that the sentence is
always false (irrespective of the month) since the maximum number of days in a month
can never exceed 31. Therefore, this sentence is a statement. So, what makes a sentence
a statement is the fact that the sentence is either true or false but not both.
While dealing with statements, we usually denote them by small letters p, q, r,...
For example, we denote the statement “Fire is always hot” by p. This is also written
as
p: Fire is always hot.
Example 1 Check whether the following sentences are statements. Give reasons for
your answer.
(i) 8 is less than 6. (ii) Every set is a finite set.
(iii) The sun is a star. (iv) Mathematics is fun.
(v) There is no rain without clouds. (vi) How far is Chennai from here?
Solution (i) This sentence is false because 8 is greater than 6. Hence it is a statement.
(ii) This sentence is also false since there are sets which are not finite. Hence it is
a statement.
(iii) It is a scientifically established fact that sun is a star and, therefore, this sentence
is always true. Hence it is a statement.

(iv) This sentence is subjective in the sense that for those who like mathematics, it
may be fun but for others it may not be. This means that this sentence is not always
true. Hence it is not a statement.

2018-19
324 MATHEMATICS

(v) It is a scientifically established natural phenomenon that cloud is formed before it

rains. Therefore, this sentence is always true. Hence it is a statement.
(vi) This is a question which also contains the word “Here”. Hence it is not a statement.
The above examples show that whenever we say that a sentence is a statement
we should always say why it is so. This “why” of it is more important than the answer.

EXERCISE 14.1
1. Which of the following sentences are statements? Give reasons for your answer.
(i) There are 35 days in a month.
(ii) Mathematics is difficult.
(iii) The sum of 5 and 7 is greater than 10.
(iv) The square of a number is an even number.
(v) The sides of a quadrilateral have equal length.
(vi) Answer this question.
(vii) The product of (–1) and 8 is 8.
(viii) The sum of all interior angles of a triangle is 180°.
(ix) Today is a windy day.
(x) All real numbers are complex numbers.
2. Give three examples of sentences which are not statements. Give reasons for the
answers.
14.3 New Statements from Old
We now look into method for producing new statements from those that we already
have. An English mathematician, “George Boole” discussed these methods in his book
“The laws of Thought” in 1854. Here, we shall discuss two techniques.
As a first step in our study of statements, we look at an important technique that
we may use in order to deepen our understanding of mathematical statements. This
technique is to ask not only what it means to say that a given statement is true but also
what it would mean to say that the given statement is not true.
14.3.1 Negation of a statement The denial of a statement is called the negation of
the statement.
Let us consider the statement:
p: New Delhi is a city
The negation of this statement is

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 325

It is not the case that New Delhi is a city

This can also be written as
It is false that New Delhi is a city.
This can simply be expressed as
New Delhi is not a city.
Definition 1 If p is a statement, then the negation of p is also a statement and is
denoted by ∼ p, and read as ‘not p’.

Note While forming the negation of a statement, phrases like, “It is not the
case” or “It is false that” are also used.
Here is an example to illustrate how, by looking at the negation of a statement, we
may improve our understanding of it.
Let us consider the statement
p: Everyone in Germany speaks German.
The denial of this sentence tells us that not everyone in Germany speaks German.
This does not mean that no person in Germany speaks German. It says merely that at
least one person in Germany does not speak German.
We shall consider more examples.
Example 2 Write the negation of the following statements.
(i) Both the diagonals of a rectangle have the same length.

(ii) 7 is rational.

Solution (i) This statement says that in a rectangle, both the diagonals have the same
length. This means that if you take any rectangle, then both the diagonals have the
same length. The negation of this statement is
It is false that both the diagonals in a rectangle have the same length
This means the statement
There is atleast one rectangle whose both diagonals do not
have the same length.
(ii) The negation of the statement in (ii) may also be written as
It is not the case that 7 is rational.
This can also be rewritten as

7 is not rational.

2018-19
326 MATHEMATICS

Example 3 Write the negation of the following statements and check whether the
resulting statements are true,
(i) Australia is a continent.
(ii) There does not exist a quadrilateral which has all its sides equal.
(iii) Every natural number is greater than 0.
(iv) The sum of 3 and 4 is 9.

Solution (i) The negation of the statement is

It is false that Australia is a continent.
This can also be rewritten as
Australia is not a continent.
We know that this statement is false.
(ii) The negation of the statement is
It is not the case that there does not exist a quadrilateral which has all its sides
equal.
This also means the following:
There exists a quadrilateral which has all its sides equal.
This statement is true because we know that square is a quadrilateral such that its four
sides are equal.
(iii) The negation of the statement is
It is false that every natural number is greater than 0.
This can be rewritten as
There exists a natural number which is not greater than 0.
This is a false statement.
(iv) The negation is
It is false that the sum of 3 and 4 is 9.
This can be written as
The sum of 3 and 4 is not equal to 9.
This statement is true.
14.3.2 Compound statements Many mathematical statements are obtained by
combining one or more statements using some connecting words like “and”, “or”, etc.
Consider the following statement
p: There is something wrong with the bulb or with the wiring.
This statement tells us that there is something wrong with the bulb or there is

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 327

something wrong with the wiring. That means the given statement is actually made up
of two smaller statements:
q: There is something wrong with the bulb.
r: There is something wrong with the wiring.
connected by “or”
Now, suppose two statements are given as below:
p: 7 is an odd number.
q: 7 is a prime number.
These two statements can be combined with “and”
r: 7 is both odd and prime number.
This is a compound statement.
This leads us to the following definition:
Definition 2 A Compound Statement is a statement which is made up of two or
more statements. In this case, each statement is called a component statement.
Let us consider some examples.
Example 4 Find the component statements of the following compound statements.
(i) The sky is blue and the grass is green.
(ii) It is raining and it is cold.
(iii) All rational numbers are real and all real numbers are complex.
(iv) 0 is a positive number or a negative number.
Solution Let us consider one by one
(i) The component statements are
p: The sky is blue.
q: The grass is green.
The connecting word is ‘and’.
(ii) The component statements are
p: It is raining.
q: It is cold.
The connecting word is ‘and’.
(iii) The component statements are
p: All rational numbers are real.
q: All real numbers are complex.
The connecting word is ‘and’.
(iv)The component statements are

2018-19
328 MATHEMATICS

p: 0 is a positive number.
q: 0 is a negative number.
The connecting word is ‘or’.
Example 5 Find the component statements of the following and check whether they
are true or not.
(i) A square is a quadrilateral and its four sides equal.
(ii) All prime numbers are either even or odd.
(iii) A person who has taken Mathematics or Computer Science can go for
MCA.
(iv) Chandigarh is the capital of Haryana and UP.
(v) 2 is a rational number or an irrational number.
(vi) 24 is a multiple of 2, 4 and 8.

Solution (i) The component statements are

p: A square is a quadrilateral.
q: A square has all its sides equal.
We know that both these statements are true. Here the connecting word is ‘and’.
(ii) The component statements are
p: All prime numbers are odd numbers.
q: All prime numbers are even numbers.
Both these statements are false and the connecting word is ‘or’.
(iii) The component statements are
p: A person who has taken Mathematics can go for MCA.
q: A person who has taken computer science can go for MCA.
Both these statements are true. Here the connecting word is ‘or’.
(iv) The component statements are
p: Chandigarh is the capital of Haryana.
q: Chandigarh is the capital of UP.
The first statement is true but the second is false. Here the connecting word is ‘and’.
(v) The component statements are

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 329

p: 2 is a rational number.

q: 2 is an irrational number.
The first statement is false and second is true. Here the connecting word is ‘or’.
(vi) The component statements are
p: 24 is a multiple of 2.
q: 24 is a multiple of 4.
r: 24 is a multiple of 8.
All the three statements are true. Here the connecting words are ‘and’.
Thus, we observe that compound statements are actually made-up of two or more
statements connected by the words like “and”, “or”, etc. These words have special
meaning in mathematics. We shall discuss this mattter in the following section.

EXERCISE 14.2
1. Write the negation of the following statements:
(i) Chennai is the capital of Tamil Nadu.
(ii) 2 is not a complex number
(iii) All triangles are not equilateral triangle.
(iv) The number 2 is greater than 7.
(v) Every natural number is an integer.
2. Are the following pairs of statements negations of each other:
(i) The number x is not a rational number.
The number x is not an irrational number.
(ii)The number x is a rational number.
The number x is an irrational number.
3. Find the component statements of the following compound statements and check
whether they are true or false.
(i) Number 3 is prime or it is odd.
(ii) All integers are positive or negative.
(iii) 100 is divisible by 3, 11 and 5.
14.4 Special Words/Phrases
Some of the connecting words which are found in compound statements like “And”,

2018-19
330 MATHEMATICS

“Or”, etc. are often used in Mathematical Statements. These are called connectives.
When we use these compound statements, it is necessary to understand the role of
these words. We discuss this below.
14.4.1 The word “And” Let us look at a compound statement with “And”.
p: A point occupies a position and its location can be determined.
The statement can be broken into two component statements as
q: A point occupies a position.
r: Its location can be determined.
Here, we observe that both statements are true.
Let us look at another statement.
p: 42 is divisible by 5, 6 and 7.
This statement has following component statements
q: 42 is divisible by 5.
r: 42 is divisible by 6.
s: 42 is divisible by 7.
Here, we know that the first is false while the other two are true.
We have the following rules regarding the connective “And”

1. The compound statement with ‘And’ is true if all its component

statements are true.
2. The component statement with ‘And’ is false if any of its component
statements is false (this includes the case that some of its component
statements are false or all of its component statements are false).

Example 6 Write the component statements of the following compound statements

and check whether the compound statement is true or false.
(i) A line is straight and extends indefinitely in both directions.
(ii) 0 is less than every positive integer and every negative integer.
(iii) All living things have two legs and two eyes.

Solution (i) The component statements are

p: A line is straight.
q: A line extends indefinitely in both directions.

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 331

Both these statements are true, therefore, the compound statement is true.
(ii) The component statements are
p: 0 is less than every positive integer.
q: 0 is less than every negative integer.
The second statement is false. Therefore, the compound statement is false.
(iii) The two component statements are
p: All living things have two legs.
q: All living things have two eyes.
Both these statements are false. Therefore, the compound statement is false.
Now, consider the following statement.
p: A mixture of alcohol and water can be separated by chemical methods.
This sentence cannot be considered as a compound statement with “And”. Here the
word “And” refers to two things – alcohol and water.
This leads us to an important note.

Note Do not think that a statement with “And” is always a compound statement
as shown in the above example. Therefore, the word “And” is not used as a connective.
14.4.2 The word “Or” Let us look at the following statement.
p: Two lines in a plane either intersect at one point or they are parallel.
We know that this is a true statement. What does this mean? This means that if two
lines in a plane intersect, then they are not parallel. Alternatively, if the two lines are not
parallel, then they intersect at a point. That is this statement is true in both the situations.
In order to understand statements with “Or” we first notice that the word “Or” is
used in two ways in English language. Let us first look at the following statement.
p: An ice cream or pepsi is available with a Thali in a restaurant.
This means that a person who does not want ice cream can have a pepsi along
with Thali or one does not want pepsi can have an ice cream along with Thali. That is,
who do not want a pepsi can have an ice cream. A person cannot have both ice cream
and pepsi. This is called an exclusive “Or”.
Here is another statement.
A student who has taken biology or chemistry can apply for M.Sc.
microbiology programme.
Here we mean that the students who have taken both biology and chemistry can
apply for the microbiology programme, as well as the students who have taken only
one of these subjects. In this case, we are using inclusive “Or”.
It is important to note the difference between these two ways because we require this
when we check whether the statement is true or not.

2018-19
332 MATHEMATICS

Let us look at an example.

Example 7 For each of the following statements, determine whether an inclusive
“Or” or exclusive “Or” is used. Give reasons for your answer.
(i) To enter a country, you need a passport or a voter registration card.
(ii) The school is closed if it is a holiday or a Sunday.
(iii) Two lines intersect at a point or are parallel.
(iv) Students can take French or Sanskrit as their third language.
Solution (i) Here “Or” is inclusive since a person can have both a passport and a
voter registration card to enter a country.
(ii) Here also “Or” is inclusive since school is closed on holiday as well as on
Sunday.
(iii) Here “Or” is exclusive because it is not possible for two lines to intersect
and parallel together.
(iv) Here also “Or” is exclusive because a student cannot take both French and
Sanskrit.
Rule for the compound statement with ‘Or’
1. A compound statement with an ‘Or’ is true when one component
statement is true or both the component statements are true.
2. A compound statement with an ‘Or’ is false when both the component
statements are false.
For example, consider the following statement.
p: Two lines intersect at a point or they are parallel
The component statements are
q: Two lines intersect at a point.
r: Two lines are parallel.
Then, when q is true r is false and when r is true q is false. Therefore, the
compound statement p is true.
Consider another statement.
p: 125 is a multiple of 7 or 8.
Its component statements are
q: 125 is a multiple of 7.
r: 125 is a multiple of 8.
Both q and r are false. Therefore, the compound statement p is false.

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 333

Again, consider the following statement:

p: The school is closed, if there is a holiday or Sunday.
The component statements are
q: School is closed if there is a holiday.
r: School is closed if there is a Sunday.
Both q and r are true, therefore, the compound statement is true.
Consider another statement.
p: Mumbai is the capital of Kolkata or Karnataka.
The component statements are
q: Mumbai is the capital of Kolkata.
r: Mumbai is the capital of Karnataka.
Both these statements are false. Therefore, the compound statement is false.
Let us consider some examples.
Example 8 Identify the type of “Or” used in the following statements and check
whether the statements are true or false:
(i) 2 is a rational number or an irrational number.
(ii) To enter into a public library children need an identity card from the school
or a letter from the school authorities.
(iii) A rectangle is a quadrilateral or a 5-sided polygon.
Solution (i) The component statements are
p: 2 is a rational number.
q: 2 is an irrational number.
Here, we know that the first statement is false and the second is true and “Or” is
exclusive. Therefore, the compound statement is true.
(ii) The component statements are
p: To get into a public library children need an identity card.
q: To get into a public library children need a letter from the school authorities.
Children can enter the library if they have either of the two, an identity card or the
letter, as well as when they have both. Therefore, it is inclusive “Or” the compound
statement is also true when children have both the card and the letter.
(iii) Here “Or” is exclusive. When we look at the component statements, we get that
the statement is true.

2018-19
334 MATHEMATICS

14.4.3 Quantifiers Quantifiers are phrases like, “There exists” and “For all”.
Another phrase which appears in mathematical statements is “there exists”. For example,
consider the statement. p: There exists a rectangle whose all sides are equal. This
means that there is atleast one rectangle whose all sides are equal.
A word closely connected with “there exists” is “for every” (or for all). Consider
a statement.
p: For every prime number p, p is an irrational number.
This means that if S denotes the set of all prime numbers, then for all the members p of
the set S, p is an irrational number.
In general, a mathematical statement that says “for every” can be interpreted as
saying that all the members of the given set S where the property applies must satisfy
that property.
We should also observe that it is important to know precisely where in the sentence
a given connecting word is introduced. For example, compare the following two
sentences:
1. For every positive number x there exists a positive number y such that
y < x.
2. There exists a positive number y such that for every positive number x, we
have y < x.
Although these statements may look similar, they do not say the same thing. As a
matter of fact, (1) is true and (2) is false. Thus, in order for a piece of mathematical
writing to make sense, all of the symbols must be carefully introduced and each symbol
must be introduced precisely at the right place – not too early and not too late.
The words “And” and “Or” are called connectives and “There exists” and “For
all” are called quantifiers.
Thus, we have seen that many mathematical statements contain some special words
and it is important to know the meaning attached to them, especially when we have to
check the validity of different statements.

EXERCISE 14.3
1. For each of the following compound statements first identify the connecting words
and then break it into component statements.
(i) All rational numbers are real and all real numbers are not complex.
(ii) Square of an integer is positive or negative.
(iii) The sand heats up quickly in the Sun and does not cool down fast at night.
(iv) x = 2 and x = 3 are the roots of the equation 3x2 – x – 10 = 0.

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 335

2. Identify the quantifier in the following statements and write the negation of the
statements.
(i) There exists a number which is equal to its square.
(ii) For every real number x, x is less than x + 1.
(iii) There exists a capital for every state in India.
3. Check whether the following pair of statements are negation of each other. Give
reasons for your answer.
(i) x + y = y + x is true for every real numbers x and y.
(ii) There exists real numbers x and y for which x + y = y + x.
4. State whether the “Or” used in the following statements is “exclusive “or” inclusive.
Give reasons for your answer.
(i) Sun rises or Moon sets.
(ii) To apply for a driving licence, you should have a ration card or a passport.
(iii) All integers are positive or negative.
14.5 Implications
In this Section, we shall discuss the implications of “if-then”, “only if” and “if and only if ”.
The statements with “if-then” are very common in mathematics. For example,
consider the statement.
r: If you are born in some country, then you are a citizen of that country.
When we look at this statement, we observe that it corresponds to two statements p
and q given by
p : you are born in some country.
q : you are citizen of that country.
Then the sentence “if p then q” says that in the event if p is true, then q must be true.
One of the most important facts about the sentence “if p then q” is that it does
not say any thing (or places no demand) on q when p is false. For example, if you are
not born in the country, then you cannot say anything about q. To put it in other words”
not happening of p has no effect on happening of q.
Another point to be noted for the statement “if p then q” is that the statement
does not imply that p happens.
There are several ways of understanding “if p then q” statements. We shall
illustrate these ways in the context of the following statement.
r: If a number is a multiple of 9, then it is a multiple of 3.
Let p and q denote the statements
p : a number is a multiple of 9.
q: a number is a multiple of 3.

2018-19
336 MATHEMATICS

Then, if p then q is the same as the following:

1. p implies q is denoted by p ⇒ q. The symbol ⇒ stands for implies.
This says that a number is a multiple of 9 implies that it is a multiple of 3.
2. p is a sufficient condition for q.
This says that knowing that a number as a multiple of 9 is sufficient to conclude
that it is a multiple of 3.
3. p only if q.
This says that a number is a multiple of 9 only if it is a multiple of 3.
4. q is a necessary condition for p.
This says that when a number is a multiple of 9, it is necessarily a multiple of 3.
5. ∼q implies ∼p.
This says that if a number is not a multiple of 3, then it is not a multiple of 9.
14.5.1 Contrapositive and converse Contrapositive and converse are certain
other statements which can be formed from a given statement with “if-then”.
For example, let us consider the following “if-then” statement.
If the physical environment changes, then the biological environment changes.
Then the contrapositive of this statement is
If the biological environment does not change, then the physical environment
does not change.
Note that both these statements convey the same meaning.
To understand this, let us consider more examples.
Example 9 Write the contrapositive of the following statement:
(i) If a number is divisible by 9, then it is divisible by 3.
(ii) If you are born in India, then you are a citizen of India.
(iii) If a triangle is equilateral, it is isosceles.
Solution The contrapositive of the these statements are
(i) If a number is not divisible by 3, it is not divisible by 9.
(ii) If you are not a citizen of India, then you were not born in India.
(iii) If a triangle is not isosceles, then it is not equilateral.
The above examples show the contrapositive of the statement if p, then q is “if ∼q,
then ∼p”.
Next, we shall consider another term called converse.
The converse of a given statement “if p, then q” is if q, then p.

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 337

For example, the converse of the statement

p: If a number is divisible by 10, it is divisible by 5 is
q: If a number is divisible by 5, then it is divisible by 10.

Example 10 Write the converse of the following statements.

(i) If a number n is even, then n2 is even.
(ii) If you do all the exercises in the book, you get an A grade in the class.
(iii) If two integers a and b are such that a > b, then a – b is always a positive
integer.
Solution The converse of these statements are
(i) If a number n2 is even, then n is even.
(ii) If you get an A grade in the class, then you have done all the exercises of
the book.
(iii) If two integers a and b are such that a – b is always a positive integer, then
a > b.
Let us consider some more examples.
Example 11 For each of the following compound statements, first identify the
corresponding component statements. Then check whether the statements are
true or not.
(i) If a triangle ABC is equilateral, then it is isosceles.
(ii) If a and b are integers, then ab is a rational number.
Solution (i) The component statements are given by
p : Triangle ABC is equilateral.
q : Triangle ABC is Isosceles.
Since an equilateral triangle is isosceles, we infer that the given compound statement
is true.
(ii) The component statements are given by
p : a and b are integers.
q : ab is a rational number.
since the product of two integers is an integer and therefore a rational number, the
compound statement is true.
‘If and only if’, represented by the symbol ‘⇔‘ means the following equivalent forms
for the given statements p and q.
(i) p if and only if q
(ii) q if and only if p

2018-19
338 MATHEMATICS

(iii) p is necessary and sufficient condition for q and vice-versa

(iv) p ⇔ q
Consider an example.
Example 12 Given below are two pairs of statements. Combine these two statements
using “if and only if ”.
(i) p: If a rectangle is a square, then all its four sides are equal.
q: If all the four sides of a rectangle are equal, then the rectangle is a
square.
(ii) p: If the sum of digits of a number is divisible by 3, then the number is
divisible by 3.
q: If a number is divisible by 3, then the sum of its digits is divisible by 3.
Solution (i) A rectangle is a square if and only if all its four sides are equal.
(ii) A number is divisible by 3 if and only if the sum of its digits is divisible by 3.

EXERCISE 14.4
1. Rewrite the following statement with “if-then” in five different ways conveying
the same meaning.
If a natural number is odd, then its square is also odd.
2. Write the contrapositive and converse of the following statements.
(i) If x is a prime number, then x is odd.
(ii) If the two lines are parallel, then they do not intersect in the same plane.
(iii) Something is cold implies that it has low temperature.
(iv) You cannot comprehend geometry if you do not know how to reason
deductively.
(v) x is an even number implies that x is divisible by 4.
3. Write each of the following statements in the form “if-then”
(i) You get a job implies that your credentials are good.
(ii) The Bannana trees will bloom if it stays warm for a month.
(iii) A quadrilateral is a parallelogram if its diagonals bisect each other.
(iv) To get an A+ in the class, it is necessary that you do all the exercises of
the book.

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 339

4. Given statements in (a) and (b). Identify the statements given below as
contrapositive or converse of each other.
(a) If you live in Delhi, then you have winter clothes.
(i) If you do not have winter clothes, then you do not live in Delhi.
(ii) If you have winter clothes, then you live in Delhi.
(b) If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its diagonals bisect each other.
(i) If the diagonals of a quadrilateral do not bisect each other, then the
quadrilateral is not a parallelogram.
(ii) If the diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other, then it is a parallelogram.

14.6 Validating Statements

In this Section, we will discuss when a statement is true. To answer this question, one
must answer all the following questions.
What does the statement mean? What would it mean to say that this statement is
true and when this statement is not true?
The answer to these questions depend upon which of the special words and
phrases “and”, “or”, and which of the implications “if and only”, “if-then”, and which
of the quantifiers “for every”, “there exists”, appear in the given statement.
Here, we shall discuss some techniques to find when a statement is valid.
We shall list some general rules for checking whether a statement is true or not.
Rule 1 If p and q are mathematical statements, then in order to show that the
statement “p and q” is true, the following steps are followed.
Step-1 Show that the statement p is true.
Step-2 Show that the statement q is true.
Rule 2 Statements with “Or”
If p and q are mathematical statements , then in order to show that the statement
“p or q” is true, one must consider the following.
Case 1 By assuming that p is false, show that q must be true.
Case 2 By assuming that q is false, show that p must be true.
Rule 3 Statements with “If-then”

2018-19
340 MATHEMATICS

In order to prove the statement “if p then q” we need to show that any one of the
following case is true.
Case 1 By assuming that p is true, prove that q must be true.(Direct method)
Case 2 By assuming that q is false, prove that p must be false.(Contrapositive
method)
Rule 4 Statements with “if and only if ”
In order to prove the statement “p if and only if q”, we need to show.
(i) If p is true, then q is true and (ii) If q is true, then p is true
Now we consider some examples.
Example 13 Check whether the following statement is true or not.
If x, y ∈ Z are such that x and y are odd, then xy is odd.
Solution Let p : x, y ∈ Z such that x and y are odd
q : xy is odd
To check the validity of the given statement, we apply Case 1 of Rule 3. That is
assume that if p is true, then q is true.
p is true means that x and y are odd integers. Then
x = 2m + 1, for some integer m. y = 2n + 1, for some integer n. Thus
xy = (2m + 1) (2n + 1)
= 2(2mn + m + n) + 1
This shows that xy is odd. Therefore, the given statement is true.
Suppose we want to check this by using Case 2 of Rule 3, then we will proceed
as follows.
We assume that q is not true. This implies that we need to consider the negation
of the statement q. This gives the statement
∼q : Product xy is even.
This is possible only if either x or y is even. This shows that p is not true. Thus we
have shown that
∼q ⇒ ∼p

Note The above example illustrates that to prove p ⇒ q, it is enough to show

∼q ⇒ ∼p which is the contrapositive of the statement p ⇒ q.
Example 14 Check whether the following statement is true or false by proving its
contrapositive. If x, y ∈ Ζ such that xy is odd, then both x and y are odd.
Solution Let us name the statements as below

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 341

p : xy is odd.
q : both x and y are odd.
We have to check whether the statement p ⇒ q is true or not, that is, by checking
its contrapositive statement i.e., ∼q ⇒ ∼p
Now ∼q : It is false that both x and y are odd. This implies that x (or y) is even.
Then x = 2n for some integer n.
Therefore, xy = 2ny for some integer n. This shows that xy is even. That is ∼p is true.
Thus, we have shown that ∼q ⇒ ∼p and hence the given statement is true.
Now what happens when we combine an implication and its converse? Next, we
shall discuss this.
Let us consider the following statements.
p : A tumbler is half empty.
q : A tumbler is half full.
We know that if the first statement happens, then the second happens and also if
the second happens, then the first happens. We can express this fact as
If a tumbler is half empty, then it is half full.
If a tumbler is half full, then it is half empty.
We combine these two statements and get the following:
A tumbler is half empty if and only if it is half full.
Now, we discuss another method.
14.6.1 By Contradiction Here to check whether a statement p is true, we assume
that p is not true i.e. ∼p is true. Then, we arrive at some result which contradicts our
assumption. Therefore, we conclude that p is true.
Example 15 Verify by the method of contradiction.
p: 7 is irrational
Solution In this method, we assume that the given statement is false. That is
we assume that 7 is rational. This means that there exists positive integers a and b
a
such that 7 = , where a and b have no common factors. Squaring the equation,
b

2018-19
342 MATHEMATICS

a2
we get 7 = ⇒ a2 = 7b2 ⇒ 7 divides a. Therefore, there exists an integer c such
b2
that a = 7c. Then a2 = 49c2 and a2 = 7b2
Hence, 7b2 = 49c2 ⇒ b2 = 7c2 ⇒ 7 divides b. But we have already shown that
7 divides a. This implies that 7 is a common factor of both of a and b which contradicts
our earlier assumption that a and b have no common factors. This shows that the
assumption 7 is rational is wrong. Hence, the statement 7 is irrational is true.
Next, we shall discuss a method by which we may show that a statement is false.
The method involves giving an example of a situation where the statement is not
valid. Such an example is called a counter example. The name itself suggests that
this is an example to counter the given statement.
Example 16 By giving a counter example, show that the following statement is false.
If n is an odd integer, then n is prime.
Solution The given statement is in the form “if p then q” we have to show that this is
false. For this purpose we need to show that if p then ∼q. To show this we look for an
odd integer n which is not a prime number. 9 is one such number. So n = 9 is a counter
example. Thus, we conclude that the given statement is false.
In the above, we have discussed some techniques for checking whether a statement
is true or not.

Note In mathematics, counter examples are used to disprove the statement.

However, generating examples in favour of a statement do not provide validity of
the statement.

EXERCISE 14.5
1. Show that the statement
p: “If x is a real number such that x3 + 4x = 0, then x is 0” is true by
(i) direct method, (ii) method of contradiction, (iii) method of contrapositive
2. Show that the statement “For any real numbers a and b, a2 = b2 implies that
a = b” is not true by giving a counter-example.
3. Show that the following statement is true by the method of contrapositive.
p: If x is an integer and x2 is even, then x is also even.
4. By giving a counter example, show that the following statements are not true.
(i) p: If all the angles of a triangle are equal, then the triangle is an obtuse
angled triangle.
(ii) q: The equation x2 – 1 = 0 does not have a root lying between 0 and 2.

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 343

5. Which of the following statements are true and which are false? In each case
give a valid reason for saying so.
(i) p: Each radius of a circle is a chord of the circle.
(ii) q: The centre of a circle bisects each chord of the circle.
(iii) r: Circle is a particular case of an ellipse.
(iv) s: If x and y are integers such that x > y, then –x < – y.
(v) t : 11 is a rational number.

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 17 Check whether “Or” used in the following compound statement is exclusive
or inclusive? Write the component statements of the compound statements and use
them to check whether the compound statement is true or not. Justify your answer.
t: you are wet when it rains or you are in a river.
Solution “Or” used in the given statement is inclusive because it is possible that it rains
and you are in the river.
The component statements of the given statement are
p : you are wet when it rains.
q : You are wet when you are in a river.
Here both the component statements are true and therefore, the compound statement
is true.
Example 18 Write the negation of the following statements:
(i) p: For every real number x, x2 > x.
(ii) q: There exists a rational number x such that x2 = 2.
(iii) r: All birds have wings.
(iv) s: All students study mathematics at the elementary level.
Solution (i) The negation of p is “It is false that p is” which means that the condition
x2 > x does not hold for all real numbers. This can be expressed as
∼p: There exists a real number x such that x2 < x.
(ii) Negation of q is “it is false that q”, Thus ∼q is the statement.
∼q: There does not exist a rational number x such that x2 = 2.
This statement can be rewritten as
∼q: For all real numbers x, x2 ≠ 2
(iii) The negation of the statement is
∼r: There exists a bird which have no wings.

2018-19
344 MATHEMATICS

(iv) The negation of the given statement is ∼s: There exists a student who does not
study mathematics at the elementary level.
Example 19 Using the words “necessary and sufficient” rewrite the statement “The
integer n is odd if and only if n2 is odd”. Also check whether the statement is true.
Solution The necessary and sufficient condition that the integer n be odd is n2 must be
odd. Let p and q denote the statements
p : the integer n is odd.
q : n2 is odd.
To check the validity of “p if and only if q”, we have to check whether “if p then q”
and “if q then p” is true.
Case 1 If p, then q
If p, then q is the statement:
If the integer n is odd, then n2 is odd. We have to check whether this statement is
true. Let us assume that n is odd. Then n = 2k + 1 when k is an integer. Thus
n2 = (2k + 1)2
= 4k2 + 4k + 1
Therefore, n2 is one more than an even number and hence is odd.
Case 2 If q, then p
If q, then p is the statement
If n is an integer and n2 is odd, then n is odd.
We have to check whether this statement is true. We check this by contrapositive
method. The contrapositive of the given statement is:
If n is an even integer, then n2 is an even integer
n is even implies that n = 2k for some k. Then n2 = 4k2. Therefore, n2 is even.
Example 20 For the given statements identify the necessary and sufficient conditions.
t: If you drive over 80 km per hour, then you will get a fine.
Solution Let p and q denote the statements:
p : you drive over 80 km per hour.
q : you will get a fine.
The implication if p, then q indicates that p is sufficient for q. That is driving over
80 km per hour is sufficient to get a fine.
Here the sufficient condition is “driving over 80 km per hour”:
Similarly, if p, then q also indicates that q is necessary for p. That is

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 345

When you drive over 80 km per hour, you will necessarily get a fine.
Here the necessary condition is “getting a fine”.

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 14

1. Write the negation of the following statements:
(i) p: For every positive real number x, the number x – 1 is also positive.
(ii) q: All cats scratch.
(iii) r: For every real number x, either x > 1 or x < 1.
(iv) s: There exists a number x such that 0 < x < 1.
2. State the converse and contrapositive of each of the following statements:
(i) p: A positive integer is prime only if it has no divisors other than 1 and itself.
(ii) q: I go to a beach whenever it is a sunny day.
(iii) r: If it is hot outside, then you feel thirsty.
3. Write each of the statements in the form “if p, then q”
(i) p: It is necessary to have a password to log on to the server.
(ii) q: There is traffic jam whenever it rains.
(iii) r: You can access the website only if you pay a subsciption fee.
4. Rewrite each of the following statements in the form “p if and only if q”
(i) p: If you watch television, then your mind is free and if your mind is free,
then you watch television.
(ii) q: For you to get an A grade, it is necessary and sufficient that you do all
the homework regularly.
(iii) r: If a quadrilateral is equiangular, then it is a rectangle and if a quadrilateral
is a rectangle, then it is equiangular.
5. Given below are two statements
p : 25 is a multiple of 5.
q : 25 is a multiple of 8.
Write the compound statements connecting these two statements with “And” and
“Or”. In both cases check the validity of the compound statement.
6. Check the validity of the statements given below by the method given against it.
(i) p: The sum of an irrational number and a rational number is irrational (by
contradiction method).
(ii) q: If n is a real number with n > 3, then n2 > 9 (by contradiction method).
7. Write the following statement in five different ways, conveying the same meaning.
p: If a triangle is equiangular, then it is an obtuse angled triangle.

2018-19
346 MATHEMATICS

Summary
 A mathematically acceptable statement is a sentence which is either true or
false.
 Explained the terms:
– Negation of a statement p: If p denote a statement, then the negation of p is
denoted by ∼p.
– Compound statements and their related component statements:
A statement is a compound statement if it is made up of two or more smaller
statements. The smaller statements are called component statements of the
compound statement.
– The role of “And”, “Or”, “There exists” and “For every” in compound
statements.
– The meaning of implications “If ”, “only if ”, “ if and only if ”.
A sentence with if p, then q can be written in the following ways.
– p implies q (denoted by p ⇒ q)
– p is a sufficient condition for q
– q is a necessary condition for p
– p only if q
– ∼q implies ∼p
– The contrapositive of a statement p ⇒ q is the statement ∼ q ⇒ ∼p . The
converse of a statement p ⇒ q is the statement q ⇒ p.
p ⇒ q together with its converse, gives p if and only if q.
 The following methods are used to check the validity of statements:
(i) direct method
(ii) contrapositive method
(iii) method of contradiction
(iv) using a counter example.

Historical Note
The first treatise on logic was written by Aristotle (384 B.C.-322 B.C.). It
was a collection of rules for deductive reasoning which would serve as a basis
for the study of every branch of knowledge. Later, in the seventeenth century,
German mathematician G. W. Leibnitz (1646 – 1716) conceived the idea of using
symbols in logic to mechanise the process of deductive reasoning. His idea was
realised in the nineteenth century by the English mathematician George Boole
(1815–1864) and Augustus De Morgan (1806–1871) , who founded the modern
subject of symbolic logic.

2018-19
 Chapter 15

STATISTICS

v“Statistics may be rightly called the science of averages and their

estimates.” – A.L.BOWLEY & A.L. BODDINGTON v

15.1 Introduction
We know that statistics deals with data collected for specific
purposes. We can make decisions about the data by
analysing and interpreting it. In earlier classes, we have
studied methods of representing data graphically and in
tabular form. This representation reveals certain salient
features or characteristics of the data. We have also studied
the methods of finding a representative value for the given
data. This value is called the measure of central tendency.
Recall mean (arithmetic mean), median and mode are three
measures of central tendency. A measure of central
tendency gives us a rough idea where data points are Karl Pearson
(1857-1936)
centred. But, in order to make better interpretation from the
data, we should also have an idea how the data are scattered or how much they are
bunched around a measure of central tendency.
Consider now the runs scored by two batsmen in their last ten matches as follows:
Batsman A : 30, 91, 0, 64, 42, 80, 30, 5, 117, 71
Batsman B : 53, 46, 48, 50, 53, 53, 58, 60, 57, 52
Clearly, the mean and median of the data are
Batsman A Batsman B
Mean 53 53
Median 53 53
Recall that, we calculate the mean of a data (denoted by x ) by dividing the sum
of the observations by the number of observations, i.e.,

2018-19
348 MATHEMATICS

n
1
x=
n
∑ xi
i =1

Also, the median is obtained by first arranging the data in ascending or descending
order and applying the following rule.
th
 n + 1
If the number of observations is odd, then the median is   observation.
 2 
th
n
If the number of observations is even, then median is the mean of   and
2
th
n 
 + 1 observations.
2 
We find that the mean and median of the runs scored by both the batsmen A and
B are same i.e., 53. Can we say that the performance of two players is same? Clearly
No, because the variability in the scores of batsman A is from 0 (minimum) to 117
(maximum). Whereas, the range of the runs scored by batsman B is from 46 to 60.
Let us now plot the above scores as dots on a number line. We find the following
diagrams:
For batsman A

For batsman B Fig 15.1

Fig 15.2
We can see that the dots corresponding to batsman B are close to each other and
are clustering around the measure of central tendency (mean and median), while those
corresponding to batsman A are scattered or more spread out.
Thus, the measures of central tendency are not sufficient to give complete
information about a given data. Variability is another factor which is required to be
studied under statistics. Like ‘measures of central tendency’ we want to have a
single number to describe variability. This single number is called a ‘measure of
dispersion’. In this Chapter, we shall learn some of the important measures of dispersion
and their methods of calculation for ungrouped and grouped data.

2018-19
 STATISTICS 349

15.2 Measures of Dispersion

The dispersion or scatter in a data is measured on the basis of the observations and the
types of the measure of central tendency, used there. There are following measures of
dispersion:
(i) Range, (ii) Quartile deviation, (iii) Mean deviation, (iv) Standard deviation.
In this Chapter, we shall study all of these measures of dispersion except the
quartile deviation.
15.3 Range
Recall that, in the example of runs scored by two batsmen A and B, we had some idea
of variability in the scores on the basis of minimum and maximum runs in each series.
To obtain a single number for this, we find the difference of maximum and minimum
values of each series. This difference is called the ‘Range’ of the data.
In case of batsman A, Range = 117 – 0 = 117 and for batsman B, Range = 60 – 46 = 14.
Clearly, Range of A > Range of B. Therefore, the scores are scattered or dispersed in
case of A while for B these are close to each other.
Thus, Range of a series = Maximum value – Minimum value.
The range of data gives us a rough idea of variability or scatter but does not tell
about the dispersion of the data from a measure of central tendency. For this purpose,
we need some other measure of variability. Clearly, such measure must depend upon
the difference (or deviation) of the values from the central tendency.
The important measures of dispersion, which depend upon the deviations of the
observations from a central tendency are mean deviation and standard deviation. Let
us discuss them in detail.
15.4 Mean Deviation
Recall that the deviation of an observation x from a fixed value ‘a’ is the difference
x – a. In order to find the dispersion of values of x from a central value ‘a’ , we find the
deviations about a. An absolute measure of dispersion is the mean of these deviations.
To find the mean, we must obtain the sum of the deviations. But, we know that a
measure of central tendency lies between the maximum and the minimum values of
the set of observations. Therefore, some of the deviations will be negative and some
positive. Thus, the sum of deviations may vanish. Moreover, the sum of the deviations
from mean ( x ) is zero.
Sum of deviations 0
Also Mean of deviations = = =0
Number of observations n
Thus, finding the mean of deviations about mean is not of any use for us, as far
as the measure of dispersion is concerned.

2018-19
350 MATHEMATICS

Remember that, in finding a suitable measure of dispersion, we require the distance

of each value from a central tendency or a fixed number ‘a’. Recall, that the absolute
value of the difference of two numbers gives the distance between the numbers when
represented on a number line. Thus, to find the measure of dispersion from a fixed
number ‘a’ we may take the mean of the absolute values of the deviations from the
central value. This mean is called the ‘mean deviation’. Thus mean deviation about a
central value ‘a’ is the mean of the absolute values of the deviations of the observations
from ‘a’. The mean deviation from ‘a’ is denoted as M.D. (a). Therefore,
Sum of absolute values of deviations from 'a'
M.D.(a) = .
Number of observations
Remark Mean deviation may be obtained from any measure of central tendency.
However, mean deviation from mean and median are commonly used in statistical
studies.
Let us now learn how to calculate mean deviation about mean and mean deviation
about median for various types of data
15.4.1 Mean deviation for ungrouped data Let n observations be x1, x2, x3, ...., xn.
The following steps are involved in the calculation of mean deviation about mean or
median:
Step 1 Calculate the measure of central tendency about which we are to find the mean
deviation. Let it be ‘a’.
Step 2 Find the deviation of each xi from a, i.e., x1 – a, x2 – a, x3 – a,. . . , xn– a
Step 3 Find the absolute values of the deviations, i.e., drop the minus sign (–), if it is
there, i.e., x1 − a , x2 − a , x3 − a , ...., xn − a

Step 4 Find the mean of the absolute values of the deviations. This mean is the mean
deviation about a, i.e.,
n
∑ xi − a
i =1
M.D.(a) =
n
n
1
Thus M.D. ( x ) =
n
∑ xi − x , where x = Mean
i =1

n
1
and M.D. (M) =
n
∑ xi − M , where M = Median
i =1

2018-19
 STATISTICS 351

A Note In this Chapter, we shall use the symbol M to denote median unless stated
otherwise.Let us now illustrate the steps of the above method in following examples.
Example 1 Find the mean deviation about the mean for the following data:
6, 7, 10, 12, 13, 4, 8, 12
Solution We proceed step-wise and get the following:
Step 1 Mean of the given data is
6 + 7 + 10 + 12 + 13 + 4 + 8 + 12 72
x= = = 9
8 8

Step 2 The deviations of the respective observations from the mean x , i.e., xi– x are
6 – 9, 7 – 9, 10 – 9, 12 – 9, 13 – 9, 4 – 9, 8 – 9, 12 – 9,
or –3, –2, 1, 3, 4, –5, –1, 3
Step 3 The absolute values of the deviations, i.e., xi − x are
3, 2, 1, 3, 4, 5, 1, 3
Step 4 The required mean deviation about the mean is
8
∑ xi − x
M.D. ( x ) =
i =1
8
3 + 2 + 1 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 1 + 3 22
= = = 2.75
8 8

A Note Instead of carrying out the steps every time, we can carry on calculation,
step-wise without referring to steps.
Example 2 Find the mean deviation about the mean for the following data :
12, 3, 18, 17, 4, 9, 17, 19, 20, 15, 8, 17, 2, 3, 16, 11, 3, 1, 0, 5

Solution We have to first find the mean ( x ) of the given data

1 20 200
x = ∑
20 i =1
xi =
20
= 10

The respective absolute values of the deviations from mean, i.e., xi − x are
2, 7, 8, 7, 6, 1, 7, 9, 10, 5, 2, 7, 8, 7, 6, 1, 7, 9, 10, 5

2018-19
352 MATHEMATICS

20
Therefore ∑ xi − x = 124
i =1

124
and M.D. ( x ) = = 6.2
20
Example 3 Find the mean deviation about the median for the following data:
3, 9, 5, 3, 12, 10, 18, 4, 7, 19, 21.
Solution Here the number of observations is 11 which is odd. Arranging the data into
ascending order, we have 3, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 12, 18, 19, 21
th
 11 + 1 
Now Median =   or 6th observation = 9
 2 
The absolute values of the respective deviations from the median, i.e., xi − M are
6, 6, 5, 4, 2, 0, 1, 3, 9, 10, 12
11
Therefore ∑ xi − M = 58
i =1

1 11 1
and M.D. ( M ) = ∑
11 i =1
xi − M = × 58 = 5.27
11

15.4.2 Mean deviation for grouped data We know that data can be grouped into
two ways :
(a) Discrete frequency distribution,
(b) Continuous frequency distribution.
Let us discuss the method of finding mean deviation for both types of the data.
(a) Discrete frequency distribution Let the given data consist of n distinct values
x1, x2, ..., xn occurring with frequencies f1, f2 , ..., fn respectively. This data can be
represented in the tabular form as given below, and is called discrete frequency
distribution:
x : x1 x2 x3 ... xn
f : f1 f2 f3 ... fn
(i) Mean deviation about mean
First of all we find the mean x of the given data by using the formula

2018-19
 STATISTICS 353

n
∑ xi fi 1 n
x= i =1
n
=
N
∑ xi fi ,
∑ fi i =1

i =1

n
where ∑x f
i =1
i i denotes the sum of the products of observations xi with their respective

n
frequencies fi and N = ∑f
i =1
i is the sum of the frequencies.

Then, we find the deviations of observations xi from the mean x and take their
absolute values, i.e., xi − x for all i =1, 2,..., n.
After this, find the mean of the absolute values of the deviations, which is the
required mean deviation about the mean. Thus
n

∑f i xi − x
1 n
M.D. ( x ) = i =1
n = ∑ f i xi − x
N i =1
∑f
i =1
i

(ii) Mean deviation about median To find mean deviation about median, we find the
median of the given discrete frequency distribution. For this the observations are arranged
in ascending order. After this the cumulative frequencies are obtained. Then, we identify
N
the observation whose cumulative frequency is equal to or just greater than , where
2
N is the sum of frequencies. This value of the observation lies in the middle of the data,
therefore, it is the required median. After finding median, we obtain the mean of the
absolute values of the deviations from median.Thus,
n
1
M.D.(M) =
N
∑f i =1
i xi − M

Example 4 Find mean deviation about the mean for the following data :
xi 2 5 6 8 10 12
fi 2 8 10 7 8 5
Solution Let us make a Table 15.1 of the given data and append other columns after
calculations.

2018-19
354 MATHEMATICS

Table 15.1

xi fi fixi xi − x f i xi − x

2 2 4 5.5 11
5 8 40 2.5 20
6 10 60 1.5 15
8 7 56 0.5 3.5
10 8 80 2.5 20
12 5 60 4.5 22.5
40 300 92
6 6 6
N = ∑ f i = 40 , ∑ f i xi = 300 , ∑f i xi − x = 92
i =1 i =1 i =1

6
1 1
Therefore x=
N
∑ fi xi =
40
× 300 = 7.5
i =1

6
1 1
and M. D. ( x ) =
N
∑ fi xi − x =
40
× 92 = 2.3
i =1

Example 5 Find the mean deviation about the median for the following data:

xi 3 6 9 12 13 15 21 22
fi 3 4 5 2 4 5 4 3

Solution The given observations are already in ascending order. Adding a row
corresponding to cumulative frequencies to the given data, we get (Table 15.2).

Table 15.2
xi 3 6 9 12 13 15 21 22
fi 3 4 5 2 4 5 4 3
c.f. 3 7 12 14 18 23 27 30

Now, N=30 which is even.

2018-19
 STATISTICS 355

Median is the mean of the 15th and 16th observations. Both of these observations
lie in the cumulative frequency 18, for which the corresponding observation is 13.
15th observation + 16th observation 13 + 13
Therefore, Median M = = = 13
2 2
Now, absolute values of the deviations from median, i.e., xi − M are shown in
Table 15.3.
Table 15.3

xi − M 10 7 4 1 0 2 8 9

fi 3 4 5 2 4 5 4 3

f i xi − M 30 28 20 2 0 10 32 27

8 8

We have ∑f
i =1
i = 30 and ∑f
i =1
i xi − M = 149

8
1
Therefore M. D. (M) =
N
∑ fi xi − M
i =1

1
= × 149 = 4.97.
30
(b) Continuous frequency distribution A continuous frequency distribution is a series
in which the data are classified into different class-intervals without gaps alongwith
their respective frequencies.
For example, marks obtained by 100 students are presented in a continuous
frequency distribution as follows :

Marks obtained 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60

Number of Students 12 18 27 20 17 6

(i) Mean deviation about mean While calculating the mean of a continuous frequency
distribution, we had made the assumption that the frequency in each class is centred at
its mid-point. Here also, we write the mid-point of each given class and proceed further
as for a discrete frequency distribution to find the mean deviation.
Let us take the following example.

2018-19
356 MATHEMATICS

Example 6 Find the mean deviation about the mean for the following data.

Marks obtained 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80

Number of students 2 3 8 14 8 3 2

Solution We make the following Table 15.4 from the given data :
Table 15.4

Marks Number of Mid-points f ix i xi − x fi xi − x

obtained students
fi xi
10-20 2 15 30 30 60
20-30 3 25 75 20 60
30-40 8 35 280 10 80
40-50 14 45 630 0 0
50-60 8 55 440 10 80
60-70 3 65 195 20 60
70-80 2 75 150 30 60
40 1800 400

7 7 7
Here N = ∑ fi = 40, ∑ fi xi = 1800, ∑ fi xi − x = 400
i =1 i =1 i =1

1 7 1800
Therefore x= ∑
N i =1
fi xi =
40
= 45

1 7 1
and M.D. ( x ) = ∑
N i =1
fi xi − x = × 400 = 10
40

Shortcut method for calculating mean deviation about mean We can avoid the
tedious calculations of computing x by following step-deviation method. Recall that in
this method, we take an assumed mean which is in the middle or just close to it in the
data. Then deviations of the observations (or mid-points of classes) are taken from the

2018-19
 STATISTICS 357

assumed mean. This is nothing but the shifting of origin from zero to the assumed mean
on the number line, as shown in Fig 15.3

Fig 15.3

If there is a common factor of all the deviations, we divide them by this common
factor to further simplify the deviations. These are known as step-deviations. The
process of taking step-deviations is the change of scale on the number line as shown in
Fig 15.4

Fig 15.4

The deviations and step-deviations reduce the size of the observations, so that the
computations viz. multiplication, etc., become simpler. Let, the new variable be denoted
xi − a
by d i = , where ‘a’ is the assumed mean and h is the common factor. Then, the
h
mean x by step-deviation method is given by
n
∑ f i di
x = a + =1
i ×h
N
Let us take the data of Example 6 and find the mean deviation by using step-
deviation method.

2018-19
358 MATHEMATICS

Take the assumed mean a = 45 and h = 10, and form the following Table 15.5.
Table 15.5
xi − 45
Marks Number of Mid-points di = fi d i xi − x f i xi − x
obtained students 10
fi xi
10-20 2 15 –3 –6 30 60
20-30 3 25 –2 –6 20 60
30-40 8 35 –1 –8 10 80
40-50 14 45 0 0 0 0
50-60 8 55 1 8 10 80
60-70 3 65 2 6 20 60
70-80 2 75 3 6 30 60

40 0 400

7
∑ fi d i
Therefore x = a + i=1 ×h
N
0
= 45 + × 10 = 45
40
7
1 400
and M .D. (x ) =
N
∑ fi xi − x =
40
= 10
i =1

A Note The step deviation method is applied to compute x . Rest of the procedure
is same.
(ii) Mean deviation about median The process of finding the mean deviation about
median for a continuous frequency distribution is similar as we did for mean deviation
about the mean. The only difference lies in the replacement of the mean by median
while taking deviations.
Let us recall the process of finding median for a continuous frequency distribution.
The data is first arranged in ascending order. Then, the median of continuous
frequency distribution is obtained by first identifying the class in which median lies
(median class) and then applying the formula

2018-19
 STATISTICS 359

N
−C
Median = l + 2 ×h
f
where median class is the class interval whose cumulative frequency is just greater
N
than or equal to , N is the sum of frequencies, l, f, h and C are, respectively the lower
2
limit , the frequency, the width of the median class and C the cumulative frequency of
the class just preceding the median class. After finding the median, the absolute values
of the deviations of mid-point xi of each class from the median i.e., xi − M are obtained.

1 n
Then M.D. (M) = ∑ fi xi − M
N i =1
The process is illustrated in the following example:
Example 7 Calculate the mean deviation about median for the following data :

Class 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60

Frequency 6 7 15 16 4 2

Solution Form the following Table 15.6 from the given data :

Table 15.6

Class Frequency Cumulative Mid-points xi − Med. f i xi − Med.

frequency
fi (c.f.) xi
0-10 6 6 5 23 138
10-20 7 13 15 13 91
20-30 15 28 25 3 45
30-40 16 44 35 7 112
40-50 4 48 45 17 68
50-60 2 50 55 27 54
50 508

2018-19
360 MATHEMATICS

th
N
The class interval containing or 25th item is 20-30. Therefore, 20–30 is the median
2
class. We know that
N
−C
Median = l + 2 ×h
f
Here l = 20, C = 13, f = 15, h = 10 and N = 50
25 − 13
Therefore, Median = 20 + × 10 = 20 + 8 = 28
15
Thus, Mean deviation about median is given by
1 6 1
M.D. (M) = ∑
N i =1
fi xi − M =
50
× 508 = 10.16

EXERCISE 15.1
Find the mean deviation about the mean for the data in Exercises 1 and 2.
1. 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 17
2. 38, 70, 48, 40, 42, 55, 63, 46, 54, 44
Find the mean deviation about the median for the data in Exercises 3 and 4.
3. 13, 17, 16, 14, 11, 13, 10, 16, 11, 18, 12, 17
4. 36, 72, 46, 42, 60, 45, 53, 46, 51, 49
Find the mean deviation about the mean for the data in Exercises 5 and 6.
5. x i 5 10 15 20 25
fi 7 4 6 3 5
6. x i 10 30 50 70 90
fi 4 24 28 16 8
Find the mean deviation about the median for the data in Exercises 7 and 8.
7. x i 5 7 9 10 12 15
fi 8 6 2 2 2 6
8. x i 15 21 27 30 35
fi 3 5 6 7 8

2018-19
 STATISTICS 361

Find the mean deviation about the mean for the data in Exercises 9 and 10.
9. Income per 0-100 100-200 200-300 300-400 400-500 500-600 600-700 700-800
day in `
Number 4 8 9 10 7 5 4 3
of persons
10. Height 95-105 105-115 115-125 125-135 135-145 145-155
in cms
Number of 9 13 26 30 12 10
boys
11. Find the mean deviation about median for the following data :
Marks 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60
Number of 6 8 14 16 4 2
Girls
12. Calculate the mean deviation about median age for the age distribution of 100
persons given below:
Age 16-20 21-25 26-30 31-35 36-40 41-45 46-50 51-55
(in years)
Number 5 6 12 14 26 12 16 9

[Hint Convert the given data into continuous frequency distribution by subtracting 0.5
from the lower limit and adding 0.5 to the upper limit of each class interval]
15.4.3 Limitations of mean deviation In a series, where the degree of variability is
very high, the median is not a representative central tendency. Thus, the mean deviation
about median calculated for such series can not be fully relied.
The sum of the deviations from the mean (minus signs ignored) is more than the
sum of the deviations from median. Therefore, the mean deviation about the mean is
not very scientific.Thus, in many cases, mean deviation may give unsatisfactory results.
Also mean deviation is calculated on the basis of absolute values of the deviations and
therefore, cannot be subjected to further algebraic treatment. This implies that we
must have some other measure of dispersion. Standard deviation is such a measure of
dispersion.
15.5 Variance and Standard Deviation
Recall that while calculating mean deviation about mean or median, the absolute values
of the deviations were taken. The absolute values were taken to give meaning to the
mean deviation, otherwise the deviations may cancel among themselves.
Another way to overcome this difficulty which arose due to the signs of deviations,
is to take squares of all the deviations. Obviously all these squares of deviations are

2018-19
362 MATHEMATICS

non-negative. Let x1, x2, x3, ..., xn be n observations and x be their mean. Then
n
(x1 − x)2 + (x2 −x)2 + .......+ (xn − x )2 = ( xi − x)2 .
i =1

If this sum is zero, then each ( xi − x ) has to be zero. This implies that there is no
dispersion at all as all observations are equal to the mean x .
n

If ∑ (x − x)
i =1
i
2
is small , this indicates that the observations x1, x2, x3,...,xn are

close to the mean x and therefore, there is a lower degree of dispersion. On the
contrary, if this sum is large, there is a higher degree of dispersion of the observations
n

from the mean x . Can we thus say that the sum ∑ (x − x)

i =1
i
2
is a reasonable indicator

of the degree of dispersion or scatter?

Let us take the set A of six observations 5, 15, 25, 35, 45, 55. The mean of the
observations is x = 30. The sum of squares of deviations from x for this set is
6

∑ (x − x)
i =1
i
2
= (5–30)2 + (15–30)2 + (25–30)2 + (35–30)2 + (45–30)2 +(55–30)2

= 625 + 225 + 25 + 25 + 225 + 625 = 1750

Let us now take another set B of 31 observations 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45. The
mean of these observations is y = 30
Note that both the sets A and B of observations have a mean of 30.
Now, the sum of squares of deviations of observations for set B from the mean y is
given by
31

∑(y
i =1
i − y ) 2 = (15–30)2 +(16–30)2 + (17–30)2 + ...+ (44–30)2 +(45–30)2

= (–15)2 +(–14)2 + ...+ (–1)2 + 02 + 12 + 22 + 32 + ...+ 142 + 152

= 2 [152 + 142 + ... + 12]
15 × (15 + 1) (30 + 1)
= 2× = 5 × 16 × 31 = 2480
6
n (n + 1) (2n + 1)
(Because sum of squares of first n natural numbers = . Here n = 15)
6

2018-19
 STATISTICS 363

If ∑ (x − x)
i =1
i
2
is simply our measure of dispersion or scatter about mean, we

will tend to say that the set A of six observations has a lesser dispersion about the mean
than the set B of 31 observations, even though the observations in set A are more
scattered from the mean (the range of deviations being from –25 to 25) than in the set
B (where the range of deviations is from –15 to 15).
This is also clear from the following diagrams.
For the set A, we have

Fig 15.5
For the set B, we have

Fig 15.6

Thus, we can say that the sum of squares of deviations from the mean is not a proper
measure of dispersion. To overcome this difficulty we take the mean of the squares of
1 n
the deviations, i.e., we take ∑ ( xi − x ) 2 . In case of the set A, we have
n i =1
1 1
Mean = × 1750 = 291.67 and in case of the set B, it is × 2480 = 80.
6 31
This indicates that the scatter or dispersion is more in set A than the scatter or dispersion
in set B, which confirms with the geometrical representation of the two sets.
1
Thus, we can take
n
∑ ( xi − x ) 2 as a quantity which leads to a proper measure

of dispersion. This number, i.e., mean of the squares of the deviations from mean is
called the variance and is denoted by σ 2 (read as sigma square). Therefore, the
variance of n observations x1, x2,..., xn is given by

2018-19
364 MATHEMATICS

1 n
σ2= ∑
n i =1
( xi − x ) 2

15.5.1 Standard Deviation In the calculation of variance, we find that the units of
individual observations xi and the unit of their mean x are different from that of variance,
since variance involves the sum of squares of (xi– x ). For this reason, the proper
measure of dispersion about the mean of a set of observations is expressed as positive
square-root of the variance and is called standard deviation. Therefore, the standard
deviation, usually denoted by σ , is given by

1 n
σ= ∑
n i =1
( xi − x ) 2 ... (1)

Let us take the following example to illustrate the calculation of variance and
hence, standard deviation of ungrouped data.
Example 8 Find the variance of the following data:
6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24
Solution From the given data we can form the following Table 15.7. The mean is
calculated by step-deviation method taking 14 as assumed mean. The number of
observations is n = 10
Table 15.7

xi − 14 Deviations from mean

xi di = (x i– x )
2 (x i– x )
6 –4 –9 81
8 –3 –7 49
10 –2 –5 25
12 –1 –3 9
14 0 –1 1
16 1 1 1
18 2 3 9
20 3 5 25
22 4 7 49
24 5 9 81
5 330

2018-19
 STATISTICS 365

∑d i
5
Therefore Mean x = assumed mean +
i =1
×h = 14 + × 2 = 15
n 10
10
1
and Variance ( σ ) =
n
2
∑ ( xi − x )2 = 101 × 330 = 33
i =1

Thus Standard deviation ( σ ) = 33 = 5.74

15.5.2 Standard deviation of a discrete frequency distribution Let the given discrete
frequency distribution be
x: x1, x2, x3 ,. . . , xn
f: f1, f2, f3 ,. . . , fn

1 n
In this case standard deviation (σ ) = ∑ fi (xi − x )2
N i =1
... (2)

n
where N = ∑ fi .
i =1

Let us take up following example.

Example 9 Find the variance and standard deviation for the following data:
xi 4 8 11 17 20 24 32
fi 3 5 9 5 4 3 1
Solution Presenting the data in tabular form (Table 15.8), we get
Table 15.8
xi fi fi x i xi – x ( xi − x ) 2 f i ( xi − x ) 2
4 3 12 –10 100 300
8 5 40 –6 36 180
11 9 99 –3 9 81
17 5 85 3 9 45
20 4 80 6 36 144
24 3 72 10 100 300
32 1 32 18 324 324
30 420 1374

2018-19
366 MATHEMATICS

7 7
∑ fi xi = 420, ∑ fi ( xi − x )
2
N = 30, = 1374
i =1 i =1

7
∑ fi xi 1
Therefore x= i =1
= × 420 = 14
N 30
7
1
Hence variance (σ ) =
N
2 ∑ fi (xi − x )2
i =1

1
= × 1374 = 45.8
30
and Standard deviation (σ ) = 45 .8 = 6.77

15.5.3 Standard deviation of a continuous frequency distribution The given

continuous frequency distribution can be represented as a discrete frequency distribution
by replacing each class by its mid-point. Then, the standard deviation is calculated by
the technique adopted in the case of a discrete frequency distribution.
If there is a frequency distribution of n classes each class defined by its mid-point
xi with frequency fi, the standard deviation will be obtained by the formula
n
1
σ =
N
∑ fi ( xi − x)2 ,
i =1

n
where x is the mean of the distribution and N = ∑ fi .
i =1

Another formula for standard deviation We know that

n n
1 1
Variance (σ ) =
2
N
∑ fi ( xi − x ) 2 =
N
∑ fi ( xi 2 + x 2 − 2 x xi )
i =1 i =1

1  n n n

= N  ∑ fi xi 2 + ∑ x 2 fi − ∑ 2x fi xi 
 i =1 i =1 i =1 

1  n n n

= N  ∑ fi xi 2 + x 2 ∑ fi − 2 x ∑ xi fi 
 i =1 i =1 i =1 

2018-19
 STATISTICS 367

1 n  1 n n

= fi xi2 + x 2 N − 2 x . N x  Here ∑
N i =1
x f
i i = x or ∑ xi fi = Nx 
N i =1  i =1 
n n
1
∑ fi xi 2 −
1
∑ fi xi 2 + x 2
2
= − 2x
2
= x
N i =1 N i =1

2
 n 
 ∑ fi xi   n 2

 = 1  N ∑ fi xi 2 −  ∑ fi xi  
n n
1
or σ =
2
∑ 2 
fi xi − i =1
 N  N 2  i =1
N i −1
  i =1  
 
 

2
1 n
 n 
Thus, standard deviation (σ ) = ∑fx ∑ f i xi 
2
N − ... (3)
 i =1 
i i
N i =1

Example 10 Calculate the mean, variance and standard deviation for the following
distribution :
Class 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90 90-100
Frequency 3 7 12 15 8 3 2
Solution From the given data, we construct the following Table 15.9.

Table 15.9

Class Frequency Mid-point f ix i (x i– x ) 2 f i (x i – x ) 2

(f i ) (x i)
30-40 3 35 105 729 2187
40-50 7 45 315 289 2023
50-60 12 55 660 49 588
60-70 15 65 975 9 135
70-80 8 75 600 169 1352
80-90 3 85 255 529 1587
90-100 2 95 190 1089 2178
50 3100 10050

2018-19
368 MATHEMATICS

7
1 3100
Thus Mean x =
N
∑fx
i =1
i i =
50
= 62

7
1
( )
Variance σ =
2
N
∑ f i (xi − x )2
i =1

1
= × 10050 = 201
50
and Standard deviation (σ ) = 201 = 14.18

Example 11 Find the standard deviation for the following data :

xi 3 8 13 18 23
fi 7 10 15 10 6

Solution Let us form the following Table 15.10:

Table 15.10
xi fi f ix i x i2 f ix i2
3 7 21 9 63
8 10 80 64 640
13 15 195 169 2535
18 10 180 324 3240
23 6 138 529 3174
48 614 9652

Now, by formula (3), we have

1
N∑ fi xi − ( ∑ fi xi )
2 2
σ =
N
1
= 48 × 9652 − (614) 2
48
1
= 463296 − 376996
48

2018-19
 STATISTICS 369

1
× 293.77 = 6.12
=
48
Therefore, Standard deviation ( σ ) = 6.12
15.5.4. Shortcut method to find variance and standard deviation Sometimes the
values of xi in a discrete distribution or the mid points xi of different classes in a
continuous distribution are large and so the calculation of mean and variance becomes
tedious and time consuming. By using step-deviation method, it is possible to simplify
the procedure.
1
Let the assumed mean be ‘A’ and the scale be reduced to times (h being the
h
width of class-intervals). Let the step-deviations or the new values be yi.
xi − A
i.e. yi = or xi = A + hyi ... (1)
h
n

∑fx i i
i =1
We know that x = ... (2)
N
Replacing xi from (1) in (2), we get
n

∑ f ( A + hy )
i i
x = i =1

 1 A 
n n
 n n

=  ∑ fi A + ∑ h fi yi  = N  ∑ i ∑ fi yi 
1
f + h
N  i =1 i =1   i =1 i =1 
n
∑ fi yi 
 because
n

∑ fi = N 
= A.N +h i =1
N N  i =1 

Thus x=A+h y ... (3)

n
1
Variance of the variable x, σ x = ∑ fi ( xi − x )
2 2
Now
N i =1

1 n
= ∑ fi (A + hyi − A − h y )2
N i =1
(Using (1) and (3))

2018-19
370 MATHEMATICS

n
1
=
N
∑ fi h2 (yi − y )2
i =1

h2 n
=
N
∑ fi (yi − y )2 = h × variance of the variable y
2
i
i =1

σ x2 = h σ y
2 2
i.e.

or σ x = hσ y ... (4)
From (3) and (4), we have
2
h n
 n 
σx = N ∑ f y
i i
2
−  ∑ fi yi  ... (5)
N i =1  i =1 
Let us solve Example 11 by the short-cut method and using formula (5)
Examples 12 Calculate mean, variance and standard deviation for the following
distribution.
Classes 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90 90-100
Frequency 3 7 12 15 8 3 2

Solution Let the assumed mean A = 65. Here h = 10

We obtain the following Table 15.11 from the given data :
Table 15.11
xi − 65
Class Frequency Mid-point yi= y i2 fi yi f i y i2
10
fi xi
30-40 3 35 –3 9 –9 27
40-50 7 45 –2 4 – 14 28
50-60 12 55 –1 1 – 12 12
60-70 15 65 0 0 0 0
70-80 8 75 1 1 8 8
80-90 3 85 2 4 6 12
9 0-100 2 95 3 9 6 18
N=50 – 15 105

2018-19
 STATISTICS 371

Therefore x= A+
∑ fi yi × h = 65 − 15 × 10 = 62
50 50

h2  2
 N ∑ fi yi − ( ∑ fi yi )
2
Variance σ2 = 
N2  
2
(10 ) 50 × 105 − (–15)2 
=  
(50) 
2

1
= [5250 − 225] = 201
25
and standard deviation (σ ) = 201 = 14.18

EXERCISE 15.2
Find the mean and variance for each of the data in Exercies 1 to 5.
1. 6, 7, 10, 12, 13, 4, 8, 12
2. First n natural numbers
3. First 10 multiples of 3
4. xi 6 10 14 18 24 28 30
fi 2 4 7 12 8 4 3

5. xi 92 93 97 98 102 104 109

fi 3 2 3 2 6 3 3

6. Find the mean and standard deviation using short-cut method.

xi 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

fi 2 1 12 29 25 12 10 4 5

Find the mean and variance for the following frequency distributions in Exercises
7 and 8.

7. Classes 0-30 30-60 60-90 90-120 120-150 150-180 180-210

Frequencies 2 3 5 10 3 5 2

2018-19
372 MATHEMATICS

8. Classes 0-10 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50

Frequencies 5 8 15 16 6

9. Find the mean, variance and standard deviation using short-cut method

Height 70-75 75-80 80-85 85-90 90-95 95-100 100-105 105-110 110-115
in cms
No. of 3 4 7 7 15 9 6 6 3
children

10. The diameters of circles (in mm) drawn in a design are given below:
Diameters 33-36 37-40 41-44 45-48 49-52
No. of circles 15 17 21 22 25

Calculate the standard deviation and mean diameter of the circles.

[ Hint First make the data continuous by making the classes as 32.5-36.5, 36.5-40.5,
40.5-44.5, 44.5 - 48.5, 48.5 - 52.5 and then proceed.]
15.6 Analysis of Frequency Distributions
In earlier sections, we have studied about some types of measures of dispersion. The
mean deviation and the standard deviation have the same units in which the data are
given. Whenever we want to compare the variability of two series with same mean,
which are measured in different units, we do not merely calculate the measures of
dispersion but we require such measures which are independent of the units. The
measure of variability which is independent of units is called coefficient of variation
(denoted as C.V.)
The coefficient of variation is defined as
σ
C.V. = × 100 , x ≠ 0 ,
x
where σ and x are the standard deviation and mean of the data.
For comparing the variability or dispersion of two series, we calculate the coefficient
of variance for each series. The series having greater C.V. is said to be more variable
than the other. The series having lesser C.V. is said to be more consistent than the
other.

2018-19
 STATISTICS 373

15.6.1 Comparison of two frequency distributions with same mean Let x1 and σ1
be the mean and standard deviation of the first distribution, and x2 and σ2 be the
mean and standard deviation of the second distribution.
σ
C.V. (1st distribution) = x × 100
1
Then
1

σ2
and C.V. (2nd distribution) = × 100
x2

Given x1 = x2 = x (say)
σ1
Therefore C.V. (1st distribution) = × 100 ... (1)
x
σ2
and C.V. (2nd distribution) = × 100 ... (2)
x
It is clear from (1) and (2) that the two C.Vs. can be compared on the basis of values
of σ 1 and σ 2 only.
Thus, we say that for two series with equal means, the series with greater standard
deviation (or variance) is called more variable or dispersed than the other. Also, the
series with lesser value of standard deviation (or variance) is said to be more consistent
than the other.
Let us now take following examples:
Example 13 Two plants A and B of a factory show following results about the number
of workers and the wages paid to them.
A B
No. of workers 5000 6000
Average monthly wages Rs 2500 Rs 2500
Variance of distribution 81 100
of wages

In which plant, A or B is there greater variability in individual wages?

Solution The variance of the distribution of wages in plant A ( σ 12 ) = 81

Therefore, standard deviation of the distribution of wages in plant A ( σ 1 ) = 9

2018-19
374 MATHEMATICS

Also, the variance of the distribution of wages in plant B ( σ 2 2 ) = 100

Therefore, standard deviation of the distribution of wages in plant B ( σ2 ) = 10
Since the average monthly wages in both the plants is same, i.e., Rs.2500, therefore,
the plant with greater standard deviation will have more variability.
Thus, the plant B has greater variability in the individual wages.
Example 14 Coefficient of variation of two distributions are 60 and 70, and their
standard deviations are 21 and 16, respectively. What are their arithmetic means.

Solution Given C.V. (1st distribution) = 60, σ 1 = 21

C.V. (2nd distribution) = 70, σ 2 = 16
Let x1 and x2 be the means of 1st and 2nd distribution, respectively. Then

σ1
C.V. (1st distribution) =
x1 × 100
21 21
Therefore 60 = ×100 or x1 = × 100 = 35
x1 60

σ2
and C.V. (2nd distribution) =
x2 ×100
16 16
i.e. 70 = × 100 or x2 = × 100 = 22.85
x2 70
Example 15 The following values are calculated in respect of heights and weights of
the students of a section of Class XI :
Height Weight
Mean 162.6 cm 52.36 kg
Variance 127.69 cm2 23.1361 kg2
Can we say that the weights show greater variation than the heights?
Solution To compare the variability, we have to calculate their coefficients of variation.
Given Variance of height = 127.69cm2
Therefore Standard deviation of height = 127.69cm = 11.3 cm
2
Also Variance of weight = 23.1361 kg

2018-19
 STATISTICS 375

Therefore Standard deviation of weight = 23.1361 kg = 4.81 kg

Now, the coefficient of variations (C.V.) are given by
Standard Deviation
(C.V.) in heights = × 100
Mean

11.3
= × 100 = 6.95
162.6
4.81
and (C.V.) in weights = × 100 = 9.18
52.36
Clearly C.V. in weights is greater than the C.V. in heights
Therefore, we can say that weights show more variability than heights.

EXERCISE 15.3
1. From the data given below state which group is more variable, A or B?

Marks 10-20 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80

Group A 9 17 32 33 40 10 9
Group B 10 20 30 25 43 15 7

2. From the prices of shares X and Y below, find out which is more stable in value:

X 35 54 52 53 56 58 52 50 51 49
Y 108 107 105 105 106 107 104 103 104 101

3. An analysis of monthly wages paid to workers in two firms A and B, belonging to

the same industry, gives the following results:
Firm A Firm B
No. of wage earners 586 648
Mean of monthly wages Rs 5253 Rs 5253
Variance of the distribution 100 121
of wages
(i) Which firm A or B pays larger amount as monthly wages?
(ii) Which firm, A or B, shows greater variability in individual wages?

2018-19
376 MATHEMATICS

4. The following is the record of goals scored by team A in a football session:

No. of goals scored 0 1 2 3 4

No. of matches 1 9 7 5 3

For the team B, mean number of goals scored per match was 2 with a standard
deviation 1.25 goals. Find which team may be considered more consistent?
5. The sum and sum of squares corresponding to length x (in cm) and weight y
(in gm) of 50 plant products are given below:
50 50 50 50
∑ xi = 212 , ∑ xi2 = 902.8 , ∑ yi = 261 , ∑ yi2 = 1457.6
i =1 i =1 i =1 i =1

Which is more varying, the length or weight?

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 16 The variance of 20 observations is 5. If each observation is multiplied by
2, find the new variance of the resulting observations.
Solution Let the observations be x1, x2, ..., x20 and x be their mean. Given that
variance = 5 and n = 20. We know that
20 1 20
Variance σ ( ) 2
=
1
n
∑ (xi − x ) , i.e., 5 =
i =1
2
∑ (xi − x )2
20 i =1
20

or ∑ (xi − x )2 = 100 ... (1)

i =1

If each observation is multiplied by 2, and the new resulting observations are yi , then
1
yi = 2xi i.e., xi = yi
2

1 20 1 20 1 20
Therefore y= ∑ i 20 ∑ i = 20 ∑ xi
n i =1
y = 2 x 2 .
i =1 i =1

1
i.e. y=2x or x= y
2
Substituting the values of xi and x in (1), we get

2018-19
 STATISTICS 377

2 20
20
1 1 
∑  2 yi − 2 y  = 100 , i.e.,
i =1
∑(y
i =1
i − y ) 2 = 400

1
Thus the variance of new observations = × 400 = 20 = 22 × 5
20

A Note The reader may note that if each observation is multiplied by a constant
2
k, the variance of the resulting observations becomes k times the original variance.
Example17 The mean of 5 observations is 4.4 and their variance is 8.24. If three of
the observations are 1, 2 and 6, find the other two observations.
Solution Let the other two observations be x and y.
Therefore, the series is 1, 2, 6, x, y.
1+ 2 + 6 + x + y
Now Mean x = 4.4 =
5
or 22 = 9 + x + y
Therefore x + y = 13 ... (1)
1 5
variance = 8.24 = ∑ ( xi −x )
2
Also
n i =1
1
i.e. 8.24 =  (3.4 )2 + ( 2.4 )2 + (1.6 )2 + x2 + y 2 − 2 × 4.4 (x + y) + 2 × ( 4.4 )2 
5
or 41.20 = 11.56 + 5.76 + 2.56 + x2 + y2 –8.8 × 13 + 38.72
Therefore x2 + y2 = 97 ... (2)
But from (1), we have
x2 + y2 + 2xy = 169 ... (3)
From (2) and (3), we have
2xy = 72 ... (4)
Subtracting (4) from (2), we get
x2 + y2 – 2xy = 97 – 72 i.e. (x – y)2 = 25
or x–y= ±5
... (5)
So, from (1) and (5), we get
x = 9, y = 4 when x – y = 5
or x = 4, y = 9 when x – y = – 5
Thus, the remaining observations are 4 and 9.
Example 18 If each of the observation x1, x2, ...,xn is increased by ‘a’, where a is a
negative or positive number, show that the variance remains unchanged.

2018-19
378 MATHEMATICS

Solution Let x be the mean of x1, x2, ...,xn . Then the variance is given by
n
1
σ 12 =
n
∑ (xi − x ) 2

i =1

If ‘a is added to each observation, the new observations will be

yi = xi + a ... (1)
Let the mean of the new observations be y . Then
n n
1 1
y=
n
∑ yi = n ∑ (xi + a)
i =1 i =1

1n n
 1 n
na
= n  ∑
 i =1
xi + ∑ a =
i =1  n
∑x +
i =1
i
n
=x+a

i.e. y = x+a ... (2)

Thus, the variance of the new observations
1 n
1 n
σ2 2
=
n
∑ (yi − y ) 2 =
i =1
∑ ( xi + a − x − a) 2
n i =1
[Using (1) and (2)]

n
1
=
n
∑ (xi − x )2 = σ 12
i =1

Thus, the variance of the new observations is same as that of the original observations.

A Note We may note that adding (or subtracting) a positive number to (or from)
each observation of a group does not affect the variance.
Example 19 The mean and standard deviation of 100 observations were calculated as
40 and 5.1, respectively by a student who took by mistake 50 instead of 40 for one
observation. What are the correct mean and standard deviation?
Solution Given that number of observations (n) = 100
Incorrect mean ( x ) = 40,
Incorrect standard deviation (σ) = 5.1
1 n
We know that x= ∑ xi
n i =1
1 100 100

i.e. 40 = ∑ xi or
100 i =1
∑ xi = 4000
i =1

2018-19
 STATISTICS 379

i.e. Incorrect sum of observations = 4000

Thus the correct sum of observations = Incorrect sum – 50 + 40
= 4000 – 50 + 40 = 3990

correct sum 3990

Hence Correct mean = = = 39.9
100 100

2
1 n
1 n 
Also Standard deviation σ =
n
∑ xi 2
− 2  ∑ xi 
n  i =1 
i =1

n
1
∑ x − (x )
2 2
= i
n i =1

n
1
× Incorrect ∑ xi − (40) 2
2
i.e. 5.1 =
100 i =1

n
1
∑x
2
or 26.01 = × Incorrect i – 1600
100 i =1

n
Incorrect ∑ xi = 100 (26.01 + 1600) = 162601
2
Therefore
i =1

n n

Now Correct ∑ xi = Incorrect

i =1
2
∑x i =1
i
2
– (50)2 + (40)2

= 162601 – 2500 + 1600 = 161701

Therefore Correct standard deviation

∑x
2
Correct 2
− (Correct mean)
i
=
n

161701
− (39.9)
2
=
100

= 1617.01 − 1592.01 = 25 =5

2018-19
380 MATHEMATICS

Miscellaneous Exercise On Chapter 15

1. The mean and variance of eight observations are 9 and 9.25, respectively. If six
of the observations are 6, 7, 10, 12, 12 and 13, find the remaining two observations.
2. The mean and variance of 7 observations are 8 and 16, respectively. If five of the
observations are 2, 4, 10, 12, 14. Find the remaining two observations.
3. The mean and standard deviation of six observations are 8 and 4, respectively. If
each observation is multiplied by 3, find the new mean and new standard deviation
of the resulting observations.
4. Given that x is the mean and σ2 is the variance of n observations x1, x2, ...,xn.
Prove that the mean and variance of the observations ax1, ax2, ax3, ...., axn are
a x and a2 σ2, respectively, (a ≠ 0).
5. The mean and standard deviation of 20 observations are found to be 10 and 2,
respectively. On rechecking, it was found that an observation 8 was incorrect.
Calculate the correct mean and standard deviation in each of the following cases:
(i) If wrong item is omitted. (ii) If it is replaced by 12.
6. The mean and standard deviation of marks obtained by 50 students of a class in
three subjects, Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry are given below:
Subject Mathematics Physics Chemistry
Mean 42 32 40.9
Standard 12 15 20
deviation
Which of the three subjects shows the highest variability in marks and which
shows the lowest?
7. The mean and standard deviation of a group of 100 observations were found to
be 20 and 3, respectively. Later on it was found that three observations were
incorrect, which were recorded as 21, 21 and 18. Find the mean and standard
deviation if the incorrect observations are omitted.

Summary
® Measures of dispersion Range, Quartile deviation, mean deviation, variance,
standard deviation are measures of dispersion.
Range = Maximum Value – Minimum Value
® Mean deviation for ungrouped data
M.D. (x ) =
∑ xi – x , M.D. (M) =
∑ xi – M
n n

2018-19
 STATISTICS 381

® Mean deviation for grouped data

M.D. ( x ) =
∑ fi xi x
, M.D. ( M ) =
∑ fi xi M
, where N = ∑ f i
N N
® Variance and standard deviation for ungrouped data
1 1
∑ ∑
2
σ2 = (xi – x )2 , σ= ( xi – x )
n n
® Variance and standard deviation of a discrete frequency distribution
1 1
∑ fi ( xi − x ) , ∑ fi ( xi − x )
2 2
σ2 = σ =
N N
® Variance and standard deviation of a continuous frequency distribution
1 1
∑ fi ( xi − x ) , N ∑ fi xi2 − ( ∑ fi xi )
2 2
σ2 = σ=
N N
® Shortcut method to find variance and standard deviation.
h2  h
N ∑ fi yi2 − ( ∑ fi yi )  , σ N ∑ fi yi2 − ( ∑ fi yi ) ,
2 2
σ2 = 2 
=
N   N
xi − A
where yi =
h
σ
® Coefficient of variation (C.V.) = × 100, x ≠ 0.
x
For series with equal means, the series with lesser standard deviation is more consistent
or less scattered.

Historical Note
‘Statistics’ is derived from the Latin word ‘status’ which means a political
state. This suggests that statistics is as old as human civilisation. In the year 3050
B.C., perhaps the first census was held in Egypt. In India also, about 2000 years
ago, we had an efficient system of collecting administrative statistics, particularly,
during the regime of Chandra Gupta Maurya (324-300 B.C.). The system of
collecting data related to births and deaths is mentioned in Kautilya’s Arthshastra
(around 300 B.C.) A detailed account of administrative surveys conducted during
Akbar’s regime is given in Ain-I-Akbari written by Abul Fazl.

2018-19
382 MATHEMATICS

Captain John Graunt of London (1620-1674) is known as father of vital

statistics due to his studies on statistics of births and deaths. Jacob Bernoulli
(1654-1705) stated the Law of Large numbers in his book “Ars Conjectandi’,
published in 1713.
The theoretical development of statistics came during the mid seventeenth
century and continued after that with the introduction of theory of games and
chance (i.e., probability). Francis Galton (1822-1921), an Englishman, pioneered
the use of statistical methods, in the field of Biometry. Karl Pearson (1857-1936)
contributed a lot to the development of statistical studies with his discovery
of Chi square test and foundation of statistical laboratory in England (1911).
Sir Ronald A. Fisher (1890-1962), known as the Father of modern statistics,
applied it to various diversified fields such as Genetics, Biometry, Education,
Agriculture, etc.

—v —

2018-19
 Chapter 16

PROBABILITY

vWhere a mathematical reasoning can be had, it is as great a folly to

make use of any other, as to grope for a thing in the dark, when
you have a candle in your hand. – JOHN ARBUTHNOT v

16.1 Introduction
In earlier classes, we studied about the concept of
probability as a measure of uncertainty of various
phenomenon. We have obtained the probability of getting
3 1
an even number in throwing a die as i.e., . Here the
6 2
total possible outcomes are 1,2,3,4,5 and 6 (six in number).
The outcomes in favour of the event of ‘getting an even
number’ are 2,4,6 (i.e., three in number). In general, to
obtain the probability of an event, we find the ratio of the
number of outcomes favourable to the event, to the total
number of equally likely outcomes. This theory of probability Kolmogorov
is known as classical theory of probability. (1903-1987)
In Class IX, we learnt to find the probability on the basis of observations and
collected data. This is called statistical approach of probability.
Both the theories have some serious difficulties. For instance, these theories can
not be applied to the activities/experiments which have infinite number of outcomes. In
classical theory we assume all the outcomes to be equally likely. Recall that the outcomes
are called equally likely when we have no reason to believe that one is more likely to
occur than the other. In other words, we assume that all outcomes have equal chance
(probability) to occur. Thus, to define probability, we used equally likely or equally
probable outcomes. This is logically not a correct definition. Thus, another theory of
probability was developed by A.N. Kolmogorov, a Russian mathematician, in 1933. He

2018-19
384 MATHEMATICS

laid down some axioms to interpret probability, in his book ‘Foundation of Probability’
published in 1933. In this Chapter, we will study about this approach called axiomatic
approach of probability. To understand this approach we must know about few basic
terms viz. random experiment, sample space, events, etc. Let us learn about these all,
in what follows next.
16.2 Random Experiments
In our day to day life, we perform many activities which have a fixed result no matter
any number of times they are repeated. For example given any triangle, without knowing
the three angles, we can definitely say that the sum of measure of angles is 180°.
We also perform many experimental activities, where the result may not be same,
when they are repeated under identical conditions. For example, when a coin is tossed
it may turn up a head or a tail, but we are not sure which one of these results will
actually be obtained. Such experiments are called random experiments.
An experiment is called random experiment if it satisfies the following two
conditions:
(i) It has more than one possible outcome.
(ii) It is not possible to predict the outcome in advance.
Check whether the experiment of tossing a die is random or not?
In this chapter, we shall refer the random experiment by experiment only unless
stated otherwise.
16.2.1 Outcomes and sample space A possible result of a random experiment is
called its outcome.
Consider the experiment of rolling a die. The outcomes of this experiment are 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, if we are interested in the number of dots on the upper face of the die.
The set of outcomes {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} is called the sample space of the experiment.
Thus, the set of all possible outcomes of a random experiment is called the sample
space associated with the experiment. Sample space is denoted by the symbol S.
Each element of the sample space is called a sample point. In other words, each
outcome of the random experiment is also called sample point.
Let us now consider some examples.
Example 1 Two coins (a one rupee coin and a two rupee coin) are tossed once. Find
a sample space.
Solution Clearly the coins are distinguishable in the sense that we can speak of the
first coin and the second coin. Since either coin can turn up Head (H) or Tail(T), the
possible outcomes may be

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 385

Heads on both coins = (H,H) = HH

Head on first coin and Tail on the other = (H,T) = HT
Tail on first coin and Head on the other = (T,H) = TH
Tail on both coins = (T,T) = TT
Thus, the sample space is S = {HH, HT, TH, TT}

A Note The outcomes of this experiment are ordered pairs of H and T. For the
sake of simplicity the commas are omitted from the ordered pairs.
Example 2 Find the sample space associated with the experiment of rolling a pair of
dice (one is blue and the other red) once. Also, find the number of elements of this
sample space.
Solution Suppose 1 appears on blue die and 2 on the red die. We denote this outcome
by an ordered pair (1,2). Similarly, if ‘3’ appears on blue die and ‘5’ on red, the outcome
is denoted by the ordered pair (3,5).
In general each outcome can be denoted by the ordered pair (x, y), where x is
the number appeared on the blue die and y is the number appeared on the red die.
Therefore, this sample space is given by
S = {(x, y): x is the number on the blue die and y is the number on the red die}.
The number of elements of this sample space is 6 × 6 = 36 and the sample space is
given below:
{(1,1), (1,2), (1,3), (1,4), (1,5), (1,6), (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (2,4), (2,5), (2,6)
(3,1), (3,2), (3,3), (3,4), (3,5), (3,6), (4,1), (4,2), (4,3), (4,4), (4,5), (4,6)
(5,1), (5,2), (5,3), (5,4), (5,5), (5,6), (6,1), (6,2), (6,3), (6,4), (6,5), (6,6)}
Example 3 In each of the following experiments specify appropriate sample space
(i) A boy has a 1 rupee coin, a 2 rupee coin and a 5 rupee coin in his pocket. He
takes out two coins out of his pocket, one after the other.
(ii) A person is noting down the number of accidents along a busy highway
during a year.
Solution (i) Let Q denote a 1 rupee coin, H denotes a 2 rupee coin and R denotes a 5
rupee coin. The first coin he takes out of his pocket may be any one of the three coins
Q, H or R. Corresponding to Q, the second draw may be H or R. So the result of two
draws may be QH or QR. Similarly, corresponding to H, the second draw may be
Q or R.
Therefore, the outcomes may be HQ or HR. Lastly, corresponding to R, the second
draw may be H or Q.
So, the outcomes may be RH or RQ.

2018-19
386 MATHEMATICS

Thus, the sample space is S={QH, QR, HQ, HR, RH, RQ}
(ii) The number of accidents along a busy highway during the year of observation
can be either 0 (for no accident ) or 1 or 2, or some other positive integer.
Thus, a sample space associated with this experiment is S= {0,1,2,...}
Example 4 A coin is tossed. If it shows head, we draw a ball from a bag consisting of
3 blue and 4 white balls; if it shows tail we throw a die. Describe the sample space of
this experiment.
Solution Let us denote blue balls by B1, B2, B3 and the white balls by W1, W2, W3, W4.
Then a sample space of the experiment is
S = { HB1, HB2, HB3, HW1, HW2, HW3, HW4, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6}.
Here HBi means head on the coin and ball Bi is drawn, HWi means head on the coin
and ball Wi is drawn. Similarly, Ti means tail on the coin and the number i on the die.
Example 5 Consider the experiment in which a coin is tossed repeatedly until a head
comes up. Describe the sample space.
Solution In the experiment head may come up on the first toss, or the 2nd toss, or the
3rd toss and so on till head is obtained. Hence, the desired sample space is
S= {H, TH, TTH, TTTH, TTTTH,...}

EXERCISE 16.1
In each of the following Exercises 1 to 7, describe the sample space for the indicated
experiment.
1. A coin is tossed three times.
2. A die is thrown two times.
3. A coin is tossed four times.
4. A coin is tossed and a die is thrown.
5. A coin is tossed and then a die is rolled only in case a head is shown on the coin.
6. 2 boys and 2 girls are in Room X, and 1 boy and 3 girls in Room Y. Specify the
sample space for the experiment in which a room is selected and then a person.
7. One die of red colour, one of white colour and one of blue colour are placed in a
bag. One die is selected at random and rolled, its colour and the number on its
uppermost face is noted. Describe the sample space.
8. An experiment consists of recording boy–girl composition of families with 2
children.
(i) What is the sample space if we are interested in knowing whether it is a boy
or girl in the order of their births?

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 387

(ii) What is the sample space if we are interested in the number of girls in the
family?
9. A box contains 1 red and 3 identical white balls. Two balls are drawn at random
in succession without replacement. Write the sample space for this experiment.
10. An experiment consists of tossing a coin and then throwing it second time if a
head occurs. If a tail occurs on the first toss, then a die is rolled once. Find the
sample space.
11. Suppose 3 bulbs are selected at random from a lot. Each bulb is tested and
classified as defective (D) or non – defective(N). Write the sample space of this
experiment.
12. A coin is tossed. If the out come is a head, a die is thrown. If the die shows up
an even number, the die is thrown again. What is the sample space for the
experiment?
13. The numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 are written separatly on four slips of paper. The slips
are put in a box and mixed thoroughly. A person draws two slips from the box,
one after the other, without replacement. Describe the sample space for the
experiment.
14. An experiment consists of rolling a die and then tossing a coin once if the number
on the die is even. If the number on the die is odd, the coin is tossed twice. Write
the sample space for this experiment.
15. A coin is tossed. If it shows a tail, we draw a ball from a box which contains 2 red
and 3 black balls. If it shows head, we throw a die. Find the sample space for this
experiment.
16. A die is thrown repeatedly untill a six comes up. What is the sample space for
this experiment?
16.3 Event
We have studied about random experiment and sample space associated with an
experiment. The sample space serves as an universal set for all questions concerned
with the experiment.
Consider the experiment of tossing a coin two times. An associated sample space
is S = {HH, HT, TH, TT}.
Now suppose that we are interested in those outcomes which correspond to the
occurrence of exactly one head. We find that HT and TH are the only elements of S
corresponding to the occurrence of this happening (event). These two elements form
the set E = { HT, TH}
We know that the set E is a subset of the sample space S . Similarly, we find the
following correspondence between events and subsets of S.

2018-19
388 MATHEMATICS

Description of events Corresponding subset of ‘S’

Number of tails is exactly 2 A = {TT}
Number of tails is atleast one B = {HT, TH, TT}
Number of heads is atmost one C = {HT, TH, TT}
Second toss is not head D = { HT, TT}
Number of tails is atmost two S = {HH, HT, TH, TT}
Number of tails is more than two φ
The above discussion suggests that a subset of sample space is associated with
an event and an event is associated with a subset of sample space. In the light of this
we define an event as follows.
Definition Any subset E of a sample space S is called an event.
16.3.1 Occurrence of an event Consider the experiment of throwing a die. Let E
denotes the event “ a number less than 4 appears”. If actually ‘1’ had appeared on the
die then we say that event E has occurred. As a matter of fact if outcomes are 2 or 3,
we say that event E has occurred
Thus, the event E of a sample space S is said to have occurred if the outcome
ω of the experiment is such that ω ∈ E. If the outcome ω is such that ω ∉ E, we say
that the event E has not occurred.
16.3.2 Types of events Events can be classified into various types on the basis of the
elements they have.
1. Impossible and Sure Events The empty set φ and the sample space S describe
events. In fact φ is called an impossible event and S, i.e., the whole sample space is
called the sure event.
To understand these let us consider the experiment of rolling a die. The associated
sample space is
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
Let E be the event “ the number appears on the die is a multiple of 7”. Can you
write the subset associated with the event E?
Clearly no outcome satisfies the condition given in the event, i.e., no element of
the sample space ensures the occurrence of the event E. Thus, we say that the empty
set only correspond to the event E. In other words we can say that it is impossible to
have a multiple of 7 on the upper face of the die. Thus, the event E = φ is an impossible
event.
Now let us take up another event F “the number turns up is odd or even”. Clearly

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 389

F = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,} = S, i.e., all outcomes of the experiment ensure the occurrence of
the event F. Thus, the event F = S is a sure event.
2. Simple Event If an event E has only one sample point of a sample space, it is
called a simple (or elementary) event.
In a sample space containing n distinct elements, there are exactly n simple
events.
For example in the experiment of tossing two coins, a sample space is
S={HH, HT, TH, TT}
There are four simple events corresponding to this sample space. These are
E1= {HH}, E2={HT}, E3= { TH} and E4={TT}.
3. Compound Event If an event has more than one sample point, it is called a
Compound event.
For example, in the experiment of “tossing a coin thrice” the events
E: ‘Exactly one head appeared’
F: ‘Atleast one head appeared’
G: ‘Atmost one head appeared’ etc.
are all compound events. The subsets of S associated with these events are
E={HTT,THT,TTH}
F={HTT,THT, TTH, HHT, HTH, THH, HHH}
G= {TTT, THT, HTT, TTH}
Each of the above subsets contain more than one sample point, hence they are all
compound events.
16.3.3 Algebra of events In the Chapter on Sets, we have studied about different
ways of combining two or more sets, viz, union, intersection, difference, complement
of a set etc. Like-wise we can combine two or more events by using the analogous set
notations.
Let A, B, C be events associated with an experiment whose sample space is S.
1. Complementary Event For every event A, there corresponds another event
A ′ called the complementary event to A. It is also called the event ‘not A’.
For example, take the experiment ‘of tossing three coins’. An associated sample
space is
S = {HHH, HHT, HTH, THH, HTT, THT, TTH, TTT}
Let A={HTH, HHT, THH} be the event ‘only one tail appears’
Clearly for the outcome HTT, the event A has not occurred. But we may say that
the event ‘not A’ has occurred. Thus, with every outcome which is not in A, we say
that ‘not A’ occurs.

2018-19
390 MATHEMATICS

Thus the complementary event ‘not A’ to the event A is

A′ = {HHH, HTT, THT, TTH, TTT}
or A′ = {ω : ω ∈ S and ω ∉A} = S – A.
2. The Event ‘A or B’ Recall that union of two sets A and B denoted by A ∪ B
contains all those elements which are either in A or in B or in both.
When the sets A and B are two events associated with a sample space, then
‘A ∪ B’ is the event ‘either A or B or both’. This event ‘A ∪ B’ is also called ‘A or B’.
Therefore Event ‘A or B’ = A ∪ B
= {ω : ω ∈ A or ω ∈ B}
3. The Event ‘A and B’ We know that intersection of two sets A ∩ B is the set of
those elements which are common to both A and B. i.e., which belong to both
‘A and B’.
If A and B are two events, then the set A ∩ B denotes the event ‘A and B’.
Thus, A ∩ B = {ω : ω ∈ A and ω ∈ B}
For example, in the experiment of ‘throwing a die twice’ Let A be the event
‘score on the first throw is six’ and B is the event ‘sum of two scores is atleast 11’ then
A = {(6,1), (6,2), (6,3), (6,4), (6,5), (6,6)}, and B = {(5,6), (6,5), (6,6)}
so A ∩ B = {(6,5), (6,6)}
Note that the set A ∩ B = {(6,5), (6,6)} may represent the event ‘the score on the first
throw is six and the sum of the scores is atleast 11’.
4. The Event ‘A but not B’ We know that A–B is the set of all those elements
which are in A but not in B. Therefore, the set A–B may denote the event ‘A but not
B’.We know that
A – B = A ∩ B´
Example 6 Consider the experiment of rolling a die. Let A be the event ‘getting a
prime number’, B be the event ‘getting an odd number’. Write the sets representing
the events (i) Aor B (ii) A and B (iii) A but not B (iv) ‘not A’.
Solution Here S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}, A = {2, 3, 5} and B = {1, 3, 5}
Obviously
(i) ‘A or B’ = A ∪ B = {1, 2, 3, 5}
(ii) ‘A and B’ = A ∩ B = {3,5}
(iii) ‘A but not B’ = A – B = {2}
(iv) ‘not A’ = A′ = {1,4,6}

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 391

16.3.4 Mutually exclusive events In the experiment of rolling a die, a sample space is
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. Consider events, A ‘an odd number appears’ and B ‘an even
number appears’
Clearly the event A excludes the event B and vice versa. In other words, there is
no outcome which ensures the occurrence of events A and B simultaneously. Here
A = {1, 3, 5} and B = {2, 4, 6}
Clearly A ∩ B = φ, i.e., A and B are disjoint sets.
In general, two events A and B are called mutually exclusive events if the
occurrence of any one of them excludes the occurrence of the other event, i.e., if they
can not occur simultaneously. In this case the sets A and B are disjoint.
Again in the experiment of rolling a die, consider the events A ‘an odd number
appears’ and event B ‘a number less than 4 appears’
Obviously A = {1, 3, 5} and B = {1, 2, 3}
Now 3 ∈ A as well as 3 ∈ B
Therefore, A and B are not mutually exclusive events.
Remark Simple events of a sample space are always mutually exclusive.
16.3.5 Exhaustive events Consider the experiment of throwing a die. We have
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. Let us define the following events
A: ‘a number less than 4 appears’,
B: ‘a number greater than 2 but less than 5 appears’
and C: ‘a number greater than 4 appears’.
Then A = {1, 2, 3}, B = {3,4} and C = {5, 6}. We observe that
A ∪ B ∪ C = {1, 2, 3} ∪ {3, 4} ∪ {5, 6} = S.
Such events A, B and C are called exhaustive events. In general, if E1, E2, ..., En are n
events of a sample space S and if
n
E1 ∪ E 2 ∪ E 3 ∪ ... ∪ E n = ∪ E i = S
i =1

then E1, E2, ...., En are called exhaustive events.In other words, events E1, E2, ..., En
are said to be exhaustive if atleast one of them necessarily occurs whenever the
experiment is performed.
Further, if Ei ∩ Ej = φ for i ≠ j i.e., events Ei and Ej are pairwise disjoint and
n
∪ E i = S , then events E1, E2, ..., En are called mutually exclusive and exhaustive
i =1

events.

2018-19
392 MATHEMATICS

We now consider some examples.

Example 7 Two dice are thrown and the sum of the numbers which come up on the
dice is noted. Let us consider the following events associated with this experiment
A: ‘the sum is even’.
B: ‘the sum is a multiple of 3’.
C: ‘the sum is less than 4’.
D: ‘the sum is greater than 11’.
Which pairs of these events are mutually exclusive?
Solution There are 36 elements in the sample space S = {(x, y): x, y = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}.
Then
A = {(1, 1), (1, 3), (1, 5), (2, 2), (2, 4), (2, 6), (3, 1), (3, 3), (3, 5), (4, 2), (4, 4),
(4, 6), (5, 1), (5, 3), (5, 5), (6, 2), (6, 4), (6, 6)}
B = {(1, 2), (2, 1), (1, 5), (5, 1), (3, 3), (2, 4), (4, 2), (3, 6), (6, 3), (4, 5), (5, 4),
(6, 6)}
C = {(1, 1), (2, 1), (1, 2)} and D = {(6, 6)}
We find that
A ∩ B = {(1, 5), (2, 4), (3, 3), (4, 2), (5, 1), (6, 6)} ≠ φ
Therefore, A and B are not mutually exclusive events.
Similarly A ∩ C ≠ φ, A ∩ D ≠ φ, B ∩ C ≠ φ and B ∩ D ≠ φ.
Thus, the pairs of events, (A, C), (A, D), (B, C), (B, D) are not mutually exclusive
events.
Also C ∩ D = φ and so C and D are mutually exclusive events.
Example 8 A coin is tossed three times, consider the following events.
A: ‘No head appears’, B: ‘Exactly one head appears’ and C: ‘Atleast two heads
appear’.
Do they form a set of mutually exclusive and exhaustive events?
Solution The sample space of the experiment is
S = {HHH, HHT, HTH, THH, HTT, THT, TTH, TTT}
and A = {TTT}, B = {HTT, THT, TTH}, C = {HHT, HTH, THH, HHH}
Now
A ∪ B ∪ C = {TTT, HTT, THT, TTH, HHT, HTH, THH, HHH} = S
Therefore, A, B and C are exhaustive events.
Also, A ∩ B = φ, A ∩ C = φ and B ∩ C = φ
Therefore, the events are pair-wise disjoint, i.e., they are mutually exclusive.
Hence, A, B and C form a set of mutually exclusive and exhaustive events.

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 393

EXERCISE 16.2
1. A die is rolled. Let E be the event “die shows 4” and F be the event “die shows
even number”. Are E and F mutually exclusive?
2. A die is thrown. Describe the following events:
(i) A: a number less than 7 (ii) B: a number greater than 7
(iii) C: a multiple of 3 (iv) D: a number less than 4
(v) E: an even number greater than 4 (vi) F: a number not less than 3
Also find A ∪ B, A ∩ B, B ∪ C, E ∩ F, D ∩ E, A – C, D – E, E ∩ F′, F′
3. An experiment involves rolling a pair of dice and recording the numbers that
come up. Describe the following events:
A: the sum is greater than 8, B: 2 occurs on either die
C: the sum is at least 7 and a multiple of 3.
Which pairs of these events are mutually exclusive?
4. Three coins are tossed once. Let A denote the event ‘three heads show”, B
denote the event “two heads and one tail show”, C denote the event” three tails
show and D denote the event ‘a head shows on the first coin”. Which events are
(i) mutually exclusive? (ii) simple? (iii) Compound?
5. Three coins are tossed. Describe
(i) Two events which are mutually exclusive.
(ii) Three events which are mutually exclusive and exhaustive.
(iii) Two events, which are not mutually exclusive.
(iv) Two events which are mutually exclusive but not exhaustive.
(v) Three events which are mutually exclusive but not exhaustive.
6. Two dice are thrown. The events A, B and C are as follows:
A: getting an even number on the first die.
B: getting an odd number on the first die.
C: getting the sum of the numbers on the dice ≤ 5.
Describe the events
(i) A ′ (ii) not B (iii) A or B
(iv) A and B (v) A but not C (vi) B or C
(vii) B and C (viii) A ∩ B′ ∩ C′
7. Refer to question 6 above, state true or false: (give reason for your answer)
(i) A and B are mutually exclusive
(ii) A and B are mutually exclusive and exhaustive
(iii) A = B′

2018-19
394 MATHEMATICS

(iv) A and C are mutually exclusive

(v) A and B′ are mutually exclusive.
(vi) A′, B′, C are mutually exclusive and exhaustive.
16.4 Axiomatic Approach to Probability
In earlier sections, we have considered random experiments, sample space and
events associated with these experiments. In our day to day life we use many words
about the chances of occurrence of events. Probability theory attempts to quantify
these chances of occurrence or non occurrence of events.
In earlier classes, we have studied some methods of assigning probability to an
event associated with an experiment having known the number of total outcomes.
Axiomatic approach is another way of describing probability of an event. In this
approach some axioms or rules are depicted to assign probabilities.
Let S be the sample space of a random experiment. The probability P is a real
valued function whose domain is the power set of S and range is the interval [0,1]
satisfying the following axioms
(i) For any event E, P (E) ≥ 0 (ii) P (S) = 1
(iii) If E and F are mutually exclusive events, then P(E ∪ F) = P(E) + P(F).
It follows from (iii) that P(φ) = 0. To prove this, we take F = φ and note that E and φ
are disjoint events. Therefore, from axiom (iii), we get
P (E ∪ φ) = P (E) + P (φ) or P(E) = P(E) + P (φ) i.e. P (φ) = 0.
Let S be a sample space containing outcomes ω1 , ω2 ,..., ωn , i.e.,
S = {ω1, ω2, ..., ωn}
It follows from the axiomatic definition of probability that
(i) 0 ≤ P (ωi) ≤ 1 for each ωi ∈ S
(ii) P (ω1) + P (ω2) + ... + P (ωn) = 1
(iii) For any event A, P(A) = ∑ P(ωi ), ωi ∈ A.

A Note It may be noted that the singleton {ω } is called elementary event and
i
for notational convenience, we write P(ω ) for P({ω }).
i i
1
For example, in ‘a coin tossing’ experiment we can assign the number to each
2
of the outcomes H and T.
1 1
i.e. P(H) = and P(T) = (1)
2 2
Clearly this assignment satisfies both the conditions i.e., each number is neither
less than zero nor greater than 1 and

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 395

1 1
P(H) + P(T) = + =1
2 2
1 1
Therefore, in this case we can say that probability of H = , and probability of T =
2 2
1 3
If we take P(H) = and P(T) = ... (2)
4 4
Does this assignment satisfy the conditions of axiomatic approach?
1 3
Yes, in this case, probability of H = and probability of T =
.
4 4
We find that both the assignments (1) and (2) are valid for probability of
H and T.
In fact, we can assign the numbers p and (1 – p) to both the outcomes such that
0 ≤ p ≤ 1 and P(H) + P(T) = p + (1 – p) = 1
This assignment, too, satisfies both conditions of the axiomatic approach of
probability. Hence, we can say that there are many ways (rather infinite) to assign
probabilities to outcomes of an experiment. We now consider some examples.
Example 9 Let a sample space be S = {ω1, ω2,..., ω6}.Which of the following
assignments of probabilities to each outcome are valid?
Outcomes ω 1 ω2 ω3 ω4 ω5 ω6
1 1 1 1 1 1
(a)
6 6 6 6 6 6
(b) 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 2 1 1 1 1
(c) − −
8 3 3 3 4 3
1 1 1 1 1 3
(d)
12 12 6 6 6 2
(e) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6

Solution (a) Condition (i): Each of the number p(ωi) is positive and less than one.
Condition (ii): Sum of probabilities
1 1 1 1 1 1
= + + + + + =1
6 6 6 6 6 6

2018-19
396 MATHEMATICS

Therefore, the assignment is valid

(b) Condition (i): Each of the number p(ωi) is either 0 or 1.
Condition (ii) Sum of the probabilities = 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 = 1
Therefore, the assignment is valid
(c) Condition (i) Two of the probabilities p(ω5) and p(ω6) are negative, the assignment
is not valid
3
(d) Since p(ω6) = > 1, the assignment is not valid
2
(e) Since, sum of probabilities = 0.1 + 0.2 + 0.3 + 0.4 + 0.5 + 0.6 = 2.1, the assignment
is not valid.
16.4.1 Probability of an event Let S be a sample space associated with the experiment
‘examining three consecutive pens produced by a machine and classified as Good
(non-defective) and bad (defective)’. We may get 0, 1, 2 or 3 defective pens as result
of this examination.
A sample space associated with this experiment is
S = {BBB, BBG, BGB, GBB, BGG, GBG, GGB, GGG},
where B stands for a defective or bad pen and G for a non – defective or good pen.
Let the probabilities assigned to the outcomes be as follows
Sample point: BBB BBG BGB GBB BGG GBG GGB GGG
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Probability:
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Let event A: there is exactly one defective pen and event B: there are atleast two
defective pens.
Hence A = {BGG, GBG, GGB} and B = {BBG, BGB, GBB, BBB}
Now P(A) = ∑ P(ωi ),∀ωi ∈ A
1 1 1 3
= P(BGG) + P(GBG) + P(GGB) = + + =
8 8 8 8
and P(B) = ∑ P(ωi ),∀ ωi ∈ B
1 1 1 1 4 1
= P(BBG) + P(BGB) + P(GBB) + P(BBB) = + + + = =
8 8 8 8 8 2
Let us consider another experiment of ‘tossing a coin “twice”
The sample space of this experiment is S = {HH, HT, TH, TT}
Let the following probabilities be assigned to the outcomes

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 397

1 1 2 9
P(HH) = , P(HT) = , P(TH) = , P(TT) =
4 7 7 28
Clearly this assignment satisfies the conditions of axiomatic approach. Now, let
us find the probability of the event E: ‘Both the tosses yield the same result’.
Here E = {HH, TT}
Now P(E) = Σ P(wi), for all wi ∈ E
1 9 4
= P(HH) + P(TT) = + =
4 28 7
For the event F: ‘exactly two heads’, we have F = {HH}
1
and P(F) = P(HH) =
4
16.4.2 Probabilities of equally likely outcomes Let a sample space of an
experiment be
S = {ω1, ω2,..., ωn}.
Let all the outcomes are equally likely to occur, i.e., the chance of occurrence of each
simple event must be same.
i.e. P(ωi) = p, for all ωi ∈ S where 0 ≤ p ≤ 1
n
Since ∑ P(ωi ) =1 i.e., p + p + ... + p (n times) = 1
i=1

1
or np = 1 i.e., p =
n
Let S be a sample space and E be an event, such that n(S) = n and n(E) = m. If
each out come is equally likely, then it follows that
m Number of outcomes favourable to E
P(E) = =
n Total possible outcomes

16.4.3 Probability of the event ‘A or B’ Let us now find the probability of event
‘A or B’, i.e., P (A ∪ B)
Let A = {HHT, HTH, THH} and B = {HTH, THH, HHH} be two events associated
with ‘tossing of a coin thrice’
Clearly A ∪ B = {HHT, HTH, THH, HHH}
Now P (A ∪ B) = P(HHT) + P(HTH) + P(THH) + P(HHH)

2018-19
398 MATHEMATICS

If all the outcomes are equally likely, then

1 1 1 1 4 1
P ( A ∪ B) = + + + = =
8 8 8 8 8 2
3
Also P(A) = P(HHT) + P(HTH) + P(THH) =
8
3
and P(B) = P(HTH) + P(THH) + P(HHH) =
8
3 3 6
Therefore P(A) + P(B) = + =
8 8 8
It is clear that P(A ∪ B) ≠ P(A) + P(B)
The points HTH and THH are common to both A and B. In the computation of
P(A) + P(B) the probabilities of points HTH and THH, i.e., the elements of A ∩B are
included twice. Thus to get the probability P(A ∪ B) we have to subtract the probabilities
of the sample points in A ∩ B from P(A) + P(B)
i.e. P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) − ∑ P(ωi ), ∀ωi ∈ A ∩ B
= P( A ) + P(B) − P( A ∩ B)
Thus we observe that, P( A ∪ B) = P( A) + P( B) − P (A ∩ B)
In general, if A and B are any two events associated with a random experiment,
then by the definition of probability of an event, we have
P ( A ∪ B ) = ∑ p ( ωi ) , ∀ωi ∈ A ∪ B .
Since A ∪ B = (A–B) ∪ (A ∩ B) ∪ (B–A) ,
we have
P(A ∪ B) = [ ∑ P(ωi )∀ ωi ∈ (A–B)] + [ ∑ P(ωi )∀ ωi ∈ A ∩ B ] + [ ∑ P(ωi )∀ ωi ∈ B – A ]
(because A–B, A ∩ B and B – A are mutually exclusive) ... (1)
Also P(A) + P(B) = [ ∑ p(ωi ) ∀ ωi ∈ A ] + [ ∑ p(ωi ) ∀ ωi ∈ B ]
= [ ∑ P(ωi )∀ωi ∈ (A–B) ∪ (A ∩ B)] + [ ∑ P(ωi )∀ωi ∈ (B – A) ∪ (A ∩ B)]
= [ ∑ P(ωi )∀ωi ∈ (A – B)] + [ ∑ P(ωi )∀ωi ∈ (A ∩ B)] + [ ∑ P(ωi )∀ωi ∈ (B–A)] +

[ ∑ P(ωi )∀ωi ∈ (A ∩ B)]

= P(A ∪ B) + [ ∑ P(ωi )∀ ωi ∈ A ∩ B ] [using (1)]
= P(A ∪ B) + P(A ∩ B) .

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 399

Hence P(A ∪ B) = P (A) +P(B) – P(A ∩ B) .

Alternatively, it can also be proved as follows:
A ∪ B = A ∪ (B – A), where A and B – A are mutually exclusive,
and B = (A ∩ B) ∪ (B – A), where A ∩ B and B – A are mutually exclusive.
Using Axiom (iii) of probability, we get
P (A ∪B) = P (A) + P (B – A) ... (2)
and P(B) = P ( A ∩ B) + P (B – A) ... (3)
Subtracting (3) from (2) gives
P (A ∪ B) – P(B) = P(A) – P (A ∩ B)
or P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P (B) – P (A ∩ B)
The above result can further be verified by observing the Venn Diagram (Fig 16.1)

Fig 16.1

If A and B are disjoint sets, i.e., they are mutually exclusive events, then A ∩ B = φ
Therefore P(A ∩ B) = P (φ) = 0
Thus, for mutually exclusive events A and B, we have
P( A ∪ B) = P ( A) + P (B) ,
which is Axiom (iii) of probability.
16.4.4 Probability of event ‘not A’ Consider the event A = {2, 4, 6, 8} associated
with the experiment of drawing a card from a deck of ten cards numbered from
1 to 10. Clearly the sample space is S = {1, 2, 3, ...,10}
If all the outcomes 1, 2, ...,10 are considered to be equally likely, then the probability
1
of each outcome is
10

2018-19
400 MATHEMATICS

Now P(A) = P(2) + P(4) + P(6) + P(8)

1 1 1 1 4 2
= + + + = =
10 10 10 10 10 5
Also event ‘not A’ = A ′ = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10}
Now P(A′) = P(1) + P(3) + P(5) + P(7) + P(9) + P(10)
6 3
= =
10 5
3 2
Thus, P(A′) = = 1 − = 1 − P ( A)
5 5
Also, we know that A′ and A are mutually exclusive and exhaustive events i.e.,
A ∩ A′ = φ and A ∪ A′ = S
or P(A ∪ A′) = P(S)
Now P(A) + P(A′) = 1, by using axioms (ii) and (iii).
or P( A ′ ) = P(not A) = 1 – P(A)
We now consider some examples and exercises having equally likely outcomes
unless stated otherwise.
Example 10 One card is drawn from a well shuffled deck of 52 cards. If each outcome
is equally likely, calculate the probability that the card will be
(i) a diamond (ii) not an ace
(iii) a black card (i.e., a club or, a spade) (iv) not a diamond
(v) not a black card.
Solution When a card is drawn from a well shuffled deck of 52 cards, the number of
possible outcomes is 52.
(i) Let A be the event 'the card drawn is a diamond'
Clearly the number of elements in set A is 13.
13 1
Therefore, P(A) = =
52 4
1
i.e. probability of a diamond card =
4
(ii) We assume that the event ‘Card drawn is an ace’ is B
Therefore ‘Card drawn is not an ace’ should be B′.
4 1 12
We know that P(B′) = 1 – P(B) = 1 − =1 − =
52 13 13

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 401

(iii) Let C denote the event ‘card drawn is black card’

Therefore, number of elements in the set C = 26
26 1
i.e. P(C) = =
52 2
1
Thus, probability of a black card = .
2
(iv) We assumed in (i) above that A is the event ‘card drawn is a diamond’,
so the event ‘card drawn is not a diamond’ may be denoted as A' or ‘not A’
1 3
Now P(not A) = 1 – P(A) = 1 − =
4 4
(v) The event ‘card drawn is not a black card’ may be denoted as C′ or ‘not C’.
1 1
We know that P(not C) = 1 – P(C) = 1 − =
2 2
1
Therefore, probability of not a black card =
2
Example 11 A bag contains 9 discs of which 4 are red, 3 are blue and 2 are yellow.
The discs are similar in shape and size. A disc is drawn at random from the bag.
Calculate the probability that it will be (i) red, (ii) yellow, (iii) blue, (iv) not blue,
(v) either red or blue.
Solution There are 9 discs in all so the total number of possible outcomes is 9.
Let the events A, B, C be defined as
A: ‘the disc drawn is red’
B: ‘the disc drawn is yellow’
C: ‘the disc drawn is blue’.
(i) The number of red discs = 4, i.e., n (A) = 4
4
Hence P(A) =
9
(ii) The number of yellow discs = 2, i.e., n (B) = 2
2
Therefore, P(B) =
9
(iii) The number of blue discs = 3, i.e., n(C) = 3

2018-19
402 MATHEMATICS

3 1
Therefore, P(C) = =
9 3
(iv) Clearly the event ‘not blue’ is ‘not C’. We know that P(not C) = 1 – P(C)
1 2
Therefore P(not C) = 1 − =
3 3
(v) The event ‘either red or blue’ may be described by the set ‘A or C’
Since, A and C are mutually exclusive events, we have
4 1 7
P(A or C) = P (A ∪ C) = P(A) + P(C) = + =
9 3 9
Example 12 Two students Anil and Ashima appeared in an examination. The probability
that Anil will qualify the examination is 0.05 and that Ashima will qualify the examination
is 0.10. The probability that both will qualify the examination is 0.02. Find the
probability that
(a) Both Anil and Ashima will not qualify the examination.
(b) Atleast one of them will not qualify the examination and
(c) Only one of them will qualify the examination.
Solution Let E and F denote the events that Anil and Ashima will qualify the examination,
respectively. Given that
P(E) = 0.05, P(F) = 0.10 and P(E ∩ F) = 0.02.
Then
(a) The event ‘both Anil and Ashima will not qualify the examination’ may be
expressed as E´ ∩ F´.
Since, E´ is ‘not E’, i.e., Anil will not qualify the examination and F´ is ‘not F’, i.e.,
Ashima will not qualify the examination.
Also E´ ∩ F´ = (E ∪ F)´ (by Demorgan's Law)
Now P(E ∪ F) = P(E) + P(F) – P(E ∩ F)
or P(E ∪ F) = 0.05 + 0.10 – 0.02 = 0.13
Therefore P(E´ ∩ F´) = P(E ∪ F)´ = 1 – P(E ∪ F) = 1 – 0.13 = 0.87
(b) P (atleast one of them will not qualify)
= 1 – P(both of them will qualify)
= 1 – 0.02 = 0.98

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 403

(c) The event only one of them will qualify the examination is same as the event
either (Anil will qualify, and Ashima will not qualify) or (Anil will not qualify and Ashima
will qualify) i.e., E ∩ F´ or E´ ∩ F, where E ∩ F´ and E´ ∩ F are mutually exclusive.
Therefore, P(only one of them will qualify) = P(E ∩ F´ or E´ ∩ F)
= P(E ∩ F´) + P(E´ ∩ F) = P (E) – P(E ∩ F) + P(F) – P (E ∩ F)
= 0.05 – 0.02 + 0.10 – 0.02 = 0.11
Example 13 A committee of two persons is selected from two men and two women.
What is the probability that the committee will have (a) no man? (b) one man? (c) two
men?
Solution The total number of persons = 2 + 2 = 4. Out of these four person, two can
be selected in 4 C 2 ways.
(a) No men in the committee of two means there will be two women in the committee.
Out of two women, two can be selected in 2 C 2 = 1 way.
2
C 2 1× 2 × 1 1
Therefore P ( no man ) = = =
4
C2 4×3 6

(b) One man in the committee means that there is one woman. One man out of 2
can be selected in 2 C1 ways and one woman out of 2 can be selected in 2 C1 ways.

Together they can be selected in 2 C1 × 2 C1 ways.

2
C1 × 2 C1 2 × 2 2
Therefore P (One man ) = = =
4
C2 2×3 3

(c) Two men can be selected in 2 C 2 way.

2
C2 1 1
Hence P (Two men ) = 4
= 4 =
C2 C2 6

EXERCISE 16.3
1. Which of the following can not be valid assignment of probabilities for outcomes
of sample Space S = {ω1 , ω2 , ω3 , ω4 , ω5 , ω6 , ω7 }

2018-19
404 MATHEMATICS

Assignment ω 1
ω 2
ω 3
ω 4
ω 5
ω 6
ω 7

(a) 0.1 0.01 0.05 0.03 0.01 0.2 0.6

1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(b)
7 7 7 7 7 7 7
(c) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
(d) – 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 – 0.2 0.1 0.3
1 2 3 4 5 6 15
(e)
14 14 14 14 14 14 14
2. A coin is tossed twice, what is the probability that atleast one tail occurs?
3. A die is thrown, find the probability of following events:
(i) A prime number will appear,
(ii) A number greater than or equal to 3 will appear,
(iii) A number less than or equal to one will appear,
(iv) A number more than 6 will appear,
(v) A number less than 6 will appear.
4. A card is selected from a pack of 52 cards.
(a) How many points are there in the sample space?
(b) Calculate the probability that the card is an ace of spades.
(c) Calculate the probability that the card is (i) an ace (ii) black card.
5. A fair coin with 1 marked on one face and 6 on the other and a fair die are both
tossed. find the probability that the sum of numbers that turn up is (i) 3 (ii) 12
6. There are four men and six women on the city council. If one council member is
selected for a committee at random, how likely is it that it is a woman?
7. A fair coin is tossed four times, and a person win Re 1 for each head and lose
Rs 1.50 for each tail that turns up.
From the sample space calculate how many different amounts of money you can
have after four tosses and the probability of having each of these amounts.
8. Three coins are tossed once. Find the probability of getting
(i) 3 heads (ii) 2 heads (iii) atleast 2 heads
(iv) atmost 2 heads (v) no head (vi) 3 tails
(vii) exactly two tails (viii) no tail (ix) atmost two tails
2
9. If is the probability of an event, what is the probability of the event ‘not A’.
11
10. A letter is chosen at random from the word ‘ASSASSINATION’. Find the
probability that letter is (i) a vowel (ii) a consonant

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 405

11. In a lottery, a person choses six different natural numbers at random from 1 to 20,
and if these six numbers match with the six numbers already fixed by the lottery
committee, he wins the prize. What is the probability of winning the prize in the
game? [Hint order of the numbers is not important.]
12. Check whether the following probabilities P(A) and P(B) are consistently defined
(i) P(A) = 0.5, P(B) = 0.7, P(A ∩ B) = 0.6
(ii) P(A) = 0.5, P(B) = 0.4, P(A ∪ B) = 0.8
13. Fill in the blanks in following table:
P(A) P(B) P(A ∩ B) P(A ∪ B)
1 1 1
(i) ...
3 5 15
(ii) 0.35 ... 0.25 0.6
(iii) 0.5 0.35 ... 0.7
3 1
14. Given P(A) = and P(B) = . Find P(A or B), if A and B are mutually exclusive
5 5
events.
1 1 1
15. If E and F are events such that P(E) = , P(F) = and P(E and F) = , find
4 2 8
(i) P(E or F), (ii) P(not E and not F).
16. Events E and F are such that P(not E or not F) = 0.25, State whether E and F are
mutually exclusive.
17. A and B are events such that P(A) = 0.42, P(B) = 0.48 and P(A and B) = 0.16.
Determine (i) P(not A), (ii) P(not B) and (iii) P(A or B)
18. In Class XI of a school 40% of the students study Mathematics and 30% study
Biology. 10% of the class study both Mathematics and Biology. If a student is
selected at random from the class, find the probability that he will be studying
Mathematics or Biology.
19. In an entrance test that is graded on the basis of two examinations, the probability
of a randomly chosen student passing the first examination is 0.8 and the probability
of passing the second examination is 0.7. The probability of passing atleast one of
them is 0.95. What is the probability of passing both?
20. The probability that a student will pass the final examination in both English and
Hindi is 0.5 and the probability of passing neither is 0.1. If the probability of
passing the English examination is 0.75, what is the probability of passing the
Hindi examination?

2018-19
406 MATHEMATICS

21. In a class of 60 students, 30 opted for NCC, 32 opted for NSS and 24 opted for
both NCC and NSS. If one of these students is selected at random, find the
probability that
(i) The student opted for NCC or NSS.
(ii) The student has opted neither NCC nor NSS.
(iii) The student has opted NSS but not NCC.

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 14 On her vacations Veena visits four cities (A, B, C and D) in a random
order. What is the probability that she visits
(i) A before B? (ii) A before B and B before C?
(iii) A first and B last? (iv) A either first or second?
(v) A just before B?
Solution The number of arrangements (orders) in which Veena can visit four cities A,
B, C, or D is 4! i.e., 24.Therefore, n (S) = 24.
Since the number of elements in the sample space of the experiment is 24 all of these
outcomes are considered to be equally likely. A sample space for the
experiment is
S = {ABCD, ABDC, ACBD, ACDB, ADBC, ADCB
BACD, BADC, BDAC, BDCA, BCAD, BCDA
CABD, CADB, CBDA, CBAD, CDAB, CDBA
DABC, DACB, DBCA, DBAC, DCAB, DCBA}
(i) Let the event ‘she visits A before B’ be denoted by E
Therefore, E = {ABCD, CABD, DABC, ABDC, CADB, DACB
ACBD, ACDB, ADBC, CDAB, DCAB, ADCB}
n (E ) 12 1
P (E ) = = =
Thus n (S) 24 2
(ii) Let the event ‘Veena visits A before B and B before C’ be denoted by F.
Here F = {ABCD, DABC, ABDC, ADBC}
n ( F) 4 1
Therefore, P ( F) = n S = 24 = 6
( )
Students are advised to find the probability in case of (iii), (iv) and (v).

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 407

Example 15 Find the probability that when a hand of 7 cards is drawn from a well
shuffled deck of 52 cards, it contains (i) all Kings (ii) 3 Kings (iii) atleast 3 Kings.
52
Solution Total number of possible hands = C7
(i) Number of hands with 4 Kings = 4 C 4 × 48
C3 (other 3 cards must be chosen
from the rest 48 cards)
4
C 4 × 48 C3 1
Hence P (a hand will have 4 Kings) = 52
=
C7 7735

(ii) Number of hands with 3 Kings and 4 non-King cards = 4 C3 × 48 C 4

4
C3 × 48 C 4 9
Therefore P (3 Kings) = 52
=
C7 1547
(iii) P(atleast 3 King) = P(3 Kings or 4 Kings)
= P(3 Kings) + P(4 Kings)
9 1 46
= + =
1547 7735 7735

Example 16 If A, B, C are three events associated with a random experiment,

prove that
P ( A ∪ B ∪ C ) = P ( A ) + P ( B ) +P ( C ) − P ( A ∩ B ) − P ( A ∩ C )
– P ( B ∩ C) + P ( A ∩ B ∩ C)
Solution Consider E = B ∪ C so that
P (A ∪ B ∪ C ) = P (A ∪ E )
= P (A) + P (E) − P (A ∩ E ) ... (1)
Now
P (E ) = P (B ∪ C)

= P ( B) + P (C ) − P ( B ∩ C ) ... (2)

Also A ∩ E = A ∩ ( B ∪ C ) = ( A ∩ B ) ∪ ( A ∩ C ) [using distribution property of

intersection of sets over the union]. Thus
P ( A ∩ E ) = P ( A ∩ B ) + P (A ∩ C ) – P ( A ∩ B ) ∩ ( A ∩ C )

2018-19
408 MATHEMATICS

= P ( A ∩ B ) + P ( A ∩ C ) – P [A ∩ B ∩ C ] ... (3)
Using (2) and (3) in (1), we get
P [A ∪ B ∪ C] = P (A ) + P ( B) + P (C ) − P ( B ∩ C )

– P ( A ∩ B) − P ( A ∩ C ) + P ( A ∩ B ∩ C )

Example 17 In a relay race there are five teams A, B, C, D and E.

(a) What is the probability that A, B and C finish first, second and third,
respectively.
(b) What is the probability that A, B and C are first three to finish (in any order)
(Assume that all finishing orders are equally likely)
Solution If we consider the sample space consisting of all finishing orders in the first
5!
three places, we will have 5 P3 , i.e., = 5 × 4 × 3 = 60 sample points, each with
(5 − 3)!
1
a probability of .
60
(a) A, B and C finish first, second and third, respectively. There is only one finishing
order for this, i.e., ABC.
1
Thus P(A, B and C finish first, second and third respectively) = .
60
(b) A, B and C are the first three finishers. There will be 3! arrangements for A, B
and C. Therefore, the sample points corresponding to this event will be 3! in
number.
3! 6 1
So P (A, B and C are first three to finish) = = =
60 60 10

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 16

1. A box contains 10 red marbles, 20 blue marbles and 30 green marbles. 5 marbles
are drawn from the box, what is the probability that
(i) all will be blue? (ii) atleast one will be green?
2. 4 cards are drawn from a well – shuffled deck of 52 cards. What is the probability
of obtaining 3 diamonds and one spade?

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 409

3. A die has two faces each with number ‘1’, three faces each with number ‘2’ and
one face with number ‘3’. If die is rolled once, determine
(i) P(2) (ii) P(1 or 3) (iii) P(not 3)
4. In a certain lottery 10,000 tickets are sold and ten equal prizes are awarded.
What is the probability of not getting a prize if you buy (a) one ticket (b) two
tickets (c) 10 tickets.
5. Out of 100 students, two sections of 40 and 60 are formed. If you and your friend
are among the 100 students, what is the probability that
(a) you both enter the same section?
(b) you both enter the different sections?
6. Three letters are dictated to three persons and an envelope is addressed to each
of them, the letters are inserted into the envelopes at random so that each envelope
contains exactly one letter. Find the probability that at least one letter is in its
proper envelope.
7. A and B are two events such that P(A) = 0.54, P(B) = 0.69 and P(A ∩ B) = 0.35.
Find (i) P(A ∪ B) (ii) P(A´ ∩ B´) (iii) P(A ∩ B´) (iv) P(B ∩ A´)
8. From the employees of a company, 5 persons are selected to represent them in
the managing committee of the company. Particulars of five persons are as follows:
S. No. Name Sex Age in years
1. Harish M 30
2. Rohan M 33
3. Sheetal F 46
4. Alis F 28
5. Salim M 41
A person is selected at random from this group to act as a spokesperson. What is
the probability that the spokesperson will be either male or over 35 years?
9. If 4-digit numbers greater than 5,000 are randomly formed from the digits
0, 1, 3, 5, and 7, what is the probability of forming a number divisible by 5 when,
(i) the digits are repeated? (ii) the repetition of digits is not allowed?
10. The number lock of a suitcase has 4 wheels, each labelled with ten digits i.e.,
from 0 to 9. The lock opens with a sequence of four digits with no repeats. What
is the probability of a person getting the right sequence to open the suitcase?

2018-19
410 MATHEMATICS

Summary
In this Chapter, we studied about the axiomatic approach of probability. The main
features of this Chapter are as follows:
® Sample space: The set of all possible outcomes
® Sample points: Elements of sample space
® Event: A subset of the sample space
® Impossible event : The empty set
® Sure event: The whole sample space
® Complementary event or ‘not event’ : The set A′ or S – A
® Event A or B: The set A ∪ B
® Event A and B: The set A ∩ B
® Event A and not B: The set A – B
® Mutually exclusive event: A and B are mutually exclusive if A ∩ B = φ
® Exhaustive and mutually exclusive events: Events E1, E2,..., En are mutually
exclusive and exhaustive if E1 ∪ E2 ∪ ...∪ En = S and Ei ∩ Ej = φ V i ≠ j
® Probability: Number P (ωi) associated with sample point ω i such that
(i) 0 ≤ P (ωi) ≤ 1 (ii) ∑ P (ω ) for all ω ∈ S = 1
i i

(iii) P(A) = ∑ P (ω ) for all ω ∈ A. The number P (ω ) is called probability

i i i

of the outcome ωi.

® Equally likely outcomes: All outcomes with equal probability
® Probability of an event: For a finite sample space with equally likely outcomes
n(A)
Probability of an event P(A) = , where n(A) = number of elements in
n(S)
the set A, n(S) = number of elements in the set S.
® If A and B are any two events, then
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
equivalently, P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A ∩ B)
® If A and B are mutually exclusive, then P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B)
® If A is any event, then
P(not A) = 1 – P(A)

2018-19
 PROBABILITY 411

Historical Note
Probability theory like many other branches of mathematics, evolved out of
practical consideration. It had its origin in the 16th century when an Italian physician
and mathematician Jerome Cardan (1501–1576) wrote the first book on the subject
“Book on Games of Chance” (Biber de Ludo Aleae). It was published in 1663
after his death.
In 1654, a gambler Chevalier de Metre approached the well known French
Philosopher and Mathematician Blaise Pascal (1623–1662) for certain dice
problem. Pascal became interested in these problems and discussed with famous
French Mathematician Pierre de Fermat (1601–1665). Both Pascal and Fermat
solved the problem independently. Besides, Pascal and Fermat, outstanding
contributions to probability theory were also made by Christian Huygenes (1629–
1665), a Dutchman, J. Bernoulli (1654–1705), De Moivre (1667–1754), a
Frenchman Pierre Laplace (1749–1827), the Russian P.L Chebyshev (1821–1897),
A. A Markov (1856–1922) and A. N Kolmogorove (1903–1987). Kolmogorov is
credited with the axiomatic theory of probability. His book ‘Foundations of
Probability’ published in 1933, introduces probability as a set function and is
considered a classic.

—v —

2018-19
 Appendix 1

INFINITE SERIES

A.1.1 Introduction
As discussed in the Chapter 9 on Sequences and Series, a sequence a1, a2, ..., an, ...
having infinite number of terms is called infinite sequence and its indicated sum, i.e.,
a1 + a2 + a3 + ... + an + ... is called an infinte series associated with infinite sequence.
This series can also be expressed in abbreviated form using the sigma notation, i.e.,
∞

a 1 + a2 + a 3 + . . . + an + . . . = ∑a
k =1
k

In this Chapter, we shall study about some special types of series which may be
required in different problem situations.
A.1.2 Binomial Theorem for any Index
In Chapter 8, we discussed the Binomial Theorem in which the index was a positive
integer. In this Section, we state a more general form of the theorem in which the
index is not necessarily a whole number. It gives us a particular type of infinite series,
called Binomial Series. We illustrate few applications, by examples.
We know the formula
(1 + x)n = n C0 + n C1 x + . . . + n Cn xn
Here, n is non-negative integer. Observe that if we replace index n by negative
integer or a fraction, then the combinations n C r do not make any sense.
We now state (without proof), the Binomial Theorem, giving an infinite series in
which the index is negative or a fraction and not a whole number.
Theorem The formula
m ( m − 1) 2 m ( m − 1)( m − 2 ) 3
(1 + x )
m
= 1 + mx + x + x + ...
1.2 1.2.3
holds whenever x < 1 .

2018-19
 INFINITE SERIES 413

Remark 1. Note carefully the condition | x | < 1, i.e., – 1< x < 1 is necessary when m
is negative integer or a fraction. For example, if we take x = – 2 and m = – 2, we
obtain
( −2 )( −3)
(1 − 2 )−2 = 1 + ( −2 )( −2 ) + (−2 )2 + ...
1.2
or 1= 1 + 4 + 12 + . . .
This is not possible
2. Note that there are infinite number of terms in the expansion of (1+ x)m, when m
is a negative integer or a fraction
m m
  b  m b
(a + b) =  a 1 +   = a 1 + 
m
Consider
  a   a

 b m ( m − 1)  b  
2

= a m
 1 + m +   + ...
 a 1.2 a 

m −1 m ( m − 1)
= a + ma b +
m
a m − 2b 2 + ...
1.2

b
This expansion is valid when < 1 or equivalently when | b | < | a |.
a
The general term in the expansion of (a + b)m is
m ( m − 1)( m − 2 )...( m − r + 1) a m − r b r
1.2.3...r
We give below certain particular cases of Binomial Theorem, when we assume
x < 1 , these are left to students as exercises:
1. (1 + x) – 1 = 1 – x + x2 – x3 + . . .
2. (1 – x) – 1 = 1 + x + x2 + x3 + . . .
3. (1 + x) – 2 = 1 –2 x + 3x2 – 4x3 + . . .
4. (1 – x) – 2 = 1 +2x + 3x2 + 4x3 + . . .
1
−
 x 2
Example 1 Expand  1 −  , when | x | < 2.
 2

2018-19
414 MATHEMATICS

Solution We have

1  1  1  3 
 x
−
 −  −x  −  −  2
= 1 +  2    +  2  2   − x  + ...
2
1 −     
 2 1  2  1. 2  2

x 3x 2
= 1+ + + ...
4 32
A.1.3 Infinite Geometric Series
From Chapter 9, Section 9.5, a sequence a 1 , a 2, a 3, ..., a n is called G.P., if
ak +1
ak = r (constant) for k = 1, 2, 3, ..., n–1. Particularly, if we take a1 = a, then the
resulting sequence a, ar, ar2, ..., arn–1 is taken as the standard form of G.P., where a is
first term and r, the common ratio of G.P.
Earlier, we have discussed the formula to find the sum of finite series
a + ar + ar2 + ... + arn – 1 which is given by

Sn =
(
a 1− rn ).
1− r

In this section, we state the formula to find the sum of infinite geometric series
a + ar + ar2 + ... + arn – 1 + ... and illustrate the same by examples.

2 4
Let us consider the G.P. 1, , ,...
3 9
2
Here a = 1, r = . We have
3
n
2
1−  
 3  = 3 1 −  2  
n
Sn =     ... (1)
2   3  
1−
3

n
 2
Let us study the behaviour of   as n becomes larger and larger.
 3

2018-19
 INFINITE SERIES 415

n 1 5 10 20
n
2
  0.6667 0.1316872428 0.01734152992 0.00030072866
3
n
2
We observe that as n becomes larger and larger,   becomes closer and closer to
3
n
2
zero. Mathematically, we say that as n becomes sufficiently large,   becomes
3
n
2
sufficiently small. In other words, as n → ∞,   → 0 . Consequently, we find that
3
the sum of infinitely many terms is given by S = 3.
Thus, for infinite geometric progression a, ar, ar2, ..., if numerical value of common
ratio r is less than 1, then

(
a 1− rn ) a
−
ar n
Sn = =
1− r 1− r 1− r

ar n
In this case, r n → 0 as n → ∞ since | r | <1 and then → 0 . Therefore,
1− r

a
Sn → as n → ∞ .
1− r
Symbolically, sum to infinity of infinite geometric series is denoted by S. Thus,
a
we have S=
1− r
For example
1 1 1 1
(i) 1+ + + + ... = =2
2 2 2 23 1−
1
2

1 1 1 1 1 2
(ii) 1 − + 2 − 3 + ... = = =
2 2 2  1 1 3
1−  −  1+
 2 2

2018-19
416 MATHEMATICS

Example 2 Find the sum to infinity of the G.P. ;

−5 5 −5
, , ,....
4 16 64
−5 1
Solution Here a = and r = − . Also | r | <1 .
4 4

−5 −5
Hence, the sum to infinity is 4 = 4 = −1 .
1 5
1+
4 4
A.1.4 Exponential Series
Leonhard Euler (1707 – 1783), the great Swiss mathematician introduced the number
e in his calculus text in 1748. The number e is useful in calculus as π in the study of the
circle.
Consider the following infinite series of numbers
1 1 1 1
1+ + + + + ... ... (1)
1! 2! 3! 4!
The sum of the series given in (1) is denoted by the number e
Let us estimate the value of the number e.
Since every term of the series (1) is positive, it is clear that its sum is also positive.
Consider the two sums
1 1 1 1
+ + + ... + + ... ... (2)
3! 4! 5! n!
1 1 1 1
and 2
+ 3 + 4 + .... + n−1 + ... ... (3)
2 2 2 2
Observe that
1 1 1 1 1 1
= and 2 = , which gives < 2
3! 6 2 4 3! 2

1 1 1 1 1 1
= and 3 = , which gives <
4! 24 2 8 4! 23

1 1 1 1 1 1
= and 4 = , which gives < 4 .
5! 120 2 16 5! 2

2018-19
 INFINITE SERIES 417

Therefore, by analogy, we can say that

1 1
< n −1 , when n > 2
n! 2
We observe that each term in (2) is less than the corresponding term in (3),
1 1 1 1  1 1 1 1 
Therefore  3! + 4! + 5! + ... + n!  <  2 + 3 + 4 + ... + n−1 + ...  ... (4)
   2 2 2 2 

 1 1
Adding 1 + 1! + 2!  on both sides of (4), we get,
 

 1 1 1 1 1 1 
1 + +  +  + + + ... + + ...
 1! 2!   3! 4! 5! n! 

 1 1  1 1 1 1  ... (5)
<  1 + +  +  2 + 3 + 4 + ... + n−1 + ...  
 1! 2!   2 2 2 2 

  1 1 1 1 1 
= 1 +  1 + + 2 + 3 + 4 + ... + n−1 + ...  
  2 2 2 2 2 

1
= 1+ =1+ 2 = 3
1
1−
2
Left hand side of (5) represents the series (1). Therefore e < 3 and also e > 2 and
hence 2 < e < 3.
Remark The exponential series involving variable x can be expressed as
x x 2 x3 xn
ex = 1 + + + + ... + + ...
1! 2! 3! n!
Example 3 Find the coefficient of x2 in the expansion of e2x+3 as a series in
powers of x.
Solution In the exponential series
x x 2 x3
e = 1+
x + + + ...
1! 2! 3!
replacing x by (2x + 3), we get

2018-19
418 MATHEMATICS

2 x+ 3 1+
( 2 x + 3 ) ( 2 x + 3)
+
2

+ ...
e =
1! 2!

( 2 x + 3)n (3+ 2 x) n
Here, the general term is = . This can be expanded by the
n! n!
Binomial Theorem as
1 n n
3 + C1 3n −1 (2 x ) + n C2 3n− 2 (2 x ) + ... + ( 2 x )  .
2 n

n!  

2
n
C 2 3n − 2 2 2
Here, the coefficient of x is . Therefore, the coefficient of x2 in the whole
n!
series is
∞ n
C 2 3n − 2 22 ∞
n ( n − 1)3 n− 2

∑
n =2 n!
= 2
n= 2
∑ n!

∞
3n –2
= 2 ∑
n = 2 ( n − 2 )!
[using n! = n (n – 1) (n – 2)!]

 3 32 33 
= 1 + + + + ...
2
 1! 2! 3! 
= 2e3 .
Thus 2e is the coefficient of x2 in the expansion of e2x+3.
3

Alternatively e2x+3 = e3 . e2x

 2 x (2 x ) 2 (2 x)3 
e3 1 + + + + ...
=  1! 2! 3! 
2
3 2
Thus, the coefficient of x2 in the expansion of e2x+3 is e . = 2e 3
2!

Example 4 Find the value of e2, rounded off to one decimal place.
Solution Using the formula of exponential series involving x, we have
x x 2 x3 xn
ex = 1 + + + + ... + + ...
1! 2! 3! n!

2018-19
 INFINITE SERIES 419

Putting x = 2, we get

2 2 2 23 2 4 25 2 6
e2 = 1 + + + + + + + ...
1! 2! 3! 4! 5! 6!
4 2 4 4
= 1+ 2 + 2 + + + + + ...
3 3 15 45
≥ the sum of first seven terms ≥ 7.355.
On the other hand, we have

 2 2 2 2 3 2 4  2 5  2 2 2 23 
e2 < 1 + + + +  +  1 + + 2 + 3 + ... 
 1! 2! 3! 4!  5!  6 6 6 

 
4  1 1  4 1 
2
2
= 7 +  1 + +   + ...  = 7 +   = 7 + = 7.4 .
15  3  3   15 1
 1 −  5
 3

Thus, e2 lies between 7.355 and 7.4. Therefore, the value of e2, rounded off to one
decimal place, is 7.4.
A.1.5 Logarithmic Series
Another very important series is logarithmic series which is also in the form of infinite
series. We state the following result without proof and illustrate its application with an
example.
Theorem If | x | < 1, then
x 2 x3
log e (1 + x ) = x −+ − ...
2 3
The series on the right hand side of the above is called the logarithmic series.

 Note The expansion of log (1+x) is valid for x = 1. Substituting x = 1 in the

expansion of log (1+x), we get
e

1 1 1
log e 2 = 1 – + – + ...
2 3 4

2018-19
420 MATHEMATICS

Example 5 If α, β are the roots of the equation x 2 − px + q = 0 , prove that

α 2 + β2 2 α3 + β3 3
( )
log e 1 + px + qx 2 = ( α + β ) x −
2
x +
3
x − ...

 α 2 x 2 α 3 x3   β 2 x 2 β3 x3 
Solution Right hand side =  α x − + − ... +
  β x − + − ...
 2 3   2 3 

= log e (1 + α x ) + log (1 + β x )

(
= log e 1 + ( α + β ) x + αβx
2
)
= log e (1 + px + qx )
2
= Left hand side.

Here, we have used the facts α + β = p and αβ = q . We know this from the
given roots of the quadratic equation. We have also assumed that both | α x | < 1 and
| β x | < 1.

— —

2018-19
 Appendix 2

MATHEMATICAL MODELLING

A.2.1 Introduction
Much of our progress in the last few centuries has made it necessary to apply
mathematical methods to real-life problems arising from different fields – be it Science,
Finance, Management etc. The use of Mathematics in solving real-world problems
has become widespread especially due to the increasing computational power of digital
computers and computing methods, both of which have facilitated the handling of
lengthy and complicated problems. The process of translation of a real-life problem
into a mathematical form can give a better representation and solution of certain
problems. The process of translation is called Mathematical Modelling.
Here we shall familiaries you with the steps involved in this process through
examples. We shall first talk about what a mathematical model is, then we discuss the
steps involved in the process of modelling.
A.2.2 Preliminaries
Mathematical modelling is an essential tool for understanding the world. In olden days
the Chinese, Egyptians, Indians, Babylonians and Greeks indulged in understanding
and predicting the natural phenomena through their knowledge of mathematics. The
architects, artisans and craftsmen based many of their works of art on geometric
prinicples.
Suppose a surveyor wants to measure the height of a tower. It is physically very
difficult to measure the height using the measuring tape. So, the other option is to find
out the factors that are useful to find the height. From his knowledge of trigonometry,
he knows that if he has an angle of elevation and the distance of the foot of the tower
to the point where he is standing, then he can calculate the height of the tower.
So, his job is now simplified to find the angle of elevation to the top of the tower
and the distance from the foot of the tower to the point where he is standing. Both of
which are easily measurable. Thus, if he measures the angle of elevation as 40° and
the distance as 450m, then the problem can be solved as given in Example 1.

2018-19
422 MATHEMATICS

Example 1 The angle of elevation of the top of a tower from a point O on the ground,
which is 450 m away from the foot of the tower, is 40°. Find the height of the tower.
Solution We shall solve this in different steps.
Step 1 We first try to understand the real problem. In the problem a tower is given and
its height is to be measured. Let h denote the height. It is given that the horizontal
distance of the foot of the tower from a particular point O on the ground is 450 m. Let
d denotes this distance. Then d = 450m. We also know that the angle of elevation,
denoted by θ, is 40°.
The real problem is to find the height h of the tower using the known distance d
and the angle of elevation θ.
Step 2 The three quantities mentioned in the problem are height,
distance and angle of elevation.
So we look for a relation connecting these three quantities.
This is obtained by expressing it geometrically in the following
way (Fig 1).
AB denotes the tower. OA gives the horizontal distance
from the point O to foot of the tower. ∠AOB is the angle of
elevation. Then we have
h
tan θ = or h = d tan θ ... (1)
d Fig 1
This is an equation connecting θ, h and d.
Step 3 We use Equation (1) to solve h. We have θ = 40°. and d = 450m. Then we get
h = tan 40° × 450 = 450 × 0.839 = 377.6m
Step 4 Thus we got that the height of the tower approximately 378m.
Let us now look at the different steps used in solving the problem. In step 1, we
have studied the real problem and found that the problem involves three parameters
height, distance and angle of elevation. That means in this step we have studied the
real-life problem and identified the parameters.
In the Step 2, we used some geometry and found that the problem can be
represented geometrically as given in Fig 1. Then we used the trigonometric ratio for
the “tangent” function and found the relation as
h = d tan θ
So, in this step we formulated the problem mathematically. That means we found
an equation representing the real problem.

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 423

In Step 3, we solved the mathematical problem and got that h = 377.6m. That is
we found
Solution of the problem.
In the last step, we interpreted the solution of the problem and stated that the
height of the tower is approximately 378m. We call this as
Interpreting the mathematical solution to the real situation
In fact these are the steps mathematicians and others use to study various real-
life situations. We shall consider the question, “why is it necessary to use mathematics
to solve different situations.”
Here are some of the examples where mathematics is used effectively to study
various situations.
1. Proper flow of blood is essential to transmit oxygen and other nutrients to various
parts of the body in humanbeings as well as in all other animals. Any constriction
in the blood vessel or any change in the characteristics of blood vessels can
change the flow and cause damages ranging from minor discomfort to sudden
death. The problem is to find the relationship between blood flow and physiological
characteristics of blood vessel.
2. In cricket a third umpire takes decision of a LBW by looking at the trajectory of
a ball, simulated, assuming that the batsman is not there. Mathematical equations
are arrived at, based on the known paths of balls before it hits the batsman’s leg.
This simulated model is used to take decision of LBW.
3. Meteorology department makes weather predictions based on mathematical
models. Some of the parameters which affect change in weather conditions are
temperature, air pressure, humidity, wind speed, etc. The instruments are used to
measure these parameters which include thermometers to measure temperature,
barometers to measure airpressure, hygrometers to measure humidity,
anemometers to measure wind speed. Once data are received from many stations
around the country and feed into computers for further analysis and interpretation.
4. Department of Agriculture wants to estimate the yield of rice in India from the
standing crops. Scientists identify areas of rice cultivation and find the average
yield per acre by cutting and weighing crops from some representative fields.
Based on some statistical techniques decisions are made on the average yield of
rice.
How do mathematicians help in solving such problems? They sit with experts in
the area, for example, a physiologist in the first problem and work out a
mathematical equivalent of the problem. This equivalent consists of one or more
equations or inequalities etc. which are called the mathematical models. Then

2018-19
424 MATHEMATICS

solve the model and interpret the solution in terms of the original problem. Before
we explain the process, we shall discuss what a mathematical model is.
A mathematical model is a representation which comprehends a situation.
An interesting geometric model is illustrated in the following example.

Example 2 (Bridge Problem) Konigsberg is a town on the Pregel River, which in the
18th century was a German
town, but now is Russian. Within
the town are two river islands
that are connected to the banks
with seven bridges as shown
in (Fig 2).
People tried to walk around
the town in a way that only
crossed each bridge once, but it
proved to be difficult problem.
Leonhard Euler, a Swiss Fig 2
mathematician in the service of
the Russian empire Catherine the Great, heard about the problem. In 1736 Euler proved
that the walk was not possible to do. He proved this by inventing a kind of diagram
called a network, that is made up of vertices
(dots where lines meet) and arcs (lines) (Fig3).
He used four dots (vertices) for the two
river banks and the two islands. These have
been marked A, B and C, D. The seven lines
(arcs) are the seven bridges. You can see that
3 bridges (arcs) join to riverbank, A, and 3 join
to riverbank B. 5 bridges (arcs) join to island
C, and 3 join to island D. This means that all
the vertices have an odd number of arcs, so Fig 3
they are called odd vertices (An even vertex
would have to have an even number of arcs joining to it).
Remember that the problem was to travel around town crossing each bridge only
once. On Euler’s network this meant tracing over each arc only once, visiting all the
vertices. Euler proved it could not be done because he worked out that, to have an odd
vertex you would have to begin or end the trip at that vertex. (Think about it). Since
there can only be one beginning and one end, there can only be two odd vertices if you
are to trace over each arc only once. Since the bridge problem has 4 odd vertices, it
just not possible to do!

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 425

After Euler proved his Theorem, much

water has flown under the bridges in Konigsberg.
In 1875, an extra bridge was built in Konigsberg,
joining the land areas of river banks A and B
(Fig 4). Is it possible now for the Konigsbergians
to go round the city, using each bridge only once?
Here the situation will be as in Fig 4. After
the addition of the new edge, both the vertices
A and B have become even degree vertices.
Fig 4
However, D and C still have odd degree. So, it
is possible for the Konigsbergians to go around the city using each bridge exactly once.
The invention of networks began a new theory called graph theory which is now
used in many ways, including planning and mapping railway networks (Fig 4).
A.2.3 What is Mathematical Modelling?
Here, we shall define what mathematical modelling is and illustrate the different
processes involved in this through examples.
Definition Mathematical modelling is an attempt to study some part (or form) of the
real-life problem in mathematical terms.
Conversion of physical situation into mathematics with some suitable
conditions is known as mathematical modelling. Mathematical modelling is
nothing but a technique and the pedagogy taken from fine arts and not from the
basic sciences. Let us now understand the different processes involved in Mathematical
Modelling. Four steps are involved in this process. As an illustrative example, we
consider the modelling done to study the motion of a simple pendulum.
Understanding the problem
This involves, for example, understanding the process involved in the motion of simple
pendulum. All of us are familiar with the simple pendulum. This pendulum is simply a
mass (known as bob) attached to one end of a string whose other end is fixed at a
point. We have studied that the motion of the simple pendulum is periodic. The period
depends upon the length of the string and acceleration due to gravity. So, what we need
to find is the period of oscillation. Based on this, we give a precise statement of the
problem as
Statement How do we find the period of oscillation of the simple pendulum?
The next step is formulation.
Formulation Consists of two main steps.
1. Identifying the relevant factors In this, we find out what are the factors/

2018-19
426 MATHEMATICS

parameters involved in the problem. For example, in the case of pendulum, the factors
are period of oscillation (T), the mass of the bob (m), effective length (l ) of the pendulum
which is the distance between the point of suspension to the centre of mass of the bob.
Here, we consider the length of string as effective length of the pendulum and acceleration
due to gravity (g), which is assumed to be constant at a place.
So, we have identified four parameters for studying the problem. Now, our purpose
is to find T. For this we need to understand what are the parameters that affect the
period which can be done by performing a simple experiment.
We take two metal balls of two different masses and conduct experiment with
each of them attached to two strings of equal lengths. We measure the period of
oscillation. We make the observation that there is no appreciable change of the period
with mass. Now, we perform the same experiment on equal mass of balls but take
strings of different lengths and observe that there is clear dependence of the period on
the length of the pendulum.
This indicates that the mass m is not an essential parameter for finding period
whereas the length l is an essential parameter.
This process of searching the essential parameters is necessary before we go
to the next step.
2. Mathematical description This involves finding an equation, inequality or a
geometric figure using the parameters already identified.
In the case of simple pendulum, experiments were conducted in which the values
of period T were measured for different values of l. These values were plotted on a
graph which resulted in a curve that resembled a parabola. It implies that the relation
between T and l could be expressed
T2 = kl ... (1)

4 2
It was found that k = . This gives the equation
g

l
T = 2 ... (2)
g
Equation (2) gives the mathematical formulation of the problem.
Finding the solution The mathematical formulation rarely gives the answer directly.
Usually we have to do some operation which involves solving an equation, calculation
or applying a theorem etc. In the case of simple pendulums the solution involves applying
the formula given in Equation (2).

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 427

The period of oscillation calculated for two different pendulums having different
lengths is given in Table 1
Table 1
l 225 cm 275cm
T 3.04 sec 3.36 sec

The table shows that for l = 225 cm, T = 3.04 sec and for l = 275 cm, T = 3.36 sec.
Interpretation/Validation
A mathematical model is an attempt to study, the essential characteristic of a real life
problem. Many times model equations are obtained by assuming the situation in an
idealised context. The model will be useful only if it explains all the facts that we would
like it to explain. Otherwise, we will reject it, or else, improve it, then test it again. In
other words, we measure the effectiveness of the model by comparing the results
obtained from the mathematical model, with the known facts about the real
problem. This process is called validation of the model. In the case of simple
pendulum, we conduct some experiments on the pendulum and find out period of
oscillation. The results of the experiment are given in Table 2.
Table 2
Periods obtained experimentally for four different pendulums
Mass (gms) Length (cms) Time (secs)

385 275 3.371

225 3.056
230 275 3.352
225 3.042
Now, we compare the measured values in Table 2 with the calculated values given in
Table 1.
The difference in the observed values and calculated values gives the error. For
example, for l = 275 cm, and mass m = 385 gm,
error = 3.371 – 3.36 = 0.011
which is small and the model is accepted.
Once we accept the model, we have to interpret the model. The process of
describing the solution in the context of the real situation is called interpretation
of the model. In this case, we can interpret the solution in the following way:
(a) The period is directly proportional to the square root of the length of the
pendulum.

2018-19
428 MATHEMATICS

(b) It is inversely proportional to the square root of the acceleration due to gravity.
Our validation and interpretation of this model shows that the mathematical model
is in good agreement with the practical (or observed) values. But we found that there
is some error in the calculated result and measured result. This is because we have
neglected the mass of the string and resistance of the medium. So, in such situation we
look for a better model and this process continues.
This leads us to an important observation. The real world is far too complex to
understand and describe completely. We just pick one or two main factors to be
completely accurate that may influence the situation. Then try to obtain a simplified
model which gives some information about the situation. We study the simple situation
with this model expecting that we can obtain a better model of the situation.
Now, we summarise the main process involved in the modelling as
(a) Formulation (b) Solution (c) Interpretation/Validation
The next example shows how modelling can be done using the techniques of finding
graphical solution of inequality.
Example 3 A farm house uses atleast 800 kg of special food daily. The special food is
a mixture of corn and soyabean with the following compositions

Table 3

Material Nutrients present per Kg Nutrients present per Kg Cost per Kg

Protein Fibre

Corn .09 .02 Rs 10

Soyabean .60 .06 Rs 20

The dietary requirements of the special food stipulate atleast 30% protein and at most
5% fibre. Determine the daily minimum cost of the food mix.
Solution Step 1 Here the objective is to minimise the total daily cost of the food which
is made up of corn and soyabean. So the variables (factors) that are to be considered
are
x = the amount of corn
y = the amount of soyabean
z = the cost
Step 2 The last column in Table 3 indicates that z, x, y are related by the equation
z = 10x + 20y ... (1)
The problem is to minimise z with the following constraints:

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 429

(a) The farm used atleast 800 kg food consisting of corn and soyabean
i.e., x + y ≥ 800
... (2)
(b) The food should have atleast 30% protein dietary requirement in the proportion
as given in the first column of Table 3. This gives
0.09x + 0.6y ≥ 0.3 (x + y) ... (3)
(c) Similarly the food should have atmost 5% fibre in the proportion given in
2nd column of Table 3. This gives
0.02x + 0.06 y ≤ 0.05 (x + y) ... (4)
We simplify the constraints given in (2), (3) and (4) by grouping all the coefficients
of x, y.
Then the problem can be restated in the following mathematical form.
Statement Minimise z subject to
x + y ≥ 800
0.21x – .30y ≤ 0
0.03x – .01y ≥ 0
This gives the formulation of the model.
Step 3 This can be solved graphically. The shaded region in Fig 5 gives the possible
solution of the equations. From the graph it is clear that the minimum value is got at the

Fig 5
point (470.6,329.4) i.e., x = 470.6 and y = 329.4.
This gives the value of z as z = 10 × 470.6 + 20 × 329.4 = 11294

2018-19
430 MATHEMATICS

This is the mathematical solution.

Step 4 The solution can be interpreted as saying that, “The minimum cost of the
special food with corn and soyabean having the required portion of nutrient contents,
protein and fibre is Rs 11294 and we obtain this minimum cost if we use 470.6 kg of
corn and 329.4 kg of soyabean.”
In the next example, we shall discuss how modelling is used to study the population
of a country at a particular time.
Example 4 Suppose a population control unit wants to find out “how many people will
be there in a certain country after 10 years”
Step 1 Formulation We first observe that the population changes with time and it
increases with birth and decreases with deaths.
We want to find the population at a particular time. Let t denote the time in years.
Then t takes values 0, 1, 2, ..., t = 0 stands for the present time, t = 1 stands for the next
year etc. For any time t, let p (t) denote the population in that particular year.
Suppose we want to find the population in a particular year, say t0 = 2006. How
will we do that. We find the population by Jan. 1st, 2005. Add the number of births in
that year and subtract the number of deaths in that year. Let B(t) denote the number of
births in the one year between t and t + 1 and D(t) denote the number of deaths
between t and t + 1. Then we get the relation
P (t + 1) = P (t) + B (t) – D (t)
Now we make some assumptions and definitions
B (t )
1. P (t ) is called the birth rate for the time interval t to t + 1.

D (t)
2.
P (t) is called the death rate for the time interval t to t + 1.

Assumptions
1. The birth rate is the same for all intervals. Likewise, the death rate is the same
for all intervals. This means that there is a constant b, called the birth rate, and a
constant d, called the death rate so that, for all t ≥ 0,
B (t ) D (t )
b= and d= ... (1)
P (t ) P (t )
2. There is no migration into or out of the population; i.e., the only source of population

2018-19
 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 431

change is birth and death.

As a result of assumptions 1 and 2, we deduce that, for t ≥ 0,
P (t + 1) = P(t) + B(t) – D(t)
= P(t) + bP(t) – dP(t)
= (1 + b – d) P(t) ... (2)
Setting t = 0 in (2) gives
P(1) = (1 + b – d)P (0) ... (3)
Setting t = 1 in Equation (2) gives
P(2) = (1 + b – d) P (1)
= (1 + b – d) (1 + b – d) P (0) (Using equation 3)
2
= (1 + b – d) P(0)
Continuing this way, we get
P(t) = (1 + b – d)t P (0) ... (4)
for t = 0, 1, 2, ... The constant 1 + b – d is often abbreviated by r and called the growth
rate or, in more high-flown language, the Malthusian parameter, in honor of Robert
Malthus who first brought this model to popular attention. In terms of r, Equation (4)
becomes
P(t) = P(0)r t , t = 0, 1, 2, ... ... (5)
P(t) is an example of an exponential function. Any function of the form cr t, where c
and r are constants, is an exponential function.
Equation (5) gives the mathematical formulation of the problem.
Step 2 – Solution
Suppose the current population is 250,000,000 and the rates are b = 0.02 and d = 0.01.
What will the population be in 10 years? Using the formula, we calculate P(10).
P(10) = (1.01)10 (250,000,000)
= (1.104622125) (250,000,000)
= 276,155,531.25
Step 3 Interpretation and Validation
Naturally, this result is absurd, since one can’t have 0.25 of a person.
So, we do some approximation and conclude that the population is 276,155,531
(approximately). Here, we are not getting the exact answer because of the assumptions
that we have made in our mathematical model.
The above examples show how modelling is done in variety of situations using
different mathematical techniques.

2018-19
432 MATHEMATICS

Since a mathematical model is a simplified representation of a real problem, by its

very nature, has built-in assumptions and approximations. Obviously, the most important
question is to decide whether our model is a good one or not i.e., when the obtained
results are interpreted physically whether or not the model gives reasonable answers.
If a model is not accurate enough, we try to identify the sources of the shortcomings.
It may happen that we need a new formulation, new mathematical manipulation and
hence a new evaluation. Thus mathematical modelling can be a cycle of the modelling
process as shown in the flowchart given below:

START
↓
< ASSUMPTIONS/AXIOMS
↓
FORMULATION
↓
SOLUTION
↓
INTERPRETATION
↓
<

VALIDATION
↓

NO YES
< SATISFIED < STOP

— —

2018-19
 ANSWERS
EXERCISE 1.1
1. (i), (iv), (v), (vi), (vii) and (viii) are sets.
2. (i) ∈ (ii) ∉ (iii) ∉ (vi) ∈ (v) ∈ (vi) ∉
3. (i) A = {–3, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 } (ii) B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
(iii) C = {17, 26, 35, 44, 53, 62, 71, 80} (iv) D = {2, 3, 5}
(v) E = {T, R, I, G, O, N, M, E, Y} (vi) F = {B, E, T, R}
4. (i) { x : x = 3n, n∈N and 1 ≤ n ≤ 4 } (ii) { x : x = 2n, n∈N and 1 ≤ n ≤ 5 }
(iii) { x : x = 5n, n∈N and 1 ≤ n ≤ 4 } (iv) { x : x is an even natural number}
(v) { x : x = n2, n∈N and 1 ≤ n ≤ 10 }
5. (i) A = {1, 3, 5, . . . } (ii) B = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4 }
(iii) C = { –2, –1, 0, 1, 2 } (iv) D = { L, O, Y, A }
(v) E = { February, April, June, September, November }
(vi) F = {b, c, d, f, g, h, j }
6. (i) ↔ (c) (ii) ↔ (a) (iii) ↔ (d) (iv) ↔ (b)
EXERCISE 1.2
1. (i), (iii), (iv)
2. (i) Finite (ii) Infinite (iii) Finite (iv) Infinite (v) Finite
3. (i) Infinite (ii) Finite (iii) Infinite (iv) Finite (v) Infinite
4. (i) Yes (ii) No (iii) Yes (iv) No
5. (i) No (ii) Yes 6. B= D, E = G

EXERCISE 1.3
1. (i) ⊂ (ii) ⊄ (iii) ⊂ (iv) ⊄ (v) ⊄ (vi) ⊂
(vii) ⊂
2. (i) False (ii) True (iii) False (iv) True (v) False (vi) True
3. (i), (v), (vii), (viii), (ix), (xi)
4. (i) φ, { a } (ii) φ, { a }, { b }, { a, b }
(iii) φ, { 1 }, { 2 }, { 3 }, { 1, 2 }, { 1, 3 }, { 2, 3 }, { 1, 2, 3 } (iv) φ
5. 1
6. (i)
(– 4, 6] (ii) (– 12, –10) (iii) [ 0, 7 )
(iv) [ 3, 4 ]
7. (i) { x : x ∈ R, – 3 < x < 0 } (ii) { x : x ∈ R, 6 ≤ x ≤ 12 }
(iii) { x : x ∈ R, 6 < x ≤ 12 } (iv) { x R : – 23 ≤ x < 5 } 9. (iii)

2018-19
434 MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE 1.4
1. (i) X ∪ Y = {1, 2, 3, 5 } (ii) A ∪ B = { a, b, c, e, i, o, u }
(iii) A ∪ B = {x : x = 1, 2, 4, 5 or a multiple of 3 }
(iv) A ∪ B = {x : 1 < x < 10, x ∈ N} (v) A ∪ B = {1, 2, 3 }
2. Yes, A ∪ B = { a, b, c } 3. B
4. (i) { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 } (ii) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,8 } (iii) {3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 }
(iv) {3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} (v) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 }
(vi) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10} (vii) { 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 }
5. (i) X ∩ Y = { 1, 3 } (ii) A ∩ B = { a } (iii) { 3 } (iv) φ (v) φ
6. (i) { 7, 9, 11 } (ii) { 11, 13 } (iii) φ (iv) { 11 }
(v) φ (vi) { 7, 9, 11 } (vii) φ
(viii) { 7, 9, 11 } (ix) {7, 9, 11 } (x) { 7, 9, 11, 15 }
7. (i) B (ii) C (iii) D (iv) φ
(v) { 2 } (vi) { x : x is an odd prime number } 8. (iii)
9. (i) {3, 6, 9, 15, 18, 21} (ii) {3, 9, 15, 18, 21 } (iii) {3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 21}
(iv) {4, 8, 16, 20 ) (v) { 2, 4, 8, 10, 14, 16 } (vi) { 5, 10, 20 }
(vii) { 20 } (viii) { 4, 8, 12, 16 } (ix) { 2, 6, 10, 14}
(x) { 5, 10, 15 } (xi) {2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16} (xii) {5, 15, 20}
10. (i) { a, c } (ii) {f, g } (iii) { b , d }
11. Set of irrational numbers 12. (i) F (ii) F (iii) T (iv) T

EXERCISE 1.5
1. (i) { 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} (ii) {1, 3, 5, 7, 9 } (iii) {7, 8, 9 }
(iv) { 5, 7, 9 } (v) { 1, 2, 3, 4 } (vi) { 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 }
2. (i) { d, e, f, g, h} (ii) { a, b, c, h } (iii) { b, d , f, h }
(iv) { b, c, d, e )
3. (i) { x : x is an odd natural number }
(ii) { x : x is an even natural number }
(iii) { x : x ∈ N and x is not a multiple of 3 }
(iv) { x : x is a positive composite number or x = 1 ]

2018-19
 ANSWERS 435

(v) { x : x is a positive integer which is not divisible by 3 or not divisible by 5}

(vi) { x : x ∈ N and x is not a perfect square }
(vii) { x : x ∈ N and x is not a perfect cube }
(viii) { x : x ∈ N and x ≠ 3 } (ix) { x : x ∈ N and x ≠ 2 }
9
(x) { x : x ∈ N and x < 7 } (xi) { x : x ∈ N and x ≤ }
2
6. A' is the set of all equilateral triangles.
7. (i) U (ii) A (iii) φ (iv) φ

EXERCISE 1.6

1. 2 2. 5 3. 50 4. 42
5. 30 6. 19 7. 25, 35 8. 60

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 1

1. A ⊂ B, A ⊂ C, B ⊂ C, D ⊂ A, D ⊂ B, D ⊂ C
2. (i) False (ii) False (iii) True (iv) False (v) False
(vi) True
7. False 12. We may take A = { 1, 2 }, B = { 1, 3 }, C = { 2 , 3 }
13. 325 14. 125 15. (i) 52, (ii) 30 16. 11

EXERCISE 2.1

1. x = 2 and y = 1 2. The number of elements in A × B is 9.

3. G × H = {(7, 5), (7, 4), (7, 2), (8, 5), (8, 4), (8, 2)}
H × G = {(5, 7), (5, 8), (4, 7), (4, 8), (2, 7), (2, 8)}
4. (i) False
P × Q = {(m, n), (m, m), (n, n), (n, m)}
(ii) True
(iii) True
5. A × A = {(– 1, – 1), (– 1, 1), (1, – 1), (1, 1)}
A × A × A = {(–1, –1, –1), (–1, –1, 1), (–1, 1, –1), (–1, 1, 1), (1, –1, –1), (1, –1, 1),
(1, 1, –1), (1, 1, 1)}
6. A = {a, b}, B = {x, y}
8. A × B = {(1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4)}
A × B will have 24 = 16 subsets.
9. A = {x, y, z} and B = {1,2}

2018-19
436 MATHEMATICS

10. A = {–1, 0, 1}, remaining elements of

A × A are (–1, –1), (–1, 1), (0, –1), (0, 0), (1, –1), (1, 0), (1, 1)

EXERCISE 2.2
1. R = {(1, 3), (2, 6), (3, 9), (4, 12)}
Domain of R = {1, 2, 3, 4}
Range of R = {3, 6, 9, 12}
Co domain of R = {1, 2, ..., 14}
2. R = {(1, 6), (2, 7), (3, 8)}
Domain of R = {1, 2, 3}
Range of R = {6, 7, 8}
3. R = {(1, 4), (1, 6), (2, 9), (3, 4), (3, 6), (5, 4), (5, 6)}
4. (i) R = {(x, y) : y = x – 2 for x = 5, 6, 7}
(ii) R = {(5,3), (6,4), (7,5)}. Domain of R = {5, 6, 7}, Range of R = {3, 4, 5}
5. (i) R = {(1, 1), (1,2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (1, 6), (2 4), (2, 6), (2, 2), (4, 4), (6, 6),
(3, 3), (3, 6)}
(ii) Domain of R = {1, 2, 3, 4, 6}
(iii) Range of R = {1, 2, 3, 4, 6}
6. Domain of R = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,} 7. R = {(2, 8), (3, 27), (5, 125), (7, 343)}
Range of R = {5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10}
8. No. of relations from A into B = 26 9. Domain of R = Z
Range of R = Z

EXERCISE 2.3

1. (i) yes, Domain = {2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17}, Range = {1}

(ii) yes, Domain = (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14}, Range = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7}
(iii) No.
2. (i) Domain = R, Range = (– ∞, 0]
(ii) Domain of function = {x : –3 ≤ x ≤ 3}
Range of function = {x : 0 ≤ x ≤ 3}
3. (i) f (0) = –5 (ii) f (7) = 9 (iii) f (–3) = –11
412
4. (i) t (0) = 32 (ii) t (28) = (iii) t (–10) = 14 (iv) 100
5
5. (i) Range = (– ∞, 2) (ii) Range = [2, ∞) (iii) Range = R

2018-19
 ANSWERS 437

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 2

2. 2.1 3. Domain of function is set of real numbers except 6 and 2.
4. Domain = [1, ∞), Range = [0, ∞)
5. Domain = R, Range = non-negative real numbers
6. Range = (0, 1)
7. (f + g) x = 3x – 2 8. a = 2, b = – 1 9. (i) No (ii) No (iii) No
(f – g) x = – x + 4
 f  x +1 3
 x= , x≠
g 2x − 3 2

10. (i) Yes, (ii) No 11. No 12. Range of f = {3, 5, 11, 13 }

EXERCISE 3.1

5π 19π 4π 26π
1. (i) (ii) – (iii) (iv)
36 72 3 9
2. (i) 39° 22′ 30″ (ii) –229° 5′ 27″ (iii) 300° (iv) 210°
20π
3. 12π 4. 12° 36′ 5. 6. 5 : 4
3
2 1 7
7. (i) (ii) (iii)
15 5 25

EXERCISE 3.2

3 2 1
1. sin x = − , cosec x = – , sec x = −2, tan x = 3 , cot x =
2 3 3
5 4 5 3 4
2. cosec x = , cos x = – , sec x = − , tan x = − , cot x = −
3 5 4 4 3
4 5 3 5 4
3. sin x = − , cosec x = – , cos x = − , sec x = − , tan x =
5 4 5 3 3
12 13 5 12 5
4. sin x = − , cosec x = – , cos x = , tan x = − , cot x = −
13 12 13 5 12

2018-19
438 MATHEMATICS

5 13 12 13 12
5. sin x = , cosec x = , cos x = − , sec x = − , cot x = −
13 5 13 12 5
1 3
6. 7. 2 8. 3 9. 10. 1
2 2

EXERCISE 3.3

3 +1
5. (i) (ii) 2 – 3
2 2

EXERCISE 3.4

π 4π π π 5π π
1. , , nπ + , n ∈ Z 2. , , 2nπ ± , n ∈ Z
3 3 3 3 3 3
5π 11π 5π 7π 11π 7π
3. , , nπ + ,n∈Z 4. , , nπ + (–1) n ,n∈Z
6 6 6 6 6 6
nπ π π
5. x= or x = nπ, n ∈ Z 6. x = (2n + 1) , or 2nπ ± , n ∈ Z
3 4 3
7π π
7. x = nπ + ( − 1) n or (2n + 1) , n ∈ Z
6 2
nπ nπ 3π nπ π
8. x= , or + ,n∈Z 9. x= , or n π ± ,n ∈ Z
2 2 8 3 3

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 3

2 5 5 1
8. , ,
5 5 2

6 3
9. ,– ,– 2
3 3

8 + 2 15 8 − 2 15
10. , , 4 + 15
4 4

2018-19
 ANSWERS 439

EXERCISE 5.1

1. 3 2. 0 3. i 4. 14 + 28 i

19 21i 17 5
5. 2 – 7 i 6. − − 7. +i 8. –4
5 10 3 3

242 −22 107 4 3 5 3

9. − − 26i 10. −i 11. +i 12. −i
27 3 27 25 25 14 14

–7 2
13. i 14. i
2

EXERCISE 5.2

−2π 5π  –π –π 
1 . 2, 2 . 2, 3. 2  cos + i sin 
3 6  4 4 

 3π 3π   −3π −3π 
4. 2  cos + i sin  5. 2  cos + i sin 
 4 4   4 4 

 π π π π
6. 3 (cos π + i sin π) 7 . 2  cos + i sin  8 . cos + i sin
 6 6  2 2

EXERCISE 5.3

−1 ± 7 i −3 ± 3 3 i –1 ± 7i
1. ± 3i 2. 3. 4.
4 2 –2

−3 ± 11 i 1± 7 i −1 ± 7 i 2 ± 34 i
5. 6. 7. 8.
2 2 2 2 2 3

9.
−1 ± (2 )
2 −1 i
10.
−1 ± 7 i
2 2 2

2018-19
440 MATHEMATICS

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 5

307 + 599 i
1. 2 – 2 i 3.
442

 3π 3π   3π 3π 
5. (i) 2  cos + i sin  , (ii) 2  cos + i sin 
 4 4   4 4 

2 4 2 5 2 2 14
6. ± i 7 . 1± i 8. ± i 9. ± i
3 3 2 27 27 3 21

−2 1 3π
10. 2 12. (i) , (ii) 0 13. , 14. x = 3, y = – 3
5 2 4
15. 2 17. 1 18. 0 20. 4

EXERCISE 6.1

1. (i) {1, 2, 3, 4} (ii) {... – 3, – 2, –1, 0, 1,2,3,4,}

2. (i) No Solution (ii) {... – 4, – 3}
3. (i) {... – 2, – 1, 0, 1} (ii) (–∞, 2)
4. (i) {–1, 0, 1, 2, 3, ...} (ii) (–2, ∞)
5. (–4, ∞) 6. (– ∞, –3) 7. (–∞, –3] 8. (–∞, 4]
9. (– ∞, 6) 10. (–∞, –6) 11. (–∞, 2] 12. (– ∞, 120]
13. (4, ∞) 14. (–∞, 2] 15. (4, ∞) 16. (–∞, 2]

17. x < 3, 18. x ≥ –1,

2
19. x > – 1, 20. x ≥ – ,
7
21. Greater than or equal to 35 22. Greater than or equal to 82
23. (5,7), (7,9) 24. (6,8), (8,10), (10,12)
25. 9 cm 26. Greater than or equal to 8 but less than or equal to 22

2018-19
 ANSWERS 441

EXERCISE 6.2

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

2018-19
442 MATHEMATICS

7. 8.

9. 10.

EXERCISE 6.3

1. 2.

2018-19
 ANSWERS 443

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

2018-19
444 MATHEMATICS

9. 10.

11. 12.

13. 14.

2018-19
 ANSWERS 445

15.

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 6

1. [2, 3] 2. (0, 1] 3. [– 4, 2]

 – 80 – 10   11 
4. (– 23, 2] 5. 
 3
,
3 
6. 1, 3 

7. (–5, 5)

8. (–1, 7)

9. (5, ∞)

10. [– 7, 11]

11. Between 20°C and 25°C

12. More than 320 litres but less than 1280 litres.
13. More than 562.5 litres but less than 900 litres.
14. 9.6 ≤ MA ≤ 16.8

EXERCISE 7.1

1. (i) 125, (ii) 60. 2. 108 3. 5040 4. 336

5. 8 6. 20

2018-19
446 MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE 7.2

1. (i) 40320, (ii) 18 2. 30, No 3. 28 4. 64

5. (i) 30, (ii) 15120

EXERCISE 7.3
1. 504 2. 4536 3. 60 4. 120, 48
5. 56 6. 9 7. (i) 3, (ii) 4 8. 40320
9. (i) 360, (ii) 720, (iii) 240 10. 33810
11. (i) 1814400, (ii) 2419200, (iii) 25401600

EXERCISE 7.4
1. 45 2. (i) 5, (ii) 6 3. 210 4. 40
5. 2000 6. 778320 7. 3960 8. 200
9. 35

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 7

1. 3600 2. 1440 3. (i) 504, (ii) 588, (iii) 1632
4. 907200 5. 120 6. 50400 7. 420
8. 4 C 1× 48C 4 9. 2880 10. 22 C 7+ 22C 10 11. 151200

EXERCISE 8.1
1. 1–10x + 40x2 – 80x3 + 80x4 – 32x5
32 40 20 5 3 x5
2. − + − 5 x + x −
x5 x3 x 8 32
3. 64 x –576 x + 2160 x – 4320 x3 + 4860 x2 – 2916 x + 729
6 5 4

x 5 5 x3 10 10 5 1
4. + + x+ + 3+ 5
243 81 27 9 x 3x x
15 6 1
5. x 6 + 6 x 4 + 15 x 2 + 20 + 2
+ 4+ 6
x x x
6. 884736 7. 11040808032 8. 104060401
10000
9. 9509900499 10. (1.1) > 1000 11. 8(a3b + ab3); 40 6
12. 2(x6 + 15x4 + 15x2 + 1), 198

2018-19
 ANSWERS 447

EXERCISE 8.2
( −1) Cr .x12−2 r .y r
r 6
1. 1512 2. – 101376 3.

4. ( −1)r 12 Cr .x24−r .y r 5. – 1760 x9y3 6. 18564

−105 9 35 12
7. x ; x 8. 61236 x5y5 10. n = 7; r = 3
8 48
12. m = 4

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 8

9
1. a = 3; b = 5; n = 6 2. a = 3. 171
7
5. 396 6 6. 2a8 + 12a6 – 10a4 – 4a2 + 2
7. 0.9510 8. n = 10
16 8 32 16 x 2 x3 x 4
9. + 2 − 3 + 4 − 4x + + + −5
x x x x 2 2 16
10. 27x6 – 54ax5 + 117a2x4 – 116a3x3 + 117a4x2 – 54a5x + 27a6

EXERCISE 9.1

1 2 3 4 5
1. 3, 8, 15, 24, 35 2. , , , , 3. 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32
2 3 4 5 6

1 1 1 5 7
4. − , , , and 5. 25, –125, 625, –3125, 15625
6 6 2 6 6

3 9 21 75 49
6. , , , 21 and 7. 65, 93 8.
2 2 2 2 128

360
9. 729 10.
23
11. 3, 11, 35, 107, 323; 3 + 11 + 35 + 107 + 323 + ...

−1 −1 −1 −1  −1   −1   −1   −1 
12. −1, , , , ; – 1+   +   +   +   + ...
2 6 24 120  2   6   24   120 

2018-19
448 MATHEMATICS

3 5 8
13. 2, 2, 1, 0, –1; 2 + 2 + 1 + 0 + (–1) + ... 14. 1, 2, , and
2 3 5

EXERCISE 9.2
1. 1002001 2. 98450 4. 5 or 20 6. 4
n 179
7. (5n + 7 ) 8. 2q 9. 10. 0
2 321
13. 27 14. 11, 14, 17, 20 and 23 15. 1
16. 14 17. Rs 245 18. 9

EXERCISE 9.3

5 5
1. , 2. 3072 4. – 2187
2 20 2n
1
1 − (0.1) 
20
5. (a) 13th , (b) 12th, (c) 9th 6. ± 1 7.
6 

7
( )
 n 
3 + 1  3 2 − 1
1 − ( − a )n 
  (
x 3 1 − x 2n )
8. 2   9. 10.
  1+ a 1− x 2

11. 22 +
2
(
3 11
3 −1 ) 5 2 2 5 5 2
12. r = or ; Terms are ,1, or ,1,
2 5 5 2 2 5

13. 4 14.
16 16 n
7
;2;
7
(
2 −1 ) 15. 2059

−4 −8 −16
16. , ,
3 3 3
,...or 4, − 8,16, − 32, 64, .. 18.
80
81
8
10n − 1 − n
9
( )
19. 496 20. rR 21. 3, –6, 12, –24 26. 9 and 27
–1
27. n= 30. 120, 480, 30 (2n) 31. Rs 500 (1.1)10
2
32. x2 –16x + 25 = 0
EXERCISE 9.4

n n ( n + 1) ( n + 2 ) ( n + 3)
1. ( n + 1) ( n + 2 ) 2.
3 4

2018-19
 ANSWERS 449

3.
n
6
(
( n + 1) 3n 2 + 5n + 1 ) 4.
n
n +1
5. 2840

n ( n + 1) ( n + 2 )
2

6. 3n (n + 1) (n + 3) 7.
12
n ( n + 1)
8.
12
(
3n 2 + 23n + 34 )
9.
n
6
( n + 1) ( 2n + 1) + 2 2n − 1( ) 10.
n
3
( 2n + 1) ( 2n − 1)

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 9

2. 5, 8, 11 4. 8729 5. 3050 6. 1210
7. 4 8. 160; 6 9. ± 3 10. 8, 16, 32
11. 4 12. 11

21. (i)
81
(
50 n
10 − 1 −)5n
9
, (ii)
2n 2
−
3 27
1 − 10− n ( ) 22. 1680

23.
n 2
3
(
n + 3n + 5 ) 25.
n
24
(
2n2 + 9n + 13 )
27. Rs 16680 28. Rs 39100 29. Rs 43690 30. Rs 17000; 20,000
31. Rs 5120 32. 25 days

EXERCISE 10.1

121
1. square unit.
2

( )
2. (0, a), (0, – a) and − 3a,0 or (0, a), (0, – a), and ( 3a,0 )
 15  1
3. (i) y2 − y1 , (ii) x2 − x1 4.  , 0  5. −
2  2
7. – 3 8. x = 1 10. 135°
1 1 1
11. 1 and 2, or and 1, or – 1 and –2, or − and – 1 14. , 104.5 Crores
2 2 2

2018-19
450 MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE 10.2

1. y = 0 and x = 0 2. x – 2y + 10 = 0 3. y = mx

4. ( ) (
3 +1 x − )
3 −1 y = 4 ( 3 –1 ) 5. 2x + y + 6 = 0

6. x − 3y + 2 3 = 0 7. 5x + 3y + 2 = 0
8. 3x + y = 10 9. 3x – 4y + 8 = 0 10. 5x – y + 20 = 0
11. (1 + n)x + 3(1 + n)y = n +11 12. x + y = 5
13. x + 2y – 6 = 0, 2x + y – 6 = 0
14. 3 x + y − 2 = 0 and 3 x + y + 2 = 0 15. 2x – 9y + 85 = 0
.192
16. L= (C − 20 ) + 124.942 17. 1340 litres. 19. 2kx + hy = 3kh.
90

EXERCISE 10.3

1 1 5 5
1. (i) y = − x + 0, − , 0; (ii) y = −2 x + , − 2 , ; (iii) y = 0x + 0, 0, 0
7 7 3 3

x y x y 3
2. (i) + = 1, 4,6; (ii) 3 + −2 =1, 2 , −2;
4 6
2
2 2
(iii) y = − , intercept with y-axis = − and no intercept with x-axis.
3 3
3. (i) x cos 120° + y sin 120° = 4, 4, 120° (ii) x cos 90° + y sin 90° = 2, 2, 90°;
(iii) x cos 315° + y sin 315° = 2 2 , 2 2 , 315° 4. 5 units

65 1 p+r
5. (– 2, 0) and (8, 0) 6. (i) units, (ii) units.
17 2 l
7. 3x – 4y + 18 = 0 8. y + 7x = 21 9. 30° and 150°
22
10.
9

12. ( ) ( )
3 + 2 x + 2 3 – 1 y = 8 3 + 1 or ( ) ( )
3 − 2 x + 1 + 2 3 y = –1 + 8 3

2018-19
 ANSWERS 451

 68 49  1 5
13. 2x + y = 5 14.  , −  15. m= ,c =
 25 25  2 2
17. y – x = 1, 2

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 10

7π
1. (a) 3, (b) ± 2, (c) 6 or 1 2. ,1
6
 8   32 
3. 2 x − 3 y = 6 , − 3x + 2 y = 6 4.  0 , −  ,  0, 
 3  3 

sin (φ – θ) 5
5. φ–θ 6. x=− 7. 2x – 3y + 18 = 0
2 sin 22
2
8. k2 square units 9. 5 11. 3x – y = 7, x + 3y = 9
23 5
12. 13x + 13y = 6 14. 1 : 2 15. units
18
16. The line is parallel to x - axis or parallel to y-axis
1± 5 2
17. x = 1, y = 1. 18. (–1, – 4). 19.
7
 13 
21. 18x + 12y + 11 = 0 22.  , 0  24. 119x + 102y = 125
5 

EXERCISE 11.1

1. x2 + y2 – 4y = 0 2. x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y –3 = 0
3. 36x2 + 36y2 – 36x – 18y + 11 = 0 4. x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y = 0
5. x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2by + 2b2 = 0 6. c(–5, 3), r = 6
1 1
7. c(2, 4), r = 65 8. c(4, – 5), r = 53 9. c ( , 0) ; r =
4 4
10. x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 15 = 0 11. x2 + y2 – 7x + 5y – 14 = 0
12. x2 + y2 + 4x – 21 = 0 & x2 + y2 – 12x + 11 = 0

2018-19
452 MATHEMATICS

13. x2 + y2 – ax – by = 0 14. x2 + y2 – 4x – 4y = 5
15. Inside the circle; since the distance of the point to the centre of the circle is less
than the radius of the circle.

EXERCISE 11.2
1. F (3, 0), axis - x - axis, directrix x = – 3, length of the Latus rectum = 12
3 3
2. F (0, ), axis - y - axis, directrix y = – , length of the Latus rectum = 6
2 2
3. F (–2, 0), axis - x - axis, directrix x = 2, length of the Latus rectum = 8
4. F (0, –4), axis - y - axis, directrix y = 4, length of the Latus rectum = 16
5 5
5. F ( , 0) axis - x - axis, directrix x = – , length of the Latus rectum = 10
2 2
–9 9
6. F (0, ) , axis - y - axis, directrix y = , length of the Latus rectum = 9
4 4
7. y2 = 24x 8. x2 = – 12y 9. y2 = 12x
10. y2 = –8x 11. 2y2 = 9x 12. 2x2 = 25y

EXERCISE 11.3
20
1. F (± 20 ,0); V (± 6, 0); Major axis = 12; Minor axis = 8 , e = ,
6
16
Latus rectum =
3
21
2. F (0, ± 21 ); V (0, ± 5); Major axis = 10; Minor axis = 4 , e = ;
5
8
Latus rectum =
5
7
3. F ( ± 7 , 0); V ( ± 4, 0); Major axis = 8; Minor axis = 6 , e = ;
4
9
Latus rectum =
2

2018-19
 ANSWERS 453

3
4. F (0, ± 75 ); V (0,± 10); Major axis = 20; Minor axis = 10 , e = ;
2
Latus rectum = 5
13
5. F (± 13 ,0); V (± 7, 0); Major axis =14 ; Minor axis = 12 , e = ;
7
72
Latus rectum =
7
3
6. F (0, ± 10 3 ); V (0,± 20); Major axis =40 ; Minor axis = 20 , e = ;
2
Latus rectum = 10
2 2
7. F (0, ± 4 2 ); V (0,± 6); Major axis =12 ; Minor axis = 4 , e = ;
3
4
Latus rectum =
3

8. ( )
F 0,± 15 ; V (0, ± 4); Major axis = 8 ; Minor axis = 2 , e =
15
4
;

1
Latus rectum =
2
5
9. F ( ± 5 ,0); V ( ± 3, 0); Major axis = 6 ; Minor axis = 4 , e = ;
3
8
Latus rectum =
3
x2 y 2 x2 y2 x2 y 2
10. + =1 11. + =1 12. + =1
25 9 144 169 36 20
x2 y 2 x2 y 2 x2 y2
13. + =1 14. + =1 15. + =1
9 4 1 5 169 144
x2 y 2 x2 y 2 x2 y 2
16. + =1 17. + =1 18. + =1
64 100 16 7 25 9

2018-19
454 MATHEMATICS

x2 y 2 2 2 x2 y 2
19. + =1 20. x + 4y = 52 or + =1
10 40 52 13

EXERCISE 11.4

5 9
1. Foci (± 5, 0), Vertices (± 4, 0); e = ; Latus rectum =
4 2
2. Foci (0 ± 6), Vertices (0, ± 3); e = 2; Latus rectum = 18
13
3. Foci (0, ± 13 ), Vertices (0, ± 2); e = ; Latus rectum = 9
2
5 64
4. Foci (± 10, 0), Vertices (± 6, 0); e = ; Latus rectum =
3 3
2 14 6 14 4 5
5. Foci (0,± ), Vertices (0,± ); e = ; Latus rectum =
5 5 3 3

65 49
6. Foci (0, ± 65 ), Vertices (0, ± 4); e = ; Latus rectum =
4 2
x2 y2 y 2 x2 y 2 x2
7. − =1 8. − =1 9. − =1
4 5 25 39 9 16
x2 y2 y 2 x2 x2 y 2
10. − =1 11. − =1 12. − =1
16 9 25 144 25 20
x2 y2 x2 9 y2 y 2 x2
13. − =1 14. − =1 15. − =1
4 12 49 343 5 5

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 11

1. Focus is at the mid-point of the given diameter.
2. 2.23 m (approx.) 3. 9.11 m (approx.) 4. 1.56m (approx.)

x2 y2 x2 y 2
5. + =1 6. 18 sq units 7. + =1
81 9 25 9
8. 8 3a

2018-19
 ANSWERS 455

EXERCISE 12.1
1. y and z - coordinates are zero 2. y - coordinate is zero
3. I, IV, VIII, V, VI, II, III, VII
4. (i) XY - plane (ii) (x, y, 0) (iii) Eight

EXERCISE 12.2

1. (i) 2 5 (ii) 43 (iii) 2 26 (iv) 2 5

4. x – 2z = 0 5. 9x2 + 25y2 + 25z2 – 225 = 0

EXERCISE 12.3

 −4 1 27 
1. (i)  , ,  (ii) ( − 8 ,17 ,3 ) 2. 1 : 2
 5 5 5 
3. 2 : 3 5. (6, – 4, – 2), (8, – 10, 2)

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 12

16
1. (1, – 2, 8) 2. 7, 34 , 7 3. a = – 2, b = − , c=2
3
4. (0, 2, 0) and (0, – 6, 0)
k 2 – 109
5. (4, – 2, 6) 6. x2 + y 2 + z 2 − 2 x − 7 y + 2 z =
2

EXERCISE 13.1

 22  19
1. 6 2.  π −  3. π 4.
 7  2
1 11 108
5. − 6. 5 7. 8.
2 4 7
1
9. b 10. 2 11. 1 12. −
4
a a 1 1
13. 14. 15. 16.
b b π π

2018-19
456 MATHEMATICS

a +1
17. 4 18. 19. 0 20. 1
b
21. 0 22. 2 23. 3, 6
24. Limit does not exist at x = 1
25. Limit does not exist at x = 0 26. Limit does not exist at x = 0
27. 0 28. a = 0, b = 4
29. lim f (x) = 0 and lim f (x) = (a – a ) (a – a ) ... (a – a )
x → a1 x →a 1 2 x

30. lim f (x) exists for all a ≠ 0. 31. 2

x →a

32. For lim

x→0
f (x) to exists, we need m = n; lim
x→1
f (x) exists for any integral value
of m and n.

EXERCISE 13.2

1. 20 2. 1 3. 99

−2 −2
4. (i) 3x2 (ii) 2x – 3 (iii) (iv)
x3 ( x − 1)2
6. nx n −1 + a (n − 1)x n − 2 + a 2 (n − 2)x n−3 + ... + a n−1
a −b
7. (i) 2x − a − b (
(ii) 4ax ax 2 + b ) (iii)
( x − b )2
nx n − anx n−1 − x n + a n
8.
(x − a)
2

−3 24
9 . (i) 2 (ii) 20x3 – 15x2 + 6x – 4 (iii) (5 + 2x ) (iv) 15x4 +
x4 x5

–12 36 –2 x (3x – 2)
(v) + (vi) – 10. – sin x
x5 x10 ( x + 1) (3 x – 1)2
2

11. (i) cos 2x (ii) sec x tan x

(iii) 5sec x tan x – 4sin x (iv) – cosec x cot x
(v) – 3cosec2 x – 5 cosec x cot x (vi) 5cos x+ 6sin x
(vii) 2sec2 x – 7sec x tan x

2018-19
 ANSWERS 457

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 13

1  π
1. (i) – 1 (ii) (iii) cos (x + 1) (iv) −sin  x −  2. 1
x2  8
− qr
3. + ps 4. 2c (ax+b) (cx + d) + a (cx + d)2
x2

ad − bc −2 − ( 2ax + b )
, x ≠ 0,1
(ax )
5. 6. 7. 2
(cx + d ) 2
( x – 1) 2 2
+ bx + c

− apx 2 − 2bpx + ar − bq apx 2 + 2bpx + bq − ar −4a 2b

8. 9. 10. + 3 − sin x
( px ) ( ax + b )
2 2
2
+ qx + r x5 x

2 n−1
11. 12. na ( ax + b )
x

13. ( ax + b )n −1 (cx + d )m−1 mc ( ax + b ) + na (cx + d ) 14. cos (x+a)

−1
15. – cosec3 x – cosec x cot2 x 16.
1 + sin x

−2 2sec x tan x n–1

17. 18. 19. n sin x cos x
(sin x − cos x ) 2
(sec x + 1) 2

bc cos x + ad sin x + bd cos a

20. 21.
(c + d cos x ) 2
cos2 x

22. x3 (5 x cos x + 3 x sin x + 20 sin x − 12cos x )

23. − x 2 sin x − sin x + 2 x cos x

24. ( )
−q sin x ax 2 + sin x + ( p + q cos x )( 2 a x + cos x )

25. − tan 2 x ( x + cos x ) + ( x − tan x )(1 − sin x )

35 + 15 x cos x + 28 cos x + 28 x sin x − 15sin x

26.
(3x + 7 cos x )2

2018-19
458 MATHEMATICS

π
x cos ( 2 sin x − x cos x ) 1 + tanx − x sec 2 x
27. 4 28.
(1 + tanx )
2
sin 2 x

29. ( x + sec x ) (1 − sec2 x ) + ( x − tan x ) . (1 + sec x tan x )

30. sin x − n x cos x
sin n +1 x
EXERCISE 14.1

1. (i) This sentence is always false because the maximum number of days in a
month is 31. Therefore, it is a statement.
(ii) This is not a statement because for some people mathematics can be easy
and for some others it can be difficult.
(iii) This sentence is always true because the sum is 12 and it is greater than 10.
Therefore, it is a statement.
(iv) This sentence is sometimes true and sometimes not true. For example the
square of 2 is even number and the square of 3 is an odd number. Therefore,
it is not a statement.
(v) This sentence is sometimes true and sometimes false. For example, squares
and rhombus have equal length whereas rectangles and trapezium have
unequal length. Therefore, it is not a statement.
(vi) It is an order and therefore, is not a statement.
(vii) This sentence is false as the product is (–8). Therefore, it is a statement.
(viii) This sentence is always true and therefore, it is a statement.
(ix) It is not clear from the context which day is referred and therefore, it is not
a statement.
(x) This is a true statement because all real numbers can be written in the form
a + i × 0.
2. The three examples can be:
(i) Everyone in this room is bold. This is not a statement because from the
context it is not clear which room is referred here and the term bold is not
precisely defined.
(ii) She is an engineering student. This is also not a statement because who
‘she’ is.
(iii) “cos2θ is always greater than 1/2”. Unless, we know what θ is, we cannot
say whether the sentence is true or not.

2018-19
 ANSWERS 459

EXERCISES 14.2

1. (i) Chennai is not the capital of Tamil Nadu.

(ii) 2 is a complex number.
(iii) All triangles are equilateral triangles.
(iv) The number 2 is not greater than 7.
(v) Every natural number is not an integer.
2. (i) The negation of the first statement is “the number x is a rational number.”
which is the same as the second statement” This is because when a number
is not irrational, it is a rational. Therefore, the given pairs are negations of
each other.
(ii) The negation of the first statement is “x is an irrational number” which is
the same as the second statement. Therefore, the pairs are negations of
each other.
3. (i) Number 3 is prime; number 3 is odd (True).
(ii) All integers are positive; all integers are negative (False).
(iii) 100 is divisible by 3,100 is divisible by 11 and 100 is divisible by 5 (False).

EXERCISE 14.3

1. (i) “And”. The component statements are:

All rational numbers are real.
All real numbers are not complex.
(ii) “Or”. The component statements are:
Square of an integer is positive.
Square of an integer is negative.
(iii) “And”. the component statements are:
The sand heats up quickily in the sun.
The sand does not cool down fast at night.
(iv) “And”. The component statements are:
2
x = 2 is a root of the equation 3x – x – 10 = 0
2
x = 3 is a root of the equation 3x – x – 10 = 0
2. (i) “There exists”. The negation is
There does not exist a number which is equal to its square.
(ii) “For every”. The negation is
There exists a real number x such that x is not less than x + 1.
(iii) “There exists”. The negation is
There exists a state in India which does not have a capital.

2018-19
460 MATHEMATICS

3. No. The negation of the statement in (i) is “There exists real number x and
y for which x + y ≠ y + x”, instead of the statement given in (ii).
4. (i) Exclusive
(ii) Inclusive
(iii) Exclusive

EXERCISE 14.4

1. (i) A natural number is odd implies that its square is odd.

(ii) A natural number is odd only if its square is odd.
(iii) For a natural number to be odd it is necessary that its square is odd.
(iv) For the square of a natural number to be odd, it is sufficient that the number
is odd
(v) If the square of a natural number is not odd, then the natural number
is not odd.
2. (i) The contrapositive is
If a number x is not odd, then x is not a prime number.
The converse is
If a number x in odd, then it is a prime number.
(ii) The contrapositive is
If two lines intersect in the same plane, then they are not parallel
The converse is
If two lines do not interesect in the same plane, then they are parallel
(iii) The contrapositive is
If something is not at low temperature, then it is not cold
The converse is
If something is at low temperature, then it is cold
(iv) The contrapositive is
If you know how to reason deductively, then you can comprehend geometry.
The converse is
If you do not know how to reason deductively, then you can not comprehend
geometry.
(v) This statement can be written as “If x is an even number, then x is
divisible by 4”.
The contrapositive is, If x is not divisible by 4, then x is not an even number.
The converse is, If x is divisible by 4, then x is an even number.
3. (i) If you get a job, then your credentials are good.
(ii) If the banana tree stays warm for a month, then it will bloom.

2018-19
 ANSWERS 461

(iii) If diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other, then it is a parallelogram.

(iv) If you get A+ in the class, then you do all the exercises in the book.
4. a (i) Contrapositive
(ii) Converse
b (i) Contrapositive
(ii) Converse

EXERCISE 14.5

5. (i) False. By definition of the chord, it should intersect the circle in two points.
(ii) False. This can be shown by giving a counter example. A chord which is not
a dimaeter gives the counter example.
(iii) True. In the equation of an ellipse if we put a = b, then it is a circle
(Direct Method)
(iv) True, by the rule of inequality
(v) False. Since 11 is a prime number, therefore 11 is irrational.

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 14

1. (i) There exists a positive real number x such that x–1 is not positive.
(ii) There exists a cat which does not scratch.
(iii) There exists a real number x such that neither x > 1 nor x < 1.
(iv) There does not exist a number x such that 0 < x < 1.
2. (i) The statement can be written as “If a positive integer is prime, then it has no
divisors other than 1 and itself.
The converse of the statement is
If a positive integer has no divisors other than 1 and itself, then it is a prime.
The contrapositive of the statement is
If positive integer has divisors other than 1 and itself then it is not prime.
(ii) The given statement can be written as “If it is a sunny day, then I go
to a beach.
The converse of the statement is
If I go to beach, then it is a sunny day.
The contrapositive is
If I do not go to a beach, then it is not a sunny day.
(iii) The converse is
If you feel thirsty, then it is hot outside.
The contrapositive is
If you do not feel thirsty, then it is not hot outside.

2018-19
462 MATHEMATICS

3. (i) If you log on to the server, then you have a password.

(ii) If it rains, then there is traffic jam.
(iii) If you can access the website, then you pay a subscription fee.
4. (i) You watch television if and only if your mind in free.
(ii) You get an A grade if and only if you do all the homework regularly.
(iii) A quadrilateral is equiangular if and only if it is a rectangle.
5. The compound statement with “And” is 25 is a multiple of 5 and 8
This is a false statement.
The compound statement with “Or” is 25 is a multiple of 5 or 8
This is true statement.
7. Same as Q1 in Exercise 14.4

EXERCISE 15.1

1. 3 2. 8.4 3. 2.33 4. 7
5. 6.32 6. 16 7. 3.23 8. 5.1
9. 157.92 10. 11.28 11. 10.34 12. 7.35

EXERCISE 15.2

n + 1 n2 − 1
1. 9, 9.25 2. , 3. 16.5, 74.25 4. 19, 43.4
2 12
5. 100, 29.09 6. 64, 1.69 7. 107, 2276 8. 27, 132
9. 93, 105.52, 10.27 10. 5.55, 43.5

EXERCISE 15.3

1. B 2. Y 3. (i) B, (ii) B
4. A 5. Weight

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 15

1. 4, 8 2. 6, 8 3. 24, 12
5. (i) 10.1, 1.99 (ii) 10.2, 1.98
6. Highest Chemistry and lowest Mathematics 7. 20, 3.036

2018-19
 ANSWERS 463

EXERCISE 16.1

1. {HHH, HHT, HTH, THH, TTH, HTT, THT, TTT}

2. {(x, y) : x, y = 1,2,3,4,5,6}
or {(1,1), (1,2), (1,3), ..., (1,6), (2,1), (2,2), ..., (2,6), ..., (6, 1), (6, 2), ..., (6,6)}
3. {HHHH, HHHT, HHTH, HTHH, THHH, HHTT, HTHT, HTTH, THHT, THTH,
TTHH, HTTT, THTT, TTHT, TTTH, TTTT}
4. {H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6}
5. {H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, T}
6. {XB1, XB2, XG1, XG2, YB3, YG3, YG4, YG5}
7. {R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, W1, W2, W3, W4, W5, W6, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6}
8. (i) {BB, BG, GB, GG} (ii) {0, 1, 2}
9. {RW, WR, WW}
10. [HH, HT, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6}
11. {DDD, DDN, DND, NDD, DNN, NDN, NND, NNN}
12. {T, H1, H3, H5, H21, H22, H23, H24, H25, H26, H41, H42, H43, H44, H45, H46,
H61, H62, H63, H64, H65, H66}
13. {(1,2), (1,3), (1,4), (2,1), (2,3), (2,4), (3,1), (3,2), (3,4), (4,1), (4,2), (4,3)}
14. {1HH, 1HT, 1TH, 1TT, 2H, 2T, 3HH, 3HT, 3TH, 3TT, 4H, 4T, 5HH, 5HT, 5TH,
5TT, 6H, 6T}
15. {TR1, TR2, TB1, TB2, TB3, H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6}
16. {6, (1,6), (2,6), (3,6), (4,6), (5,6), (1,1,6), (1,2,6), ..., (1,5,6), (2,1,6). (2,2,6), ...,
(2,5,6), ..., (5,1,6), (5,2,6), ... }

EXERCISE 16.2
1. No.
2. (i) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} (ii) φ (iii) {3, 6} (iv) {1, 2, 3} (v) {6}
(vi) {3, 4, 5, 6}, A∪B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}, A∩B = φ, B∪C = {3, 6}, E∩F = {6},
D∩E = φ,
A – C = {1, 2,4,5}, D – E = {1,2,3}, E∩ F′ = φ, F′ = {1, 2}
3. A = {(3,6), (4,5), (5, 4), (6,3), (4,6), (5,5), (6,4), (5,6), (6,5), (6,6)}
B = {(1,2), (2,2), (3, 2), (4,2), (5,2), (6,2), (2,1), (2,3), (2,4), (2,5), (2,6)}
C ={(3,6), (6,3), (5, 4), (4,5), (6,6)}
A and B, B and C are mutually exclusive.
4. (i) A and B; A and C; B and C; C and D (ii) A and C (iii) B and D
5. (i) “Getting at least two heads”, and “getting at least two tails”
(ii) “Getting no heads”, “getting exactly one head” and “getting at least two
heads”

2018-19
464 MATHEMATICS

(iii) “Getting at most two tails”, and “getting exactly two tails”
(iv) “Getting exactly one head” and “getting exactly two heads”
(v) “Getting exactly one tail”, “getting exactly two tails”, and getting exactly
three tails”

ANote There may be other events also as answer to the above question.
6. A = {(2, 1), (2,2), (2,3), (2,4), (2,5), (2,6), (4,1), (4,2), (4,3), (4,4), (4,5), (4,6),
(6,1), (6,2), (6,3), (6,4), (6,5), (6,6)}
B = {(1, 1), (1,2), (1,3), (1,4), (1,5), (1,6), (3,1), (3,2), (3,3), (3,4), (3,5), (3,6),
(5,1), (5,2), (5,3), (5,4), (5,5), (5,6)}
C = {(1, 1), (1,2), (1,3), (1,4), (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (3,1), (3,2), (4,1)}
(i) A′ = {(1,1), (1,2), (1,3), (1,4), (1,5), (1,6), (3,1), (3,2), (3,3), (3,4), (3,5), (3,6),
(5,1), (5,2), (5,3), (5,4), (5,5), (5,6)} = B
(ii) B′ = {(2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (2,4), (2,5), (2,6), (4,1), (4,2), (4,3), (4,4), (4,5), (4,6),
(6,1), (6,2), (6,3), (6,4), (6,5), (6,6)} = A
(iii) A∪B = {(1,1), (1,2), (1,3), (1,4), (1,5), (1,6), (3,1), (3,2), (3,3), (3,4), (3,5),
(3,6), (5,1), (5,2), (5,3), (5,4), (5,5), (5,6), (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (2,5),
(2,6), (4,1), (4,2), (4,3), (4,4), (4,5), (4,6), (6,1), (6,2), (6,3), (6,4),
(6,5), (6,6)} = S
(iv) A ∩ B = φ
(v) A – C = {(2,4), (2,5), (2,6), (4,2), (4,3), (4,4), (4,5), (4,6), (6,1), (6,2), (6,3),
(6,4), (6,5), (6,6)}
(vi) B ∪ C = {(1,1), (1,2), (1,3), (1,4), (1,5), (1,6), (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (3,1), (3,2),
(3,3), (3,4), (3,5), (3,6), (4,1), (5,1), (5,2), (5,3), (5,4), (5,5), (5,6)}
(vii) B ∩ C = {(1,1), (1,2), (1,3), (1,4), (3,1), (3,2)}
(viii) A ∩ B′ ∩ C′ = {(2,4), (2,5), (2,6), (4,2), (4,3), (4,4), (4,5), (4,6), (6,1), (6,2),
(6,3), (6,4), (6,5), (6,6)}
7. (i) True (ii) True (iii) True (iv) False (v) False (vi) False

EXERCISE 16.3

3
1. (a) Yes (b) Yes (c) No (d) No (e) No 2.
4
1 2 1 5 1 1 1
3. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 0 (v) 4. (a) 52 (b) (c) (i) (ii)
2 3 6 6 52 13 2
1 1 3
5. (i) (ii) 6.
12 12 5

2018-19
 ANSWERS 465

7. Rs 4.00 gain, Rs 1.50 gain, Re 1.00 loss, Rs 3.50 loss, Rs 6.00 loss.
1 1 3
P ( Winning Rs 4.00) = , P(Winning Rs 1.50) = , P (Losing Re. 1.00) =
16 4 8
1 1
P (Losing Rs 3.50) = , P (Losing Rs 6.00) = .
4 16
1 3 1 7 1 1 3 1 7
8. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix)
8 8 2 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 6 7 1
9. 10. (i) (ii) 11.
11 13 13 38760

12. (i) No, because P(A∩B) must be less than or equal to P(A) and P(B), (ii) Yes
7 4
13. (i) (ii) 0.5 (iii) 0.15 14.
15 5
5 3
15. (i) (ii) 16. No 17. (i) 0.58 (ii) 0.52 (iii) 0.74
8 8
18. 0.6 19. 0.55 20. 0.65
19 11 2
21. (i) (ii) (iii)
30 30 15

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 16

20 30 13
C5 C5 C3 . 13 C1
1. (i) 60 (ii) 1 − 60 2. 52
C5 C5 C4
9990 9990
1 1 5 999 C2 C10
3. (i) (ii) (iii) 4. (a) (b) 10000
(c) 10000
2 2 6 1000 C2 C10

17 16 2
5. (a) (b) 6.
33 33 3
4
7. (i) 0.88 (ii) 0.12 (iii) 0.19 (iv) 0.34 8.
5
33 3 1
9. (i) (ii) 10.
83 8 5040

2018-19
 NCERT
EXEMPLAR

11
CLASS

MATHEMATICS
 Chapter 1
SETS
1.1 Overview
This chapter deals with the concept of a set, operations on sets.Concept of sets will be
useful in studying the relations and functions.

1.1.1 Set and their representations A set is a well-defined collection of objects.

There are two methods of representing a set
(i) Roaster or tabular form (ii) Set builder form

1.1.2 The empty set A set which does not contain any element is called the empty
set or the void set or null set and is denoted by { } or φ.
1.1.3 Finite and infinite sets A set which consists of a finite number of elements is
called a finite set otherwise, the set is called an infinite set.
1.1.4 Subsets A set A is said to be a subset of set B if every element of A is also an
element of B. In symbols we write A ⊂ B if a ∈ A ⇒ a ∈ B.
We denote set of real numbers by R
set of natural numbers by N
set of integers by Z
set of rational numbers by Q
set of irrational numbers by T
We observe that
N ⊂ Z ⊂ Q ⊂ R,
T ⊂ R, Q ⊄ T, N ⊄ T

1.1.5 Equal sets Given two sets A and B, if every elements of A is also an element of
B and if every element of B is also an element of A, then the sets A and B are said to
be equal. The two equal sets will have exactly the same elements.
1.1.6 Intervals as subsets of R Let a, b ∈ R and a < b. Then
(a) An open interval denoted by (a, b) is the set of real numbers {x : a < x < b}
(b) A closed interval denoted by [a, b] is the set of real numbers {x : a ≤ x ≤ b)

18/04/18
 2 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(c) Intervals closed at one end and open at the other are given by
[a, b) = {x : a ≤ x < b}
(a, b] = {x : a < x ≤ b}
1.1.7 Power set The collection of all subsets of a set A is called the power set of A.
It is denoted by P(A). If the number of elements in A = n , i.e., n(A) = n, then the
number of elements in P(A) = 2n.
1.1.8 Universal set This is a basic set; in a particular context whose elements and
subsets are relevant to that particular context. For example, for the set of vowels in
English alphabet, the universal set can be the set of all alphabets in English. Universal
set is denoted by U.
1.1.9 Venn diagrams Venn Diagrams are the
diagrams which represent the relationship between
sets. For example, the set of natural numbers is a
subset of set of whole numbers which is a subset of
integers. We can represent this relationship through
Venn diagram in the following way.
1.1.10 Operations on sets Fig 1.1
Union of Sets : The union of any two given sets A and B is the set C which consists
of all those elements which are either in A or in B. In symbols, we write
C = A ∪ B = {x | x ∈A or x ∈B}

Fig 1.2 (a) Fig 1.2 (b)

Some properties of the operation of union.
(i) A ∪ B = B ∪ A (ii) (A ∪ B) ∪ C = A ∪ (B ∪ C)
(iii) A ∪ φ = A (iv) A ∪ A = A
(v) U ∪ A = U
Intersection of sets: The intersection of two sets A and B is the set which
consists of all those elements which belong to both A and B. Symbolically, we
write A ∩ B = {x : x ∈ A and x ∈ B}.

18/04/18
 SETS 3

When A ∩ B = φ, then A and B are called disjoint sets.

Fig 1.3 (a) Fig 1.3 (b)

Some properties of the operation of intersection
(i) A ∩ B = B ∩ A (ii) (A ∩ B) ∩ C = A ∩ (B ∩ C)
(iii) φ ∩ A = φ ; U ∩ A = A (iv) A ∩ A = A
(v) A ∩ (B ∪ C) = (A ∩ B) ∪ (A ∩ C)
(vi) A ∪ (B ∩ C) = (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C)
Difference of sets The difference of two sets A and B, denoted by A – B is defined
as set of elements which belong to A but not to B. We write
A – B = {x : x ∈ A and x ∉ B}
also, B – A = { x : x ∈ B and x ∉A}
Complement of a set Let U be the universal set and A a subset of U. Then the
complement of A is the set of all elements of U which are not the elements of A.
Symbolically, we write
A′ = {x : x ∈ U and x ∉ A}. Also A′ = U – A
Some properties of complement of sets
(i) Law of complements:
(a) A ∪ A′ = U (b) A ∩ A′ = φ
(ii) De Morgan’s law
(a) (A ∪ B)′ = A′ ∩ B′ (b) (A ∩ B)′ = A′ ∪ B′
(iii) (A′ )′ = A
(iv) U′ = φ and φ′ = U
1.1.11 Formulae to solve practical problems on union and intersection of two sets
Let A, B and C be any finite sets. Then
(a) n (A ∪ B) = n (A) + n (B) – n (A ∩ B)
(b) If (A ∩ B) = φ, then n (A ∪ B) = n (A) + n (B)

18/04/18
 4 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(c) n (A ∪ B ∪ C) = n (A) + n (B) + n (C) – n (A ∩ B) – n (A ∩ C) – n (B ∩ C)

+ n (A ∩ B ∩ C)
1.2 Solved Examples
Short Answer Type
Example 1 Write the following sets in the roaster form.
(i) A = {x | x is a positive integer less than 10 and 2x – 1 is an odd number}
(ii) C = {x : x2 + 7x – 8 = 0, x ∈ R}
Solution
(i) 2x – 1 is always an odd number for all positive integral values of x. In particular,
2x – 1 is an odd number for x = 1, 2, ... , 9. Thus, A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9}.
(ii) x2 + 7x – 8 = 0 or (x + 8) (x – 1) = 0 giving x = – 8 or x = 1
Thus, C = {– 8, 1}
Example 2 State which of the following statements are true and which are false.
Justify your answer.
(i) 37 ∉ {x | x has exactly two positive factors}
(ii) 28 ∈ {y | the sum of the all positive factors of y is 2y}
(iii) 7,747 ∈ {t | t is a multiple of 37}
Solution
(i) False
Since, 37 has exactly two positive factors, 1 and 37, 37 belongs to the set.
(ii) True
Since, the sum of positive factors of 28
= 1 + 2 + 4 + 7 + 14 + 28
= 56 = 2(28)
(iii) False
7,747 is not a multiple of 37.
Example 3 If X and Y are subsets of the universal set U, then show that
(i) Y ⊂ X ∪ Y (ii) X ∩ Y ⊂ X (iii) X ⊂ Y ⇒ X ∩ Y = X
Solution
(i) X ∪ Y = {x | x ∈ X or x ∈ Y}
Thus x∈Y⇒x∈X∪Y
Hence, Y⊂X∪Y

18/04/18
 SETS 5

(ii) X ∩ Y = {x | x ∈ X and x ∈ Y}
Thus x∈X∩Y⇒x∈X
Hence X∩Y⊂X
(iii) Note that
x∈X∩Y⇒x∈ X
Thus X∩Y⊂X
Also, since X ⊂ Y,
x∈X⇒x∈Y⇒x∈X∩Y
so that X⊂X∩Y
Hence the result X = X ∩ Y follows.
Example 4 Given that N = {1, 2, 3, ..., 100}, then
(i) Write the subset A of N, whose element are odd numbers.
(ii) Write the subset B of N, whose element are represented by x + 2, where x ∈ N.
Solution
(i) A = {x | x ∈ N and x is odd}= {1, 3, 5, 7, ..., 99}
(ii) B = {y | y = x + 2, x ∈ N}
So, for 1 ∈ N, y = 1 + 2 = 3
2 ∈ N, y = 2 + 2 = 4,
and so on. Therefore, B = {3, 4, 5, 6, ... , 100}
Example 5 Given that E = {2, 4, 6, 8, 10}. If n represents any member of E, then,
write the following sets containing all numbers represented by
(i) n + 1 (ii) n 2
Solution Given E = {2, 4, 6, 8, 10}
(i) Let A = {x | x = n + 1, n ∈ E}
Thus, for 2 ∈ E, x = 3
4 ∈ E, x = 5,
and so on. Therefore, A = {3, 5, 7, 9, 11}.
(ii) Let B = {x | x = n2, n ∈ E}
So, for 2 ∈ E, x = (2)2 = 4, 4 ∈ E, x = (4)2 = 16, 6 ∈ E, x = (6)2 = 36,
and so on. Hence, B = {4, 16, 36, 64, 100}
Example 6 Let X = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. If n represent any member of X, express the
following as sets :

18/04/18
 6 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(i) n ∈ X but 2n ∉ X (ii) n + 5 = 8

(iii) n is greater than 4.
Solution
(i) For X = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}, it is the given that n ∈ X, but 2n ∉ X.
Let, A = {x | x ∈ X and 2x ∉ X}
Now, 1∉A as 2.1 = 2 ∈ X
2∉A as 2.2 = 4 ∈ X
3∉A as 2.3 = 6 ∈ X
But 4∈A as 2.4 = 8 ∉ X
5∈A as 2.5 = 10 ∉ X
6∈A as 2.6 = 12 ∉ X
So, A = {4, 5, 6}
(ii) Let B = {x | x ∈ X and x + 5 = 8}
Here, B = {3}
as x = 3 ∈ X and 3 + 5 = 8 and there is no other element belonging to X
such that x + 5 = 8.
(iii) Let C = {x | x ∈ X, x > 4}
Therefore, C = {5, 6}
Example 7 Draw the Venn diagrams to illustrate the followoing relationship among
sets E, M and U, where E is the set of students studying English in a school, M is the
set of students studying Mathematics in the same school, U is the set of all students in
that school.
(i) All the students who study Mathematics study English, but some students who
study English do not study Mathematics.
(ii) There is no student who studies both Mathematics and English.
(iii) Some of the students study Mathematics but do not study English, some study English
but do not study Mathematics, and some study both.
(iv) Not all students study Mathematics, but every students
studying English studies Mathematics.
Solution
(i) Since all of the students who study mathematics study
English, but some students who study English do not
study Mathematics.
Therefore, M⊂E⊂U
Thus the Venn Diagram is Fig 1.4

18/04/18
 SETS 7

(ii) Since there is no student who study both English and Mathematics
Hence, E ∩ M = φ.

Fig 1.5
(iii) Since there are some students who study both English and Mathematics, some
English only and some Mathematics only.
Thus, the Venn Diagram is

Fig 1.6

(iv) Since every student studying English studiesMathematics.

Hence, E⊂M⊂U

Fig 1.7

Example 8 For all sets A, B and C

Is (A ∩ B) ∪ C = A ∩ (B ∪ C)?
Justify your statement.

18/04/18
 8 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Solution No. consider the following sets A, B and C :

A = {1, 2, 3}
B = {2, 3, 5}
C = {4, 5, 6}
Now (A ∩ B) ∪ C = ({1, 2, 3} ∩ {2, 3, 5}) ∪ {4, 5, 6}
= {2, 3} ∪ {4, 5, 6}
= {2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
And A ∩ (B ∪ C) = {1, 2, 3} ∩ [{2, 3, 5} ∪ {4, 5, 6}
= {1, 2, 3} ∩ {2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
= {2, 3}
Therefore, (A ∩ B) ∪ C ≠ A ∩ (B ∪ C)
Example 9 Use the properties of sets to prove that for all the sets A and B
A – (A ∩ B) = A – B
Solution We have
A – (A ∩ B) = A ∩ (A ∩ B)′ (since A – B = A ∩ B′)
= A ∩ (A′ ∪ B′) [by De Morgan’s law)
= (A ∩ A′) ∪ (A ∩ B′) [by distributive law]
= φ ∪ (A ∩ B′)
= A ∩ B′ = A – B
Long Answer Type
Example 10 For all sets A, B and C
Is (A – B) ∩ (C – B) = (A ∩ C) – B?
Justify your answer.
Solution Yes
Let x ∈ (A – B) ∩ (C – B)
⇒ x ∈ A – B and x ∈ C – B
⇒ (x ∈ A and x ∉ B) and (x ∈ C and x ∉ B)
⇒ (x ∈ A and x ∈ C) and x ∉ B
⇒ (x ∈ A ∩ C) and x ∉ B
⇒ x ∈ (A ∩ C) – B
So (A – B) ∩ (C – B) ⊂ (A ∩ C) – B ... (1)
Now, conversely

18/04/18
 SETS 9

Let y ∈ (A ∩ C) – B
⇒ y ∈ (A ∩ C) and y ∉ B
⇒ (y ∈ A and y ∈ C) and (y ∉ B)
⇒ (y ∈ A and y ∉ B) and (y ∈ C and y ∉ B)
⇒ y ∈ (A – B) and y ∈ (C – B)
⇒ y ∈ (A – B) ∩ (C – B)
So (A ∩ C) – B ⊂ (A – B) ∩ (C – B) ... (2)
From (1) and (2), (A – B) ∩ (C – B) = (A ∩ C) – B
Example 11 Let A, B and C be sets. Then show that
A ∪ (B ∩ C) = (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C)
Solution We first show that A ∪ (B ∩ C) ⊂ (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C)
Let x ∈ A ∪ (B ∩ C). Then
x∈A or x∈B∩C
⇒ x∈A or (x ∈ B and x ∈ C)
⇒ (x ∈ A or x ∈ B) and (x ∈ A or x ∈ C)
⇒ (x ∈ A ∪ B) and (x ∈ A ∪ C)
⇒ x ∈ (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C)
Thus, A ∪ (B ∩ C) ⊂ (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C) ... (1)
Now we will show that (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C) ⊂ (A ∪ C)
Let x ∈ (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C)
⇒ x ∈ A ∪ B and x ∈ A ∪ C
⇒ (x ∈ A or x ∈ B) and (x ∈ A or x ∈ C)
⇒ x ∈ A or (x ∈ B and x ∈ C)
⇒ x ∈ A or (x ∈ B ∩ C)
⇒ x ∈ A ∪ (B ∩ C)
Thus, (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C) ⊂ A ∪ (B ∩ C) ... (2)
So, from (1) and (2), we have
A ∩ (B ∪ C) = (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C)
Example 12 Let P be the set of prime numbers and let S = {t | 2t – 1 is a prime}.
Prove that S ⊂ P.
Solution Now the equivalent contrapositive statement of x ∈ S ⇒ x ∈ P is x ∉ P ⇒
x ∉ S.

18/04/18
 10 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Now, we will prove the above contrapositive statement by contradiction method

Let x∉P
⇒ x is a composite number
Let us now assume that x ∈ S
⇒ 2x – 1 = m (where m is a prime number)
⇒ x
2 =m+1
Which is not true for all composite number, say for x = 4 because
24 = 16 which can not be equal to the sum of any prime number m and 1.
Thus, we arrive at a contradiction
⇒ x ∉ S.
Thus, when x ∉ P, we arrive at x ∉ S
So S ⊂ P.
Example 13 From 50 students taking examinations in Mathematics, Physics and
Chemistry, each of the student has passed in at least one of the subject, 37 passed
Mathematics, 24 Physics and 43 Chemistry. At most 19 passed Mathematics and
Physics, at most 29 Mathematics and Chemistry and at most 20 Physics and Chemistry.
What is the largest possible number that could have passed all three examination?
Solution Let M be the set of students passing in Mathematics
P be the set of students passing in Physics
C be the set of students passing in Chemistry
Now, n(M ∪ P ∪ C) = 50, n(M) = 37, n(P) = 24, n(C) = 43
n(M ∩ P) ≤ 19, n(M ∩ C) ≤ 29, n(P ∩ C) ≤ 20 (Given)
n(M ∪ P ∪ C) = n(M) + n(P) + n(C) – n(M ∩ P) – n(M ∩ C)
– n(P ∩ C) + n(M ∩ P ∩ C) ≤ 50
⇒ 37 + 24 + 43 – 19 – 29 – 20 + n(M ∩ P ∩ C) ≤ 50
⇒ n(M ∩ P ∩ C) ≤ 50 – 36
⇒ n(M ∩ P ∩ C) ≤ 14
Thus, the largest possible number that could have passed all the three examinations is 14.

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Examples
14 to 16 : (M.C.Q.)

18/04/18
 SETS 11

Example 14 Each set Xr contains 5 elements and each set Yr contains 2 elements
20 n
and ∪ X r = S = ∪ Yr . If each element of S belong to exactly 10 of the Xr’s and to
r =1 r =1

exactly 4 of the Yr’s, then n is

(A) 10 (B) 20 (C) 100 (D) 50
Solution The correct answer is (B)
20
Since, n(Xr) = 5, ∪ Xr = S , we get n(S) = 100
r =1

But each element of S belong to exactly 10 of the Xr’s

100
So, = 10 are the number of distinct elements in S.
10
Also each element of S belong to exactly 4 of the Yr’ s and each Yr contain 2 elements.
If S has n number of Yr in it. Then
2n
= 10
4
which gives n = 20
Example 15 Two finite sets have m and n elements respectively. The total number of
subsets of first set is 56 more than the total number of subsets of the second set. The
values of m and n respectively are.
(A) 7, 6 (B) 5, 1 (C) 6, 3 (D) 8, 7
Solution The correct answer is (C).
Since, let A and B be such sets, i.e., n (A) = m, n (B) = n
So n (P(A)) = 2m, n (P(B)) = 2n
Thus n (P(A)) – n (P(B)) = 56, i.e., 2m – 2n = 56
⇒ 2n (2m – n – 1) = 23 7
⇒ n = 3 , 2m – n – 1 = 7
⇒ m=6
Example 16 The set (A ∪ B ∪ C) ∩ (A ∩ B′ ∩ C′)′ ∩ C′ is equal to
(A) B ∩ C′ (B) A ∩ C (C) B ∪ C′ (D) A ∩ C′
Solution The correct choice is (A).
Since (A ∪ B ∪ C) ∩ (A ∩ B′ ∩ C′)′ ∩ C′

18/04/18
 12 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

= (A ∪ (B ∪ C)) ∩ (A′ ∪ (B ∪ C)) ∩ C′

= (A ∩ A′) ∪ (B ∪ C) ∩ C′
= φ ∪ (B ∪ C) ∩ C′
= B ∩ C′ ∪ φ = B ∩ C′
Fill in the blanks in Examples 17 and 18 :
Example 17 If A and B are two finite sets, then n(A) + n(B) is equal to ___________
Solution Since n(A ∪ B) = n (A) + n (B) – n (A ∩ B)
So n(A) + n (B) = n (A ∪ B) + n (A ∩ B)
Example 18 If A is a finite set containing n element, then number of subsets of A is
__________
Solution 2n
State true or false for the following statements given in Examples
19 and 20.
Example 19 Let R and S be the sets defined as follows:
R = {x ∈ Z | x is divisible by 2}
S = {y ∈ Z | y is divisible by 3}
then R∩S=φ
Solution False
Since 6 is divisible by both 3 and 2.
Thus R∩S ≠φ
Example 20 Q ∩ R = Q, where Q is the set of rational numbers and R is the set of
real numbers.
Solution True
Since Q⊂R
So Q∩R=Q

1.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
1. Write the following sets in the roaster from
(i) A = {x : x ∈ R, 2x + 11 = 15} (ii) B = {x | x2 = x, x ∈ R}
(iii) C = {x | x is a positive factor of a prime number p}

18/04/18
 SETS 13

2. Write the following sets in the roaster form :

w−2
(i) D = {t | t3 = t, t ∈ R} (ii) E = {w | = 3 , w ∈ R}
w+3
(iii) F = {x | x4 – 5x2 + 6 = 0, x ∈ R}
3. If Y = {x | x is a positive factor of the number 2p – 1 (2p – 1), where 2p – 1 is a
prime number}.Write Y in the roaster form.
4. State which of the following statements are true and which are false. Justify
your answer.
(i) 35 ∈ {x | x has exactly four positive factors}.
(ii) 128 ∈ {y | the sum of all the positive factors of y is 2y}
(iii) 3 ∉ {x | x4 – 5x3 + 2x2 – 112x + 6 = 0}
(iv) 496 ∉ {y | the sum of all the positive factors of y is 2y}.
5. Given L = {1, 2, 3, 4}, M = {3, 4, 5, 6} and N = {1, 3, 5}
Verify that L – (M ∪ N) = (L – M) ∩ (L – N)
6. If A and B are subsets of the universal set U, then show that
(i) A ⊂ A ∪ B (ii) A ⊂ B ⇔ A ∪ B = B
(iii) (A ∩ B) ⊂ A
7. Given that N = {1, 2, 3, ... , 100}. Then write
(i) the subset of N whose elements are even numbers.
(ii) the subset of N whose element are perfect square numbers.
8. If X = {1, 2, 3}, if n represents any member of X, write the following sets
containing all numbers represented by

n
(i) 4n (ii) n + 6 (iii) (iv) n – 1
2
9. If Y = {1, 2, 3, ... 10}, and a represents any element of Y, write the following
sets, containing all the elements satisfying the given conditions.
(i) a ∈ Y but a2 ∉ Y (ii) a + 1 = 6, a ∈ Y
(iii) a is less than 6 and a ∈ Y
10. A, B and C are subsets of Universal Set U. If A = {2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 20}
B = {3, 6, 9, 12, 15}, C = {5, 10, 15, 20} and U is the set of all whole numbers,
draw a Venn diagram showing the relation of U, A, B and C.

18/04/18
 14 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

11. Let U be the set of all boys and girls in a school, G be the set of all girls in the
school, B be the set of all boys in the school, and S be the set of all students in the
school who take swimming. Some, but not all, students in the school take
swimming. Draw a Venn diagram showing one of the possible interrelationship
among sets U, G, B and S.
12. For all sets A, B and C, show that (A – B) ∩ (C – B) = A – (B ∪ C)
Determine whether each of the statement in Exercises 13 – 17 is true or false.
Justify your answer.
13. For all sets A and B, (A – B) ∪ (A ∩ B) = A
14. For all sets A, B and C, A – (B – C) = (A – B) – C
15. For all sets A, B and C, if A ⊂ B, then A ∩ C ⊂ B ∩ C
16. For all sets A, B and C, if A ⊂ B, then A ∪ C ⊂ B ∪ C
17. For all sets A, B and C, if A ⊂ C and B ⊂ C, then A ∪ B ⊂ C.
Using properties of sets prove the statements given in Exercises 18 to 22
18. For all sets A and B, A ∪ (B – A) = A ∪ B
19. For all sets A and B, A – (A – B) = A ∩ B
20. For all sets A and B, A – (A ∩ B) = A – B
21. For all sets A and B, (A ∪ B) – B = A – B

 x+5 4 x − 40 
22. Let T =  x | −5=  . Is T an empty set? Justify your answer.
 x−7 13 − x 

Long Answer Type

23. Let A, B and C be sets. Then show that
A ∩ (B ∪ C) = (A ∩ B) ∪ (A ∩ C)
24. Out of 100 students; 15 passed in English, 12 passed in Mathematics, 8 in Science,
6 in English and Mathematics, 7 in Mathematics and Science; 4 in English and
Science; 4 in all the three. Find how many passed
(i) in English and Mathematics but not in Science
(ii) in Mathematics and Science but not in English
(iii) in Mathematics only
(iv) in more than one subject only
25. In a class of 60 students, 25 students play cricket and 20 students play tennis, and
10 students play both the games. Find the number of students who play neither?

18/04/18
 SETS 15

26. In a survey of 200 students of a school, it was found that 120 study Mathematics,
90 study Physics and 70 study Chemistry, 40 study Mathematics and Physics, 30
study Physics and Chemistry, 50 study Chemistry and Mathematics and 20 none
of these subjects. Find the number of students who study all the three subjects.
27. In a town of 10,000 families it was found that 40% families buy newspaper A,
20% families buy newspaper B, 10% families buy newspaper C, 5% families
buy A and B, 3% buy B and C and 4% buy A and C. If 2% families buy all the
three newspapers. Find
(a) The number of families which buy newspaper A only.
(b) The number of families which buy none of A, B and C
28. In a group of 50 students, the number of students studying French, English,
Sanskrit were found to be as follows:
French = 17, English = 13, Sanskrit = 15
French and English = 09, English and Sanskrit = 4
French and Sanskrit = 5, English, French and Sanskrit = 3. Find the number of
students who study
(i) French only (v) French and Sanskrit but not English
(ii) English only (vi) French and English but not Sanskrit
(iii) Sanskrit only (vii) at least one of the three languages
(iv) English and Sanskrit (viii) none of the three languages
but not French

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answers from the given four options in each Exercises 29 to 43
(M.C.Q.).
29. Suppose A1, A2, ..., A30 are thirty sets each having 5 elements and B1, B2, ..., Bn
30 n
are n sets each with 3 elements, let ∪ Ai = ∪ B j = S and each element of S
i =1 j =1

belongs to exactly 10 of the Ai’s and exactly 9 of the B,’S. then n is equal to
(A) 15 (B) 3 (C) 45 (D) 35
30. Two finite sets have m and n elements. The number of subsets of the first set is
112 more than that of the second set. The values of m and n are, respectively,
(A) 4, 7 (B) 7, 4 (C) 4, 4 (D) 7, 7

18/04/18
16 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

31. The set (A ∩ B′)′ ∪ (B ∩ C) is equal to

(A) A′ ∪ B ∪ C (B) A′ ∪ B (C) A′ ∪ C′ (D) A′ ∩ B
32. Let F1 be the set of parallelograms, F2 the set of rectangles, F3 the set of rhombuses,
F4 the set of squares and F5 the set of trapeziums in a plane. Then F1 may be
equal to
(A) F2 ∩ F3 (B) F3 ∩ F4
(C) F2 ∪ F5 (D) F2 ∪ F3 ∪ F4 ∪ F1
33. Let S = set of points inside the square, T = the set of points inside the triangle and
C = the set of points inside the circle. If the triangle and circle intersect each
other and are contained in a square. Then
(A) S ∩ T ∩ C = φ (B) S ∪ T ∪ C = C
(C) S ∪ T ∪ C = S (D) S ∪ T = S ∩ C
34. Let R be set of points inside a rectangle of sides a and b (a, b > 1) with two sides
along the positive direction of x-axis and y-axis. Then
(A) R = {(x, y) : 0 ≤ x ≤ a, 0 ≤ y ≤ b}
(B) R = {(x, y) : 0 ≤ x < a, 0 ≤ y ≤ b}
(C) R = {(x, y) : 0 ≤ x ≤ a, 0 < y < b}
(D) R = {(x, y) : 0 < x < a, 0 < y < b}
35. In a class of 60 students, 25 students play cricket and 20 students play tennis,
and 10 students play both the games. Then, the number of students who play
neither is
(A) 0 (B) 25 (C) 35 (D) 45
36. In a town of 840 persons, 450 persons read Hindi, 300 read English and 200 read
both. Then the number of persons who read neither is
(A) 210 (B) 290 (C) 180 (D) 260
37. If X = {8 – 7n – 1 | n ∈ N} and Y = {49n – 49 | n ∈ N}. Then
n

(A) X ⊂ Y (B) Y ⊂ X (C) X = Y (D) X ∩ Y = φ

38. A survey shows that 63% of the people watch a News Channel whereas 76%
watch another channel. If x% of the people watch both channel, then
(A) x = 35 (B) x = 63 (C) 39 ≤ x ≤ 63 (D) x = 39
39. If sets A and B are defined as
1
A = {(x, y) | y = , 0 ≠ x ∈ R} B = {(x, y) | y = – x, x ∈ R}, then
x
(A) A ∩ B = A (B) A ∩ B = B (C) A ∩ B = φ (D) A ∪ B = A

18/04/18
 SETS 17

40. If A and B are two sets, then A ∩ (A ∪ B) equals

(A) A (B) B (C) φ (D) A ∩ B
41. IfA = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17} B = {2, 4, ... , 18} and N the set of natural
numbers is the universal set, then A′ ∪ (A ∪ B) ∩ B′) is
(A) φ (B) N (C) A (D) B
42. Let S = {x | x is a positive multiple of 3 less than 100}
P = {x | x is a prime number less than 20}. Then n(S) + n(P) is
(A) 34 (B) 31 (C) 33 (D) 30
43. If X and Y are two sets and X′ denotes the complement of X, then X ∩ (X ∪ Y)′
is equal to
(A) X (B) Y (C) φ (D) X ∩ Y
Fill in the blanks in each of the Exercises from 44 to 51 :
44. The set {x ∈ R : 1 ≤ x < 2} can be written as ______________.
45. When A = φ, then number of elements in P(A) is ______________.
46. If A and B are finite sets such that A ⊂ B, then n (A ∪ B) = ______________.
47. If A and B are any two sets, then A – B is equal to ______________.
48. Power set of the set A = {1, 2} is ______________.
49. Given the sets A = {1, 3, 5}. B = {2, 4, 6} and C = {0, 2, 4, 6, 8}. Then the
universal set of all the three sets A, B and C can be ______________.
50. If U = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10}, A = {1, 2, 3, 5}, B = {2, 4, 6, 7} and
C = {2, 3, 4, 8}. Then
(i) (B ∪ C)′ is ______________. (ii)(C – A)′ is ______________.
51. For all sets A and B, A – (A ∩ B) is equal to ______________.
52. Match the following sets for all sets A, B and C
(i) ((A′ ∪ B′) – A)′ (a) A – B
(ii) [B′ ∪ (B′ – A)]′ (b) A
(iii) (A – B) – (B – C) (c) B
(iv) (A – B) ∩ (C – B) (d) (A × B) ∩ (A × C)
(v) A × (B ∩ C) (e) (A × B) ∪ (A × C)
(vi) A × (B ∪ C) (f) (A ∩ C) – B

18/04/18
 18 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

State True or False for the following statements in each of the Exercises from 53 to 58 :
53. If A is any set, then A ⊂ A
54. Given that M = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} and if B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9}, then B ⊄ M
55. The sets {1, 2, 3, 4} and {3, 4, 5, 6} are equal.
56. Q ∪ Z = Q, where Q is the set of rational numbers and Z is the set of integers.
57. Let sets R and T be defined as
R = {x ∈ Z | x is divisible by 2}
T = {x ∈ Z | x is divisible by 6}. Then T ⊂ R
58. Given A = {0, 1, 2}, B = {x ∈ R | 0 ≤ x ≤ 2}. Then A = B.

18/04/18
 Chapter 2
RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS
2.1 Overview
This chapter deals with linking pair of elements from two sets and then introduce
relations between the two elements in the pair. Practically in every day of our lives, we
pair the members of two sets of numbers. For example, each hour of the day is paired
with the local temperature reading by T.V. Station's weatherman, a teacher often pairs
each set of score with the number of students receiving that score to see more clearly
how well the class has understood the lesson. Finally, we shall learn about special
relations called functions.
2.1.1 Cartesian products of sets
Definition : Given two non-empty sets A and B, the set of all ordered pairs (x, y),
where x ∈ A and y ∈ B is called Cartesian product of A and B; symbolically, we write
A × B = {(x, y) | x ∈ A and y ∈ B}
If A = {1, 2, 3} and B = {4, 5}, then
A × B = {(1, 4), (2, 4), (3, 4), (1, 5), (2, 5), (3, 5)}
and B × A = {(4, 1), (4, 2), (4, 3), (5, 1), (5, 2), (5, 3)}
(i) Two ordered pairs are equal, if and only if the corresponding first elements are
equal and the second elements are also equal, i.e. (x, y) = (u, v) if and only if x =
u, y = v.
(ii) If n(A) = p and n (B) = q, then n (A × B) = p × q.
(iii) A × A × A = {(a, b, c) : a, b, c ∈ A}. Here (a, b, c) is called an ordered triplet.
2.1.2 Relations A Relation R from a non-empty set A to a non empty set B is a
subset of the Cartesian product set A × B. The subset is derived by describing a
relationship between the first element and the second element of the ordered pairs in
A × B.
The set of all first elements in a relation R, is called the domain of the relation R,
and the set of all second elements called images, is called the range of R.
1
For example, the set R = {(1, 2), (– 2, 3), ( , 3)} is a relation; the domain of
2
1
R = {1, – 2, } and the range of R = {2, 3}.
2

18/04/18
20 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(i) A relation may be represented either by the Roster form or by the set builder
form, or by an arrow diagram which is a visual representation of a relation.
(ii) If n (A) = p, n (B) = q; then the n (A × B) = pq and the total number of possible
relations from the set A to set B = 2pq.
2.1.3 Functions A relation f from a set A to a set B is said to be function if every
element of set A has one and only one image in set B.
In other words, a function f is a relation such that no two pairs in the relation
has the same first element.
The notation f : X → Y means that f is a function from X to Y. X is called the domain
of f and Y is called the co-domain of f. Given an element x ∈ X, there is a unique element
y in Y that is related to x. The unique element y to which f relates x is denoted by f (x) and
is called f of x, or the value of f at x, or the image of x under f.
The set of all values of f (x) taken together is called the range of f or image of X
under f. Symbolically.
range of f = { y ∈ Y | y = f (x), for some x in X}
Definition : A function which has either R or one of its subsets as its range, is called
a real valued function. Further, if its domain is also either R or a subset of R, it is called
a real function.
2.1.4 Some specific types of functions
(i) Identity function:
The function f : R → R defined by y = f (x) = x for each x ∈ R is called the
identity function. Domain of f = R
Range of f = R
(ii) Constant function: The function f : R → R defined by y = f (x) = C, x ∈ R,
where C is a constant ∈ R, is a constant function.
Domain of f = R
Range of f = {C}
(iii) Polynomial function: A real valued function f : R → R defined by y = f (x) = a0
+ a1x + ...+ anxn, where n ∈ N, and a0, a1, a2...an ∈ R, for each x ∈ R, is called
Polynomial functions.
f ( x)
(iv) Rational function: These are the real functions of the type , where
g ( x)
f (x) and g (x) are polynomial functions of x defined in a domain, where g(x) ≠ 0. For

18/04/18
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 21

x +1
example f : R – {– 2} → R defined by f (x) = , ∀ x ∈ R – {– 2 }is a
x+2
rational function.
(v) The Modulus function: The real function f : R → R defined by f (x) = x =

x, x ≥ 0
− x, x < 0
∀ x ∈ R is called the modulus function.
Domain of f = R
Range of f = R+ ∪ {0}
(vi) Signum function: The real function
f : R → R defined by

| x |  1, if x>0
 ,x≠0 
f ( x) =  x =  0, if x=0
 0, x = 0 −1, if x<0

is called the signum function. Domain of f = R, Range of f = {1, 0, – 1}
(vii) Greatest integer function: The real function f : R → R defined by
f (x) = [x], x ∈R assumes the value of the greatest integer less than or equal to x, is
called the greatest integer function.
Thus f (x) = [x] = – 1 for – 1 ≤ x < 0
f (x) = [x] = 0 for 0 ≤ x < 1
[x] = 1 for 1 ≤ x < 2
[x] = 2 for 2 ≤ x < 3 and so on
2.1.5 Algebra of real functions
(i) Addition of two real functions
Let f : X → R and g : X → R be any two real functions, where X ∈ R.
Then we define ( f + g) : X → R by ( f + g) (x) = f (x) + g (x), for all x ∈ X.
(ii) Subtraction of a real function from another
Let f : X → R and g : X → R be any two real functions, where X ⊆ R.
Then, we define (f – g) : X → R by (f – g) (x) = f (x) – g (x), for all x ∈ X.
(iii) Multiplication by a Scalar
Let f : X → R be a real function and α be any scalar belonging to R. Then the
product αf is function from X to R defined by (α f ) (x) = α f (x), x ∈ X.

18/04/18
22 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(iv) Multiplication of two real functions

Let f : X → R and g : x → R be any two real functions, where X ⊆ R. Then
product of these two functions i.e. f g : X → R is defined by
( f g ) (x) = f (x) g (x) ∀ x ∈ X.
(v) Quotient of two real function
Let f and g be two real functions defined from X → R. The quotient of f by g
f
denoted by g is a function defined from X → R as

 f  f ( x)
  ( x) = , provided g (x) ≠ 0, x ∈ X.
g  g ( x)

A Note Domain of sum function f + g, difference function f – g and product

function fg.
= {x : x ∈D f ∩ Dg}
where Df = Domain of function f
Dg = Domain of function g
f
Domain of quotient function
g
= {x : x ∈D f ∩ Dg and g (x) ≠ 0}

2.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type

Example 1 Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and B = {5, 7, 9}. Determine
(i) A × B (ii) B × A
(iii) Is A × B = B × A ? (iv) Is n (A × B) = n (B × A) ?
Solution Since A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and B = {5, 7, 9}. Therefore,
(i) A × B = {(1, 5), (1, 7), (1, 9), (2, 5), (2, 7),
(2, 9), (3, 5), (3, 7), (3, 9), (4, 5), (4, 7), (4, 9)}
(ii) B × A = {(5, 1), (5, 2), (5, 3), (5, 4), (7, 1), (7, 2),
(7, 3), (7, 4), (9, 1), (9, 2), (9, 3), (9, 4)}
(iii) No, A × B ≠ B × A. Since A × B and B × A do not have exactly the same
ordered pairs.
(iv) n (A × B) = n (A) × n (B) = 4 × 3 = 12

18/04/18
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 23

n (B × A) = n (B) × n (A) = 4 × 3 = 12
Hence n (A × B) = n (B × A)
Example 2 Find x and y if:
(i) (4x + 3, y) = (3x + 5, – 2) (ii) (x – y, x + y) = (6, 10)
Solution
(i) Since (4x + 3, y) = (3x + 5, – 2), so
4x + 3 = 3x + 5
or x=2
and y=–2
(ii) x – y = 6
x + y = 10
∴ 2x = 16
or x=8
8–y=6
∴ y=2
Example 3 If A = {2, 4, 6, 9} and B = {4, 6, 18, 27, 54}, a ∈ A, b ∈ B, find the set of
ordered pairs such that 'a' is factor of 'b' and a < b.
Solution Since A = {2, 4, 6, 9}
B = {4, 6, 18, 27, 54},
we have to find a set of ordered pairs (a, b) such that a is factor of b and a < b.
Since 2 is a factor of 4 and 2 < 4.
So (2, 4) is one such ordered pair.
Similarly, (2, 6), (2, 18), (2, 54) are other such ordered pairs. Thus the required set
of ordered pairs is
{(2, 4), (2, 6), (2, 18), (2, 54), (6, 18), (6, 54,), (9, 18), (9, 27), (9, 54)}.
Example 4 Find the domain and range of the relation R given by
6
R = {(x, y) : y = x +; where x, y ∈ N and x < 6}.
x
Solution When x = 1, y = 7 ∈ N, so (1, 7) ∈ R. Again for,
6
x = 2 . y = 2+ = 2 + 3 = 5 ∈ N, so (2, 5) ∈ R. Again for
2

18/04/18
24 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

6
x = 3, y = 3 + = 3 + 2 = 5 ∈ N, (3, 5) ∈ R. Similarly for x = 4
3
6 6
y=4+ ∉ N and for x = 5 , y = 5 + ∉N
4 5
Thus R = {(1, 7), (2, 5), (3, 5)}, where Domain of R = {1, 2, 3}
Range of R = {7, 5}
Example 5 Is the following relation a function? Justify your answer
1
(i) R1 = {(2, 3), ( , 0), (2, 7), (– 4, 6)}
2
(ii) R2 = {(x, | x |) | x is a real number}
Solution
Since (2, 3) and (2, 7) ∈ R1
⇒ R1 (2) = 3 and R1 (2) = 7
So R1 (2) does not have a unique image. Thus R1 is not a function.
(iii) R2 = {(x, | x |) / x ∈R}
For every x ∈ R there will be unique image as | x | ∈ R.
Therefore R2 is a function.
Example 6 Find the domain for which the functions
f (x) = 2x2 – 1 and g (x) = 1 – 3x are equal.
Solution
For f (x) = g (x)
⇒ 2x2 – 1 = 1 – 3x
⇒ 2x2 + 3x – 2 = 0
⇒ 2x2 + 4x – x – 2 = 0
⇒ 2x (x + 2) – 1 (x + 2) = 0
⇒ (2x – 1) (x + 2) = 0
1 
Thus domain for which the function f (x) = g (x) is  , – 2 .
 2 
Example 7 Find the domain of each of the following functions.
x
(i) f ( x) = 2 (ii) f (x) = [x] + x
x + 3x + 2

18/04/18
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 25

Solution
g ( x)
(i) f is a rational function of the form , where g (x) = x and h (x) = x2 + 3x + 2.
h ( x)
Now h (x) ≠ 0 ⇒ x2 + 3x + 2 ≠ 0 ⇒ (x + 1) (x + 2) ≠ 0 and hence domain of the
given function is R – {– 1, – 2}.
(ii) f (x) = [x] + x,i.e., f (x) = h (x) + g (x)
where h (x) = [x] and g (x) = x
The domain of h = R
and the domain of g = R. Therefore
Domain of f = R
Example 8 Find the range of the following functions given by

x−4
(i) (ii) 16 – x 2
x−4
Solution

 x−4
= 1, x > 4
x−4   x−4
(i) f (x) = = 
x − 4  − ( x − 4)
= −1, x < 4
 x − 4

x −4
Thus the range of = {1, –1}.
x −4

(ii) The domain of f, where f (x) = 16 − x 2 is given by [– 4, 4].

For the range, let y = 16 − x 2

then y2 = 16 – x2
or x2 = 16 – y2
Since x ∈ [– 4, 4]
Thus range of f = [0, 4]
Example 9 Redefine the function which is given by
f (x) = x −1 + 1 + x , – 2 ≤ x ≤ 2

18/04/18
26 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Solution f (x) = x −1 + 1 + x , – 2 ≤ x ≤ 2

 – x +1 −1− x, – 2 ≤ x < –1

=  – x +1 + x + 1, –1≤ x < 1
 x − 1 + 1 + x , 1≤ x ≤ 2


 – 2 x , – 2 ≤ x < –1

=  2, –1 ≤ x < 1
 2 x,1 ≤ x ≤ 2


1
Example 10 Find the domain of the function f given by f (x) =
2
[ x] –[ x ]– 6

1
Solution Given that f (x) = , f is defined if [x]2 – [x] – 6 > 0.
2
[ x] –[ x ]– 6
or ([x]–3) ([x] + 2) > 0,
⇒ [x] < – 2 or [x] > 3
⇒ x<–2 or x≥4
Hence Domain = ( – ∞ , – 2) ∪ [4, ∞ ).

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of the four given possible answers (M.C.Q.)

1
Example 11 The domain of the function f defined by f (x) = is
x− x

(A) R (B) R+
(C) R – (D) None of these
1
Solution The correct answer is (D). Given that f (x) =
x− x

 x – x = 0 if x ≥0
where x– x = 
2 x if x <0

18/04/18
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 27

1
Thus is not defined for any x ∈ R.
x− x
Hence f is not defined for any x ∈ R, i.e. Domain of f is none of the given options.
1 1
Example 12 If f (x) = x3 − 3 , then f (x) + f ( ) is equal to
x x

1
(A) 2x 3 (B) 2 (C) 0 (D) 1
x3
Solution The correct choice is C.
1
Since f (x) = x3 –
x3

1 1 1 1
= 3 – x3
f  = 3 −
x x 1 x
x3

1 3 1 1 3
Hence, f (x) + f   = x − 3 + 3 – x = 0
x x x
Example 13 Let A and B be any two sets such that n(B) = p, n(A) = q then the total
number of functions f : A → B is equal to __________.
Solution Any element of set A, say xi can be connected with the element of set B in p
ways. Hence, there are exactly pq functions.
Example 14 Let f and g be two functions given by
f = {(2, 4), (5, 6), (8, – 1), (10, – 3)}
g = {(2, 5), (7, 1), (8, 4), (10, 13), (11, – 5)} then. Domain of f + g is __________
Solution Since Domain of f = Df = {2, 5, 8, 10} and Domain of g = Dg = {2, 7, 8, 10, 11},
therefore the domain of f + g = {x | x ∈ D f ∩ Dg} = {2, 8, 10}

2.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
1. Let A = {–1, 2, 3} and B = {1, 3}. Determine
(i) A × B (ii) B × A
(iii) B × B (iv) A × A

18/04/18
28 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

2. If P = {x : x < 3, x ∈ N}, Q = {x : x ≤ 2, x ∈ W}. Find (P ∪ Q) × (P ∩ Q), where

W is the set of whole numbers.
3. If A = {x : x ∈ W, x < 2} B = {x : x ∈ N, 1 < x < 5} C = {3, 5} find
(i) A × (B ∩ C) (ii) A × (B ∪ C)
4. In each of the following cases, find a and b.

a 
(i) (2a + b, a – b) = (8, 3) (ii)  , a – 2b  = (0, 6 + b)
4 
5. Given A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}, S = {(x, y) : x ∈ A, y ∈ A}. Find the ordered pairs
which satisfy the conditions given below:
(i) x + y = 5 (ii) x + y < 5 (iii) x + y > 8
6. Given R = {(x, y) : x, y ∈ W, x + y = 25}. Find the domain and Range of R.
2 2

7. If R1 = {(x, y) | y = 2x + 7, where x ∈ R and – 5 ≤ x ≤ 5} is a relation. Then find

the domain and Range of R1.
8. If R2 = {(x, y) | x and y are integers and x2 + y2 = 64} is a relation. Then find R2.
9. If R3 = {(x, x ) | x is a real number} is a relation. Then find domain and range
of R3.
10. Is the given relation a function? Give reasons for your answer.
(i) h = {(4, 6), (3, 9), (– 11, 6), (3, 11)}
(ii) f = {(x, x) | x is a real number}

1
(iii) g = n, |n is a positive integer
n
(iv) s = {(n, n2) | n is a positive integer}
(v) t = {(x, 3) | x is a real number.
11. If f and g are real functions defined by f (x) = x2 + 7 and g (x) = 3x + 5, find each
of the following
1
(a) f (3) + g (– 5) (b) f   × g (14)
 2
(c) f (– 2) + g (– 1) (d) f (t) – f (– 2)
f (t ) − f (5)
(e) , if t ≠ 5
t −5

18/04/18
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 29

12. Let f and g be real functions defined by f (x) = 2x + 1 and g (x) = 4x – 7.

(a) For what real numbers x, f (x) = g (x)?
(b) For what real numbers x, f (x) < g (x)?
13. If f and g are two real valued functions defined as f (x) = 2x + 1, g (x) = x2 + 1,
then find.
f
(i) f + g (ii) f – g (iii) f g (iv)
g

14. Express the following functions as set of ordered pairs and determine their range.
f : X → R, f (x) = x3 + 1, where X = {–1, 0, 3, 9, 7}
15. Find the values of x for which the functions
f (x) = 3x2 – 1 and g (x) = 3 + x are equal

Long Answer Type

16. Is g = {(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 5), (4, 7)} a function? Justify. If this is described by the
relation, g (x) = αx + β, then what values should be assigned to α and β?
17. Find the domain of each of the following functions given by
1 1
(i) f ( x) = (ii) f ( x) =
1− cos x x+ x

x3 − x + 3
(iii) f (x) = x x (iv) f (x) =
x 2 −1

3x
(v) f (x) =
2x −8
18. Find the range of the following functions given by

3
(i) f (x) = 2 (ii) f (x) = 1 – x − 2
2– x

(iii) f (x) = x − 3 (iv) f (x) = 1 + 3 cos2x

(Hint : – 1 ≤ cos 2x ≤ 1 ⇒ – 3 ≤ 3 cos 2x ≤ 3 ⇒ –2 ≤ 1 + 3cos 2x ≤ 4)
19. Redefine the function f (x) = x − 2 + 2 + x , – 3 ≤ x ≤ 3

18/04/18
30 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

x −1
20. If f (x) = , then show that
x +1

1  1  −1
(i) f   = – f (x) (ii) f  −  =
 x  x  f ( x)
21. Let f (x) = x and g (x) = x be two functions defined in the domain R+ ∪ {0}.
Find
(i) (f + g) (x) (ii) (f – g) (x)
 f 
(iii) (fg) (x) (iv)   ( x )
g
1
22. Find the domain and Range of the function f (x) = .
x−5

ax − b
23. If f (x) = y = , then prove that f (y) = x.
cx − a

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answers in Exercises from 24 to 35 (M.C.Q.)
24. Let n (A) = m, and n (B) = n. Then the total number of non-empty relations that
can be defined from A to B is
(A) mn (B) nm – 1
(C) mn – 1 (D) 2mn – 1
25. If [x]2 – 5 [x] + 6 = 0, where [ . ] denote the greatest integer function, then
(A) x ∈ [3, 4] (B) x ∈ (2, 3]
(C) x ∈ [2, 3] (D) x ∈ [2, 4)
1
26. Range of f (x) = is
1 − 2cos x

1   1
(A)  3 ,1 (B)  −1, 3 

1   1 
(C) (– ∞, –1] ∪  , ∞  (D)  − 3 ,1
3 

18/04/18
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 31

27. Let f (x) = 1 + x 2 , then

(A) f (xy) = f (x) . f (y) (B) f (xy) ≥ f (x) . f (y)
(C) f (xy) ≤ f (x) . f (y) (D) None of these

[Hint : find f (xy) = 1 + x 2 y 2 , f (x) . f (y) = 1+ x 2 y 2 + x 2 + y 2 ]

28. Domain of a 2 − x 2 (a > 0) is

(A) (– a, a) (B) [– a, a]
(C) [0, a] (D) (– a, 0]
29. If f (x) = ax + b, where a and b are integers, f (–1) = – 5 and f (3) = 3, then a and b
are equal to
(A) a = – 3, b = –1 (B) a = 2, b = – 3
(C) a = 0, b = 2 (D) a = 2, b = 3

1
30. The domain of the function f defined by f (x) = 4−x + is equal to
x 2 −1
(A) (– ∞, – 1) ∪ (1, 4] (B) (– ∞, – 1] ∪ (1, 4]
(C) (– ∞, – 1) ∪ [1, 4] (D) (– ∞, – 1) ∪ [1, 4)

4− x
31. The domain and range of the real function f defined by f (x) = is given by
x−4
(A) Domain = R, Range = {–1, 1}
(B) Domain = R – {1}, Range = R
(C) Domain = R – {4}, Range = {– 1}
(D) Domain = R – {– 4}, Range = {–1, 1}

32. The domain and range of real function f defined by f (x) = x − 1 is given by
(A) Domain = (1, ∞), Range = (0, ∞)
(B) Domain = [1, ∞), Range = (0, ∞)
(C) Domain = [1, ∞), Range = [0, ∞)
(D) Domain = [1, ∞), Range = [0, ∞)

18/04/18
32 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

x 2 + 2 x +1
33. The domain of the function f given by f (x) =
x2 – x – 6
(A) R – {3, – 2} (B) R – {–3, 2}
(C) R – [3, – 2] (D) R – (3, – 2)
34. The domain and range of the function f given by f (x) = 2 – x − 5 is
(A) Domain = R+, Range = ( – ∞, 1]
(B) Domain = R, Range = ( – ∞, 2]
(C) Domain = R, Range = (– ∞, 2)
(D) Domain = R+, Range = (– ∞, 2]
35. The domain for which the functions defined by f (x) = 3x2 – 1 and g (x) = 3 + x
are equal is

 4  4
(A) −1,  (B)  −1, 3 
 3

 4  4
(C)  −1,  (D)  −1, 3 
 3
Fill in the blanks :
36. Let f and g be two real functions given by
f = {(0, 1), (2, 0), (3, – 4), (4, 2), (5, 1)}
g = {(1, 0), (2, 2), (3, – 1), (4, 4), (5, 3)}
then the domain of f . g is given by _________.
37. Let f = {(2, 4), (5, 6), (8, – 1), (10, – 3)}
g = {(2, 5), (7, 1), (8, 4), (10, 13), (11, 5)}
be two real functions. Then Match the following :

 4   −1   −3  
(a) f – g (i)  2,  ,  8,  ,  10,  
 5   4   13  

(b) f + g (ii) {( 2,20) , (8, − 4) , (10, − 39)}

(c) f . g (iii) {( 2, − 1) , (8, − 5) , (10, − 16)}

18/04/18
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 33

f
(d) (iv) {(2, 9), (8, 3), (10, 10)}
g
State True or False for the following statements given in Exercises 38 to 42 :
38. The ordered pair (5, 2) belongs to the relation R = {(x, y) : y = x – 5, x, y ∈ Z}
39. If P = {1, 2}, then P × P × P = {(1, 1, 1), (2, 2, 2), (1, 2, 2), (2, 1, 1)}
40. If A = {1, 2, 3}, B = {3, 4} and C = {4, 5, 6}, then (A × B) ∪ (A × C)
= {(1, 3), (1, 4), (1, 5), (1, 6), (2, 3), (2, 4), (2, 5), (2, 6), (3, 3), (3, 4), (3, 5), (3, 6)}.

 1 −14
41. If (x – 2, y + 5) =  − 2,  are two equal ordered pairs, then x = 4, y =
 3 3
42. If A × B = {(a, x), (a, y), (b, x), (b, y)}, then A = {a, b}, B = {x, y}

18/04/18
 Chapter 3
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS
3.1 Overview
3.1.1 The word ‘trigonometry’ is derived from the Greek words ‘trigon’ and ‘metron’
which means measuring the sides of a triangle. An angle is the amount of rotation of a
revolving line with respect to a fixed line. If the rotation is in clockwise direction the
angle is negative and it is positive if the rotation is in the anti-clockwise direction.
Usually we follow two types of conventions for measuring angles, i.e., (i) Sexagesimal
system (ii) Circular system.
In sexagesimal system, the unit of measurement is degree. If the rotation from the
1
initial to terminal side is th of a revolution, the angle is said to have a measure of
360
1°. The classifications in this system are as follows:
1° = 60′
1′ = 60″
In circular system of measurement, the unit of measurement is radian. One radian is
the angle subtended, at the centre of a circle, by an arc equal in length to the radius of the
circle. The length s of an arc PQ of a circle of radius r is given by s = rθ, where θ is the
angle subtended by the arc PQ at the centre of the circle measured in terms of radians.

3.1.2 Relation between degree and radian

The circumference of a circle always bears a constant ratio to its diameter. This constant
22
ratio is a number denoted by π which is taken approximately as for all practical
7
purpose. The relationship between degree and radian measurements is
as follows:
2 right angle = 180° = π radians
180°
1 radian = = 57°16′ (approx)
π
π
1° = radian = 0.01746 radians (approx)
180

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 35

3.1.3 Trigonometric functions

Trigonometric ratios are defined for acute angles as the ratio of the sides of a right
angled triangle. The extension of trigonometric ratios to any angle in terms of radian
measure (real numbers) are called trigonometric functions. The signs of trigonometric
functions in different quadrants have been given in the following table:

I II III IV

sin x + + – –
cos x + – – +
tan x + – + –
cosec x + + – –
sec x + – – +
cot x + – + –

3.1.4 Domain and range of trigonometric functions

Functions Domain Range

sine R [–1, 1]
cosine R [–1, 1]
π
tan R – {(2n + 1) : n ∈ Z} R
2
cot R – {nπ : n ∈ Z} R
π
sec R – {(2n + 1) : n ∈ Z} R – (–1, 1)
2
cosec R – {nπ : n ∈ Z} R – (–1, 1)

3.1.5 Sine, cosine and tangent of some angles less than 90°

0° 15° 18° 30° 36° 45° 60° 90°

6− 2 5 −1 1 10 − 2 5 1 3
sine 0 1
4 4 2 4 2 2

18/04/18
 36 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

6+ 2 10 + 2 5 3 5 +1 1 1
cosine 1 0
4 4 2 4 2 2

1 not
tan 0 25 − 10 5 1
2− 3 3 5−2 5 3 defined
5

nπ
3.1.6 Allied or related angles The angles ± θ are called allied or related angles
2
and θ ± n × 360° are called coterminal angles. For general reduction, we have the
nπ
following rules. The value of any trigonometric function for ( ± θ) is numerically
2
equal to
(a) the value of the same function if n is an even integer with algebaric sign of the
function as per the quadrant in which angles lie.
(b) corresponding cofunction of θ if n is an odd integer with algebraic sign of the
function for the quadrant in which it lies. Here sine and cosine; tan and cot; sec
and cosec are cofunctions of each other.

3.1.7 Functions of negative angles Let θ be any angle. Then

sin (– θ) = – sin θ, cos (– θ) = cos θ
tan (– θ) = – tan θ, cot (– θ) = – cot θ
sec (– θ) = sec θ, cosec (– θ) = – cosec θ
3.1.8 Some formulae regarding compound angles
An angle made up of the sum or differences of two or more angles is called a
compound angle. The basic results in this direction are called trigonometric identies
as given below:
(i) sin (A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B
(ii) sin (A – B) = sin A cos B – cos A sin B
(iii) cos (A + B) = cos A cos B – sin A sin B
(iv) cos (A – B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B
tan A + tan B
(v) tan (A + B) =
1 − tan A tan B

tan A − tan B
(vi) tan (A – B) =
1 + tan A tan B

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 37

cot A cot B − 1
(vii) cot (A + B) =
cot A + cot B
cot A cot B + 1
(viii) cot (A – B) =
cot B − cot A
2 tan A
(ix) sin 2A = 2 sin A cos A =
1 + tan 2 A
2
1 – tan A
2 2 2 2
(x) cos 2A = cos A – sin A = 1 – 2 sin A = 2 cos A – 1 = 2
1+ tan A
2 tan A
(xi) tan 2A =
1 – tan 2 A
(xii) sin 3A = 3sin A – 4sin3 A
(xiii) cos 3A = 4cos3 A – 3cos A
3
3 tanA – tan A
(xiv) tan 3A =
1 – 3tan 2 A

A+B A–B
(xv) cos A + cos B = 2 cos cos
2 2
A+B B–A
(xvi) cos A – cos B = 2sin sin
2 2
A+B A−B
(xvii) sin A + sin B = 2sin cos
2 2
A+B A−B
(xviii) sin A – sin B = 2cos sin
2 2
(xix) 2sin A cos B = sin (A + B) + sin (A – B)
(xx) 2cos A sin B = sin (A + B) – sin (A – B)
(xxi) 2cos A cos B = cos (A + B) + cos (A – B)
(xxii) 2sin A sin B = cos (A – B) – cos (A + B)

A
+ if lies in quadrants I or II
A 1 − cos A 2
(xxiii) sin = ±
2 2 A
– if lies in III or IV quadrants
2

18/04/18
 38 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

 A
A 1 + cos A  + if 2
lies in I or IV quadrants
(xxiv) cos =± 
2 2  – if A
lies in II or III quadrants
 2

 A
A 1 − cos A  + if 2
lies in I or III quadrants
(xxv) tan =± 
2 1 + cos A  – if A
lies in II or IV quadrants
 2

Trigonometric functions of an angle of 18°

Let θ = 18°. Then 2θ = 90° – 3θ
Therefore, sin 2θ = sin (90° – 3θ) = cos 3θ
or sin 2θ = 4cos3 θ – 3cos θ
Since, cos θ ≠ 0, we get
2sin θ = 4cos2 θ – 3 = 1 – 4sin2 θ or 4sin2 θ + 2sin θ – 1 = 0.

−2 ± 4 + 16 −1 ± 5
Hence, sin θ = =
8 4
5 −1
Since, θ = 18°, sin θ > 0, therefore, sin 18° =
4

6−2 5 10 + 2 5
Also, cos18° = 1 − sin 2 18° = 1 − =
16 4
Now, we can easily find cos 36° and sin 36° as follows:
6−2 5 2+2 5 5 +1
cos 36° = 1 – 2sin2 18° = 1 − = =
8 8 4
5 +1
Hence, cos 36° =
4

6+2 5 10 − 2 5
Also, sin 36° = 1 − cos2 36° = 1 − =
16 4
3.1.9 Trigonometric equations
Equations involving trigonometric functions of a variables are called trigonometric
equations. Equations are called identities, if they are satisfied by all values of the

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 39

unknown angles for which the functions are defined. The solutions of a trigonometric
equations for which 0 ≤ θ < 2 π are called principal solutions. The expression
involving integer n which gives all solutions of a trigonometric equation is called the
general solution.

General Solution of Trigonometric Equations

(i) If sin θ = sin α for some angle α, then
θ = nπ + (–1)nα for n ∈ Z, gives general solution of the given equation
(ii) If cos θ = cos α for some angle α, then
θ = 2 nπ ± α, n ∈ Z, gives general solution of the given equation
(iii) If tan θ = tan α or cot θ = cot α, then
θ = nπ + α, n ∈ Z, gives general solution for both equations
(iv) The general value of θ satisfying any of the equations sin2 θ = sin2 α, cos2θ =
cos2 α and
tan2 θ = tan2 α is given by θ = nπ ± α
(v) The general value of θ satisfying equations sin θ = sin α and cos θ = cos α
simultaneously is given by θ = 2nπ + α, n ∈ Z.
(vi) To find the solution of an equation of the form a cosθ + b sinθ = c, we put
b
a = r cosα and b = r sinα, so that r2 = a2 + b2 and tan α = .
a
Thus we find
a cosθ + b sinθ = c changed into the form r (cos θ cos α + sin θ sin α) = c
c
or r cos (θ – α) = c and hence cos (θ – α) = . This gives the solution of the given
r
equation.

Maximum and Minimum values of the expression Acos θ + B sin θ are A 2 + B2

and – A 2 + B2 respectively, where A and B are constants.

3.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type
Example 1 A circular wire of radius 3 cm is cut and bent so as to lie along the
circumference of a hoop whose radius is 48 cm. Find the angle in degrees which is
subtended at the centre of hoop.

18/04/18
 40 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Solution Given that circular wire is of radius 3 cm, so when it is cut then its
length = 2π × 3 = 6π cm. Again, it is being placed along a circular hoop of radius 48 cm.
Here, s = 6π cm is the length of arc and r = 48 cm is the radius of the circle. Therefore,
the angle θ, in radian, subtended by the arc at the centre of the circle is given by
Arc 6π π
θ= = = = 22.5° .
Radius 48 8
3
Example 2 If A = cos2θ + sin4θ for all values of θ, then prove that ≤ A ≤ 1.
4
Solution We have A =cos2 θ + sin4 θ = cos2 θ + sin2 θ sin2 θ ≤ cos2 θ + sin2 θ
Therefore, A≤1
Also, A = cos θ + sin θ = (1 – sin2 θ) + sin4 θ
2 4

2 2
 2 1  1  2 1 3 3
=  sin θ −  +  1 −  =  sin θ −  + ≥
 2  4  2 4 4

3
Hence, ≤ A ≤1.
4
Example 3 Find the value of 3 cosec 20° – sec 20°
Solution We have

3 1
3 cosec 20° – sec 20° = sin 20° − cos 20°

 3 1 
3 cos 20° – sin 20°  cos 20° – sin 20° 
= = 4  2 2 
sin 20° cos 20°  2sin 20° cos 20° 

 sin 60° cos 20° – cos 60° sin 20° 

= 4 
 sin 40° 
(Why?)

 sin (60° – 20°) 

= 4  =4 (Why?)
 sin 40° 

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 41

Example 4 If θ lies in the second quadrant, then show that

1 − sin θ 1 + sin θ
+ = −2sec θ
1 + sin θ 1 − sin θ
Solution We have

1 − sin θ 1 + sin θ 1 − sin θ 1 + sin θ 2

+ = + =
1 + sin θ 1 − sin θ 1 − sin 2 θ 1 − sin 2 θ cos 2 θ
2
=
| cos θ |
(Since α 2 = | α | for every real number α )
Given that θ lies in the second quadrant so |cos θ| = – cos θ (since cos θ < 0).
2
Hence, the required value of the expression is = –2 secθ
− cos θ
Example 5 Find the value of tan 9° – tan 27° – tan 63° + tan 81°
Solution We have tan 9° – tan 27° – tan 63° + tan 81°
= tan 9° + tan 81° – tan 27° – tan 63°
= tan 9° + tan (90° – 9°) – tan 27° – tan (90° – 27°)
= tan 9° + cot 9° – (tan 27° + cot 27°) (1)
1 2
Also tan 9° + cot 9° = sin 9° cos 9° = sin18° (Why?) (2)

1 2 2
Similarly, tan 27° + cot 27° = = = (Why?) (3)
sin 27° cos 27° sin 54° cos36°
Using (2) and (3) in (1), we get
2 2 2× 4 2× 4
tan 9° – tan 27° – tan 63° + tan 81° = – = – =4
sin 18° cos36° 5 −1 5 +1
sec8 θ − 1 tan 8 θ
Example 6 Prove that =
sec4 θ − 1 tan 2 θ

sec8 θ − 1 (1 − cos8 θ) cos 4 θ

Solution We have =
sec 4 θ − 1 cos8 θ (1 – cos 4 θ)

2sin 2 4 θ cos 4 θ
= (Why?)
cos8 θ 2sin 2 2 θ

18/04/18
 42 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

sin 4 θ (2 sin 4 θ cos 4 θ)

=
2 cos8 θ sin 2 2 θ

sin 4 θ sin 8 θ
= (Why?)
2 cos8 θ sin 2 2 θ

2sin 2 θ cos 2 θ sin8 θ

=
2 cos8 θ sin 2 2 θ

tan8 θ
= (Why?)
tan 2 θ
Example 7 Solve the equation sin θ + sin 3θ + sin 5θ = 0
Solution We have sin θ + sin 3θ + sin 5θ = 0
or (sin θ + sin 5θ) + sin 3θ = 0
or 2 sin 3θ cos 2θ + sin 3θ = 0 (Why?)
or sin 3θ (2 cos 2θ + 1) = 0
1
or sin 3θ = 0 or cos 2θ = –
2
nπ
When sin 3θ = 0, then 3θ = nπ or θ =
3
1 2π 2π π
When cos 2θ = – = cos , then 2θ = 2nπ ± or θ = nπ ±
2 3 3 3
π π
which gives θ = (3n + 1) or θ = (3n – 1)
3 3
nπ
All these values of θ are contained in θ = , n ∈ Z. Hence, the required solution set
3
nπ
is given by {θ : θ = , n ∈ Z}
3
Example 8 Solve 2 tan2 x + sec2 x = 2 for 0 ≤ x ≤ 2π
Solution Here, 2 tan2 x + sec2 x = 2
1
which gives tan x = ±
3

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 43

1 π 7π
If we take tan x = , then x = or (Why?)
3 6 6
−1 5π 11π
Again, if we take tan x = , then x = or (Why?)
3 6 6
Therefore, the possible solutions of above equations are
π 5π 7 π 11π
x= , , and where 0 ≤ x ≤ 2π
6 6 6 6

Long Answer Type

 π 3π   5π   7π 
Example 9 Find the value of  1 + cos   1 + cos  1 + cos  1 + cos 
 8 8  8  8 

 π 3π   5π   7π 
Solution Write  1 + cos  1 + cos   1 + cos  1 + cos 
 8 8  8  8 

 π 3π    3π     π 
=  1 + cos  1 + cos   1 + cos  π −   1 + cos  π −  
 8 8   8    8 

 2 π 2 3π 
=  1 − cos  1 − cos  (Why?)
 8 8 

2 π 3π
= sin sin 2
8 8
1 π 3π 
=  1 − cos  1 − cos  (Why?)
4 4 4 

1 π π
= 1 − cos  1 + cos  (Why?)
4 4 4

1 2 π 1 1 1
=  1 − cos  =  1 −  =
4 4 4 2 8
2π 4π
Example 10 If x cos θ = y cos (θ + ) = z cos ( θ + ), then find the value of
3 3
xy + yz + zx.

18/04/18
 44 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

1 1 1
Solution Note that xy + yz + zx = xyz  + +  .
x y z
2π  4π 
If we put x cos θ = y cos (θ + ) = z cos  θ +  = k (say).
3  3 

k k k
Then x= ,y= and z =
cos θ  2π   4π 
cos  θ +  cos  θ + 
 3   3 

1 1 1 1  2π   4π  
so that + + =  cos θ + cos  θ +  + cos  θ +  
x y z k  3   3 

1 2π 2π
= [cos θ + cos θ cos − sin θ sin
k 3 3
4π 4π
+ cos θ cos − sin θ sin ]
3 3

1 −1 3 1 3
= [cos θ + cos θ ( )− sin θ − cos θ + sin θ] (Why?)
k 2 2 2 2
1
×0=0 =
k
Hence, xy + yz + zx = 0
Example 11 If α and β are the solutions of the equation a tan θ + b sec θ = c,
2ac
then show that tan (α + β) = .
a − c2
2

Solution Given that atanθ + bsecθ = c or asinθ + b = c cos θ

Using the identities,

θ 2 θ
2 tan 1 − tan
2 and cos θ = 2
sin θ =
2 θ θ
1 + tan 1 + tan 2
2 2

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 45

 θ  θ
a  2 tan  c  1 − tan 2 
We have,  2 +b=  2
θ θ
1 + tan 2 1 + tan 2
2 2

2 θ θ
or (b + c) tan + 2a tan +b–c=0
2 2

θ α β
Above equation is quadratic in tan and hence tan and tan are the roots of this
2 2 2
α β −2a α β b−c
equation (Why?). Therefore, tan + tan = and tan tan = (Why?)
2 2 b+c 2 2 b+c

α β
tan + tan
α β 2 2
Using the identity tan  +  =
 2 2  1 − tan α tan β
2 2

−2a
α β b + c = −2a = − a
We have, tan  +  = ... (1)
 2 2 b−c 2c c
1−
b+c
Again, using another identity

α+β
α+β 2 tan
2
tan 2 = ,
2 2 α+β
1 − tan
2

 a
2 − 
 c 2ac
We have tan ( α + β ) = = 2 [From (1)]
a 2
a − c2
1− 2
c
Alternatively, given that a tanθ + b secθ = c

18/04/18
 46 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

⇒ (a tanθ – c)2 = b2(1 + tan2θ)

⇒ a2 tan2θ – 2ac tanθ + c2 = b2 + b2 tan2θ
⇒ (a2 – b2) tan2θ – 2ac tanθ + c2 – b2 = 0 ... (1)
Since α and β are the roots of the equation (1), so

2ac c 2 − b2
tanα + tanβ = 2 2 and tanα tanβ =
a −b a2 − b2

tan α + tan β
Therefore, tan (α + β) =
1 − tan α tan β

2ac
a − b2
2
2ac
= 2 2 =
c −b a − c2
2

2 2
a −b

Example 12 Show that 2 sin2 β + 4 cos (α + β) sin α sin β + cos 2 (α + β) = cos 2α

Solution LHS = 2 sin2 β + 4 cos (α + β) sin α sin β + cos 2(α + β)
= 2 sin2 β + 4 (cos α cos β – sin α sin β) sin α sin β
+ (cos 2α cos 2β – sin 2α sin 2β)
= 2 sin2 β + 4 sin α cos α sin β cos β – 4 sin2 α sin2 β
+ cos 2α cos 2β – sin 2α sin 2β
= 2 sin2 β + sin 2α sin 2β – 4 sin2 α sin2 β + cos 2α cos 2β – sin
2α sin 2β
= (1 – cos 2β) – (2 sin2 α) (2 sin2 β) + cos 2α cos 2β (Why?)
= (1 – cos 2β) – (1 – cos 2α) (1 – cos 2β) + cos 2α cos 2β
= cos 2α (Why?)
Example 13 If angle θ is divided into two parts such that the tangent of one part is k
times the tangent of other, and φ is their difference, then show that
k +1
sin θ = sin φ
k −1
Solution Let θ = α + β. Then tan α = k tan β

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 47

tan α k
or =
tan β 1
Applying componendo and dividendo, we have
tan α + tan β k +1
=
tan α − tan β k −1
sin α cos β + cos α sin β k +1
or = (Why?)
sin α cos β − cos α sin β k −1

sin (α + β) k +1
i.e., = (Why?)
sin (α − β) k −1
Given that α – β = φ and α + β = θ. Therefore,
sin θ k +1 k +1
sin θ = sin φ
sin φ = k – 1 or
k −1
Example 14 Solve 3 cos θ + sin θ = 2
Solution Divide the given equation by 2 to get
3 1 1 π π π
cos θ + sin θ = or cos cos θ + sin sin θ = cos
2 2 2 6 6 4
π  π  π π
or cos  − θ  = cos or cos  θ −  = cos (Why?)
6  4  6 4
π π
Thus, the solution are given by, i.e., θ = 2mπ ± +
4 6
Hence, the solution are
π π π π 5π π
θ = 2mπ + + and 2mπ – + , i.e., θ = 2mπ + and θ = 2mπ –
4 6 4 6 12 12
Objective Type Questions
Choose the correct answer from the given four options against each of the Examples
15 to 19
−4
Example 15 If tan θ = , then sinθ is
3

18/04/18
 48 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

−4 4 −4 4
(A) but not (B) or
5 5 5 5
4 4
(C) but not − (D) None of these
5 5
4
Solution Correct choice is B. Since tan θ = − is negative, θ lies either in second
3
4
quadrant or in fourth quadrant. Thus sin θ = if θ lies in the second quadrant or
5
4
sin θ = − , if θ lies in the fourth quadrant.
5
Example 16 If sin θ and cos θ are the roots of the equation ax2 – bx + c = 0, then a,
b and c satisfy the relation.
(A) a2 + b2 + 2ac = 0 (B) a2 – b2 + 2ac = 0
(C) a2 + c2 + 2ab = 0 (D) a2 – b2 – 2ac = 0
Solution The correct choice is (B). Given that sin θ and cos θ are the roots of the
b c
equation ax2 – bx + c = 0, so sin θ + cos θ = and sin θ cos θ = (Why?)
a a
2 2 2
Using the identity (sinθ + cos θ) = sin θ + cos θ + 2 sin θ cos θ, we have
b2 2c
=1 +
or a2 – b2 + 2ac = 0
2
a a
Example 17 The greatest value of sin x cos x is
1
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D)
2
Solution (D) is the correct choice, since
1 1
sinx cosx = sin 2x ≤ , since |sin 2x | ≤ 1 .
2 2
Eaxmple 18 The value of sin 20° sin 40° sin 60° sin 80° is
−3 5 3 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
16 16 16 16

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 49

Solution Correct choice is (C). Indeed sin 20° sin 40° sin 60° sin 80°.

3 3
= sin 20° sin (60° – 20°) sin (60° + 20°) (since sin 60° = )
2 2

3
= sin 20° [sin2 60° – sin2 20°] (Why?)
2
3 3
= sin 20° [ – sin2 20°]
2 4

3 1
= × [3sin 20° – 4sin3 20°]
2 4
3 1
= × (sin 60°) (Why?)
2 4
3 1 3 3
= × × =
2 4 2 16
π 2π 4π 8π
Example 19 The value of cos cos cos cos is
5 5 5 5
1 −1 −1
(A) (B) 0 (C) (D)
16 8 16
Solution (D) is the correct answer. We have
π 2π 4π 8π
cos cos cos cos
5 5 5 5
1 π π 2π 4π 8π
= 2 sin cos cos cos cos
π 5 5 5 5 5
2 sin
5
1 2π 2π 4π 8π
= sin cos cos cos
π 5 5 5 5 (Why?)
2 sin
5
1 4π 4π 8π
= sin cos cos
π 5 5 5 (Why?)
4 sin
5

18/04/18
 50 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

1 8π 8π
= sin cos
π 5 5 (Why?)
8sin
5
16π  π
sin sin  3π + 
= 5
=
 5
π π
16 sin 16 sin
5 5
π
− sin
= 5
π (Why?)
16 sin
5
1
= −
16
Fill in the blank :
Example 20 If 3 tan (θ – 15°) = tan (θ + 15°), 0° < θ < 90°, then θ = _________
Solution Given that 3 tan (θ – 15°) = tan (θ + 15°) which can be rewritten as

tan(θ + 15°) 3
= .
tan(θ − 15°) 1

tan (θ + 15°) + tan (θ – 15°)

Applying componendo and Dividendo; we get =2
tan (θ + 15°) − tan (θ – 15°)

sin (θ + 15°) cos (θ − 15°) + sin (θ − 15°) cos (θ + 15°)

⇒ =2
sin (θ + 15°) cos (θ − 15°) − sin (θ − 15°) cos (θ + 15°)

sin 2θ
⇒ = 2 i.e., sin 2θ = 1 (Why?)
sin 30°

π
giving θ =
4
State whether the following statement is True or False. Justify your answer
1
1−
Example 21 “The inequality 2sinθ + 2cosθ ≥ 2 holds for all real values of θ”
2

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 51

Solution True. Since 2sinθ and 2cosθ are positive real numbers, so A.M. (Arithmetic
Mean) of these two numbers is greater or equal to their G.M. (Geometric Mean) and
hence
cos θ
2sinθ + 2
≥ 2sinθ × 2cos θ = 2sinθ+
cos θ
2
sin θ + cos θ 1  1 1 
 sin θ + cos θ 
2 2 2 
≥2 2 = 2
1 π 
sin  + θ 
2 4 
≥2

π 
Since, –1 ≤ sin  + θ  ≤ 1, we have
4 
sin θ cos θ −1 1
2 +2 2
1−
≥2 ⇒ 2sin θ + 2cos θ ≥ 2 2
2

Match each item given under the column C1 to its correct answer given under column C2
Example 22
C1 C2
1 − cos x x
(a) (i) cot 2
sin x 2
1 + cos x x
(b) (ii) cot
1 − cos x 2
1 + cos x
(c) (iii) cos x + sin x
sin x
x
(d) 1 + sin 2x (iv) tan
2
Solution

2 x
1 − cos x 2 sin
2 x
(a) = = tan .
sin x x x 2
2 sin cos
2 2
Hence (a) matches with (iv) denoted by (a) ↔ (iv)

18/04/18
 52 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

x
1 + cos x 2sin 2
(b) = 2 = cot 2 x . Hence (b) matches with (i) i.e., (b) ↔ (i)
1 − cos x 2 x 2
2sin
2

2 x
1 + cos x 2 cos
2 x
(c) = = cot .
sin x x x 2
2 sin cos
2 2
Hence (c) matches with (ii) i.e., (c) ↔ (ii)
(d) 1 + sin 2 x = sin 2 x + cos 2 x + 2sin x cos x

= (sin x + cos x ) 2

= ( sin x + cos x ) . Hence (d) matches with (iii), i.e., (d) ↔ (iii)

3.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
tan A + sec A –1 1 + sin A
1. Prove that =
tan A − sec A + 1 cos A

2 sin α 1 − cos α + sin α

2. If = y , then prove that is also equal to y.
1 + cos α + sin α 1 + sin α

 1 − cos α + sin α 1 − cos α + sin α 1 + cos α + sin α 

 Hint :Express = . 
 1 + sin α 1 + sin α 1 + cos α + sin α 

m+n
3. If m sin θ = n sin (θ + 2α), then prove that tan (θ + α) cot α =
m−n

sin (θ + 2α ) m
[Hint: Express = and apply componendo and dividendo]
sin θ n

4 5 π
4. If cos (α + β) = and sin (α – β) = , where α lie between 0 and , find the
5 13 4
value of tan2α [Hint: Express tan 2 α as tan (α + β + α – β]

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 53

b a+b a −b
5. If tan x = , then find the value of +
a a −b a+b
θ 9θ
6. Prove that cosθ cos – cos3θ cos = sin 7θ sin 8θ.
2 2
1 θ 9θ
[Hint: Express L.H.S. = [2cosθ cos – 2 cos3θ cos ]
2 2 2
7. If a cos θ + b sin θ = m and a sin θ – b cos θ = n, then show that a2 + b2 = m2 + n2

8. Find the value of tan 22°30 ′ .

θ θ
θ
sin
2 sin cos
θ 2 = 2 2 = sin θ ]
[Hint: Let θ = 45°, use tan =
2 θ θ 1 + cos θ
cos 2 cos2
2 2
9. Prove that sin 4A = 4sinA cos3A – 4 cosA sin3A.
10. If tanθ + sinθ = m and tanθ – sinθ = n, then prove that m2 – n2 = 4sinθ tanθ
[Hint: m + n = 2tanθ, m – n = 2 sinθ, then use m2 – n2 = (m + n) (m – n)]
p+q
11. If tan (A + B) = p, tan (A – B) = q, then show that tan 2 A =
1 − pq
[Hint: Use 2A = (A + B) + (A – B)]
12. If cosα + cosβ = 0 = sinα + sinβ, then prove that cos 2α + cos 2β = – 2cos (α + β).
[Hint: (cosα + cosβ)2 – (sinα + sinβ)2 = 0]
sin ( x + y ) a+b tan x a
13. If = , then show that = [Hint: Use Componendo and
sin ( x − y ) a−b tan y b
Dividendo].
sin α − cos α
14. If tanθ = , then show that sinα + cosα = 2 cosθ.
sin α + cos α
π π
[Hint: Express tanθ = tan (α – ) ]θ=α–
4 4
15. If sinθ + cosθ = 1, then find the general value of θ.
16. Find the most general value of θ satisfying the equation tanθ = –1 and
1
cosθ = .
2

18/04/18
 54 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

17. If cotθ + tanθ = 2 cosecθ, then find the general value of θ.

18. If 2sin2θ = 3cosθ, where 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π, then find the value of θ.
π
19. If secx cos5x + 1 = 0, where 0 < x ≤ , then find the value of x.
2
Long Answer Type
20. If sin (θ + α) = a and sin (θ + β) = b, then prove that cos 2(α – β) – 4ab cos (α – β) =
1 – 2a2 – 2b2 [Hint: Express cos (α – β) = cos ((θ + α) – (θ + β))]
1− m
21. If cos (θ + φ) = m cos (θ – φ), then prove that tan θ = cot φ .
1+ m

cos (θ + φ) m
[Hint: Express = and apply Componendo and Dividendo]
cos (θ − φ) 1
22. Find the value of the expression
3π π
3 [sin4 ( − α ) + sin4 (3π + α)] – 2 {sin6 (
+ α) + sin6 (5π – α)]
2 2
23. If a cos 2θ + b sin 2θ = c has α and β as its roots, then prove that
2b
tanα + tan β = .
a+c

1− tan 2 θ 2 tan θ
[Hint: Use the identities cos 2θ = 2 and sin 2θ = ].
1 + tan θ 1 + tan 2 θ
24. If x = sec φ – tan φ and y = cosec φ + cot φ then show that xy + x – y + 1 = 0
[Hint: Find xy + 1 and then show that x – y = – (xy + 1)]
8
25. If θ lies in the first quadrant and cosθ = , then find the value of
17
cos (30° + θ) + cos (45° – θ) + cos (120° – θ).
π 3π 5π 7π
26. Find the value of the expression cos 4 + cos 4 + cos 4 + cos 4
8 8 8 8
4 π 4 3π
[Hint: Simplify the expression to 2 ( cos + cos )
8 8
 π 3π 
2
π 3π 
= 2  cos2 + cos 2  − 2cos2 cos 2 
 8 8  8 8 

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 55

27. Find the general solution of the equation 5cos2θ + 7sin2θ – 6 = 0

28. Find the general solution of the equation
sinx – 3sin2x + sin3x = cosx – 3cos2x + cos3x
29. Find the general solution of the equation ( 3 – 1) cosθ + ( 3 + 1) sinθ = 2
π π
[Hint: Put 3 – 1= r sinα, 3 + 1 = r cosα which gives tanα = tan ( – )
4 6
π
α= ]
12
Objective Type Questions
Choose the correct answer from the given four options in the Exercises 30 to 59 (M.C.Q.).
30. If sin θ + cosec θ = 2, then sin2 θ + cosec2 θ is equal to
(A) 1 (B) 4
(C) 2 (D) None of these
31. If f (x) = cos2 x + sec2 x, then
(A) f (x) < 1 (B) f (x) = 1
(C) 2 < f (x) < 1 (D) f(x) ≥ 2
[Hint: A.M ≥ G.M.]
1 1
32. If tan θ = and tan φ = , then the value of θ + φ is
2 3

π π
(A) (B) π (C) 0 (D)
6 4
33. Which of the following is not correct?
1
(A) sin θ = – (B) cos θ = 1
5
1
(C) sec θ = (D) tan θ = 20
2
34. The value of tan 1° tan 2° tan 3° ... tan 89° is
(A) 0 (B) 1
1
(C) (D) Not defined
2

18/04/18
56 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

1 − tan 2 15°
35. The value of is
1 + tan 2 15°

3
(A) 1 (B) 3 (C) (D) 2
2
36. The value of cos 1° cos 2° cos 3° ... cos 179° is
1
(A) (B) 0 (C) 1 (D) –1
2
37. If tan θ = 3 and θ lies in third quadrant, then the value of sin θ is
1 1 −3 3
(A) (B) − (C) (D)
10 10 10 10
38. The value of tan 75° – cot 75° is equal to
(A) 2 3 (B) 2 + 3 (C) 2− 3 (D) 1
39. Which of the following is correct?
(A) sin1° > sin 1 (B) sin 1° < sin 1
π
(C) sin 1° = sin 1 (D) sin 1° = sin 1
18°
180°
[Hint: 1 radian = = 57° 30′ approx]
π
m 1
40. If tan α = , tan β = , then α + β is equal to
m +1 2m + 1
π π π π
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 6 4
41. The minimum value of 3 cosx + 4 sinx + 8 is
(A) 5 (B) 9 (C) 7 (D) 3
42. The value of tan 3A – tan 2A – tan A is equal to
(A) tan 3A tan 2A tan A
(B) – tan 3A tan 2A tan A
(C) tan A tan 2A – tan 2A tan 3A – tan 3A tan A
(D) None of these

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 57

43. The value of sin (45° + θ) – cos (45° – θ) is

(A) 2 cosθ (B) 2 sinθ (C) 1 (D) 0
π  π 
44. The value of cot  + θ  cot  − θ  is
4  4 
(A) –1 (B) 0 (C) 1 (D) Not defined
45. cos 2θ cos 2φ + sin2 (θ – φ) – sin2 (θ + φ) is equal to
(A) sin 2(θ + φ) (B) cos 2(θ + φ)
(C) sin 2(θ – φ) (D) cos 2(θ – φ)
2 2
[Hint: Use sin A – sin B = sin (A + B) sin (A – B)]
46. The value of cos 12° + cos 84° + cos 156° + cos 132° is
1 1 1
(A) (B) 1 (C) – (D)
2 2 8

1 1
47. If tan A = , tan B = , then tan (2A + B) is equal to
2 3
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
π 13π
48. The value of sin sin is
10 10

1 1 1
(A) (B) − (C) − (D) 1
2 2 4

5 −1 5 +1
[Hint: Use sin 18° = and cos 36° = ]
4 4
49. The value of sin 50° – sin 70° + sin 10° is equal to

1
(A) 1 (B) 0 (C) (D) 2
2
50. If sin θ + cos θ = 1, then the value of sin 2θ is equal to

1
(A) 1 (B) (C) 0 (D) –1
2

18/04/18
58 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

π
51. If α + β = , then the value of (1 + tan α) (1 + tan β) is
4
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) – 2 (D) Not defined
−4 θ
52. If sin θ = and θ lies in third quadrant then the value of cos is
5 2

1 1 1 1
(A) (B) – (C) – (D)
5 10 5 10
53. Number of solutions of the equation tan x + sec x = 2 cosx lying in the interval
[0, 2π] is
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3
π π 2π 5π
54. The value of sin + sin + sin + sin is given by
18 9 9 18

7π 4π
(A) sin + sin (B) 1
18 9

π 3π π π
(C) cos + cos (D) cos + sin
6 7 9 9
55. If A lies in the second quadrant and 3 tan A + 4 = 0, then the value of
2 cotA – 5 cos A + sin A is equal to

−53 23 37 7
(A) (B) (C) (D)
10 10 10 10
2 2
56. The value of cos 48° – sin 12° is

5 +1 5 −1
(A) (B)
8 8

5 +1 5 +1
(C) (D)
5 2 2
2 2
[Hint: Use cos A – sin B = cos (A + B) cos (A – B)]

18/04/18
 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 59

1 1
57. If tan α = , tan β = , then cos 2α is equal to
7 3
(A) sin 2β (B) sin 4β (C) sin 3β (D) cos 2β
a
58. If tan θ = , then b cos 2θ + a sin 2θ is equal to
b
a
(A) a (B) b (C) (D) None
b
1
59. If for real values of x, cos θ = x + , then
x
(A) θ is an acute angle (B) θ is right angle
(C) θ is an obtuse angle (D) No value of θ is possible
Fill in the blanks in Exercises 60 to 67 :
sin 50°
60. The value of is _______ .
sin 130°

π  5π   7π 
61. If k = sin   sin   sin   , then the numerical value of k is _______.
 18   18   18 

1 − cos B
62. If tan A = , then tan 2A = _______.
sin B
63. If sin x + cos x = a, then
(i) sin6 x + cos6 x = _______
(ii) | sin x – cos x | = _______.
64. In a triangle ABC with ∠C = 90° the equation whose roots are tan A and tan B
is _______.

2
[Hint: A + B = 90° ⇒ tan A tan B = 1 and tan A + tan B = ]
sin 2A
65. 3 (sin x – cos x)4 + 6 (sin x + cos x)2 + 4 (sin6 x + cos6 x) = _______.

66. Given x > 0, the values of f (x) = – 3 cos 3 + x + x lie in the interval _______.
2

18/04/18
 60 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

67. The maximum distance of a point on the graph of the function y = 3 sin x + cos x
from x-axis is _______.
In each of the Exercises 68 to 75, state whether the statements is True or False? Also
give justification.
1 – cos B
68. If tan A = , then tan 2A = tan B
sin B
69. The equality sin A + sin 2A + sin 3A = 3 holds for some real value of A.
70. sin 10° is greater than cos 10°.
2π 4π 8π 16π 1
71. cos cos cos cos =
15 15 15 15 16
72. One value of θ which satisfies the equation sin4 θ – 2sin2 θ – 1 lies between 0
and 2π.
π
73. If cosec x = 1 + cot x then x = 2nπ, 2nπ +
2
nπ π
74. If tan θ + tan 2θ + 3 tan θ tan 2θ = 3 , then θ = +
3 9
 π 1
75. If tan (π cosθ) = cot (π sinθ), then cos  θ –  = ±
 4 2 2
76. In the following match each item given under the column C1 to its correct answer
given under the column C2 :
(a) sin (x + y) sin (x – y) (i) cos2 x – sin2 y
1 − tan θ
(b) cos (x + y) cos (x – y) (ii)
1 + tan θ
π  1 + tan θ
(c) cot  + θ  (iii)
4  1 − tan θ
π 
(d) tan  + θ  (iv) sin2 x – sin2 y
4 

18/04/18
 Chapter 4
PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL
INDUCTION

4.1 Overview
Mathematical induction is one of the techniques which can be used to prove variety
of mathematical statements which are formulated in terms of n, where n is a
positive integer.

4.1.1 The principle of mathematical induction

Let P(n) be a given statement involving the natural number n such that
(i) The statement is true for n = 1, i.e., P(1) is true (or true for any fixed natural
number) and
(ii) If the statement is true for n = k (where k is a particular but arbitrary natural
number), then the statement is also true for n = k + 1, i.e, truth of P(k) implies
the truth of P(k + 1). Then P(n) is true for all natural numbers n.

4.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type
Prove statements in Examples 1 to 5, by using the Principle of Mathematical Induction
for all n ∈ N, that :
Example 1 1 + 3 + 5 + ... + (2n – 1) = n2
Solution Let the given statement P(n) be defined as P(n) : 1 + 3 + 5 +...+ (2n – 1) =
n2, for n ∈ N. Note that P(1) is true, since
P(1) : 1 = 12
Assume that P(k) is true for some k ∈ N, i.e.,
P(k) : 1 + 3 + 5 + ... + (2k – 1) = k 2
Now, to prove that P(k + 1) is true, we have
1 + 3 + 5 + ... + (2k – 1) + (2k + 1)
= k2 + (2k + 1) (Why?)
= k2 + 2k + 1 = (k + 1)2

18/04/18
 62 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Thus, P(k + 1) is true, whenever P(k) is true.

Hence, by the Principle of Mathematical Induction, P(n) is true for all n ∈ N.
n −1 n ( n − 1) ( n + 1)
Example 2 ∑ t (t + 1) = , for all natural numbers n ≥ 2.
t =1 3
Solution Let the given statement P(n), be given as
n −1 n ( n − 1) ( n + 1)
P(n) : ∑ t (t + 1) = , for all natural numbers n ≥ 2.
t =1 3
We observe that
2−1 1 1.2.3
P(2): ∑ t (t + 1) = ∑ t (t + 1) = 1.2 =
t =1 t =1 3
2. (2 − 1) (2 + 1)
=
3
Thus, P(n) in true for n = 2.
Assume that P(n) is true for n = k ∈ N.
k −1 k (k − 1) ( k + 1)
i.e., P(k) : ∑ t (t + 1) =
t =1 3
To prove that P(k + 1) is true, we have

( k +1−1) k
∑ t (t + 1) =
t =1
∑ t (t +1)
t =1

k −1
k (k −1) ( k + 1)
= ∑ t (t +1) + k (k +1) =
3
+ k ( k + 1)
t =1

 k −1+ 3  k (k +1)(k + 2)
= k ( k +1)  =
 3  3

(k +1)(( k + 1) −1)) ((k +1) + 1)

=
3
Thus, P(k + 1) is true, whenever P(k) is true.
Hence, by the Principle of Mathematical Induction, P(n) is true for all natural
numbers n ≥ 2.

18/04/18
 PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION 63

Example 3 1 − 2  . 1− 2  ... 1− 2  =

1 1 1 n +1
, for all natural numbers, n ≥ 2.
 2   3   n  2n
Solution Let the given statement be P(n), i.e.,

 1  1  1  n +1
P(n) : 1− 2  . 1− 2  ... 1− 2  = , for all natural numbers, n ≥ 2
 2   3   n  2n
We, observe that P (2) is true, since
 1  1 4 −1 3 2 +1
 1 − 2  =1− = 4 = 4 = 2 × 2
 2  4
Assume that P(n) is true for some k ∈ N, i.e.,
1 1 1 k +1
P(k) : 1 − 2
. 1 − 2 ... 1 − 2 =
2 3 k 2k
Now, to prove that P (k + 1) is true, we have

1 1 1 1
1− 2
. 1 − 2 ... 1 − 2 . 1 −
2 3 k ( k + 1) 2

k +1  1  k 2 + 2k ( k + 1) + 1
=  1 − 2  = 2 k (k + 1)
=
2k  (k +1)  2(k +1)
Thus, P (k + 1) is true, whenever P(k) is true.
Hence, by the Principle of Mathematical Induction, P(n) is true for all natural
numbers, n ≥ 2.
Example 4 22n – 1 is divisible by 3.
Solution Let the statement P(n) given as
P(n) : 22n – 1 is divisible by 3, for every natural number n.
We observe that P(1) is true, since
22 – 1 = 4 – 1 = 3.1 is divisible by 3.
Assume that P(n) is true for some natural number k, i.e.,
P(k): 22k – 1 is divisible by 3, i.e., 22k – 1 = 3q, where q ∈ N
Now, to prove that P(k + 1) is true, we have
P(k + 1) : 22(k+1) – 1 = 22k + 2 – 1 = 22k . 22 – 1
= 22k . 4 – 1 = 3.22k + (22k – 1)

18/04/18
 64 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

= 3.22k + 3q
= 3 (22k + q) = 3m, where m ∈ N
Thus P(k + 1) is true, whenever P(k) is true.
Hence, by the Principle of Mathematical Induction P(n) is true for all natural
numbers n.
Example 5 2n + 1 < 2n, for all natual numbers n ≥ 3.
Solution Let P(n) be the given statement, i.e., P(n) : (2n + 1) < 2n for all natural
numbers, n ≥ 3. We observe that P(3) is true, since
2.3 + 1 = 7 < 8 = 23
Assume that P(n) is true for some natural number k, i.e., 2k + 1 < 2k
To prove P(k + 1) is true, we have to show that 2(k + 1) + 1 < 2k+1. Now, we have
2(k + 1) + 1 = 2 k + 3
= 2k + 1 + 2 < 2k + 2 < 2k . 2 = 2k + 1.
Thus P(k + 1) is true, whenever P(k) is true.
Hence, by the Principle of Mathematical Induction P(n) is true for all natural
numbers, n ≥ 3.

Long Answer Type

Example 6 Define the sequence a1, a2, a3... as follows :
a1 = 2, an = 5 an–1, for all natural numbers n ≥ 2.
(i) Write the first four terms of the sequence.
(ii) Use the Principle of Mathematical Induction to show that the terms of the sequence
satisfy the formula an = 2.5n–1 for all natural numbers.
Solution
(i) We have a1 = 2
a2 = 5a2–1 = 5a1 = 5.2 = 10
a3 = 5a3–1 = 5a2 = 5.10 = 50
a4 = 5a4–1 = 5a3 = 5.50 = 250
(ii) Let P(n) be the statement, i.e.,
P(n) : an = 2.5 n–1 for all natural numbers. We observe that P(1) is true
Assume that P(n) is true for some natural number k, i.e., P(k) : ak = 2.5k – 1.
Now to prove that P (k + 1) is true, we have

18/04/18
 PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION 65

P(k + 1) : a k + 1 = 5.ak = 5 . (2.5k – 1)

= 2.5k = 2.5(k + 1)–1
Thus P(k + 1) is true whenever P (k) is true.
Hence, by the Principle of Mathematical Induction, P(n) is true for all natural numbers.
Example 7 The distributive law from algebra says that for all real numbers c, a1 and
a2, we have c (a1 + a2) = ca1 + ca2.
Use this law and mathematical induction to prove that, for all natural numbers, n ≥ 2,
if c, a1, a2, ...,an are any real numbers, then
c (a1 + a2 + ... + an) = ca1 + ca2 + ... + can
Solution Let P(n) be the given statement, i.e.,
P(n) : c (a1 + a2 + ... + an) = ca1 + ca2 + ... can for all natural numbers n ≥ 2, for c, a1,
a2, ... an ∈ R.
We observe that P(2) is true since
c(a1 + a2) = ca1 + ca2 (by distributive law)
Assume that P(n) is true for some natural number k, where k > 2, i.e.,
P(k) : c (a1 + a2 + ... + ak) = ca1 + ca2 + ... + cak
Now to prove P(k + 1) is true, we have
P(k + 1) : c (a1 + a2 + ... + ak + ak + 1)
= c ((a1 + a2 + ... + ak) + ak + 1)
= c (a1 + a2 + ... + ak) + cak + 1 (by distributive law)
= ca1 + ca2 + ... + cak + cak + 1
Thus P(k + 1) is true, whenever P (k) is true.
Hence, by the principle of Mathematical Induction, P(n) is true for all natural
numbers n ≥ 2.
Example 8 Prove by induction that for all natural number n
sin α + sin (α + β) + sin (α + 2β)+ ... + sin (α + (n – 1) β)

n −1  nβ 
sin (α + β)sin  
2  2 
=
 
β
sin  
2
Solution Consider P (n) : sin α + sin (α + β) + sin (α + 2β) + ... + sin (α + (n – 1) β)

18/04/18
 66 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

n −1  nβ 
sin (α + β)sin  
2  2 
= , for all natural number n.
β
sin  
2
We observe that
P (1) is true, since

β
sin (α + 0)sin
2
P (1) : sin α =
β
sin
2
Assume that P(n) is true for some natural numbers k, i.e.,
P (k) : sin α + sin (α + β) + sin (α + 2β) + ... + sin (α + (k – 1)β)
k −1  kβ 
sin (α + β)sin  
2  2 
=
β
sin  
2
Now, to prove that P (k + 1) is true, we have
P (k + 1) : sin α + sin (α + β) + sin (α + 2β) + ... + sin (α + (k – 1) β) + sin (α + kβ)
k −1  kβ 
sin (α + β)sin  
2  2  + sin (α + kβ)
=
β
sin  
2

 k −1  k β β
sin  α + β  sin + sin ( α + k β ) sin
 2  2 2
=
β
sin
2

 β   β  β  β
cos  α −  − cos  α + kβ −  + cos  α + k β −  − cos  α + kβ + 
 2   2  2  2
=
β
2sin
2

18/04/18
 PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION 67

 β  β
cos  α −  − cos  α + k β + 
 2  2
=
β
2sin
2

 k β   kβ +β 
sin  α +  sin  
 2   2 
=
β
sin
2

 kβ  β
sin  α +  sin (k +1)  
 2  2
=
β
sin
2
Thus P (k + 1) is true whenever P (k) is true.
Hence, by the Principle of Mathematical Induction P(n) is true for all natural number n.
Example 9 Prove by the Principle of Mathematical Induction that
1 × 1! + 2 × 2! + 3 × 3! + ... + n × n! = (n + 1)! – 1 for all natural numbers n.
Solution Let P(n) be the given statement, that is,
P(n) : 1 × 1! + 2 × 2! + 3 × 3! + ... + n × n! = (n + 1)! – 1 for all natural numbers n.
Note that P (1) is true, since
P (1) : 1 × 1! = 1 = 2 – 1 = 2! – 1.
Assume that P(n) is true for some natural number k, i.e.,
P(k) : 1 × 1! + 2 × 2! + 3 × 3! + ... + k × k! = (k + 1)! – 1
To prove P (k + 1) is true, we have
P (k + 1) : 1 × 1! + 2 × 2! + 3 × 3! + ... + k × k! + (k + 1) × (k + 1)!
= (k + 1)! – 1 + (k + 1)! × (k + 1)
= (k + 1 + 1) (k + 1)! – 1
= (k + 2) (k + 1)! – 1 = ((k + 2)! – 1
Thus P (k + 1) is true, whenever P (k) is true. Therefore, by the Principle of Mathematical
Induction, P (n) is true for all natural number n.
Example 10 Show by the Principle of Mathematical Induction that the sum Sn of the
n term of the series 12 + 2 × 22 + 32 + 2 × 42 + 52 + 2 × 62 ... is given by

18/04/18
 68 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

 n(n + 1) 2
 , if n is even
2
Sn =  2
 n (n + 1) , if n is odd
 2

 n ( n +1) 2
 , when n is even
 2
Solution Here P(n) : Sn =  2
 n ( n + 1) , when n is odd
 2
Also, note that any term Tn of the series is given by

n 2 if n is odd
Tn =  2
2n if n is even
We observe that P(1) is true since

1.2 12.(1+ 1)
P(1) : S1 = 12 = 1 = =
2 2
Assume that P(k) is true for some natural number k, i.e.
Case 1 When k is odd, then k + 1 is even. We have
P (k + 1) : Sk + 1 = 12 + 2 × 22 + ... + k2 + 2 × (k + 1)2

k 2 ( k + 1)
= + 2 × (k + 1)2
2

(k + 1) 2 (k + 1)
= [k + 4(k + 1)] (as k is odd, 12 + 2 × 22 + ... + k2 = k2 )
2 2

k +1 2
= [k + 4k + 4]
2

k +1 [(k + 1) + 1]2
= (k + 2) 2 = (k + 1)
2 2
So P(k + 1) is true, whenever P(k) is true in the case when k is odd.
Case 2 When k is even, then k + 1 is odd.

18/04/18
 PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION 69

Now, P (k + 1) : 12 + 2 × 22 + ... + 2.k2 + (k + 1)2

2
k ( k +1) (k + 1) 2
= + (k + 1)2 (as k is even, 12 + 2 × 22 + ... + 2k2 = k )
2 2
2
=
( k + 1) (k + 2)
=
(k +1) 2 (( k +1) +1)
2 2
Therefore, P (k + 1) is true, whenever P (k) is true for the case when k is even. Thus
P (k + 1) is true whenever P (k) is true for any natural numbers k. Hence, P (n) true
for all natural numbers.

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer in Examples 11 and 12 (M.C.Q.)
Example 11 Let P(n) : “2n < (1 × 2 × 3 × ... × n)”. Then the smallest positive integer
for which P (n) is true is
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
Solution Answer is D, since
P (1) : 2 < 1 is false
P (2) : 22 < 1 × 2 is false
P (3) : 23 < 1 × 2 × 3 is false
But P (4) : 24 < 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 is true
Example 12 A student was asked to prove a statement P (n) by induction. He proved
that P (k + 1) is true whenever P (k) is true for all k > 5 ∈ N and also that P (5) is true.
On the basis of this he could conclude that P (n) is true
(A) for all n ∈ N (B) for all n > 5
(C) for all n ≥ 5 (D) for all n < 5
Solution Answer is (C), since P(5) is true and P(k + 1) is true, whenever P (k) is true.
Fill in the blanks in Example 13 and 14.
Example 13 If P (n) : “2.42n + 1 + 33n+1 is divisible by λ for all n ∈ N” is true, then the
value of λ is ____
Solution Now, for n = 1,
2.42+1 + 33+1 = 2.43 + 34 = 2.64 + 81 = 128 + 81 = 209,
for n = 2, 2.45 + 37 = 8.256 + 2187 = 2048 + 2187 = 4235

18/04/18
 70 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Note that the H.C.F. of 209 and 4235 is 11. So 2.42n+1 + 33n+1 is divisible by 11.
Hence, λ is 11
Example 14 If P (n) : “49n + 16n + k is divisible by 64 for n ∈ N” is true, then the least
negative integral value of k is ______.
Solution For n = 1, P(1) : 65 + k is divisible by 64.
Thus k, should be – 1 since, 65 – 1 = 64 is divisible by 64.
Example 15 State whether the following proof (by mathematical induction) is true or
false for the statement.
n( n + 1) (2n + 1)
P(n): 12 + 22 + ... + n2 =
6
Proof By the Principle of Mathematical induction, P(n) is true for n = 1,
1(1 + 1) (2 ⋅ 1 + 1) k (k + 1) (2k + 1)
12 = 1 = . Again for some k ≥ 1, k2 = . Now we
6 6
prove that
(k + 1) (( k + 1) + 1) (2( k + 1) + 1)
(k + 1)2 =
6
Solution False
Since in the inductive step both the inductive hypothesis and what is to be proved
are wrong.

4.3 EXERCISE

Short Answer Type

1. Give an example of a statement P(n) which is true for all n ≥ 4 but P(1), P(2)
and P(3) are not true. Justify your answer.
2. Give an example of a statement P(n) which is true for all n. Justify your answer.
Prove each of the statements in Exercises 3 - 16 by the Principle of Mathematical
Induction :
3. 4n – 1 is divisible by 3, for each natural number n.
4. 23n – 1 is divisible by 7, for all natural numbers n.
5. n3 – 7n + 3 is divisible by 3, for all natural numbers n.
6. 32n – 1 is divisible by 8, for all natural numbers n.

18/04/18
 PRINCIPLE OF MATHEMATICAL INDUCTION 71

7. For any natural number n, 7n – 2n is divisible by 5.

8. For any natural number n, xn – yn is divisible by x – y, where x and y are any
integers with x ≠ y.
9. n3 – n is divisible by 6, for each natural number n ≥ 2.
10. n (n2 + 5) is divisible by 6, for each natural number n.
11. n2 < 2n for all natural numbers n ≥ 5.
12. 2n < (n + 2)! for all natural number n.
1 1 1
13. n < + + ... + , for all natural numbers n ≥ 2.
1 2 n
14. 2 + 4 + 6 + ... + 2n = n2 + n for all natural numbers n.
15. 1 + 2 + 22 + ... + 2n = 2n+1 – 1 for all natural numbers n.
16. 1 + 5 + 9 + ... + (4n – 3) = n (2n – 1) for all natural numbers n.

Long Answer Type

Use the Principle of Mathematical Induction in the following Exercises.
17. A sequence a1, a2, a3 ... is defined by letting a1 = 3 and ak = 7ak–1 for all natural
numbers k ≥ 2. Show that an = 3.7n–1 for all natural numbers.
18. A sequence b0, b1, b2 ... is defined by letting b0 = 5 and bk = 4 + bk – 1 for all
natural numbers k. Show that bn = 5 + 4n for all natural number n using
mathematical induction.
d k −1
19. A sequence d1, d2, d3 ... is defined by letting d1 = 2 and dk = for all natural
k
2
numbers, k ≥ 2. Show that dn = for all n ∈ N.
n!
20. Prove that for all n ∈ N
cos α + cos (α + β) + cos (α + 2β) + ... + cos (α + (n – 1) β)
  n −1    nβ 
cos  α +   β  sin  
  2    2 
=
β
sin
2 sin 2n θ
21. Prove that, cos θ cos 2θ cos22θ ... cos2n–1θ = n , for all n ∈ N.
2 sin θ
sin n θ
sin
( n +1) θ
2 2
22. Prove that, sin θ + sin 2θ + sin 3θ + ... + sin nθ = θ , for all n ∈ N.
sin
2

18/04/18
 72 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

n5 n3 7n
23. Show that + + is a natural number for all n ∈ N.
5 3 15

1 1 1 13
24. Prove that + + ... + > , for all natural numbers n > 1.
n +1 n + 2 2n 24
25. Prove that number of subsets of a set containing n distinct elements is 2n, for all
n ∈ N.

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answers in Exercises 26 to 30 (M.C.Q.).
26. If 10n + 3.4n+2 + k is divisible by 9 for all n ∈ N, then the least positive integral
value of k is
(A) 5 (B) 3 (C) 7 (D) 1
27. For all n ∈ N, 3.5 + 2 is divisible by
2n+1 3n+1

(A) 19 (B) 17 (C) 23 (D) 25

n
28. If x – 1 is divisible by x – k, then the least positive integral value of k is
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
Fill in the blanks in the following :
29. If P(n) : 2n < n!, n ∈ N, then P(n) is true for all n ≥ ________.
State whether the following statement is true or false. Justify.
30. Let P(n) be a statement and let P(k) ⇒ P(k + 1), for some natural number k,
then P(n) is true for all n ∈ N.

18/04/18
 Chapter 5
COMPLEX NUMBERS AND
QUADRATIC EQUATIONS

5.1 Overview
We know that the square of a real number is always non-negative e.g. (4)2 = 16 and
(– 4)2 = 16. Therefore, square root of 16 is ± 4. What about the square root of a
negative number? It is clear that a negative number can not have a real square root. So
we need to extend the system of real numbers to a system in which we can find out the
square roots of negative numbers. Euler (1707 - 1783) was the first mathematician to
introduce the symbol i (iota) for positive square root of – 1 i.e., i = −1 .
5.1.1 Imaginary numbers
Square root of a negative number is called an imaginary number., for example,

− 9 = −1 9 = i3, − 7 = −1 7 =i 7

5.1.2 Integral powers of i

i= −1 , i 2 = – 1, i 3 = i 2 i = – i , i 4 = (i 2)2 = (–1)2 = 1.
To compute in for n > 4, we divide n by 4 and write it in the form n = 4m + r, where m is
quotient and r is remainder (0 ≤ r ≤ 4)
Hence in = i4m+r = (i4)m . (i)r = (1)m (i)r = ir
For example, (i)39 = i 4 × 9 + 3 = (i4)9 . (i)3 = i3 = – i
and (i)–435 = i – (4 × 108 + 3) = (i)– (4 × 108) . (i)– 3
1 1 i
= 4 108 . 3 = 4 = i
(i ) (i) (i )
(i) If a and b are positive real numbers, then
− a × −b = −1 a × −1 b = i a × i b = − ab

(ii) a. b = ab if a and b are positive or at least one of them is negative or

zero. However, a b ≠ ab if a and b, both are negative.

18/04/18
 74 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

5.1.3 Complex numbers

(a) A number which can be written in the form a + ib, where a, b are real numbers
and i = −1 is called a complex number.
(b) If z = a + ib is the complex number, then a and b are called real and imaginary
parts, respectively, of the complex number and written as Re (z) = a, Im (z) = b.
(c) Order relations “greater than” and “less than” are not defined for complex
numbers.
(d) If the imaginary part of a complex number is zero, then the complex number is
known as purely real number and if real part is zero, then it is called
purely imaginary number, for example, 2 is a purely real number because its
imaginary part is zero and 3i is a purely imaginary number because its real part
is zero.
5.1.4 Algebra of complex numbers
(a) Two complex numbers z1 = a + ib and z2 = c + id are said to be equal if
a = c and b = d.
(b) Let z1 = a + ib and z2 = c + id be two complex numbers then
z1 + z2 = (a + c) + i (b + d).
5.1.5 Addition of complex numbers satisfies the following properties
1. As the sum of two complex numbers is again a complex number, the set of
complex numbers is closed with respect to addition.
2. Addition of complex numbers is commutative, i.e., z1 + z2 = z2 + z1
3. Addition of complex numbers is associative, i.e., (z1 + z2) + z3 = z1 + (z2 + z3)
4. For any complex number z = x + i y, there exist 0, i.e., (0 + 0i) complex number
such that z + 0 = 0 + z = z, known as identity element for addition.
5. For any complex number z = x + iy, there always exists a number – z = – a – ib
such that z + (– z) = (– z) + z = 0 and is known as the additive inverse of z.
5.1.6 Multiplication of complex numbers
Let z1 = a + ib and z2 = c + id, be two complex numbers. Then
z1 . z2 = (a + ib) (c + id) = (ac – bd) + i (ad + bc)
1. As the product of two complex numbers is a complex number, the set of complex
numbers is closed with respect to multiplication.
2. Multiplication of complex numbers is commutative, i.e., z1.z2 = z2.z1
3. Multiplication of complex numbers is associative, i.e., (z1.z2) . z3 = z1 . (z2.z3)

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 75

4. For any complex number z = x + iy, there exists a complex number 1, i.e., (1 + 0i)
such that
z . 1 = 1 . z = z, known as identity element for multiplication.
1
5. For any non zero complex number z = x + i y, there exists a complex number
z
1 1 1 a − ib
such that z ⋅ = ⋅ z = 1 , i.e., multiplicative inverse of a + ib = = .
z z a + ib a 2 + b2
6. For any three complex numbers z1, z2 and z3 ,
z1 . (z2 + z3) = z1 . z2 + z1 . z3
and (z1 + z2) . z3 = z1 . z3 + z2 . z3
i.e., for complex numbers multiplication is distributive over addition.
5.1.7 Let z1 = a + ib and z2( ≠ 0) = c + id. Then
z1 a + ib (ac + bd ) (bc − ad )
z1 ÷ z2 == = 2 2
+i 2
z2 c + id c +d c +d2
5.1.8 Conjugate of a complex number
Let z = a + ib be a complex number. Then a complex number obtained by changing the
sign of imaginary part of the complex number is called the conjugate of z and it is denoted
by z , i.e., z = a – ib.
Note that additive inverse of z is – a – ib but conjugate of z is a – ib.
We have :
1. ( z ) = z
2. z + z = 2 Re (z) , z – z = 2 i Im(z)
3. z = z , if z is purely real.
4. z + z = 0 ⇔ z is purely imaginary
5. z . z = {Re (z)}2 + {Im (z)}2 .
6. ( z1 + z2 ) = z1 + z2 , ( z1 − z2 ) = z1 – z2

z1 (z )
= 1 ( z2 ≠ 0)
7. ( z1 . z2 ) = ( z1 ) ( z2 ),
z2 ( z2 )
5.1.9 Modulus of a complex number
Let z = a + ib be a complex number. Then the positive square root of the sum of square
of real part and square of imaginary part is called modulus (absolute value) of z and it
is denoted by z i.e., z = a 2 + b2

18/04/18
 76 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

In the set of complex numbers z1 > z2 or z1 < z2 are meaningless but

z1 > z2 or z1 < z2

are meaningful because z1 and z2 are real numbers.

5.1.10 Properties of modulus of a complex number
1. z = 0 ⇔ z = 0 i.e., Re (z) = 0 and Im (z) = 0
2. z = z = −z
3. – z ≤ Re (z) ≤ z and – z ≤ Im (z) ≤ z
2 2 2
4. z z = z , z = z

z1 z
5. z1 z2 = z1 . z2 , = 1 ( z2 ≠ 0)
z2 z2
2 2 2
6. z1 + z2 = z1 + z2 + 2Re ( z1 z2 )
2 2 2
7. z1 − z2 = z1 + z2 − 2 Re ( z1 z2 )
8. z1 + z2 ≤ z1 + z2
9. z1 − z2 ≥ z1 − z2
2 2 2 2
10. az1 − bz2 + bz1 + az2 = ( a 2 + b2 ) ( z1 + z2 )
In particular:
2 2 2 2
z1 − z2 + z1 + z2 = 2 ( z1 + z2 )
11. As stated earlier multiplicative inverse (reciprocal) of a complex number
z = a + ib (≠ 0) is
1 a − ib z
= 2 2 = 2
z a +b z

5.2 Argand Plane

A complex number z = a + ib can be represented by a unique point P (a, b) in the
cartesian plane referred to a pair of rectangular axes. The complex number 0 + 0i
represent the origin 0 ( 0, 0). A purely real number a, i.e., (a + 0i) is represented by the
point (a, 0) on x - axis. Therefore, x-axis is called real axis. A purely imaginary number

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 77

ib, i.e., (0 + ib) is represented by the point (0, b) on y-axis. Therefore, y-axis is called
imaginary axis.
Similarly, the representation of complex numbers as points in the plane is known as
Argand diagram. The plane representing complex numbers as points is called complex
plane or Argand plane or Gaussian plane.
If two complex numbers z1 and z2 be represented by the points P and Q in the complex
plane, then
z1 − z2 = PQ
5.2.1 Polar form of a complex number
Let P be a point representing a non-zero complex number z = a + ib in the
Argand plane. If OP makes an angle θ with the positive direction of x-axis,
then z = r (cosθ + isinθ) is called the polar form of the complex number, where
b
r= z = a 2 + b2 and tanθ = . Here θ is called argument or amplitude of z and we
a
write it as arg (z) = θ.
The unique value of θ such that – π ≤ θ ≤ π is called the principal argument.
arg (z1 . z2) = arg (z1) + arg (z2)

 z1 
arg  z  = arg (z1) – arg (z2)
 2
5.2.2 Solution of a quadratic equation
The equations ax2 + bx + c = 0, where a, b and c are numbers (real or complex, a ≠ 0)
is called the general quadratic equation in variable x. The values of the variable satisfying
the given equation are called roots of the equation.
The quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 with real coefficients has two roots given
–b + D –b – D
by and , where D = b2 – 4ac, called the discriminant of the equation.
2a 2a

A Notes
1. When D = 0, roots of the quadratic equation are real and equal. When D > 0,
roots are real and unequal.
Further, if a, b, c ∈ Q and D is a perfect square, then the roots of the equation
are rational and unequal, and if a, b, c ∈Q and D is not a perfect square, then
the roots are irrational and occur in pair.

18/04/18
 78 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

When D < 0, roots of the quadratic equation are non real (or complex).
2. Let α, β be the roots of the quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0, then sum of
the roots
−b c
(α + β) = and the product of the roots ( α . β) = .
a a
3. Let S and P be the sum of roots and product of roots, respectively, of a quadratic
equation. Then the quadratic equation is given by x2 – Sx + P = 0.

5.2 Solved Exmaples

Short Answer Type
Example 1 Evaluate : (1 + i)6 + (1 – i)3
Solution (1 + i)6 = {(1 + i)2}3 = (1 + i2 + 2i)3 = (1 – 1 + 2i)3 = 8 i3 = – 8i
and (1 – i)3 = 1 – i3 – 3i + 3i2 = 1 + i – 3i – 3 = – 2 – 2i
Therefore, (1 + i)6 + (1 – i)3 = – 8i – 2 – 2i = – 2 – 10i
1
x y
Example 2 If ( x + iy ) 3 = a + ib, where x, y, a, b ∈ R, show that − = – 2 (a2 + b2)
a b
1
Solution ( x + iy ) 3 = a + ib
⇒ x + iy = (a + ib)3
i.e., x + iy = a3 + i3 b3 + 3iab (a + ib)
= a3 – ib3 + i3a2b – 3ab2
= a3 – 3ab2 + i (3a2b – b3)
⇒ x = a3 – 3ab2 and y = 3a2b – b3
x y
2 2 2 2
Thus a = a – 3b and b = 3a – b

x y
So, − = a2 – 3b2 – 3a2 + b2 = – 2 a2 – 2b2 = – 2 (a2 + b2).
a b
Example 3 Solve the equation z2 = z , where z = x + iy
Solution z2 = z ⇒ x2 – y2 + i2xy = x – iy
Therefore, x2 – y2 = x ... (1) and 2xy = – y ... (2)

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 79

1
From (2), we have y = 0 or x = −
2
When y = 0, from (1), we get x2 – x = 0, i.e., x = 0 or x = 1.
1 1 1 3 3
When x = − , from (1), we get y2 = + or y2 = , i.e., y = ± .
2 4 2 4 2
Hence, the solutions of the given equation are
1 3 1 3
0 + i0, 1 + i0, − + i , − −i .
2 2 2 2
2 z +1
Example 4 If the imaginary part of is – 2, then show that the locus of the point
iz +1
representing z in the argand plane is a straight line.
Solution Let z = x + iy . Then
2 z +1 2( x + iy ) + 1 (2 x + 1) + i 2 y
= =
iz + 1 i ( x + iy ) + 1 (1 − y ) + ix

{(2 x +1) + i 2 y} {(1− y) − ix}

= ×
{(1− y) + ix} {(1− y) − ix}
(2 x + 1− y ) + i (2 y − 2 y 2 − 2 x 2 − x )
=
1+ y 2 − 2 y + x 2

 2 z +1  2 y − 2 y 2 − 2 x2 − x
Thus Im  =
 iz +1  1+ y 2 − 2 y + x2

 2 z +1 
But Im  = –2 (Given)
 iz +1 
2 y − 2 y 2 − 2x2 − x
So =−2
1+ y 2 − 2 y + x 2
⇒ 2y – 2y2 – 2x2 – x = – 2 – 2y2 + 4y – 2x2
i.e., x + 2y – 2 = 0, which is the equation of a line.
2 2
Example 5 If z −1 = z +1 , then show that z lies on imaginary axis.
Solution Let z = x + iy. Then | z2 – 1 | = | z |2 + 1

18/04/18
 80 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

2
⇒ x 2 − y 2 −1 + i 2 xy = x + iy + 1
⇒ (x2 – y2 –1)2 + 4x2y2 = (x2 + y2 + 1)2
⇒ 4x2 = 0 i.e., x=0
Hence z lies on y-axis.
Example 6 Let z1 and z2 be two complex numbers such that z1 + i z 2 = 0 and
arg (z1 z2) = π. Then find arg (z1).

Solution Given that z1 + i z 2 = 0

⇒ z1 = i z2 , i.e., z2 = – i z1
Thus arg (z1 z2) = arg z1 + arg (– i z1) = π
⇒ arg (– i z12 ) = π

⇒ arg (– i ) + arg ( z12 ) = π

⇒ arg (– i ) + 2 arg (z1) = π
−π
⇒ + 2 arg (z1) = π
2
3π
⇒ arg (z1) =
4
Example 7 Let z1 and z2 be two complex numbers such that z1 + z2 = z1 + z2 .
Then show that arg (z1) – arg (z2) = 0.

Solution Let z1 = r1 (cosθ1 + i sin θ1) and z2 = r2 (cosθ2 + i sin θ2)

where r1 = z1 , arg ( z1 ) = θ1, r2 = z2 , arg (z2) = θ2.
We have, z1 + z2 = z1 + z2

= r1 (cos θ1 + cos θ2 ) + r2 (cos θ2 + sin θ2 ) = r1 + r2

= r12 + r22 + 2r1r2 cos (θ1 − θ2 ) = ( r1 + r2 ) 2 ⇒ cos (θ1 – θ2 ) =1
⇒ θ1 – θ2 i.e. arg z1 = arg z2
Example 8 If z1, z2, z3 are complex numbers such that
1 1 1
z1 = z2 = z3 = + + = 1 , then find the value of z + z + z .
z1 z2 z3 1 2 3

Solution z1 = z2 = z3 =1

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 81

2 2 2
⇒ z1 = z2 = z3 =1
⇒ z1 z1 = z2 z2 = z3 z3 = 1
1 1 1
⇒ z1 = , z 2 = , z3 =
z1 z2 z3

1 1 1
Given that + + =1
z1 z2 z3

⇒ z1 + z2 + z3 = 1 , i.e., z1 + z 2 + z 3 = 1

⇒ z1 + z2 + z3 = 1
Example 9 If a complex number z lies in the interior or on the boundary of a circle of
radius 3 units and centre (– 4, 0), find the greatest and least values of z +1 .

Solution Distance of the point representing z from the centre of the circle is
z − (− 4 + i 0) = z + 4 .

According to given condition z + 4 ≤ 3 .

Now z + 1 = z + 4 – 3 ≤ z + 4 + −3 ≤ 3 + 3 = 6
Therefore, greatest value of |z + 1| is 6.
Since least value of the modulus of a complex number is zero, the least value of
z +1 = 0 .
Example 10 Locate the points for which 3 < z < 4
Solution z < 4 ⇒ x2 + y2 < 16 which is the interior of circle with centre at origin and
radius 4 units, and z > 3 ⇒ x2 + y2 > 9 which is exterior of circle with centre at origin

and radius 3 units. Hence 3 < z < 4 is the portion between two circles x2 + y2 = 9 and
x2 + y2 = 16.
Example 11 Find the value of 2x4 + 5x3 + 7x2 – x + 41, when x = – 2 – 3 i
Solution x + 2 = – 3 i ⇒ x2 + 4x + 7 = 0
Therefore 2x4 + 5x3 + 7x2 – x + 41 = (x2 + 4x + 7) (2x2 – 3x + 5) + 6
= 0 × (2x2 – 3x + 5) + 6 = 6.

18/04/18
 82 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Example 12 Find the value of P such that the difference of the roots of the equation
x2 – Px + 8 = 0 is 2.
Solution Let α, β be the roots of the equation x2 – Px + 8 = 0
Therefore α + β = P and α . β = 8.

Now α – β = ± (α + β )2 – 4αβ

Therefore 2 = ± P 2 − 32

⇒ P2 – 32 = 4, i.e., P = ± 6.
Example 13 Find the value of a such that the sum of the squares of the roots of the
equation x2 – (a – 2) x – (a + 1) = 0 is least.
Solution Let α, β be the roots of the equation
Therefore, α + β = a – 2 and αβ = – ( a + 1)
Now α2 + β2 = (α + β)2 – 2αβ
= (a – 2)2 + 2 (a + 1)
= (a – 1)2 + 5
Therefore, α2 + β2 will be minimum if (a – 1)2 = 0, i.e., a = 1.

Long Answer Type

Example 14 Find the value of k if for the complex numbers z1 and z2,
2 2 2 2
1− z1 z2 − z1 − z2 = k (1− z1 )(1− z2 )
Solution
2 2
L.H.S. = 1− z1 z2 − z1 − z2

= (1 − z1 z2 ) (1− z1 z2 ) − ( z1 − z2 ) ( z1 − z2 )
= (1 − z1 z2 ) (1 − z1 z2 ) − ( z1 − z2 ) ( z1 − z2 )
= 1 + z1 z1 z2 z2 − z1 z1 − z2 z 2
2 2 2 2
= 1+ z1 ⋅ z2 − z1 − z2
2 2
= (1 − z1 ) (1− z2 )
2 2
R.H.S. = k (1 – z1 ) (1 − z2 )
⇒ k=1

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 83

Hence, equating LHS and RHS, we get k = 1.

π
Example 15 If z1 and z2 both satisfy z + z = 2 z − 1 arg (z1 – z2) = , then find
4
Im (z1 + z2).
Solution Let z = x + iy, z1 = x1 + iy1 and z2 = x2 + iy2.
Then z + z = 2 z −1

⇒ (x + iy) + (x – iy) = 2 x −1+ iy

⇒ 2x = 1 + y2 ... (1)
Since z1 and z2 both satisfy (1), we have
2x1 = 1 + y12 ... and 2x2 = 1 + y22
⇒ 2 (x1 – x2) = (y1 + y2) (y1 – y2)
 y −y 
⇒ 2 = (y1 + y2)  1 2  ... (2)
 x1 − x2 
Again z1 – z2 = (x1 – x2) + i (y1 – y2)
y1 − y2
Therefore, tan θ = , where θ = arg (z1 – z2)
x1 − x2

π y −y
tan = 1 2  π
⇒ 4 x1 − x2  since θ= 
 4

i.e., y1 − y2
1=
x1 − x2
From (2), we get 2 = y1 + y2, i.e., Im (z1 + z2) = 2

Objective Type Questions

Example 16 Fill in the blanks:
(i) The real value of ‘a’ for which 3i3 – 2ai2 + (1 – a)i + 5 is real is ________.
π
(ii) If z = 2 and arg (z) = , then z = ________.
4
π
(iii) The locus of z satisfying arg (z) = is _______.
3
(iv) The value of ( − −1) 4 n –3 , where n ∈ N, is ______.

18/04/18
 84 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

1− i
(v) The conjugate of the complex number is _____.
1+ i
(vi) If a complex number lies in the third quadrant, then its conjugate lies in
the ______.
(vii) If (2 + i) (2 + 2i) (2 + 3i) ... (2 + ni) = x + iy, then 5.8.13 ... (4 + n2) = ______.
Solution
(i) 3i3 – 2ai2 + (1 – a)i + 5 = –3i + 2a + 5 + (1 – a)i
= 2a + 5 + (– a – 2) i, which is real if – a – 2 = 0 i.e. a = – 2.
 π π  1 1 
(ii) z = z  cos + i sin  = 2  +i  = 2 (1+ i)
 4 4  2 2

(iii) Let z = x + iy. Then its polar form is z = r (cos θ + i sin θ), where tan θ = y and
x
π
θ is arg (z). Given that θ = . Thus.
3
π y
tan = ⇒ y = 3 x , where x > 0, y > 0.
3 x
Hence, locus of z is the part of y = 3 x in the first quadrant except origin.
1
(iv) Here (– −1)
4 n –3
= (−i) 4 n−3 = (−i )4 n (−i) −3 =
( −i)3
1 1 i
3== = 2 = −i
−i i i
1− i 1 − i 1 − i 1+ i 2 − 2i 1 −1 − 2i
(v) = × = = = −i
1 + i 1+ i 1 − i 1− i 2 1+ 1
1− i
Hence, conjugate of is i.
1+ i
(vi) Conjugate of a complex number is the image of the complex number about the
x-axis. Therefore, if a number lies in the third quadrant, then its image lies in
the second quadrant.
(vii) Given that (2 + i) (2 + 2i) (2 + 3i) ... (2 + ni) = x + iy ... (1)

⇒ ( )
(2 + i ) (2 + 2i ) (2 + 3i )...(2 + ni ) = x + iy = ( x − iy )

i.e., (2 – i) (2 – 2i) (2 – 3i) ... (2 – ni) = x – iy ... (2)

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 85

Multiplying (1) and (2), we get 5.8.13 ... (4 + n2) = x2 + y2.

Example 17 State true or false for the following:
(i) Multiplication of a non-zero complex number by i rotates it through a right
angle in the anti- clockwise direction.
(ii) The complex number cosθ + i sinθ can be zero for some θ.
(iii) If a complex number coincides with its conjugate, then the number must lie on
imaginary axis.
(iv) The argument of the complex number z = (1 +i 3 ) (1 + i) (cos θ + i sin θ) is
7π
+θ
12
(v) The points representing the complex number z for which z + 1 < z −1 lies in
the interior of a circle.
(vi) If three complex numbers z1, z2 and z3 are in A.P., then they lie on a circle in
the complex plane.
(vii) If n is a positive integer, then the value of in + (i)n+1 + (i)n+2 + (i)n+3 is 0.
Solution
(i) True. Let z = 2 + 3i be complex number represented by OP. Then iz = –3 + 2i,
represented by OQ, where if OP is rotated in the anticlockwise direction through
a right angle, it coincides with OQ.
(ii) False. Because cosθ + isinθ = 0 ⇒ cosθ = 0 and sinθ = 0. But there is no
value of θ for which cosθ and sinθ both are zero.
(iii) False, because x + iy = x – iy ⇒ y = 0 ⇒ number lies on x-axis.
(iv) True, arg (z) = arg (1 + i 3 ) + arg (1 + i) + arg (cosθ + isinθ)
π π 7π
+ +θ= +θ
3 4 12
(v) False, because x + iy + 1 < x + iy −1
⇒ (x + 1)2 + y2 < (x – 1)2 + y2 which gives 4x < 0.
z1 + z3
(vi) False, because if z1, z2 and z3 are in A.P., then z2 = ⇒ z2 is the midpoint
2
of z1 and z3, which implies that the points z1, z2, z3 are collinear.
(vii) True, because in + (i)n+1 + (i)n+2 + (i)n+3
= in (1 + i + i2 + i3) = in (1 + i – 1 – i)
= in (0) = 0

18/04/18
 86 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Example 18 Match the statements of column A and B.

Column A Column B
2 4 6 20
(a) The value of 1+i + i + i + ... i is (i) purely imaginary complex number
(b) The value of i–1097 is (ii) purely real complex number
(c) Conjugate of 1+i lies in (iii) second quadrant
1+ 2i
(d) lies in (iv) Fourth quadrant
1− i
(e) If a, b, c ∈ R and b2 – 4ac < 0, (v) may not occur in conjugate pairs
then the roots of the equation
ax2 + bx + c = 0 are non real
(complex) and
(f) If a, b, c ∈ R and b2 – 4ac > 0, (vi) may occur in conjugate pairs
2
and b – 4ac is a perfect
square, then the roots of the
equation ax2 + bx + c = 0
Solution
(a) ⇔ (ii), because 1 + i2 + i4 + i6 + ... + i20
= 1 – 1 + 1 – 1 + ... + 1 = 1 (which is purely a real complex number)
1 1 1 1 i
(b) ⇔ (i), because i–1097 = 1097
= 4×274+1 = 4 274
= = 2 = −i
(i) i {(i ) } (i) i i
which is purely imaginary complex number.
(c) ⇔ (iv), conjugate of 1 + i is 1 – i, which is represented by the point (1, –1) in
the fourth quadrant.
1 + 2i 1 + 2i 1+ i −1 + 3i 1 3
(d) ⇔ (iii), because = × = = − + i , which is
1− i 1− i 1+ i 2 2 2
 1 3
represented by the point  − ,  in the second quadrant.
 2 2
(e) ⇔ (vi), If b2 – 4ac < 0 = D < 0, i.e., square root of D is a imaginary
−b ± Imaginary Number
number, therefore, roots are x = , i.e., roots are in
2a
conjugate pairs.

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 87

(f) ⇔ (v), Consider the equation x2 – (5 + 2)x+5 2 = 0, where a = 1,

b = – (5 + 2 ), c = 5 2 , clearly a, b, c ∈ R.
Now D = b2 – 4ac = {– (5 + 2
2 )} – 4.1.5 2 = (5 –
2
2).
5 + 2 ± 5− 2
Therefore x = = 5, 2 which do not form a conjugate pair.
2
i 4 n +1 − i 4 n −1
Example 19 What is the value of ?
2
i 4 n +1 − i 4n −1 i 4 ni − i 4 ni − i
Solution i, because =
2 2
1
2 i−
i = i −1 = −2 = i
=
2 2i 2i
Example 20 What is the smallest positive integer n, for which (1 + i)2n = (1 – i)2n?
2n
 1+ i 
Solution n = 2, because (1 + i)2n = (1 – i)2n =   =1
 1− i 
⇒ (i)2n = 1 which is possible if n = 2 (∴ i4 = 1)
Example 21 What is the reciprocal of 3 + 7i

z
Solution Reciprocal of z = 2
z
3− 7 i 3 7i
Therefore, reciprocal of 3 + 7 i= = –
16 16 16

Example 22 If z1 = 3 + i 3 and z2 = 3 + i , then find the quadrant in which

 z1 
  lies.
 z2 
z1 3 + i 3  3+ 3   3− 3 
Solution = =   +   i
z2 3+i  4   4 
which is represented by a point in first quadrant.

18/04/18
 88 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

5 + 12i + 5 −12i
Example 23 What is the conjugate of ?
5 +12i − 5 −12i
Solution Let
5 +12i + 5 −12i 5 +12i + 5 −12i
z= ×
5 +12i − 5 −12i 5 +12i + 5 −12i

5 +12i + 5 −12i + 2 25 + 144

=
5 + 12i − 5 +12i
3 3i 3
= = = 0− i
2i −2 2
3
Therefore, the conjugate of z = 0 + i
2
Example 24 What is the principal value of amplitude of 1 – i ?
Solution Let θ be the principle value of amplitude of 1 – i. Since
 π π
tan θ = – 1 ⇒ tan θ = tan  −  ⇒ θ = −
 4 4
25 3
Example 25 What is the polar form of the complex number (i ) ?
Solution z = (i25)3 = (i)75 = i4×18+3 = (i4)18 (i)3
= i3 = – i = 0 – i
Polar form of z = r (cos θ + i sinθ)
  π  π 
= 1cos  −  + i sin  −  
  2  2 
π π
= cos – i sin
2 2
π
Example 26 What is the locus of z, if amplitude of z – 2 – 3i is ?
4
Solution Let z = x + iy. Then z – 2 – 3i = (x – 2) + i (y – 3)
y −3
Let θ be the amplitude of z – 2 – 3i. Then tan θ =
x−2
π y −3  π
⇒ tan =  since θ = 
4 x−2  4

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 89

y −3
⇒ 1= i.e. x – y + 1 = 0
x−2
Hence, the locus of z is a straight line.
Example 27 If 1 – i, is a root of the equation x2 + ax + b = 0, where a, b ∈ R, then
find the values of a and b.
−a
Solution Sum of roots = (1 – i) + (1 + i) ⇒ a = – 2.
1
(since non real complex roots occur in conjugate pairs)
b
Product of roots, = (1 − i ) (1 + i) ⇒ b = 2
1
Choose the correct options out of given four options in each of the Examples from 28
to 33 (M.C.Q.).
Example 28 1 + i2 + i4 + i6 + ... + i2n is
(A) positive (B) negative
(C) 0 (D) can not be evaluated
Solution (D), 1 + i2 + i4 + i6 + ... + i2n = 1 – 1 + 1 – 1 + ... (–1)n
which can not be evaluated unless n is known.
Example 29 If the complex number z = x + iy satisfies the condition z +1 = 1 , then
z lies on
(A) x-axis
(B) circle with centre (1, 0) and radius 1
(C) circle with centre (–1, 0) and radius 1
(D) y-axis
Solution (C), z +1 =1 ⇒ ( x +1) + iy = 1
⇒ (x +1)2 + y2 = 1
which is a circle with centre (–1, 0) and radius 1.
Example 30 The area of the triangle on the complex plane formed by the complex
numbers z, – iz and z + iz is:
2 2
(A) z (B) z
2
z
(C) (D) none of these
2

18/04/18
 90 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Solution (C), Let z = x + iy. Then – iz = y – ix. Therefore,

z + iz = (x – y) + i (x + y)
2
1 2 z
Required area of the triangle = (x + y2 ) =
2 2

Example 31 The equation z + 1− i = z −1+ i represents a

(A) straight line (B) circle
(C) parabola (D) hyperbola
Solution (A), z + 1− i = z −1+ i

⇒ z − (−1 + i) = z − (1 − i)
⇒ PA = PB, where A denotes the point (–1, 1), B denotes the point (1, –1) and P
denotes the point (x, y)
⇒ z lies on the perpendicular bisector of the line joining A and B and perpendicular
bisector is a straight line.
2
Example 32 Number of solutions of the equation z2 + z = 0 is
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 3 (D) infinitely many
2
Solution (D), z2 + z = 0, z ≠ 0
⇒ x2 – y2 + i2xy + x2 + y2 = 0
⇒ 2x2 + i2xy = 0 2x (x + iy) = 0
⇒ x = 0 or x + iy = 0 (not possible)
Therefore, x = 0 and z ≠ 0
So y can have any real value. Hence infinitely many solutions.
π π
Example 33 The amplitude of sin + i (1 − cos ) is
5 5
2π π π π
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 5 15 10

 π π
Solution (D), Here r cos θ = sin   and r sin θ = 1 – cos
5 5

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 91

π π
1 − cos 2sin 2  
5 =  10 
Therefore, tan θ =
sin
π  π π
2sin   .cos  
5  10   10 
π π
⇒ tan θ = tan   i.e., θ=
 10  10
5.3 EXERCISE

Short Answer Type

n
 1
1. For a positive integer n, find the value of (1 – i)n  1− 
 i
13

2. Evaluate ∑ (i n + i n+1 ) , where n∈N .

n =1
3 3
 1+ i   1 − i 
3. If   −  = x + iy, then find (x, y).
 1- i   1+ i 
(1+ i) 2
4. If = x + iy, then find the value of x + y.
2−i
100
 1− i 
5. If   = a + ib, then find (a, b).
 1+ i 
1+ a
6. If a = cos θ + i sinθ, find the value of .
1− a
7. If (1 + i) z = (1 – i) z , then show that z = – i z .
8. If z = x + iy , then show that z z + 2 (z + z ) + b = 0, where b ∈ R, represents
a circle.
z +2
9. If the real part of is 4, then show that the locus of the point representing
z −1
z in the complex plane is a circle.
 z −1  π
10. Show that the complex number z, satisfying the condition arg  = lies
 z +1  4
on a circle.
11. Solve the equation z = z + 1 + 2i.

18/04/18
 92 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Long Answer Type

12. If z +1 = z + 2 (1 + i), then find z.
13. If arg (z – 1) = arg (z + 3i), then find x – 1 : y. where z = x + iy
z −2
14. Show that = 2 represents a circle. Find its centre and radius.
z −3

z −1
15. If is a purely imaginary number (z ≠ – 1), then find the value of z .
z +1

16. z1 and z2 are two complex numbers such that z1 = z2 and arg (z1) + arg (z2) =
π, then show that z1 = − z2 .
z1 −1
17. If z1 = 1 (z1 ≠ –1) and z2 = , then show that the real part of z2 is zero.
z1 +1
18. If z1, z2 and z3, z4 are two pairs of conjugate complex numbers, then find
 z1  z 
arg   + arg  2  .
 z4   z3 
19. If z1 = z2 = ... = zn =1 , then

1 1 1 1
show that z1 + z2 + z3 + ... + zn = + + + ... + .
z1 z2 z3 zn
20. If for complex numbers z1 and z2, arg (z1) – arg (z2) = 0, then show that
z1 − z2 = z1 − z2
21. Solve the system of equations Re (z2) = 0, z = 2 .
22. Find the complex number satisfying the equation z + 2 |(z + 1)| + i = 0.

1− i
23. Write the complex number z = in polar form.
π π
cos + i sin
3 3
24. If z and w are two complex numbers such that zw =1 and arg (z) – arg (w) =
π
, then show that z w = – i.
2

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 93

Objective Type Questions

25. Fill in the blanks of the following
(i) For any two complex numbers z 1, z 2 and any real numbers a, b,
2 2
az1 − bz2 + bz1 + az2 = .....

(ii) The value of −25 × −9 is .....................

(1 − i)3
(iii) The number is equal to ...............
1 − i3
(iv) The sum of the series i + i2 + i3 + ... upto 1000 terms is ..........
(v) Multiplicative inverse of 1 + i is ................
(vi) If z1 and z2 are complex numbers such that z1 + z2 is a real number,
then z2 = ....
(vii) arg (z) + arg z ( z ≠ 0) is ...............

(viii) If z + 4 ≤ 3 , then the greatest and least values of z + 1 are ..... and .....

z −2 π
(ix) If = , then the locus of z is ............
z+2 6

5π
(x) If z = 4 and arg (z) = , then z = ............
6
26. State True or False for the following :
(i) The order relation is defined on the set of complex numbers.
(ii) Multiplication of a non zero complex number by – i rotates the point about
origin through a right angle in the anti-clockwise direction.
(iii) For any complex number z the minimum value of z + z − 1 is 1.

(iv) The locus represented by z − 1 = z − i is a line perpendicular to the join of

(1, 0) and (0, 1).
(v) If z is a complex number such that z ≠ 0 and Re (z) = 0, then Im (z2) = 0.

(vi) The inequality z − 4 < z − 2 represents the region given by x > 3.

18/04/18
94 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(vii) Let z1 and z2 be two complex numbers such that z1 + z2 = z1 + z2 , then

arg (z1 – z2) = 0.
(viii) 2 is not a complex number.
27. Match the statements of Column A and Column B.
Column A Column B

(a) The polar form of i + 3 is (i) Perpendicular bisector of segment

joining (– 2, 0) and (2, 0)

(b) The amplitude of –1 + − 3 is (ii) On or outside the circle having centre

at (0, – 4) and radius 3.
2π
(c) If z + 2 = z − 2 , then (iii)
3
locus of z is
(d) If z + 2i = z − 2i , then (iv) Perpendicular bisector of segment
locus of z is joining (0, – 2) and (0, 2).
 π π
(e) Region represented by (v) 2  cos + i sin 
 6 6
z + 4 i ≥ 3 is
(f) Region represented by (vi) On or inside the circle having centre
z + 4 ≤ 3 is (– 4, 0) and radius 3 units.

1 + 2i
(g) Conjugate of lies in (vii) First quadrant
1− i
(h) Reciprocal of 1 – i lies in (viii) Third quadrant
2−i
28. What is the conjugate of ?
(1 − 2i) 2
29. If z1 = z2 , is it necessary that z1 = z2?

(a 2 + 1) 2
30. If = x + iy, what is the value of x2 + y2?
2a − i

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 95

5π
31. Find z if z = 4 and arg (z) = .
6

(2 + i )
32. Find (1+ i )
(3 + i)

33. Find principal argument of (1 + i 3 )2 .

z − 5i
34. Where does z lie, if = 1.
z + 5i
Choose the correct answer from the given four options indicated against each of the
Exercises from 35 to 50 (M.C.Q)
35. sinx + i cos 2x and cos x – i sin 2x are conjugate to each other for:

 1π
(A) x = nπ (B) x =  n + 
 22
(C) x = 0 (D) No value of x
1 − i sin α
36. The real value of α for which the expression is purely real is :
1+ 2i sin α
π π
(A) ( n +1) (B) (2n + 1)
2 2
(C) n π (D) None of these, where n ∈N
z
37. If z = x + iy lies in the third quadrant, then
z also lies in the third quadrant if
(A) x > y > 0 (B) x < y < 0
(C) y < x < 0 (D) y > x > 0
38. The value of (z + 3) ( z + 3) is equivalent to
2
(A) z+3 (B) z −3
2
(C) z + 3 (D) None of these
x
 1+ i 
39. If   = 1, then
 1− i 
(A) x = 2n+1 (B) x = 4n
(C) x = 2n (D) x = 4n + 1, where n ∈N

18/04/18
96 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

 3 − 4ix 
40. A real value of x satisfies the equation   = α − iβ (α, β ∈ R )
 3 + 4ix 
if α2 + β2 =
(A) 1 (B) – 1 (C) 2 (D) – 2
41. Which of the following is correct for any two complex numbers z1 and z2?
(A) z1 z2 = z1 z2 (B) arg (z1z2) = arg (z1). arg (z2)

(C) z1 + z2 = z1 + z2 (D) z1 + z2 ≥ z1 − z2
42. The point represented by the complex number 2 – i is rotated about origin through
π
an angle in the clockwise direction, the new position of point is:
2
(A) 1 + 2i (B) –1 – 2i (C) 2 + i (D) –1 + 2 i
43. Let x, y ∈ R, then x + iy is a non real complex number if:
(A) x = 0 (B) y = 0 (C) x ≠ 0 (D) y ≠ 0
44. If a + ib = c + id, then
(A) a2 + c2 = 0 (B) b2 + c2 = 0
(C) b2 + d2 = 0 (D) a2 + b2 = c2 + d2

i+z
45. The complex number z which satisfies the condition = 1 lies on
i−z
(A) circle x2 + y2 = 1 (B) the x-axis
(C) the y-axis (D) the line x + y = 1.
46. If z is a complex number, then
2 2
(A) z2 > z (B) z2 = z
2 2
(C) z2 < z (D) z2 ≥ z

47. z1 + z2 = z1 + z2 is possible if

1
(A) z2 = z1 (B) z2 = z
1

(C) arg (z1) = arg (z2) (D) z1 = z2

18/04/18
 COMPLEX NUMBERS AND QUADRATIC EQUATIONS 97

1 + i cos θ
48. The real value of θ for which the expression is a real number is:
1 − 2 i cos θ
π π
(A) nπ + (B) nπ+ (−1) n
4 4
π
(C) 2nπ ± (D) none of these.
2
49. The value of arg (x) when x < 0 is:
π
(A) 0 (B)
2
(C) π (D) none of these
7− z
50. If f (z) = , where z = 1 + 2i, then f ( z ) is
1− z 2

z
(A) (B) z
2
(C) 2z (D) none of these.

18/04/18
 Chapter 6
LINEAR INEQUALITIES
6.1 Overview
6.1.1 A statement involving the symbols ‘>’, ‘<’, ‘ ≥’, ‘≤’ is called an inequality. For
example 5 > 3, x ≤ 4, x + y ≥ 9.
(i) Inequalities which do not involve variables are called numerical inequalities. For
example 3 < 8, 5 ≥ 2.
(ii) Inequalities which involve variables are called literal inequalities. For example,
x > 3, y ≤ 5, x – y ≥ 0.
(iii) An inequality may contain more than one variable and it can be linear, quadratic or
cubic etc. For eaxmple, 3x – 2 < 0 is a linear inequality in one variable, 2x + 3y ≥ 4
is a linear inequality in two variables and x2 + 3x + 2 < 0 is a quadratic inequality
in one variable.
(iv) Inequalities involving the symbol ‘>’ or ‘<’ are called strict inequalities. For
example, 3x – y > 5, x < 3.
(v) Inequalities involving the symbol ‘≥’ or ‘≤’ are called slack inequalities. For
example, 3x – y ≥ 5, x ≤ 5.
6.1.2 Solution of an inequality
(i) The value(s) of the variable(s) which makes the inequality a true statement is
called its solutions. The set of all solutions of an inequality is called the solution
set of the inequality. For example, x – 1 ≥ 0, has infinite number of solutions as
all real values greater than or equal to one make it a true statement. The inequality
x2 + 1 < 0 has no solution in R as no real value of x makes it a true statement.
To solve an inequality we can
(i) Add (or subtract) the same quantity to (from) both sides without changing the
sign of inequality.
(ii) Multiply (or divide) both sides by the same positive quantity without changing the
sign of inequality. However, if both sides of inequality are multiplied (or divided)
by the same negative quantity the sign of inequality is reversed, i.e., ‘>’ changes
into ‘<’ and vice versa.

18/04/18
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 99

6.1.3 Representation of solution of linear inequality in one variable on a

number line
To represent the solution of a linear inequality in one variable on a number line, we use
the following conventions:
(i) If the inequality involves ‘≥’ or ‘≤’, we draw filled circle (•) on the number line
to indicate that the number corresponding to the filled circle is included in the
solution set.
(ii) If the inequality involves ‘>’ or ‘<’, we draw an open circle (O) on the number
line to indicate that the number corresponding to the open circle is excluded from
the solution set.
6.1.4 Graphical representation of the solution of a linear inequality
(a) To represent the solution of a linear inequality in one or two variables graphically
in a plane, we proceed as follows:
(i) If the inequality involves ‘≥’ or ‘≤’, we draw the graph of the line as a thick
line to indicate that the points on this line are included in the solution set.
(ii) If the inequality involves ‘>’ or ‘<’, we draw the graph of the line as dotted
line to indicate that the points on the line are excluded from the solution set.
(b) Solution of a linear inequality in one variable can be represented on number line
as well as in the plane but the solution of a linear inequality in two variables of the
type ax + by > c, ax + by ≥ c, ax + by < c or ax + by ≤ c (a ≠ 0, b ≠ 0) can be
represented in the plane only.
(c) Two or more inequalities taken together comprise a system of inequalities and
the solutions of the system of inequalities are the solutions common to all the
inequalities comprising the system.
6.1.5 Two important results
(a) If a, b ∈ R and b ≠ 0, then
a
(i) ab > 0 or > 0 ⇒ a and b are of the same sign.
b
a
(ii) ab < 0 or < 0 ⇒ a and b are of opposite sign.
b
(b) If a is any positive real number, i.e., a > 0, then
(i) | x | < a ⇔ – a < x < a
|x| ≤ a ⇔ – a ≤ x ≤ a
(ii) | x | > a ⇔ x < – a or x > a
| x | ≥ a ⇔ x ≤ – a or x ≥ a

18/04/18
 100 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

6.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type
Example 1 Solve the inequality, 3x – 5 < x + 7, when
(i) x is a natural number (ii) x is a whole number
(iii) x is an integer (iv) x is a real number
Solution We have 3x – 5 < x + 7
⇒ 3x < x + 12 (Adding 5 to both sides)
⇒ 2x < 12 (Subtracting x from both sides)
⇒ x<6 (Dividing by 2 on both sides)
(i) Solution set is {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
(ii) Solution set is {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
(iii) Solution set is {....– 3, – 2, –1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
(iv) Solution set is {x : x ∈ R and x < 6}, i.e., any real number less than 6.
x −2
Example 2 Solve >2
x+5

x−2
Solution We have >2
x +5
x−2
⇒ – 2>0 [Subtracting 2 from each side]
x +5
– ( x +12)
⇒ >0
x+5
x +12
⇒ <0 (Multiplying both sides by – 1)
x +5
a
⇒ x + 12 > 0 and x + 5 < 0 [Since < 0 ⇒ a and b are of opposite signs]
b
or
x + 12 < 0 and x + 5 > 0
⇒ x > – 12 and x < – 5
or
x < – 12 and x > – 5 (Not possible)
Therefore, – 12 < x < –5, i.e. x ∈ (–12, –5)

18/04/18
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 101

Example 3 Solve 3 – 4 x ≥ 9 .

Solution We have 3 – 4 x ≥ 9 .

⇒ 3 – 4x ≤ – 9 or 3 – 4x ≥ 9 (Since x ≥ a ⇒ x ≤ – a or x ≥ a)
⇒ – 4x ≤ – 12 or – 4x ≥ 6
−3
⇒ x≥3 or x≤ (Dividing both sides by – 4)
2
−3
⇒ x∈( −∞, ] ∪ [3, ∞ )
2
Example 4 Solve 1 ≤ |x –2 | ≤ 3.
Solution We have 1 ≤ |x – 2| ≤ 3
⇒ x − 2 ≥1 and x −2 ≤3
⇒ (x – 2 ≤ – 1 or x – 2 ≥ 1) and (– 3 ≤ x – 2 ≤ 3)
⇒ (x ≤ 1 or x ≥ 3) and (– 1 ≤ x ≤ 5)
⇒ x ∈ (– ∞, 1] ∪ [3, ∞) and x ∈ [ –1, 5]
Combining the solutions of two inequalities, we have
x ∈ [–1, 1] ∪ [3, 5]
Example 5 The cost and revenue functions of a product are given by
C(x) = 20 x + 4000 and R(x) = 60x + 2000, respectively, where x is the number of items
produced and sold. How many items must be sold to realise some profit?
Solution We have, profit = Revenue – Cost
= (60x + 2000) – (20x + 4000)
= 40x – 2000
To earn some profit, 40x – 2000 > 0
⇒ x > 50
Hence, the manufacturer must sell more than 50 items to realise some profit.
Example 6 Solve for x, x +1 + x > 3 .
Solution On LHS of the given inequality, we have two terms both containing modulus.
By equating the expression within the modulus to zero, we get x = – 1, 0 as critical points.
These critical points divide the real line in three parts as (– ∞, – 1), [–1, 0), [0, ∞).

18/04/18
 102 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Case I When – ∞ < x < – 1

x +1 + x > 3 ⇒ – x – 1 – x > 3 ⇒ x < – 2.
Case II When – 1 ≤ x < 0,
x +1 + x > 3 ⇒ x + 1 – x > 3 ⇒ 1 > 3 (not possible)
Case III When 0 ≤ x < ∞,
x +1 + x > 3 ⇒ x + 1 + x > 3 ⇒ x > 1.
Combining the results of cases (I), (II) and (III), we get
x ∈ (– ∞ , – 2) ∪ (1, ∞)

Long Answer Type

x +3 + x
Example 7 Solve for x, >1
x+2

x+3 + x
Solution We have >1
x+2
x +3 + x
⇒ –1>0
x+2
x+3 − 2
⇒ >0
x+2
Now two cases arise:
Case I When x + 3 ≥ 0, i.e., x ≥ – 3. Then
x+3 − 2 x +3 − 2
>0 ⇒ >0
x+2 x+2
x +1
⇒ >0
x+2
⇒ {(x + 1) > 0 and x + 2 > 0} or {x + 1 < 0 and x + 2 < 0}
⇒ {x > –1 and x > –2} or {x < – 1 and x < – 2}
⇒ x > –1 or x < – 2
⇒ x ∈ (–1, ∞) or x ∈ (– ∞, – 2)
⇒ x ∈ (–3, –2) ∪ ( – 1, ∞) [Since x ≥ – 3] ... (1)

18/04/18
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 103

Case II When x + 3 < 0, i.e., x < – 3

x+3 − 2 − x − 3− 2
>0 ⇒ >0
x+2 x+2
− ( x + 5) x +5
⇒ >0 ⇒ <0
x+2 x+2
⇒ (x + 5 < 0 and x + 2 > 0) or (x + 5 > 0 and x + 2 < 0)
⇒ (x < – 5 and x > – 2) or (x > – 5 and x < –2)
it is not possible.
⇒ x ∈ (– 5 , – 2) ... (2)
Combining (I) and (II), the required solution is
x ∈ (– 5 , – 2) ∪ (– 1, ∞)
Example 8 Solve the following system of inequalities :
x 1 6x 1
≥ , <
2 x +1 4 4 x − 1 2
x 1
Solution From the first inequality, we have − ≥0
2 x +1 4
2 x −1
⇒ ≥0
2 x +1
⇒ (2x – 1 ≥ 0 and 2x + 1 > 0) or (2x – 1 ≤ 0 and 2x + 1 < 0) [Since 2x + 1 ≠ 0)
1 1 1 1
⇒ (x ≥ and x > – ) or (x ≤ and x < – )
2 2 2 2
1 1
⇒ x≥ or x < –
2 2
1 1
⇒ x ∈ ( – ∞ , – ) ∪ [ , ∞) ... (1)
2 2
6x 1
From the second inequality, we have 4 x − 1 − 2 < 0
8 x +1
⇒ <0
4 x –1
⇒ (8x + 1 < 0 and 4x – 1 > 0) or (8x + 1 > 0 and 4x – 1 < 0)
1 1 1 1
⇒ (x < − and x > ) or (x > − and x < )
8 4 8 4
1 1
⇒ x ∈ (− , ) (Since the first is not possible) ... (2)
8 4

18/04/18
 104 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Note that the common solution of (1) and (2) is null set. Hence, the given system of
inequalities has no solution.
Example 9 Find the linear inequalities for which the shaded region in the given figure
is the solution set.
Solution
(i) Consider 2x + 3y = 3. We observe that
the shaded region and the origin lie on
opposite side of this line and (0, 0)
satisfies 2x + 3y ≤ 3. Therefore, we
must have 2x + 3y ≥ 3 as linear
inequality corresponding to the line
2x + 3y = 3.
(ii) Consider 3x + 4y = 18. We observe
that the shaded region and the origin
lie on the same side of this line and
(0, 0) satisfies 3x + 4y ≤ 18. Therefore,
3x + 4y ≤ 18 is the linear inequality Fig 6.1
corresponding to the line 3x + 4y = 18.
(iii) Consider –7x + 4y = 14. It is clear from the figure that the shaded region
and the origin lie on the same side of this line and (0, 0) satisfies the inequality
– 7x + 4y ≤ 14. Therefore, –7x + 4y ≤ 14 is the inequality corresponding to the
line –7x + 4y = 14.
(iv) Consider x – 6y = 3. It may be noted that the shaded portion and origin lie on the
same side of this line and (0, 0) satisfies x – 6y ≤ 3. Therefore, x – 6y ≤ 3 is the
inequality corresponding to the line x – 6y = 3.
(v) Also the shaded region lies in the first quadrant only. Therefore, x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0.
Hence, in view of (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) and (v) above, the linear inequalities
corresponding to the given solution set are :
2x + 3y ≥ 3,3x + 4y ≤ 18 –7x + 4y ≤14, x – 6y ≤ 3, x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0.

Objective Type
Choose the correct answer from the given four options against each of the Examples
10 to 13 (M.C.Q.)
x−2
Example 10 If ≥ 0 , then
x−2
(A) x ∈ [2, ∞) (B) x ∈ (2, ∞) (C) x ∈ (– ∞, 2) (D) x ∈ (– ∞, 2]

18/04/18
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 105

x−2
Solution (B) is the correct choice. Since ≥ 0 , for x − 2 ≥ 0, and x – 2 ≠ 0.
x−2
Example 11 The length of a rectangle is three times the breadth. If the minimum
perimeter of the rectangle is 160 cm, then
(A) breadth > 20 cm (B) length < 20 cm
(C) breadth x ≥ 20 cm (D) length ≤ 20 cm
Solution (C) is the correct choice. If x cm is the breadth, then
2 (3x + x) ≥ 160 ⇒ x ≥ 20
Example 12 Solutions of the inequalities comprising a system in variable x are
represented on number lines as given below, then

Fig 6.2
(A) x ∈ (– ∞, – 4] ∪ [3, ∞) (B) x ∈ [– 3, 1]
(C) x ∈ (– ∞, – 4) ∪ [3, ∞) (D) x ∈ [– 4, 3]
Solution (A) is the correct choice
Common solution of the inequalities is from – ∞ to – 4 and 3 to ∞.

Example 13 If x + 3 ≥ 10 , then
(A) x ∈ (– 13, 7] (B) x ∈ (– 13, 7]
(C) x ∈ (– ∞, – 13] ∪ [7, ∞) (D) x ∈ [– ∞, – 13] ∪ [7, ∞)
Solution (D) is the correct choice, since x + 3 ≥ 10 , ⇒ x + 3 ≤ – 10 or x + 3 ≥ 10
⇒ x ≤ – 13 or x ≥ 7
⇒ x ∈ (– ∞, – 13] ∪ [7, ∞)
Example 14 State whether the following statements are True or False.
(i) If x > y and b < 0, then bx < by
(ii) If xy > 0, then x > 0, and y < 0
(iii) If xy < 0, then x > 0, and y > 0
(iv) If x > 5 and x > 2, then x ∈ (5, ∞)
(v) If | x | < 5, then x ∈ (– 5, 5)
(vi) Graph of x > – 2 is
(vii) Solution set of x – y ≤ 0 is Fig 6.3

18/04/18
 106 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Solution
(i) True, because the sign of inequality is reversed
when we multiply both sides of an inequality by a
negative quantity.
(ii) False, product of two numbers is positive if they
have the same sign.
(iii) False, product of two numbers is negative if they
have opposite signs.
(iv) True Fig 6.4
(v) True if | x | < 5 ⇒ – 5 < x < 5 ⇒ x ∈ (– 5, 5).
(vi) False, because for x > – 2, the line x = –2 has to be dotted, i.e., the region does
not include the points on the line x = –2
(vii) False, because (1, 0) does not satisfy the given inequality and it is a point in
shaded portion.
Example 15 Fill in the blanks in the following:
(i) If x ≥ – 3, then x + 5 ................... 2
(ii) If – x ≤ – 4, then 2x ................... 8
1
(iii) If < 0, then x ................... 2
x−2

a b
(iv) If a < b and c < 0, then ............
c c
(v) If x −1 ≤ 2 , then – 1..... x .... 3

5
(vi) If |3x – 7| > 2, then x .... or x ....3
3
(vii) If p > 0 and q < 0, then p + q ... p
Solution
(i) (≥), because same number can be added to both sides of inequality without
changing the sign of inequality.
(ii) (≥), after multiplying both sides by – 2, the sign of inequality is reversed.
a
(iii) (<), because if < 0 and a > 0, then b < 0.
b
(iv) (>), if both sides are divided by the same negative quantity, then the sign of
inequality is reversed.

18/04/18
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 107

(v) (≤, ≤ ), x −1 ≤ 2 ⇒ – 2 ≤ x – 1 ≤ 2 ⇒ –1 ≤ x ≤ 3.
(vi) (<, > ), |3x – 7| > 2 ⇒ 3x – 7 < – 2 or 3x – 7 > 2
5
⇒ x< or x > 3
3
(vii) (<), as p is positive and q is negative, therefore, p + q is always smaller than p.

6.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
Solve for x, the inequalities in Exercises 1 to 12.

4 6 x − 2 −1 1 1
1. ≤3≤ , (x > 0) 2. ≤0 3. ≤
x +1 x +1 x−2 –2 x –3 2
2 − 3x
4. x −1 ≤ 5, x ≥ 2 5. – 5 ≤ ≤9
4
6. 4x + 3 ≥ 2x + 17, 3x – 5 < – 2.
7. A company manufactures cassettes. Its cost and revenue functions are
C(x) = 26,000 + 30x and R(x) = 43x, respectively, where x is the number of
cassettes produced and sold in a week. How many cassettes must be sold by
the company to realise some profit?
8. The water acidity in a pool is considerd normal when the average pH reading of
three daily measurements is between 8.2 and 8.5. If the first two pH readings
are 8.48 and 8.35, find the range of pH value for the third reading that will result
in the acidity level being normal.
9. A solution of 9% acid is to be diluted by adding 3% acid solution to it. The
resulting mixture is to be more than 5% but less than 7% acid. If there is 460
litres of the 9% solution, how many litres of 3% solution will have to be added?
10. A solution is to be kept between 40°C and 45°C. What is the range of temperature
9
in degree fahrenheit, if the conversion formula is F = C + 32?
5
11. The longest side of a triangle is twice the shortest side and the third side is 2cm
longer than the shortest side. If the perimeter of the triangle is more than
166 cm then find the minimum length of the shortest side.
12. In drilling world’s deepest hole it was found that the temperature T in degree
celcius, x km below the earth’s surface was given by T = 30 + 25 (x – 3),
3 ≤ x ≤ 15. At what depth will the temperature be between 155°C and 205°C?

18/04/18
 108 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Long Answer Type

2 x +1 x+7
13. Solve the following system of inequalities >5, >2
7 x −1 x −8
14. Find the linear inequalities for which the shaded region in the given figure is the
solution set.

Fig 6.5
15. Find the linear inequalities for which the shaded region in the given figure is the
solution set.

Fig 6.6
16. Show that the following system of linear inequalities has no solution
x + 2y ≤ 3, 3x + 4y ≥ 12, x ≥ 0, y ≥ 1

18/04/18
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 109

17. Solve the following system of linear inequalities:

3x + 2y ≥ 24, 3x + y ≤ 15, x ≥ 4
18. Show that the solution set of the following system of linear inequalities is an
unbounded region
2x + y ≥ 8, x + 2y ≥ 10, x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0

Objective Type Question

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Exercises 19 to
26 (M.C.Q.).
19. If x < 5, then
(A) – x < – 5 (B) – x ≤ – 5
(C) – x > – 5 (D) – x ≥ – 5
20. Given that x, y and b are real numbers and x < y, b < 0, then
x y x y
(A) < (B) ≤
b b b b
x y x y
(C) > (D) ≥
b b b b
21. If – 3x + 17 < – 13, then
(A) x ∈ (10, ∞) (B) x ∈ [10, ∞)
(C) x ∈ (– ∞, 10] (D) x ∈ [– 10, 10)
22. If x is a real number and | x | < 3, then
(A) x ≥ 3 (B) – 3 < x < 3
(C) x ≤ – 3 (D) – 3 ≤ x ≤ 3
23. x and b are real numbers. If b > 0 and | x | > b, then
(A) x ∈ (– b, ∞) (B) x ∈ [– ∞, b)
(C) x ∈ (– b, b) (D) x ∈ (– ∞, – b) ∪ (b, ∞)
24. If x − 1 > 5, then
(A) x ∈ (– 4, 6) (B) x ∈ [– 4, 6]
(C) x ∈ [– ∞, – 4) ∪ (6, ∞) (D) x ∈ [– ∞, – 4) ∪ [6, ∞)
25. If x + 2 ≤ 9, then
(A) x ∈ (– 7, 11) (B) x ∈ [– 11, 7]
(C) x ∈ (– ∞, – 7) ∪ (11, ∞) (D) x ∈ (– ∞, – 7) ∪ [11, ∞)

18/04/18
 110 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

26. The inequality representing the following graph is:

Fig 6.7
(A) | x | < 5 (B) | x | ≤ 5 (C) | x | > 5 (D) | x | ≥ 5
Solution of a linear inequality in variable x is represented on number line in Exercises
27 to 30. Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the
exercises (M.C.Q.).
27. (A) x ∈ (– ∞, 5) (B) x ∈ (– ∞, 5]
(C) x ∈ [5, ∞,) (D) x ∈ (5, ∞) Fig 6.8
9
28. (A) x ∈ ( , ∞)
2
9
(B) x ∈ [ , ∞)
2 9
9
(D) x ∈ [– ∞, ) 2
2 Fig 6.9
9
(D) x ∈ (– ∞, ]
2
7 7 7
29. (A) x ∈ (– ∞, ) (B) x ∈ (– ∞, ] 2
2 2
Fig 6.10
7 7
(C) x ∈ [ , – ∞) (D) x ∈ ( , ∞)
2 2
30. (A) x ∈ (– ∞, – 2)
(B) x ∈ (– ∞, – 2] –2
(C) x ∈ (– 2, ∞]
Fig 6.11
(D) x ∈ [– 2, ∞)

18/04/18
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 111

31. State which of the following statements is True or False

x y
(i) If x < y and b < 0, then < .
b b
(ii) If xy > 0, then x > 0 and y < 0
(iii) If xy > 0, then x < 0 and y < 0
(iv) If xy < 0, then x < 0 and y < 0
(v) If x < –5 and x < –2, then x ∈ (– ∞, – 5)
(vi) If x < –5 and x > 2, then x ∈ (– 5, 2)
(vii) If x > –2 and x < 9, then x ∈ (– 2, 9)
(viii) If | x| > 5, then x ∈ (– ∞, – 5) ∪ [5, ∞)
(ix) If | x| ≤ 4, then x ∈ [– 4, 4]
(x) Graph of x < 3 is

Fig 6.12
(xi) Graph of x ≥ 0 is

Fig 6.13

18/04/18
112 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(xii) Graph of y ≤ 0 is

Fig 6.14
(xiii) Solution set of x ≥ 0 and y ≤ 0 is

Fig 6.15
(xiv) Solution set of x ≥ 0 and y ≤ 1 is

Fig 6.16

18/04/18
 LINEAR INEQUALITIES 113

(xv) Solution set of x + y ≥ 0 is

Fig 6.17
32. Fill in the blanks of the following:
(i) If – 4x ≥ 12, then x ... – 3.
−3
(ii) If x ≤ – 3, then x ... 4.
4
2
(iii) If x + 2 > 0, then x ... –2.
(iv) If x > – 5, then 4x ... –20.
(v) If x > y and z < 0, then – xz ... – yz.
(vi) If p > 0 and q < 0, then p – q ... p.

(vii) If x + 2 > 5, then x ... – 7 or x ... 3.

(viii) If – 2x + 1 ≥ 9, then x ... – 4.

18/04/18
 Chapter 7
PERMUTATIONS AND
COMBINATIONS

7.1 Overview
The study of permutations and combinations is concerned with determining the number
of different ways of arranging and selecting objects out of a given number of objects,
without actually listing them. There are some basic counting techniques which will be
useful in determining the number of different ways of arranging or selecting objects.
The two basic counting principles are given below:
Fundamental principle of counting
7.1.1 Multiplication principle (Fundamental Principle of Counting)
Suppose an event E can occur in m different ways and associated with each way of
occurring of E, another event F can occur in n different ways, then the total number of
occurrence of the two events in the given order is m × n .
7.1.2 Addition principle
If an event E can occur in m ways and another event F can occur in n ways, and
suppose that both can not occur together, then E or F can occur in m + n ways.
7.1.3 Permutations A permutation is an arrangement of objects in a definite order.
7.1.4 Permutation of n different objects The number of permutations of n objects
taken all at a time, denoted by the symbol nPn, is given by
n
Pn = n , ... (1)
where n = n(n – 1) (n – 2) ... 3.2.1, read as factorial n, or n factorial.
The number of permutations of n objects taken r at a time, where 0 < r ≤ n,
denoted by nPr, is given by

n
n
Pr =
n−r

We assume that 0 = 1

18/04/18
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 115

7.1.5 When repetition of objects is allowed The number of permutations of n things

taken all at a time, when repetion of objects is allowed is nn.
The number of permutations of n objects, taken r at a time, when repetition of
objects is allowed, is nr.
7.1.6 Permutations when the objects are not distinct The number of permutations
of n objects of which p1 are of one kind, p2 are of second kind, ..., pk are of kth kind and
n!
the rest if any, are of different kinds is
p1 ! p2 !... pk !
7.1.7 Combinations On many occasions we are not interested in arranging but only
in selecting r objects from given n objects. A combination is a selection of some or all
of a number of different objects where the order of selection is immaterial. The number
of selections of r objects from the given n objects is denoted by nCr , and is given by
n!
n
Cr =
r !( n − r )!
Remarks
1. Use permutations if a problem calls for the number of arrangements of objects
and different orders are to be counted.
2. Use combinations if a problem calls for the number of ways of selecting objects
and the order of selection is not to be counted.
7.1.8 Some important results
Let n and r be positive integers such that r ≤ n. Then
(i) nCr = nCn – r
(ii) nCr + nCr – 1 = n + 1Cr
(iii) n n – 1Cr – 1 = (n – r + 1) n Cr – 1

7.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type
Example 1 In a class, there are 27 boys and 14 girls. The teacher wants to select 1
boy and 1 girl to represent the class for a function. In how many ways can the teacher
make this selection?
Solution Here the teacher is to perform two operations:
(i) Selecting a boy from among the 27 boys and
(ii) Selecting a girl from among 14 girls.

18/04/18
 116 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

The first of these can be done in 27 ways and second can be performed in
14 ways. By the fundamental principle of counting, the required number of ways is
27 × 14 = 378.
Example 2
(i) How many numbers are there between 99 and 1000 having 7 in the units place?
(ii) How many numbers are there between 99 and 1000 having atleast one of their
digits 7?
Solution
(i) First note that all these numbers have three digits. 7 is in the unit’s place. The
middle digit can be any one of the 10 digits from 0 to 9. The digit in hundred’s
place can be any one of the 9 digits from 1 to 9. Therefore, by the fundamental
principle of counting, there are 10 × 9 = 90 numbers between 99 and 1000 having
7 in the unit’s place.
(ii) Total number of 3 digit numbers having atleast one of their digits as 7 = (Total
numbers of three digit numbers) – (Total number of 3 digit numbers in which 7
does not appear at all).
= (9 × 10 × 10) – (8 × 9 × 9)
= 900 – 648 = 252.
Example 3 In how many ways can this diagram be coloured subject to the following
two conditions?
(i) Each of the smaller triangle is to be painted with one of three colours: red, blue or
green.
(ii) No two adjacent regions have the same colour.

Solution These conditions are satisfied exactly when we do as follows: First paint the
central triangle in any one of the three colours. Next paint the remaining 3 triangles,
with any one of the remaining two colours.
By the fundamental principle of counting, this can be done in 3 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 24 ways.

18/04/18
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 117

Example 4 In how many ways can 5 children be arranged in a line such that (i) two
particular children of them are always together (ii) two particular children of them are
never together.
Solution
(i) We consider the arrangements by taking 2 particular children together as one
and hence the remaining 4 can be arranged in 4! = 24 ways. Again two particular
children taken together can be arranged in two ways. Therefore, there are
24 × 2 = 48 total ways of arrangement.
(ii) Among the 5! = 120 permutations of 5 children, there are 48 in which two children
are together. In the remaining 120 – 48 = 72 permutations, two particular children
are never together.
Example 5 If all permutations of the letters of the word AGAIN are arranged in the
order as in a dictionary. What is the 49th word?
Solution Starting with letter A, and arranging the other four letters, there are 4! = 24
words. These are the first 24 words. Then starting with G, and arranging A, A, I and N
4!
in different ways, there are = 12 words. Next the 37th word starts with I.
2!1!1!
There are again 12 words starting with I. This accounts up to the 48 th word.
The 49th word is NAAGI.
Example 6 In how many ways 3 mathematics books, 4 history books, 3 chemistry
books and 2 biology books can be arranged on a shelf so that all books of the same
subjects are together.
Solution First we take books of a particular subject as one unit. Thus there are
4 units which can be arranged in 4! = 24 ways. Now in each of arrangements,
mathematics books can be arranged in 3! ways, history books in 4! ways,
chemistry books in 3! ways and biology books in 2! ways. Thus the total number
of ways = 4! × 3! × 4! × 3! × 2! = 41472.
Example 7 A student has to answer 10 questions, choosing atleast 4 from each of
Parts A and B. If there are 6 questions in Part A and 7 in Part B, in how many ways
can the student choose 10 questions?
Solution The possibilities are:
4 from Part A and 6 from Part B
or 5 from Part A and 5 from Part B
or 6 from Part A and 4 from Part B.
Therefore, the required number of ways is

18/04/18
 118 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

6
C4 × 7C6 + 6C5 × 7C5 + 6C6 × 7C4
= 105 + 126 + 35 = 266.

Long Answer Type

Example 8 Suppose m men and n women are to be seated in a row so that no two
women sit together. If m > n, show that the number of ways in which they can be
seated is
m!( m + 1)!
(m − n + 1)!
Solution Let the men take their seats first. They can be seated in mPm ways as shown
in the following figure
M M ... M
st nd
1 2 mth
From the above figure, we observe, that there are (m + 1) places for n women.
It is given that m > n and no two women can sit together. Therefore, n women can
take their seats (m + 1)Pn ways and hence the total number of ways so that no two
women sit together is
m!( m + 1)!
(mPm) × (m + 1Pn) =
(m − n + 1)!
Example 9 Three married couples are to be seated in a row having six seats in a
cinema hall. If spouses are to be seated next to each other, in how many ways can they
be seated? Find also the number of ways of their seating if all the ladies sit together.
Solution Let us denote married couples by S1, S2, S3, where each couple is considered
to be a single unit as shown in the following figure:

1 st 2 nd 3rd
Then the number of ways in which spouces can be seated next to each other is
3! = 6 ways.
Again each couple can be seated in 2! ways. Thus the total number of seating
arrangement so that spouces sit next to each other = 3! × 2! × 2! × 2! = 48.
Again, if three ladies sit together, then necessarily three men must sit together.
Thus, ladies and men can be arranged altogether among themselves in 2! ways.
Therefore, the total number of ways where ladies sit together is 3! × 3! × 2! = 144.

18/04/18
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 119

Example 10 In a small village, there are 87 families, of which 52 families have atmost
2 children. In a rural development programme 20 families are to be chosen for assistance,
of which atleast 18 families must have at most 2 children. In how many ways can the
choice be made?
Solution It is given that out of 87 families, 52 families have at most 2 children so other
35 families are of other type. According to the question, for rural development
programme, 20 families are to be chosen for assistance, of which at least 18 families
must have atmost 2 children. Thus, the following are the number of possible choices:
52 35
C 18 × C 2 (18 families having atmost 2 children and 2 selected from other type
of families)
52 35
C 19 × C 1 (19 families having at most 2 children and 1 selected from other type
of families)
52
C 20 (All selected 20 families having atmost 2 children)
Hence, the total number of possible choices is
52
C18 × 35C2 + 52C19 × 35C1 + 52C20
Example 11 A boy has 3 library tickets and 8 books of his interest in the library. Of
these 8, he does not want to borrow Mathematics Part II, unless Mathematics Part I is
also borrowed. In how many ways can he choose the three books to be borrowed?
Solution Let us make the following cases:
Case (i) Boy borrows Mathematics Part II, then he borrows Mathematics Part I also.
So the number of possible choices is 6C1 = 6.
Case (ii) Boy does not borrow Mathematics Part II, then the number of possible
choices is 7C3 = 35.
Hence, the total number of possible choices is 35 + 6 = 41.
Example 12 Find the number of permutations of n different things taken r at a time
such that two specific things occur together.
Solution A bundle of 2 specific things can be put in r places in (r – 1) ways (Why?)
and 2 things in the bundle can be arranged themselves into 2 ways. Now (n – 2)
things will be arranged in (r – 2) places in n –2Pr –2 ways.
Thus, using the fundamental principle of counting, the required numer of
permutations will be 2 ⋅ ( r − 1) ⋅ n − 2 Pr − 2 .

18/04/18
 120 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of four options given against each of the following
Examples (M.C.Q.).
Example 13 There are four bus routes between A and B; and three bus routes
between B and C. A man can travel round-trip in number of ways by bus from A to C
via B. If he does not want to use a bus route more than once, in how many ways can
he make round trip?
(A) 72 (B) 144 (C) 14 (D) 19
Solution (A) is the correct answer. In the following figure:

A B C

there are 4 bus routes from A to B and 3 routes from B to C. Therefore, there are
4 × 3 = 12 ways to go from A to C. It is round trip so the man will travel back from C
to A via B. It is restricted that man can not use same bus routes from C to B and B to
A more than once. Thus, there are 2 × 3 = 6 routes for return journey. Therefore, the
required number of ways = 12 × 6 = 72.
Example 14 In how many ways a committee consisting of 3 men and 2 women, can
be chosen from 7 men and 5 women?
(A) 45 (B) 350 (C) 4200 (D) 230
Solution (B) is the correct choice. Out of 7 men, 3 men can be chosen in 7C 3
ways and out of 5 women, 2 women can be chosen in 5C2 ways. Hence, the
committee can be chosen in 7C3 × 5C2 = 350 ways.
Example 15 All the letters of the word ‘EAMCOT’ are arranged in different possible
ways. The number of such arrangements in which no two vowels are adjacent to each
other is
(A) 360 (B) 144 (C) 72 (D) 54
Solution (B) is the correct choice. We note that there are 3 consonants and 3
vowels E, A and O. Since no two vowels have to be together, the possible choice for
vowels are the places marked as ‘X’. X M X C X T X, these volwels can be arranged
in 4P3 ways 3 consonents can be arranged in 3 ways. Hence, the required number of
ways = 3! × 4P3 = 144.
Example 16 Ten different letters of alphabet are given. Words with five letters are
formed from these given letters. Then the number of words which have atleast one
letter repeated is

18/04/18
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 121

(A) 69760 (B) 30240 (C) 99748 (D) 99784

Solution (A) is correct choice. Number of 5 letters words (with the condition that a
letter can be repeated) = 105. Again number of words using 5 different letters is 10P5.
Therefore, required number of letters
= Total number of words – Total number of words in which no letter is repeated
= 105 – 10P5 = 69760.
Example 17 The number of signals that can be sent by 6 flags of different colours
taking one or more at a time is
(A) 63 (B) 1956 (C) 720 (D) 21
Solution The correct answer is B.
Number of signals using one flag = 6P1 = 6
Number of signals using two flags = 6P2 = 30
Number of signals using three flags = 6P3 = 120
Number of signals using four flags = 6P4 = 360
Number of signals using five flags = 6P5 = 720
Number of signals using all six flags = 6P6 = 720
Therefore, the total number of signals using one or more flags at a time is
6 + 30 + 120 + 360 + 720 + 720 = 1956 (Using addition principle).
Example 18 In an examination there are three multiple choice questions and each
question has 4 choices. Number of ways in which a student can fail to get all answer
correct is
(A) 11 (B) 12 (C) 27 (D) 63
Solution The correct choice is (D). There are three multiple choice question, each
has four possible answers. Therefore, the total number of possible answers will be
4 × 4 × 4 = 64. Out of these possible answer only one will be correct and hence the
number of ways in which a student can fail to get correct answer is 64 – 1 = 63.
Example 19 The straight lines l1, l2 and l3 are parallel and lie in the same plane. A
total numbers of m points are taken on l1; n points on l2, k points on l3. The maximum
number of triangles formed with vertices at these points are
(A) (m + n + k)C3 (B) (m + n + k)C3 – mC3 – nC3 – kC3
(C) mC3 + nC3 + kC3 (D) mC3 × nC3 × kC3
Solution (B) is the correct answer. Here the total number of points are (m + n + k)
which must give (m + n + k)C3 number of triangles but m points on l1 taking 3 points at a
time gives mC3 combinations which produce no triangle. Similarly, nC3 and kC 3

18/04/18
 122 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

number of triangles can not be formed. Therefore, the required number of triangles is
(m + n + k)
C3 – mC3 – nC3 – kC3.

7.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
1. Eight chairs are numbered 1 to 8. Two women and 3 men wish to occupy one
chair each. First the women choose the chairs from amongst the chairs 1 to 4
and then men select from the remaining chairs. Find the total number of possible
arrangements.
[Hint: 2 women occupy the chair, from 1 to 4 in 4P2 ways and 3 men occupy the
remaining chairs in 6P3 ways.]
2. If the letters of the word RACHIT are arranged in all possible ways as listed in
dictionary. Then what is the rank of the word RACHIT ?
[Hint: In each case number of words beginning with A, C, H, I is 5!]
3. A candidate is required to answer 7 questions out of 12 questions, which are
divided into two groups, each containing 6 questions. He is not permitted to
attempt more than 5 questions from either group. Find the number of different
ways of doing questions.
4. Out of 18 points in a plane, no three are in the same line except five points which
are collinear. Find the number of lines that can be formed joining the point.
[Hint: Number of straight lines = 18C2 – 5C2 + 1.]
5. We wish to select 6 persons from 8, but if the person A is chosen, then B must be
chosen. In how many ways can selections be made?
6. How many committee of five persons with a chairperson can be selected from
12 persons.
[Hint: Chairman can be selected in 12 ways and remaining in 11C4.]
7. How many automobile license plates can be made if each plate contains two
different letters followed by three different digits?
8. A bag contains 5 black and 6 red balls. Determine the number of ways in which
2 black and 3 red balls can be selected from the lot.
9. Find the number of permutations of n distinct things taken r together, in which 3
particular things must occur together.
10. Find the number of different words that can be formed from the letters of the
word ‘TRIANGLE’ so that no vowels are together.
11. Find the number of positive integers greater than 6000 and less than 7000 which
are divisible by 5, provided that no digit is to be repeated.

18/04/18
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 123

12. There are 10 persons named P1, P2, P3, ... P10. Out of 10 persons, 5 persons are
to be arranged in a line such that in each arrangement P1 must occur whereas P4
and P5 do not occur. Find the number of such possible arrangements.
[Hint: Required number of arrangement = 7C4 × 5!]
13. There are 10 lamps in a hall. Each one of them can be switched on independently.
Find the number of ways in which the hall can be illuminated.
[Hint: Required number = 210 – 1].
14. A box contains two white, three black and four red balls. In how many ways
can three balls be drawn from the box, if atleast one black ball is to be included
in the draw.
[Hint: Required number of ways = 3C1 × 6C2 + 3C2 × 6C2 + 3C3.]
15. If nCr – 1 = 36, nCr = 84 and nCr + 1 = 126, then find rC2.
n n
Cr Cr
[Hint: Form equation using n and n to find the value of r.]
Cr +1 C r –1
16. Find the number of integers greater than 7000 that can be formed with the digits
3, 5, 7, 8 and 9 where no digits are repeated.
[Hint: Besides 4 digit integers greater than 7000, five digit integers are always
greater than 7000.]
17. If 20 lines are drawn in a plane such that no two of them are parallel and no three
are concurrent, in how many points will they intersect each other?
18. In a certain city, all telephone numbers have six digits, the first two digits always
being 41 or 42 or 46 or 62 or 64. How many telephone numbers have all six digits
distinct?
19. In an examination, a student has to answer 4 questions out of 5 questions; questions
1 and 2 are however compulsory. Determine the number of ways in which the
student can make the choice.
20. A convex polygon has 44 diagonals. Find the number of its sides.
[Hint: Polygon of n sides has (nC2 – n) number of diagonals.]

Long Answer Type Questions

21. 18 mice were placed in two experimental groups and one control group, with all
groups equally large. In how many ways can the mice be placed into three
groups?
22. A bag contains six white marbles and five red marbles. Find the number of ways
in which four marbles can be drawn from the bag if (a) they can be of any colour
(b) two must be white and two red and (c) they must all be of the same colour.

18/04/18
 124 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

23. In how many ways can a football team of 11 players be selected from 16 players?
How many of them will
(i) include 2 particular players?
(ii) exclude 2 particular players?
24. A sports team of 11 students is to be constituted, choosing at least 5 from Class
XI and atleast 5 from Class XII. If there are 20 students in each of these classes,
in how many ways can the team be constituted?
25. A group consists of 4 girls and 7 boys. In how many ways can a team of 5
members be selected if the team has
(i) no girls
(ii) at least one boy and one girl
(iii) at least three girls.

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of the given four options against each of the Exercises
from 26 to 40 (M.C.Q.).
26. If nC12 = nC8, then n is equal to
(A) 20 (B) 12 (C) 6 (D) 30
27. The number of possible outcomes when a coin is tossed 6 times is
(A) 36 (B) 64 (C) 12 (D) 32
28. The number of different four digit numbers that can be formed with the digits 2,
3, 4, 7 and using each digit only once is
(A) 120 (B) 96 (C) 24 (D) 100
29. The sum of the digits in unit place of all the numbers formed with the help of 3,
4, 5 and 6 taken all at a time is
(A) 432 (B) 108 (C) 36 (D) 18
30. Total number of words formed by 2 vowels and 3 consonants taken from 4
vowels and 5 consonants is equal to
(A) 60 (B) 120 (C) 7200 (D) 720
31. A five digit number divisible by 3 is to be formed using the numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
and 5 without repetitions. The total number of ways this can be done is
(A) 216 (B) 600 (C) 240 (D) 3125
[Hint: 5 digit numbers can be formed using digits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5 or by using digits 1,
2, 3, 4, 5 since sum of digits in these cases is divisible by 3.]

18/04/18
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 125

32. Every body in a room shakes hands with everybody else. The total number of
hand shakes is 66. The total number of persons in the room is
(A) 11 (B) 12 (C) 13 (D) 14
33. The number of triangles that are formed by choosing the vertices from a set of
12 points, seven of which lie on the same line is
(A) 105 (B) 15 (C) 175 (D) 185
34. The number of parallelograms that can be formed from a set of four parallel
lines intersecting another set of three parallel lines is
(A) 6 (B) 18 (C) 12 (D) 9
35. The number of ways in which a team of eleven players can be selected from 22
players always including 2 of them and excluding 4 of them is
(A) 16 C 11 (B) 16 C 5 (C) 16 C 9 (D) 20 C 9
36. The number of 5-digit telephone numbers having atleast one of their digits repeated is
(A) 90,000 (B) 10,000 (C) 30,240 (D) 69,760
37. The number of ways in which we can choose a committee from four men and six
women so that the committee includes at least two men and exactly twice as many
women as men is
(A) 94 (B) 126 (C) 128 (D) None
38. The total number of 9 digit numbers which have all different digits is
(A) 10! (B) 9 ! (C) 9 × 9! (D) 10×10!
39. The number of words which can be formed out of the letters of the word
ARTICLE, so that vowels occupy the even place is
(A) 1440 (B) 144
(C) 7! (D) 4C4 × 3C3
40. Given 5 different green dyes, four different blue dyes and three different red
dyes, the number of combinations of dyes which can be chosen taking at least
one green and one blue dye is
(A) 3600 (B) 3720 (C) 3800 (D) 3600
[Hint: Possible numbers of choosing or not choosing 5 green dyes, 4 blue dyes
and 3 red dyes are 25, 24 and 23, respectively.]
Fill in the Blanks in the Exercises 41 to 50.
41. If nPr = 840, nCr = 35, then r = ______.
42. 15C8 + 15C9 – 15C6 – 15C7 = ______.
43. The number of permutations of n different objects, taken r at a line, when
repetitions are allowed, is ______.

18/04/18
 126 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

44. The number of different words that can be formed from the letters of the word
INTERMEDIATE such that two vowels never come together is ______.
6!
[Hint: Number of ways of arranging 6 consonants of which two are alike is
2!
7 1 1
and number of ways of arranging vowels = P6 × × .]
3! 2!
45. Three balls are drawn from a bag containing 5 red, 4 white and 3 black balls.
The number of ways in which this can be done if at least 2 are red is ______
46. The number of six-digit numbers, all digits of which are odd is ______.
47. In a football championship, 153 matches were played . Every two teams played
one match with each other. The number of teams, participating in the championship
is ______.
48. The total number of ways in which six ‘+’ and four ‘–’ signs can be arranged in
a line such that no two signs ‘–’ occur together is ______.
49. A committee of 6 is to be chosen from 10 men and 7 women so as to contain
atleast 3 men and 2 women. In how many different ways can this be done if two
particular women refuse to serve on the same committee.
[Hint:At least 3 men and 2 women: The number of ways = 10C3 × 7C3 + 10C4 × 7C2.
For 2 particular women to be always there: the number of ways = 10C4 + 10C3 × 5C1 .
The total number of committees when two particular women are never together
= Total – together.]
50. A box contains 2 white balls, 3 black balls and 4 red balls. The number of ways
three balls be drawn from the box if at least one black ball is to be included in the
draw is ______.
State whether the statements in Exercises from 51 to 59 True or False? Also give
justification.
51. There are 12 points in a plane of which 5 points are collinear, then the number of
lines obtained by joining these points in pairs is 12C2 – 5C2.
52. Three letters can be posted in five letterboxes in 35 ways.
53. In the permutations of n things, r taken together, the number of permutations in
which m particular things occur together is n–mPr–m × rPm.
54. In a steamer there are stalls for 12 animals, and there are horses, cows and
calves (not less than 12 each) ready to be shipped. They can be loaded in 312
ways.
55. If some or all of n objects are taken at a time, the number of combinations
is 2n–1.

18/04/18
 PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS 127

56. There will be only 24 selections containing at least one red ball out of a bag
containing 4 red and 5 black balls. It is being given that the balls of the same
colour are identical.
57. Eighteen guests are to be seated, half on each side of a long table. Four
particular guests desire to sit on one particular side and three others on other
side of the table. The number of ways in which the seating arrangements
11!
can be made is (9!) (9!) .
5!6!
[Hint: After sending 4 on one side and 3 on the other side, we have to select out
of 11; 5 on one side and 6 on the other. Now there are 9 on each side of the long
table and each can be arranged in 9! ways.]
58. A candidate is required to answer 7 questions out of 12 questions which are
divided into two groups, each containing 6 questions. He is not permitted to
attempt more than 5 questions from either group. He can choose the seven
questions in 650 ways.
59. To fill 12 vacancies there are 25 candidates of which 5 are from scheduled
castes. If 3 of the vacancies are reserved for scheduled caste candidates while
the rest are open to all, the number of ways in which the selection can be made
is 5C3 × 20C9.
In each if the Exercises from 60 to 64 match each item given under the column C1 to
its correct answer given under the column C2.
60. There are 3 books on Mathematics, 4 on Physics and 5 on English. How many
different collections can be made such that each collection consists of :
C1 C2
(a) One book of each subject; (i) 3968
(b) At least one book of each subject : (ii) 60
(c) At least one book of English: (iii) 3255
61. Five boys and five girls form a line. Find the number of ways of making the
seating arrangement under the following condition:
C1 C2
(a) Boys and girls alternate: (i) 5! × 6!
(b) No two girls sit together : (ii) 10 ! – 5 ! 6 !
(c) All the girls sit together (iii) (5!)2 + (5!)2
(d) All the girls are never together : (iv) 2!5!5!

18/04/18
128 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

62. There are 10 professors and 20 lecturers out of whom a committee of 2 professors
and 3 lecturer is to be formed. Find :
C1 C2
(a) In how many ways committee : (i) 10C 2 × 19C3
can be formed
(b) In how many ways a particular : (ii) 10C 2 × 19C2
professor is included
(c) In how many ways a particular : (iii) 9C1 × 20C3
lecturer is included
(d) In how many ways a particular : (iv) 10C 2 × 20C3
lecturer is excluded
63. Using the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, a number of 4 different digits is formed. Find
C1 C2
(a) how many numbers are formed? (i) 840
(b) how many numbers are exactly (ii) 200
divisible by 2?
(c) how many numbers are exactly (iii) 360
divisible by 25?
(d) how many of these are exactly (iv) 40
divisble by 4?
64. How many words (with or without dictionary meaning) can be made from the
letters of the word MONDAY, assuming that no letter is repeated, if
C1 C2
(a) 4 letters are used at a time (i) 720
(b) All letters are used at a time (ii) 240
(c) All letters are used but the (iii) 360
first is a vowel

18/04/18
 Chapter 8
BINOMIAL THEOREM

8.1 Overview:
8.1.1 An expression consisting of two terms, connected by + or – sign is called a
1 1 4
binomial expression. For example, x + a, 2x – 3y, − 3 , 7x − , etc., are all binomial
x x 5y
expressions.
8.1.2 Binomial theorem
If a and b are real numbers and n is a positive integer, then
(a + b)n =nC0 an + nC1 an – 1 b1 + nC2 an – 2 b2 + ...
n
... + nCr an – r br + ... + nCn bn, where nCr = for 0 ≤ r ≤ n
r n−r

The general term or (r + 1)th term in the expansion is given by

Tr + 1 = nCr an–r br
8.1.3 Some important observations
1. The total number of terms in the binomial expansion of (a + b)n is n + 1, i.e. one
more than the exponent n.
2. In the expansion, the first term is raised to the power of the binomial and in each
subsequent terms the power of a reduces by one with simultaneous increase in
the power of b by one, till power of b becomes equal to the power of binomial,
i.e., the power of a is n in the first term, (n – 1) in the second term and so on
ending with zero in the last term. At the same time power of b is 0 in the first
term, 1 in the second term and 2 in the third term and so on, ending with n in the
last term.
3. In any term the sum of the indices (exponents) of ‘a’ and ‘b’ is equal to n (i.e.,
the power of the binomial).
4. The coefficients in the expansion follow a certain pattern known as pascal’s
triangle.

18/04/18
 130 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Index of Binomial Coefficient of various terms

0 1
1 1 1
2 1 2 1
3 1 3 3 1
4 1 4 6 4 1
5 1 5 10 10 5 1

Each coefficient of any row is obtained by adding two coefficients in the preceding
row, one on the immediate left and the other on the immediate right and each row is
bounded by 1 on both sides.
The (r + 1)th term or general term is given by
Tr + 1 = n
C r an – r br

8.1.4 Some particular cases

If n is a positive integer, then
(a + b)n = nC0 an b0 + nC1 an b1 + nC2 an – 2 b2 + ... + nCr an – r br + ... +
n
C n a0 bn ... (1)
In particular
1. Replacing b by – b in (i), we get
(a – b)n = nC0 an b0 – nC1 an – 1 b1 + nC2 an – 2 b2 + ... + (–1)r nCr an – r br + ... +
(–1)n nCn a0 bn ... (2)
2. Adding (1) and (2), we get
(a + b)n + (a – b)n = 2 [nC0 an b0 + nC2 an – 2 b2 + nC4 an – 4 b4 + ... ]
= 2 [terms at odd places]
3. Subtracting (2) from (1), we get
(a + b)n – (a – b)n = 2 [nC1 an – 1 b1 + nC3 an – 3 b3 + ... ]
= 2 [sum of terms at even places]
4. Replacing a by 1 and b by x in (1), we get
(1 + x)n =nC0 x0 + nC1 x + nC2 x2 + ... + nCr xr + ... + nCn – 1
xn – 1 + nCn xn
n
n
i.e. (1 + x)n = Cr xr
r=0

18/04/18
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 131

5. Replacing a by 1 and b by –x in ... (1), we get

(1 – x)n = nC0 x0 – nC1 x + nC2 x2 ... + nCn–1 (–1)n–1 xn-1 + nCn (–1)n xn
n
i.e., (1 – x)n = ∑ (−1)r n Cr xr
r =0

8.1.5 The pth term from the end

The pth term from the end in the expansion of (a + b) n is (n – p + 2)th term from the
beginning.

8.1.6 Middle terms

The middle term depends upon the value of n.
(a) If n is even: then the total number of terms in the expansion of (a + b)n is n + 1
th
(odd). Hence, there is only one middle term, i.e.,  + 1 term is the middle
n
2 
term.
(b) If n is odd: then the total number of terms in the expansion of (a + b)n is n + 1
th th
n +1 n+3
(even). So there are two middle terms i.e., and are two
2 2
middle terms.

8.1.7 Binomial coefficient

In the Binomial expression, we have
(a + b)n =nC0 an + nC1 an – 1 b + nC2 an – 2 b2 + ... + nCn bn ... (1)
n n n n
The coefficients C0, C1, C 2, ... , Cn are known as binomial or combinatorial
coefficients.
Putting a = b = 1 in (1), we get
n
C0 + nC1 + nC2 + ... + nCn = 2n
Thus the sum of all the binomial coefficients is equal to 2n.
Again, putting a = 1 and b = –1 in (i), we get
n
C0 + nC2 + nC4 + ... = nC1 + nC3 + nC5 + ...
Thus, the sum of all the odd binomial coefficients is equal to the sum of all the even
2n
binomial coefficients and each is equal to = 2n−1 .
2
n
C0 + nC2 + nC4 + ... = nC1 + nC3 + nC5 + ... = 2n – 1

18/04/18
 132 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

8.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type
2r
 1
Example 1 Find the r term in the expansion of  x +  .
th
 x
r −1
1
Solution We have Tr = 2rCr – 1 (x)2r – r + 1  
x

2r
= xr + 1 – r+1
r −1 r +1

2r
= x2
r −1 r +1

Example 2 Expand the following (1 – x + x2)4

Solution Put 1 – x = y. Then
(1 – x + x2)4 = (y + x2)4
= 4C0 y4 (x2)0 + 4C1 y3 (x2)1
+ 4C2 y2 (x2)2 + 4C3 y (x2)3 + 4C4 (x2)4
= y4 + 4y3 x2 + 6y2 x4 + 4y x6 + x8
= (1 – x)4 + 4x2 (1 – x)3 + 6x4 (1 – x)2 + 4x6 (1 – x) + x8
= 1 – 4x + 10x2 – 16x3 + 19x4 – 16x5 + 10x6 – 4x7 + x8
9
 x3 2 
Example 3 Find the 4th term from the end in the expansion of  − 2 
 2 x 
Solution Since rth term from the end in the expansion of (a + b)n is (n – r + 2)th term
from the beginning. Therefore 4th term from the end is 9 – 4 + 2, i.e., 7th term from the
beginning, which is given by
3
9  x3   −2 6 9 x9 64 9 × 8 × 7 64 672
T7 = C 6    2  = C3 ⋅ 12 = × = 3
 2  x  8 x 3 × 2 × 1 x3 x

4 4
(
Example 4 Evaluate: x 2 − 1 − x 2 ) + (x 2
+ 1 − x2 )

18/04/18
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 133

Solution Putting 1 − x 2 = y , we get

The given expression = (x2 – y)4 + (x2 + y)4 = 2 [x8 + 4C2 x4 y2 + 4C4 y4]

8 4 ×3 4
= 2 x + x ⋅ (1 – x 2 ) + (1 − x 2 ) 2
2 ×1
= 2 [x8 + 6x4 (1 – x2) + (1 – 2x2 + x4]
= 2x8 – 12x6 + 14x4 – 4x2 + 2
12
2
Example 5 Find the coefficient of x11 in the expansion of x3 −
x2
Solution Let the general term, i.e., (r + 1)th contain x11.
r
12 3 12 – r  2 
We have Tr + 1 = Cr (x ) − 2 
 x 
= 12Cr x36 – 3r – 2r (–1)r 2r
= 12Cr (–1)r 2r x36– 5r
Now for this to contain x11, we observe that
36 – 5r = 11, i.e., r = 5
Thus, the coefficient of x11 is
12 × 11 × 10 × 9 × 8
12
C5 (–1)5 25 = − × 32 = –25344
5× 4×3× 2
18
2
Example 6 Determine whether the expansion of x2 − will contain a term
x
containing x10?
Solution Let Tr + 1 contain x10. Then
r
18 2 18 − r −2
Tr + 1 = Cr ( x )
x
= 18Cr x36 – 2r (–1)r . 2r x– r
= (–1)r 2r 18Cr x36 – 3r
26
Thus, 36 – 3r = 10, i.e., r =
3

18/04/18
 134 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Since r is a fraction, the given expansion cannot have a term containing x10.
10
 x 3
Example 7 Find the term independent of x in the expansion of  + 2 .
 3 2x 
Solution Let (r + 1)th term be independent of x which is given by
10 − r r
10 x 3
Tr+1 = Cr
3 2 x2
10 − r
r
10 x 2 1
= Cr 32
3 2 x2r
r

r 10 − r 10 − r
− − 2r
= 10 2 2− r
Cr 32 x 2

Since the term is independent of x, we have

10 − r
− 2r = 0 ⇒ r= 2
2
Hence 3rd term is independent of x and its value is given by

10 3−3 10 × 9 1 5
T3 = C2 = × =
4 2 × 1 9 × 12 12
12
b
Example 8 Find the middle term in the expansion of 2ax − .
x2
Solution Since the power of binomial is even, it has one middle term which is the
th
12 + 2
term and it is given by
2
6
12  −b 
T7 = C6 (2ax) 6  2 
x 

12 26 a 6 x6 ⋅ (−b)6
= C6
x12

12 26 a 6b6 59136a 6b6

= C6 =
x6 x6

18/04/18
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 135

9
p x
Example 9 Find the middle term (terms) in the expansion of  +  .
 x p
Solution Since the power of binomial is odd. Therefore, we have two middle terms
which are 5th and 6th terms. These are given by
5 4
 p  x p 126 p
T5 = 9 C4     = 9 C4 =
 x   p x x

4 5
9  p   x  9 x 126 x
and T6 = C5     = C5 =
 x   p p p
Example 10 Show that 24n + 4 – 15n – 16, where n ∈ N is divisible by 225.
Solution We have
24n + 4 – 15n – 16 = 24 (n + 1) – 15n – 16
= 16n + 1 – 15n – 16
= (1 + 15)n + 1 – 15n – 16
= n + 1C0 150 + n + 1C1 151 + n + 1C2 152 + n + 1C3 153
+ ... + n + 1Cn + 1 (15)n + 1 – 15n – 16
= 1 + (n + 1) 15 + n + 1C2 152 + n + 1C3 153
+ ... + n + 1Cn + 1 (15)n + 1 – 15n – 16
= 1 + 15n + 15 + n + 1C2 152 + n + 1C3 153
+ ... + n + 1Cn + 1 (15)n + 1 – 15n – 16
= 152 [n + 1C2 + n + 1C3 15 + ... so on]
Thus, 24n + 4 – 15n – 16 is divisible by 225.

Long Answer Type

Example 11 Find numerically the greatest term in the expansion of (2 + 3x)9, where
3
x= .
2
9
9 3x 
Solution We have (2 + 3x) = 2  1 + 
9
 2 

18/04/18
 136 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

  3x  
r

Tr + 1 29  9 C r   
  2 
Now, =
Tr 
9 9  3x  
r −1
2  C r −1   
  2 
9 r − 1 10 − r 3 x
Cr 3x 9
= 9 = ⋅
C r −1 2 r 9−r 9 2

10 − r 3x 10 − r 9 3
= =   Since x=
r 2 r 4 2

Tr + 1 90 − 9r
Therefore, ≥1 ⇒ ≥1
Tr 4r
⇒ 90 – 9r ≥ 4r (Why?)
90
⇒r≤
13

12
⇒r≤6
13
Thus the maximum value of r is 6. Therefore, the greatest term is Tr + 1 = T7.


9 9  3x  
6
3
Hence, T7 = 2  6  ,
C where x =
  2   2

9 9×8×7  3  7 × 313
6 12
9 9 9
= 2 ⋅ C 6   =
2 ⋅  =
4 3 × 2 × 1  212  2
Example 12 If n is a positive integer, find the coefficient of x–1 in the expansion of
n
 1
(1 + x)n 1 +  .
 x
Solution We have
n
n
1 n x +1
n
(1 + x) 2 n
(1 + x) 1+ = (1 + x) =
x x xn

18/04/18
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 137

n
–1 n
1
Now to find the coefficient of x in (1 + x) 1+ , it is equivalent to finding
x

(1 + x) 2 n
coefficient of x–1 in which in turn is equal to the coefficient of xn – 1 in the
xn
expansion of (1 + x)2n.
Since (1 + x)2n = 2nC0 x0 + 2nC1 x1 + 2nC2 x2 + ... + 2nCn – 1 xn–1 + ... + 2nC2n x2n
Thus the coefficient of xn – 1 is 2nCn – 1

2n 2n
= =
n − 1 2n − n + 1 n −1 n +1

Example 13 Which of the following is larger?

9950 + 10050 or 10150
We have (101)50 = (100 + 1)50
50.49 50.49.48
= 10050 + 50 (100)49 + (100)48 + (100) 47 + ... (1)
2.1 3.2.1
Similarly 9950 = (100 – 1)50
50.49 50.49.48
= 10050 – 50 . 10049 + (100)48– (100) 47 + ... (2)
2.1 3.2.1
Subtracting (2) from (1), we get

49 50 ⋅ 49 ⋅ 48
10150 – 9950 = 2 50 ⋅ (100) + 10047 + ...
3 ⋅ 2 ⋅1

50 ⋅ 49 ⋅ 48
⇒ 10150 – 9950 = 10050 + 2 10047 + ...
3 ⋅ 2 ⋅1
⇒ 10150 – 9950 > 10050
Hence 10150 >9950 + 10050
Example 14 Find the coefficient of x50 after simplifying and collecting the like terms
in the expansion of (1 + x)1000 + x (1 + x)999 + x2 (1 + x)998 + ... + x1000.
x
Solution Since the above series is a geometric series with the common ratio ,
1+ x
its sum is

18/04/18
 138 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

1001
1000 x
(1 + x) 1−
1+ x
x
1−
1+ x

x 100 1
(1 + x )100 0 −
1+ x
= = (1 + x)1001 – x1001
1+ x − x
1+ x
Hence, coefficient of x50 is given by
1001
1001
C 50 =
50 951
Example 15 If a1, a2, a3 and a4 are the coefficient of any four consecutive terms in
the expansion of (1 + x)n, prove that

a1 a3 2a2
+ =
a1 + a2 a3 + a4 a2 + a3
Solution Let a1, a2, a3 and a4 be the coefficient of four consecutive terms Tr + 1, Tr +
2
, Tr + 3, and Tr + 4 respectively. Then
a1 = coefficient of Tr + 1 = nCr
a2 = coefficient of Tr + 2 = nCr + 1
a3 = coefficient of Tr + 3 = nCr + 2
and a4 = coefficient of Tr + 4 = nCr + 3
n
a1 Cr
Thus = n
a1 + a2 Cr + nCr + 1

n
Cr
= n +1 (∵ Cr + nCr + 1 = n + 1Cr + 1 )
n
Cr + 1

18/04/18
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 139

n r +1 n − r r +1
= × =
r n−r n +1 n +1

n
a3 Cr + 2
Similarly, = n
a3 + a4 Cr + 2 + nCr + 3

n
Cr + 2 r+3
= n +1 =
Cr + 3 n +1

a1 a3 r + 1 r + 3 2r + 4
Hence, L.H.S. = + = + =
a1 + a2 a3 + a4 n + 1 n + 1 n + 1

and R.H.S. =
2a2
=
2 n Cr + 1 (2 n Cr + 1
= n +1
) ( )
a2 + a3 n C r + 1 + n C r + 2 Cr + 2

n r + 2 n − r − 1 2 (r + 2)
= 2 × =
r +1 n − r −1 n+1 n +1
Objective Type Questions (M.C.Q)
Example 16 The total number of terms in the expansion of (x + a)51 – (x – a)51 after
simplification is
(a) 102 (b) 25 (c) 26 (d) None of these
Solution C is the correct choice since the total number of terms are 52 of which 26
terms get cancelled.
n
x
Example 17 If the coefficients of x and x in 2 +
7 8
are equal, then n is
3
(a) 56 (b) 55 (c) 45 (d) 15
n–r r
Solution B is the correct choice. Since Tr + 1 = Cr a x in expansion of (a + x)n,
n

7
n n−7 x n 2n − 7 7
Therefore, T8 = C7 (2)   = C 7 x
3 37

18/04/18
 140 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

8 n −8
x n 2 8
and T9 = n
C8 (2) n–8
  = C8 8 x
3 3

n 2n − 7 n 2n − 8
Therefore, C7 7 = C8 8 (since it is given that coefficient of x7 = coefficient x8)
3 3
n 8 n − 8 2 n − 8 37
⇒ × = ⋅
7 n−7 n 38 2n − 7
8 1
⇒ = ⇒ n = 55
n−7 6
Example 18 If (1 – x + x2)n = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + ... + a2n x2n, then a0 + a2 + a4 + ...
+ a2n equals.

3n + 1 3n − 1 1 − 3n n 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) 3 +
2 2 2 2
Solution A is the correct choice. Putting x = 1 and –1 in
(1 – x + x2)n = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + ... + a2n x2n
we get 1 = a0 + a1 + a2 + a3 + ... + a2n ... (1)
and 3n = a0 – a1 + a2 – a3 + ... + a2n ...
(2)
Adding (1) and (2), we get
3n + 1 = 2 (a0 + a2 + a4 + ... + a2n)

3n + 1
Therefore a0 + a2 + a4 + ... + a2n =
2
Example 19 The coefficient of xp and xq (p and q are positive integers) in the
expansion of (1 + x)p + q are
(A) equal (B) equal with opposite signs
(C) reciprocal of each other (D) none of these
Solution A is the correct choice. Coefficient of xp and xq in the expansion of (1 + x)p
+q
are p + qCp and p + qCq
p+q
p+q
and Cp = p + qCq =
p q
Hence (a) is the correct answer.

18/04/18
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 141

Example 20 The number of terms in the expansion of (a + b + c)n, where n ∈ N is

( n + 1) ( n + 2)
(A) (B) n + 1
2
(C) n + 2 (D) (n + 1) n
Solution A is the correct choice. We have
(a + b + c)n = [a + (b + c)]n
= an + nC1 an – 1 (b + c)1 + nC2 an – 2 (b + c)2
+ ... + nCn (b + c)n
Further, expanding each term of R.H.S., we note that
First term consist of 1 term.
Second term on simplification gives 2 terms.
Third term on expansion gives 3 terms.
Similarly, fourth term on expansion gives 4 terms and so on.
The total number of terms = 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + (n + 1)
( n + 1) ( n + 2)
=
2
Example 21 The ratio of the coefficient of x15 to the term independent of x in
15
2 2
x + is
x
(A) 12:32 (B) 1:32 (C) 32:12 (D) 32:1
15
2 2
Solution (B) is the correct choice. Let Tr + 1 be the general term of x + , so,
x
r
15 2 15 – r 2
Tr + 1 = Cr (x )
x
= 15Cr (2)r x30 – 3r ... (1)
Now, for the coefficient of term containing x15,
30 – 3r = 15, i.e., r = 5
Therefore, C5 (2) is the coefficient of x15 (from (1))
15 5

To find the term independent of x, put 30 – 3r = 0

18/04/18
 142 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Thus 15C10 210 is the term independent of x (from (1))

15
C5 25 1 1
Now the ratio is 15 10
= 5=
C10 2 2 32

5 5
Example 22 If z =
3 i 3 i , then
+ + −
2 2 2 2
(A) Re (z) = 0 (B) Im (z) = 0
(C) Re (z) > 0, Im (z) > 0 (D) Re (z) > 0, Im (z) < 0
Solution B is the correct choice. On simplification, we get
2 3 2 4
5 3 5 3 i 5 3 i
z= 2 C0 + C2 + C4
2 2 2 2 2
Since i2 = –1 and i4 = 1, z will not contain any i and hence Im (z) = 0.

8.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
15
 3x2 1 
1. Find the term independent of x, x ≠ 0, in the expansion of  −  .
 2 3x 
10
k
2. If the term free from x in the expansion of x− is 405, find the value
x2
of k.
3. Find the coefficient of x in the expansion of (1 – 3x + 7x2) (1 – x)16.
15
2
4. Find the term independent of x in the expansion of, 3x − .
x2
5. Find the middle term (terms) in the expansion of
10 9
x a x3
(i) − (ii) 3x −
a x 6

18/04/18
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 143

6. Find the coefficient of x15 in the expansion of (x – x2)10.

15
1 1
7. Find the coefficient of in the expansion of x4 − .
x17 x3

1 n
8. Find the sixth term of the expansion y 2 + x 3 ( 1
) , if the binomial coefficient of

the third term from the end is 45.

[Hint: Binomial coefficient of third term from the end = Binomial coefficient of
third term from beginning = nC2.]
9. Find the value of r, if the coefficients of (2r + 4)th and (r – 2)th terms in the
expansion of (1 + x)18 are equal.
10. If the coefficient of second, third and fourth terms in the expansion of (1 + x)2n
are in A.P. Show that 2n2 – 9n + 7 = 0.
11. Find the coefficient of x4 in the expansion of (1 + x + x2 + x3)11.

Long Answer Type

8
p
12. If p is a real number and if the middle term in the expansion of +2 is
2
1120, find p.
2n
 1
13. Show that the middle term in the expansion of  x −  is
 x
1 × 3 × 5 × ... (2n − 1)
× ( −2)n .
n
n
3 1
14. Find n in the binomial 2+ 3 if the ratio of 7th term from the beginning to
3
1
the 7th term from the end is .
6
15. In the expansion of (x + a)n if the sum of odd terms is denoted by O and the sum of

18/04/18
 144 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

even term by E.
Then prove that
(i) O2 – E2 = (x2 – a2)n (ii) 4OE = (x + a)2n – (x – a)2n
2n
2 1
p
16. If x occurs in the expansion of x + , prove that its coefficient is
x

2n
.
4n − p 2n + p
3 3
9
3 2 1
3
17. Find the term independent of x in the expansion of (1 + x + 2x ) x − .
2 3x
Objective Type Questions
Choose the correct answer from the given options in each of the Exercises 18 to 24
(M.C.Q.).
18. The total number of terms in the expansion of (x + a)100 + (x – a)100 after
simplification is
(A) 50 (B) 202 (C) 51 (D) none of these
19. Given the integers r > 1, n > 2, and coefficients of (3r) and (r + 2)nd terms in
th

the binomial expansion of (1 + x)2n are equal, then

(A) n = 2r (B) n = 3r (C) n = 2r + 1 (D) none of these
20. The two successive terms in the expansion of (1 + x)24 whose coefficients are in
the ratio 1:4 are
(A) 3rd and 4th (B) 4th and 5th (C) 5th and 6th (D) 6th and 7th
24
Cr 1 r +1 1
[Hint: 24
= ⇒ 4r + 4 = 24 – 4 ⇒ r = 4 ]
Cr + 1 4 24 − r 4
21. The coefficient of xn in the expansion of (1 + x)2n and (1 + x)2n – 1 are in the ratio.
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 1 : 3 (C) 3 : 1 (D) 2 : 1
[Hint : 2nCn : 2n – 1Cn
22. If the coefficients of 2nd, 3rd and the 4th terms in the expansion of (1 + x)n are in
A.P., then value of n is
(A) 2 (B) 7 (c) 11 (D) 14
n n n 2
[Hint: 2 C2 = C1 + C3 ⇒ n – 9n + 14 = 0 ⇒ n = 2 or 7

18/04/18
 BINOMIAL THEOREM 145

23. If A and B are coefficient of xn in the expansions of (1 + x)2n and (1 + x)2n – 1

A
respectively, then equals
B
1 1
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) (D)
2 n
2n
A Cn
[Hint: = 2n −1
=2]
B Cn

10
1 7
24. If the middle term of + x sin x is equal to 7 , then value of x is
x 8
π π π π
(A) 2nπ + (B) nπ + (C) nπ + (–1)n (D) nπ + (–1)n
6 6 6 3
1 5 63 1 1
[Hint: T6 = 10
⋅C5
x sin 5
x = ⇒ sin5 x = 5 sin
x5 8 2 2
π
⇒ x = nπ + (–1)n ]
6
Fill in the blanks in Exercises 25 to 33.
25. The largest coefficient in the expansion of (1 + x)30 is _________________ .
26. The number of terms in the expansion of (x + y + z)n _________________ .
[Hint: (x + y + z)n = [x + (y + z)]n]
16
1
27. In the expansion of x2 − , the value of constant term is
x2
_________________ .
28. If the seventh terms from the beginning and the end in the expansion of
n
3 1
2+ 3 are equal, then n equals _________________ .
3

1 n−6 1 6

[Hint : T7 = T n – 7 + 2 ⇒ n
C ( )
6 23
 1
 1

6

 =
n ( )  1 
C n −6 2 3 1
n− 6

 3   3
3  3 

18/04/18
 146 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

n − 12
1 n − 12 1
⇒ ( )
23 = 1 ⇒ only problem when n – 12 = 0 ⇒ n = 12].
33
10
1 2b
29. The coefficient of a– 6 b4 in the expansion of − is _________.
a 3
b 4
10 1 −2b 1120 − 6 4
[Hint : T5 = C4 = a b ]
a 3 27
30. Middle term in the expansion of (a3 + ba)28 is _________ .
31. The ratio of the coefficients of xp and xq in the expansion of (1 + x)p + q is_________
[Hint: p + qCp = p + qCq]
10
x 3
32. The position of the term independent of x in the expansion of + 2 is
3 2x
_________ .
33. If 2515 is divided by 13, the reminder is _________ .
State which of the statement in Exercises 34 to 40 is True or False.
10 20
20
Cr is 219 + C10
34. The sum of the series
r =0 2
35. The expression 79 + 97 is divisible by 64.
Hint: 79 + 97 = (1 + 8)7 – (1 – 8)9
36. The number of terms in the expansion of [(2x + y3)4]7 is 8
37. The sum of coefficients of the two middle terms in the expansion of (1 + x)2n – 1
is equal to 2n – 1Cn.
38. The last two digits of the numbers 3400 are 01.
2n
1
39. If the expansion of x − 2 contains a term independent of x, then n is a
x
multiple of 2.
40. Number of terms in the expansion of (a + b)n where n ∈ N is one less than the
power n.

18/04/18
 Chapter 9
SEQUENCE AND SERIES

9.1 Overview
By a sequence, we mean an arrangement of numbers in a definite order according
to some rule. We denote the terms of a sequence by a1, a2, a3, ... , etc., the subscript
denotes the position of the term.
In view of the above a sequence in the set X can be regarded as a mapping or a
function f : N → X defined by
f (n) = tn ∀ n ∈ N.
Domain of f is a set of natural numbers or some subset of it denoting the position of
term. If its range denoting the value of terms is a subset of R real numbers then it is
called a real sequence.
A sequence is either finite or infinite depending upon the number of terms in a sequence.
We should not expect that its terms will be necessarily given by a specific formula.
However, we expect a theoretical scheme or rule for generating the terms.
Let a1, a2, a3, ... , be the sequence, then, the expression a1 + a2 + a3 + ... is called the
series associated with given sequence. The series is finite or infinite according as the
given sequence is finite or infinite.
Remark When the series is used, it refers to the indicated sum not to the sum itself.
Sequence following certain patterns are more often called progressions. In
progressions, we note that each term except the first progresses in a definite manner.

9.1.1 Arithmetic progression (A.P.) is a sequence in which each term except the
first is obtained by adding a fixed number (positive or negative) to the preceding term.
Thus any sequence a1, a2, a3 ... an, ... is called an arithmetic progression if
an + 1= an + d, n ∈ N, where d is called the common difference of the A.P., usually we
denote the first term of an A.P by a and the last term by l
The general term or the nth term of the A.P. is given by
an = a + (n – 1) d
th
The n term from the last is given by an = l – (n – 1) d

18/04/18
 148 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

The sum Sn of the first n terms of an A.P. is given by

n n
Sn = [ 2a + (n − 1) d ] = (a + l ) , where l = a + (n – 1) d is the last terms of the A.P.,
2 2
and the general term is given by an = Sn – Sn – 1
The arithmetic mean for any n positive numbers a1, a2, a3, ... an is given by
a1 + a2 + ... + an
A.M. =
n
If a, A and b are in A.P., then A is called the arithmetic mean of numbers a and b and
a+b
i.e., A=
2
If the terms of an A.P. are increased, decreased, multiplied or divided by the same
constant, they still remain in A.P.
If a1, a2, a3 ... are in A.P. with common difference d, then
(i) a1 ± k, a2 ± k, a3 ± k, ... are also in A.P with common difference d.
(ii) a1 k, a2 k, a3 k, ... are also in A.P with common difference dk (k ≠ 0).
a1 a2 a3 d
and , , ... are also in A.P. with common difference (k ≠ 0).
k k k k
If a1, a2, a3 ... and b1, b2, b3 ... are two A.P., then
(i) a1 ± b1, a2 ± b2, a3 ± b3, ... are also in A.P
a1 a2 a3
(ii) a1 b1, a2 b2, a3 b3, ... and , ,
b1 b2 b3 , ... are not in A.P.
If a1, a2, a3 ... and an are in A.Ps, then
(i) a1 + an = a2 + an – 1 = a3 + an – 2 = ...
ar − k + ar + k
(ii) ar = ∀ k, 0 ≤ k ≤ n – r
2
(iii) If nth term of any sequence is linear expression in n, then the sequence is an
A.P.
(iv) If sum of n terms of any sequence is a quadratic expression in n, then sequence
is an A.P.

18/04/18
 SEQUENCE AND SERIES 149

9.1.2 A Geometric progression (G.P.) is a sequence in which each term except the
first is obtained by multiplying the previous term by a non-zero constant called the
common ratio. Let us consider a G.P. with first non-zero term a and common ratio r,
i.e., a, ar, ar2, ... , arn – 1, ...

Here, common ratio r =

ar n –1
ar n –2
The general term or nth term of G.P. is given by an = arn – 1.
Last term l of a G.P. is same as the nth term and is given by l = arn – 1.
l
and the nth term from the last is given by an = n −1
r
The sum Sn of the first n terms is given by

a ( r n − 1)
Sn = , if r ≠ 1
r −1
Sn = na if r = 1
If a, G and b are in G.P., then G is called the geometric mean of the numbers a and
b and is given by

G= ab
(i) If the terms of a G.P. are multiplied or divided by the same non-zero constant
(k ≠ 0), they still remain in G.P.
a1 a2 a3
If a1, a2, a3, ... , are in G.P., then a1 k, a2 k, a3 k, ... and , , , ...
k k k
are also in G.P. with same common ratio, in particularly
if a1, a2, a3, ... are in G.P., then
1 1 1
, ,
a1 a2 a3 , ... are also in G.P.
(ii) If a1, a2, a3, ... and b1, b2, b3, ... are two G.P.s, then a1 b1, a2 b2, a3 b3, ... and
a1 a2 a3
, ,
b1 b2 b3 , ... are also in G.P.

(iii) If a1, a2, a3, ... are in A.P. (ai > 0 ∀ i), then x a1 , x a2 , x a3 , ..., are in G.P. ( ∀ x > 0)

18/04/18
 150 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(iv) If a1, a2, a3, ..., an are in G.P., then a1 an = a2 an – 1 = a3 an – 2 = ...

9.1.3 Important results on the sum of special sequences

(i) Sum of the first n natural numbers:
n ( n + 1)
∑ n = 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n = 2
(ii) Sum of the squares of first n natural numbers.
n ( n + 1) (2n + 1)
∑ n2 = 12 + 22 + 32 + ... + n 2 = 6
(iii) Sum of cubes of first n natural numbers:
2
 n (n + 1) 
∑ n = 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n =  2 
3 3 3 3 3

9.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type
Example 1 The first term of an A.P. is a, the second term is b and the last term is c.
(b + c − 2a) (c + a)
Show that the sum of the A.P. is .
2 (b − a)
Solution Let d be the common diffrence and n be the number of terms of the A.P.
Since the first term is a and the second term is b
Therefore, d= b–a
Also, the last term is c, so
c = a + (n – 1) (b – a) (since d = b – a)
c−a
⇒ n–1=
b−a

c−a b − a + c − a b + c − 2a
⇒ n= 1+ = =
b−a b−a b−a

n (b + c − 2a)
Therefore, (a + l ) =
Sn = ( a + c)
2 2 (b − a)
Example 2 The pth term of an A.P. is a and qth term is b. Prove that the sum of its
(p + q) terms is

18/04/18
 SEQUENCE AND SERIES 151

p+q  a−b
a + b + p − q  .
2  
Solution Let A be the first term and D be the common difference of the A.P. It is
given that
tp = a ⇒ A + (p – 1) D = a ... (1)
tq = b ⇒ A + (q – 1) D = b ... (2)
Subtracting (2) from (1), we get
(p – 1 – q + 1) D = a–b
a −b
⇒ D= p−q ... (3)

Adding (1) and (2), we get

2A + (p + q – 2) D = a + b
⇒ 2A + (p + q – 1) D = a + b + D
a −b
⇒ 2A + (p + q – 1) D = a + b + .. (4)
p−q

p+q
Now Sp + q = [2A + (p + q – 1) D]
2

p+q  a−b
= a + b + p − q 
2  
[(using ... (3) and (4)]
Example 3 If there are (2n + 1) terms in an A.P., then prove that the ratio of the sum
of odd terms and the sum of even terms is (n + 1) : n
Solution Let a be the first term and d the common difference of the A.P. Also let S1
be the sum of odd terms of A.P. having (2n + 1) terms. Then
S1 = a1 + a3 + a5 + ... + a2n + 1
n +1
S1 = ( a1 + a2 n + 1 )
2

n +1
S1 =
2
[ a + a + (2n + 1 − 1)d ]

18/04/18
 152 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

= (n + 1) (a + nd)
Similarly, if S2 denotes the sum of even terms, then
n
S2 = [2a + 2nd] = n (a + nd)
2

S1 (n + 1) ( a + nd ) n + 1
Hence = =
S2 n (a + nd ) n

Example 4 At the end of each year the value of a certain machine has depreciated by
20% of its value at the beginning of that year. If its initial value was Rs 1250, find the
value at the end of 5 years.

Solution After each year the value of the machine is 80% of its value the previous
year so at the end of 5 years the machine will depreciate as many times as 5.
Hence, we have to find the 6th term of the G.P. whose first term a1 is 1250 and common
ratio r is .8.
Hence, value at the end 5 years = t6 = a1 r5 = 1250 (.8)5 = 409.6
Example 5 Find the sum of first 24 terms of the A.P. a1, a2, a3, ... if it is known that
a1 + a5 + a10 + a15 + a20 + a24 = 225.
Solution We know that in an A.P., the sum of the terms equidistant from the beginning
and end is always the same and is equal to the sum of first and last term.
Therefore d= b–a
i.e., a1 + a24 = a5 + a20 = a10 + a15
It is given that (a1 + a24) + (a5 + a20) + (a10 + a15) = 225
⇒ (a1 + a24) + (a1 + a24) + (a1 + a24) =225
⇒ 3 (a1 + a24) = 225
⇒ a1 + a24 = 75
n
We know that Sn = [a + l ] , where a is the first term and l is the last term of an A.P.
2

24
Thus, S24 = [a1 + a24] = 12 × 75 = 900
2
Example 6 The product of three numbers in A.P. is 224, and the largest number is 7
times the smallest. Find the numbers.
Solution Let the three numbers in A.P. be a – d, a, a + d (d > 0)

18/04/18
 SEQUENCE AND SERIES 153

Now (a – d) a (a + d) = 224
⇒ a (a2 – d2) = 224 ... (1)
Now, since the largest number is 7 times the smallest, i.e., a + d = 7 (a – d)
3a
Therefore, d=
4
Substituting this value of d in (1), we get

 9a 2 
a  a2 −  = 224
 16 
a= 8
3a 3
and d= = ×8 = 6
4 4
Hence, the three numbers are 2, 8, 14.

Example 7 Show that (x2 + xy + y2), (z2 + xz + x2) and (y2 + yz + z2) are consecutive
terms of an A.P., if x, y and z are in A.P.

Solution The terms (x2 + xy + y2), (z2 + xz + x2) and (y2 + yz + z2) will be in A.P. if
(z2 + xz + x2) – (x2 + xy + y2) = (y2 + yz + z2) – (z2 + xz + x2)
i.e., z2 + xz – xy – y2 = y2 + yz – xz – x2
i.e., x2 + z2 + 2xz – y2 = y2 + yz + xy
i.e., (x + z)2 – y2 = y (x + y + z)
i.e., x+z–y= y
i.e., x + z = 2y
which is true, since x, y, z are in A.P. Hence x2 + xy + y2, z2 + xz + x2, y2 + yz + z2 are
in A.P.

Example 8 If a, b, c, d are in G.P., prove that a2 – b2, b2 – c2, c2 – d2 are also in G.P.
Solution Let r be the common ratio of the given G.P. Then
b c d
= = =r
a b c
⇒ b = ar, c = br = ar2, d = cr = ar3
Now, a2 – b2 = a2 – a2r2 = a2 (1 – r2)

18/04/18
 154 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

b2 – c2 = a2r2 – a2r4 = a2r2 (1 – r2)

and c2 – d2 = a2r4 – a2r6 = a2r4 (1 – r2)

b2 − c2 c2 − d 2
Therefore, 2 2 = 2 2
= r2
a −b b −c
2 2 2 2 2 2
Hence, a – b , b – c , c – d are in G.P.

Long Answer Type

Example 9 If the sum of m terms of an A.P. is equal to the sum of either the next n
terms or the next p terms, then prove that
1 1  1 1
(m + n)  −  = ( m + p)  − 
m p m n
Solution Let the A.P. be a, a + d, a + 2d, ... . We are given
a1 + a2 + ... + am = am+1 + am+2 + ... + am+n ... (1)
Adding a1 + a2 + ... + am on both sides of (1), we get
2 [a1 + a2 + ... + am] = a1 + a2 + ... + am + am+1 + ... + am+n
2 Sm = Sm+n
m m+n
Therefore, 2 {2a + (m −1)d } = {2a + (m + n −1) d }
2 2
Putting 2a + (m – 1) d = x in the above equation, we get
m+n
mx = (x + nd)
2
(2m – m – n) x = (m + n) nd
⇒ (m – n) x = (m + n) nd ... (2)
Similarly, ifa1 + a2 + ... + am = am + 1 + am + 2 + ... + am + p
Adding a1 + a2 + ... + am on both sides
we get, 2 (a1 + a2 + ... + am) = a1 + a2 + ... + am + 1 + ... + am + p
or, 2 Sm = Sm + p

m m+ p
⇒ 2 {2a + ( m − 1) d } = {2a + (m + p – 1)d} which gives
2 2
i.e., (m – p) x = (m + p)pd ... (3)
Dividing (2) by (3), we get

18/04/18
 SEQUENCE AND SERIES 155

(m − n) x (m + n) nd
=
(m − p) x (m + p ) pd
⇒ (m – n) (m + p) p = (m – p) (m + n) n
Dividing both sides by mnp, we get

1 1  1 1
(m + p)  −  = (m + n)  − 
 n m  p m

1 1  1 1
= (m + n)  −  = (m + p)  − 
m p m n

Example 10 If a1, a2, ..., an are in A.P. with common difference d (where d ≠ 0);
then the sum of the series sin d (cosec a1 cosec a2 + cosec a2 cosec a3 + ...+ cosec
an–1 cosec an) is equal to cot a1 – cot an

Solution We have
sin d (cosec a1 cosec a2 + cosec a2 cosec a3 + ...+ cosec an–1 cosec an)

 1 1 1 
= sin d  sin a sin a + sin a sin a + ... + sin a sin a 
 1 2 2 3 n −1 n

sin ( a2 − a1 ) sin ( a3 − a2 ) sin ( an − an−1 )

= + + ... +
sin a1 sin a2 sin a2 sin a3 sin an −1 sin an

sin a2 cos a1 − cos a2 sin a1 ) sin a3 cos a2 − cos a3 sin a2 ) sin an cos an −1 − cos an sin an −1 )
= + + ... +
sin a1 sin a2 sin a2 sin a3 sin an −1 sin an
= (cot a1 – cot a2) + (cot a2 – cot a3) + ... + (cot an–1 – cot an)
= cot a1 – cot an

Example 11
(i) If a, b, c, d are four distinct positive quantities in A.P., then show that
bc > ad
(ii) If a, b, c, d are four distinct positive quantities in G.P., then show that
a+d>b+c
Solution
(i) Since a, b, c, d are in A.P., then A.M. > G.M., for the first three terms.

18/04/18
 156 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

 a +c 
Therefore, b > ac  Here =b 
 2 
Squaring, we get b2 > ac ... (1)
Similarly, for the last three terms
AM > GM

 b+d 
c> bd  Here =c
 2 
c2 > bd ... (2)
Multiplying (1) and (2), we get
b2c2 > (ac) (bd)
⇒ bc > ad
(ii) Since a, b, c, d are in G.P.
again A.M. > G.M. for the first three terms
a +c
2
>b ( since ac = b )
⇒ a + c > 2b ... (3)
Similarly, for the last three terms
b +d
2
>c ( since bd = c )
⇒ b + d > 2c ... (4)
Adding (3) and (4), we get
(a + c) + (b + d) > 2b + 2c
a+d>b+c

Eample 12 If a, b, c are three consecutive terms of an A.P. and x, y, z are three

consecutive terms of a G.P. Then prove that
xb – c . yc – a . za – b = 1
Solution We have a, b, c as three consecutive terms of A.P. Then
b–a=c–b=d (say)
c – a = 2d
a–b= –d

18/04/18
 SEQUENCE AND SERIES 157

Now x b–c . y c–a . z a–b = x –d

.y 2d
.z –d

= x – d ( xz ) 2 d . z − d (since y = ( xz ) ) as x, y, z are G.P.)

–d d d –d
=x .x .z .z
= x– d + d . zd – d
= x° z° = 1
n
Example 13 Find the natural number a for which ∑ f (a + k ) = 16(2 n
– 1), where
k =1

the function f satisfies f (x + y) = f (x) . f (y) for all natural numbers x, y and further
f (1) = 2.
Solution Given that
f (x + y) = f (x) . f (y) and f (1) = 2
Therefore, f (2) = f (1 + 1) = f (1) . f (1) = 22
f (3) = f (1 + 2) = f (1) . f (2) = 23
f (4) = f (1 + 3) = f (1) . f (3) = 24
and so on. Continuing the process, we obtain
f (k) = 2k and f (a) = 2a
n n
Hence ∑ f (a + k ) = ∑ f (a). f (k )
k =1 k =1

= f (a) ∑ f (k )
k =1

= 2 (2 + 22 + 23 + ... + 2n)
a 1

 2. 2n − 1 ( )  = 2
a a +1
= 2   (2n −1) ... (1)
2 −1
 
n

But, we are given ∑ f (a + k ) = 16 (2n – 1)

k =1

2a + 1 (2n – 1) = 16 (2n – 1)
⇒ 2a+1 = 24 ⇒ a + 1 = 4
⇒ a= 3

18/04/18
 158 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of the four given options in Examples 14 to 23 (M.C.Q.).
Example 14 A sequence may be defined as a
(A) relation, whose range ⊆ N (natural numbers)
(B) function whose range ⊆ N
(C) function whose domain ⊆ N
(D) progression having real values
Solution (C) is the correct answer. A sequence is a function f : N → X having
domain ⊆ N

Example 15 If x, y, z are positive integers then value of expression

(x + y) (y + z) (z + x) is
(A) = 8xyz (B) > 8xyz (C) < 8xyz (D) = 4xyz
Solution (B) is the correct answer, since
x+ y y+ z z+x
A.M. > G.M., > xy , > yz and > zx
2 2 2
Multiplying the three inequalities, we get
x+ y y+ z y+ z
. . > ( xy )( yz )( zx)
2 2 2
or, (x + y) (y + z) (z + x) > 8 xyz

Example 16 In a G.P. of positive terms, if any term is equal to the sum of the next two
terms. Then the common ratio of the G.P. is
(A) sin 18° (B) 2 cos18° (C) cos 18° (D) 2 sin 18°
Solution (D) is the correct answer, since
tn = tn+1 + tn+2
⇒ arn–1 = arn + arn+1
⇒ 1 = r + r2

−1 ± 5
r= , since r > 0
2

5 −1
Therefore, r= 2 = 2 sin 18°
4

18/04/18
 SEQUENCE AND SERIES 159

Example 17 In an A.P. the pth term is q and the (p + q)th term is 0. Then the qth term is
(A) – p (B p (C) p + q (D) p – q
Solution (B) is the correct answer
Let a, d be the first term and common difference respectively.
Therefore, Tp = a + (p – 1) d = q and ... (1)
Tp+ q = a + (p + q – 1) d = 0 ... (2)
Subtracting (1), from (2) we get qd = – q
Substituting in (1) we get a = q – (p – 1) (–1) = q + p – 1
Now Tq = a + (q – 1) d = q + p – 1 + (q – 1) (–1)
= q+p–1–q+1=p
Example 18 Let S be the sum, P be the product and R be the sum of the reciprocals
of 3 terms of a G.P. Then P2 R3 : S3 is equal to
(A) 1 : 1 (B) (common ratio)n : 1
(C) (first term)2 : (common ratio)2 (D) none of these
Solution (A) is the correct answer
a
Let us take a G.P. with three terms , a, ar . Then
r
a a( r 2 + r + 1)
S= + a + ar =
r r
r 1 1 1  r2 + r + 1
P = a3, R = + + =  
a a ar a  r 

3
6 1  r2 + r + 1
a ⋅  
P2 R 3 a3  r  =1
3 = 3
S  r + r +1
2
a3  
 r 
Therefore, the ratio is 1 : 1

Example 19 The 10th common term between the series

3 + 7 + 11 + ... and 1 + 6 + 11 + ... is
(A) 191 (B) 193 (C) 211 (D) None of these
Solution (A) is the correct answer.

18/04/18
 160 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

The first common term is 11.

Now the next common term is obtained by adding L.C.M. of the common difference 4
and 5, i.e., 20.
Therefore, 10th common term = T10 of the AP whose a = 11 and d = 20
T10 = a + 9 d = 11 + 9 (20) = 191

Example 20 In a G.P. of even number of terms, the sum of all terms is 5 times the
sum of the odd terms. The common ratio of the G.P. is
−4 1
(A) (B) (C) 4 (D) none the these
5 5
Solution (C) is the correct answer

a (r 2 n −1) 5a ( (r ) −1)
2 n
2
Let us consider a G.P. a, ar, ar , ... with 2n terms. We have =
r −1 r 2 −1
(Since common ratio of odd terms will be r2 and number of terms will be n)

a (r 2 n −1) a (r 2 n −1)
⇒ = 5
r −1 (r 2 −1)
⇒ a (r + 1) = 5a, i.e., r = 4

Example 21 The minimum value of the expression 3x + 31 – x, x ∈ R, is

1
(A) 0 (B) (C) 3 (D) 2 3
3
Solution (D) is the correct answer.
We know A.M. ≥ G.M. for positive numbers.

3x + 31− x
Therefore, ≥ 3x ⋅ 31− x
2

3x + 31− x 3
⇒ ≥ 3x ⋅ x
2 3

⇒ 3x + 31–x ≥ 2 3

18/04/18
 SEQUENCE AND SERIES 161

9.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
1. The first term of an A.P.is a, and the sum of the first p terms is zero, show that
− a ( p + q) q
the sum of its next q terms is . [Hint: Required sum = Sp + q – Sp]
p −1
2. A man saved Rs 66000 in 20 years. In each succeeding year after the first year
he saved Rs 200 more than what he saved in the previous year. How much did
he save in the first year?
3. A man accepts a position with an initial salary of Rs 5200 per month. It is
understood that he will receive an automatic increase of Rs 320 in the very next
month and each month thereafter.
(a) Find his salary for the tenth month
(b) What is his total earnings during the first year?
4. If the pth and qth terms of a G.P. are q and p respectively, show that its (p + q)th
1
 q p  p−q
term is  q  .
p 
5. A carpenter was hired to build 192 window frames. The first day he made five
frames and each day, thereafter he made two more frames than he made the
day before. How many days did it take him to finish the job?
6. We know the sum of the interior angles of a triangle is 180°. Show that the sums
of the interior angles of polygons with 3, 4, 5, 6, ... sides form an arithmetic
progression. Find the sum of the interior angles for a 21 sided polygon.
7. A side of an equilateral triangle is 20cm long. A second equilateral triangle is
inscribed in it by joining the mid points of the sides of the first triangle. The
process is continued as shown in the accompanying diagram. Find the perimeter
of the sixth inscribed equilateral triangle.
8. In a potato race 20 potatoes are placed in a line at intervals of 4 metres with the
first potato 24 metres from the starting point. A contestant is required to bring
the potatoes back to the starting place one at a time. How far would he run in
bringing back all the potatoes?
9. In a cricket tournament 16 school teams participated. A sum of Rs 8000 is to be
awarded among themselves as prize money. If the last placed team is awarded

18/04/18
 162 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Rs 275 in prize money and the award increases by the same amount for
successive finishing places, how much amount will the first place team receive?
10. If a1, a2, a3, ..., an are in A.P., where ai > 0 for all i, show that
1 1 1 n −1
+ + ... + =
a1 + a2 a2 + a3 an −1 + an a1 + an
11. Find the sum of the series
(33 – 23) + (53 – 43) + (73 – 63) + ... to (i) n terms (ii) 10 terms
12. Find the rth term of an A.P. sum of whose first n terms is 2n + 3n2.
[Hint: an = Sn – Sn–1]

Long Answer Type

13. If A is the arithmetic mean and G1, G2 be two geometric means between any
two numbers, then prove that

G12 G 22
2A = +
G 2 G1
14. If θ1, θ2, θ3, ..., θn are in A.P., whose common difference is d, show that
tan θn − tan θ1
secθ1 secθ2 + secθ2 secθ3 + ... + secθn–1 secθn = .
sin d
15. If the sum of p terms of an A.P. is q and the sum of q terms is p, show that the
sum of p + q terms is – (p + q). Also, find the sum of first p – q terms (p > q).

16. If pth, qth, and rth terms of an A.P. and G.P. are both a, b and c respectively,
show that
ab–c . bc – a . ca – b = 1

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of the four given options in each of the Exercises 17 to
26 (M.C.Q.).

17. If the sum of n terms of an A.P. is given by

Sn = 3n + 2n2, then the common difference of the A.P. is
(A) 3 (B) 2 (C) 6 (D) 4

18/04/18
 SEQUENCE AND SERIES 163

18. The third term of G.P. is 4. The product of its first 5 terms is
(A) 43 (B) 4 4 (C) 4 5 (D) None of these

19. If 9 times the 9th term of an A.P. is equal to 13 times the 13th term, then the 22nd
term of the A.P. is
(A) 0 (B) 22 (C) 220 (D) 198
20. If x, 2y, 3z are in A.P., where the distinct numbers x, y, z are in G.P. then the
common ratio of the G.P. is
1 1
(A) 3 (B) (C) 2 (D)
3 2
21. If in an A.P., Sn = q n2 and Sm = qm2, where Sr denotes the sum of r terms of the
A.P., then Sq equals

q3
(A) (B) mnq (C) q 3 (D) (m + n) q2
2
22. Let Sn denote the sum of the first n terms of an A.P. If S2n = 3Sn then S3n : Sn is
equal to
(A) 4 (B) 6 (C) 8 (D) 10
x 1–x
23. The minimum value of 4 + 4 , x ∈ R, is
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 1 (D) 0
24. Let Sn denote the sum of the cubes of the first n natural numbers and sn denote
n
S
the sum of the first n natural numbers. Then ∑ sr equals
r =1 r

n( n + 1)(n + 2) n( n + 1)
(A) (B)
6 2
n 2 + 3n + 2
(C) (D) None of these
2
25. If tn denotes the nth term of the series 2 + 3 + 6 + 11 + 18 + ... then t50 is
(A) 492 – 1 (B) 492 (C) 502 + 1 (D) 492 + 2
26. The lengths of three unequal edges of a rectangular solid block are in G.P. The
volume of the block is 216 cm3 and the total surface area is 252cm2. The length
of the longest edge is
(A) 12 cm (B) 6 cm (C) 18 cm (D) 3 cm

18/04/18
 164 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Fill in the blanks in the Exercises 27 to 29.

a −b
27. For a, b, c to be in G.P. the value of b − c is equal to .............. .

28. The sum of terms equidistant from the beginning and end in an A.P. is equal to
............ .
29. The third term of a G.P. is 4, the product of the first five terms is ................ .
State whether statement in Exercises 30 to 34 are True or False.
30. Two sequences cannot be in both A.P. and G.P. together.
31. Every progression is a sequence but the converse, i.e., every sequence is also a
progression need not necessarily be true.
32. Any term of an A.P. (except first) is equal to half the sum of terms which are
equidistant from it.
33. The sum or difference of two G.P.s, is again a G.P.
34. If the sum of n terms of a sequence is quadratic expression then it always represents
an A.P.
Match the questions given under Column I with their appropriate answers given
under the Column II.
35. Column I Column II
1 1
(a) 4, 1, , (i) A.P.
4 16
(b) 2, 3, 5, 7 (ii) sequence
(c) 13, 8, 3, –2, –7 (iii) G.P.
36. Column I Column II
2
 n(n + 1) 
(a) 12 + 22 + 32 + ...+n2 (i)  
 2 
(b) 13 + 23 + 33 + ...+n3 (ii) n (n + 1)
n ( n + 1)(2n +1)
(c) 2 + 4 + 6 + ... + 2n (iii)
6
n ( n +1)
(d) 1 + 2 + 3 +...+ n (iv)
2

18/04/18
 Chapter 10
STRAIGHT LINES

10.1 Overview
10.1.1 Slope of a line
If θ is the angle made by a line with positive direction of x-axis in anticlockwise direction,
then the value of tan θ is called the slope of the line and is denoted by m.
The slope of a line passing through points P(x1, y1) and Q (x2, y2) is given by

y2 − y1
m = tan θ =
x2 − x1
10.1.2 Angle between two lines The angle θ between the two lines having slopes m1 and
m2 is given by
(m1 − m2 )
tan θ = ±
1+ m1m2

m1 − m2
If we take the acute angle between two lines, then tan θ = 1+ m m
1 2

If the lines are parallel, then m1 = m2.

If the lines are perpendicular, then m1m2 = – 1.
10.1.3 Collinearity of three points If three points P (h, k), Q (x1, y1) and R (x2,y2)
y1 − k y2 − y1
are such that slope of PQ = slope of QR, i.e., =
x1 − h x2 − x1

or (h – x1) (y2 – y1) = (k – y1) (x2 – x1) then they are said to be collinear.

10.1.4 Various forms of the equation of a line

(i) If a line is at a distance a and parallel to x-axis, then the equation of the line is
y = ± a.
(ii) If a line is parallel to y-axis at a distance b from y-axis then its equation is
x=±b

18/04/18
 166 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(iii) Point-slope form : The equation of a line having slope m and passing through the
point (x0, y0) is given by y – y0 = m (x – x0)
(iv) Two-point-form : The equation of a line passing through two points (x1, y1) and
(x2, y2) is given by
y2 − y1
y – y1 = x − x (x – x1)
2 1

(v) Slope intercept form : The equation of the line making an intercept c on y-axis and
having slope m is given by
y = mx + c
Note that the value of c will be positive or negative as the intercept is made on
the positive or negative side of the y-axis, respectively.
(vi) Intercept form : The equation of the line making intercepts a and b on x- and y-
x y
axis respectively is given by + =1 .
a b
(vii) Normal form : Suppose a non-vertical line is known to us with following data:
(a) Length of the perpendicular (normal) p from origin to the line.
(b) Angle ω which normal makes with the positive direction of x-axis.
Then the equation of such a line is given by x cos ω + y sin ω = p
10.1.5 General equation of a line
Any equation of the form Ax + By + C = 0, where A and B are simultaneously not zero,
is called the general equation of a line.
Different forms of Ax + By + C = 0
The general form of the line can be reduced to various forms as given below:
(i) Slope intercept form : If B ≠ 0, then Ax + By + C = 0 can be written as

−A −C −A −C
y= x+ or y = mx + c, where m = and c =
B B B B

−C
If B = 0, then x = which is a vertical line whose slope is not defined and x-intercept
A
−C
is .
A

18/04/18
 STRAIGHT LINES 167

x y
(ii) Intercept form : If C ≠ 0, then Ax + By + C = 0 can be written as +
−C −C
A B

x y −C −C
= 1 or + = 1 , where a = and b = .
a b A B
If C = 0, then Ax + By + C = 0 can be written as Ax + By = 0 which is a line
passing through the origin and therefore has zero intercepts on the axes.
(iii) Normal Form : The normal form of the equation Ax + By + C = 0 is
x cos ω + y sin ω = p where,
A B C
cos ω = ± ,sin ω = ± and p = ± .
A 2 + B2 A 2 + B2 A + B2
2

Note: Proper choice of signs is to be made so that p should be always positive.

10.1.6 Distance of a point from a line The perpendicular distance (or simply distance)
d of a point P (x1, y1) from the line Ax + By + C = 0 is given by

Ax1 + By1 + C
d=
A 2 + B2
Distance between two parallel lines
The distance d between two parallel lines y = mx + c1 and y = mx + c2 is given by

c1 − c2
d= .
1+m 2

10.1.7 Locus and Equation of Locus The curve described by a point which moves
under certain given condition is called its locus. To find the locus of a point P whose
coordinates are (h, k), express the condition involving h and k. Eliminate variables if
any and finally replace h by x and k by y to get the locus of P.

10.1.8 Intersection of two given lines Two lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y +
c2 = 0 are
a1 b1
(i) intersecting if ≠
a2 b2

18/04/18
 168 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

a1 b1 c1
(ii) parallel and distinct if = ≠
a2 b2 c2

a1 b1 c1
(iii) coincident if = =
a2 b2 c2
Remarks
(i) The points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) are on the same side of the line or on the opposite
side of the line ax + by + c = 0, if ax1 + by1 + c and ax2 + by2 + c are of the same
sign or of opposite signs respectively.
(ii) The condition that the lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c = 0 are
perpendicular is a1a2 + b1b2 = 0.
(iii) The equation of any line through the point of intersection of two lines a1x + b1y +
c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 is a1x + b1y + c1 + k (ax2 + by2 + c2) = 0. The value
of k is determined from extra condition given in the problem.

10.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type
Example 1 Find the equation of a line which passes through the point (2, 3) and
makes an angle of 30° with the positive direction of x-axis.
1
Solution Here the slope of the line is m = tanθ = tan 30° = and the given point is
3
(2, 3). Therefore, using point slope formula of the equation of a line, we have
1
y–3= (x – 2) or x – 3y + (3 3 – 2) = 0.
3
Example 2 Find the equation of the line where length of the perpendicular segment
from the origin to the line is 4 and the inclination of the perpendicular segment with the
positive direction of x-axis is 30°.
Solution The normal form of the equation of the line is x cos ω + y sin ω = p. Here
p = 4 and ω = 30°. Therefore, the equation of the line is
x cos 30° + y sin 30° = 4

3 1
x +y =4 or 3 x+y=8
2 2

18/04/18
 STRAIGHT LINES 169

Example 3 Prove that every straight line has an equation of the form Ax + By + C = 0,
where A, B and C are constants.
Proof Given a straight line, either it cuts the y-axis, or is parallel to or coincident with
it. We know that the equation of a line which cuts the y-axis (i.e., it has y-intercept) can
be put in the form y = mx + b; further, if the line is parallel to or coincident with the y-
axis, its equation is of the form x = x1, where x = 0 in the case of coincidence. Both of
these equations are of the form given in the problem and hence the proof.
Example 4 Find the equation of the straight line passing through (1, 2) and perpendicular
to the line x + y + 7 = 0.
Solution Let m be the slope of the line whose equation is to be found out which is
perpendicular to the line x + y + 7 = 0. The slope of the given line y = (– 1) x – 7 is – 1.
Therefore, using the condition of perpendicularity of lines, we have m × (– 1) = – 1
or m = 1 (Why?)
Hence, the required equation of the line is y – 1 = (1) (x – 2) or y – 1 = x – 2 x–
y – 1 = 0.

Example 5 Find the distance between the lines 3x + 4y = 9 and 6x + 8y = 15.

Solution The equations of lines 3x + 4y = 9 and 6x + 8y = 15 may be rewritten as
15
3x + 4y – 9 = 0 and 3x + 4y − =0
2
Since, the slope of these lines are same and hence they are parallel to each other.
Therefore, the distance between them is given by
15
9−
2 3
=
2
3 +4 2 10

Example 6 Show that the locus of the mid-point of the distance between the axes of
1 1 4
the variable line x cosα + y sinα = p is 2
+ 2 = 2 where p is a constant.
x y p
Solution Changing the given equation of the line into intercept form, we have
x y p p
+ = 1 which gives the coordinates , 0 and 0, , where the
p p cos α sin α
cos α sin α
line intersects x-axis and y-axis, respectively.

18/04/18
 170 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Let (h, k) denote the mid-point of the line segment joining the points
p p
, 0 and 0, ,
cos α sin α

p p
Then h = and k = (Why?)
2cos α 2sin α

p p
This gives cos α = and sin α =
2h 2k

Squaring and adding we get

p2 p2 1 1 4
+ =1 or + 2 = 2.
4h 2 4k 2 h 2
k p

1 1 4
Therefore, the required locus is 2
+ 2 = 2.
x y p
Example 7 If the line joining two points A(2, 0) and B(3, 1) is rotated about A in
anticlock wise direction through an angle of 15°. Find the equation of the line in new
position.
1− 0
Solution The slope of the line AB is = 1 or tan 45° (Why?) (see Fig.). After
3− 2
rotation of the line through 15°, the slope of the line AC in new position is tan 60° = 3

Fig. 10.1

18/04/18
 STRAIGHT LINES 171

Therefore, the equation of the new line AC is

y–0= 3( x − 2) or y – 3x + 2 3 = 0

Long Answer Type

3
Example 8 If the slope of a line passing through the point A(3, 2) is , then find
4
points on the line which are 5 units away from the point A.
3
Solution Equation of the line passing through (3, 2) having slope is given by
4
3
y–2= (x – 3)
4
or 4y – 3x + 1 = 0 (1)
Let (h, k) be the points on the line such that
(h – 3)2 + (k – 2)2 = 25 (2) (Why?)
Also, we have
4k – 3h + 1 = 0 (3) (Why?)
3h − 1
or k= (4)
4
Putting the value of k in (2) and on simplifying, we get
25h2 – 150h – 175 = 0 (How?)
2
or h – 6h – 7 = 0
or (h + 1) (h – 7) = 0 ⇒ h = –1, h = 7
Putting these values of k in (4), we get k = –1 and k = 5. Therefore, the coordinates of
the required points are either (–1, –1) or (7, 5).

Example 9 Find the equation to the straight line passing through the point of intersection
of the lines 5x – 6y – 1 = 0 and 3x + 2y + 5 = 0 and perpendicular to the line 3x – 5y +
11 = 0.
Solution First we find the point of intersection of lines 5x – 6y – 1 = 0 and 3x + 2y +
3
5 = 0 which is (– 1, – 1). Also the slope of the line 3x – 5y + 11 = 0 is . Therefore,
5
−5
the slope of the line perpendicular to this line is (Why?). Hence, the equation of the
3
required line is given by

18/04/18
 172 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

−5
y+1= (x + 1)
3
or 5x + 3y + 8 = 0
Alternatively The equation of any line through the intersection of lines 5x – 6y – 1 = 0
and 3x + 2y + 5 = 0 is
5x – 6y – 1 + k(3x + 2y + 5) = 0 (1)
− (5 + 3k )
or Slope of this line is
– 6 + 2k

3
Also, slope of the line 3x – 5y + 11 = 0 is
5
Now, both are perpendicular
− (5 + 3k ) 3
so – 6 + 2k × 5 = –1

or k = 45
Therefore, equation of required line in given by
5x – 6y – 1 + 45 (3x + 2y + 5) = 0
or 5x + 3y + 8 = 0

Example 10 A ray of light coming from the point (1, 2) is reflected at a point A on the
x-axis and then passes through the point (5, 3). Find the coordinates of the point A.
Solution Let the incident ray strike x-axis at the point A whose coordinates be (x, 0).
From the figure, the slope of the reflected ray is given by
3
tan θ = (1)
5– x

Fig. 10.2

18/04/18
 STRAIGHT LINES 173

Again, the slope of the incident ray is given by

−2
tan (π – θ) = (Why?)
x −1
−2
or – tan θ = (2)
x −1
Solving (1) and (2), we get

3 2 13
= or x =
5− x x −1 5

13
Therefore, the required coordinates of the point A are ,0 .
5
Example 11 If one diagonal of a square is along the line 8x – 15y = 0 and one of its
vertex is at (1, 2), then find the equation of sides of the square passing through this
vertex.
Solution Let ABCD be the given square and the coordinates of the vertex D be (1, 2).
We are required to find the equations of its sides DC and AD.

Fig. 10.3
8
Given that BD is along the line 8x – 15y = 0, so its slope is
(Why?). The angles
15
made by BD with sides AD and DC is 45° (Why?). Let the slope of DC be m. Then

8
m−
15
tan 45° = (Why?)
8m
1+
15

18/04/18
 174 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

or 15 + 8m = 15m – 8
23
or 7m = 23, which gives m =
7
Therefore, the equation of the side DC is given by
23
y–2= (x – 1) or 23x – 7y – 9 = 0.
7
Similarly, the equation of another side AD is given by
−7
y–2= (x – 1) or 7x + 23y – 53 = 0.
23
Objective Type Questions
Each of the Examples 12 to 20 has four possible options out of which only one option is
correct. Choose the correct option (M.C.Q.).
Example 12 The inclination of the line x – y + 3 = 0 with the positive direction of
x-axis is
(A) 45° (B) 135° (C) – 45° (D) –135°
Solution (A) is the correct answer. The equation of the line x – y + 3 = 0 can be
rewritten as y = x + 3 ⇒ m = tan θ = 1 and hence θ = 45°.
Example 13 The two lines ax + by = c and a′x + b′y = c′ are perpendicular if
(A) aa′ + bb′ = 0 (B) ab′ = ba′
(C) ab + a′b′ = 0 (D) ab′ + ba′ = 0
−a
Solution (A) is correct answer. Slope of the line ax + by = c is ,
b
−a′
and the slope of the line a′x + b′y = c′ is . The lines are perpendicular if
b′
3
tan θ = (1)
5– x
−a −a ′
= −1 or aa ′ + bb′ = 0 (Why?)
b b′
Example 14 The equation of the line passing through (1, 2) and perpendicular to
x + y + 7 = 0 is
(A) y – x + 1 = 0 (B) y – x – 1 = 0

18/04/18
 STRAIGHT LINES 175

(C) y – x + 2 = 0 (D) y – x – 2 = 0.
Solution (B) is the correct answer. Let the slope of the line be m. Then, its equation
passing through (1, 2) is given by
y – 2 = m (x – 1) (1)
Again, this line is perpendicular to the given line x + y + 7 = 0 whose slope is – 1 (Why?)
Therefore, we have m ( – 1) = – 1
or m= 1
Hence, the required equation of the line is obtained by putting the value of m in (1), i.e.,
y–2= x–1
or y–x–1= 0
Example 15 The distance of the point P (1, – 3) from the line 2y – 3x = 4 is
7
(A) 13 (B) 13 (C) 13 (D) None of these
13
Solution (A) is the correct answer. The distance of the point P (1, – 3) from the line
2y – 3 x – 4 = 0 is the length of perpendicular from the point to the line which is given
by

2(–3) – 3– 4
= 13
13
Example 16 The coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular from the point (2, 3) on
the line x + y – 11 = 0 are
(A) (–6, 5) (B) (5, 6) (C) (–5, 6) (D) (6, 5)
Solution (B) is the correct choice. Let (h, k) be the coordinates of the foot of the
perpendicular from the point (2, 3) on the line x + y – 11 = 0. Then, the slope of the
k –3
perpendicular line is h − 2 . Again the slope of the given line x + y – 11 = 0 is – 1

(why?)
Using the condition of perpendicularity of lines, we have

k –3
(– 1) = – 1 (Why?)
h−2
or k–h= 1 (1)

18/04/18
 176 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Since (h, k) lies on the given line, we have,

h + k – 11 = 0 or h + k = 11 (2)
Solving (1) and (2), we get h = 5 and k = 6. Thus (5, 6) are the required coordinates of
the foot of the perpendicular.
Example 17 The intercept cut off by a line from y-axis is twice than that from x-axis,
and the line passes through the point (1, 2). The equation of the line is
(A) 2x + y = 4 (B) 2x + y + 4 = 0
(C) 2x – y = 4 (D) 2x – y + 4 = 0
Solution (A) is the correct choice. Let the line make intercept ‘a’ on x-axis. Then, it
makes intercept ‘2a’ on y-axis. Therefore, the equation of the line is given by
x y
+ =1
a 2a

It passes through (1, 2), so, we have

1 2
+ = 1 or a = 2
a 2a
Therefore, the required equation of the line is given by
x y
+ = 1 or 2x + y = 4
2 4
Example 18 A line passes through P (1, 2) such that its intercept between the axes is
bisected at P. The equation of the line is
(A) x + 2y = 5 (B) x – y + 1 = 0
(C) x + y – 3 = 0 (D) 2x + y – 4 = 0
Solution The correct choice is (D). We know that the equation of a line making
intercepts a and b with x-axis and y-axis, respectively, is given by
x y
+ =1 .
a b

a+0 0+b
Here we have 1= and 2 = , (Why?)
2 2
which give a = 2 and b = 4. Therefore, the required equation of the line is given by

18/04/18
 STRAIGHT LINES 177

x y
+ = 1 or 2x + y – 4 = 0
2 4
Example 19 The reflection of the point (4, – 13) about the line 5x + y + 6 = 0 is
(A) (– 1, – 14) (B) (3, 4) (C) (0, 0) (D) (1, 2)
Solution The correct choice is (A). Let (h, k) be the point of reflection of the given point
(4, – 13) about the line 5x + y + 6 = 0. The mid-point of the line segment joining points (h, k)
and (4, – 13) is given by

h + 4 k −13
, (Why?)
2 2
This point lies on the given line, so we have

h+4 k − 13
5 + +6=0
2 2
or 5 h + k + 19 = 0 (1)
k + 13
Again the slope of the line joining points (h, k) and (4, –13) is given by h − 4 . This line

k +3
is perpendicular to the given line and hence ( −5) = –1 (Why?)
h−4
This gives 5k + 65 = h – 4
or h – 5k – 69 = 0 (2)
On solving (1) and (2), we get h = –1 and k = –14. Thus the point (–1, – 14) is the
reflection of the given point.
Example 20 A point moves such that its distance from the point (4, 0) is half that of
its distance from the line x = 16. The locus of the point is
(A) 3x2 + 4y2 = 192 (B) 4x2 + 3y2 = 192
(C) x2 + y2 = 192 (D) None of these
Solution The correct choice is (A). Let (h, k) be the coordinates of the moving point.
Then, we have

1 h −16
( h – 4)2 + k 2 = (Why?)
2 12 + 0

18/04/18
 178 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

1
(h – 4)2 + k2 = (h – 16)2
4
4 (h2 – 8h + 16 + k2) = h2 – 32h + 256
or 3h2 + 4 k2 = 192
Hence, the required locus is given by 3x2 + 4y2 = 192

10.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type Questions
1. Find the equation of the straight line which passes through the point (1, – 2) and
cuts off equal intercepts from axes.
2. Find the equation of the line passing through the point (5, 2) and perpendicular to
the line joining the points (2, 3) and (3, – 1).
3. Find the angle between the lines y = (2 – 3 ) (x + 5) and y = (2 + 3 ) (x – 7).
4. Find the equation of the lines which passes through the point (3, 4) and cuts off
intercepts from the coordinate axes such that their sum is 14.
5. Find the points on the line x + y = 4 which lie at a unit distance from the line
4x + 3y = 10.
x y x y
6. Show that the tangent of an angle between the lines + = 1 and − = 1 is
a b a b
2ab
.
a − b2
2

7. Find the equation of lines passing through (1, 2) and making angle 30° with
y-axis.
8. Find the equation of the line passing through the point of intersection of 2x + y =
5 and x + 3y + 8 = 0 and parallel to the line 3x + 4y = 7.
9. For what values of a and b the intercepts cut off on the coordinate axes by the
line ax + by + 8 = 0 are equal in length but opposite in signs to those cut off by the
line 2x – 3y + 6 = 0 on the axes.
10. If the intercept of a line between the coordinate axes is divided by the point (–5,
4) in the ratio 1 : 2, then find the equation of the line.
11. Find the equation of a straight line on which length of perpendicular from the
origin is four units and the line makes an angle of 120° with the positive direction
of x-axis.

18/04/18
 STRAIGHT LINES 179

[Hint: Use normal form, here ω =30°.]

12. Find the equation of one of the sides of an isosceles right angled triangle whose
hypotenuse is given by 3x + 4y = 4 and the opposite vertex of the hypotenuse is
(2, 2).
Long Answer Type
13. If the equation of the base of an equilateral triangle is x + y = 2 and the vertex is
(2, – 1), then find the length of the side of the triangle.
[Hint: Find length of perpendicular (p) from (2, – 1) to the line and use p = l sin
60°, where l is the length of side of the triangle].
14. A variable line passes through a fixed point P. The algebraic sum of the
perpendiculars drawn from the points (2, 0), (0, 2) and (1, 1) on the line is zero.
Find the coordinates of the point P.
[Hint: Let the slope of the line be m. Then the equation of the line passing
through the fixed point P (x1, y1) is y – y1 = m (x – x1). Taking the algebraic sum
of perpendicular distances equal to zero, we get y – 1 = m (x – 1). Thus (x1, y1)
is (1, 1).]
15. In what direction should a line be drawn through the point (1, 2) so that its point
6
of intersection with the line x + y = 4 is at a distance from the given point.
3
16. A straight line moves so that the sum of the reciprocals of its intercepts made on
axes is constant. Show that the line passes through a fixed point.
x y 1 1 1
[Hint: + = 1 where + = constant = (say). This implies that
a b a b k
k k
+ =1 line passes through the fixed point (k, k).]
a b
17. Find the equation of the line which passes through the point (– 4, 3) and the
portion of the line intercepted between the axes is divided internally in the ratio
5 : 3 by this point.
18. Find the equations of the lines through the point of intersection of the lines
7
x – y + 1 = 0 and 2x – 3y + 5 = 0 and whose distance from the point (3, 2) is .
5
19. If the sum of the distances of a moving point in a plane from the axes is 1, then
find the locus of the point. [Hint: Given that x + y = 1 , which gives four sides
of a square.]

18/04/18
 180 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

20. P1, P2 are points on either of the two lines y – 3 x = 2 at a distance of 5 units
from their point of intersection. Find the coordinates of the foot of perpendiculars
drawn from P1, P2 on the bisector of the angle between the given lines.
[Hint: Lines are y = 3 x + 2 and y = – 3 x + 2 according as x ≥ 0 or x < 0.
y-axis is the bisector of the angles between the lines. P1, P2 are the points on
these lines at a distance of 5 units from the point of intersection of these lines
which have a point on y-axis as common foot of perpendiculars from these
points. The y-coordinate of the foot of the perpendicular is given by 2 + 5 cos30°.]
x y
21. If p is the length of perpendicular from the origin on the line + = 1 and a2,
a b
p2, b2 are in A.P, then show that a4 + b4 = 0.

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in Exercises 22 to 41
22. A line cutting off intercept – 3 from the y-axis and the tengent at angle to the x-
3
axis is , its equation is
5
(A) 5y – 3x + 15 = 0 (B) 3y – 5x + 15 = 0
(C) 5y – 3x – 15 = 0 (D) None of these
23. Slope of a line which cuts off intercepts of equal lengths on the axes is
(A) – 1 (B) – 0
(C) 2 (D) 3
24. The equation of the straight line passing through the point (3, 2) and perpendicular
to the line y = x is
(A) x – y = 5 (B) x + y = 5
(C) x + y = 1 (D) x – y = 1
25. The equation of the line passing through the point (1, 2) and perpendicular to the
line x + y + 1 = 0 is
(A) y – x + 1 = 0 (B) y – x – 1 = 0
(C) y – x + 2 = 0 (D) y – x – 2 = 0
26. The tangent of angle between the lines whose intercepts on the axes are a, – b
and b, – a, respectively, is

18/04/18
 STRAIGHT LINES 181

a 2 − b2 b2 − a2
(A) (B)
ab 2

b2 − a2
(C) (D) None of these
2ab

x y
27. If the line + = 1 passes through the points (2, –3) and (4, –5), then (a, b) is
a b
(A) (1, 1) (B) (– 1, 1) (C) (1, – 1) (D) (– 1, –1)
28. The distance of the point of intersection of the lines 2x – 3y + 5 = 0 and 3x + 4y = 0
from the line 5x – 2y = 0 is
130 13 130
(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these
17 29 7 29 7
29. The equations of the lines which pass through the point (3, –2) and are inclined at
60° to the line 3 x + y = 1 is
(A) y + 2 = 0, 3x–y–2–3 3 =0
(B) x – 2 = 0, 3 x–y+2+3 3 =0

(C) 3 x–y–2–3 3 =0
(D) None of these

3
30. The equations of the lines passing through the point (1, 0) and at a distance
2
from the origin, are
(A) 3x+ y– 3 = 0, 3x– y– 3 =0
(B) 3x+ y+ 3 = 0, 3x– y + 3 =0
(C) x + 3 y – 3 = 0, x – 3 y – 3 =0
(D) None of these.
31. The distance between the lines y = mx + c1 and y = mx + c2 is
c1 − c2 | c1 − c2 | c2 − c1
(A) (B) (C) (D) 0
m2 + 1 1 + m2 1 + m2

18/04/18
182 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

32. The coordinates of the foot of perpendiculars from the point (2, 3) on the line
y = 3x + 4 is given by

37 −1 −1 37 10 2 1
(A) , (B) , (C) , − 10 (D) ,−
10 10 10 10 37 3 3
33. If the coordinates of the middle point of the portion of a line intercepted between
the coordinate axes is (3, 2), then the equation of the line will be
(A) 2x + 3y = 12 (B) 3x + 2y = 12 (C) 4x – 3y = 6 (D) 5x – 2y = 10
34. Equation of the line passing through (1, 2) and parallel to the line y = 3x – 1 is
(A) y + 2 = x + 1 (B) y + 2 = 3 (x + 1)
(C) y – 2 = 3 (x – 1) (D) y – 2 = x – 1
35. Equations of diagonals of the square formed by the lines x = 0, y = 0, x = 1 and
y = 1 are
(A) y = x, y + x = 1 (B) y = x, x + y = 2
1
(C) 2y = x, y + x = (D) y = 2x, y + 2x = 1
3
36. For specifying a straight line, how many geometrical parameters should be known?
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 3
37. The point (4, 1) undergoes the following two successive transformations :
(i) Reflection about the line y = x
(ii) Translation through a distance 2 units along the positive x-axis
Then the final coordinates of the point are

7 7
(A) (4, 3) (B) (3, 4) (C) (1, 4) (D) ,
2 2
38. A point equidistant from the lines 4x + 3y + 10 = 0, 5x – 12y + 26 = 0 and
7x + 24y – 50 = 0 is
(A) (1, –1) (B) (1, 1) (C) (0, 0) (D) (0, 1)
39. A line passes through (2, 2) and is perpendicular to the line 3x + y = 3. Its y-
intercept is
1 2 4
(A) (B) (C) 1 (D)
3 3 3

18/04/18
 STRAIGHT LINES 183

40. The ratio in which the line 3x + 4y + 2 = 0 divides the distance between the lines
3x + 4y + 5 = 0 and 3x + 4y – 5 = 0 is
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 3 : 7 (C) 2 : 3 (D) 2 : 5
41. One vertex of the equilateral triangle with centroid at the origin and one side as
x + y – 2 = 0 is
(A) (–1, –1) (B) (2, 2) (C) (–2, –2) (D) (2, –2)
[Hint: Let ABC be the equilateral triangle with vertex A (h, k) and let D (α, β)
2α + h 2β + k
be the point on BC. Then = 0= . Also α + β – 2 = 0 and
3 3

k −0
× ( − 1) = − 1 ].
h−0

Fill in the blank in Exercises 42 to 47.

42. If a, b, c are in A.P., then the straight lines ax + by + c = 0 will always pass
through ____.
43. The line which cuts off equal intercept from the axes and pass through
the point (1, –2) is ____.
44. Equations of the lines through the point (3, 2) and making an angle of 45° with
the line x – 2y = 3 are ____.
45. The points (3, 4) and (2, – 6) are situated on the ____ of the line 3x – 4y – 8 = 0.
46. A point moves so that square of its distance from the point (3, –2) is numerically
equal to its distance from the line 5x – 12y = 3. The equation of its locus is ____.
47. Locus of the mid-points of the portion of the line x sin θ + y cos θ = p intercepted
between the axes is ____.
State whether the statements in Exercises 48 to 56 are true or false. Justify.
48. If the vertices of a triangle have integral coordinates, then the triangle can not be
equilateral.
49. The points A (– 2, 1), B (0, 5), C (– 1, 2) are collinear.
50. Equation of the line passing through the point (a cos3θ, a sin3θ) and perpendicular
to the line x sec θ + y cosec θ = a is x cos θ – y sin θ = a sin 2θ.
51. The straight line 5x + 4y = 0 passes through the point of intersection of the
straight lines x + 2y – 10 = 0 and 2x + y + 5 = 0.
52. The vertex of an equilateral triangle is (2, 3) and the equation of the opposite side is
x + y = 2. Then the other two sides are y – 3 = (2 ± 3 ) (x – 2).

18/04/18
 184 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

53. The equation of the line joining the point (3, 5) to the point of intersection of the
lines 4x + y – 1 = 0 and 7x – 3y – 35 = 0 is equidistant from the points (0, 0) and
(8, 34).
x y 1 1 1
54. The line + = 1 moves in such a way that 2 + 2 = 2 , where c is a constant.
a b a b c
The locus of the foot of the perpendicular from the origin on the given line is
x2 + y2 = c2.
55. The lines ax + 2y + 1 = 0, bx + 3y + 1 = 0 and cx + 4y + 1 = 0 are concurrent if
a, b, c are in G.P.
56. Line joining the points (3, – 4) and (– 2, 6) is perpendicular to the line joining the
points (–3, 6) and (9, –18).
Match the questions given under Column C1 with their appropriate answers given
under the Column C2 in Exercises 57 to 59.
57.
Column C1 Column C2
(a) The coordinates of the points (i) (3, 1), (–7, 11)
P and Q on the line x + 5y = 13 which
are at a distance of 2 units from the
line 12x – 5y + 26 = 0 are

1 11 4 7
(b) The coordinates of the point on the line (ii) − , , ,
3 3 3 3
x + y = 4, which are at a unit distance
from the line 4x + 3y – 10 = 0 are

12 16
(c) The coordinates of the point on the line (iii) 1, , –3,
5 5
joining A (–2, 5) and B (3, 1) such
that AP = PQ = QB are
58. The value of the λ, if the lines
(2x + 3y + 4) + λ (6x – y + 12) = 0 are
Column C1 Column C2
3
(a) parallel to y-axis is (i) λ = −
4

18/04/18
 STRAIGHT LINES 185

1
(b) perpendicular to 7x + y – 4 = 0 is (ii) λ=−
3

17
(c) passes through (1, 2) is (iii) λ=−
41
(d) parallel to x axis is (iv) λ = 3

59. The equation of the line through the intersection of the lines 2x – 3y = 0 and
4x – 5y = 2 and
Column C1 Column C2
(a) through the point (2, 1) is (i) 2x – y = 4
(b) perpendicular to the line (ii) x + y – 5 = 0
x + 2y + 1 = 0 is
(c) parallel to the line (iii) x – y –1 = 0
3x – 4y + 5 = 0 is
(d) equally inclined to the axes is (iv) 3x – 4y – 1 = 0

18/04/18
 Chapter 11
CONIC SECTIONS

11.1 Overview
11.1.1 Sections of a cone Let l be a fixed vertical line and m be another line intersecting
it at a fixed point V and inclined to it at an angle α (Fig. 11.1).

Fig. 11.1
Suppose we rotate the line m around the line l in such a way that the angle α remains
constant. Then the surface generated is a double-napped right circular hollow cone
herein after referred as cone and extending indefinitely in both directions (Fig. 11.2).

Fig. 11.2 Fig. 11.3

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 187

The point V is called the vertex; the line l is the axis of the cone. The rotating line m is
called a generator of the cone. The vertex separates the cone into two parts called
nappes.
If we take the intersection of a plane with a cone, the section so obtained is called a
conic section. Thus, conic sections are the curves obtained by intersecting a right
circular cone by a plane.
We obtain different kinds of conic sections depending on the position of the intersecting
plane with respect to the cone and the angle made by it with the vertical axis of the
cone. Let β be the angle made by the intersecting plane with the vertical axis of the
cone (Fig.11.3).
The intersection of the plane with the cone can take place either at the vertex of the
cone or at any other part of the nappe either below or above the vertex.
When the plane cuts the nappe (other than the vertex) of the cone, we have the
following situations:
(a) When β = 90o, the section is a circle.
(b) When α < β < 90o, the section is an ellipse.
(c) When β = α; the section is a parabola.
(In each of the above three situations, the plane cuts entirely across one nappe
of the cone).
(d) When 0 ≤ β < α; the plane cuts through both the nappes and the curves of
intersection is a hyperbola.
Indeed these curves are important tools for present day exploration of outer space and
also for research into the behaviour of atomic particles.
We take conic sections as plane curves. For this purpose, it is convenient to use equivalent
definition that refer only to the plane in which the curve lies, and refer to special points
and lines in this plane called foci and directrices. According to this approach, parabola,
ellipse and hyperbola are defined in terms of a fixed point (called focus) and fixed line
(called directrix) in the plane.
If S is the focus and l is the directrix, then the set of all points in the plane whose
distance from S bears a constant ratio e called eccentricity to their distance from l is a
conic section.
As special case of ellipse, we obtain circle for which e = 0 and hence we study it
differently.
11.1.2 Circle A circle is the set of all points in a plane which are at a fixed distance
from a fixed point in the plane. The fixed point is called the centre of the circle and the
distance from centre to any point on the circle is called the radius of the circle.

18/04/18
 188 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

The equation of a circle with radius r having

centre (h, k) is given by (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2
The general equation of the circle is given by
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, where g, f and c are
constants.
(a) The centre of this circle is (– g, – f )
(b) The radius of the circle is g2 + f 2 − c
The general equation of the circle passing through
the origin is given by x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy = 0. Fig. 11.4
2 2
General equation of second degree i.e., ax + 2hxy + by + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 represent
a circle if (i) the coefficient of x2 equals the coefficient of y2, i.e., a = b ≠ 0 and (ii) the
coefficient of xy is zero, i.e., h = 0.
The parametric equations of the circle x2 + y2 = r2 are given by x = r cosθ, y = r sinθ
where θ is the parameter and the parametric equations of the circle (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2
are given by
x – h = r cosθ, y – k = r sinθ
or x = h + r cosθ, y = k + r sinθ.

Fig. 11.5
Note: The general equation of the circle involves three
constants which implies that at least three conditions are
required to determine a circle uniquely.

11.1.3 Parabola
A parabola is the set of points P whose distances from a
fixed point F in the plane are equal to their distances from
a fixed line l in the plane. The fixed point F is called focus
and the fixed line l the directrix of the parabola. Fig. 11.6

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 189

Standard equations of parabola

The four possible forms of parabola are shown below in Fig. 11.7 (a) to (d)
The latus rectum of a parabola is a line segment perpendicular to the axis of the
parabola, through the focus and whose end points lie on the parabola (Fig. 11.7).

Fig. 11.7

Main facts about the parabola

Forms of Parabolas y2 = 4ax y2 = – 4ax x2 = 4ay x2 = – 4ay

Axis y=0 y=0 x=0 x=0
Directix x=–a x=a y=–a y=a
Vertex (0, 0) (0, 0) (0, 0) (0, 0)
Focus (a, 0) (– a, 0) (0, a) (0, – a)
Length of latus 4a 4a 4a 4a
rectum
Equations of latus x=a x=–a y=a y=–a
rectum

18/04/18
 190 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Focal distance of a point

Let the equation of the parabola be y2 = 4ax and P(x, y) be a point on it. Then the
distance of P from the focus (a, 0) is called the focal distance of the point, i.e.,
FP = ( x − a )2 + y 2
= ( x − a) 2 + 4ax
= ( x + a) 2
= |x+a|
11.1.4 Ellipse An ellipse is the set of points in a plane, the sum of whose distances
from two fixed points is constant. Alternatively, an ellipse is the set of all points in the
plane whose distances from a fixed point in the plane bears a constant ratio, less than,
to their distance from a fixed line in the plane. The fixed point is called focus, the fixed
line a directrix and the constant ratio (e) the centricity of the ellipse.
We have two standard forms of the ellipse, i.e.,
x2 y 2 x2 y2
(i) + = 1 and (ii) + = 1,
a 2 b2 b2 a 2
In both cases a > b and b2 = a2(1 – e2), e < 1.
In (i) major axis is along x-axis and minor along y-axis and in (ii) major axis is along y-
axis and minor along x-axis as shown in Fig. 11.8 (a) and (b) respectively.
Main facts about the Ellipse

Fig. 11.8

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 191

x2 y 2 x2 y2
Forms of the ellipse + =1 + =1
a 2 b2 b2 a 2
a>b a>b
Equation of major axis y=0 x=0
Length of major axis 2a 2a
Equation of Minor axis x=0 y=0
Length of Minor axis 2b 2b
a a
Directrices x=± y=±
e e
Equation of latus rectum x = ± ae y = ± ae

2b2 2b 2
Length of latus rectum
a a
Centre (0, 0) (0, 0)

Focal Distance

x2 y 2
The focal distance of a point (x, y) on the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 is
a b
a – e | x | from the nearer focus
a + e | x | from the farther focus

Sum of the focal distances of any point on an ellipse is constant and equal to the length
of the major axis.

11.1.5 Hyperbola A hyperbola is the set of all points in a plane, the difference of
whose distances from two fixed points is constant. Alternatively, a hyperbola is the set
of all points in a plane whose distances from a fixed point in the plane bears a constant
ratio, greater than 1, to their distances from a fixed line in the plane. The fixed point is
called a focus, the fixed line a directrix and the constant ratio denoted by e, the ecentricity
of the hyperbola.
We have two standard forms of the hyperbola, i.e.,

x2 y 2 y 2 x2
(i) − =1 and (ii) − =1
a 2 b2 a 2 b2

18/04/18
 192 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Here b2 = a2 (e2 – 1), e > 1.

In (i) transverse axis is along x-axis and conjugate axis along y-axis where as in (ii)
transverse axis is along y-axis and conjugate axis along x-axis.

Fig. 11.9

Main facts about the Hyperbola

x2 y 2 y 2 x2
Forms of the hyperbola − =1 − =1
a 2 b2 a 2 b2
Equation of transverse axis y=0 x=0
Equation of conjugate axis x=0 y=0
Length of transverse axis 2a 2a
Foci (± ae, 0) (0, ± ae)
Equation of latus rectum x = ± ae y = ± ae

2b2 2b 2
Length of latus rectum
a a
Centre (0, 0) (0, 0)

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 193

Focal distance

x2 y 2
The focal distance of any point (x, y) on the hyperbola − = 1 is
a 2 b2
e | x | – a from the nearer focus
e | x | + a from the farther focus
Differences of the focal distances of any point on a hyperbola is constant and equal to
the length of the transverse axis.

Parametric equation of conics

Conics Parametric equations

(i) Parabola : y2 = 4ax x = at2, y = 2at; – ∞ < t < ∞

x2 y 2
(ii) Ellipse : + =1 x = a cosθ, y = b sinθ; 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π
a 2 b2

x2 y 2
(iii) Hyperbola : 2 − 2 = 1 x = a secθ, y = b tanθ, where
a b
π π π 3π
− <θ< ; <θ<
2 2 2 2
11.2 Solved Examples
Short Answer Type
Example 1 Find the centre and radius of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y = 8
Solution we write the given equation in the form (x2 – 2x) + ( y2 + 4y) = 8
Now, completing the squares, we get
(x2 – 2x + 1) + ( y2 + 4y + 4) = 8 + 1 + 4
(x – 1)2 + (y + 2)2 = 13
Comparing it with the standard form of the equation of the circle, we see that the
centre of the circle is (1, –2) and radius is 13 .
Example 2 If the equation of the parabola is x2 = – 8y, find coordinates of the focus,
the equation of the directrix and length of latus rectum.
Solution The given equation is of the form x2 = – 4ay where a is positive.
Therefore, the focus is on y-axis in the negative direction and parabola opens downwards.

18/04/18
 194 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Comparing the given equation with standard form, we get a = 2.

Therefore, the coordinates of the focus are (0, –2) and the the equation of directrix is
y = 2 and the length of the latus rectum is 4a, i.e., 8.
Example 3 Given the ellipse with equation 9x2 + 25y2 = 225, find the major and minor
axes, eccentricity, foci and vertices.
Solution We put the equation in standard form by dividing by 225 and get

x2 y 2
+ =1
25 9

4
This shows that a = 5 and b = 3. Hence 9 = 25(1 – e2), so e = . Since the denominator
5
of x2 is larger, the major axis is along x-axis, minor axis along y-axis, foci are (4, 0) and
(– 4, 0) and vertices are (5, 0) and (–5, 0).
36
Example 4 Find the equation of the ellipse with foci at (± 5, 0) and x = as one of
5
the directrices.
a 36 5
Solution We have ae = 5, = which give a2 = 36 or a = 6. Therefore, e = .
e 5 6

2 25 x2 y2
Now b = a 1 − e = 6 1 − = 11 . Thus, the equation of the ellipse is + = 1.
36 36 11
Example 5 For the hyperbola 9x2 – 16y2 = 144, find the vertices, foci and eccentricity.

x2 y2
Solution The equation of the hyperbola can be written as – = 1 , so a = 4, b = 3
16 9
9 25 5
and 9 = 16 (e2 – 1), so that e2 = +1= , which gives e = . Vertices are (± a, 0) =
16 16 4
(± 4, 0) and foci are (± ae, 0) = (± 5, 0).
5
Example 6 Find the equation of the hyperbola with vertices at (0, ± 6) and e = .
3
Find its foci.
Solution Since the vertices are on the y-axes (with origin at the mid-point), the equation
y2 x2
is of the form − = 1.
a 2 b2

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 195

25
As vertices are (0, ± 6), a = 6, b2 = a2 (e2 – 1) = 36 − 1 = 64 , so the required
9

y 2 x2
equation of the hyperbola is − = 1 and the foci are (0, ± ae) = (0, ± 10).
36 64
Long Answer Type

Example 7 Find the equation of the circle which passes through the points (20, 3),
(19, 8) and (2, –9). Find its centre and radius.

Solution By substitution of coordinates in the general equation of the circle given by

x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, we have
40g + 6f + c = – 409
38g + 16 f + c = – 425
4g – 18 f + c = – 85
From these three equations, we get
g = – 7, f = – 3 and c = –111
Hence, the equation of the circle is
x2 + y2 – 14x – 6y – 111 = 0
or (x – 7)2 + (y – 3)2 = 132
Therefore, the centre of the circle is (7, 3) and radius is 13.
Example 8 An equilateral triangle is inscribed in the parabola y2 = 4ax whose one
vertex is at the vertex of the parabola. Find the length of the side of the triangle.
Solution As shown in the figure APQ denotes the equilateral triangle with its equal
sides of length l (say).

Here AP = l so AR = l cos30°
3
= l
2
l
Also, PR = l sin 30° = .
2

Thus l 3 , l are the coordinates of the point P lying on the

2 2
parabola y2 = 4ax. Fig. 11.10

18/04/18
 196 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

l2 l 3
Therefore, = 4a ⇒l = 8 a 3.
4 2

Thus, 8 a 3 is the required length of the side of the equilateral triangle inscribed in
the parabola y2 = 4ax.

Example 9 Find the equation of the ellipse which passes through the point (–3, 1) and
2
has eccentricity , with x-axis as its major axis and centre at the origin.
5

x2 y 2
Solution Let 2 + 2 = 1 be the equation of the ellipse passing through the point (–3, 1).
a b

9 1
Therefore, we have 2
+ 2 =1.
a b
or 9b2 + a2 = a2 b2
or 9a2 (a2 – e2) + a2 = a2 a2 (1 – e2) (Using b2 = a2 (1 – e2)
32
or a2 =
3
32 2 32
Again b2 = a2 (1 – e2) = 1− =
3 5 5
Hence, the required equation of the ellipse is

x2 y 2
+ = 1
32 32
3 5
or 3x2 + 5y2 = 32.
Example 10 Find the equation of the hyperbola whose vertices are (± 6, 0) and one of
the directrices is x = 4.
Solution As the vertices are on the x-axis and their middle point is the origin, the
x2 y 2
equation is of the type − = 1.
a 2 b2

a
Here b2 = a2 (e2 – 1), vertices are (± a, 0) and directrices are given by x = ± .
e

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 197

a 3 9
Thus a = 6, = 4 and so e = which gives b2 = 36 − 1 = 45
e 2 4
x2 y2
Consequently, the required equation of the hyperbola is − =1
36 45
Objective Type Questions
Each of the examples from 11 to 16, has four possible options, out of which one is
correct. Choose the correct answer from the given four options (M.C.Q.)

Example 11 The equation of the circle in the first quadrant touching each coordinate
axis at a distance of one unit from the origin is:
(A) x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1= 0 (B) x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y – 1 = 0
2 2
(C) x + y – 2x – 2y = 0 (C) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 1 = 0
Solution The correct choice is (A), since the equation can be written as (x – 1)2 +
(y – 1)2 = 1 which represents a circle touching both the axes with its centre (1, 1) and
radius one unit.

Example 12 The equation of the circle having centre (1, –2) and passing through the
point of intersection of the lines 3x + y = 14 and 2x + 5y = 18 is
(A) x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 20 = 0 (B) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 20 = 0
2 2
(C) x + y + 2x – 4y – 20 = 0 (D) x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – 20 = 0
Solution The correct option is (A). The point of intersection of 3x + y – 14 = 0 and 2x
+ 5y – 18 = 0 are x = 4, y = 2, i.e., the point (4, 2)
Therefore, the radius is = 9 + 16 = 5 and hence the equation of the circle is given by
(x – 1) + (y + 2)2 = 25
2

or x + y2 – 2x + 4y – 20 = 0.
2

Example 13 The area of the triangle formed by the lines joining the vertex of the
parabola x2 = 12y to the ends of its latus rectum is
(A) 12 sq. units
(B) 16 sq. units
(C) 18 sq. units
(D) 24 sq. units
Solution The correct option is (C). From the
figure, OPQ represent the triangle whose area
is to be determined. The area of the triangle
1 1
= PQ × OF = (12 × 3) = 18 Fig. 11.11
2 2

18/04/18
 198 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Example 14 The equations of the lines joining the vertex of the parabola y2 = 6x to the
points on it which have abscissa 24 are
(A) y ± 2x = 0
(B) 2y ± x = 0
(C) x ± 2y = 0
(D) 2x ± y = 0

Solution (B) is the correct choice. Let P and Q be

points on the parabola y2 = 6x and OP, OQ be the lines
joining the vertex O to the points P and Q whose
abscissa are 24.
Thus y2 = 6 × 24 = 144
or y = ± 12.
Therefore the coordinates of the points P and Q are
(24, 12) and (24, –12) respectively. Hence the lines are
12
y= ± x 2y x.
24
Fig. 11.12
Example 15 The equation of the ellipse whose centre is at the origin and the x-axis,
the major axis, which passes through the points (–3, 1) and (2, –2) is
(A) 5x2 + 3y2 32 (B) 3x2 + 5y2 = 32
(C) 5x2 – 3y2 = 32 (D) 3x2 + 5y2 + 32 = 0

x2 y 2
Solution (B) is the correct choice. Let 2 + 2 = 1 be the equation of the ellipse.
a b
Then according to the given conditions, we have
9 1 1 1 1
2
+ 2 =1 and 2
+ 2 =
a b a b 4

32 32
which gives a2 = and b2 = .
3 5
Hence, required equation of ellipse is 3x2 + 5y2 = 32.
Example 16 The length of the transverse axis along x-axis with centre at origin of a
hyperbola is 7 and it passes through the point (5, –2). The equation of the hyperbola is

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 199

4 2 196 2 49 2 51 2
(A) x − y =1 (B) x − y =1
49 51 4 196

4 2 51 2
(C) x − y =1 (D) none of these
49 196

x2 y 2
Solution (C) is the correct choice. Let − = 1 represent the hyperbola. Then
a 2 b2
7
according to the given condition, the length of transverse axis, i.e., 2a = 7 ⇒ a = .
2
Also, the point (5, –2) lies on the hyperbola, so, we have
4 4
(25) – 2 = 1 which gives
49 b

196
b2 = . Hence, the equation of the hyperbola is
51

4 2 51 2
x − y =1
49 196
State whether the statements in Examples 17 and 18 are correct or not. Justify.
Example 17 Circle on which the coordinates of any point are (2 + 4 cosθ, –1 +
4 sinθ) where θ is parameter is given by (x – 2)2 + (y + 1)2 = 16.
Solution True. From given conditions, we have
x = 2 + 4 cosθ ⇒ (x – 2) = 4 cosθ
and y = –1 + 4 sinθ ⇒ y + 1 = 4 sinθ.
Squaring
and adding, we get (x – 2)2 + (y + 1)2 = 16.

Example 18 A bar of given length moves with its

extremities on two fixed straight lines at right angles.
Any point of the bar describes an ellipse.
Solution True. Let P (x, y) be any point on the bar
such that PA = a and PB = b, clearly from the
Fig. 11.13. Fig. 11.13

18/04/18
 200 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

x = OL = b cosθ and
y = PL = a sinθ

x2 y 2
These give + = 1, which is an ellipse.
b2 a2
Fill in the blanks in Examples 19 to 23.

Example 19 The equation of the circle which passes through the point (4, 5) and
has its centre at (2, 2) is ________________ .

Solution As the circle is passing through the point (4, 5) and its centre is (2, 2) so its
radius is (4 − 2)2 + (5 − 2)2 = 13 . Therefore the required answer is
(x – 2)2 + (y – 2)2 = 13.
Example 20 A circle has radius 3 units and its centre lies on the line y = x – 1. If it
passes through the point (7, 3), its equation is ________________ .
Solution Let (h, k) be the centre of the circle. Then k = h – 1. Therefore, the equation
of the circle is given by (x – h)2 + [y – (h – 1)]2 = 9 ... (1)
Given that the circle passes through the point (7, 3) and hence we get
(7 – h)2 + (3 – (h – 1))2 = 9
or (7 – h)2 + (4 – h)2 = 9
or h2 – 11h + 28 = 0
which gives (h – 7) (h – 4) = 0 ⇒ h = 4 or h = 7
Therefore, the required equations of the circles are x2 + y2 – 8x – 6y + 16 = 0
or x2 + y2 – 14x – 12y + 76 = 0
Example 21 If the latus rectum of an ellipse with axis along x-axis and centre at origin
is 10, distance between foci = length of minor axis, then the equation of the ellipse is
________________ .

2b 2
Solution Given that = 10 and 2ae = 2b ⇒ b = ae
a
Again, we know that
b2 = a2 (1 – e2)
1
or 2a2e2 = a2 ⇒ e = (using b = ae)
2
Thus a= b 2

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 201

2b2
Again = 10
a
or b= 5 2. Thus we get a = 10
Therefore, the required equation of the ellipse is

x2 y2
+ = 1
100 50
Example 22 The equation of the parabola whose focus is the point (2, 3) and
directrix is the line x – 4y + 3 = 0 is ________________ .
Solution Using the definition of parabola, we have

x − 4y + 3
( x − 2) 2 + ( y – 3) 2 =
17
Squaring, we get
17 (x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y + 13) = x2 + 16y2 + 9 – 8xy – 24y + 6x
or 16x2 + y2 + 8xy – 74x – 78y + 212 = 0

x2 y 2
Example 23 The eccentricity of the hyperbola − = 1 which passes through
a 2 b2
the points (3, 0) and (3 2 , 2) is ________________ .

x2 y 2
Solution Given that the hyperbola − = 1 is passing through the points (3, 0) and
a 2 b2
(3 2, 2) , so we get a2 = 9 and b2 = 4.
Again, we know that b2 = a2 (e2 – 1). This gives
4 = 9 (e2 – 1)
13
or e2 =
9

13
or e= .
3

18/04/18
 202 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

11.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
1. Find the equation of the circle which touches the both axes in first quadrant and
whose radius is a.

2at a (1 − t 2 )
2. Show that the point (x, y) given by x = and y = lies on a circle
1 + t2 1 + t2
for all real values of t such that –1 < t < 1 where a is any given real numbers.
3. If a circle passes through the point (0, 0) (a, 0), (0, b) then find the coordinates of
its centre.
4. Find the equation of the circle which touches x-axis and whose centre is (1, 2).
5. If the lines 3x – 4y + 4 = 0 and 6x – 8y – 7 = 0 are tangents to a circle, then find
the radius of the circle.
[Hint: Distance between given parallel lines gives the diameter of the circle.]
6. Find the equation of a circle which touches both the axes and the line 3x – 4y + 8 = 0
and lies in the third quadrant.
[Hint: Let a be the radius of the circle, then (– a, – a) will be centre and
perpendicular distance from the centre to the given line gives the radius of the
circle.]
7. If one end of a diameter of the circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y + 11 = 0 is (3, 4), then find
the coordinate of the other end of the diameter.
8. Find the equation of the circle having (1, –2) as its centre and passing through
3x + y = 14, 2x + 5y = 18
9. If the line y = 3 x + k touches the circle x2 + y2 = 16, then find the value of k.
[Hint: Equate perpendicular distance from the centre of the circle to its radius].
10. Find the equation of a circle concentric with the circle x2 + y2 – 6x + 12y + 15 = 0
and has double of its area.
[Hint: concentric circles have the same centre.]
11. If the latus rectum of an ellipse is equal to half of minor axis, then find its
eccentricity.
12. Given the ellipse with equation 9x2 + 25y2 = 225, find the eccentricity and foci.
5
13. If the eccentricity of an ellipse is and the distance between its foci is 10, then
8
find latus rectum of the ellipse.

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 203

2
14. Find the equation of ellipse whose eccentricity is , latus rectum is 5 and the
3
centre is (0, 0).
x2 y2
15. Find the distance between the directrices of the ellipse + = 1.
36 20
16. Find the coordinates of a point on the parabola y2 = 8x whose focal distance is 4.
17. Find the length of the line-segment joining the vertex of the parabola y2 = 4ax
and a point on the parabola where the line-segment makes an angle θ to the x-
axis.
18. If the points (0, 4) and (0, 2) are respectively the vertex and focus of a parabola,
then find the equation of the parabola.
19. If the line y = mx + 1 is tangent to the parabola y2 = 4x then find the value of m.
[Hint: Solving the equation of line and parabola, we obtain a quadratic equation
and then apply the tangency condition giving the value of m].
20. If the distance between the foci of a hyperbola is 16 and its eccentricity is 2 ,
then obtain the equation of the hyperbola.
21. Find the eccentricity of the hyperbola 9y2 – 4x2 = 36.
3
22. Find the equation of the hyperbola with eccentricity and foci at (± 2, 0).
2
Long Answer Type
23. If the lines 2x – 3y = 5 and 3x – 4y = 7 are the diameters of a circle of area 154
square units, then obtain the equation of the circle.
24. Find the equation of the circle which passes through the points (2, 3) and (4, 5)
and the centre lies on the straight line y – 4x + 3 = 0.
25. Find the equation of a circle whose centre is (3, –1) and which cuts off a chord
of length 6 units on the line 2x – 5y + 18 = 0.
[Hint: To determine the radius of the circle, find the perpendicular distance
from the centre to the given line.]
26. Find the equation of a circle of radius 5 which is touching another circle
x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 20 = 0 at (5, 5).
27. Find the equation of a circle passing through the point (7, 3) having radius 3 units
and whose centre lies on the line y = x – 1.
28. Find the equation of each of the following parabolas
(a) Directrix x = 0, focus at (6, 0) (b) Vertex at (0, 4), focus at (0, 2)
(c) Focus at (–1, –2), directrix x – 2y + 3 = 0

18/04/18
 204 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

29. Find the equation of the set of all points the sum of whose distances from the
points (3, 0) and (9, 0) is 12.
2
30. Find the equation of the set of all points whose distance from (0, 4) are of
3
their distance from the line y = 9.
31. Show that the set of all points such that the difference of their distances from (4, 0)
and (– 4, 0) is always equal to 2 represent a hyperbola.
32. Find the equation of the hyperbola with
4
(a) Vertices (± 5, 0), foci (± 7, 0) (b) Vertices (0, ± 7), e =
3

(c) Foci (0, ± 10 ), passing through (2, 3)

Objective Type Questions

State Whether the statements in each of the Exercises from 33 to 40 are True or False.
Justify
33. The line x + 3y = 0 is a diameter of the circle x2 + y2 + 6x + 2y = 0.
34. The shortest distance from the point (2, –7) to the circle x2 + y2 – 14x – 10y – 151 = 0
is equal to 5.
[Hint: The shortest distance is equal to the difference of the radius and the
distance between the centre and the given point.]
35. If the line lx + my = 1 is a tangent to the circle x2 + y2 = a2, then the point (l, m)
lies on a circle.
[Hint: Use that distance from the centre of the circle to the given line is equal to
radius of the circle.]
36. The point (1, 2) lies inside the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 6y + 1 = 0.
37. The line lx + my + n = 0 will touch the parabola y2 = 4ax if ln = am2.

x2 y2
38. If P is a point on the ellipse + = 1 whose foci are S and S′, then PS + PS′ = 8.
16 25

x2 y2
39. The line 2x + 3y = 12 touches the ellipse + = 2 at the point (3, 2).
9 4

40. The locus of the point of intersection of lines 3 x − y − 4 3k = 0 and

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 205

3kx + ky – 4 3 = 0 for different value of k is a hyperbola whose eccentricity

is 2.
[Hint:Eliminate k between the given equations]

Fill in the Blank in Exercises from 41 to 46.

41. The equation of the circle having centre at (3, – 4) and touching the line
5x + 12y – 12 = 0 is ________________ .
[Hint: To determine radius find the perpendicular distance from the centre of
the circle to the line.]
42. The equation of the circle circumscribing the triangle whose sides are the lines
y = x + 2, 3y = 4x, 2y = 3x is ________________ .
43. An ellipse is described by using an endless string which is passed over two pins.
If the axes are 6 cm and 4 cm, the length of the string and distance between the
pins are ____________.
44. The equation of the ellipse having foci (0, 1), (0, –1) and minor axis of length 1 is
________________ .
45. The equation of the parabola having focus at (–1, –2) and the directrix
x – 2y + 3 = 0 is ________________ .
5
46. The equation of the hyperbola with vertices at (0, ± 6) and eccentricity is
3
______________ and its foci are ________________ .

Choose the correct answer out of the given four options (M.C.Q.) in Exercises 47 to 59.
47. The area of the circle centred at (1, 2) and passing through (4, 6) is
(A) 5π (B) 10π (C) 25π (D) none of these
48. Equation of a circle which passes through (3, 6) and touches the axes is
(A) x2 + y2 + 6x + 6y + 3 = 0 (B) x 2 + y2 – 6x – 6y – 9 = 0
(C) x2 + y2 – 6x – 6y + 9 = 0 (D) none of these
49. Equation of the circle with centre on the y-axis and passing through the origin
and the point (2, 3) is
(A) x2 + y2 + 13y = 0 (B) 3x 2 + 3y2 + 13x + 3 = 0
(C) 6x2 + 6y2 – 13x = 0 (D) x 2 + y2 + 13x + 3 = 0

18/04/18
206 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

50. The equation of a circle with origin as centre and passing through the vertices of
an equilateral triangle whose median is of length 3a is
(A) x2 + y2 = 9a2 (B) x 2 + y2 = 16a2
(C) x2 + y2 = 4a2 (D) x 2 + y2 = a2
[Hint: Centroid of the triangle coincides with the centre of the circle and the
2
radius of the circle is of the length of the median]
3
51. If the focus of a parabola is (0, –3) and its directrix is y = 3, then its equation is
(A) x2 = –12y (B) x 2 = 12y (C) y2 = –12x (D) y2 = 12x
52. If the parabola y2 = 4ax passes through the point (3, 2), then the length of its latus
rectum is
2 4 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) 4
3 3 3
53. If the vertex of the parabola is the point (–3, 0) and the directrix is the line x + 5 = 0,
then its equation is
(A) y2 = 8 (x + 3) (B) x2 = 8 (y + 3)
(C) y2 = – 8 (x + 3) (D) y2 = 8 ( x + 5)
54. The equation of the ellipse whose focus is (1, –1), the directrix the line x – y – 3
1
= 0 and eccentricity is
2
(A) 7x2 + 2xy + 7y2 – 10x + 10y + 7 = 0
(B) 7x2 + 2xy + 7y2 + 7 = 0
(C) 7x2 + 2xy + 7y2 + 10x – 10y – 7 = 0
(D) none
55. The length of the latus rectum of the ellipse 3x2 + y2 = 12 is
4
(A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 8 (D)
3

x2 y 2
56. If e is the eccentricity of the ellipse + = 1 (a < b), then
a 2 b2
(A) b2 = a2 (1 – e2) (B) a2 = b2 (1 – e2)
(C) a2 = b2 (e2 – 1) (D) b2 = a2 (e2 – 1)

18/04/18
 CONIC SECTIONS 207

57. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose latus rectum is 8 and conjugate axis is
equal to half of the distance between the foci is

4 4 2
(A) (B) (C) (D) none of these
3 3 3

58. The distance between the foci of a hyperbola is 16 and its eccentricity is 2 . Its
equation is

x2 y2
2 2
(A) x – y = 32 (B) − =1 (C) 2x – 3y2 = 7 (D) none of these
4 9

3
59. Equation of the hyperbola with eccentricty and foci at (± 2, 0) is
2

x2 y 2 4 x2 y 2 4 x2 y2
(A) − = (B) − = (C) − = 1 (D) none of these
4 5 9 9 9 9 4 9

18/04/18
 Chapter 12
INTRODUCTION TO THREE
DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY

12.1 Overview
12.1.1 Coordinate axes and coordinate planes Let X′OX, Y′OY, Z′OZ be three
mutually perpendicular lines that pass through a point O such that X′OX and Y′OY lies
in the plane of the paper and line Z′OZ is perpendicular to the plane of paper. These
three lines are called rectangular axes ( lines X′OX, Y′OY and Z′OZ are called x-axis,
y-axis and z-axis). We call this coordinate system
a three dimensional space, or simply space.
The three axes taken together in pairs determine
xy, yz, zx-plane , i.e., three coordinate planes. Each
plane divide the space in two parts and the three
coordinate planes together divide the space into
eight regions (parts) called octant, namely (i) OXYZ
(ii) OX′YZ (iii) OXY′Z (iv) OXYZ′ (v) OXY′Z′
(vi) OX′YZ′ (vii) OX′Y′Z (viii) OX′Y′Z′.
(Fig.12.1).
Let P be any point in the space, not in a coordinate
plane, and through P pass planes parallel to the
coordinate planes yz, zx and xy meeting the Fig. 12.1
coordinate axes in the points A, B, C respectively.
Three planes are
(i) ADPF || yz-plane (ii) BDPE || xz-plane
(iii) CFPE || xy-plane
These planes determine a rectangular parallelopiped which has three pairs of rectangular
faces
(A D P F, O B E C),(B D P E, C F A O) and (A O B D, FPEC) (Fig 12.2)

12.1.2 Coordinate of a point in space An arbitrary point P in three-dimensional

space is assigned coordinates (x0, y0, z0) provided that

18/04/18
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 209

(1) the plane through P parallel to the yz-plane intersects the x-axis at (x0, 0, 0);
(2) the plane through P parallel to the xz-plane intersects the y-axis at (0, y0, 0);
(3) the plane through P parallel to the xy-plane intersects the z-axis at (0, 0, z0).
The space coordinates (x0, y0, z0) are called the Cartesian coordinates of P or simply
the rectangular coordinates of P.
Moreover we can say, the plane ADPF
( Fig.12.2) is perpendicular to the x-axis or x-
axis is perpendicular to the plane ADPF and
hence perpendicular to every line in the plane.
Therefore, PA is perpendicular to OX and OX
is perpendicular to PA. Thus A is the foot of
perpendicular drawn from P on x-axis and
distance of this foot A from O is x-coordinate
of point P. Similarly, we call B and C are the
feet of perpendiculars drawn from point P on
the y and z-axis and distances of these feet B
and C from O are the y and z coordinates of Fig. 12.2
the point P.
Hence the coordinates x, y z of a point P are the perpendicular distance of P from the
three coordinate planes yz, zx and xy, respectively.

12.1.3 Sign of coordinates of a point The distance measured along or parallel to OX,
OY, OZ will be positive and distance moved along or parallel to OX′, OY′, OZ′ will be
negative. The three mutually perpendicular coordinate plane which in turn divide the
space into eight parts and each part is know as octant. The sign of the coordinates of
a point depend upon the octant in which it lies. In first octant all the coordinates are
positive and in seventh octant all coordinates are negative. In third octant x, y coordinates
are negative and z is positive. In fifth octant x, y are positive and z is negative. In fourth
octant x, z are positive and y is negative. In sixth octant x, z are negative y is positive.
In the second octant x is negative and y and z are positive.
Octants → I II III IV V VI VII VIII
Coordinates OXYZ OX′YZ OX′Y′Z OXY′Z OXYZ′ OX′YZ′ OX′Y′Z′ OXY′Z′
↓
x + – – + + – – +
y + + – – + + – –
z + + + + – – – –

18/04/18
 210 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

12.1.4 Distance formula The distance between two points P (x1, y1, z1) and Q (x2, y2,
z2) is given by

PQ = x2 − x1 )2 + ( y2 − y1 ) 2 + ( z2 − z1 )2
A paralleopiped is formed by planes drawn through the points (x1, y1, z1) and (x2, y2, z2)
parallel to the coordinate planes. The length of edges are x2– x1, y2 – y1, z2 – z1 and
length of diagonal is ( x2 − x1 ) 2 + ( y2 − y1 ) 2 + ( z2 − z1 ) 2 .

12.1.5 Section formula The coordinates of the point R which divides the line segment
joining two points P(x1, y1, z1) and Q(x2, y2, z2) internally or externally in the ratio m : n
 mx2 + nx1 my2 + ny1 mz2 + nz1   mx2 − nx1 my2 − ny1 mz2 − nz1 
are given by  m + n , m + n , m + n ,  ,  m − n , m − n , m − n  ,
   
respectively.
The coordinates of the mid-point of the line segment joining two points P (x1, y1, z1) and
 x1 + x2 y1 + y2 z1 + z2 
Q (x2, y2, z2) are  , , .
 2 2 2 
The coordinates of the centroid of the triangle, whose vertices are (x1, y1, z1), (x2, y2, z2)
 x1 + x2 + x3 y1 + y2 + y3 z1 + z2 + z3 
and x3, y3, z3 are  , , .
 3 3 3 

12.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type
Example 1 Locate the points (i) (2, 3, 4)
(ii) (–2, –2, 3) in space.
Solution
(i) To locate the point (2, 3, 4) in space, we
move 2 units from O along the positive
direction of x-axis. Let this point be A
(2, 0, 0). From the point A moves 3 units
parallel to +ve direction of y-axis.Let
this point be B (2, 3, 0). From the point
B moves 4 units along positive direction
of z-axis. Let this point be P (2, 3, 4)
Fig.(12.3). Fig. 12.3

18/04/18
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 211

(ii) From the origin, move 2 units along the negative direction of x-axis. Let this point
be A (–2, 0, 0). From the point A move 2 units parallel to negative direction of
y-axis.
Let this point be B (–2, –2, 0). From B move 3 units parallel to positive direction of
z - axis. This is our required point Q (–2, –2, 3) (Fig.12.4.)

Fig. 12.4
Example 2 Sketch the plane (i) x = 1 (ii) y = 3 (iii) z = 4
Solution
(i) The equation of the plan x = 0 represents the yz-plane and equation of the plane
x = 1 represents the plane parallel to yz-plane at a distance 1 unit above yz-
plane. Now, we draw a plane parallel to yz- plane at a distance 1 unit above yz-
plane Fig.12.5(a).
(ii) The equation of the plane y = 0 represents the xz plane and the equation of the
plane y = 3 represents the plane parallel to xz plane at a distance 3 unit above xz
plane (Fig. 12.5(b)).
(iii) The equation of the plane z = 0 represents the xy-plane and z = 3 represents the
plane parallel to xy-plane at a distance 3 unit above xy-plane (Fig. 12.5(c)).

(a) (b) (c)

Fig. 12.5

18/04/18
 212 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Example 3 Let L, M, N be the feet of the perpendiculars drawn from a point P (3, 4, 5)
on the x, y and z-axes respectively. Find the coordinates of L, M and N.
Solution Since L is the foot of perpendicular from P on the x-axis, its y and z co-
ordinates are zero. The coordinates of L is (3, 0, 0). Similarly, the coordinates of M and
N are (0, 4, 0) and (0, 0, 5), respectively.
Example 4 Let L, M, N be the feet of the
perpendicular segments drawn from a point
P (3, 4, 5) on the xy, yz and zx-planes, respectively.
What are the coordinates of L, M and N?
Solution Since L is the foot of perpendicular
segment from P on the xy-plane, z-coordinate is
zero in the xy-plane. Hence, coordinates of L is
(3, 4, 0). Similarly, we can find the coordinates of
of M (0, 4, 5) and N (3, 0, 5), Fig.12.6.
Example 5 Let L, M, N are the feet of the
perpendiculars drawn from the point P (3, 4, 5) on Fig. 12.6
the xy, yz and zx-planes, respectively. Find the
distance of these points L, M, N from the
point P, Fig.12.7.
Solution L is the foot of perpendicular drawn
from the point P (3, 4, 5) to the xy-plane.
Therefore, the coordinate of the point L is
(3, 4, 0). The distance between the point (3, 4,
5) and (3, 4, 0) is 5. Similarly, we can find the
lengths of the foot of perpendiculars on yz and
zx-plane which are 3 and 4 units, respectively.
Example 6 Using distance formula show that
the points P (2, 4, 6), Q (– 2, – 2, – 2) and
R (6, 10, 14) are collinear. Fig. 12.7
Solution Three points are collinear if the sum of any two distances is equal to the third
distance.

PQ = (–2 – 2) 2 + (–2 – 4) 2 + (–2 – 6) 2 = 16 + 36 + 64 = 116 = 2 29

QR = (6 + 2) 2 + (10 + 2)2 + (14 + 2) 2 = 64 +144 + 256 = 464 = 4 29

PR = (6 − 2) 2 + (10 − 4) 2 + (14 – 6) 2 = 16 + 36 + 64 = 116 = 2 29

Since QR = PQ + PR. Therefore, the given points are collinear.

18/04/18
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 213

Example 7 Find the coordinates of a point equidistant from the four points O (0, 0, 0),
A (l, 0, 0), B (0, m, 0) and C (0, 0, n).
Solution Let P (x, y, z) be the required point. Then OP = PA = PB = PC.
l
Now OP = PA ⇒OP2 = PA2 ⇒ x2 + y2 + z2 = (x – l)2 + (y – 0)2 + (z – 0)2 ⇒ x =
2
m n
Similarly, OP = PB ⇒ y = and OP = PC ⇒ z =
2 2

l m n
Hence, the coordinate of the required point are ( , , ).
2 2 2
Example 8 Find the point on x-axis which is equidistant from the point A (3, 2, 2) and
B (5, 5, 4).
Solution The point on the x-axis is of form P (x, 0, 0). Since the points A and B are
equidistant from P. Therefore PA2 = PB2, i.e.,
(x – 3)2 + ( 0 – 2)2 + (0 – 2)2 = (x – 5)2 + (0 – 5)2 + (0 – 4)2
49
⇒ 4x = 25 + 25 + 16 – 17 i.e., x = .
4

49
Thus, the point P on the x - axis is ( , 0, 0) which is equidistant from A and B.
4
Example 9 Find the point on y-axis which is at a distance 10 from the point (1, 2, 3)
Solution Let the point P be on y-axis. Therefore, it is of the form P (0, y, 0).
The point (1, 2, 3) is at a distance 10 from (0, y, 0). Therefore

(1− 0) 2 + (2 − y )2 + (3 − 0) 2 = 10
⇒ y2 – 4y + 4 = 0 ⇒ (y – 2)2 = 0 ⇒ y = 2
Hence, the required point is (0, 2, 0).
Example 10 If a parallelopiped is formed by planes drawn through the points (2, 3, 5)
and (5, 9, 7) parallel to the coordinate planes, then find the length of edges of a
parallelopiped and length of the diagonal.
Solution Length of edges of the parallelopiped are 5 – 2, 9 – 3, 7 – 5 i.e., 3, 6, 2.

Length of diagonal is 32 + 62 + 22 = 7 units.

18/04/18
 214 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Example 11 Show that the points (0, 7, 10), (–1, 6, 6) and (– 4, 9, 6) form a right
angled isosceles triangle.
Solution Let P (0, 7, 10), Q (–1, 6, 6) and R (– 4, 9, 6) be the given three points.
Here PQ = 1 + 1 + 16 = 3 2

QR = 9+9+0 = 3 2

PR = 16 + 4 +16 = 6

Now PQ2 + QR2 = (3 2)2 + (3 2) 2 = 18 + 18 = 36 = (PR)2

Therefore, ∆ PQR is a right angled triangle at Q. Also PQ = QR. Hence ∆ PQR is an
isosceles triangle.
Example 12 Show that the points (5, –1, 1), (7, – 4, 7), (1 – 6, 10) and (–1, – 3, 4) are
the vertices of a rhombus.
Solution Let A (5, – 1, 1), B (7, – 4, 7), C(1, – 6, 10) and D (– 1, – 3, 4) be the four
points of a quadrilateral. Here
AB = 4 + 9 + 36 = 7 , BC = 36 + 4 + 9 = 7, CD = 4 + 9 + 36 = 7,

DA = 23 + 4 + 9 = 7
Note that AB = BC = CD = DA. Therefore, ABCD is a rhombus.
Example 13 Find the ratio in which the line segment joining the points (2, 4, 5) and
(3, 5, – 4) is divided by the xz-plane.
Solution Let the joint of P (2, 4, 5) and Q (3, 5, – 4) be divided by xz-plane in the ratio
k:1 at the point R(x, y, z). Therefore
3k + 2 5k + 4 − 4k + 5
x= , y= , z=
k +1 k +1 k +1
Since the point R (x, y, z) lies on the xz-plane, the y-coordinate should be zero,i.e.,
5k + 4 4
= 0 ⇒ k = −
k +1 5
Hence, the required ratio is – 4 : 5, i.e.; externally in the ratio 4 : 5.
Example 14 Find the coordinate of the point P which is five - sixth of the way from A
(– 2, 0, 6) to B (10, – 6, – 12).

18/04/18
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 215

Solution Let P (x, y, z) be the required point, i.e., P divides AB in the ratio 5 : 1. Then

 5 × 10 + 1 × –2 5 × – 6 + 1 × 0 5 ×− 12 + 1 × 6 
P (x, y, z) =  , ,  = (8, – 5, – 9)
 5 +1 5 +1 5 +1 
Example 15 Describe the vertices and edges of the rectangular parallelopiped with
vertex (3, 5, 6) placed in the first octant with one vertex at origin and edges of
parallelopiped lie along x, y and z-axes.
Solution The six planes of the parallelopiped are as follows:
Plane OABC lies in the xy-plane. The z-coordinate of every point in this plane is zero.
z = 0 is the equation of this xy-plane. Plane PDEF is parallel to xy-plane and 6 unit
distance above it. The equation of the plane is z = 6. Plane ABPF represents plane
x = 3. Plane OCDE lies in the yz-plane and x = 0 is the equation of this plane. Plane
AOEF lies in the xz-plane. The y coordinate of everypoint in this plane is zero. Therefore,
y = 0 is the equation of plane.
Plane BCDP is parallel to the plane AOEF at a distance y = 5.
Edge OA lies on the x-axis. The x-axis has equation y = 0 and z = 0.
Edges OC and OE lie on y-axis and z-axis, respectively. The y-axis has its equation
z = 0, x = 0. The z-axis has its equation x = 0, y = 0. The perpendicular distance of the
point P (3, 5, 6) from the x-
axis is 52 + 6 2 = 61 .
The perpendicular distance
of the point P (3, 5, 6)
from y-axis and z-axis
are 32 + 6 2 = 45 and

32 + 52 =, respectively.
The coordinates of the feet
of perpendiculars from the
point P (3, 5, 6) to the
coordinate axes are A, C,
E. The coordinates of feet
of perpendiculars from the
point P on the coordinate
planes xy, yz and zx are
(3, 5, 0), (0, 5, 6) and Fig. 12.8
(3, 0, 6). Also, perpendicular

18/04/18
 216 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

distance of the point P from the xy, yz and zx-planes are 6, 5 and 3, respectively,
Fig.12.8.
Example 16 Let A (3, 2, 0), B (5, 3, 2), C (– 9, 6, – 3) be three points forming a triangle.
AD, the bisector of ∠ BAC, meets BC in D. Find the coordinates of the point D.
Solution Note that

AB = (5 – 3) 2 + (3 − 2) 2 + (2 − 0) 2 = 4 + 1+ 4 = 3

AC = (–9 – 3) 2 + (6 − 2) 2 + ( −3 − 0) 2 = 144 + 16 + 9 = 13

BD AB 3
Since AD is the bisector of ∠ BAC,We have = =
DC AC 13
i.e., D divides BC in the ratio 3 : 13. Hence, the coordinates of D are

 3( − 9) +13(5) 3( 6) + 13(3) 3( − 3) +13(2)   19 57 17 

 , ,  = , , 
 3 + 13 3 + 13 3 + 13   8 16 16 
Example 17 Determine the point in yz-plane which is equidistant from three points A
(2, 0 3) B (0, 3, 2) and C (0, 0, 1).
Solution Since x-coordinate of every point in yz-plane is zero. Let P (0, y, z) be a point
on the yz-plane such that PA = PB = PC. Now
PA = PB ⇒ (0 – 2)2 + (y – 0)2 + (z – 3)2 = (0 – 0)2 + (y – 3)2 + (z – 2)2 , i.e. z – 3y = 0
and PB = PC
⇒ y2 + 9 – 6y + z2 + 4 – 4z = y2 + z2 + 1 – 2z , i.e. 3y + z = 6
Simplifying the two equating, we get y = 1, z = 3
Here, the coordinate of the point P are (0, 1, 3).

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of given four options in each of the Examples from 18
to 23 (M.C.Q.).
Example 18 The length of the foot of perpendicular drawn from the point P (3, 4, 5)
on y-axis is
(A) 10 (B) 34 (C) 113 (D) 5 2
Solution Let l be the foot of perpendicular from point P on the y-axis. Therefore, its
x and z-coordinates are zero, i.e., (0, 4, 0). Therefore, distance between the points (0,
4, 0) and (3, 4, 5) is 9 + 25 i.e., 34 .

18/04/18
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 217

Example 19 What is the perpendicular distance of the point P (6, 7, 8) from xy-plane?
(A) 8 (B) 7 (C) 6 (D) None of these
Solution Let L be the foot of perpendicular drawn from the point P (6, 7, 8) to the xy-
plane and the distance of this foot L from P is z-coordinate of P, i.e., 8 units.
Example 20 L is the foot of the perpendicular drawn from a point P (6, 7, 8) on the xy-
plane. What are the coordinates of point L?
(A) (6, 0, 0) (B) (6, 7, 0) (C) (6, 0, 8) (D) none of these
Solution Since L is the foot of perpendicular from P on the xy-plane, z-coordinate is
zero in the xy-plane. Hence, coordinates of L are (6, 7, 0).
Example 21 L is the foot of the perpendicular drawn from a point (6, 7, 8) on x-axis.
The coordinates of L are
(A) (6, 0, 0) (B) (0, 7, 0) (C) (0, 0, 8) (D) none of these
Solution Since L is the foot of perpendicular from P on the x- axis, y and z-coordinates
are zero. Hence, the coordinates of L are (6, 0, 0).
Example 22 What is the locus of a point for which y = 0, z = 0?
(A) equation of x-axis (B) equation of y-axis
(C) equation of z-axis (D) none of these
Solution Locus of the point y = 0, z = 0 is x-axis, since on x-axis both y = 0 and z = 0.
Example 23 L, is the foot of the perpendicular drawn from a point P (3, 4, 5) on the
xz plane. What are the coordinates of point L ?
(A) (3, 0, 0) (B) (0, 4, 5) (C) (3, 0, 5) (D) (3, 4, 0)
Solution Since L is the foot of perpendicular segment drawn from the point P (3, 4, 5)
on the xz-plane. Since the y-coordinates of all points in the xz-plane are zero, coordinate
of the foot of perpendicular are (3, 0, 5).

Fill in the blanks in Examples 24 to 28.

Example 24 A line is parallel to xy-plane if all the points on the line have equal _____.
Solution A line parallel to xy-plane if all the points on the line have equal z-coordinates.
Example 25 The equation x = b represents a plane parallel to _____ plane.
Solution Since x = 0 represent yz-plane, therefore x = b represent a plane parallel to
yz -plane at a unit distance b from the origin.
Example 26 Perpendicular distance of the point P (3, 5, 6) from y-axis is ________

18/04/18
 218 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Solution Since M is the foot of perpendicular from P on the y-axis, therefore, its x and
z-coordinates are zero. The coordinates of M is (0, 5, 0). Therefore, the perpendicular
distance of the point P from y-axis 32 + 62 = 45 .
Example 27 L is the foot of perpendicular drawn from the point P (3, 4, 5) on zx-
planes. The coordinates of L are ________.
Solution Since L is the foot of perpendicular from P on the zx-plane, y-coordinate of
every point is zero in the zx-plane. Hence, coordinate of L are (3, 0, 5).
Example 28 The length of the foot of perpendicular drawn from the point P (a, b, c)
on z-axis is _____.
Solution The coordinates of the foot of perpendicular from the point P (a, b, c) on z-
axis is (0, 0,c). The distance between the point P (a, b, c) and (0, 0, c) is a 2 + b2 .
Check whether the statements in Example from 30 to 37 are True or False
Example 29 The y-axis and z-axis, together determine a plane known as yz-plane.
Solution True
Example 30 The point (4, 5, – 6) lies in the VIth octant.
Solution False, the point (4, 5, – 6) lies in the Vth octant,
Example 31 The x-axis is the intersection of two planes xy-plane and xz plane.
Solution True.
Example 32 Three mutually perpendicular planes divide the space into 8 octants.
Solution True.
Example 33 The equation of the plane z = 6 represent a plane parallel to the xy-plane,
having a z-intercept of 6 units.
Solution True.
Example 34 The equation of the plane x = 0 represent the yz-plane.
Solution True.
Example 35 The point on the x-axis with x-coordinate equal to x0 is written as (x0, 0, 0).
Solution True.
Example 36 x = x0 represent a plane parallel to the yz-plane.
Solution True.

18/04/18
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 219

Match each item given under the column C1 to its correct answer given under
column C2.
Example 37
Column C1 Column C2
(a) If the centriod of the triangle is (i) Parallelogram
origin and two of its vertices
are (3, – 5, 7) and (–1, 7, – 6)
then the third vertex is
(b) If the mid-points of the sides of (ii) (–2, –2, –1)
triangle are (1, 2, – 3), (3, 0, 1)
and (–1, 1, – 4) then the centriod is
(c) The points (3, – 1, – 1), (5, – 4, 0), (iii) as Isosceles right-angled
triangle
(2, 3, – 2) and (0, 6, – 3) are the
vertices of a
(d) Point A(1, –1, 3), B (2, – 4, 5) and (iv) (1, 1, – 2)
C (5, – 13, 11) are
(e) Points A (2, 4, 3), B (4, 1, 9) and (v) Collinear
C (10, – 1, 6) are the vertices of
Solution (a)
Let A (3, – 5, 7), B (– 1, 7, – 6), C (x, y, z) be the vertices of a ∆ ABC with centriod (0,
0, 0)

 3 −1+ x −5 + 7 + y 7 − 6 + z  x+2 y+2

Therefore, (0, 0, 0) =  , ,  . This implies =0, =0 ,
 3 3 3  3 3
z +1
=0 .
3
Hence x = – 2, y = – 2, and z = – 1.Therefore (a) ↔ (ii)
(b) Let ABC be the given ∆ and DEF be the mid-points of the sides BC, CA, AB,
respectively. We know that the centriod of the ∆ ABC = centriod of ∆ DEF.

 1+ 3 −1 2 + 0 +1 −3 + 1− 4 
Therefore, centriod of ∆ DEF is  , ,  = (1, 1, – 2)
 3 3 3 

18/04/18
 220 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Hence (b) ↔ (iv)

 3 + 2 −1+ 3 –1– 2   5 − 3 
(c) Mid-point of diagonal AC is  , ,  =  ,1, 
 2 2 2  2 2 

 5+0 −4+6 0− 3  5 −3 
Mid-point of diagonal BD is  , ,  =  ,1, 
 2 2 2  2 2 
Diagonals of parallelogram bisect each other. Therefore (c) ↔ (i)

(d) AB = (2 −1)2 + ( − 4 +1) 2 + (5 − 3) 2 = 14

BC = (5 − 2) 2 + (−13 + 4)2 + (11− 5)2 = 3 14

AC = (5 −1) 2 + ( −13 +1)2 + (11 − 3) 2 = 4 14

Now AB + BC = AC . Hence Points A, B, C are collinear. Hence (d) ↔ (v)

(e) AB = 4 + 9 + 36 = 7

BC = 36 + 4 + 9 = 7

CA = 64 + 25 + 9 = 7 2
Now AB2 +BC2 = AC2 . Hence ABC is an isosceles right angled triangle and hence
(e) ↔ (iii)

12.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
1. Locate the following points:
(i) (1, – 1, 3), (ii) (– 1, 2, 4)
(iii) (– 2, – 4, –7) (iv) (– 4, 2, – 5).
2. Name the octant in which each of the following points lies.
(i) (1, 2, 3), (ii) (4, – 2, 3), (iii) (4, –2, –5) (iv) (4, 2, –5)
(v) (– 4, 2, 5) (vi) (–3, –1, 6) (vii) (2, – 4, – 7) (viii) (– 4, 2, – 5).
3. Let A, B, C be the feet of perpendiculars from a point P on the x, y, z-axis
respectively. Find the coordinates of A, B and C in each of the following where
the point P is :

18/04/18
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 221

(i) A = (3, 4, 2) (ii) (–5, 3, 7) (iii) (4, – 3, – 5)

4. Let A, B, C be the feet of perpendiculars from a point P on the xy, yz and zx-
planes respectively. Find the coordinates of A, B, C in each of the following
where the point P is
(i) (3, 4, 5) (ii) (–5, 3, 7) (iii) (4, – 3, – 5).
5. How far apart are the points (2, 0, 0) and (–3, 0, 0)?
6. Find the distance from the origin to (6, 6, 7).

7. Show that if x2 + y2 = 1, then the point (x, y, 1− x 2 − y 2 ) is at a distance 1 unit

from the origin.
8. Show that the point A (1, – 1, 3), B (2, – 4, 5) and (5, – 13, 11) are collinear.
9. Three consecutive vertices of a parallelogram ABCD are A (6, – 2, 4), B (2, 4, – 8),
C (–2, 2, 4). Find the coordinates of the fourth vertex.
[Hint: Diagonals of a parallelogram have the same mid-point.]
10. Show that the triangle ABC with vertices A (0, 4, 1), B (2, 3, – 1) and C (4, 5, 0)
is right angled.
11. Find the third vertex of triangle whose centroid is origin and two vertices are
(2, 4, 6) and (0, –2, –5).
12. Find the centroid of a triangle, the mid-point of whose sides are D (1, 2, – 3),
E (3, 0, 1) and F (– 1, 1, – 4).
13. The mid-points of the sides of a triangle are (5, 7, 11), (0, 8, 5) and (2, 3, – 1).
Find its vertices.
14. Three vertices of a Parallelogram ABCD are A (1, 2, 3), B (– 1, – 2, – 1) and
C (2, 3, 2). Find the fourth vertex D.
15. Find the coordinate of the points which trisect the line segment joining the points
A (2, 1, – 3) and B (5, – 8, 3).
16. If the origin is the centriod of a triangle ABC having vertices A (a, 1, 3),
B (– 2, b, – 5) and C (4, 7, c), find the values of a, b, c.
17. Let A (2, 2, – 3), B (5, 6, 9) and C (2, 7, 9) be the vertices of a triangle. The internal
bisector of the angle A meets BC at the point D. Find the coordinates of D.

Long Answer Type

18. Show that the three points A (2, 3, 4), B (–1, 2, – 3) and C (– 4, 1, – 10) are
collinear and find the ratio in which C divides AB.

18/04/18
 222 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

19. The mid-point of the sides of a triangle are (1, 5, – 1), (0, 4, – 2) and (2, 3, 4).
Find its vertices. Also find the centriod of the triangle.
20. Prove that the points (0, – 1, – 7), (2, 1, – 9) and (6, 5, – 13) are collinear. Find
the ratio in which the first point divides the join of the other two.
21. What are the coordinates of the vertices of a cube whose edge is 2 units, one of
whose vertices coincides with the origin and the three edges passing through the
origin, coincides with the positive direction of the axes through the origin?

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer from the given four options inidcated against each of the
Exercises from 22 (M.C.Q.).
22. The distance of point P(3, 4, 5) from the yz-plane is
(A) 3 units (B) 4 units (C) 5 units (D) 550
23. What is the length of foot of perpendicular drawn from the point P (3, 4, 5) on
y-axis
(A) 41 (B) 34 (C) 5 (D) none of these
24. Distance of the point (3, 4, 5) from the origin (0, 0, 0) is
(A) 50 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5

25. If the distance between the points (a, 0, 1) and (0, 1, 2) is 27 , then the value of
a is
(A) 5 (B) ± 5 (C) – 5 (D) none of these
26. x-axis is the intersection of two planes
(A) xy and xz (B) yz and zx (C) xy and yz (D) none of these
27. Equation of y-axis is considered as
(A) x = 0, y = 0 (B) y = 0, z = 0 (C) z = 0, x = 0 (D) none of these
28. The point (–2, –3, –4) lies in the
(A) First octant (B) Seventh octant
(C) Second octant (D) Eighth octant
29. A plane is parallel to yz-plane so it is perpendicular to :
(A) x-axis (B) y-axis (C) z-axis (D) none of these
30. The locus of a point for which y = 0, z = 0 is
(A) equation of x-axis (B) equation of y-axis
(C) equation at z-axis (D) none of these

18/04/18
 INTRODUCTION TO THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 223

31. The locus of a point for which x = 0 is

(A) xy-plane (B) yz-plane (C) zx-plane (D) none of these
32. If a parallelopiped is formed by planes drawn through the points (5, 8, 10) and
(3, 6, 8) parallel to the coordinate planes, then the length of diagonal of the
parallelopiped is

(A) 2 3 (B) 3 2 (C) 2 (D) 3

33. L is the foot of the perpendicular drawn from a point P (3, 4, 5) on the xy-plane.
The coordinates of point L are
(A) (3, 0, 0) (B) (0, 4, 5) (C) (3, 0, 5) (D) none of these
34. L is the foot of the perpendicular drawn from a point (3, 4, 5) on x-axis. The
coordinates of L are
(A) (3, 0, 0) (B) (0, 4, 0) (C) (0, 0, 5) (D) none of these

Fill in the blanks in Exercises from 35 to 49.

35. The three axes OX, OY, OZ determine ________ .
36. The three planes determine a rectangular parallelopiped which has ________
of rectangular faces.
37. The coordinates of a point are the perpendicular distance from the ________
on the respectives axes.
38. The three coordinate planes divide the space into ________ parts.
39. If a point P lies in yz-plane, then the coordinates of a point on yz-plane is of the
form ________.
40. The equation of yz-plane is ________.
41. If the point P lies on z-axis, then coordinates of P are of the form ________.
42. The equation of z-axis, are ________.
43. A line is parallel to xy-plane if all the points on the line have equal ________.
44. A line is parallel to x-axis if all the points on the line have equal ________.
45. x = a represent a plane parallel to ________.
46. The plane parallel to yz - plane is perpendicular to ________.
47. The length of the longest piece of a string that can be stretched straight in a
rectangular room whose dimensions are 10, 13 and 8 units are ______.

18/04/18
 224 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

48. If the distance between the points (a, 2, 1) and (1, –1, 1) is 5, then a _______.
49. If the mid-points of the sides of a triangle AB; BC; CA are D (1, 2, – 3), E (3, 0, 1)
and F (–1, 1, – 4), then the centriod of the triangle ABC is ________.
50. Match each item given under the column C1 to its correct answer given under
column C2.
Column C1 Column C2
(a) In xy-plane (i) Ist octant
(b) Point (2, 3,4) lies in the (ii) yz-plane
(c) Locus of the points having x (iii) z-coordinate is zero
coordinate 0 is
(d) A line is parallel to x-axis if and only (iv) z-axis
(e) If x = 0, y = 0 taken together will (v) plane parallel to xy-plane
represent the
(f) z = c represent the plane (vi) if all the points on the
line have equal y and
z-coordinates.
(g) Planes x = a, y = b represent the line (vii) from the point on the respective
(h) Coordinates of a point are the (viii) parallel to z - axis.
distances from the origin to the feet of
perpendiculars
(i) A ball is the solid region in the space (ix) disc
enclosed by a
(j) Region in the plane enclosed by a circle is (x) sphere
known as a

18/04/18
 Chapter 13
LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES

13.1 Overview
13.1.1 Limits of a function
Let f be a function defined in a domain which we take to be an interval, say, I. We shall
study the concept of limit of f at a point ‘a’ in I.
We say lim– f ( x ) is the expected value of f at x = a given the values of f near to the
x→a
left of a. This value is called the left hand limit of f at a.

We say xlim
→ a+
f ( x) is the expected value of f at x = a given the values of f near to the
right of a. This value is called the right hand limit of f at a.
If the right and left hand limits coincide, we call the common value as the limit of f at
x = a and denote it by lim f ( x) .
x→a

Some properties of limits

Let f and g be two functions such that both lim f ( x) and lim g ( x) exist. Then
x→a x →a

(i) lim [ f ( x ) + g ( x )] = lim f ( x ) + lim g ( x)

x→a x→a x→ a

(ii) lim [ f ( x ) − g ( x )] = lim f ( x ) − lim g ( x)

x→a x→a x→ a
(iii) For every real number α
lim (α f ) ( x) = α lim f ( x)
x→a x→ a

(iv) lim [ f ( x) g ( x)] = [lim f ( x ) lim g ( x)]

x→a x→ a x→ a

f ( x ) lim f ( x)
lim = x→ a
x→a g ( x) lim g ( x) , provided g (x) ≠ 0
x→a

18/04/18
 226 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Limits of polynomials and rational functions

If f is a polynomial function, then lim f ( x) exists and is given by
x→a

lim f ( x ) = f ( a)
x→a

An Important limit
An important limit which is very useful and used in the sequel is given below:

xn − an
lim = na n − 1
x→a x−a
Remark The above expression remains valid for any rational number provided ‘a’ is
positive.
Limits of trigonometric functions
To evaluate the limits of trigonometric functions, we shall make use of the following
limits which are given below:
sin x cos x = 1 sin x = 0
(i) lim = 1 (ii) lim
x →0
(iii) lim
x →0
x→ 0 x
13.1.2 Derivatives Suppose f is a real valued function, then
f ( x + h ) − f ( x)
f ′(x) = lim ... (1)
h →0 h
is called the derivative of f at x, provided the limit on the R.H.S. of (1) exists.
Algebra of derivative of functions Since the very definition of derivatives involve
limits in a rather direct fashion, we expect the rules of derivatives to follow closely that
of limits as given below:
Let f and g be two functions such that their derivatives are defined in a common
domain. Then :
(i) Derivative of the sum of two function is the sum of the derivatives of the functions.
d d d
dx
[ f ( x) + g ( x)] =
dx
f ( x) +
dx
g ( x)

(ii) Derivative of the difference of two functions is the difference of the derivatives
of the functions.
d d d
dx
[ f ( x) − g ( x)] = dx f ( x) − dx g ( x)

18/04/18
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 227

(iii) Derivative of the product of two functions is given by the following product
rule.

d d d
dx
[ f ( x ) ⋅ g ( x )] =
dx
f ( x ) ⋅ g ( x) + f ( x ) ⋅
dx
g ( x)

This is referred to as Leibnitz Rule for the product of two functions.

(iv) Derivative of quotient of two functions is given by the following quotient rule
(wherever the denominator is non-zero).

d d
d f ( x) f ( x ) ⋅ g ( x ) − f ( x) ⋅ g ( x)
dx dx
=
dx g ( x) ( g ( x )) 2
13.2 Solved Examples
Short Answer Type

1 2(2 x − 3)
Example 1 Evaluate lim − 3
x→2 x − 2 x − 3x2 + 2 x

Solution We have

1 2(2 x − 3) 1 2(2 x − 3)
lim − 3 = lim −
x→2 x − 2 x − 3x2 + 2 x x→2 x − 2 x ( x − 1) ( x − 2

x ( x − 1) − 2 (2 x − 3)
= lim
x→2 x ( x − 1) ( x − 2)

x2 − 5x + 6
= lim
x→2 x ( x − 1) ( x − 2)

( x − 2) ( x − 3)
= lim
x→2 x ( x − 1) ( x − 2) [x – 2 ≠ 0]

x −3 −1
= lim =
x → 2 x ( x − 1) 2

18/04/18
 228 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

2+ x − 2
Example 2 Evaluate lim
x →0 x
Solution Put y = 2 + x so that when x → 0, y → 2. Then
1 1
2+ x − 2 y2 − 22
lim = lim
x →0 x y→ 2 y−2

1 1
1 2 −1 1 − 2 1
= (2) = ⋅2 =
2 2 2 2

x n − 3n
Example 3 Find the positive integer n so that lim = 108 .
x →3 x−3
Solution We have

x n − 3n
lim = n(3)n – 1
x →3 x−3
Therefore, n(3)n – 1 = 108 = 4 (27) = 4(3)4 – 1
Comparing, we get n= 4
Example 4 Evaluate lim (sec x − tan x)
π
x→
2

π π
Solution Put y = − x . Then y → 0 as x → . Therefore
2 2
π π
lim (sec x − tan x) = lim [sec( − y ) − tan ( − y)]
π y→ 0 2 2
x→
2

= lim (cosec y − cot y )

y→ 0

1 cos y
= lim −
y→ 0 sin y sin y

1 − cos y
= lim
y→ 0 sin y

18/04/18
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 229

y y 1 − cos y
2 sin 2 since , sin 2 =
2 2 2
= lim
y→0 y y y y
2sin cos sin y = 2sin cos
2 2 2 2

y
= lim tan =0
y
→0 2
2

sin (2 + x) − sin(2 − x )
Example 5 Evaluate lim
x →0 x
Solution (i) We have

(2 + x + 2 − x) (2 + x − 2 + x)
2cos sin
sin (2 + x) − sin(2 − x) 2 2
lim = lim
x→ 0 x x→ 0 x

2 cos 2 sin x
= lim
x →0 x

sin x sin x
= 2 cos 2 lim = 2cos 2 as lim =1
x →0 x x→ 0 x
Example 6 Find the derivative of f (x) = ax + b, where a and b are non-zero constants,
by first principle.
Solution By definition,
f ( x + h ) − f ( x)
f ′(x) = lim
h →0 h

a ( x + h) + b − ( ax + b) bh
= lim = lim =b
h →0 h h→ 0 h

Example 7 Find the derivative of f (x) = ax2 + bx + c, where a, b and c are none-zero
constant, by first principle.
Solution By definition,
f ( x + h ) − f ( x)
f ′(x) = lim
h →0 h

18/04/18
 230 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

a ( x + h ) 2 + b ( x + h ) + c − ax 2 − bx − c
= lim
h→ 0 h

bh + ah 2 + 2axh
= lim = lim
h→0
ah + 2ax + b = b + 2ax
h →0 h
Example 8 Find the derivative of f (x) = x3, by first principle.
Solution By definition,
f ( x + h ) − f ( x)
f ′(x) = lim
h →0 h

( x + h )3 − x 3
= lim
h →0 h

x3 + h3 + 3xh ( x + h) − x3
= lim
h →0 h

= lim
h→0
(h2 + 3x (x + h)) = 3x2

1
Example 9 Find the derivative of f (x) = by first principle.
x
Solution By definition,
f ( x + h ) − f ( x)
f ′(x) = lim
h →0 h

1 1 1
= lim −
h →0 h x+h x

−h −1
= lim = 2.
h →0 h ( x + h) x x
Example 10 Find the derivative of f (x) = sin x, by first principle.
Solution By definition,
f ( x + h ) − f ( x)
f ′(x) = lim
h →0 h

18/04/18
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 231

sin ( x + h) − sin x
= lim
h →0 h

2x + h h
2cos sin
2 2
= lim h
h →0
2⋅
2

h
(2 x + h) sin
= lim cos ⋅ lim 2
h →0 2 h →0 h
2
= cos x.1 = cos x
Example 11 Find the derivative of f (x) = xn, where n is positive integer, by first
principle.
Solution By definition,
f ( x + h) − f ( x )
f ′(x) =
h

( x + h) n − x n
=
h
Using Binomial theorem, we have (x + h)n = nC0 xn + nC1 xn – 1 h + ... + nCn hn

( x + h) n − x n
Thus, f ′(x) = hlim
→0 h

h ( nx n −1 + ... + h n −1 ]
= lim = nxn – 1.
h →0 h
Example 12 Find the derivative of 2x4 + x.
Solution Let y = 2x4 + x
Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get
dy d d
= (2 x 4 ) + ( x)
dx dx dx
= 2 × 4x4 – 1 + 1x0

18/04/18
 232 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

= 8x3 + 1
d
Therefore, (2 x 4 + x ) = 8x3 + 1.
dx
Example 13 Find the derivative of x2 cosx.
Solution Let y = x2 cosx
Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get
dy d 2
= ( x cos x)
dx dx

d d 2
= x2 (cos x ) + cos x (x )
dx dx
= x2 (– sinx) + cosx (2x)
= 2x cosx – x2 sinx
Long Answer Type

2sin 2 x + sin x − 1
Example 14 Evaluate limπ
x→ 2sin 2 x − 3sin x + 1
6

Solution Note that

2 sin2 x + sin x – 1 = (2 sin x – 1) (sin x + 1)
2 sin2 x – 3 sin x + 1 = (2 sin x – 1) (sin x – 1)

2sin 2 x + sin x − 1 (2sin x − 1) (sin x + 1)

Therefore, lim = lim
x→
π 2sin 2 x − 3sin x + 1 x→
π (2sin x − 1) (sin x − 1)
6 6

sin x + 1
= lim (as 2 sin x – 1 ≠ 0)
x→
π sin x − 1
6

π
1 + sin
= 6 = –3
π
sin − 1
6

18/04/18
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 233

tan x − sin x
Example 15 Evaluate lim
x →0 sin 3 x
Solution We have

1
sin x −1
tan x − sin x cos x
lim = lim
x →0 sin 3 x x →0 sin 3 x

1 − cos x
= lim
x →0 cos x sin 2 x

x
2sin 2 1
2
= lim = .
x →0 x x 2
cos x 4sin 2 ⋅ cos 2
2 2

a + 2 x − 3x
Example 16 Evaluate lim
x→a 3a + x − 2 x

a + 2 x − 3x
Solution We have lim
x→a 3a + x − 2 x

a + 2 x − 3x a + 2 x + 3x
= lim ×
x→a 3a + x − 2 x a + 2 x + 3x

a + 2 x − 3x
= lim
x→a
( 3a + x − 2 x )( a + 2 x + 3x )

= lim
( a − x) ( 3a + x + 2 x )
x→a
( a + 2 x + 3x )( 3a + x − 2 x )( 3a + x + 2 x )
(a − x) 3a + x + 2 x
= lim
x→a
( )
a + 2 x + 3x (3a + x − 4 x )

18/04/18
 234 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

4 a 2 2 3
= = = .
3 × 2 3a 3 3 9

cos ax − cos bx
Example 17 Evaluate lim
x →0 cos cx − 1

(a + b ) ( a − b) x
2sin x sin
Solution We have lim
2 2
x →0 sin 2 cx
2
2

(a + b ) x (a − b ) x
2sin ⋅ sin
2 2 x2
= lim ⋅
x →0 x2 sin 2
cx
2

2
( a + b) x ( a − b) x cx 4
sin sin × 2
= lim
2 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 2 c
x →0 ( a + b ) x 2 ( a − b) x 2 2 cx
⋅ ⋅ sin
2 a+b 2 a−b 2

a+b a −b 4 a 2 − b2
= × × 2 =
2 2 c c2

( a + h) 2 sin ( a + h) − a 2 sin a
Example 18 Evaluate lim
h →0 h

( a + h)2 sin (a + h) − a 2 sin a

Solution We have lim
h →0 h

( a 2 + h 2 + 2ah) [sin a cos h + cos a sin h] − a 2 sin a

= lim
h →0 h

a 2 sin a (cos h − 1) a 2 cos a sin h

= lim [ + + (h + 2a) (sin a cos h + cos a sin h )]
h →0 h h

18/04/18
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 235

h
a 2 sin a ( −2sin 2 ) 2
lim 2 ⋅ h + lim a cos a sin h + lim (h + 2a ) sin (a + h)
=
h→ 0 h2 2 h→ 0 h h→ 0

2
= a2 sin a × 0 + a2 cos a (1) + 2a sin a
= a2 cos a + 2a sin a.
Example 19 Find the derivative of f (x) = tan (ax + b), by first principle.
f ( x + h ) − f ( x)
Solution We have f ′(x) = lim
h →0 h

tan ( a ( x + h) + b ) − tan (ax + b)

= lim
h →0 h

sin (ax + ah + b) sin ( ax + b)

−
cos ( ax + ah + b) cos ( ax + b)
= lim
h →0 h

sin ( ax + ah + b) cos (ax + b) − sin ( ax + b) cos ( ax + ah + b)

= lim
h →0 h cos ( ax + b) cos ( ax + ah + b)

a sin ( ah)
= lim
h →0 a ⋅ h cos (ax + b) cos ( ax + ah + b)

a sin ah
= lim lim [as h → 0 ah → 0]
h →0 cos (ax + b) cos ( ax + ah + b) ah →0 ah

a
= 2 = a sec2 (ax + b).
cos (ax + b)

Example 20 Find the derivative of f ( x ) = sin x , by first principle.

Solution By definition,
f ( x + h ) − f ( x)
f ′(x) = lim
h →0 h

18/04/18
 236 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

sin ( x + h) − sin x
= lim
h →0 h

( sin ( x + h) − sin x )( sin ( x + h) + sin x )

= lim
h →0 h ( sin ( x + h) + sin x )
sin ( x + h) − sin x
= hlim
→0 h ( sin ( x + h) + sin x )
2x + h h
2 cos sin
2 2
= lim
h
h →0
2⋅
2
( sin ( x + h) + sin x )
cos x 1
= = cot x sin x
2 sin x 2

cos x
Example 21 Find the derivative of .
1 + sin x

cos x
Solution Let y =
1 + sin x
Differentiating both sides with respects to x, we get

dy d cos x
=
dx dx 1 + sin x

d d
(1 + sin x ) (cos x ) − cos x (1 + sin x)
dx dx
=
(1 + sin x ) 2

(1 + sin x ) ( − sin x) − cos x (cos x )

=
(1 + sin x) 2

18/04/18
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 237

− sin x − sin 2 x − cos2 x

=
(1 + sin x) 2

− (1 + sin x) −1
= 2 =
(1 + sin x ) 1 + sin x
Objective Type Questions
Choose the correct answer out of the four options given against each Example 22 to 28
(M.C.Q.).
sin x
Example22 lim is equal to
x →0 x (1 + cos x)

1
(A) 0 (B) (C) 1 (D) –1
2
Solution (B) is the correct answer, we have

x x
2sincos
sin x 2 2
lim = lim
x →0 x (1 + cos x) x →0 x
x 2cos 2
2

x
tan
=
1
lim 2 = 1
2 x→0 x 2
2

1 − sin x
Example23 lim is equal to
x→
π cos x
2

(A) 0 (B) –1 (C) 1 (D) does not exit

Solution (A) is the correct answer, since

π
1 − sin −y
1 − sin x 2 π
lim = lim taking −x= y
x→
π cos x y→ 0 π 2
2 cos −y
2

18/04/18
 238 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

y
2sin 2
1 − cos y lim 2
= lim = y→ 0 y y
y→ 0 sin y 2sin cos
2 2

y
= lim tan =0
y→ 0 2

| x|
Example 24 lim is equal to
x →0 x
(A) 1 (B) –1 (C) 0 (D) does not exists
Solution (D) is the correct answer, since
|x| x
R.H.S = lim+ = =1
x →0 x x

| x | −x
and L.H.S = lim– = = −1
x →0 x x

Example 25 lim [ x − 1] , where [.] is greatest integer function, is equal to

x→1

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 0 (D) does not exists

Solution (D) is the correct answer, since

R.H.S = lim [ x − 1] = 0
x →1+

and L.H.S = lim [ x − 1] = –1

x →1−

1
Example 26 lim x sin is equals to
x →0 x

1
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) (D) does not exist
2
Solution (A) is the correct answer, since

lim x = 0 and –1 ≤ sin

1
x→ 0
≤ 1, by Sandwitch Theorem, we have
x

18/04/18
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 239

1
lim x sin = 0
x →0 x

1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n
Example 27 nlim , n ∈ N, is equal to
→∞ n2

1 1
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) (D)
2 4

1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n
Solution (C) is the correct answer. As xlim
→∞ n2

n ( n + 1) 1 1 1
= nlim = lim 1+ =
→∞ 2n 2 x →∞ 2 n 2

π
Example 28 If f(x) = x sinx, then f ′ is equal to
2

1
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) –1 (D)
2
Solution (B) is the correct answer. As f ′ (x) = x cosx + sinx

π π π π
So, f′ = cos + sin = 1
2 2 2 2

13.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
Evaluate :

x2 − 9 4x2 − 1 x+h − x
lim lim
1. x →3 2. 1 2x − 1 3. lim
x−3 x→
2
h →0 h

1 1 5 5
( x + 2) 3 − 2 3 (1 + x )6 − 1 (2 + x ) 2 − ( a + 2) 2
4. lim 5. lim 6. lim
x →0 x x→1 (1 + x )2 − 1 x→a x−a

18/04/18
 240 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

x4 − x x2 − 4
7. lim 8. lim
x→1 x −1 x→2 3x − 2 − x + 2

x4 − 4 x7 − 2 x5 + 1 1 + x3 − 1 − x3
9. xlim 10. lim 11. lim
→ 2 x2 + 3 2x − 8 x→1 x3 − 3 x 2 + 2 x →0 x2

x 3 + 27 8x − 3 4 x2 + 1
12. xlim 13. lim1 −
→−3 x5 + 243 x→ 2x − 1 4 x2 − 1
2

x n − 2n sin 3x
14. Find ‘n’, if lim = 80 , n ∈ N 15. lim
x→2 x−2 x → a sin 7 x

sin 2 2 x 1 − cos 2 x 2sin x − sin 2 x

16. lim 17. lim 18. lim
x →0 sin 2 4 x x →0 x2 x →0 x3

1 − cos mx 1 − cos 6 x sin x − cos x

lim
19. lim
x →0 1 − cos nx
20. limπ π 21. x→
π π
x→
2 −x 4 x−
3
3 4

3 sin x − cos x sin 2 x + 3x sin x − sin a

22. limπ π 23. lim
x →0 2 x + tan 3 x
24. lim
x→ x−
x→a x− a
6
6

cot 2 x − 3 2 − 1 + cos x
25. limπ 26. lim
x→ cosec x − 2 x →0 sin 2 x
6

sin x − 2sin 3x + sin 5 x

27. lim
x →0 x

x4 − 1 x3 − k 3
28. If lim = lim 2 , then find the value of k.
x →1 x − 1 x→k x − k 2
Differentiate each of the functions w. r. to x in Exercises 29 to 42.
3
x 4 + x3 + x 2 + 1 1
29. 30. x+ 31. (3x + 5) (1 + tanx)
x x

18/04/18
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 241

3x + 4 x 5 − cos x
32. (sec x – 1) (sec x + 1) 33. 2 34.
5x − 7 x + 9 sin x

π
x 2 cos
35. 4 36. (ax2 + cotx) (p + q cosx)
sin x

a + b sin x
37. 38. (sin x + cosx)2 39. (2x – 7)2 (3x + 5)3
c + d cos x

1
40. x2 sinx + cos2x 41. sin3x cos3x 42. 2
ax + bx + c
Long Answer Type
Differentiate each of the functions with respect to ‘x’ in Exercises 43 to 46 using first
principle.
ax + b 2
43. cos (x2 + 1) 44. cx + d 45. x 3

46. x cosx

Evaluate each of the following limits in Exercises 47 to 53.

( x + y ) sec( x + y ) − x sec x
47. lim
y→ 0 y

(sin(α + β) x + sin(α − β) x + sin 2α x)

48. lim ⋅x
x →0 cos 2βx − cos 2αx

x
1 − sin
3
tan x − tan x lim 2
49. limπ 50. x →π x x x
x→ π cos cos − sin
4 cos x + 2 4 4
4
| x− 4|
51. Show that lim does not exists
x→ 4 x − 4

18/04/18
 242 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

k cos x π
when x ≠
π − 2x 2 π
52. Let f (x) = and if lim f ( x ) = f ( ) ,
π x→
π 2
3 x= 2
2
find the value of k.

x+2 x ≤ –1
53. Let f (x) = 2
, find ‘c’ if xlim
→ –1
f ( x ) exists.
cx x > −1

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of 4 options given against each Exercise 54 to 76
(M.C.Q).
sin x
54. lim is
x →π x−π
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) –1 (D) –2

x 2 cos x
55. lim is
x → 0 1 − cos x

3 −3
(A) 2 (B) (C) (D) 1
2 2

(1 + x) n − 1
56. lim is
x→ 0 x
(A) n (B) 1 (C) –n (D) 0

xm − 1
57. lim is
x →1 xn − 1

m m m2
(A) 1 (B) (C) − (D) 2
n n n

1 − cos 4θ
58. lim is
x→ 0 1 − cos 6θ

18/04/18
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 243

4 1 −1
(A) (B) (C) (D) –1
9 2 2
cosec x − cot x
59. lim is
x →0 x
−1 1
(A) (B) 1 (C) (D) 1
2 2
sin x
60. lim is
x →0 x +1 − 1− x
(A) 2 (B) 0 (C) 1 (D) –1
sec 2 x − 2
61. lim is
x→
π tan x − 1
4

(A) 3 (B) 1 (C) 0 (D) 2

62. lim
( x − 1) ( 2 x − 3)
is
x →1 2x2 + x − 3

1 −1
(A) (B) (C) 1 (D) None of these
10 10

sin[ x]
, [ x] ≠ 0
63. If f (x) = [ x] , where [.] denotes the greatest integer function ,
0 ,[ x ] = 0

then lim
x →0
f ( x ) is equal to

(A) 1 (B) 0 (C) –1 (D) None of these

| sin x |
64. lim is
x →0 x
(A) 1 (B) –1 (C) does not exist(D) None of these

x 2 − 1, 0 < x < 2
65. Let f (x) = , the quadratic equation whose roots are xlim
→ 2–
f ( x) and
2 x + 3, 2 ≤ x < 3

lim f ( x ) is
x → 2+

18/04/18
244 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(A) x2 – 6x + 9 = 0 (B) x2 – 7x + 8 = 0
(C) x2 – 14x + 49 = 0 (D) x2 – 10x + 21 = 0
tan 2 x − x
66. lim is
x →0 3x − sin x

1 −1 1
(A) 2 (B) (C) (D)
2 2 4

1
67. Let f (x) = x – [x]; ∈ R, then f ′ is
2

3
(A) (B) 1 (C) 0 (D) –1
2

1 dy
68. If y = x+ , then at x = 1 is
x dx

1 1
(A) 1 (B) (C) (D) 0
2 2

x−4
69. If f (x) = , then f ′(1) is
2 x

5 4
(A) (B) (C) 1 (D) 0
4 5

1
1+
x2 dy
70. If y = , then is
1 dx
1− 2
x

− 4x − 4x 1 − x2 4x
(A) (B) (C) (D) 2
( x 2 − 1) 2 x2 − 1 4x x −1

sin x + cos x dy
71. If y = , then at x = 0 is
sin x − cos x dx

18/04/18
 LIMITS AND DERIVATIVES 245

1
(A) –2 (B) 0 (C) (D) does not exist
2
sin( x + 9) dy
72. If y = , then at x = 0 is
cos x dx
(A) cos 9 (B) sin 9 (C) 0 (D) 1

x2 x100
73. If f (x) = 1 + x + + ... + , then f ′(1) is equal to
2 100

1
(A) (B) 100 (C) does not exist (D) 0
100

xn − a n
74. If f ( x) = for some constant ‘a’, then f ′(a) is
x−a

1
(A) 1 (B) 0 (C) does not exist (D)
2
75. If f (x) = x100 + x99 + ... + x + 1, then f ′(1) is equal to
(A) 5050 (B) 5049 (C) 5051 (D) 50051
2 3 99 100
76. If f (x) = 1 – x + x – x ... – x + x , then f ′(1) is euqal to
(A) 150 (B) –50 (C) –150 (D) 50
Fill in the blanks in Exercises 77 to 80.
tan x
77. If f (x) = , then lim
x →π
f ( x ) = ______________
x−π

x
78. lim sin mx cot = 2 , then m = ______________
x →0 3

x x 2 x3 dy
79. if y = 1 + + + + ... , then = ______________
1! 2! 3! dx

x
80. lim+ = ______________
x →3 [ x]

18/04/18
 Chapter 14
MATHEMATICAL REASONING

14.1 Overview
If an object is either black or white, and if it is not black, then logic leads us to the
conclusion that it must be white. Observe that logical reasoning from the given hypotheses
can not reveal what “black” or “white” mean, or why an object can not be both.
Infact, logic is the study of general patterns of reasoning, without reference to particular
meaning or context.
14.1.1 Statements
A statement is a sentence which is either true or false, but not both simultaneously.
Note: No sentence can be called a statement if
(i) It is an exclamation
(ii) It is an order or request
(iii) It is a question
(iv) It involves variable time such as ‘today’, ‘tomorrow’, ‘yesterday’ etc.
(v) It involves variable places such as ‘here’, ‘there’, ‘everywhere’ etc.
(vi) It involves pronouns such as ‘she’, ‘he’, ‘they’ etc.
Example 1
(i) The sentence
‘New Delhi is in India; is true. So it is a statement.
(ii) The sentence
“Every rectangle is a square” is false. So it is a statement.
(iii) The sentence
“Close the door” can not be assigned true or false (Infact, it is a command). So
it can not be called a statement.
(iv) The sentence

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 247

“How old are you?” can not be assigned true or false (In fact, it is a question).
So it is not a statement.
(v) The truth or falsity of the sentence
“x is a natural number” depends on the value of x. So it is not considered as a
statement. However, in some books it is called an open statement.
Note: Truth and falisity of a statement is called its truth value.

14.1.2 Simple statements A statement is called simple if it can not be broken down
into two or more statements.
Example 2 The statements
“2 is an even number”,
“A square has all its sides equal” and
“ Chandigarh is the capital of Haryana” are all simple statements.

14.1.3 Compound statements A compound statement is the one which is made up of

two or more simple statements.
Example 3 The statement
“11 is both an odd and prime number” can be broken into two statements
“11 is an odd number” and “11 is a prime number” so it is a compound statement.
Note: The simple statements which constitutes a compound statement are called
component statements.

14.1.4 Basic logical connectives There are many ways of combining simple
statements to form new statements. The words which combine or change simple
statements to form new statements or compound statements are called Connectives.
The basic connectives (logical) conjunction corresponds to the English word ‘and’;
disjunction corresponds to the word ‘or’; and negation corresponds to the word
‘not’.
Throughout we use the symbol ‘∧’ to denote conjunction; ‘∨’ to denote disjunction and
the symbol ‘~’ to denote negation.
Note: Negation is called a connective although it does not combine two or more
statements. In fact, it only modifies a statement.

14.1.5 Conjunction If two simple statements p and q are connected by the word
‘and’, then the resulting compound statement “p and q” is called a conjunction of p
and q and is written in symbolic form as “p ∧ q”.

18/04/18
 248 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Example 4 Form the conjunction of the following simple statements:

p: Dinesh is a boy.
q: Nagma is a girl.
Solution The conjunction of the statement p and q is given by
p∧q: Dinesh is a boy and Nagma is a girl.
Example 5 Translate the following statement into symbolic form
“Jack and Jill went up the hill.”
Solution The given statement can be rewritten as
“Jack went up the hill and Jill went up the hill”
Let p : Jack went up the hill and q : Jill went up the hill.
Then the given statement in symbolic form is p ∧ q.
Regarding the truth value of the conjunction p ∧ q of two simple statements p and q,
we have
(D1) : The statement p ∧ q has the truth value T (true) whenever both p and q
have the truth value T.
(D2) : The statement p ∧ q has the truth value F (false) whenever either p or q
or both have the truth value F.
Example 6 Write the truth value of each of the following four statements:
(i) Delhi is in India and 2 + 3 = 6.
(ii) Delhi is in India and 2 + 3 = 5.
(iii) Delhi is in Nepal and 2 + 3 = 5.
(iv) Delhi is in Nepal and 2 + 3 = 6.
Solution In view of (D1) and (D2) above, we observe that statement (i) has the truth
value F as the truth value of the statement “2 + 3 = 6” is F. Also, statement (ii) has the
truth value T as both the statement “Delhi is in India” and “2 + 3 = 5” has the truth
value T.
Similarly, the truth value of both the statements (iii) and (iv) is F.

14.1.6 Disjunction If two simple statements p and q are connected by the word
‘or’, then the resulting compound statement “p or q” is called disjunction of p and q
and is written in symbolic form as “p ∨ q”.
Example 7 Form the disjunction of the following simple statements:
p: The sun shines.
q: It rains.

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 249

Solution The disjunction of the statements p and q is given by

p ∨ q : The sun shines or it rains.
Regarding the truth value of the disjunction p ∨ q of two simple statements p and q, we
have
(D3) : The statement p ∨ q has the truth value F whenever both p and q have
the truth value F.
(D4) : The statement p ∨ q has the truth value T whenever either p or q or both
have the truth value T.
Example 8 Write the truth value of each of the following statements:
(i) India is in Asia or 2 + 2 = 4.
(ii) India is in Asia or 2 + 2 = 5.
(iii) India is in Europe or 2 + 2 = 4.
(iv) India is in Europe or 2 + 2 = 5.
Solution In view of (D3) and (D4) above, we observe that only the last statement has
the truth value F as both the sub-statements “India is in Europe” and “2 + 2 = 5” have
the truth value F. The remaining statements (i) to (iii) have the truth value T as at least
one of the sub-statements of these statements has the truth value T.

14.1.7 Negation An assertion that a statement fails or denial of a statement is called

the negation of the statement. The negation of a statement is generally formed by
introducing the word “not” at some proper place in the statement or by prefixing the
statement with “It is not the case that” or It is false that”.
The negation of a statement p in symbolic form is written as “~ p”.
Example 9 Write the negation of the statement
p : New Delhi is a city.
Solution The negation of p is given by
~ p : New Delhi is not a city
or ~ p : It is not the case that New Delhi is a city.
or ~ p : It is false that New Delhi is a city.
Regarding the truth value of the negation ~ p of a statement p, we have
(D5) : ~ p has truth value T whenever p has truth value F.
(D6) : ~ p has truth value F whenever p has truth value T.

18/04/18
 250 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Example 10 Write the truth value of the negation of each of the following statements:
(i) p : Every square is a rectangle.
(ii) q : The earth is a star.
(iii) r : 2 + 3 < 4
Solution In view of (D5) and (D6), we observe that the truth value of ~p is F as the truth
value of p is T. Similarly, the truth value of both ~q and ~r is T as the truth value of both
statements q and r is F.

14.1.8 Negation of compound statements

14.1.9 Negation of conjunction Recall that a conjunction p ∧ q consists of two

component statements p and q both of which exist simultaneously. Therefore, the
negation of the conjunction would mean the negation of at least one of the two component
statements. Thus, we have
(D7) : The negation of a conjunction p ∧ q is the disjunction of the negation of
p and the negation of q. Equivalently, we write
~ (p ∧ q) = ~ p ∨ ~ q
Example 11 Write the negation of each of the following conjunctions:
(a) Paris is in France and London is in England.
(b) 2 + 3 = 5 and 8 < 10.
Solution
(a) Write p : Paris is in France and q : London is in England.
Then, the conjunction in (a) is given by p ∧ q.
Now ~ p : Paris is not in France, and
~ q : London is not in England.
Therefore, using (D7), negation of p ∧ q is given by
~ ( p ∧ q) = Paris is not in France or London is not in England.
(b) Write p : 2 + 3 = 5 and q : 8 < 10.
Then the conjunction in (b) is given by p ∧ q.
Now ~ p : 2 + 3 ≠ 5 and ~ q : 8 </ 10.
Then, using (D7), negation of p ∧ q is given by
– ( p ∧ q) = (2 + 3 ≠ 5 ) or (8 </ 10)

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 251

14.1.10 Negation of disjunction Recall that a disjunction p ∨ q is consisting of two

component statements p and q which are such that either p or q or both exist. Therefore,
the negation of the disjunction would mean the negation of both p and q simultaneously.
Thus, in symbolic form, we have
(D8) : The negation of a disjunction p ∨ q is the conjunction of the negation of p
and the negation of q. Equivalently, we write
~ (p ∨ q) = ~ p ∧ ∼ q
Example 12 Write the negation of each of the following disjunction :
(a) Ram is in Class X or Rahim is in Class XII.
(b) 7 is greater than 4 or 6 is less than 7.
Solution
(a) Let p : Ram is in Class X and q : Rahim is in Class XII.
Then the disjunction in (a) is given by p ∨ q.
Now ~p: Ram is not in Class X.
~q : Rahim is not in Class XII.
Then, using (D8), negation of p ∨ q is given by
~ (p ∨ q) : Ram is not in Class X and Rahim is not in Class XII.
(b) Write p : 7 is greater than 4, and q : 6 is less than 7.
Then, using (D8), negation of p ∨ q is given by
~ (p ∨ q) : 7 is not greater than 4 and 6 is not less than 7.
14.1.11 Negation of a negation As already remarked the negation is not a connective
but a modifier. It only modifies a given statement and applies only to a single simple
statement. Therefore, in view of (D5) and (D6), for a statement p, we have
(D9) : Negation of negation of a statement is the statement itself. Equivalently, we
write
~ ( ~ p) = p
14.1.12 The conditional statement Recall that if p and q are any two statements,
then the compound statement “if p then q” formed by joining p and q by a connective
‘if then’ is called a conditional statement or an implication and is written in symbolic
form as p → q or p ⇒ q. Here, p is called hypothesis (or antecedent) and q is called
conclusion (or consequent) of the conditional statement (p ⇒ q):
Remark The conditional statement p ⇒ q can be expressed in several different ways.
Some of the common expressions are :

18/04/18
 252 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(a) if p, then q
(b) q if p
(c) p only if q
(d) p is sufficient for q
(e) q is necessary for p.
Observe that the conditional statement p → q reflects the idea that whenever it is
known that p is true, it will have to follow that q is also true.
Example 13 Each of the following statements is also a conditional statement.
(i) If 2 + 2 = 5, then Rekha will get an ice-cream.
(ii) If you eat your dinner, then you will get dessert.
(iii) If John works hard, then it will rain today.
(iv) If ABC is a triangle, then ∠ A + ∠ B + ∠ C = 180°.
Example 14 Express in English, the statement p → q, where
p : it is raining today
q:2+3>4
Solution The required conditional statement is
“If it is raining today, then 2 + 3 > 4”
14.1.13 Contrapositive of a conditional statement The statement “(~ q) → (~ p)” is
called the contrapositive of the statement p → q
Example 15 Write each of the following statements in its equivalent contrapositive
form:
(i) If my car is in the repair shop, then I cannot go to the market.
(ii) If Karim cannot swim to the fort, then he cannot swim across the river.
Solution (i) Let “p : my car is in the repair shop” and “q : I can not go to the market”.
Then, the given statement in symbolic form is p → q. Therefore, its contrapositive is
given by ~ q → ~ p.
Now ~ p : My car is not in the repair shop.
and ~ q : I can go to the market
Therefore, the contrapositive of the given statement is
“If I can go to the market, then my car is not in the repair shop”.
(ii) Proceeding on the lines of the solution of (i), the contrapositive of the statement
in (ii) is
“If Karim can swim across the river, then he can swim to the fort”.

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 253

14.1.14 Converse of a conditional statement The conditional statement “q → p” is

called the converse of the conditional statement “ p → q ”
Example 16 Write the converse of the following statements
(i) If x < y, then x + 5 < y + 5
(ii) If ABC is an equilateral triangle, then ABC is an isosceles triangle
Solution (i) Let
p:x<y
q:x+5<y+5
Therefore, the converse of the statement p → q is given by
“If x + 5 < y + 5, then x < y
(ii) Converse of the given statement is
“If ABC is an isosceles triangle, then ABC is an equilateral triangle.”
14.1.15 The biconditional statement If two statements p and q are connected by
the connective ‘if and only if’ then the resulting compound statement “p if and only if q”
is called a biconditional of p and q and is written in symbolic form as p ↔ q.
Example 17 Form the biconditional of the following statements:
p : One is less than seven
q : Two is less than eight
Solution The biconditional of p and q is given by “One is less than seven, if and only
if two is less than eight”.
Example 18 Translate the following biconditional into symbolic form:
“ABC is an equilateral triangle if and only if it is equiangular”.
Solution Let p : ABC is an equilateral triangle
and q : ABC is an equiangular triangle.
Then, the given statement in symbolic form is given by p ↔ q.
14.1.16 Quantifiers Quantifieres are the phrases like ‘These exist’ and “for every”.
We come across many mathematical statement containing these phrases.
For example – Consider the following statements
p : For every prime number x, x is an irrational number.
q : There exists a triangle whose all sides are equal.

18/04/18
 254 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

14.1.17 Validity of statements Validity of a statement means checking when the

statement is true and when it is not true. This depends upon which of the connectives,
quantifiers and implication is being used in the statement.
(i) Validity of statement with ‘AND’
To show statement r : p ∧ q is true, show statement ‘p’ is true and statement ‘q’
is true.
(ii) Validity of statement with ‘OR’
To show statement r : p ∨ q is true, show either statement ‘p’ is true or statement
‘q’ is true.
(iii) Validity of statement with “If-then”
To show statement r : “If p then q is true”, we can adopt the following methods:
(a) Direct method : Assume p is true and show q is true, i.e., p ⇒ q.
(b) Contrapositive method : Assume ~ q is true and show ~ p is true, i.e.,
~ q ⇒ ~ p.
(c) Contradiction method : Assume that p is true and q is false and obtain a
contradiction from assumption.
(d) By giving a counter example : To prove the given statement r is false we
give a counter example. Consider the follwoing statement.
“r : All prime numbers are odd”. Now the statement ‘r’ is false as 2 is a
prime number and it is an even number.
14.1.18 Validity of the statement with “If and only If” To show the statement
r : p if and only if q is true, we proceed as follows:
Step 1 Show if p is true then q is true.
Step 2 Show if q is true then p is true.

14.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type
Example 1 Which of the following statements are compound statements
(i) “2 is both an even number and a prime number”
(ii) “9 is neither an even number nor a prime number”
(iii) “Ram and Rahim are friends”

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 255

Solution
(i) The given statement can be broken into two simple statements “2 is an even
number” and “2 is a prime number” and connected by the connective ‘and’
(ii) The given statement can be broken into two simple statements
“9 is not an even number” and “9 is not a prime number” and connected by the
connective ‘and’
(iii) The given statement can not be broken into two simple statements and hence it
is not a compound statement.
Example 2 Identify the component statements and the connective in the following
compound statements.
(a) It is raining or the sun is shining.
(b) 2 is a positive number or a negative number.
Solution
(a) The component statements are given by
p : It is raining
q : The sun is shining
The connective is “or”
(b) The component statements are given by
p : 2 is a positive number
q : 2 is a negative number
The connective is ‘or’
Example 3 Translate the following statements in symbolic form
(i) 2 and 3 are prime numbers
(ii) Tigers are found in Gir forest or Rajaji national park.
Solution
(i) The given statement can be rewritten as “2 is a prime number and 3 is a prime
number”.
Let p : 2 is a prime number
q : 3 is a prime number
Then the given statement in symbolic form is p ∧ q.
(ii) The given statement can be rewritten as

18/04/18
 256 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

“Tigers are found in Gir forest or Tigers are found in Rajaji national park”
Let p : Tigers are found in Gir forest
q : Tigers are found in Rajaji national park.
Then the given statement in symbolic form is p ∨ q.
Example 4 Write the truth value of each of the following statements.
(i) 9 is an even integer or 9 + 1 is even.
(ii) 2 + 4 = 6 or 2 + 4 = 7
(iii) Delhi is the capital of India and Islamabad is the capital of Pakistan.
(iv) Every rectangle is a square and every square is a rectangle.
(v) The sun is a star or sun is a planet.
Solution In view of (D1), (D2), (D3) and (D4), we observe that only statement (iv) has
truth value F as the first component statement namely “every rectangle is a square” is
false.
Further, in statements (i), (ii) and (v) atleast one component statement is true. Therefore,
these statements have truth value T.
Also, truth value of statement (iii) is T as both the component statements are true.
Example 5 Write negation of the statement
“Everyone who lives in India is an Indian”
Solution Let p : Everyone who lives in India is an Indian. The negation of this
statement is given by
~ p : It is false that everyone who lives in India is an Indian.
or
~ p : Everyone who lives in India is not an Indian.
Example 6 Write the negation of the following statements :
(a) p : All triangles are equilateral triangles.
(b) q : 9 is a multiple of 4.
(c) r : A triangle has four sides.
Solution
(a) We have
It is false that all triangles are equilateral triangles
or

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 257

~ p : Threre exists a triangle which is not an equilateral triangles.

or
~ p : Not all triangles are equilateral triangles
(b) ~ q : 9 is not a multiple of 4.
(c) ~ r : It is false that the triangle has four sides.
or
~ r : A triangle has not four sides.
Example 7 Write the negation of the following statements :
(i) Suresh lives in Bhopal or he lives in Mumbai.
(ii) x + y = y + x and 29 is a prime number.
Solution
(i) Let
p : Suresh lives in Bhopal
and q : Suresh lives in Mumbai
Then the disjunction in (i) is given by p ∨ q.
Now ~ p : Suresh does not live in Bhopal.
~ q : Suresh does not live in Mumbai.
Therefore, using (D8), negation of p ∨ q is given by
~ ( p ∨ q ) : Suresh does not live in Bhopal and he does not live in Mumbai.
(ii) Let p : x + y = y + x
and q : 29 is a prime number.
Then the conjunction in (ii) is given by p ∧ q.
Now ~ p : x + y ≠ y + x
and ~ q : 29 is not a prime number.
Therefore, using (D7), negation of p ∧ q is given by,
~ ( p ∧ q) : x + y ≠ y + x or 29 is not a prime number.
Example 8 Rewrite each of the following statements in the form of conditional
statements :
(i) Mohan will be a good student if he studies hard.
(ii) Ramesh will get dessert only if he eats his dinner.
(iii) When you sing, my ears hurt.

18/04/18
 258 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(iv) A necessary condition for Indian team to win a cricket match is that the selection
committee selects an all-rounder.
(v) A sufficient condition for Tara to visit New Delhi is that she goes to the
Rashtrapati Bhawan.
Solution
(i) The given statement is of the form “q if p”, where
p : Mohan studies hard.
q : He will be a good student.
It is an equivalent form (Remark (b) 14.1.12) of the statement “if p then q”. So the
equivalent formulation of the given statement is
“If Mohan studies hard, then he will be a good student”.
(Here, note that in p he is replaced by Mohan and in q Mohan is replaced by he)
(ii) The given statement is of the form
“p only if q” which is an equivalent form (Remark (c) 14.1.12) of the statement
“if p then q”. So, the equivalent formulation of the given statement is:
“If Ramesh eats his dinner, then he will get dessert”
(iii) Here ‘when’ means the same as ‘if’ and so the equivalent formulation of the
given statements is:
“If you sing, then my ears hurt”
(iv) The given statement is of the form “q is necessary for p” where
p : Indian team wins a cricket match
q : The selection committee selects an all-rounder
which is an equivalent form (Remark (e) 14.1.12) of “if p then q”. So the
equivalent formulation of the given statement is
“If the teams wins a cricket match then selection committee selects an all rounder.
(v) The given statement is of the form “p is sufficient for q” where
p : Tara goes to Rashtrapati Bhawan
q : She visits New Delhi
which is an equivalent form (Remark (d) 14.1.12) of “if p, then q”, so the
equivalent formulation of the given statement is
“If Tara goes to Rashtrapati Bhawan, then she visits New Delhi”.

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 259

Example 9 Express in English, the statement p → q, where

p : It is raining today
q:2+3>4
Solution The conditional statement is
“If it is raining today, then 2 + 3 > 4”.
Example 10 Translate the following statements in symbolic form:
If x = 7 and y = 4” then x + y = 11.
Solution Let p : x = 7 and y = 4 and q : x + y = 11
Then the given statement is symbolic form is p → q
Example 11 Form the biconditional of the following statements :
p : Today is 14th of August
q : Tomorrow is Independence day
Solution The biconditional p ↔ q is given by
“Today is 14th of August if and only if tomorrow is Independence Day”.
Example 12 Translate the following biconditional into symbolic form:
“ABC is an equilateral triangle if and only if its each interior angle is 60°”
Solution Let p : ABC is an equilateral triangle
and q : Each interior angle of triangle ABC is 60°
Then the given statement in symbolic form is p ↔ q.
Example 13 Identify the quantifiers and write the negation of the following statements
(i) There exists a number which is equal to its square.
(ii) For all even integers x, x2 is also even.
(iii) There exists a number which is a multiple of 6 and 9.
Solution (i) The quantifier is “there exists” and the negation is
“There does not exist a number which is equal to its square”
(ii) The quantifier is “for all” and the negation is
“There exists an even integer x such that x2 is not even”
(iii) The quantifier is “there exists” and the negation is
“There does not exist a number which is a multiple of both 6 and 9”.

18/04/18
 260 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Example 14 Show that the following statement is true.

p : For any real numbers x, y if x = y, then 2x + a = 2y + a when a ∈ Z.
Solution We prove the statement ‘p’ is true by contrapositive method and by Direct
Method.
Direct Method for any real number x, y given
x=y
⇒ 2x = 2y
⇒ 2x + a = 2y + a for some a ∈ Z.
Contrapositve Method The contrapositive statement of ‘p’ is “For any real numbers
x, y if 2x + a ≠ 2y + a, where a ∈ Z, then x ≠ y.
Given 2x + a ≠ 2y + a
⇒ 2x ≠ 2y
⇒ x≠y
Example 15 Check the validity of the statements
(i) r : 100 is a multiple of 4 and 5.
(ii) s : 60 is a multiple of 3 or 5.
Solution (i) Let p : r ∧ s
where r : “100 is a multiple of 4” is true
s : “100 is a multiple of 5” is true
Hence p is true.
(ii) Let q : r V s, where
r : “60 is a multiple of 3”, is true.
s : “60 is a multiple of 5”, is true.
Hence q is true.
Objective Type Questions
Choose the correct answer out of the four options given against each of the Examples
16 to 18 (M.C.Q.).
Example 16 Which of the following is a statement?
(A) Roses are black.
(B) Mind your own business.
(C) Be punctual.
(D) Do not tell lies.

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 261

Solution (A) is the correct answer as the sentences in (B), (C) and (D) are neither
true nor false. Infact all these sentences are advices.
Example 17 The negation of the statement
“It is raining and weather is cold.” is
(A) It is not raining and weather is cold.
(B) It is raining or weather is not cold.
(C) It is not raining or weather is not cold.
(D) It is not raining and weather is not cold.
Solution (C) is the correct answer as it satisfies (D7). The options (A), (B) and (D)
do not satisfy (D7).
Example 18 Which of the following is the converse of the statement ?
“If Billu secure good marks, then he will get a bicycle.”
(A) If Billu will not get bicycle, then he will not secure good marks.
(B) If Billu will get a bicycle, then he will secure good marks.
(C) If Billu will get a bicycle, then he will not secure good marks.
(D) If Billu will not get a bicycle, then he will secure good marks.
Solution (B) is the correct answer since the statement q → p is the converse of the
statement p → q.

14.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
1. Which of the following sentences are statements? Justify
(i) A triangle has three sides.
(ii) 0 is a complex number.
(iii) Sky is red.
(iv) Every set is an infinite set.
(v) 15 + 8 > 23.
(vi) y + 9 = 7.
(vii) Where is your bag?
(viii) Every square is a rectangle.
(ix) Sum of opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral is 180°.
(x) sin2x + cos2x = 0

18/04/18
 262 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

2. Find the component statements of the following compound statements.

(i) Number 7 is prime and odd.
(ii) Chennai is in India and is the capital of Tamil Nadu.
(iii) The number 100 is divisible by 3, 11 and 5.
(iv) Chandigarh is the capital of Haryana and U.P.

(v) 7 is a rational number or an irrational number.

(vi) 0 is less than every positive integer and every negative integer.
(vii) Plants use sunlight, water and carbon dioxide for photosynthesis.
(viii) Two lines in a plane either intersect at one point or they are parallel.
(ix) A rectangle is a quadrilateral or a 5 - sided polygon.
3. Write the component statements of the following compound statements and
check whether the compound statement is true or false.
(i) 57 is divisible by 2 or 3.
(ii) 24 is a multiple of 4 and 6.
(iii) All living things have two eyes and two legs.
(iv) 2 is an even number and a prime number.
4. Write the negation of the following simple statements
(i) The number 17 is prime.
(ii) 2 + 7 = 6.
(iii) Violets are blue.

(iv) 5 is a rational number.

(v) 2 is not a prime number.
(vi) Every real number is an irrational number.
(vii) Cow has four legs.
(viii) A leap year has 366 days.
(ix) All similar triangles are congruent.
(x) Area of a circle is same as the perimeter of the circle.
5. Translate the following statements into symbolic form
(i) Rahul passed in Hindi and English.
(ii) x and y are even integers.
(iii) 2, 3 and 6 are factors of 12.

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 263

(iv) Either x or x + 1 is an odd integer.

(v) A number is either divisible by 2 or 3.
(vi) Either x = 2 or x = 3 is a root of 3x2 – x – 10 = 0
(vii) Students can take Hindi or English as an optional paper.
6. Write down the negation of following compound statements
(i) All rational numbers are real and complex.
(ii) All real numbers are rationals or irrationals.
(iii) x = 2 and x = 3 are roots of the Quadratic equation x2 – 5x + 6 = 0.
(iv) A triangle has either 3-sides or 4-sides.
(v) 35 is a prime number or a composite number.
(vi) All prime integers are either even or odd.

(vii) x is equal to either x or – x.

(viii) 6 is divisible by 2 and 3.
7. Rewrite each of the following statements in the form of conditional statements
(i) The square of an odd number is odd.
(ii) You will get a sweet dish after the dinner.
(iii) You will fail, if you will not study.
(iv) The unit digit of an integer is 0 or 5 if it is divisible by 5.
(v) The square of a prime number is not prime.
(vi) 2b = a + c, if a, b and c are in A.P.
8. Form the biconditional statement p ↔ q, where
(i) p : The unit digit of an integer is zero.
q : It is divisible by 5.
(ii) p : A natural number n is odd.
q : Natural number n is not divisible by 2.
(iii) p : A triangle is an equilateral triangle.
q : All three sides of a triangle are equal.
9. Write down the contrapositive of the following statements:
(i) If x = y and y = 3, then x = 3.

18/04/18
 264 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(ii) If n is a natural number, then n is an integer.

(iii) If all three sides of a triangle are equal, then the triangle is equilateral.
(iv) If x and y are negative integers, then xy is positive.
(v) If natural number n is divisible by 6, then n is divisible by 2 and 3.
(vi) If it snows, then the weather will be cold.
(vii) If x is a real number such that 0 < x < 1, then x2 < 1.
10. Write down the converse of following statements :
(i) If a rectangle ‘R’ is a square, then R is a rhombus.
(ii) If today is Monday, then tomorrow is Tuesday.
(iii) If you go to Agra, then you must visit Taj Mahal.
(iv) If the sum of squares of two sides of a triangle is equal to the square of
third side of a triangle, then the triangle is right angled.
(v) If all three angles of a triangle are equal, then the triangle is equilateral.
(vi) If x : y = 3 : 2, then 2x = 3y.
(vii) If S is a cyclic quadrilateral, then the opposite angles of S are
supplementary.
(viii) If x is zero, then x is neither positive nor negative.
(ix) If two triangles are similar, then the ratio of their corresponding sides are
equal.
11. Identify the Quantifiers in the following statements.
(i) There exists a triangle which is not equilateral.
(ii) For all real numbers x and y, xy = yx.
(iii) There exists a real number which is not a rational number.
(iv) For every natural number x, x + 1 is also a natural number.
(v) For all real numbers x with x > 3, x2 is greater than 9.
(vi) There exists a triangle which is not an isosceles triangle.
(vii) For all negative integers x, x3 is also a negative integers.
(viii) There exists a statement in above statements which is not true.
(ix) There exists a even prime number other than 2.
(x) There exists a real number x such that x2 + 1 = 0.

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 265

12. Prove by direct method that for any integer ‘n’, n3 – n is always even.
[Hint: Two cases (i) n is even, (ii) n is odd.]
13. Check the validity of the following statement.
(i) p : 125 is divisible by 5 and 7.
(ii) q : 131 is a multiple of 3 or 11.
14. Prove the following statement by contradication method.
p : The sum of an irrational number and a rational number is irrational.
15. Prove by direct method that for any real numbers x, y if x = y, then x2 = y2.
16. Using contrapositive method prove that if n2 is an even integer, then n is also an
even integers.

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of the four options given against each of the Exercises
17 to 36 (M.C.Q.).
17. Which of the following is a statement.
(A) x is a real number.
(B) Switch off the fan.
(C) 6 is a natural number.
(D) Let me go.
18. Which of the following is not a statement
(A) Smoking is injurious to health.
(B) 2 + 2 = 4
(C) 2 is the only even prime number.
(D) Come here.
19. The connective in the statement
“2 + 7 > 9 or 2 + 7 < 9” is
(A) and
(B) or
(C) >
(D) <

18/04/18
 266 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

20. The connective in the statement

“Earth revolves round the Sun and Moon is a satellite of earth” is
(A) or
(B) Earth
(C) Sun
(D) and
21. The negation of the statement
“A circle is an ellipse” is
(A) An ellipse is a circle.
(B) An ellipse is not a circle.
(C) A circle is not an ellipse.
(D) A circle is an ellipse.
22. The negation of the statement
“7 is greater than 8” is
(A) 7 is equal to 8.
(B) 7 is not greater than 8.
(C) 8 is less than 7.
(D) none of these
23. The negation of the statement
“72 is divisible by 2 and 3” is
(A) 72 is not divisible by 2 or 72 is not divisible by 3.
(B) 72 is not divisible by 2 and 72 is not divisible by 3.
(C) 72 is divisible by 2 and 72 is not divisible by 3.
(D) 72 is not divisible by 2 and 72 is divisible by 3.
24. The negation of the statement
“Plants take in CO2 and give out O2” is
(A) Plants do not take in CO2 and do not give out O2.
(B) Plants do not take in CO2 or do not give out O2.
(C) Plants take in CO2 and do not give out O2.
(D) Plants take in CO2 or do not give out O2.

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 267

25. The negation of the statement

“Rajesh or Rajni lived in Bangalore” is
(A) Rajesh did not live in Bangalore or Rajni lives in Bangalore.
(B) Rajesh lives in Bangalore and Rajni did not live in Bangalore.
(C) Rajesh did not live in Bangalore and Rajni did not live in Bangalore.
(D) Rajesh did not live in Bangalore or Rajni did not live in Bangalore.
26. The negation of the statement
“101 is not a multiple of 3” is
(A) 101 is a multiple of 3.
(B) 101 is a multiple of 2.
(C) 101 is an odd number.
(D) 101 is an even number.
27. The contrapositive of the statement
“If 7 is greater than 5, then 8 is greater than 6” is
(A) If 8 is greater than 6, then 7 is greater than 5.
(B) If 8 is not greater than 6, then 7 is greater than 5.
(C) If 8 is not greater than 6, then 7 is not greater than 5.
(D) If 8 is greater than 6, then 7 is not greater than 5.
28. The converse of the statement
“If x > y, then x + a > y + a” is
(A) If x < y, then x + a < y + a.
(B) If x + a > y + a, then x > y.
(C) If x < y, then x + a > y + a.
(D) If x > y, then x + a < y + a.
29. The converse of the statement
“If sun is not shining, then sky is filled with clouds” is
(A) If sky is filled with clouds, then the sun is not shining.
(B) If sun is shining, then sky is filled with clouds.
(C) If sky is clear, then sun is shining.
(D) If sun is not shining, then sky is not filled with clouds.

18/04/18
 268 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

30. The contrapositive of the statement

“If p, then q”, is
(A) If q, then p.
(B) If p, then ~ q.
(C) If ~ q, then ~ p.
(D) If ~ p, then ~ q.
31. The statement
“If x2 is not even, then x is not even” is converse of the statement
(A) If x2 is odd, then x is even.
(B) If x is not even, then x2 is not even.
(C) If x is even, then x2 is even.
(D) If x is odd, then x2 is even.
32. The contrapositive of statement
‘If Chandigarh is capital of Punjab, then Chandigarh is in India’ is
(A) If Chandigarh is not in India, then Chandigarh is not the capital of
Punjab.
(B) If Chandigarh is in India, then Chandigarh is Capital of Punjab.
(C) If Chandigarh is not capital of Punjab, then Chandigarh is not capital
of India.
(D) If Chandigarh is capital of Punjab, then Chandigarh is not in India.
33. Which of the following is the conditional p → q ?
(A) q is sufficient for p.
(B) p is necessary for q.
(C) p only if q.
(D) if q, then p.
34. The negation of the statement “The product of 3 and 4 is 9” is
(A) It is false that the product of 3 and 4 is 9.
(B) The product of 3 and 4 is 12.
(C) The product of 3 and 4 is not 12.
(D) It is false that the product of 3 and 4 is not 9.

18/04/18
 MATHEMATICAL REASONING 269

35. Which of the following is not a negation of

“A natural number is greater than zero”
(A) A natural number is not greater than zero.
(B) It is false that a natural number is greater than zero.
(C) It is false that a natural number is not greater than zero.
(D) None of the above
36. Which of the following statement is a conjunction ?
(A) Ram and Shyam are friends.
(B) Both Ram and Shyam are tall.
(C) Both Ram and Shyam are enemies.
(D) None of the above.
37. State whether the following sentences are statements are not :
(i) The angles opposite to equal sides of a triangle are equal.
(ii) The moon is a satellite of earth.
(iii) May God bless you!
(iv) Asia is a continent.
(v) How are you?

18/04/18
 Chapter 15
STATISTICS

15.1 Overview
In earlier classes, you have studied measures of central tendency such as mean, mode,
median of ungrouped and grouped data. In addition to these measures, we often need
to calculate a second type of measure called a measure of dispersion which meas-
ures the variation in the observations about the middle value– mean or median etc.
This chapter is concerned with some important measures of dispersion such as
mean deviation, variance, standard deviation etc., and finally analysis of frequency
distributions.
15.1.1 Measures of dispersion
(a) RangeThe measure of dispersion which is easiest to understand and easiest to
calculate is the range. Range is defined as:
Range = Largest observation – Smallest observation
(b) Mean Deviation
(i) Mean deviation for ungrouped data:
For n observation x1, x2, ..., xn, the mean deviation about their mean x is
given by

| xi − x |
M.D ( x ) = n (1)

Mean deviation about their median M is given by

| xi − M |
M.D (M) = n (2)

(ii) Mean deviation for discrete frequency distribution

Let the given data consist of discrete observations x1, x2, ... , xn occurring with
frequencies f1, f2, ... , fn, respectively. In this case

18/04/18
 STATISTICS 271

fi | xi − x | fi | xi − x |
M.D ( x ) = = (3)
fi N

fi | xi − M |
M.D (M) = (4)
N
where N = fi .
(iii) Mean deviation for continuous frequency distribution (Grouped data).
fi | xi − x |
M.D ( x ) = (5)
N
fi | xi − M |
M.D (M) = (6)
N
where xi are the midpoints of the classes, x and M are, respectively, the mean
and median of the distribution.
(c) Variance : Let x1, x2, ..., xn be n observations with x as the mean. The variance,
denoted by σ2, is given by
1
σ2 = ( xi − x ) 2 (7)
n
(d) Standard Deviation: If σ2 is the variance, then σ, is called the standard deviation,
is given by
1
σ= ( xi − x ) 2
n
(8)
(e) Standard deviation for a discrete frequency distribution is given by
1
σ= fi ( xi − x ) 2 (9)
N
n
where fi’s are the frequencies of xi’ s and N = fi .
i =1

(f) Standard deviation of a continuous frequency distribution (grouped data)

is given by

18/04/18
 272 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

1
fi ( xi − x ) 2
σ= (10)
N
where xi are the midpoints of the classes and fi their respective frequencies.
Formula (10) is same as
1 2

N
Nσ= fi xi2 − ( fi xi ) (11)
(g) Another formula for standard deviation :
h 2
σx =
N
N fi yi2 − ( fi yi ) (12)

xi − A
where h is the width of class intervals and yi = and A is the assumed
h
mean.
15.1.2 Coefficient of variation It is sometimes useful to describe variability by
expressing the standard deviation as a proportion of mean, usually a percentage. The
formula for it as a percentage is
Standard deviation
Coefficient of variation = × 100
Mean

15.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type

Example 1 Find the mean deviation about the mean of the following data:

Size (x): 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

Frequency (f): 3 3 4 14 7 4 3 4

fi xi 3 + 9 + 20 + 98 + 63 + 44 + 39 + 60 336
Solution Mean = x = = = =8
fi 42 42

fi | xi − x | 3(7) + 3(5) + 4(3) + 14(1) + 7(1) + 4(3) + 3(5) + 4(7)

M.D. ( x ) = =
fi 42

18/04/18
 STATISTICS 273

21 + 15 + 12 + 14 + 7 + 12 + 15 + 28 62
= = = 2.95
42 21

Example 2 Find the variance and standard deviation for the following data:
57, 64, 43, 67, 49, 59, 44, 47, 61, 59
57 + 64 + 43 + 67 + 49 + 59 + 61 + 59 + 44 + 47 550
Solution Mean ( x ) = = = 55
10 10

2
( xi − x ) 2
Variance (σ ) =
n

22 + 92 + 122 + 122 + 62 + 42 + 62 + 42 + 112 + 82

=
10

662
= = 66.2
10

Standard deviation (σ) = σ 2 = 66.2 = 8.13

Example 3 Show that the two formulae for the standard deviation of ungrouped data.

( xi − x ) 2 xi2
σ= and σ′ = − x2
n n
are equivalent.

Solution We have ( xi − x ) 2 = ( xi2 − 2 x xi + x 2 )

= xi2 + − 2 x xi + x2

2
= xi2 − 2 x xi + ( x ) 1

= xi2 − 2 x (n x ) + n x 2

= xi2 − n x 2

18/04/18
 274 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Dividing both sides by n and taking their square root, we get σ = σ′.

Example 4 Calculate variance of the following data :

Class interval Frequency

4-8 3

8 - 12 6

12 - 16 4

16 - 20 7

fi xi 3 × 6 + 6 × 10 + 4 × 14 + 7 × 18
Mean ( x ) = = = 13
fi 20

fi ( xi − x ) 2 3( −7)2 + 6( −3) 2 + 4(1) 2 + 7(5) 2

Solution Variance (σ2) = =
fi 20

147 + 54 + 4 + 175
= = 19
20

Long Answer Type

Example 5 Calculate mean, variation and standard deviation of the following frequency
distribution:

Classes Frequency

1 - 10 11
10 - 20 29
20 - 30 18
30 - 40 4
40 - 50 5
50 - 60 3

18/04/18
 STATISTICS 275

Solution Let A, the assumed mean, be 25.5. Here h = 10

xi – 25.5
Classes xi yi = fi fi yi f i yi2
10

1 - 10 5.5 –2 11 –22 44

10 - 20 15.5 –1 29 –29 29

20 - 30 25.5 0 18 0 0

30 - 40 35.5 1 4 4 4

40 - 50 45.5 2 5 10 20

50 - 60 55.5 3 3 9 27

70 –28 124

fi yi −28
x′ = = = − 0.4
fi 70

Mean = x = 25.5 + (–10) (0.4) = 21.5

2
h 2
Variance 2
(σ ) =
N
N fi yi2 − ( fi yi )

10 × 10
= [70(124) – (–28)2]
70 × 70

70 (124) 28 × 28 1240
= − = − 16 = 161
7×7 7×7 7

S.D. (σ) = 161 = 12.7

18/04/18
 276 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Example 6 Life of bulbs produced by two factories A and B are given below:

Length of life Factory A Factory B

(in hours) (Number of bulbs) (Number of bulbs)

550 - 650 10 8

650 - 750 22 60

750 - 850 52 24

850 - 950 20 16

950 - 1050 16 12

120 120

The bulbs of which factory are more consistent from the point of view of length of life?

Solution Here h = 100, let A (assumed mean) = 800.

xi – A
Length of life Mid values(xi) yi = Factory A Factory B
10
(in hour) fi fi yi f i yi2 fi fi yi f i yi2

550 - 650 600 –2 10 –20 40 8 –16 32

650 - 750 700 –1 22 –22 22 60 – 60 60

750 - 850 800 0 52 0 0 24 0 0

850 - 950 900 1 20 20 20 16 16 16

950 - 1050 1000 2 16 32 64 12 24 48

120 10 146 120 –36 156

For factory A
10
Mean ( x ) = 800 + × 100 = 816.67 hours
120
100
S.D. = 120 (146) − 100 = 109.98
120

18/04/18
 STATISTICS 277

S.D. 109.98
Therefore, Coefficient of variation (C.V.) = × 100 = × 100 = 13.47
x 816.67
For factory B
−36
Mean = 800 + 100 = 770
120
100
S.D. = 120 (156) − ( −36)2 = 110
120
S.D. 110
Therefore, Coefficient of variation = × 100 = × 100 = 14.29
Mean 770
Since C.V. of factory B > C.V. of factory A ⇒ Factory B has more variability which
means bulbs of factory A are more consistent.

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of the four options given against each of the Examples
7 to 9 (M.C.Q.).
Example 7 The mean deviation of the data 2, 9, 9, 3, 6, 9, 4 from the mean is
(A) 2.23 (B) 2.57 (C) 3.23 (D) 3.57

Solution (B) is the correct answer

| xi − x | 4+ 3+3+ 3+ 0+ 3+ 2
M.D. ( x ) = = = 2.57
n 7
Example 8 Variance of the data 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 17 is 23.33. Then variance of 4, 8, 10, 12,
16, 34 will be
(A) 23.23 (B) 25.33 (C) 46.66 (D) 48.66

Solution (C) is the correct answer. When each observation is multiplied by 2, then
variance is also multiplied by 2.

Example 9 A set of n values x1, x2, ..., xn has standard deviation 6. The standard
deviation of n values x1 + k, x2 + k, ..., xn + k will be
(A) σ (B) σ + k (C) σ – k (D) k σ

Solution (A) is correct answer. If each observation is increased by a constant k, then

standard deviation is unchanged.

18/04/18
 278 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

15.3 EXERCISE

Short Answer Type

1. Find the mean deviation about the mean of the distribution:

Size 20 21 22 23 24

Frequency 6 4 5 1 4

2. Find the mean deviation about the median of the following distribution:
Marks obtained 10 11 12 14 15

No. of students 2 3 8 3 4

3. Calculate the mean deviation about the mean of the set of first n natural numbers
when n is an odd number.
4. Calculate the mean deviation about the mean of the set of first n natural numbers
when n is an even number.
5. Find the standard deviation of the first n natural numbers.
6. The mean and standard deviation of some data for the time taken to complete a
test are calculated with the following results:
Number of observations = 25, mean = 18.2 seconds, standard deviation = 3.25
seconds.
Further, another set of 15 observations x1, x2, ..., x15, also in seconds, is now
15 15

available and we have xi = 279 and xi2 = 5524 . Calculate the standard
i =1 i =1

derivation based on all 40 observations.

7. The mean and standard deviation of a set of n1 observations are x1 and s1,
respectively while the mean and standard deviation of another set of n2
observations are x2 and s2, respectively. Show that the standard deviation of the
combined set of (n1 + n2) observations is given by

n1 ( s1 ) 2 + n2 ( s2 )2 n1n2 ( x1 − x2 )2
S.D. = +
n1 + n2 ( n1 + n2 ) 2

18/04/18
 STATISTICS 279

8. Two sets each of 20 observations, have the same standard derivation 5. The first
set has a mean 17 and the second a mean 22. Determine the standard deviation
of the set obtained by combining the given two sets.
9. The frequency distribution:

x A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A

f 2 1 1 1 1 1
where A is a positive integer, has a variance of 160. Determine the value of A.
10. For the frequency distribution:

x 2 3 4 5 6 7

f 4 9 16 14 11 6

Find the standard distribution.

11. There are 60 students in a class. The following is the frequency distribution of
the marks obtained by the students in a test:

Marks 0 1 2 3 4 5

Frequency x–2 x x2 (x + 1)2 2x x+1

where x is a positive integer. Determine the mean and standard deviation of the
marks.
12. The mean life of a sample of 60 bulbs was 650 hours and the standard deviation
was 8 hours. A second sample of 80 bulbs has a mean life of 660 hours and
standard deviation 7 hours. Find the overall standard deviation.
13. Mean and standard deviation of 100 items are 50 and 4, respectively. Find the
sum of all the item and the sum of the squares of the items.
14. If for a distribution ( x − 5) = 3, ( x − 5) 2 = 43 and the total number of item is
18, find the mean and standard deviation.
15. Find the mean and variance of the frequency distribution given below:

x 1≤x<3 3≤x<5 5≤x<7 7 ≤ x < 10

f 6 4 5 1

18/04/18
 280 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Long Answer Type

16. Calculate the mean deviation about the mean for the following frequency
distribution:

Class interval 0-4 4-8 8 - 12 12 - 16 16 - 20

Frequency 4 6 8 5 2

17. Calculate the mean deviation from the median of the following data:

Class interval 0-6 6 - 12 12 - 18 18 - 24 24 - 30

Frequency 4 5 3 6 2

18. Determine the mean and standard deviation for the following distribution:

Marks 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Frequency 1 6 6 8 8 2 2 3 0 2 1 0 0 0 1

19. The weights of coffee in 70 jars is shown in the following table:

Weight Frequency
(in grams)

200 - 201 13

201 - 202 27

202 - 203 18

203 - 204 10

204 - 205 1

205 - 206 1

Determine variance and standard deviation of the above distribution.

20. Determine mean and standard deviation of first n terms of an A.P. whose first
term is a and common difference is d.

18/04/18
 STATISTICS 281

21. Following are the marks obtained, out of 100, by two students Ravi and Hashina
in 10 tests.

Ravi 25 50 45 30 70 42 36 48 35 60

Hashina 10 70 50 20 95 55 42 60 48 80

Who is more intelligent and who is more consistent?

22. Mean and standard deviation of 100 observations were found to be 40 and 10,
respectively. If at the time of calculation two observations were wrongly taken
as 30 and 70 in place of 3 and 27 respectively, find the correct standard deviation.
23. While calculating the mean and variance of 10 readings, a student wrongly used
the reading 52 for the correct reading 25. He obtained the mean and variance as
45 and 16 respectively. Find the correct mean and the variance.

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of the given four options in each of the Exercises 24 to
39 (M.C.Q.).
24. The mean deviation of the data 3, 10, 10, 4, 7, 10, 5 from the mean is
(A) 2 (B) 2.57 (C) 3 (D) 3.75
25. Mean deviation for n observations x1, x2, ..., xn from their mean x is given by
n n
1
(A) ( xi − x ) (B) xi − x
i =1 n i =1

n n
1
(C) ( xi − x )2 (D)
n
( xi − x )2
i =1 i =1

26. When tested, the lives (in hours) of 5 bulbs were noted as follows:
1357, 1090, 1666, 1494, 1623
The mean deviations (in hours) from their mean is
(A) 178 (B) 179 (C) 220 (D) 356
27. Following are the marks obtained by 9 students in a mathematics test:
50, 69, 20, 33, 53, 39, 40, 65, 59
The mean deviation from the median is:
(A) 9 (B) 10.5 (C) 12.67 (D) 14.76

18/04/18
282 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

28. The standard deviation of the data 6, 5, 9, 13, 12, 8, 10 is

52 52
(A) (B) (C) 6 (D) 6
7 7

29. Let x1, x2, ..., xn be n observations and x be their arithmetic mean. The
formula for the standard deviation is given by
( xi − x ) 2
(A) ( xi − x )2 (B)
n

( xi − x ) 2 xi2
(C) (D) + x2
n n
30. The mean of 100 observations is 50 and their standard deviation is 5. The sum
of all squares of all the observations is
(A) 50000 (B) 250000 (C) 252500 (D) 255000
31. Let a, b, c, d, e be the observations with mean m and standard deviation s.
The standard deviation of the observations a + k, b + k, c + k, d + k, e + k is
s
(A) s (B) ks (C) s+k (D)
k
32. Let x1, x2, x3, x4, x5 be the observations with mean m and standard deviation s.
The standard deviation of the observations kx1, kx2, kx3, kx4, kx5 is
s
(A) k + s (B) (C) ks (D) s
k
33. Let x1, x2, ... xn be n observations. Let wi = lxi + k for i = 1, 2, ...n, where l
and k are constants. If the mean of xi’s is 48 and their standard deviation is 12,
the mean of wi’s is 55 and standard deviation of wi’s is 15, the values of l and
k should be
(A) l = 1.25, k = – 5 (B) l = – 1.25, k = 5
(C) l = 2.5, k = – 5 (D) l = 2.5, k = 5
34. Standard deviations for first 10 natural numbers is
(A) 5.5 (B) 3.87 (C) 2.97 (D) 2.87
35. Consider the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. If 1 is added to each number,
the variance of the numbers so obtained is

18/04/18
 STATISTICS 283

(A) 6.5 (B) 2.87 (C) 3.87 (D) 8.25

36. Consider the first 10 positive integers. If we multiply each number by –1 and
then add 1 to each number, the variance of the numbers so obtained is
(A) 8.25 (B) 6.5 (C) 3.87 (D) 2.87

37. The following information relates to a sample of size 60: x 2 = 18000,

x = 960
The variance is
(A) 6.63 (B) 16 (C) 22 (D) 44
38. Coefficient of variation of two distributions are 50 and 60, and their arithmetic
means are 30 and 25 respectively. Difference of their standard deviation is
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 1.5 (D) 2.5
39. The standard deviation of some temperature data in °C is 5. If the data were
converted into ºF, the variance would be
(A) 81 (B) 57 (C) 36 (D) 25
Fill in the blanks in Exercises from 40 to 46.
...
40. Coefficient of variation = × 100
Mean
n

41. If x is the mean of n values of x, then ( xi − x ) is always equal to _______.

i =1

If a has any value other than x , then ( xi − x ) 2 is _________ than

i =1

( xi − a ) 2
42. If the variance of a data is 121, then the standard deviation of the data is _______.
43. The standard deviation of a data is ___________ of any change in orgin, but is
_____ on the change of scale.
44. The sum of the squares of the deviations of the values of the variable is _______
when taken about their arithmetic mean.
45. The mean deviation of the data is _______ when measured from the median.
46. The standard deviation is _______ to the mean deviation taken from the arithmetic
mean.

18/04/18
 Chapter 16
PROBABILITY

16.1 Overview
Probability is defined as a quantitative measure of uncertainty – a numerical value that
conveys the strength of our belief in the occurrence of an event. The probability of an
event is always a number between 0 and 1 both 0 and 1 inclusive. If an event’s probability
is nearer to 1, the higher is the likelihood that the event will occur; the closer the event’s
probability to 0, the smaller is the likelihood that the event will occur. If the event
cannot occur, its probability is 0. If it must occur (i.e., its occurrence is certain), its
probability is 1.
16.1.1 Random experiment An experiment is random means that the experiment
has more than one possible outcome and it is not possible to predict with certainty
which outcome that will be. For instance, in an experiment of tossing an ordinary coin,
it can be predicted with certainty that the coin will land either heads up or tails up, but
it is not known for sure whether heads or tails will occur. If a die is thrown once, any of
the six numbers, i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 may turn up, not sure which number will come up.
(i) Outcome A possible result of a random experiment is called its outcome for
example if the experiment consists of tossing a coin twice, some of the outcomes
are HH, HT etc.
(ii) Sample Space A sample space is the set of all possible outcomes of an
experiment. In fact, it is the universal set S pertinent to a given experiment.
The sample space for the experiment of tossing a coin twice is given by
S = {HH, HT, TH, TT}
The sample space for the experiment of drawing a card out of a deck is the set of all
cards in the deck.
16.1.2 Event An event is a subset of a sample space S. For example, the event of
drawing an ace from a deck is
A = {Ace of Heart, Ace of Club, Ace of Diamond, Ace of Spade}
16.1.3 Types of events
(i) Impossible and Sure Events The empty set φ and the sample space S describe
events. In fact φ is called an impossible event and S, i.e., the whole sample
space is called a sure event.

18/04/18
 PROBABILITY 285

(ii) Simple or Elementary Event If an event E has only one sample point of a
sample space, i.e., a single outcome of an experiment, it is called a simple or
elementary event. The sample space of the experiment of tossing two coins is
given by
S = {HH, HT, TH, TT}
The event E1 = {HH} containing a single outcome HH of the sample space S is
a simple or elementary event. If one card is drawn from a well shuffled deck,
any particular card drawn like ‘queen of Hearts’ is an elementary event.
(iii) Compound Event If an event has more than one sample point it is called a
compound event, for example, S = {HH, HT} is a compound event.
(iv) Complementary event Given an event A, the complement of A is the event
consisting of all sample space outcomes that do not correspond to the occurrence
of A.
The complement of A is denoted by A′ or A . It is also called the event ‘not A’. Further
P( A ) denotes the probability that A will not occur.
A′ = A = S – A = {w : w ∈ S and w ∉A}
16.1.4 Event ‘A or B’ If A and B are two events associated with same sample space,
then the event ‘A or B’ is same as the event A ∪ B and contains all those elements
which are either in A or in B or in both. Further more, P (A∪B) denotes the probability
that A or B (or both) will occur.
16.1.5 Event ‘A and B’ If A and B are two events associated with a sample space,
then the event ‘A and B’ is same as the event A ∩ B and contains all those elements which
are common to both A and B. Further more, P (A ∩ B) denotes the probability that both
A and B will simultaneously occur.
16.1.6 The Event ‘A but not B’ (Difference A – B) An event A – B is the set of all
those elements of the same space S which are in A but not in B, i.e., A – B = A ∩ B′.
16.1.7 Mutually exclusive Two events A and B of a sample space S are mutually
exclusive if the occurrence of any one of them excludes the occurrence of the other
event. Hence, the two events A and B cannot occur simultaneously, and thus P(A∩B) = 0.
Remark Simple or elementary events of a sample space are always mutually exclusive.
For example, the elementary events {1}, {2}, {3}, {4}, {5} or {6} of the experiment of
throwing a dice are mutually exclusive.
Consider the experiment of throwing a die once.
The events E = getting a even number and F = getting an odd number are mutually
exclusive events because E ∩ F = φ.

18/04/18
 286 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

Note For a given sample space, there may be two or more mutually exclusive events.
16.1.8 Exhaustive events If E1, E2, ..., En are n events of a sample space S and if
n

E1 ∪ E2 ∪ E3 ∪ ... ∪ En = ∪ Ei = S
i=1

then E1, E2, ..., En are called exhaustive events.

In other words, events E1, E2, ..., En of a sample space S are said to be exhaustive if
atleast one of them necessarily occur whenever the experiment is performed.
Consider the example of rolling a die. We have S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. Define the two
events A : ‘a number less than or equal to 4 appears.’
B : ‘a number greater than or equal to 4 appears.’
Now A : {1, 2, 3, 4}, B = {4, 5, 6}
A ∪ B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} = S
Such events A and B are called exhaustive events.
16.1.9 Mutually exclusive and exhaustive events If E1, E2, ..., En are n events of
a sample space S and if Ei ∩ Ej = φ for every i ≠ j, i.e., Ei and Ej are pairwise disjoint
n

and ∪ Ei = S , then the events E1, E2, ... , En are called mutually exclusive and exhaustive
i=1

events.
Consider the example of rolling a die.
We have S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
Let us define the three events as
A = a number which is a perfect square
B = a prime number
C = a number which is greater than or equal to 6
Now A = {1, 4}, B = {2, 3, 5}, C = {6}
Note that A ∪ B ∪ C = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} = S. Therefore, A, B and C are exhaustive
events.
Also A ∩ B = B ∩ C = C ∩ A = φ
Hence, the events are pairwise disjoint and thus mutually exclusive.
Classical approach is useful, when all the outcomes of the experiment are equally
likely. We can use logic to assign probabilities. To understand the classical method
consider the experiment of tossing a fair coin. Here, there are two equally likely

18/04/18
 PROBABILITY 287

outcomes - head (H) and tail (T). When the elementary outcomes are taken as equally
likely, we have a uniform probablity model. If there are k elementary outcomes in S,
1
each is assigned the probability of . Therefore, logic suggests that the probability of
k
1
observing a head, denoted by P (H), is = 0.5, and that the probability of observing a
2
1
tail,denoted P (T), is also = 5. Notice that each probability is between 0 and 1.
2
Further H and T are all the outcomes of the experiment and P (H) + P (T) = 1.
16.1.10 Classical definition If all of the outcomes of a sample space are equally
likely, then the probability that an event will occur is equal to the ratio :
The number of outcomes favourable to the event
The total number of outcomes of the sample space
Suppose that an event E can happen in h ways out of a total of n possible equally likely
ways.
Then the classical probability of occurrence of the event is denoted by
h
P (E) =
n
The probability of non occurrence of the event E is denoted by
n−h h
P (not E) = = 1− = 1 − P (E)
n n
Thus P (E) + P (not E) = 1
The event ‘not E’ is denoted by E or E′ (complement of E)
Therefore P ( E ) = 1 – P (E)
16.1.11 Axiomatic approach to probability Let S be the sample space of a random
experiment. The probability P is a real valued function whose domain is the power set
of S, i.e., P (S) and range is the interval [0, 1] i.e. P : P (S) → [0, 1] satisfying the
following axioms.
(i) For any event E, P (E) ≥ 0.
(ii) P (S) = 1
(iii) If E and F are mutually exclusive events, then P (E ∪ F) = P (E) + P (F).

18/04/18
 288 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

It follows from (iii) that P ( φ ) = 0.

Let S be a sample space containing elementary outcomes w1, w2, ..., wn,
i.e., S = {w1, w2, ..., wn}
It follows from the axiomatic definition of probability that
(i) 0 ≤ P (wi) ≤ 1 for each wi ∈ S
(ii) P (wi) + P (w2) + ... + P (wn) = 1

(iii) P (A) = P( wi ) for any event A containing elementary events wi.

For example, if a fair coin is tossed once
1
P (H) = P (T) = satisfies the three axioms of probability.
2
Now suppose the coin is not fair and has double the chances of falling heads up as
2 1
compared to the tails, then P (H) = and P (T) = .
3 3
This assignment of probabilities are also valid for H and T as these satisfy the axiomatic
definitions.
16.1.12 Probabilities of equally likely outcomes Let a sample space of an experiment
be S = {w1, w2, ..., wn} and suppose that all the outcomes are equally likely to occur i.e.,
the chance of occurrence of each simple event must be the same
i.e., P (wi) = p for all wi ∈ S, where 0 ≤ p ≤ 1
n

Since P ( wi ) = 1
i =1

i.e., p + p + p + ... + p (n times) = 1

1
⇒ n p = 1, i.e. p=
n
Let S be the sample space and E be an event, such that n (S) = n and n (E) = m. If each
outcome is equally likely, then it follows that
m Number of outcomes favourable to E
P (E) = =
n Total number of possibleoutcomes
16.1.13 Addition rule of probability If A and B are any two events in a sample

18/04/18
 PROBABILITY 289

space S, then the probability that atleast one of the events A or B will occur is given by
P (A ∪ B) = P (A) + P (B) – P (A ∩ B)
Similarly, for three events A, B and C, we have
P (A ∪ B ∪ C) = P (A) + P (B) + P (C) – P (A ∩ B) – P (A ∩ C) – P (B ∩ C) +
P (A ∩ B ∩ C)
16.1.14 Addition rule for mutually exclusive events If A and B are disjoint sets,
then
P (A ∪ B) = P(A) + P (B) [since P(A ∩ B) = P(φ) = 0, where A and B are disjoint].
The addition rule for mutually exclusive events can be extended to more than two
events.
16.2 Solved Examples
Short Answer Type (S.A.)
Example 1 An ordinary deck of cards contains 52 cards divided into four suits. The
red suits are diamonds and hearts and black suits are clubs and spades. The cards J, Q,
and K are called face cards. Suppose we pick one card from the deck at random.
(a) What is the sample space of the experiment?
(b) What is the event that the chosen card is a black face card?
Solution
(a) The outcomes in the sample space S are 52 cards in the deck.
(b) Let E be the event that a black face card is chosen. The outcomes in E are Jack,
Queen, King or spades or clubs. Symbolically
E = {J, Q, K, of spades and clubs} or E = {J♣, Q♣, K♣, J♠, Q♠, K♠}
Example 2 Suppose that each child born is equally likely to be a boy or a girl. Consider
a family with exactly three children.
(a) List the eight elements in the sample space whose outcomes are all possible
genders of the three children.
(b) Write each of the following events as a set and find its probability :
(i) The event that exactly one child is a girl.
(ii) The event that at least two children are girls
(iii) The event that no child is a girl
Solution
(a) All possible genders are expressed as :
S = {BBB, BBG, BGB, BGG, GBB,GBG, GGB, GGG}

18/04/18
 290 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(b) (i)Let A denote the event : ‘exactly one child is a girl’

A = {BBG, BGB, GBB}
3
P (A) =
8
(ii) Let B denote the event that at least two children are girls.
4
B = {GGB, GBG, BGG, GGG}, P (B) = .
8
(iii) Let C denote the event : ‘no child is a girl’.
C = {BBB}
1
∴ P (C) =
8
Example 3
(a) How many two-digit positive integers are multiples of 3?
(b) What is the probability that a randomly chosen two-digit positive integer is a
multiple of 3?
Solution
(a) 2 digit positive integers which are multiples of 3 are 12, 15, 18, ... , 99. Thus,
there are 30 such integers.
(b) 2-digit positive integers are 10, 11, 12, ... , 99. Thus, there are 90 such numbers.
Since out of these, 30 numbers are multiple of 3, therefore, the probability that a
30 1
randomly chosen positive 2-digit integer is a multiple of 3, is = .
90 3
Example 4 A typical PIN (personal identification number) is a sequence of any four
symbols chosen from the 26 letters in the alphabet and the ten digits. If all PINs are
equally likely, what is the probability that a randomly chosen PIN contains a repeated
symbol?
Solution A PIN is a sequence of four symbols selected from 36 (26 letters + 10 digits)
symbols.
By the fundamental principle of counting, there are 36 × 36 × 36 × 36 = 364 = 1,679,616
PINs in all. When repetition is not allowed the multiplication rule can be applied to
conclude that there are
36 × 35 × 34 × 33 = 1,413,720 different PINs

18/04/18
 PROBABILITY 291

The number of PINs that contain at least one repeated symbol

= 1,679,616 – 1,413,720 = 2,65,896
Thus, the probability that a randomly chosen PIN contains a repeated symbol is

265,896
= .1583
1, 679, 616
Example 5 An experiment has four possible outcomes A, B, C and D, that are mutually
exclusive. Explain why the following assignments of probabilities are not permissible:
(a) P(A) = .12, P (B) = .63, P (C) = 0.45, P (D) = – 0.20
9 45 27 46
(b) P(A) = , P (B) = P (C) = P (D) =
120 120 120 120
Solution
(a) Since P(D) = – 0.20, this is not possible as 0 ≤ P (A) ≤ 1 for any event A.
9 45 27 46 127
(b) P(S) = P (A ∪ B ∪ C ∪ D) = + + + = ≠1 .
120 120 120 120 120
This violates the condition that P (S) = 1.
Example 6 Probability that a truck stopped at a roadblock will have faulty brakes or
badly worn tires are 0.23 and 0.24, respectively. Also, the probability is 0.38 that a
truck stopped at the roadblock will have faulty brakes and/or badly working tires. What
is the probability that a truck stopped at this roadblock will have faulty breaks as well
as badly worn tires?
Solution Let B be the event that a truck stopped at the roadblock will have faulty
brakes and T be the event that it will have badly worn tires. We have P (B) = 0.23,
P (T) = 0.24 and P (B∪T) = 0.38
and P (B ∪ T) = P (B) + P (T) – P (B ∩ T)
So 0.38 = 0.23 + 0.24 – P (B ∩ T)
⇒ P (B ∩ T) = 0.23 + 0.24 – 0.38 = 0.09
Example 7 If a person visits his dentist, suppose the probability that he will have his
teeth cleaned is 0.48, the probability that he will have a cavity filled is 0.25, the probability
that he will have a tooth extracted is 0.20, the probability that he will have a teeth
cleaned and a cavity filled is 0.09, the probability that he will have his teeth cleaned and
a tooth extracted is 0.12, the probability that he will have a cavity filled and a tooth
extracted is 0.07, and the probability that he will have his teeth cleaned, a cavity filled,
and a tooth extracted is 0.03. What is the probability that a person visiting his dentist

18/04/18
 292 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

will have atleast one of these things done to him?

Solution Let C be the event that the person will have his teeth cleaned and F and E be
the event of getting cavity filled or tooth extracted, respectively. We are given
P(C) = 0.48, P (F) = 0.25, P (E) = .20, P (C ∩ F) = .09,
P (C ∩ E) = 0.12, P (E ∩ F) = 0.07 and P (C ∩ F ∩ Ε) = 0.03
Now, P ( C ∪ F ∪ E) = P (C) + P (F) + P (E)
– P (C ∩ F) – P (C ∩ E) – P (F ∩ E)
+ P (C ∩ F ∩ E)
= 0.48 + 0.25 + 0.20 – 0.09 – 0.12 – 0.07 + 0.03
= 0.68
Long Answer Type
Example 8 An urn contains twenty white slips of paper numbered from 1 through 20,
ten red slips of paper numbered from 1 through 10, forty yellow slips of paper numbered
from 1 through 40, and ten blue slips of paper numbered from 1 through 10. If these 80
slips of paper are thoroughly shuffled so that each slip has the same probability of being
drawn. Find the probabilities of drawing a slip of paper that is
(a) blue or white
(b) numbered 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
(c) red or yellow and numbered 1, 2, 3 or 4
(d) numbered 5, 15, 25, or 35;
(e) white and numbered higher than 12 or yellow and numbered higher than 26.
Solution
(a) P (Blue or White) = P (Blue) + P (White) (Why?)
10 20 30 3
= + = =
80 80 80 8
(b) P (numbered 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
= P (1 of any colour) + P (2 of any colour)
+ P (3 of any colour) + P (4 of any colour) + P (5 of any colour)
4 4 4 4 4 20 2 1
= + + + + = = =
80 80 80 80 80 80 8 4
(c) P (Red or yellow and numbered 1, 2, 3 or 4)
= P (Red numbered 1, 2, 3 or 4) + P (yellow numbered 1, 2, 3 or 4)

18/04/18
 PROBABILITY 293

4 4 8 1
= + = =
80 80 80 10
(d) P (numbered 5, 15, 25 or 35)
= P (5) + P (15) + P (25) + P (35)
= P (5 of White, Red, Yellow, Blue) + P (15 of White, Yellow) + P (25 of Yellow)
+ P (35 of Yellow)
4 2 1 1 8 1
= + + + = =
80 80 80 80 80 10
(e) P (White and numbered higher than 12 or Yellow and numbered higher than 26)
= P (White and numbered higher than 12)
+ P (Yellow and numbered higher than 26)
8 14 22 11
= + = =
80 80 80 40
Objective Type Questions
Choose the correct answer from given four options in each of the Examples 9 to 15
(M.C.Q.).
Example 9 In a leap year the probability of having 53 Sundays or 53 Mondays is
2 3 4 5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
7 7 7 7
Solution (B) is the correct answer. Since a leap year has 366 days and hence 52
weeks and 2 days. The 2 days can be SM, MT, TW, WTh, ThF, FSt, StS.
3
Therefore, P (53 Sundays or 53 Mondays) = .
7
Example 10 Three digit numbers are formed using the digits 0, 2, 4, 6, 8. A number is
chosen at random out of these numbers. What is the probability that this number has
the same digits?
1 16 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
16 25 645 25
Solution (D) is the correct answer. Since a 3-digit number cannot start with digit 0, the
hundredth place can have any of the 4 digits. Now, the tens and units place can have all
the 5 digits. Therefore, the total possible 3-digit numbers are 4 × 5 × 5, i.e., 100.

18/04/18
 294 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

The total possible 3 digit numbers having all digits same = 4

4 1
Hence, P (3-digit number with same digits) = = .
100 25
Example 11 Three squares of chess board are selected at random. The probability of
getting 2 squares of one colour and other of a different colour is
16 8 3 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
21 21 32 8
Solution (A) is the correct answer. In a chess board, there are 64 squares of which
32 are white and 32 are black. Since 2 of one colour and 1 of other can be 2W, 1B, or
1W, 2B, the number of ways is (32C2 × 32C1) × 2 and also, the number of ways of
choosing any 3 boxes is 64C3.
32
C 2 × 32C1 × 2 16
Hence, the required probability = 64
= .
C3 21

1 2
Example 12 If A and B are any two events having P (A ∪ B) = and P ( A ) = ,
2 3
then the probability of A ∩ B is
1 2 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 6 3

1
Solution (C) is the correct answer. We have P(A ∪ B) =
2
1
⇒ P (A ∪ (B – A)) =
2

1
⇒ P (A) + P (B – A) = (since A and B – A are mutually exclusive)
2

1
⇒ 1 – P ( A ) + P (B – A) =
2

2 1
⇒ 1– + P (B – A) =
3 2

18/04/18
 PROBABILITY 295

1
⇒ P (B – A) =
6

1
⇒ P ( A ∩ B) = (since A ∩ B ≡ B – A)
6
Example 13 Three of the six vertices of a regular hexagon are chosen at random.
What is the probability that the triangle with these vertices is equilateral?
3 3 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
10 20 20 10
Solution (D) is the correct answer.
A
F B

E C
D
Fig. 16.1
ABCDEF is a regular hexagon. Total number of triangles 6C3 = 20. (Since no three
points are collinear). Of these only ∆ ACE; ∆ BDF are equilateral triangles.
2 1
Therefore, required probability = = .
20 10
Example 14 If A, B, C are three mutually exclusive and exhaustive events of an
experiment such that
3P(A) = 2P(B) = P(C), then P(A) is equal to
1 2 5 6
(A) (B) (C) (D)
11 11 11 11
Solution (B) is the correct answer. Let 3P (A) = 2P(B) = P(C) = p which gives p (A)
p p
= , P(B) = and P(C) = p
3 2
Now since A, B, C are mutually exclusive and exhaustive events, we have
P(A) + P(B) + P(C) = 1

18/04/18
 296 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

p p 6
⇒ + + p =1 ⇒ p=
3 2 11

p 2
Hence, P (A) = =
3 11
Example 15 One mapping (function) is selected at random from all the mappings of
the set A = {1, 2, 3, ..., n} into itself. The probability that the mapping selected is one to
one is
1 1 n −1
(A) (B) (C) (D) none of these
nn n nn −1
Solution (C) is the correct answer. Total number of mappings from a set A having n
elements onto itself is nn
Now, for one to one mapping the first element in A can have any of the n images in A;
the 2nd element in A can have any of the remaining (n – 1) images, counting like this,
the nth element in A can have only 1 image.
Therefore, the total number of one to one mappings is n .

n n n −1 n −1
Hence the required probability is = n −1 = .
n n
nn n n −1
16.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer Type
1. If the letters of the word ALGORITHM are arranged at random in a row what
is the probability the letters GOR must remain together as a unit?
2. Six new employees, two of whom are married to each other, are to be assigned
six desks that are lined up in a row. If the assignment of employees to desks is
made randomly, what is the probability that the married couple will have
nonadjacent desks?
[Hint: First find the probability that the couple has adjacent desks, and then
subtract it from 1.]
3. Suppose an integer from 1 through 1000 is chosen at random, find the probability
that the integer is a multiple of 2 or a multiple of 9.
4. An experiment consists of rolling a die until a 2 appears.
(i) How many elements of the sample space correspond to the event that the 2
appears on the kth roll of the die?

18/04/18
 PROBABILITY 297

(ii) How many elements of the sample space correspond to the event that the 2
appears not later than the kth roll of the die?
[Hint:(a) First (k – 1) rolls have 5 outcomes each and kth rolls should result in 1
outcomes. (b)1 + 5 + 52 + ... + 5k–1.]
5. A die is loaded in such a way that each odd number is twice as likely to occur as
each even number. Find P(G), where G is the event that a number greater than
3 occurs on a single roll of the die.
6. In a large metropolitan area, the probabilities are .87, .36, .30 that a family
(randomly chosen for a sample survey) owns a colour television set, a black and
white television set, or both kinds of sets. What is the probability that a family
owns either anyone or both kinds of sets?
7. If A and B are mutually exclusive events, P (A) = 0.35 and P (B) = 0.45, find
(a) P (A′) (b) P (B′) (c) P (A ∪ B) (d) P (A ∩ B)
(e) P (A ∩ B′) (f) P (A′ ∩ B′)
8. A team of medical students doing their internship have to assist during surgeries
at a city hospital. The probabilities of surgeries rated as very complex, complex,
routine, simple or very simple are respectively, 0.15, 0.20, 0.31, 0.26, .08. Find
the probabilities that a particular surgery will be rated
(a) complex or very complex;
(b) neither very complex nor very simple;
(c) routine or complex
(d) routine or simple
9. Four candidates A, B, C, D have applied for the assignment to coach a school
cricket team. If A is twice as likely to be selected as B, and B and C are given
about the same chance of being selected, while C is twice as likely to be selected
as D, what are the probabilities that
(a) C will be selected?
(b) A will not be selected?
10. One of the four persons John, Rita, Aslam or Gurpreet will be promoted next
month. Consequently the sample space consists of four elementary outcomes
S = {John promoted, Rita promoted, Aslam promoted, Gurpreet promoted}
You are told that the chances of John’s promotion is same as that of Gurpreet,
Rita’s chances of promotion are twice as likely as Johns. Aslam’s chances are
four times that of John.
(a) Determine P (John promoted)

18/04/18
 298 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

P (Rita promoted)
P (Aslam promoted)
P (Gurpreet promoted)
(b) If A = {John promoted or Gurpreet promoted}, find P (A).
11. The accompanying Venn diagram shows three events, A, B, and C, and also the
probabilities of the various intersections (for instance, P (A ∩ B) = .07). Determine
(a) P (A)
(b) P (B ∩ C )
(c) P (A ∪ B)
(d) P (A ∩ B )
(e) P (B ∩ C)
(f) Probability of exactly one
of the three occurs.
Long Answer Type
12. One urn contains two black balls (labelled B1 and B2) and one white ball. A
second urn contains one black ball and two white balls (labelled W1 and W2).
Suppose the following experiment is performed. One of the two urns is chosen
at random. Next a ball is randomly chosen from the urn. Then a second ball is
chosen at random from the same urn without replacing the first ball.
(a) Write the sample space showing all possible outcomes
(b) What is the probability that two black balls are chosen?
(c) What is the probability that two balls of opposite colour are chosen?
13. A bag contains 8 red and 5 white balls. Three balls are drawn at random. Find the
Probability that
(a) All the three balls are white
(b) All the three balls are red
(c) One ball is red and two balls are white
14. If the letters of the word ASSASSINATION are arranged at random. Find the
Probability that
(a) Four S’s come consecutively in the word
(b) Two I’s and two N’s come together
(c) All A’s are not coming together
(d) No two A’s are coming together.

18/04/18
 PROBABILITY 299

15. A card is drawn from a deck of 52 cards. Find the probability of getting a king or
a heart or a red card.
16. A sample space consists of 9 elementary outcomes e1, e2, ..., e9 whose probabilities
are
P(e1) = P(e2) = .08, P(e3) = P(e4) = P(e5) = .1
P(e6) = P(e7) = .2, P(e8) = P(e9) = .07
SupposeA = {e1, e5, e8}, B = {e2, e5, e8, e9}
(a) Calculate P (A), P (B), and P (A ∩ B)
(b) Using the addition law of probability, calculate P (A ∪ B)
(c) List the composition of the event A ∪ B, and calculate P (A ∪ B) by adding
the probabilities of the elementary outcomes.
(d) Calculate P ( B ) from P (B), also calculate P ( B ) directly from the elementary
outcomes of B
17. Determine the probability p, for each of the following events.
(a) An odd number appears in a single toss of a fair die.
(b) At least one head appears in two tosses of a fair coin.
(c) A king, 9 of hearts, or 3 of spades appears in drawing a single card from a
well shuffled ordinary deck of 52 cards.
(d) The sum of 6 appears in a single toss of a pair of fair dice.

Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer out of four given options in each of the Exercises 18 to 29
(M.C.Q.).
18. In a non-leap year, the probability of having 53 tuesdays or 53 wednesdays is
1 2 3
(A) (B) (C) (D) none of these
7 7 7
19. Three numbers are chosen from 1 to 20. Find the probability that they are not
consecutive

186 187 188 18

(A) (B) (C) (D) 20
190 190 190 C3
20. While shuffling a pack of 52 playing cards, 2 are accidentally dropped. Find the
probability that the missing cards to be of different colours

18/04/18
300 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

29 1 26 27
(A) (B) (C) (D)
52 2 51 51
21. Seven persons are to be seated in a row. The probability that two particular
persons sit next to each other is
1 1 2 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 6 7 2
22. Without repetition of the numbers, four digit numbers are formed with the numbers
0, 2, 3, 5. The probability of such a number divisible by 5 is
1 4 1 5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 5 30 9
23. If A and B are mutually exclusive events, then
(A) P (A) ≤ P ( B ) (B) P (A) ≥ P ( B )
(C) P (A) < P ( B ) (D) none of these
24. If P (A ∪ B) = P (A ∩ B) for any two events A and B, then
(A) P (A) = P (B) (B) P (A) > P (B)
(C) P (A) < P (B) (D) none of these
25. 6 boys and 6 girls sit in a row at random. The probability that all the girls sit
together is
1 12 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) none of these
432 431 132
26. A single letter is selected at random from the word ‘PROBABILITY’. The
probability that it is a vowel is
1 4 2 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 11 11 11
27. If the probabilities for A to fail in an examination is 0.2 and that for B is 0.3, then
the probability that either A or B fails is
(A) > . 5 (B) .5 (C) ≤ .5 (D) 0
28. The probability that at least one of the events A and B occurs is 0.6. If A and B
occur simultaneously with probability 0.2, then P ( A ) + P ( B ) is
(A) 0.4 (B) 0.8 (C) 1.2 (D) 1.6

18/04/18
 PROBABILITY 301

29. If M and N are any two events, the probability that at least one of them occurs
is
(A) P (M) + P (N) – 2 P (M ∩ N) (B) P (M) + P (N) – P (M ∩ N)
(C) P (M) + P (N) + P (M ∩ N) (D) P (M) + P (N) + 2P (M ∩ N)
State whether the statements are True or False in each of the Exercises 30 to 36.
30. The probability that a person visiting a zoo will see the giraffee is 0.72, the
probability that he will see the bears is 0.84 and the probability that he will see
both is 0.52.
31. The probability that a student will pass his examination is 0.73, the probability of
the student getting a compartment is 0.13, and the probability that the student will
either pass or get compartment is 0.96.
32. The probabilities that a typist will make 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or more mistakes in typing
a report are, respectively, 0.12, 0.25, 0.36, 0.14, 0.08, 0.11.
33. If A and B are two candidates seeking admission in an engineering College. The
probability that A is selected is .5 and the probability that both A and B are
selected is at most .3. Is it possible that the probability of B getting selected is
0.7?
34. The probability of intersection of two events A and B is always less than or equal
to those favourable to the event A.
35. The probability of an occurrence of event A is .7 and that of the occurrence of
event B is .3 and the probability of occurrence of both is .4.
36. The sum of probabilities of two students getting distinction in their final
examinations is 1.2.
Fill in the blanks in the Exercises 37 to 41.
37. The probability that the home team will win an upcoming football game is 0.77,
the probability that it will tie the game is 0.08, and the probability that it will lose
the game is _____.
38. If e1, e2, e3, e4 are the four elementary outcomes in a sample space and P(e1) =
.1, P(e2) = .5, P (e3) = .1, then the probability of e4 is ______.
39. Let S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} and E = {1, 3, 5}, then E is _________.
40. If A and B are two events associated with a random experiment such that P ( A)
= 0.3, P (B) = 0.2 and P (A ∩ B) = 0.1, then the value of P (A ∩ B ) is _______.
41. The probability of happening of an event A is 0.5 and that of B is 0.3. If A and B
are mutually exclusive events, then the probability of neither A nor B is ________.

18/04/18
302 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

42. Match the proposed probability under Column C1 with the appropriate written
description under column C2 :
C1 C2
Probability Written Description
(a) 0.95 (i) An incorrect assignment
(b) 0.02 (ii) No chance of happening
(c) – 0.3 (iii) As much chance of happening as not.
(d) 0.5 (iv) Very likely to happen
(e) 0 (v) Very little chance of happening
43. Match the following
(a) If E1 and E2 are the two mutually (i) E1 ∩ E2 = E1
exclusive events
(b) If E1 and E2 are the mutually (ii) (E1 – E2) ∪ (E1 ∩ E2) = E1
exclusive and exhaustive events
(c) If E1 and E2 have common (iii) E1 ∩ E2 = φ, E1 ∪ E2 = S
outcomes, then
(d) If E1 and E2 are two events (iv) E1 ∩ E2 = φ
such that E1 ⊂ E2

18/04/18
 ANSWERS

1.3 EXERCISE

1. (i) {2} (ii) {0, 1} (iii) {1, p}

−11
2. (i) {0, –1, 1} (ii)
3
(iii) {− 3, − 2, 2, 3 }
3. {1, 2, 22, 23, ...2P – 1,(2p –1}
4. (i) True (ii) False (iii) True (iv) True
7. (i) {2, 4, 6, 8, ... , 98} (ii) (1,4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, 81,}

1 3
8. (i) {4, 8, 12} (ii) {7, 8, 9} (iii) ,1, (iv) {0, 1, 2}
2 2
9. (i) {4, 5, 6, ....10} (ii) {5} (iii) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
10. 11.

13. True 14. False 15. True

16. True 17. True 22. T = {10}
24. (i) 2 (ii) 3 (iii) 3 (iv) 9
25. 25 26. 20 27. (a) 3300 (b) 4000
28. (i) 6, (ii) 3, (iii) 9, (iv) 1, (v) 2, (vi) 6, (vii) 30, (viii) 20 29. C
30. B 31. B 32. D 33. C
34. D 35. B 36. B 37. C

18/04/18
 304 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

38. C 39. C 40. A 41. B

42. B 43. C 44. [1,2] 45. 1
46. n (B) 47. A ∩ B′ 48. {φ, {1}, {2}, {1, 2}
49. {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8} 50.(i) {1,5, 9, 10 } (ii) { 1, 2,3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 }
51. A ∪ Β′ 52. (i) ↔(b) (ii) ↔(c) (iii) ↔ (a) (iv) ↔(f) (v) ↔(d) (vi) ↔ (e)
53. True 54. False 55. False 56. True
57. True 58. False

2.3 EXERCISE
1. (i) {(– 1, 1), (–1, 3), (2, 1), (2, 3), (3, 1), (3, 3)}
(ii) {(1, –1), (1, 2), (1, 3), (3, –1), (3, 2), (3, 3)}
(iii) {(1, 1), (1, 3), (3, 1), (3, 3)}
(iv) {(–1, –1), (–1, 2), (–1, 3), (2, –1), (2, 2), (2, 3), (3, –1), (3, 2), (3, 3)}
2. {(0, 1), (0, 2), (1, 1), (1, 2), (2, 1), (2, 2)}
3. (i) {(0, 3), (1, 3)}
(ii) {(0, 2), (0, 3), (0, 4), (0, 5), (1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (1,5)}

11 2
4. (i) a = and b = (ii) a = 0 and b = – 2
3 3
5. (i) {(1, 4), (2, 3), (3, 2), (4, 1) }
(ii) {(1, 1), (1, 2), (1,3),(2, 1), (2, 2), (3, 1)}
(iii) { (4, 5), (5, 4), (5, 5)}
6. Domain of R = {0, 3, 4, 5} = Range of R
7. Domain of R1 = [–5, 5 ] and Range of R1 = [–3, 17 ]
8. R2 = {(0, 8), (8, 0) (0,– 8), (– 8, 0)}
9. Domain of R3= R and range of R3 = R+ ∪ {0}
10. (i) h is not a function (ii) f is a function (iii) g is a function (iv) s is a
function(v) t is a constant function
1364
11. (a) 6 (b) (c) 13 (d) t2 _ 4 (e) t + 5
4

12. (a) x = 4 (b) x > 4

2
13. (i) (f + g) x = x + 2x + 2 (ii) (f – g) x = 2x – x2

18/04/18
 ANSWERS 305

 f  2x + 1
(iii) ( f g) x = 2x3 + x3 + 2x + 1 (iv)   x = 2
g x +1
14. (i) f = {(–1, 0), (0, 1), (3, 28), (7, 344), (9, 730)}
4
15. x = –1 ,
3
16. Yes, α = 2 , β = −1
17. (i) R – {2nπ : n∈Z} (ii) R + (iii) R
(iv) R – {–1, 1} (v) R – {4}
3
18. (i) [ ,∞) (ii) (– ∞, 1] (iii) [ 0 , ∞) (iv) [ – 2, 4]
2

−2 x , − 3 ≤ x < − 2
19. f ( x) = 4 , − 2≤ x < 2
2 ,2≤ x≤3

21. (i) (f + g) x = x+x (ii) (f – g ) x = x –x

3  f  1
(iii) (fg) x = x 2 (iv)  x=
g x
22. Domain of f = (5, ∞) and Range of f = R+
24. D 25. D 26. B 27. C
28. B 29. B 30. A 31. C
32. C 33. A 34. B 35. A
36. {2, 3, 4, 5} 37. (a) ↔ (iii) (b) ↔ (iv) (c) ↔ (ii) (d) ↔ (i)
38. False 39. False 40. True 41. False
42. True.

3.3 EXERCISE

56 2cos x
4. 5.
33 cos 2 x

18/04/18
306 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

1 π π
8. 15. θ = nπ + (–1)n −
2 +1 4 4

7π π
16. θ = 2nπ + 17. θ = 2nπ ±
4 3

π 5π π π π
18. θ = , 19. x = , ,
3 3 6 4 2

23 3 −1 1
22. 1 25. +
17 2 2

3 π
26. 27. nπ ±
2 4

nπ π π π
28. ± 29. θ = 2nπ ± +
2 8 4 12
30. C 31. D 32. D 33. C
34. B 35. C 36. B 37. C
38. A 39. B 40. D 41. D
42. A 43. D 44. C 45. B
46. C 47. C 48. C 49. B
50. C 51. B 52. C 53. C
54. A 55. B 56. A 57. B
1
58. B 59. D 60. 1 61.
8

1
62. tan β 63. [4 – 3(a2 – 1)2] , 2 − a2
4
2
64. x2 − x + 1 65. 13 66. [–3, 3] 67. 2
sin 2A
68. True 69. False 70. False 71. True
72. False 73. True 74. True 75. True
76. (a) ↔ (iv) (b) ↔ (i) (c) ↔ (ii) (d) ↔ (iii)

18/04/18
 ANSWERS 307

4.3 EXERCISE

n (n + 1)
1. P(n) : 2n < ∠n 2. P(n) : 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n =
2
26. A 27. B 28. A
29. 4 30. False

5.3 EXERCISE

2
1. 2n 2. –1 + i 3. (0, – 2) 4.
5

θ 3 1
5. (1, 0) 6. icot 11. – 2i 12. – 2i
2 2 2

10 2
13. 1:3 14. ,0 , 15. 1 18. 0
3 3

21. 2 ± i 2, − 2 ± i 2 22. –2 – i

5π 5π
23. 2 cos + i sin
12 12

25. (i) (a 2
+ b2 )( z
1
2
+ z2
2
) (ii) –15

1 i
(iii) –2 (iv) 0 (v) − (vi) z1 (vii) 0
2 2
(viii) 6 and 0 (ix) a circle (x) – 2 3 + 2i
26. (i) F (ii) F (iii) T (iv) T
(v) T (vi) T (vii) F (viii) F
27. (a) ↔ (v), (b) ↔ (iii), (c) ↔ (i),
(d) ↔ (iv), (e) ↔ (ii), (f) ↔ (vi),
(g) ↔ (viii) and (h) ↔ (vii)

18/04/18
308 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

−2 11 (a 2 + 1) 4
28. −i 29. No 30. 31. – 2 3 + 2 i
25 25 4a 2 + 1

2π
32. 1 33. 34. Real axis
3
35. D 36. C 37. B 38. A
39. B 40. A 41. A 42. B
43. D 44. D 45. B 46. B
47. C 48. C 49. C 50. A

6.3 EXERCISE

1
1. ≤ x ≤1 2. [0,1] ∪ [3,4] 3. ( − ∞ , −5 )∪(–3, 3)∪[5, ∞)
3

−34 22
4. [ −4, −2] ∪ [2,6] 5. , 6. No Solution
3 3
7. More than 2000.
8. Between 7.77 and 8.77.
9. More than 230 litres but less than 920 litres.
10. Between 104 °F and 113 °F
11. 41 cm.
12. Between 8 km and 10 km
13. No Solution
14. x + y ≤ 20, 3 x + 2 y ≤ 48, x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0
15. x + y ≤ 8, x + y ≥ 4, x ≤ 5, y ≤ 5, x ≥ 0, y ≥ 0
17. No Solution.
19. C 20. C 21. A 22. B
23. D 24. C 25. B 26. A
27. D 28. B 29. A 30. B
31. (i) F (ii) F (iii) T (iv) F
(v) T (vi) F (vii) T (viii) F

18/04/18
 ANSWERS 309

(ix) T (x) F (xi) T (xii) F

(xiii)F (xiv) T (xv) T.
32. (i) ≤ (ii) ≥ (iii) > (iv) >
(v) > (vi) > (vii) < , > (viii) ≤ .

7.3 EXERCISE
1. 1440 2. 481 3. 780 4. 144
5. 22 6. 3960 7. 4,68000 8. 200
n−3
9. Cr −3 (r – 2)!3! 10. 14400 11. 112 15. r = 3
16. 192 17. 190 18. 8400 19. 3 20. 11
18!
21. 22. (a) 11C4 (b) 6C2 × 5C2 (c) 6C4 + 5C4
(6!)3
23. (i) 14C9 (ii) 14C11 24. 2(20C5 × 20C6)
25. (i) 21, (ii) 441 (iii) 91 26. A 27. B
28. C 29. B 30. C 31. A
32. B 33. D 34. B 35. C
36. D 37. A 38. C 39. B
40. B 41. n = 7 42. 0 43. nr
6
44. 1,51,200 45. 80 46. 5 47. 18
48. 35 49. 7800 50. 64 51. False
52. False 53. False 54. True 55. True
56. True 57. True 58. False 59. False
60. (a) ↔ (ii) (b) ↔ (iii) and (c) ↔ (i)
61. (a) ↔ (iii) (b) ↔ (i) (c) ↔ (iv), (d) ↔ (ii)

62. (a) ↔ (iv) (b) ↔ (iii) (c) ↔ (ii), (d) ↔ (i)

63. (a) ↔ (i) (b) ↔ (iii) (c) ↔ (iv), (d) ↔ (ii)
64. (a) ↔ (iii) (b) ↔ (i) (c) ↔ (ii)

8.3 EXERCISE
5
15 1
1. C10 2. k = ± 3 3. –19 4. –3003 (310) (25)
6

18/04/18
310 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

189 17 −21 5 5
5. (i) –252 (ii) x ; x19 6. –252 7. –1365 8. 252 y 2 x 3
8 16
9. r = 6 11. 990 12. p = ± 2 14. n = 9

17
17. 18. (C) 19. (A) 20. (C)
54
21. (D) 22. (B) 23. (B) 24. (C)

30 ( n + 1) ( n + 2) 16
25. C15 26. 27. C8 28. n = 12
2

1120 –6 4 28
29. a a 30. C14 a56 b14 31. 1 32. Third term
27
33. 12 34. F 35. T 36. F
37. F 38. T 39. F 40. F

9.3 EXERCISE
2. Rs 1400 3. Rs 8080 , Rs 83520 5. 12 days
15
6. 3420° 7. cm 8. 2480 m 9. Rs 725
8
11. (i) 4n3 + 9n2 + 6n (ii) 4960 12. Tr= 6r – 1 17. D
18. C 19. A 20. B 21. C
22. B 23. B 24. A 25. D
a b
26. A 27. or 28. First term + last term
b c
29. 45 30. F 31. T 32. T
33. F 34. F
35. (a) ↔ (iii) (b) ↔ (i) (c) ↔ (ii)
36. (a) ↔ (iii) (b) ↔ (i) (c) ↔ (ii)(d) ↔ (iv)

10.3 EXERCISE
1. x+y+1=0 2. x – 4y + 3 = 0 3. 60° or 120°

18/04/18
 ANSWERS 311

x y
4. x + y = 7 or + =1 5. (3, 1), (– 7, 11)
6 8

7. y – 3x–2+ 3 =0 8. 3x + 4y + 3 = 0
−8
9. a= ,b = 4 10. 8x – 5y + 60 = 0
3

11. 3x + y = 8 12. x – 7y – 12 = 0

2
13. 14. (1, 1)
3
15. 15° or 75° 17. 9x – 20y + 96 = 0

5 3
18. 3x – 4y + 6 = 0 and 4x – 3y + 1 = 0 20. (0, 2 + )
2
22. A 23. A 24. B 25. B
26. C 27. D 28. A 29. A
30. A 31. B 32. B 33. A
34. C 35. A 36. B 37. B
38. C 39. D 40. B 41. B
42. (1, – 2) 43. x + y + 1 = 0 44. 3x – y – 7 = 0, x + 3y – 9 = 0
2 2
45. opposite sides 46. 13 (x + y ) – 83 x + 64 y + 182 = 0
47. 4 x2 y2 = p2 (x2 + y2) 48. True 49. False
50. False 51. True 52. True 53. True
54. True 55. False 56. False
57. (a) ↔ (iii) (b) ↔ (i) and (c) ↔ (ii)
58. (a) ↔ (iv) (b) ↔ (iii) (c) ↔ (i), (d) ↔ (ii)

59. (a) ↔ (iii) (b) ↔ (i) (c) ↔ (iv), (d) ↔ (ii)

11.3 EXERCISE

a b
1. x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2ay + a2 = 0 3. ,
2 2

18/04/18
312 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

3
4. x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 1 = 0 5.
4
6. x2 + y2 + 4x + 4y + 4 = 0 7. (1, 2)
8. x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 20 = 0 9. k ± 8

3
10. x2 + y2 – 6x + 12y – 15 = 0 11.
2

4 39
12. ecentricity = and foci (4, 0) and (–4, 0) 13.
5 4

4 x2 4 y 2
14. + = 1 15. 18 16. (2, 4) , (2, – 4)
81 45

4a cos θ
17. 18. x2 + 8y = 32 19. m = 1 20. x2 – y2 = 32
sin 2 θ

13 x2 y 2 4
21. 22. − = . 23. x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y = 47
2 4 5 9
24. x2 + y2 – 4x – 10y + 25 = 0 25. (x – 3)2 + (y + 1)2 = 38
26. x2 + y2 – 18x – 16y + 120 = 0 27. x2 + y2 – 8x – 6y + 16 = 0
28. (a) y2 = 12x – 36, (b) x2 = 32 – 8y, (c)4x2 + 4xy + y2 + 4x + 32y + 16 = 0
29. 3x2 + 4y2 – 36x = 0 30. 9x2 + 5y2 = 180
32. (a) 15x2 – y2 = 15 (b) 9x2 – 7y2 + 343 = 0, (c) y2 – x2 = 5
33. False 34. False 35. True 36. False
37. True 38. False 39. True 40. True
2
2 2
45
41. (x – 3) + (y + 4) = 42. x2 + y2 – 46x + 22y = 0
13

4 x2 4 y 2
43. 6 + 2 5 , 2 5 44. + =1
1 5

y 2 x2
45. 4x2 + 4xy + y2 + 4x + 32y + 16 = 0 46. – = 1 and (0, ± 10).
36 64
47. (C) 48. (C) 49. (C) 50. (C)

18/04/18
 ANSWERS 313

51. A 52. B 53. A 54. A

55. D 56. B 57. C 58. A
59. A

12.3 EXERCISE
2. (i) 1st octant (ii) 4th octant (iii) viiith octant (iv) vth octant (v) 2nd octant
(vi) 3rd octant (vii) viiith octant (viii) vith octant
3. (i) (3,0,0), (0,4,0), (0,0,2) (ii) (–5, 0, 0), (0,3,0), (0,0,7) (iii) (4,0,0), (0, –3, 0),
(0,0,5)
4. (i) (3,4,0), (0,4,5), (3,0,5) (ii) (–5, 3, 0),(0,3,7), (–5, 0, 7) (iii) (4,–3, 0),
(0,–3, –5), (4, 0, –5)
5. 5 6. 11 9. (2,–4, 16) 11. (–2, –2, –1)
12. (1, 1, –2) 13. (–3, 4, –7), (7, 2, 5) and (–3, 12, 17) 14. (4, 7, 6)
15. (4, –5, 1), (3, –2, –1) 16. a = –2, b = –8, c = 2

7 13
17. , ,9 18. 2:1 externally
2 2

1
19. vertices are (3,4,5), (–1,6,–7), (1,2,3) and centroid is (1,4, )
3
20. 1:3 externally
21. (2,0,0), (2,2,0), (0,2,0), (0,2,2) (0,0,2) (2,0,2), (0,0,0), (2,2,2)
22. A 23. B 24. A 25. B
26. A 27. B 28. B 29. A
30. A 31. B 32. A 33. D
34. A 35. Three cordinates planes 36. Three pairs
37. given point 38. Eight 39. (0, y, z) 40. x=0
41. (0, 0, z) 42. x = 0 , y = 0 43. z- cordinates
44. (y, z cordinates) 45. yz-plane 46. x-axis 47. 333
48. a = 5 or –3 49. (1, 1, –2)
50. (a) ↔ (iii) (b) ↔ (i) (c) ↔ (ii) (d) ↔ (vi) (e) ↔ (iv) (f) ↔ (v) (g) ↔ (viii)
(h) ↔ (vii) (i) ↔ (x) (j) ↔ (ix)

18/04/18
314 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

13.3 EXERCISE
–2
1 1 3
1. 6 2. 2 3. 2 4. 2
x 3
3
5
5. 3 6. ( a + 2) 2 7. 7 8. 8
2

8 1
9. 10. 1 11. 0 12.
5 15

7 3 1
13. 14. n = 5 15. 16.
2 7 4

m2
17. 2 18. 1 19. 2 20. 3
n

21. 2 22. 2 23. 1 24. 2 a cos a

1 3
25. 4 26. 27. 0 28. k =
4 2 8

2 1 2 3 3
29. 3 x + 2 x + 1 – 30. 3 x – – 4 +3
x2 x 2
x
31. 3 x sec 2 x + 5sec 2 x + 3tan x + 3 32. 2 tan x sec 2 x

55 – 40 x – 15 x 2 – x5 cos x + 5sec 4 sin x + 1

33. 2 34.
(5x 2
– 7x + 9 ) sin 2 x

x
35. cos ec x ( 2 – x cot x )
2

36. ( ax 2
) (
+ cot x ( – q sin x ) + ( p + q cos x ) 2 ax – cos ec 2 x )
bc cos x + ad sin x + db
37. 38. 2 cos 2x
( c + d cos x)2

18/04/18
 ANSWERS 315

39. ( 2 x – 7 )(30 x – 43)(3 x + 5)2 40. x 2 cos x + 2 x sin x – 2sin 2 x

– ( 2ax + b)
3 2
41. sin 2 x cos 2 x 42. 2
4 (ax 2
+ bx + c )
ad – bc
43. (
–2 x sin x 2 + 1) 44.
( cx + d )2
1
2 –3
45. x 46. cos x – x sin x
3

2α
47. sec x ( x tan x + 1) 48.
α – β2
2

1
49. –4 50. 52. k = 6 53. c = 1
2
54. C 55. A 56. A 57. B
58. A 59. C 60. C 61. D
62. B 63. D 64. C 65. D
66. B 67. B 68. D 69. A
70. A 71. A 72. A 73. B
74. C 75. A 76. D 77. 1

2 3
78. m= 79. y 80. 1
3

14.3 EXERCISE

1. (i) to (v) and (viii) to (x) are statements.

2. (i) p : Number 7 is prime (ii) p : Chennai is in India
q : Number 7 is odd q : Chennai is capital of Tamil Nadu
(iii)p : 100 is divisble by 3 (iv) p : Chandigarh is capital of Haryana
q : 100 is divisible by 11 q : Chandigarh is the capital of U.P
r : 100 is divisible by 5

18/04/18
316 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(v) p : 7 is a rational number (vi) p : 0 is less than every positive integer

q: 7 is an irrational number q : 0 is less than every negative integer
(vii) p : plants use sunlight for photosynthesis
q : plants use water for photosynthesis
r : plants use carbondioxide for photosynthesis
(viii) p : two lines in a plane intersect at one point
q : two lines in a plane are parallel
(ix) p : a rectangle is a quadrilateral
q : a rectangle is a 5- sided polygons.
3. (i) Compound statement is true and its component statements are :
p : 57 is divisible by 2 and q : 57 is divisble by 3
(ii) component statement is true and its component statements are :
p : 24 is multiple of 4 and q : 24 is multiple of 6
(iii) component statement is false and is component statements are
p : All living things have two eyes
q : All living things have two legs
(iv) component statement is true and its component statements are :
p : 2 is an number ; q : 2 is a prime number
4. (i) The number 17 is not prime (ii) 2 + 7 ≠ 6 (iii) Violet are not blue
(iv) 5 is not a rational number (v) 2 is a prime number
(vi) There exists a real number which is not an irrational number
(vii) Cow has not four legs (viii) A leap year has not 366 days
(ix) There exist similar triangles which are not congruent
(x) Area of a circle is not same as the perimeter of the circle
5. (i) p ∧ q where p : Rahul passed in Hndi; q : Rahul passed in English
(ii) p ∧ q where p : x is even integer ; q : y is even integer
(iii) p ∧ q ∧ r where p : 2 is factor of 12; q : 3 is factor of 12; r : 6 is factor
of 12
(iv) p ∨ q where p : x is an odd integer ; q : x +1 is an odd integer
(v) p ∨ q where p : a number is divisible by 2, q : it is divisibe by 3
(vi) p ∨ q where p : x = 2 is a root of 3x2 – x –10 = 0, q : x = 3 is a root of
3x2 –x –10 = 0

18/04/18
 ANSWERS 317

(vii) p ∨ q where p : student can take Hindi as an optional paper and q :

student can take English as an optional paper.
6. (i) It is false that all rational numbers are real and complex
(ii) It is false that all real numbers are rational or irrational
(iii) x = 2 is not a root of the quadratic equation x2– 5x + 6 = 0 or x = 3 is not
a root of the quadratic equation x2–5x + 6 = 0
(iv) A triangle has neither 3-sides nor 4-sides
(v) 35 is not a prime number and it is not a complex number
(vi) It is false that all prime integers are either even or odd

(vii) x is not equal to x and it not eqaul to –x

(viii) 6 is not divisible by 2 or it is not divisible by 3.
7. (i) If the number is odd number then its square is odd number
(ii) If you take the dinner then you will get sweet dish
(iii) If you will not study then you will fail
(iv) If an integer is divisible by 5 then its unit digits are 0 or 5
(v) If the number is prime then its square is not prime
(vi) If a,b and c are in A.P then 2b = a + c.
8. (i) The unit digit of an integer is zero if and only if it is divisible by 5.
(ii) A natural number n is odd if and only if it is not divisible by 2.
(iii) A triangle is an equilateral triangle if and only if all three sides of triangle
are equal.
9. (i) If x ≠ 3 then x ≠ y or y ≠ 3
(ii) If n is not an integer then it is not a natural number.
(iii) If the triangle is not equilateral then all three sides of the triangle are not
equal
(iv) If xy is not positive integer then either x or y is not negative integer.
(v) If natural number n is not divisible by 2 and 3 then n is not divisible by 6.
(vi) The weather will not be cold if it does not snow.
10. (i) If the rectangle R is rhombus then it is square.
(ii) If tomorrow is Tuesday then today is Monday.
(iii) If you must visit Taj Mahal you go to Agra.

18/04/18
318 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

(iv) If the triangle is right angle then sum of squares of two sides of a triangle
is equal to the square of third side.
(v) If the triangle is equilateral then all three anlges of triangle are equal.
(vi) If 2x = 3y then x:y = 3:2
(vii) If the opposite angles of a quadrilaterals are supplementary then S is
cyclic.
(viii) If x is neither positive nor negative than x is 0.
(ix) If the ratio of corresponding sides of two triangles are equal then
trianges are similar.
11. (i) There exists (ii) For all (iii) There exists (iv) For every (v) For all (vi)
There exists (vii) For all (viii)There exists (ix) There exists (x) There
exists
17.. C 18. D 19. B 20. D
21. C 22. B 23. A 24. B
25. C 26. A 27. C 28. B
29. A 30. C 31. B 32. A
33. C 34. A 35. C 36. D
37. (i), (ii) and (iv) are statement; (iii) and (v) are not statements.

15.3 EXERCISE

n 2 –1 n
1. 0.32 2. 1.25 3. 4.
4n 4

n 2 –1 n1 ( s1 ) 2 + n2 ( s2 )2 n1n2 ( x1 − x2 ) 2
5. 6. 3.87 7. +
12 n1 + n2 (n1 + n2 ) 2

8. 5.59 9. 7 10. 1.38

11. Mean = 2.8, SD = 1.12 12. 8.9
13. 5000, 251600 14. Mean = 5.17, SD = 1.53
15. Mean = 5.5, Var. = 4.26 16. 0.99
239
17. 7.08 18. Mean = , SD = 2.85
40

18/04/18
 ANSWERS 319

d ( n −1)
19. Var. = 1.16gm, S.D = 1.08 gm 20. Mean = a + ,
2
n2 − 1
S.D = d
12
21. Hashina is more intelligent and consistent
22. 10.24 23. Mean = 42.3, Var. 43.81
24. B 25. B 26. B 27. C
28. A 29. C 30. C 31. A
32. C 33. A 34. D 35. D
36. A 37. D 38. A 39. A
40. SD 41. 0, less 42. 11 43. Independent
44. Minimum 45. Least 46. greater than or equal

16.3 EXERCISE

1 2
1. 2. 3. 0.556
72 3

5k − 1 4
4. (a) 5k–1 elements (b) 5. 6. 0.93
4 9
7. (a) 0.65 (b) 0.55 (c) 0.8 (d) 0 (e) 0.35 (f) 0.2
2 5
8. (a) 0.35 (b) 0.77 (c) 0.51 (d) 0.57 9. (a) (b)
9 9

1 1 1
10. (a)p(John promoted) = , p(Rita promoted) = , p(Aslam promoted) = ,
8 4 2
1 1
p(Gurpreet promoted) = (b) P(A) =
8 4
11. (a) 0.20 (b) 0.17 (c) 0.45 (d) 0.13 (e) 0.15 (f) 0.51
12. (a) S = {B1 B2 , B1W , B2 B1 , B2W ,WB1 ,WB2 BW1 , BW2 ,W1 B, W1W2 ,W2 B,W2W1}
1 2
(b) (c)
6 3

18/04/18
320 EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS – MATHEMATICS

5 28 40 2 2 25 15
13. (a) (b) (c) 14. (a) (b) (c) (d)
143 143 143 143 143 26 26

7
15.
13
16. (a) p(A) = .25, p(B) = .32 , p(A∩Β) = .17 (b) p(A∪B) = .40 (c) .40 (d) .68
1 3 3 5
17. (a) (b) (c) (d) 18. A 19. B
2 4 26 36
20. C 21. C 22. D 23. A
24. A 25. C 26. B 27. C
28. C 29. B 30. False 31. False
32. False 33. True 34. True 35. False
36. True 37. 0.15 38. 0.3 39. E = {2, 4, 6}
40. 0.2 41. 0.2
42. (a) ↔ (iv) (b) ↔ (v) (c) ↔ (i) (d) ↔ (iii) (e) ↔ (ii)
43. (a) ↔ (iv) (b) ↔ (iii) (c) ↔ (ii) (d) ↔ (i)

18/04/18
 NCERT
TEXTBOOK

11
CLASS

MATHEMATICS